request for proposal selection of system integrator (si ...operation, commissioning, maintenance and...

RFP for Selection of System Integrator to setup Tier IV Data Center on Design, Build, Supply, Installation,

Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer model at Hinjewadi, Pune.

RFP No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 Dated: 05.09.2017

1

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

Selection of System Integrator (SI) to setup a Tier IV Data Center at Pune on Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning,

Operation, Maintenance and Transfer model for SBI

RFP No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419

Dated: 05.09.2017

STATE BANK GLOBAL IT CENTER DC & BCM, 2nd Floor, ‘C’ Wing

Sector – 11 CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai – 400 614




2

Section 1: Invitation to Bid

1.1. State Bank of India (herein after referred to as ‘SBI/the Bank’ is having its Corporate Center at

Mumbai, various other offices (LHOs/ Head Offices /Zonal Offices/Global Link Services, Global IT Center, etc. of State Bank of India and branches/other offices, other exchange companies available at various locations and managed by the Bank (collectively referred to as State Bank Group or ‘SBG’ hereinafter). This Request for Proposal (RFP) has been issued by the Bank on behalf of SBG for Setting up of Tier IV Data Center on Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer model at ‘Plot No.3, Phase 3C, Hinjewadi, Pune’.

1.2. In order to meet the Data Center's Design, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation,

Maintenance and Transfer requirement, the Bank proposes to invite tenders from eligible System Integrators (herein referred to as SI) to undertake Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Operation, Commissioning, Maintenance and Transfer of Data Center for SBI at Hinjewadi, Pune as per details/Scope of Work mentioned in Section 2.4 & Annexure-Q of this RFP document.

1.3. Bidder shall mean any entity (i.e. juristic person) who meets the eligibility criteria given in Section

2.5 of Instructions to Bidders of this RFP and willing to provide the goods and services as required in this bidding document. The interested Bidders who agree to all the terms and conditions contained in this document may submit their Bids with the information desired in this bidding document (Request for Proposal).

1.4. The address for submission of Bids, contact details including email address for sending

communications are given in given in Section 2.3 of this RFP document. 1.5. The purpose of BANK behind this RFP is to seek a detailed technical and commercial proposal for

Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data center as desired in this document.

1.6. This document shall not be transferred, reproduced or otherwise used for purpose other than for

which it is specifically issued. 1.7. Interested Bidders are advised to go through the entire document before submission of Bids to

avoid any chance of elimination. The eligible Bidders desirous of taking up the project for BANK are invited to submit their technical and commercial proposal in response to this RFP. The criteria and the actual process of evaluation of the responses to this RFP and subsequent selection of the successful Bidder will be entirely at the Bank’s discretion. This RFP seeks proposals from Bidders who have the necessary experience, capability & expertise as per the Bank’s requirements outlined in this RFP.




1

Section 2: Instructions to Bidders

Table of contents

2.1 Disclaimer .................................................................................................................................... 3 2.2 Definitions.................................................................................................................................... 4 2.3 Schedule of Events ..................................................................................................................... 5 2.4 Scope of Work ............................................................................................................................. 6 2.5 Eligibility Criteria ...................................................................................................................... 24 2.6 Technical Evaluation ................................................................................................................ 27 2.7 Technical Specifications and BOM & Compliance ................................................................ 29 2.8 Cost of Bid document ............................................................................................................... 29 2.9 Pre-Bid Meeting/ Clarification and amendments on RFP ..................................................... 29 2.10 Contents of bidding document ................................................................................................ 30 2.11 Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) ................................................................................................. 30 2.12 Bid Preparation and submission ............................................................................................. 31 2.13 Deadline for submission of Bids ............................................................................................. 32 2.14 Modification and withdrawal of Bids ...................................................................................... 32 2.15 Period of Validity of Bids ......................................................................................................... 32 2.16 Bid integrity ............................................................................................................................... 33 2.17 Bidding process/Opening of Technical Bids ......................................................................... 33 2.18 Evaluation Methodology .......................................................................................................... 33 2.19 Evaluation of Price Bids and Finalization .............................................................................. 34 2.20 Contacting the Bank ................................................................................................................. 35 2.21 Award Criteria ........................................................................................................................... 35 2.22 Powers to Vary or Omit Work .................................................................................................. 35 2.23 No Waiver of Bank Rights or Successful Bidder’s Liability ................................................. 36 2.24 Change in Orders ...................................................................................................................... 36 2.25 Contract Amendments ............................................................................................................. 36 2.26 Bank’s Right to Accept Any Bid and to reject any or All Bids ............................................. 36 2.27 Documentary Evidence Establishing Bidder’s Eligibility and Qualifications ..................... 37 2.28 Performance Bank Guarantee ................................................................................................. 37 2.29 Country of Origin / Eligibility of Goods & Services ............................................................... 37 2.30 Delivery, Installation, Commissioning & Documentation ..................................................... 37 2.31 Services ..................................................................................................................................... 39 2.32 Warranty and Annual Maintenance Contract ......................................................................... 39 2.33 Compliance with IT and IS Security Policy ............................................................................ 40 2.34 Penalty/SLA conditions ............................................................................................................ 41 2.35 Right to Verification .................................................................................................................. 41 2.36 Purchase Price .......................................................................................................................... 41 2.37 Inspection and Quality Control Tests ..................................................................................... 41 2.38 Right to Audit ............................................................................................................................ 42 2.39 Insurance and Indemnification ................................................................................................ 42 2.40 Subcontracting .......................................................................................................................... 43 2.41 Validity of Agreement ............................................................................................................... 43 2.42 Limitation of liability ................................................................................................................. 43 2.43 Confidentiality ........................................................................................................................... 44 2.44 Delay in the SI’s Performance ................................................................................................. 44 2.45 SI’s obligations ......................................................................................................................... 44 2.46 Technical Documentation ........................................................................................................ 45 2.47 Patent Rights/Intellectual Property Rights ............................................................................. 45 2.48 Liquidated Damages ................................................................................................................. 46 2.49 Conflict of Interest .................................................................................................................... 46 2.50 Fraud & Corrupt Practices ....................................................................................................... 47 2.51 Termination for Default ............................................................................................................ 47 2.52 Force Majeure ............................................................................................................................ 48




2

2.53 Termination for Insolvency ...................................................................................................... 48 2.54 Termination for Convenience .................................................................................................. 49 2.55 Disputes/Arbitration [applicable in case of successful Bidder only] .................................. 49 2.56 Governing Language ................................................................................................................ 49 2.57 Applicable Law .......................................................................................................................... 49 2.58 Project Expense, Taxes and Duties ........................................................................................ 49 2.59 Tax deduction at Source .......................................................................................................... 50 2.60 Right to use defective Equipment/ Product ........................................................................... 50 2.61 Tender Fee ................................................................................................................................. 50 2.62 Notices ....................................................................................................................................... 50 2.63 Transition Plan .......................................................................................................................... 50 2.64 Compliance with Laws ............................................................................................................. 50 2.65 Non-Hire and Non-Solicitation ................................................................................................. 51 2.66 Expenses to be borne by the Bank ......................................................................................... 51 2.67 Safety ......................................................................................................................................... 51




3

2.1 Disclaimer

2.1.1. The information contained in this RFP document or information provided subsequently to Bidder(s)

whether verbally or in documentary form/email by or on behalf of State Bank of India (Bank), is subject to the terms and conditions set out in this RFP document.

2.1.2. This RFP is not an offer by State Bank of India, but an invitation to receive responses from the eligible Bidders. No contractual obligation whatsoever shall arise from the RFP process unless and until a formal contract is signed and executed by duly authorized official(s) of State Bank of India with the selected Bidder.

2.1.3. The purpose of this RFP is to provide the Bidder(s) with information to assist preparation of their Bid proposals. This RFP does not claim to contain all the information each Bidder may require. Each Bidder should conduct its own investigations and analysis and should check the accuracy, reliability and completeness of the information contained in this RFP and where necessary obtain independent advices/clarifications. Bank may in its absolute discretion, but without being under any obligation to do so, update, amend or supplement the information in this RFP.

2.1.4. The Bank, its employees and advisors make no representation or warranty and shall have no liability to any person, including any Applicant or Bidder under any law, statute, rules or regulations or tort, principles of restitution or unjust enrichment or otherwise for any loss, damages, cost or expense which may arise from or be incurred or suffered on account of anything contained in this RFP or otherwise, including the accuracy, adequacy, correctness, completeness or reliability of the RFP and any assessment, assumption, statement or information contained therein or deemed to form or arising in any way for participation in this bidding process.

2.1.5. The Bank also accepts no liability of any nature whether resulting from negligence or otherwise, howsoever caused arising from reliance of any Bidder upon the statements contained in this RFP.

2.1.6. The issue of this RFP does not imply that the Bank is bound to select a Bidder for the Project and the Bank reserves the right to reject all or any of the Bidders or Bids without assigning any reason whatsoever.

2.1.7. The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms and specifications in the bidding document. Failure to furnish all information required by the bidding document or to submit a Bid not substantially responsive to the bidding document in all respect will be at the Bidder’s risk and may result in rejection of the Bid.

2.1.8. “The Equipment/Product” means all the IT and Non-IT components, including but not limited to Hardware / Software / Firmware/ Middleware/ services etc.; which the SI is required to supply to the Bank under this Contract.

2.1.9. “Final Acceptance Test” means the date on which Final Acceptance Test certificate is issued shall be deemed to be the date of successful commissioning (Sign Off) of the Project. The final acceptance shall cover 100% of Phase 1,2,3,4 for this Project, after successful testing; a Final Acceptance Test Certificate (FAT) shall be issued by the BANK to the selected SI.

2.1.10. “The Services” means those services pertaining to the Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data Center and other obligations such as transportation, transit insurance, customization, integration, provision of technical assistance, training, etc.; to be covered under the Contract by the SI.

2.1.11. “The Project” means setting up a Tier IV Data center on Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data Center for BANK, at Hinjewadi, Pune.

2.1.12. “The Project Site” means locations where supply and services as desired in this RFP document are to be provided.

2.1.13. Defect Liability Period is Supervision of all equipment (including but not limited to Hardware / software / Firmware/ Middleware/ Services etc.). The SI will also be liable for any defects in this




4

period and will take care of the remedial procedure. Defect liability Period starts one (1) year from the date of Final Acceptance Test (FAT).

2.1.14. Term/Period of this Contract This period includes time taken to Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning and 5 years for Maintenance and operation of the Data Center from the date of acceptance by the Bank.

2.2 Definitions

In this connection, the following terms shall be interpreted as indicated below:

2.2.1 “The Bank/SBI” ‘means the State Bank of India (including domestic branches and foreign offices) subsidiaries and Joint Ventures.

2.2.2 “Bidder/SI/System Integrator/Managed Service Provider” means an eligible entity/firm submitting the Bid in response to this RFP.

2.2.3 “Bid” means the written reply or submission of response to this RFP.

2.2.4 “The Contract” means the agreement entered into between the Bank and the SI, as recorded in the Contract Form signed by the parties, including all attachments and appendices thereto and all documents incorporated by reference therein.

2.2.5 “System Integrator (SI)” is the successful Bidder found eligible as per eligibility criteria set out in this RFP, whose technical Bid has been accepted, and who has emerged as TC1 Bidder as per the selection criteria set out in the RFP and to whom notification of award has been given by Bank.

2.2.6 “The Contract Price/Project Cost” means the price payable to the SI under the Contract for the full and proper performance of its contractual obligations.

2.2.7 “The Equipment/Product” means all the IT and Non-IT components, including but not limited to Hardware / Software / Firmware/ Middleware/ services etc.; which the SI is required to supply to the Bank under this Contract.

2.2.8 “Final Acceptance Test” means the date on which Final Acceptance Test certificate is issued shall be deemed to be the date of successful commissioning (Sign Off) of the Project. The final acceptance shall cover 100% of Phase 1,2,3,4 for this Project, after successful testing; a Final Acceptance Test Certificate (FAT) shall be issued by the BANK to the selected SI.

2.2.9 “The Services” means those services pertaining to the Planning, Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV certified Data Center and other obligations such as transportation, transit insurance, customization, integration, provision of technical assistance, training, etc.; to be covered under the Contract by the SI.

2.2.10 “The Project” means setting up a Tier IV Data center on Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data Center for BANK, at Hinjewadi, Pune.

2.2.11 “The Project Site” means locations where supply and services as desired in this RFP document are to be provided.

2.2.12 Defect Liability Period is Supervision of all equipment (including but not limited to Hardware / software / Firmware/ Middleware/ Services etc.). The SI will also be liable for any defects in this period and will take care of the remedial procedure. Defect liability Period starts one (1) year from the date of Final Acceptance Test (FAT).

2.2.13 Term/Period of this Contract This period includes time taken to Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning and 5 years for Maintenance and operation of the Data Center from the date of acceptance by the Bank.

2.2.14 “Data Center” means complete campus facility including but not limited to Data Center building, other ancillary building, facilities, utility areas, etc.




5

2.3 Schedule of Events

Sr. No Particulars Remarks

2.3.1.

Contact details of issuing department(Name, Designation, Mobile No., Email address for sending any kind of correspondence regarding this RFP)

DC & BCM Department Address: State Bank Global IT Center Sector 11, CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai,400614. Contact Person Details: Name: Mr. Devesh Gupta Email: [email protected] Cc: [email protected] Mobile: 9867568362

2.3.2. Bid Document Availability including changes/amendments, if any to be issued

RFP may be downloaded from Bank’s website https://www.sbi.co.in Procurement news from 05/09/2017 to 26/09/2017.

2.3.3 Last date for requesting clarification

Up to 17:00 hrs. on 14/09/2017 All communications regarding points / queries requiring clarifications shall be given in writing or by e-mail

2.3.4 Pre - Bid Meeting From 15:00 hrs. onwards on 18/09/2017 at GITC, Belapur

2.3.5 Clarifications to queries raised at pre-Bid meeting will be provided by the Bank.

On 20/09/2017

2.3.6 Last date and time for Bid submission

15:00 hrs. on 27/09/2017

2.3.7 Address for submission of Bids

Address: DC & BCM Department 2nd Floor, C-Wing State Bank Global IT Center Sector 11, CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai,400614

2.3.8 Date and Time of opening of Technical Bids

15.30 hrs. on 27/09/2017 Authorized representatives of SIs may be present during opening of the Technical Bids. However, Technical Bids would be opened even in the absence of any or all of the SI representatives.

2.3.9 Reverse Auction

On a subsequent date which will be communicated to such Bidders who qualify in the Technical Bid.

2.3.10 Bid Participation Fee

Amount Rs.25,000/-

Non-refundable by means of a DD or Bankers’ cheque payable at Mumbai in favor of State Bank of India.

2.3.11 Earnest Money Deposit Rs. 50 Lakhs Validity period - 6 months from the date of Bid application

2.3.12

Performance Bank Guarantee As Stipulated below

• PBG for Entire Project including warranty and AMC-20% of the total cost of contract for the entire period of contract.

• PBG should be obtained for the entire period of contract plus claim period of 3 months.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.sbi.co.in/




6

Sr. No Particulars Remarks

2.3.13 Price validity from the date of price discovery

180 days from the date of Reverse Auction

2.3.14 Contact details of agency appointed for conducting Reverse Auction

Will be advised to the qualified Bidders

2.3.15 Delivery schedule As per SLA

2.3.16 Terms of Payment Annexure-S

2.3.17 Delivery locations Hinjewadi, Pune

2.3.18 Liquidated damages Sum equivalent to 1% per week or part thereof of Contract Price subject to maximum deduction of 10 % of the Contract Price.

2.3.19 Transition Penalty 10% of the Services portion of the contract

2.4 Scope of Work

2.4.1 General

This document defines the requirements for the Data Center Building to be constructed to house and support Data, Telecommunications and Computing services and facilities at Hinjewadi, Phase III, Pune.

Participants are expected to fully understand the scope and provide comprehensive proposal for the following requirements. The participant would need to deliver all the packages completely.

TURNKEY SI shall design and develop, procure, construct, test and commission a permanent, functional turnkey building and undertake all-inclusive maintenance contract.

The building scope shall include the following integrated component Systems:

i. Foundations; ii. Building structure; iii. Architectural components; iv. Internal and external finishing of floors, doors, walls, ceilings and roof; v. Furniture and building facilities, parking and access; vi. Utility services and connections; vii. Emergency diesel generator(s); viii. UPS and batteries; ix. AC and DC supplies x. Lighting / Emergency Lighting; xi. Lightning and Grounding; xii. HVAC, PAC xiii. Fire Detection and Protection; xiv. Fire Suppression System; xv. Plumbing, STP, WTP, Rain water harvesting system xvi. Physical security systems, Access Control System & CCTV System xvii. Building Management System, DCIM System xviii. Solar Panel System

2.4.2 Bid Evaluations:

A set of evaluation criteria shall be made based on the parameters listed;

i. Conceptual design on Architectural, structural and MEP services. ii. Build approach & Methodology, Electrical solution, Cooling Solution. iii. Better design PUE (Power Usage Effectiveness) and achievable target. iv. Better Reliability and Redundancy approach. v. Delivery time line. vi. TCO of Design. vii. Over all Data Center design and experience.




7

2.4.3 Bid submission:

The following documents should be enclosed with the tender duly signed and filled in:

2.4.3.1 Bid Documents

i. Conceptual Design documents ii. Detailed calculation on selection of equipment’s and design criteria’s iii. Complete Schematic drawings (end to end). iv. Detailed specifications of the equipment’s selected / proposed. v. Schedule of Quantities for all the works. vi. Tender Drawings.

2.4.3.2 Company Profile

2.4.3.3 Method Statement on how the tenderer proposes to mobilize Men, Materials and Equipment, and Execute the works

2.4.3.4 Details of Site Organization Chart proposed by the Tenderer and the profile snaps.

2.4.3.5 Samples of proposed filling materials for each category.

2.4.4 SI Scope:

The major responsibilities of the SI for Data Center shall include Packages for “Design, documentation, procurement, development, commissioning, training and handing over complying with the Telecommunications Infrastructure Association (TIA)'s "Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers" (ANSI TIA-942 or TIA-942 of chapter 2012) and Uptime Certification requirements for Tier IV Data Centers. The SI must describe how the proposed Layout and Design and development Data Center complies with the standards and statutory compliances for the Data Center project being implemented.

2.4.4.1 Key Requirements;

The key architectural goals & requirements of the Data Center are:

i. Scalability: All components of the data center must support scaling to provide continuous growth to meet user demand.

ii. Availability: All components of the data center must provide redundancy appropriately to ensure high availability and load balancing of the Mission Convergence application and related services.

iii. Security: The data center must provide an end-to-end security model that protects Racks, Servers, infrastructure components and Data from theft from external and internal.

iv. Manageability: Ease of configuration, ongoing health monitoring, and failure detection are vital to the goals of high-availability, load balancing, scalability, and security and must be catered in this to match the growing requirements and demands.

2.4.4.2 Deliverable summary;

i. The new facility shall include space comprising Data Suites, technical space, M&E plant space, technology support areas and offices. The facility will be Design and developed as possible as to minimize initial construction costs as well as to maximize the available space.

ii. The proposed site occupies an area of 4.09 Acres, in MIDC Hinjewadi, Phase III, Pune for plot layout drawing, refer Annexure-U.

iii. The main technical requirement is to meet TIA 942 along with Uptime Institute Tier IV certification requirements and applicable local codes. The new facility will have Uptime Certified Tier IV Core Data Center space




8

iv. Data Center should be available to the BANK in proper working condition with an uptime of 99.995% of the time on a 365 x 24 x7 basis. Power and cooling availability for IT Load with an uptime of 99.999% on a 365x24x7 basis.

v. Electrical load requirement for design purpose, refer Annexure-Q3, Section 1.1, Power Requirements.

vi. Floor loading capacity shall be designed as 1250kg / Sq.mtr for data hall and service corridors; 2000 kg/ Sq.mtr for UPS battery rooms.

vii. Slab to slab height for Server Hall shall be 5.5 Mtrs

viii. All internal walls to be 2 hrs. fire rated and all external walls to be 4 hrs. fire rated.

ix. Boundary wall to be designed for 10 feet height with 3 feet barbed wire fencing.

x. Design and development PUE should be 1.5 and less.

xi. The IT Data Hall layout follows an 8-tile pitch to optimize space.

xii. The Data Halls shall be fit with Hot Aisle Containment / Cold Aisle Containment to optimize airflow and prevent bypass air.

xiii. Refer the detailed Scope of Work in Annexure-Q2 for space requirements.

2.4.4.3 Architecture and structural Requirements;

The SI must perform the following specific services and any services necessarily incidental thereto.

i. SI shall carry out Geotechnical study including contour layout. ii. Master Plan: Architect shall develop master plan for the entire project immediately taking into

consideration phase wise development of the Data Center building. iii. Architectural Design and development of Building and services: iv. Preparation of concept plan of the Data Center building and presenting the same to BANK for

approval. Working out detailed layout, subsequent to approval of the concept plan by BANK, including complete architectural Design and development of all building and services proposed for the Data center.

v. Exterior, Interior Design and development: vi. Exterior façade finish, Interior space planning, Design of all areas including Data hall, Office

areas, Reception, lobbies, VC rooms, Cafeteria and all service rooms etc. inclusive of complete services and amenities.

vii. Co-ordination services: viii. Architect shall coordinate with different Design and development services as mentioned above

including architectural, landscape, structural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, Air-conditioning, firefighting, building automation, building management system, networking and communication, structured cabling audio visual and security system etc..

ix. Architect shall consult and coordinate with any other consultants engaged by BANK from time to time in course of the project and notified to the architect.

x. Architect shall provide all kinds of support to the BANK hired consultants in giving them whatever inputs required to meet BANK's requirements. If required, BANK hired consultants can be called for any discussion/meeting at architects place or elsewhere to sort" out all issues pertaining to the project in order to achieve project deadline. All such meetings and discussions shall be done or routed through BANK's Representative.

xi. Structural Design and development: xii. Preparation of basic structural working drawing, Preparation of detailed structural working

drawings, which would include detailed drawing of pile, pile cap, plinth beams, columns, staircase, slabs, trenches, machinery foundation etc.

xiii. Co-ordination with other consultant in order to preplan and implement a total Design and development solution. You should provide the Design and development data / calculations vetted by an independent structural consultant / Engineer appointed by BANK by sending a complete set of drawings and Design calculations in phases. You should co-ordinate and clarify any queries / comments raised by the structural consultant / Engineer and incorporate any




9

improvements suggested. Duly approved Design and development calculations and assumptions / data's should be submitted to BANK for their reference / records.

xiv. LEED GOLD CERTIFICATION – Bidder has to adhere to Leed Gold Certification for the Facility.

2.4.4.4 Electrical Requirements:

The Electrical services during the course of its Design and development shall comprise of but not limited to the following and meeting CEIG/ CEA (Chief Electrical Inspectorate to Government / Chief Electricity Authority) requirements,

i. Power Electrical Architecture should be as per Tier IV Norms. ii. Low Voltage Power Distribution iii. Power distribution Design and development including transformers and panels as per Tier IV

norms iv. Diesel Generators Design and development including infrastructure as per Tier IV norms. v. Power factor correction equipment’s. vi. External cable routing and layout of cable trenches vii. UPS systems of 2(N+1) configuration and in modularity in Design and development. viii. Rising mains for floor distributions ix. Electrical Design and development and documentation for Energy efficient lighting systems. x. Emergency Lighting systems and its distributions. xi. Lightning Protection system meeting the local statutory norms. xii. Design and development of Power monitoring instrumentation by IBMS systems. xiii. Cable ladders, trays, and trunking system for power and data systems xiv. Earthing Systems xv. Electrical Coordinated drawings for all services.

2.4.4.5 Structured Cabling

Data Cabling would be through Fiber Cabling as per the design submitted by the SI. The Cabling should be from the MUX Room to the Core, Distribution and Access switches and should be laid over overhead tray and per the rack placement plan. The standard for cabling should follow the EIA/TIA 586 A/B standards and should be the latest in terms of technology suitable for 100G network backbone using Software Defined Network or Network Function Virtualization requirements. The cabling should be through two different paths /shaft /raceways, so that in the event of an accident in one path the second path should be active and operational.

2.4.4.6 Mechanical Requirements

The Design and development of the mechanical services during the course of its development shall comprise of but not limited to the following:

i. Location, type, configuration and capacity of the central chiller plant of air cooled and water cooled system. The system shall be designed based on Tier IV Norms.

ii. Free cooling system through water side economizer comprising cooling towers and auxiliary cooling coils in PAHU for Server area.

iii. 2 x 100% treated fresh air unit for server halls complete with chemical filter, pre-filter, fine filter, cooling coils etc.

iv. Cost benefit analysis of the various types of chillers with refrigerants / refrigeration plant and associated applications in the determination of the type of plant to be submitted.

v. Specialized air conditioning as per Tier IV norms and the latest technology of energy efficient systems for the Data Center rooms, Mux / MMR room and other office locations meeting the ASHARE standards.

vi. Efficient piping systems and its distribution such a way the complete system is of fault tolerant.

vii. Fire Protection System including Fire hydrant, sprinkler system, wet risers and yard hydrant system.

viii. Mechanical services control panels and switch boards, including power and control reticulation to mechanical equipment.




10

ix. Inputs to Building management system for:

x. HVAC operation Control and monitoring from centralized control room.

xi. Utility i.e. water and electricity consumption, distribution and monitoring

xii. Interface with specialized services pertaining to the systems in the scope of EPC CONTRACTOR

xiii. Energy Management: The Design and development shall address energy conservation opportunities including but not limited to the following, • Variable Speed Drive Units for Chillers, pumps and cooling towers • Variable Air Volume units for PAHU

xiv. VRF System for office area.

2.4.4.7 Plumbing Requirements;

The Design and development of the Plumbing Services (but not limited to) included in this scope are,

i. Raw water storage tank, treated water storage tank, Rainwater storage, Design and development and layout with distribution line diagram.

ii. Sewer and drainage services

iii. Storm water services

2.4.4.8 Extra Low Voltage system Requirements;

The Extra Low Voltage services (but not limited to) included in this scope are

i. Fire Alarm and Detection System in the entire built up area and premises as per NFPA standards.

ii. Physical Security system and perimeter security system

iii. Access Control System

iv. CCTV monitoring System

v. Public Address System

vi. Green gas based fire quenching system

vii. Rodent repellent system

viii. Water Leak Detection System

ix. Building Management System

x. Third party integration system including determining the common platform for communication and interface of equipment with IBMS,

xi. Third party integration of all the utilities and services for centralized operation, Monitoring and control of systems, report generation on utilities.

SI will be responsible for providing all technical inputs for obtaining requisite clearance from statutory authorities.

2.4.5 GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:

2.4.5.1 General

This TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION describes the Building requirements together with

i. Grounding, ii. AC & DC power supplies, iii. Emergency generator,




11

iv. Lighting, v. HVAC, PAC vi. Fire detection, protection and suppression, vii. Utilities, viii. Access security System, furniture and storage requirement which the SI shall provide as a

turnkey facility.

SI shall construct the Building in accordance with this TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ( Annexure P ) All Systems provided at this facility shall meet the best commercial practices for reliability, maintainability and performance.

2.4.5.2 Civil works

Civil Work shall be responsible for the final detailed design of the Building, including but not limited to the following, and as indicated on the relevant drawings:

i. Building foundation design and construction; ii. Grading and paving for building surround, including car parking, walkways and access roads; iii. Design and construction of Building frame, walls and roof; iv. Provision of crash proof external concrete walls for the Core DC. v. Provision and construction of security fences, gates, barriers, bollards turnstiles, etc.

All works are to be performed in accordance with the latest specifications and geotechnical data. 2.4.5.3 Architectural

i. Building Description

The Data Center building housing Data Center Server Hall, Network Operation Center (NOC), electrical / UPS rooms, battery rooms, mechanical rooms and associated office and loading bay / workshop areas. The entrance shall be via an entrance stair and lobby and reception area. The staff area shall consist of offices, conference room, and lounge / break room, storage / file room, toilet facilities with janitor’s closet. Two numbers loading area with Staging and testing rooms shall also be provided. The building shall be an elevated cast reinforced concrete framed / precast concrete panel structure. The roof shall be finished externally with a reinforced protective concrete screed over a fully adhered ply weathering membrane on rigid insulation bonded to a concrete screed laid to falls. The rooftop equipment shall be shielded from view. The rooftop of the Building shall have either a) mesh screens or b) increased parapet height such that equipment (i.e. Satellite dishes, antennas) can be shielded appropriately. Alternatives can be proposed, upon BANK’s approval, to suit the requirements. A screeded concrete floor shall be provided in the Mechanical room, and Electrical room with a hardener additive and epoxy-based sealant. The screed within the Battery room shall be finished with acid resistant paint finish. The Data Center Server Hall and Network Operators Center (NOC) shall be provided with a raised access floor with a bonded anti-static PVC tile finish. The concrete sub floor shall be finished with epoxy paint to prevent dust formation. Access to the raised floor level shall be via concrete steps and platforms with equipment access via demountable galvanized steel handrails. All doors shall be paint finished insulated metal construction, with the addition of removable transom panels for equipment access, if required. Internal partitions shall be rendered and painted reinforced with concrete masonry block installed from floor to underside of roof and shall provide the required fire rating to separate the internal spaces to comply with the IBC for Fire Protection.




12

All sanitary fittings of the same kind shall be one uniform make and type supplied by the same approved manufacturer. All sanitary appliances shall be fitted with a trap, either as an integral part of the appliance or attached to and immediately beneath its outlet. All fittings shall be of the anti-vandal type. All toilet fittings shall be white glazed vitreous ceramic. Pedestal-type WC’s shall be close-coupled pans and cisterns. Eastern type WC’s shall be wash down rim type with integral foot treads and high level cisterns. Individual urinals shall be trapped with flushing rims and matching dividing screens. All units shall be complete with all manufacturer’s fittings, accessories and fasteners. All toilet fittings shall be provided with an adjacent water tap and hose. Wash hand basins shall be provided with central pillar mixing taps and all necessary accessories. Vanity counters and wash hand basins shall be Corian or equal approved. Water supply control fittings to ablution areas shall be provided with automatic shut-off timer valves. Stainless steel accessories for each toilet shall include:

• Paper towel dispensers and receptacles; • Toilet tissue dispensers; • Stainless steel framed mirrors; • Soap dispensers; • Shelves; • Coat hooks; • Hot air hand dryers; • Hose bib with flexible pipe and spray nozzle.

Cleaner’s sinks and hose connections shall be heavy-duty type with integral high splash back, a hinged bucket grating and a protective hardwood pad on the front edge. Support brackets / legs shall be included as required. Kitchen sinks, stainless steel, double bowl inset sink and drainer with ‘Monobloc’ type mixer including swivel nozzle shall be provided to all mess rooms, unless otherwise noted. Rainwater disposal System shall be galvanized steel type, fitted externally. System shall be designed to take account of local climatic conditions, to ensure that gutters are laid to appropriate falls and gutters and downpipes sized such that they discharge freely. Access for cleaning shall be provided at locations prone to blockage including offsets in vertical pipework and at the end of pipe branches. Rainwater downpipes shall discharge onto concrete splash blocks at grade or paving level. All fittings shall be compatible with roof materials. All built-in fixtures and furnishings including worktops and cabinets to break rooms, vanity counters to W.C’s etc. shall be fabricated from locally available materials to designs and finally the BANK’s approval. The selected materials shall be classified as suitable for the purpose and shall be finished in accordance with good trade practice and methods. All finished surfaces shall be smooth and free from protrusions, crevices and corners in order to avoid personal injury and damage to clothing. Trims with un-jointed lengths between angles or ends of runs, shall be installed wherever possible. All built-in fixed furniture and finished carpentry including kitchen and break room cabinets, wash basin cabinets, heavy-duty working service counters, vanity tops and reception desks. All fixed furniture shall be treated to be fire retardant. Materials shall include Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), plywood, wood veneers, hardwood edging, plastic laminate, counter / vanity tops shall be solid polymer type, non-porous, single piece, wherever possible, with flush joints sealed with joint adhesive.




13

2.4.5.4 Electrical Works

The Building shall be supplied with dual redundant electrical power feeds. 220/ 11KV GIS substation to be planned in the plot. These transformers shall be oil cooled with OLTC (On Circuit Tap changer). All ACBs at incoming should be of EDO (Electrical Draw Out) type.

i. Emergency Power Generator

The Generator shall be 0.9 power factor and located in its own building, exterior to the Data Center Building, complete with underground fuel storage tanks providing sufficient fuel for 72 hours continuous operation, industrial grade exhaust silencer, DC starting System, space heater, jacket water heater and air intake louvers, control panel and main circuit breaker. Emergency Power Generator shall be Data Center continuous rating. Permanent load bank for single largest capacity of DG set shall be provided.

ii. Lightning Protection

SI shall assess and make calculations for the requirement of lightning protection of the Building and other structures. SI shall provide lighting protection by means of an Air Terminal System and/or an overhead ground wire connected to grounding rods or to the grounding grid.

iii. Area Lighting

There shall be provision and installation of area lighting around the Building. Minimum illumination level in the Building yards shall be in accordance with BANK Standards. Lighting fixtures shall be LED type and controlled by photo-cell through an auto / manual selector switch and lighting contactors.

iv. Interior / Exterior Lighting

The Building will be provided with interior and exterior lighting, emergency lighting, exit lighting fixtures and receptacle outlets with associated accessories. All lighting shall be LED type.

Lux density levels shall be in accordance with TIA standards. All exit doors shall be provided with illuminated exit signs both in Local Language and English. Occupancy sensor based lighting system with LED lighting for all the areas.

v. AC Power System

A 415 / 230V AC System shall be provided for lighting, receptacles, and other small appliance loads.

vi. Capacity Requirements

A minimum requirement of 15 Min’s power backup capacity shall be provided from UPS Battery Banks for all IT equipment’s. UPS system for IBMS shall be designed for 30 Min’s back up.

The Power System shall be defined according to the BANK requirements.

vii. UPS

UPS shall be configured as per Tier IV norms and design requirements. This will provide the feed to the PDU Distribution boards. A standalone UPS shall be provided for the emergency lighting System. UPS shall be configured as per Tier IV norms and design requirements for IBMS and PAC units of server hall. Permanent load bank for single largest capacity of UPS system shall be provided.

All cables at incoming and outgoing of UPS shall be copper. Power from PDUs to racks shall be with bus bar trunking.

viii. Batteries

Each Battery Bank shall be Sealed Maintenance free batteries. The Batteries shall be high grade used for communication installations. SI shall finalize the number of battery cells in each bank and a properly sized two-pole fused cross-over switch with an under voltage release feature to be used to prevent battery discharge beyond the battery’s end-of-discharge voltage. A battery monitoring System at cell level shall be provided linked to the Building Management System. An alarm to




14

indicate the battery circuit breaker open condition (or fused disconnect switch open or blown fuse condition) shall be provided on the charger cabinet or the UPS cabinet.

Another alarm to indicate the battery room high temperature condition shall be enunciated to IBMS. Battery cables shall be sized for a total voltage drop of less than Three percent (3%). The positive and negative battery cables shall be run in the same conduit to prevent inductive heating. The positive and negative buses of the batteries shall be isolated from earth ground.

ix. Battery Rack

Stationary batteries shall be installed on open battery racks within the battery room to facilitate proper cooling, routine inspection and maintenance.

The battery rack shall be corrosion resistant with grounding lugs installed at both ends or diagonally opposite on the rack: it shall be bonded at both end points to a local supplementary grounding. Covers for all inter-cell connectors, Insulation sheets between racks to batteries and battery terminals or insulated copper bus bars shall be supplied as part of this battery to enhance safety.

x. Grounding

Maintenance free Chemical type Grounding system as per IS 3043 and IEEE standards to be followed.

2.4.5.5 HVAC Works

i. General

SI shall be responsible for the design, procurement, installation, testing, balancing and commissioning of the Systems within the air conditioning and Building services scope.

The air conditioning and Building services scope includes the following Systems:

• Air conditioning Systems;

• Domestic pipe work services;

• Above and below ground drainage;

SI shall verify the plant room overall dimensions to ensure adequate accommodation of the final equipment selected during the detailed design period. Space shall be allowed for the installation of all equipment, ductwork, pipe work and associated insulation, controls, panels, wiring and the like. Access space shall be allowed for inspection, testing, balancing, commissioning, cleaning and painting and the removal and replacement of parts including fans, drives, motors, coils, filters and the like.

ii. Design Criteria

a) External Design Conditions

The external design conditions for sizing HVAC equipment and carrying out heat gain and heat loss calculations to be submitted for approval and as per BANK requirement. External design dry bulb and wet bulb shall be selected considering ASHRAE, N = 20 years maximum ambient.

b) Internal Design Conditions

Internal design conditions to be read in conjunction with BANK’s requirement and all associated reference documents should be as per latest applicable ASHRAE Tier IV standards.

iii. Noise

Noise control shall be designed to comply with the requirements of TIA and local statutory norms.

All air conditioning equipment shall be selected to provide quiet and efficient operation. The selection of equipment shall be based on the lower level of the range stated as a target value. Due regard shall be given to the additive effect of multiple noise sources within the spaces when considering the overall noise level to be achieved.




15

Where equipment noise levels cannot be achieved below the required level, duct or equipment mounted sound attenuators shall be used. Duct mounted attenuators shall be complete with bull noses and tapered exits to avoid high air pressure drops and regenerated noise.

Sound insulation material shall not be installed as internal linings to air conditioning and ventilation ductwork.

Where sound insulation is required to reduce noise break-in or out of a System, this shall be fixed to the outside of the ductwork, combined where necessary with the thermal insulation and vapor sealing requirements.

Fluid velocities in ducts and pipes shall be selected to ensure that flow generated noise does not cause the specified noise levels of the areas, through which they are routed, to be exceeded.

iv. Vibration

Equipment design and selection shall minimize the generation of vibration. All relative equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by the use of anti-vibration mountings. These mountings shall be connected to the rest of the System, in which they are installed, with suitable flexible connections designed to minimize the transmission of vibration. Where necessary, in critical areas, the pipe work and ductwork shall be supported with adjustable spring hangers. Where terminal grilles, ductwork and diffusers etc. are in contact with walls, ceilings etc. non-intercellular neoprene strips shall be inserted into the contact areas. Anti-vibration mountings shall be of the spring, rubber in shear, or a combination of both to suit the vibration frequencies to be isolated. Spring mountings shall be of the enclosed type (with inspection slots) suitable for retaining the spring in position on failure.

Where equipment produces excessive out of balance forces, the equipment shall be mounted on inertia blocks, with the anti-vibration mountings supporting the blocks.

v. Outdoor Air Requirements

The outdoor air quantity shall be established based on the following requirements:

a) Outdoor air rate required by occupants, dependent on their space allocation and activity and shall meet the LEED requirements;

b) Outdoor air quantity required to balance air exhausted via toilets, battery rooms, etc., where re-circulation of air is not acceptable;

c) Outdoor air quantity to provide area air pressurization requirements for Server Hall;

d) Unless otherwise noted, all fresh air intakes shall be at high level in the HVAC plant room and include sand trap louvers, inertia filter and bleed fan prior to the air handling unit.

In addition to inertia filter, the fresh air intake shall include chemical and particulate air filters to minimize the risk of H2S and other chemicals entering the Building and causing corrosion within the equipment for Server Hall.

vi. Battery Room

Humidity control is not required in battery rooms. Battery room shall be air conditioned to maintain a temperature of 25 deg C +/- 2 deg C.

Battery rooms shall be ventilated to the outside air by forced ventilation to prevent accumulation of hydrogen and conditioned to maintain design temperature.

The ventilation System is determined such that the hydrogen concentration shall be limited to less than One percent (1%) of the total air volume of the battery room. Separate ventilation system shall be provided based on Hydrogen Sensor. Battery Room shall have negative pressure.

No false ceiling is allowed in the battery room. Pockets for collection of flammable gas within battery room ceilings shall be avoided. However, if not possible, then means shall be provided to withdraw any collected flammable gas from the highest point within this soffit pocket.




16

vii. Generator Room

The Generator Room, if required shall be ventilated to maintain the internal environment to meet the equipment requirements. In addition, provision shall be made to supply the combustion air if required to be supplied from the HVAC Systems.

viii. Data Center Server Hall

The Data Center Server Hall shall be provided with Precision Air Handlers. The design of the air conditioning and ventilation System shall take into account temperature and heat dissipated by all equipment’s installed.

Air conditioning Systems will operate to supply the necessary cooling while 20% of units are in stand-by mode. On failure of the operating unit, the stand-by units will automatically start by means of auto change over control. All Precision Units for Server Hall shall be down discharge type with EC Fan based on Supply Air Temperature Logic. The fans shall be in floor type plenum fan.

A Temperature / Humidity Recorder shall also be provided to monitor the temperature and humidity.

Location of fresh air intake shall be at a minimum of 2.4 Mtrs above ground level

There shall be provision for remote alarm in case of any equipment failure. The Building conditioning and ventilation Systems shall be monitored and controlled by a microprocessor based control System, as required.

ix. UPS and Battery Rooms

UPS Rooms and Battery Rooms shall be provided with Precision Air Handlers. The design of the air conditioning and ventilation System shall take into account temperature and heat dissipated by all equipment’s installed.

Air conditioning Systems will operate to supply the necessary cooling while one of the units are in stand-by mode. On failure of the operating unit, the stand-by units will automatically start by means of auto change over control. All Precision Units for UPS and Battery Rooms shall be top discharge type with EC Fan.


x. Staging Room

Staging Room shall be provided with Precision Air Handlers. The design of the air conditioning and ventilation System shall take into account temperature and heat dissipated by all equipment’s installed.

Air conditioning Systems will operate to supply the necessary cooling while one of the units are in stand-by mode. On failure of the operating unit, the stand-by units will automatically start by means of auto change over control. Precision Units shall be top discharge type with EC Fan.


xi. Meet Me Room (MMR) and Networking Room

All Rooms shall be provided with Precision Air Handlers. The design of the air conditioning and ventilation System shall take into account temperature and heat dissipated by all equipment’s installed.

Air conditioning Systems will operate to supply the necessary cooling while one of the units are in stand-by mode. On failure of the operating unit, the stand-by units will automatically start by means of auto change over control. All Precision Units for Server Hall shall be down discharge type with EC Fan based on Supply

Air Temperature Logic.

A Temperature / Humidity Recorder shall also be provided to monitor the temperature and humidity.




17


xii. Other Areas in the Building

Additional air conditioning System shall be provided to the office area and other rooms. Exhaust Fan shall be installed in toilet and Electrical rooms. Pressurization system shall be provided for stairwell, lift well and lobbies as per local byelaws requirements.

All HVAC works shall comply with relevant to Engineering Criteria and American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

xiii. Chilled water storage

Since the data center is employed for primarily high density racks, any power outage may result in shifting the rack inlet conditions above the desired level. Though non-availability of cooling during this time may not be of much significance in case of low density racks, continuous cooling is operational requirement for Tier-IV. The System shall provide emergency chiller backup as per Tier IV norms.

xiv. Ductwork and Pipework

Ductwork shall be designed, fabricated and installed in accordance with the requirements of project specification and associated references.

All HVAC pipe work materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the requirements of project specification and associated references.

All ductwork and pipe work passing building fire / smoke walls, floors, etc. shall have the required rated fire / smoke stop installed, the rating shall be as stated on the building architectural drawings.

Ductwork and pipework should not be routed above electrical or instrumentation cubicles. Where unavoidable, approved “drip trays” shall be installed to protect cubicles.

xv. Insulation

Insulation shall be applied for the following purposes:

• Conservation of energy;

• Personnel protection;

• Acoustic protection;

• Condensation prevention.

Rigid insulation sections shall be installed on pipe work and ducts to support the service. Duct and pipe work supports shall be installed on the outside of the insulation.

Pipe work and ducts exposed in HVAC plant rooms or exposed in room areas shall be finished with aluminum jacket or better. Services exposed to the ambient shall be protected with an all-purpose weatherproof jacket.

xvi. Refrigerants

No CFC (Chlorofluorocarbon) or HCFC (Hydro Chlorofluorocarbon) refrigerants (R410, R134A etc.) shall be used in air conditioning or cooling equipment.

xvii. Electrical Power Supplies

Independent electrical power panels shall be provided by SI to power the individual air conditioning equipment and shall be positioned in the Mechanical room. Where practical, the associated controls and instrumentation cubicle shall be directly fixed to the power panel, making it in appearance, to be one panel. However, power and control cabling shall be segregated and screened.

Power supplies to externally mounted refrigeration equipment shall be taken from the independent air conditioning power panel.




18

All externally mounted refrigeration equipment shall contain all necessary starters, motor protection and automatic controls.

Controls System power supply shall be from the Emergency supply with UPS backup.

xviii. Controls and Instrumentation

The HVAC control scope shall include the supply, installation, test and commissioning of the Environmental Monitoring and Temperature Control System for the Telecommunications & IT Data Center Building shall be in accordance with the requirements and specifications.

SI shall provide an integrated standalone control System. This shall include Direct Digital Controller (DDC), remote microprocessor control panels, sensors, control devices, software, handheld field programming devices, screened cabling, trunking and conduit for a fully operational System.

xix. Fire and Gas Detection

The Building shall have gas detectors installed in the outdoor air intake ductwork. The detectors shall sense H2S and hydrocarbons. Upon detection of gas, the outdoor air intake damper shall close and the air conditioning units shall revert to full recirculation operation. The outdoor air intake damper shall be One Hundred percent (100%) airtight.

Point type smoke detection shall be provided within the building to monitor all areas including floor and ceiling voids.

2.4.6 DATA CENTER BUILDING LAYOUT

Based on Tier-IV standards, the Building shall be organized into specific functional areas, which shall help to define equipment placement.

The Building shall consist of the following key functional areas as set out below:

• Entrance Room; • Data Center Server Hall:

a) Aisle Containment System (ACS) b) Main Distribution Area; c) Horizontal Distribution Areas; d) Equipment Distribution Area;

• Network Operations Center (NOC); • Loading Area (Shipping, Receiving, Staging).

In addition, the following IT / Telecommunications Systems as set out below shall facilitate the following within the Building

• Security (ISS); • Public Address and General Alarm (PAGA); • Network Monitoring System (NMS); • Wireless LAN; • Telephone Voice over IP (VoIP); • Hotline and Direct Line; • Data Network.

2.4.6.1 Entrance Room

This is the location for IT / Telecommunication provider equipment and demarcation points, as well as the interface with premises cabling Systems. In this PROJECT, pending requirements may utilize cable vault as entrance room housing.

The IT / Telecommunication provider spaces in the entrance room shall conform to ANSI/TIA-569-B standards.

The size of the entrance room shall meet known and projected requirements including: • Entrance pathways for cabling; • Backboard and frame space for termination of access provider and campus cabling; • Access provider racks; • End user equipment within the entrance room;




19

• Demarcation racks; • Pathways to the Data Center Server Hall.

2.4.6.2 ACS (Aisle Containment System)

All the servers shall be housed within the racks/cabinets, and deployed utilizing the ACS concept. The Aisle Containment System (ACS) is a row based containment system for high density designed to maximize in-row cooling predictability, capacity, and efficiency.

Along with the servers within the racks/cabinets shall be implemented. This shall reduce the opportunity for the hot air to mix with the room, and improves the performance of cooling units.

Hot / cold air containment shall eliminate hot spots by preventing hot air recirculation into sensitive IT equipment. The HACS shall ensure proper air distribution by completely separating supply and return air paths. The hot / cold aisle is sealed off using doors and transparent ceiling tiles that extend the width of the hot aisle. Ceiling tiles shall house the racks. The ACS shall have a scalable design that allows for quick deployment of high density clusters and shall also cater to changing needs and future expansion on a pay as you grow architecture.

2.4.6.3 Backbone and Horizontal Cabling

Within the Data Center Building, backbone cabling shall provide connections between MDA, HDA, Data Center Server Hall and Entrance Room in accordance with the BANK and BICSI TDMM Standards. The horizontal cabling shall provide connections between the HDA and EDA. Backbone cabling shall be installed between HDAs for redundancy. The cabling shall be based on the highest capacity media available at the time of installation, to reduce the need for re-cabling in the future. Both fibre and Cat6 copper cabling shall be installed for horizontal cabling between access switches and servers.

2.4.6.4 Network Operations Center (NOC)

At the Data Center Building, the operations staff and monitoring Systems shall be located in the NOC. The NOC shall be a separate room located adjacent to the Data Center Server Hall.

2.4.6.5 Loading, Staging and Testing

The Loading, Staging and Testing Area shall be a space that supports the shipping and receiving of network equipment as well as all other IT equipment and devices such as server, storage subsystem, and tape library, racks / cabinets, etc.

2.4.6.6 Security System

This section provides a general description of the proposed Physical Security and Access Control System within the Building. The PSACS System specified herein shall be of minimum performance and availability requirements and will be finalized during detailed design.

Access to the Data Center Server Hall within the Building shall be strictly regulated, limited to personnel necessary to keeping the equipment in operation. All points of access shall be controlled by checkpoints, and coded card readers at restricted access doorways. For added surveillance, CCTV cameras shall be installed at entry points to be monitored by security personnel. Main entrance shall be provided with Boom Barriers, Bollards, and Under Vehicle Scanning System etc. X-ray Baggage scanners, Door frame metal detectors, handheld metal detectors shall be provided at Building Entrance Security Hall. Full height turnstiles shall be provided for Server Hall Entrance.

SI shall install the Security System to control the access within the Building.

The Scope shall cover the following:

• Adequate LCD displays providing a graphic display of the vital areas in the Building;

• System capacity to support Card Readers and Controllers;

• System capacity to support Security CCTVs (Fixed and/or PTZ);

• Alarm Display;




20

• Software application configuration to meet user requirements;

• Video Storage System / Digital Video Recorder;

• Operator Workstations;

• Communications links between Security system equipment.

The items listed in this Section represent the major System devices for the Security System. Any additional items deemed necessary to satisfy the functional requirements of this TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION, i.e. to provide a fully functional and highly reliable Security System, shall be provided by SI.

2.4.6.7 Public Address

Internally Mounted Loudspeakers shall be installed by SI for means of broadcasting speech and emergency alarms within the Building. Equipment to be provided as part of the System shall meet the best commercial practices, reliability, maintainability and performance of the PAGA System that is defined within the Public Address & General Alarm System Technical Specification.

2.4.6.8 Telephone Voice over IP (VoIP)

Telephone Voice over IP (VoIP) and IP Telephony (IPT) services shall be provided within the Building for communication purposes, especially within the administrative offices.

2.4.6.9 Building Management System

The design considerations for the monitoring systems are listed below:

• A fully integrated building automation system will be planned incorporating direct digital control for energy management, equipment monitoring and control, suitable for mission critical equipment monitoring via management station software.

• The BMS system will be used to monitor the critical equipment in the Data center including the DG sets, LT panels, transformers, distribution boards, UPS, PDUs, Chillers, Pumps, and PAHUs etc.

• In raised floor areas where chilled water or any other liquid piping is installed, liquid leak detectors shall be installed.

• Critical instruments shall be isolatable for preventive maintenance without impacting data center operation. Critical instruments are those without which the data center has a potential of shutting down or is at risk.

• Critical I/Os for similar functions shall be distributed on separate DDC / PLC panels, integrators etc.

• Communication between Critical equipment and BMS controllers will be via dedicated MODBUS / BACNET communication Network.

• Major parameters monitored by IBMS are temperature, Humidity, CO, CO2, Pressure, flow etc.

1. Communication Interfaces:

• SNMP Interface

• MODBUS/TCP Interface

• BACnet/IP Interface

• Dry Contact Sensing Interface

2. Software Modules: Power Monitoring & Management (Real time monitoring, Reports, Dashboards, Elevation Modeling, Visualization, Analytics)




21

3. Environment Monitoring & Management (Real time monitoring, Reports, Dashboards, Elevation Modeling, Visualization, Analytics)

4. Asset Management (Real time monitoring, Reports, Dashboards, Elevation Modeling, Visualization, Analytics)

5. Capacity Management (Real time monitoring, Reports, Dashboards, Elevation Modeling,| Visualization, Analytics)

6. Alarm Management (Real time monitoring, Reports, Dashboards, Visualization, Analytics). For Environmental, non-IT and IT assets

7. Software Modules: IT Power Monitoring (Real time monitoring, Reports, Dashboards, Visualization, Analytics).

2.4.6.10 Furniture specification

Office Chair

Gas lift height adjustable, ratchet back, forward seat tilt with height adjustable arms, 5 point base with castors, with fabric deep cushion seat and back.

Operator’s Chair

Multi-functional with adjustable back height and lumbar support, gas lift height adjustable seat height and slide, arm rests, 5-point base with castors, head rest and full mesh seat and back suitable for 24-hour usage.

Meeting Room Chair

Fabric covered deep foam seat and back with arms and chromium plated cantilever frame.

Break Room Chair

Stackable with easy clean laminated pressed ply seat and back with chrome frame.

Office Desk

Curved workstation. Beech veneer or similar approved finish with PVC edge, cantilever powder coated frame, height adjustable feet, 2 cable ports and modesty panel. 1800 x 1200 x 800 x 600mm.

Under Desk Pedestal

Beech veneer or similar approved finish and PVC edge (to match desk), 3 locking draws and zinc alloy handles and castors.

Meeting Room Table

Beech veneer or similar approved finish and PVC edge, powder coated cantilever ‘I’ frame, 2 cable ports and modesty panel. 4800 x 1200mm.

Round Meeting Table

Beech veneer or similar approved finish and PVC edge with powder coated 5 leg splay base. 1220mm dia.

Break Room Table

Melamine faced finish and PVC edge with powder coated tubular legs. 1220 x 760mm.

Operators Desk

To Instrument Engineers requirements and specification.

Filing Cabinet

Powder coated steel with 4 drawers, locks, card holder and recessed handles.

Lockers




22

305 x 450 x 1780mm powder coated steel locker with lock, locker stand and slatted hardwood seat.

Workbench

Heavy duty (500kg UDL per shelf) adjustable galvanized steel shelving complete with uprights, shelves and bracing. 1000 x 500 x 2000mm.

Office/Library Shelving

Powder coated single or double sided units. Height adjustable shelves with backstop, anti-slip finish and adjustable feet. 900 x 300 x 2100mm.

Shoe Rack

Purpose built hardwood unit.

White Board

Laminate dry wipe surface with aluminum frame and pen tray. 2400 x 1200mm.

Wall Mounted Projector Screen

Manually operated matte white projector screen. 2000 x 2000mm.

Break Room Furniture / Kitchen Units

Break Room fitted furniture shall be melamine face worktops with matching cupboards and drawers below, matching high level cupboards and stainless steel sink, as drawings.

Operator Consoles

Consoles shall be ergonomically designed and manufactured to permit operators a clear view of console mounted equipment, wall mounted equipment requiring clear visibility. Have sufficient desktop space to be able to furnish communication equipment i.e. telephones, and be capable of writing reports in the log book, etc.

2.4.7 GIS

The SI should be able to provide one-stop GIS substation as per the electrical design requirements that also comprise all secondary technology, procurement, installation and commissioning on-site, and operational training.

Gas-insulated high-voltage switchgear (GIS) is a compact metal encapsulated switchgear consisting of high-voltage components such as circuit-breakers and disconnectors, which can be safely operated in confined spaces

The benefits of gas-insulated substation

• High reliability, availability, gas tightness, and high degree of safety • Economic efficiency, long service life, little maintenance requirements, and low life cycle costs • Compact design, good accessibility and ergonomics, high degree of adaptability to individual

requirement 2.4.8 Fire Suppression System

2.4.8.1 Introduction

This Section describes the scope of work of the fire suppression System to be provided for in the Building. The intent of this is to generally describe the major components of the scope. SI shall use these details as the basis to prepare detailed engineering of the fire suppression System, including drawings, design calculations, data sheets and specification sheets.

2.4.8.2 Design Requirements

SI shall prepare the design based on latest version of NFPA 2001, Standard on Clean Agents Fire Extinguishing Systems. Design shall be prepared and certified by a Certified Fire Protection Engineer. Design of fire suppression System shall be based on utilizing a clean agent Fire Extinguishing System.




23

Design Deliverables:

Design calculations for the clean agent quantities shall be based on Minimum Design Concentration (MDC) and Minimum Design Quantity (MDQ) with correction factors as per NFPA-2001. Final design quantity shall take into consideration additional agent quantities to compensate volumetric flow rate of released agent through openings in the System.

Hydraulic design calculations shall be utilized for sizing of the distribution piping System and discharge nozzles.

The Piping System shall be designed to ensure that the maximum allowable agent release time is achieved as per NFPA 2001. This may require multiple cylinders banks and agent release Systems.

Server Halls, UPS Rooms and Battery Rooms shall be provided with clean Gas Fire Suppression System. All occupied areas shall be provided with Wet Water Sprinkler System. Server Hall Corridors shall be provided with Water Mist System.

Handheld Fire Extinguishers based on clean agent shall be provided as per local codes.

2.4.8.3 Supply and Installation Requirements

A Fire suppression System utilizing agent shall be used for fire protection of the Data Center Server Hall in the Building. Fire suppression System shall be provided for both sub-floor and equipment room as total flood System. Offices and other utilities rooms in the Building are not required to be protected by this System.

SI supply and installation scope shall include but not be limited to:

• Supply and installation of clean agent cylinders per design requirements with One Hundred percent (100%) additional spare cylinders;

• Supply and installation of distribution piping System and discharge nozzles rated for the design pressure of the System and per design recommendations;

• Supply and installation of agent release System components including control panel with interface to FACP, automatic actuation System and manual actuation Systems;

• Supply and installation of pipe supports, hangers and all related accessories.

SI shall test the fire suppression System per NFPA Standards requirements.

2.4.8.4 Standards and Codes for Fire Protection Systems

All the WORK shall comply with the applicable BANK and Industry Standards including, but not limited to NFPA-2001 Standard on Clean Agents Fire Extinguishing Systems.

In the event of conflict between the above Codes and Standards, the more stringent shall govern.

2.4.8.5 Materials

Technical data and information for all materials shall be submitted to the BANK representative for review and approval prior to purchase. All materials shall be supplied by the SI.

2.4.9 Plumbing / Utilities

2.4.9.1 General

The domestic pipework services and above ground drainage shall include hot and cold water services and above ground plumbing to all sanitary appliances, kitchen facilities and wash stations as identified on the relevant drawings. In addition, sanitary sewer, condensate drain (from Mechanical room) and various floor drain Systems shall be provided with termination at a suitable manhole or piping interface approximately One meter (1m) from the building boundary. Floor drains from the Battery Room shall be equipped with neutralization pits, prior to discharge into the sanitary sewer.

Domestic piped services shall not be routed through, above or below rooms or areas containing sensitive equipment. All precautions shall be taken to ensure there is no risk of flooding sensitive rooms or areas, as the result of a pipe leak.




24

SI has to adhere to detailed scope of work mentioned in Annexure-Q and all its sub-sections. 2.5 Eligibility Criteria

2.5.1. Bidders meeting the following criteria are eligible to submit their Bids along with supporting

documents. If the Bid is not accompanied by all the required documents supporting eligibility criteria, the same would be rejected.

a. The Bidder has to submit the documents substantiating eligibility criteria as mentioned in this

RFP document. b. If any Bidder submits Bid on behalf of Principal/OEM, same Bidder shall not submit a Bid on

behalf of another Principal/OEM under this RFP.

2.5.2. The Bidder shall also submit PRE-CONTRACT INTEGRITY PACT along with technical bid as prescribed by the Govt. of India (Annexure- L) duly signed by the Bidder on each page and witnessed by two persons. The agreement shall be stamped as applicable in the State where it is executed. Bid submitted without PRE-CONTRACT INTEGRITY PACT, as per the format provided in RFP, shall not be considered.

Either the Bidder on behalf of Principal/OEM or Principal/OEM itself is allowed to Bid, however both cannot Bid simultaneously

Sr.No Eligibility Criteria Documents to be submitted

1 Bidder must be Indian firms / company/ organization registered under applicable Act in India.

Copy of the Partnership deed/Bye Law/ Certificate of Incorporation issued by Registrar of Companies along with Memorandum & Articles of Association and full address of the registered office.

2

The Bidder must have minimum average turnover of Rs 200 crore, in last 3 financial year(s) i.e. FY 2014-15, FY 2015-16 and FY 2016-17 as on 31st March 2017.

Copy of the audited Balance Sheet and Certificate of the Chartered Accountant stating the average annual turnover for preceding three years.

3

The Bidder should be profitable organization (on the basis of Operating Profit) for last 3 financial years ) i.e. FY 2014-15, FY 2015-16 and FY 2016-17 as on 31st March.

Copy of the audited balance sheets along with profit and loss statement for corresponding years and / or Certificate of the Chartered Accountant

4 Bidder should have positive net worth for last 3 financial years’ i.e. FY 2014-15, FY 2015-16 and FY 2016-17.

Chartered Accountant certificate for Net-worth.




25

Sr.No Eligibility Criteria Documents to be submitted

5

Bidder should have experience of constructing and commissioning of minimum 4 certified Tier III or Rated III (Design Certified) Data Center in last 7 years as on publishing date of this tender. Bidders who have built Data Center for Client or for their Commercial use will be considered.

Data Center build for Client 1.Copy of the Work order/Purchase Order OR Certificate of completion of the work from client 2.Uptime/TIA Certification Or Self-Build Data Center 1. Project details including but not limited Commencement and commissioning date, Total Number of Racks, TIER rating etc. 2.Uptime/TIA Certification 3.Certificate from Local Authority such as Occupancy Certificate

6

The bidder should have experience of having successfully completed at least one Data Centre (TIER III and above) of 500 racks and total of 1200 racks during the last 7 years

Data Center Build for Client 1. Copy of the Work order/Purchase Order OR Certificate of completion of the work from client 2. Uptime/TIA Certification Self-Build Data Center Project details including but not limited Commencement and commissioning date, Total Number of Racks, Uptime/TIA compliance etc. OR Uptime/TIA Certification

7

Bidder should not have any Past/present litigations, disputes, if any (Adverse litigations could result in disqualification, at the sole discretion of the Bank)

Brief details of litigations, disputes, if any are to be given on Company’s letter head.

8 Bidder should not have been blacklisted by any Public Sector Bank during the last 3 years.

Bidder should specifically confirm on their letter head in this regard.

9 The Bidder should have a local presence of support center and level 3 support (highest escalation) locally in India.


10

The Bidder should not have any Service Level Agreement pending to be signed with Bank for more than 6 months from the date of issue of purchase order issued by any of the Department at BANK GTC as on the date of Bid submission.


Note: 1. PQ Criteria: No change/ addition or deletion to be made by the Bidder to any of the clauses.




26

2. The Bidder should agree to the terms and conditions of Service Level Agreement (format placed at Annexure-R- Penalties and SLA Terms), should they become TC1 in the reverse auction to execute a contract with the Bank.

3. Eligibility criteria is applicable to System Integrator Documentary evidence must be furnished against each of the above criteria along with an index. All documents must be signed by the authorized signatory of the Bidder. Relevant portions, in the documents submitted in pursuance of eligibility criteria, should be highlighted. Signature Seal of Company




27

2.6 Technical Evaluation

2.5.1 The Technical Bids of only those Bidders, who qualify in the Pre-Qualification stage, shall be considered and will be evaluated as per the evaluation criteria in this clause.

2.5.2 In order to qualify technically, a Bid must secure a minimum of 70% of total marks in the technical evaluation. Only those Bids which have a minimum score of 70% of total marks in technical evaluation will be considered for opening of their commercial Bid.

2.6.3. Technical evaluation will include technical information submitted as per the Technical Bid format, demonstration of proposed project, reference calls and site visits, wherever required. The Bidder may highlight the noteworthy/superior features of relevant project. The Bidder will demonstrate/substantiate all claims made in the technical Bid to the satisfaction of the Bank, the capability of the project to support all the required functionalities at their cost or those at other organizations where similar projects are deployed.

2.6.4. Bank will evaluate the technical and functional specifications of all the designs and equipment quoted by the Bidder.

2.6.5. During evaluation and comparison of Bids, the Bank may, at its discretion ask the Bidders for clarification on the Bids received. The request for clarification shall be in writing and no change in prices or substance of the Bid shall be sought, offered or permitted. No post Bid clarification at the initiative of the Bidder shall be entertained.

2.6.7. The evaluation will also take into account:

a. The equipment to be supplied/services offered by the Bidder to any scheduled commercial Bank or recognizable Bank in India or abroad. The Bidder should furnish the details of such services offered.

b. Does the proposed design, equipment/product offer a proven solution to meet the requirements c. Upgrade(s) assurance by the Bidder as per requirements of the Bank for the duration of the

project. d. Capability of the proposed design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning,

Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data center to meet future requirements outlined in the RFP.

e. Bidder support facilities: support requirement like online support/ email support/ offline support, time period

To qualify in the Technical Evaluation, a Bidder must comply with all the requirements as listed in the table below.

Sr. No

Evaluation Criteria

Max Marks

Criteria

1

Capability of the Bidder to execute similar large projects

20

Bidder’s experience in setting-up IT infrastructure in Data Centres in India, quantified in terms of number of projects will be evaluated. Only Projects constructed and commissioned in the last 7 years from the date of Release of RFP will be considered.

Project Type

No. of Projects

Marks

Tier III/Rated III

>4 8

3-4 5

Tier IV/Rated IV

>2 12

1-2 5

Bidder Needs to submit Purchase order Or Work Order along with Project Completion Certificate from Client




28

Sr. No

Evaluation Criteria

Max Marks

Criteria

2

Maximum Number of Racks deployed in a project of Tier III/Tier IV Data Centre.

15

Project Type

Highest No. of Racks Deployed

Marks

Tier III/Rated III

>400 5

300-400 3

200-299 2

Tier IV/Rated IV

>300 10

200-300 7

100-199 5

Bidder Needs to submit Purchase order Or Work Order along with Project Completion Certificate from Client

3. Tier III/ Tier IV Certified Resources

20

Type of Certification

No. of certified Resources

Marks

Accredited Tier Designers

>3 10

2-3 6

Accredited Tier Specialist

>3 4

2-3 2

Accredited Operation Specialist

>3 6

2-3 4

The Bidders shall furnish these certificates issued by Uptime.

4

PMP / Prince 2 Certified Project Management Professionals

5

Total number of resources on its payroll with specified Certification available in company for deployment

No. of Resources

Marks

>3 5

2-3 3

The Bidders shall furnish these certificates accredited by Prince2/PMP institute or any other equivalent accredited authorized body.

5

Technical Presentation and clarifications / answers given to the BANK during presentation by the Bidder

20

The Bidder shall prepare and submit the presentation regarding the project. The Bid Evaluation Committee (BEC) shall evaluate the presentation based on the following criteria:

1.Demonstration of understanding regarding the project scope, approach & methodology to meet the project requirements and Quality of response against the queries raised by the committee: 15 marks

2. Innovations proposed to be implemented as per the criteria mentioned in Annexure-Q17: 5 Marks




29

Sr. No

Evaluation Criteria

Max Marks

Criteria

6

Site Visit of the latest Tier III / IV certified implemented, Commissioned and operational Data Centre project

20

1.Demonstration of Civil/Non-IT Design, Facilities such as MEP as per Tier III / IV certification (15 Marks) 2. Demonstration of innovations implemented at Data Center visited as per the criteria mentioned in Annexure-Q17 (5 Marks)

Total 100

Evaluation shall be done based on the information provided in the technical proposal (and subsequent clarification, if any) and Clarifications / Answers given to the Bid Evaluation committee (BEC) during the Presentation by the bidders.

2.7 Technical Specifications and BOM & Compliance

The Bid is open to all Bidders who meet the Technical specifications as given in Annexure-P of this document. Bidders have to submit Bill of Material (BOM) and Compliance as given in Annexure-B of this document. The Bidder has to submit the documents substantiating eligibility criteria as mentioned in this RFP document.

2.8 Cost of Bid document

The participating Bidders shall bear all the costs associated with or relating to the preparation and submission of their Bids including but not limited to preparation, copying, postage, delivery fees, expenses associated with any demonstration or presentations which may be required by the Bank or any other costs incurred in connection with or relating to their Bid. The Bank shall not be liable in any manner whatsoever for the same or for any other costs or other expenses incurred by a Bidder regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process.

2.9 Pre-Bid Meeting/ Clarification and amendments on RFP

2.9.1. Bidders requiring any clarification on the bidding documents may notify the Bank in writing strictly as per the format given in Annexure-K at the address/by e-mail given in Section 2.3 of this document within the date/time mentioned in the schedule of events.

2.9.2. A Pre-Bid Meeting will be held on the date and time specified in the schedule of events which may be attended by the authorized representatives of the Bidders interested to respond to this RFP.

2.9.3. The queries received (without identifying source of query) and response of the Bank thereof will be posted on the Bank’s website or conveyed to the Bidders.

2.9.4. BANK reserves the right to amend, rescind or reissue the RFP, at any time prior to the deadline for submission of Bids. The Bank, for any reason, whether, on its own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by a prospective Bidder, may modify the bidding document, by amendment which will be made available to the Bidders by way of corrigendum/addendum. The interested Parties/Bidders are advised to check the Bank’s website regularly till the date of submission of Bid document specified in the schedule of events/email and ensure that clarifications / amendments issued by the Bank, if any, have been taken into consideration before submitting the Bid. Such amendments/clarifications, if any, issued by the Bank will be binding on the participating Bidders. Bank will not take any responsibility for any such omissions by the Bidder. BANK, at its own discretion, may extend the deadline for submission of Bids in order to allow prospective Bidders a reasonable time to prepare the Bid, for taking the amendment into account. Nothing in this RFP or any addenda/ corrigenda or clarifications issued in connection thereto is intended to relieve Bidders from forming their own opinions and conclusions in respect of the matters addresses in this RFP or any addenda/ corrigenda or clarifications issued in connection thereto thereof.




30

2.9.5. Request for any change in commercial/legal terms and conditions, other than what has been mentioned in the RFP or any addenda/corrigenda or clarifications issued in connection thereto, will not be entertained.

2.9.6. Queries received after the scheduled date and time will not be responded/acted upon.

2.10 Contents of bidding document

2.10.1 The Bidder must thoroughly study/analyse and properly understand the contents of this RFP document, its meaning and impact of the information contained therein.

2.10.2 Failure to furnish all information required in the bidding document or submission of Bid not responsive to the bidding documents in any respect will be at the Bidder’s risk and responsibility and the same may finally result in rejection of its Bid. BANK has made considerable effort to ensure that accurate information is contained in this RFP and is supplied solely as guidelines for Bidders.

2.10.3 Nothing in this RFP or any addenda/corrigenda or clarifications issued in connection thereto, is intended to relieve Bidders from forming their own opinions and conclusions in respect of the matters contained in RFP and its addenda, if any.

2.10.4 The Bid prepared by the Bidder, as well as all correspondences and documents relating to the Bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Bank and supporting documents and printed literature shall be submitted in English.

2.10.5 The information provided by the Bidders in response to this RFP will become the property of SBI and will not be returned. Incomplete information in Bid document may lead to non-consideration of the proposal.

2.11 Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)

2.11.1 The Bidder shall furnish EMD for the amount and validity period mentioned in Section 2.3 of Instructions to Bidder.

2.11.2 EMD is required to protect the Bank against the risk of Bidder’s conduct.

2.11.3 The EMD may be in the form of a Demand draft or Pay order or Bank Guarantee [on the lines of Annexure-G, issued by a scheduled commercial Bank in India, other than State Bank of India, drawn in favour of State Bank of India payable at Mumbai. In case, SBI is the sole Banker for the Bidder, a letter of comfort from SBI would be acceptable.

2.11.4 Any Bid not accompanied by EMD for the specified amount as mentioned elsewhere in the RFP will be rejected as non-responsive.

2.11.5 The EMD of the unsuccessful Bidders shall be returned within 2 weeks from the date of Bid finalisation.

2.11.6 The EMD of successful Bidder will be discharged upon the Bidder signing the contract and furnishing the Performance Bank Guarantee for the amount and validity as mentioned in Section 2.3 of Instructions to Bidder of this RFP, which should be strictly on the lines of format placed at Annexure-H.

2.11.7 No interest is payable on EMD.

2.11.8 The EMD may be forfeited:-

a) if a Bidder withdraws his Bid during the period of Bid validity specified in this RFP; or

b) if a Bidder makes any statement or encloses any form which turns out to be false / incorrect at any time prior to signing of contract; or If the successful Bidder fails to sign the contract or furnish Performance Bank Guarantee, within the specified time period in the RFP/Purchase Order.

2.11.9 If EMD is forfeited for any reasons mentioned above, the concerned Bidder may be debarred from participating in the RFPs floated by the Bank/this department, in future, as per sole discretion of the Bank.




31

2.12 Bid Preparation and submission

2.12.1 The Bid is to be submitted in two separate envelopes. One of the envelope is to be prominently marked as ‘Technical Proposal for Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data Centre at Hinjewadi, Pune in response to the RFP No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 dated 05.09.2017 This envelope should contain following documents and properly sealed:

(a) Bid covering letter/Bid form on the lines of Annexure-A on Bidder’s letter head. (b) Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) as specified in this document. (c) A letter on Bidder’s letter head: - (i) Mentioning details of EMD submitted, technical competence and experience of the Bidder (ii) Certifying that the period of the validity of the Bid is as per terms of this RFP. (iii) Confirming that the Bidder has quoted for all the items/services mentioned in this RFP in their

commercial Bid. (iv) Confirming that they agree with all the terms and conditions mentioned in the RFP. (v) Specific response with supporting documents in respect of Eligibility Criteria as mentioned in

Section 2.5 and Technical Evaluation Section 2.6 of Instructions to Bidders. (d) Bidder’s details as per Annexure-C on Bidder’s letter head. (e) Licensing details of operating software/firmware. (f) Undertaking of Authenticity - Annexure-E (g) Format for Manufacturer’s Authorization Form– Annexure- F (h) Any deviations sought from technical criteria/specifications given in RFP. (i) Audited balance sheets and profit and loss account statement for last three years (j) A copy of board resolution or power of attorney showing that the signatory has been duly

authorized to sign the Bid document. (k) Detailed explanation of functioning of all the equipment (IT and Non-IT) installed.

2.12.2 A second sealed envelope prominently marked as Indicative Price Proposal for Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data centre in response to the RFP No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 dated 05.09.2017 This envelope should contain only indicative price Bid strictly on the lines of Annexure-D. The Indicative Price must include all the price components mentioned. Prices are to be quoted in Indian Rupees only.

2.12.3 Bidders may please note:

a. The Bidder should quote for the entire package on a single responsibility basis for all equipment (IT and Non-IT) including Hardware / Software / services it proposes to supply.

b. A soft copy (Word format) on a CD/DVD should also be kept in a separate envelope within the envelope of technical Bid. Voluminous documents should be submitted only on CD/DVD.

c. While submitting the Technical Bid, literature on the all equipment and its associated operating software should be segregated and kept together in one section / lot in a separate envelope.

d. Care should be taken that the Technical Bid shall not contain any price information. Such proposal, if received, will be rejected.

e. The Bid document shall be complete in accordance with various clauses of the RFP document or any addenda/corrigenda or clarifications issued in connection thereto, duly signed by the authorized representative of the Bidder and stamped with the official stamp of the Bidder. Board resolution authorizing representative to Bid and make commitments on behalf of the Bidder is to be attached.

f. Bids are liable to be rejected if only one (i.e. Technical Bid or Indicative Price Bid) is received.

g. Prices quoted by the Bidder shall remain fixed for the period specified in Section 2.3 of this document and shall not be subjected to variation on any account, including exchange rate fluctuations and custom duty. A Bid submitted with an adjustable price quotation will be treated as non-responsive and will be rejected.




32

h. If deemed necessary the Bank may seek clarifications on any aspect from the Bidder. However that would not entitle the Bidder to change or cause any change in the substances of the Bid already submitted or the price quoted.

i. The Bidder may also be asked to give presentation for the purpose of clarification of the Bid.

j. The Bidder must provide specific and factual replies to the points raised in the RFP.

k. The Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by the Bidder or a person or persons duly authorized to bind the Bidder to the Contract.

l. All the enclosures (Bid submission) shall be serially numbered with rubber stamp of the participating Bidder’s company. The person or persons signing the Bids shall initial all pages of the Bids, except for un-amended printed literature.

m. Any inter-lineation, erasures or overwriting shall be valid only if these are initialled by the person signing the Bids.

n. The Bid document shall be spirally bound.

o. The Bank reserves the right to reject Bids not conforming to above.

The two NON-WINDOW envelopes shall be put together and sealed in an outer NON-WINDOW envelope.

p. All the envelopes shall be addressed to the Bank and deliver at the address given in Part-II of this RFP and should have name and address of the Bidder on the cover.

q. If the envelope is not sealed and marked, the Bank will assume no responsibility for the Bid’s misplacement or its premature opening.

2.13 Deadline for submission of Bids

2.13.1 Bids must be received by the Bank at the address specified and by the date and time mentioned in the “Schedule of Events”.

2.13.2 In the event of the specified date for submission of Bids being declared a holiday for the Bank, the Bids will be received up to the appointed time on the next working day.

2.13.3 In case the Bank extends the scheduled date of submission of Bid document, the Bids shall be submitted by the time and date rescheduled. All rights and obligations of the Bank and Bidders will remain the same.

2.13.4 Any Bid received after the deadline for submission of Bids prescribed, will be rejected and returned unopened to the Bidder.

2.14 Modification and withdrawal of Bids

2.14.1 The Bidder may modify or withdraw its Bid after the Bid’s submission, provided that written notice of the modification, including substitution or withdrawal of the Bids, is received by the Bank, prior to the deadline prescribed for submission of Bids.

2.14.2 A withdrawal notice may also be sent by Fax, but followed by a signed confirmation copy, not later than the deadline for submission of Bids.

2.14.3 No modification in the Bid shall be allowed, after the deadline for submission of Bids.

2.14.4 No Bid shall be withdrawn in the interval between the deadline for submission of Bids and the expiration of the period of Bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Bid Form. Withdrawal of a Bid during this interval may result in the forfeiture of EMD submitted by the bidder.

2.14.5 Withdrawn Bids, if any, will be returned unopened to the Bidders.

2.15 Period of Validity of Bids

2.15.1 Bids shall remain valid for 180 days from the date of reverse auction. A Bid valid for a shorter period is liable to be rejected by the Bank as non-responsive.

2.15.2 In exceptional circumstances, the Bank may solicit the Bidders’ consent to an extension of the period of validity. The request and the responses thereto shall be made in writing. A




33

Bidder is free to refuse the request. However, in such case, the Bank will not forfeit its EMD. However, any extension of validity of Bids will not entitle the Bidder to revise/modify the Bid document.

2.15.3 The Bank reserves the right to call for fresh quotes at any time during the Bid validity period, if considered, necessary.

2.16 Bid integrity

Willful misrepresentation of any fact within the Bid will lead to the cancellation of the contract without prejudice to other actions that the Bank may take. All the submissions, including any accompanying documents, will become property of SBI. The Bidders shall be deemed to license, and grant all rights to BANK, to reproduce the whole or any portion of their equipment/product for the purpose of evaluation, to disclose the contents of submission to other Bidders and to disclose and/ or use the contents of submission as the basis for RFP process.

2.17 Bidding process/Opening of Technical Bids

2.17.1 All the Technical Bids received up to the specified time and date will be opened for initial evaluation on the time and date mentioned in the schedule of events available in Section 2.3 of this document. The Technical Bids will be opened in the presence of representatives of the Bidders who choose to attend the same. However, Bids may be opened even in the absence of representatives of one or more of the Bidders.

2.17.2 In the first stage, only the Technical Bid will be opened and evaluated. Proposals of such Bidders satisfying eligibility criteria and agreeing to comply with all the Terms and conditions specified in the RFP, will be evaluated for technical criteria/specifications/eligibility. Only those Bids complying with Technical Criteria shall become eligible for Commercial Bid opening and further RFP evaluation process.

2.17.3 The Bank will examine the Bids to determine whether they are complete, required formats have been furnished, the documents have been properly signed, EMD for the desired amount and validity period is available and the Bids are generally in order. The Bank may, at its discretion waive any minor non-conformity or irregularity in a Bid which does not constitute a material deviation.

2.17.4 Prior to the detailed evaluation, the Bank will determine the responsiveness of each Bid to the bidding document. For purposes of these clauses, a responsive Bid is one, which conforms to all the terms and conditions of the bidding document in totality, without any deviation.

2.17.5 The Bank’s determination of a Bid’s responsiveness will be based on the contents of the Bid itself, without recourse to extrinsic evidence.

2.17.6 After opening of the technical Bids and preliminary evaluation, some or all the Bidders may be asked to make presentations on all equipment (IT and Non-IT) including hardware / software / services, operating software/ firmware proposed to be offered by them.

2.17.7 If a Bid is not responsive, it will be rejected by the Bank and will not subsequently be made responsive by the Bidder by correction of the non-conformity.

2.18 Evaluation Methodology

Stage 1: Bidders scoring equal to or above 70 marks in Technical Evaluation (TS) will be qualified for Opening of commercial Bid. Stage 2: The bidders whose commercial Bids have been opened post stage 1, will be invited for Reverse Auction. Stage 3: Based on reverse auction process, the lowest Bid for the individual bidders (EC) will be recorded.




34

Stage 4: The LEC will be determined among the lowest commercial bid post reverse auction process. Stage 5: The winning bidder will be selected by using following formula: Total points: (70% x 100 x HTS/TS) + (30% x 100 x LEC/EC) Where, TS stands for Individual Technical Score EC stands for Evaluation Cost received in Commercial Bid, post finalization of reverse auction LEC stands for Lowest Evaluated Cost received in Commercial Bid, post finalization of reverse auction

In deciding the final selection of the SI, the technical quality of the Bid will be given a weightage of 70% on the basis of criteria for evaluation. The price bids of the bidders after the reverse auctioning process will be given a weightage of 30%. The Bid with the lowest cost will be given a financial score of 100 and the financial scores of all other bidders will be pro-rated. The Bids will be ranked in terms of total points scored. Example: if in response to this RFP, three Bids from Bidders A, B & C are received and the technical scores of them are 75, 80 and 90 marks respectively, all the three Bids would be technically suitable. Further, if the quoted price of Bidders A, B & C are Rs.120, 100 & 110 respectively. In the combined evaluation, the process would be as follows: Bidder A: 100 x 0.7 x (90/75) + 100 x 0.3 x (100/120) = 109 Bidder B: 100 x 0.7 x (90/80) + 100 x 0.3 x (100/100) = 108.75 Bidder C: 100 x 0.7 x (90/90) + 100 x 0.3 x (100/110) = 97.27 Bidder A would be considered the TC1 and would be awarded the contract.

2.19 Evaluation of Price Bids and Finalization

2.19.1 The envelope containing the Commercial Bids of only those Bidders, who are short-listed after technical evaluation, would be opened.

2.19.2 All the Bidders who qualify in the evaluation process shall have to participate in the online reverse auction to be conducted by Bank’s authorized SI on behalf of the Bank, details of which are given in Section 2.3 of this RFP document.

2.19.3 Shortlisted Bidders shall be willing to participate in the reverse auction process and must have a valid digital signature certificate. Such Bidders will be trained by Bank’s authorized SI for this purpose. Bidders shall also be willing to abide by the e-business rules for reverse auction framed by the Bank / Authorized SI. The details of e-business rules, processes and procedures will be provided to the short-listed Bidders.

2.19.4 The TC1 Bidder will be selected on the basis of net total of the TC1 (example mentioned in Section 2.18 of Instructions to Bidders above).

2.19.5 The successful Bidder is required to provide price confirmation and price breakup strictly on the lines of Annexure-D within 48 hours of conclusion of the Reverse Auction, failing which Bank may take appropriate action.

2.19.6 Errors, if any, in the price breakup format will be rectified as under:

(a) If there is a discrepancy between the unit price and total price which is obtained by multiplying the unit price with quantity, the unit price shall prevail and the total price shall be corrected unless it is a lower figure. If the Bidder does not accept the correction of errors, the Bid will be rejected.




35

(b) If there is a discrepancy in the unit price quoted in figures and words, the unit price in figures or in words, as the case may be, which corresponds to the total Bid price for the Bid shall be taken as correct.

(c) If the SI has not worked out the total Bid price or the total Bid price does not correspond to the unit price quoted either in words or figures, the unit price quoted in words shall be taken as correct.

(d) The Bidder should quote for the Equipment/Products and /or Services relevant to this Project in this RFP. In case, prices are not quoted by any Bidder for any specific Equipment/Product and / or Service, for the purpose of evaluation, the highest of the prices quoted by other Bidders participating in the bidding process will be reckoned as the notional price for that service, for that Bidder. However, if selected, at the time of award of Contract, the lowest of the price(s) quoted by other Bidders (whose Price Bids are also opened) for that Equipment/Product and / or service will be reckoned. This shall be binding on all the Bidders. However, the Bank reserves the right to reject all such incomplete Bids.

2.20 Contacting the Bank

2.20.1 No Bidder shall contact the Bank on any matter relating to its Bid, from the time of opening of Price Bid to the time, the Contract is awarded.

2.20.2 Any effort by a Bidder to influence the Bank in its decisions on Bid evaluation, Bid comparison or contract award may result in the rejection of the Bidder’s Bid.

2.21 Award Criteria

2.21.1 Bank will notify successful Bidder (TC1) in writing by letter or fax/email that its Bid has been accepted. The Selected Bidder has to return the duplicate copy of the same to the Bank within 7 working days, duly Accepted, Stamped and Signed by Authorized Signatory in token of acceptance.

2.21.2 The successful Bidder will have to submit Non-disclosure Agreement (wherever applicable), Performance Bank Guarantee for the amount and validity as desired in Section 2.3 of Instructions to Bidder and strictly on the lines of format given at Annexure-H of this document together with acceptance of all terms and conditions of RFP.

2.21.3 Copy of board resolution or power of attorney showing that the signatory has been duly authorized to sign the acceptance letter, contract and NDA should be submitted.

2.21.4 The notification of award will constitute the formation of the Contract.

2.21.5 The successful Bidder shall be required to enter into a contract/ SLA with the Bank, within 30 days of award of the tender or within such extended period as may be decided by the Bank.

2.21.6 Until the execution of a formal contract, the Bid document, together with the Bank’s notification of award and the SI’s acceptance thereof, would constitute a binding contract between the Bank and the successful Bidder.

2.21.7 The contract/ agreement will be based on Bidder’s offer document with all its enclosures, modifications arising out of negotiation /clarifications etc. and will include SLA, project plan – phases & milestones and schedule, copies of all necessary documents, licenses, certifications etc.

2.21.8 The Bank reserves the right to stipulate, at the time of finalization of the contract, any other document(s) to be enclosed as a part of the final contract.

2.21.9 Failure of the successful Bidder to comply with the requirements/terms and conditions of this RFP shall constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the EMD and/or PBG.

2.21.10 Upon notification of award to the TC1 Bidder, the Bank will promptly notify the award of contract to the successful Bidder on the Bank’s website. The EMD of each unsuccessful Bidder will be discharged and returned in due course.

2.22 Powers to Vary or Omit Work

2.22.1 No alterations, amendments, omissions, additions, suspensions or variations of the work




36

(hereinafter referred to as variation) under the contract shall be made by the successful Bidder except as directed in writing by Bank. The Bank shall have full powers, subject to the provision herein after contained, from time to time during the execution of the contract, by notice in writing to instruct the successful Bidder to make any variation without prejudice to the contract. The finally selected Bidder shall carry out such variation and be bound by the same conditions as far as applicable as though the said variations occurred in the contract documents. If any, suggested variations would, in the opinion of the finally selected Bidder, if carried out, prevent him from fulfilling any of his obligations under the contract, he shall notify Bank thereof in writing with reasons for holding such opinion and Bank shall instruct the successful Bidder to make such other modified variation without prejudice to the contract. The finally selected Bidder shall carry out such variation and be bound by the same conditions as far as applicable as though the said variations occurred in the contract documents. If the Bank confirms its instructions, the successful Bidder’s obligations shall be modified to such an extent as may be mutually agreed, if such variation is substantial and involves considerable extra cost. Any agreed difference in cost occasioned by such variation shall be added to or deducted from the contract price as the case may be.

2.22.2 In any case in which the successful Bidder has received instructions from the Bank as to the requirements for carrying out the altered or additional substituted work which either then or later on, will in the opinion of the finally selected Bidders, involve a claim for additional payments, such additional payments shall be mutually agreed in line with the terms and conditions of the order.

2.22.3 If any change in the work is likely to result in reduction in cost, the parties shall agree in writing so as to the extent of change in contract price, before the finally selected Bidder(s) proceeds with the change. In all the above cases, in the event of a disagreement as to the reasonableness of the said sum, the decision of the Bank shall prevail.

2.23 No Waiver of Bank Rights or Successful Bidder’s Liability

Neither any sign-off, nor any payment by the Bank for acceptance of the whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the Bank shall affect or prejudice the rights of Bank against the finally selected Bidder(s), or relieve the finally selected Bidder(s) of his obligations for the due performance of the contract, or be interpreted as approval of the work done, or create liability in the Bank to pay for alterations/ amendments/ variations, or discharge the liability of the successful Bidder(s) for the payment of damages whether due, ascertained, or certified or not or any sum against the payment of which he is bound to indemnify the Bank nor shall any such certificate nor the acceptance by him of any such amount paid on account or otherwise affect or prejudice the rights of the successful Bidder against Bank.

2.24 Change in Orders

2.24.1 The Bank may, at any time, by a written order given to the SI, make changes within the general scope of the Contract in any one or more of the following:

(a) Method of shipment or packing; (b) Place of delivery; (c) Quantities to be supplied subject to 25% above or below the originally declared quantities.

2.24.2 If any such change causes an increase or decrease in the cost of, or the time required for the SI’s performance of any provisions under the Contract, an equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or delivery schedule, or both, and the Contract shall accordingly be amended. Any claims by the SI for adjustment under this clause must be asserted within 15 days from the date of SI’s receipt of Bank’s change order.

2.25 Contract Amendments

No variation in or modification of the terms of the Contract shall be made, except by written amendment, signed by the parties.

2.26 Bank’s Right to Accept Any Bid and to reject any or All Bids

The Bank reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid in part or in full or to cancel the bidding




37

process and reject all Bids at any time prior to contract award, without incurring any liability to the affected Bidder or Bidders or any obligation to inform the affected Bidder or Bidders of the grounds for the Bank’s action.

2.27 Documentary Evidence Establishing Bidder’s Eligibility and Qualifications

Along with the Technical bid the Bidder needs to submit the undertaking of authenticity on the lines of Annexure-E along with documentary evidence of their eligibility/qualifications to perform the Contract to the Bank’s satisfaction that:

i. In case of a Bidder offering to supply Equipment/Products and/or services mentioned in the

Scope of Work, the Bidders need to provide the evidence that Bidder has been duly authorized by the OEM strictly on the lines of authorization letter Annexure-F.

ii. Adequate, specialized expertise are available with the Bidder to ensure that the services are

responsive and the Bidder will assume total responsibility for the fault-free operation of the product proposed and maintenance thereof during the support (warranty/annual maintenance contract, if desired) period.

2.28 Performance Bank Guarantee

2.28.1 Performance Bank Guarantee [PBG] of the amount with validity period in this RFP strictly on the format at Annexure-H is to be submitted by the finally selected Bidder. The PBG has to be issued by a Scheduled Commercial Bank other than BANK and needs to be submitted within the specified time of receipt of formal communication from the Bank about their Bid finally selected. Purchase Order will be released only after receipt of the Performance Bank Guarantee. In case, BANK is the sole Banker for the Bidder, a Letter of Comfort from BANK may be accepted.

2.28.2 The PBG is required to protect the interest of the Bank against delay in supply/installation and or the risk of unsuccessful implementation of the project, or performance of the material or services sold, which may warrant invoking of PBG. In case any act of the supplier results in imposition of Liquidated Damages then also the Bank reserves the right to invoke the PBG.

2.29 Country of Origin / Eligibility of Goods & Services

2.29.1 All Equipment and components thereof to be supplied under the Contract shall have their origin in eligible source countries, as per the prevailing Import Trade Control Regulations in India.

2.29.2 For purposes of this clause, “origin” means the place where the goods are mined, grown, or manufactured or produced, or the place from which the related Equipment/Product is supplied. Goods are produced when, through manufacturing, processing or substantial and major assembly of components, a commercially-recognized Equipment/Product results that is substantially different in basic characteristics or in purpose or utility from its components.

2.30 Delivery, Installation, Commissioning & Documentation

2.30.1 The SI shall provide such packing of the equipment/products as is required to prevent its damage or deterioration during transit thereof to the location given by the Bank. The packing shall be sufficient to withstand, without limitation, rough handling during transit and exposure to extreme temperature, salt and precipitation during transit and open storage. Size and weight of packing cases shall take into consideration, where appropriate, the remoteness of the Equipment/Products final destination and the absence of heavy handling facilities at all transit points.

2.30.2 Delivery, installation and commissioning of the equipment shall be made by the SI in accordance with the system approved / ordered and within the time schedule given in the Scope of Work given in Annexure-Q of this document. The delivery will be deemed complete when the equipment/ components/ associated software/firmware are received in good working condition at the designated locations, mentioned in Section 2.3 of this RFP.




38

2.30.3 The installation will be deemed to be completed, when the equipment/product including all the, accessories/components, firmware/system software, and other associated software have been supplied, installed and operationalized as per the technical specifications and all the features as per the technical specifications are demonstrated and implemented as required, on the systems, to the satisfaction of the Bank. The Bidder has to resolve any problem faced during installation and operationalization.

2.30.4 In addition, SI will supply all associated documentation relating to all the equipment, cables etc. The equipment/product(s) are considered accepted (commissioned and operationalized) after signing the Acceptance Test Plan (ATP) document jointly by the representative of the Bank and the engineer from the SI on the lines of format/certificate on the lines of Annexure-I of this RFP. The component level checking for individual item may be included during the acceptance test. The ‘Acceptance Test Plan’ document shall be deemed to form a part of the Agreement, to be signed between the SI and the BANK. On the evaluation of the Acceptance Test results, if required, in view of the performance of the equipment/services (including hardware equipment/ components/ software), as observed during the Acceptance Test, the Bidder shall take remedial measures including upgradation of any of the components thereunder, including replacement thereof, at no additional cost to the Bank within a fortnight from the date of notification of the same to the SI. The SI should ensure that the product meets the requirements of the Bank as envisaged in the RFP.

2.30.5 The details of the documents to be furnished by the SI are specified here under:-

(a) 2 copies of SI’s Invoice showing contract number, products description, quantity, unit price and total amount.

(b) Delivery Note or acknowledgement of receipt of products from the Consignee or in case of products from abroad, original and two copies of the negotiable clean Airway Bill.

(c) 2 copies of packing list identifying contents of each of the package. (d) Insurance Certificate. (e) Manufacturer’s / SI’s warranty certificate. (f) Import Duty paid etc.

2.30.6 The above documents shall be received by the Bank before arrival of products (except where it is handed over to the Consignee with all documents). If these documents are not received, the SI will be responsible for any consequent expenses.

2.30.7 Penalties as specified in Annexure-R will be applicable for the any kind of default in delay in Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, commissioning, Operation, maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data centre as expected in Scope of Work which will be deducted at the time of making payment(s).

2.30.8 In addition to the penalty on delayed supplies, Bank also reserves the right to cancel the Purchase Order and forfeit the EMD. In the event of such cancellation, the SI is not entitled to any compensation, whatsoever.

2.30.9 For all the project equipment (IT and Non-IT) including but not limited to Hardware / software / services ordered for, the following will apply:-

(a) The SI shall supply standard software/firmware package published by third parties in or out of India in their original publisher-packed status only, and should have procured the same either directly from the publishers or from the publisher's sole authorized representatives only.

(b) The SI shall provide complete and legal documentation of all sub systems, licensed operating systems, licensed system software/firmware, licensed utility software and other licensed software. The SI shall also provide licensed software for all software/firmware whether developed by them or acquired from others.

(c) In case the SI is providing software/firmware which is not its proprietary software then the SI must submit evidence in the form of agreement he has entered into with the software/firmware SI which includes support from the software/firmware SI for the proposed software for the entire period required by the Bank.

(d) The ownership of the software license shall be that of the Bank from the date of delivery of the same. In other words, wherever the ownership of the licenses is indicated, the name “State Bank of India” must appear to indicate that the Bank is the perpetual owner of the




39

software/license. Evidence to this effect must be submitted before the payment can be released.

2.31 Services

2.31.1 All professional services necessary to successfully implement the proposed ‘Project’ will be part of the RFP/contract. These services include, but are not limited to, Project Management, Training, Deployment methodologies etc.

2.31.2 The Bidder should also submit as part of technical Bid an overview of Project Management approach of the proposed project.

2.31.3 Bidder should ensure that SI’s key personnel with relevant skill-sets are available to the Bank.

2.31.4 Bidder should ensure that the quality of methodologies for delivering the project, adhere to quality standards/timelines stipulated therefor.

2.31.5 Bidder shall be willing to transfer skills to relevant personnel from the Bank, by means of training and documentation.

2.31.6 Bidder shall provide and implement patches/ upgrades/ updates for all equipment/products (Hardware/ Software/ Firmware / OS) as and when released by the SI/ OEM or as per requirements of the Bank. Bidder should bring to notice of the Bank all releases/ version changes.

2.31.7 Bidder shall obtain a written permission from the Bank before applying any of the patches/ upgrades/ updates. Bidder has to support older versions of the OS/firmware/Middleware etc. in case the Bank chooses not to upgrade to latest version.

2.31.8 Bidder shall provide maintenance support for equipment (IT and Non-IT) including but not limited to Hardware / software / Firmware/ Middleware/ services over the entire period of contract.

2.31.9 All equipment/product updates, upgrades & patches shall be provided by the Bidder/ SI free of cost during warranty and AMC/ ATS/ S&S period.

2.31.10 Bidder shall provide legally valid firmware/software solution. The detailed information on license count and type of license should also be provided to the Bank.

2.31.11 The ownership of all Equipment (IT and Non-IT) including but not limited to Hardware / software / Firmware/ Middleware shall be that of the Bank from the date of delivery of the same to the Bank. In other words, wherever the ownership of the license/hardware is indicated, the name “State Bank of India” must appear to indicate that the Bank is the perpetual owner of the all equipment etc. Evidence in this regard must be submitted before the payment is released.

2.31.12 The Bidder shall keep the Bank explicitly informed the end of support dates on related equipment/ products and should ensure support during warranty and AMC/ATS/S&S.

2.32 Warranty and Annual Maintenance Contract

2.32.1 The selected Bidder shall support the Equipment/product and its associated items/components including OS/firmware during the period of warranty and AMC (if included in purchase order) as specified in Scope of work in this RFP from the date of acceptance of the Equipment by State Bank of India.

2.32.2 During the warranty and AMC period, the Bidder will have to undertake comprehensive support of all equipment (hardware/components/ operating software/firmware) supplied by the Bidder and all new versions releases upgrades and updates for all standard software to be supplied to the Bank at no additional cost to the Bank. During the support period, the Bidder shall maintain all the Equipment/product to comply with parameters defined for acceptance criteria and the Bidder shall be responsible for all costs relating to labour, spares, maintenance (preventive and corrective), compliance of security requirements and transport charges from and to the Site (s) in connection with the repair/ replacement of the




40

equipment (hardware/ equipment/ components/ software or any component/ part thereunder), which, under normal and proper use and maintenance thereof, proves defective in design, material or workmanship or fails to conform to the specifications, as specified.

2.32.3 During the support period (warranty and AMC), the SI shall ensure that services of professionally qualified personnel are available for providing comprehensive on-site maintenance of the equipment/Product and its components as per the Bank’s requirements. Comprehensive maintenance shall include, among other things, day to day maintenance of the system as per the Bank’s policy, reloading of firmware/software, compliance to security requirements, etc. when required or in the event of system crash/malfunctioning, arranging and configuring facility as per the requirements of the Bank, fine tuning, system monitoring, log maintenance, etc. The Bidder shall provide services of an expert engineer at BANK GITC, Belapur or at other locations wherever required, whenever it is essential. In case of failure of equipment (hardware, system software or any of its components), the Bidder shall ensure that all equipment are made operational to the full satisfaction of the Bank within the given timelines. The selected Bidder shall provide preventive maintenance schedules as per periodicity, which shall be specified in advance.

2.32.4 On site comprehensive warranty for the solution would include free replacement of spares, parts, kits, resolution of problem, if any, in solution.

2.32.5 Warranty/ AMC for the system software/ off-the shelf software will be provided to the Bank as per the general conditions of sale of such software.

2.32.6 Support (Warranty/ AMC) would be on-site and comprehensive in nature and must have back to back support from the OEM/SI. Undertaking on the lines of Annexure-F of this RFP document is required to be submitted by the SI, duly endorsed by the OEM that in case SI fails to provide services then OEM shall provide the same at no extra cost, to the satisfaction of the Bank. The SI will warrant equipment/products against defect arising out of faulty design, materials, etc. during the specified support period. The SI will provide support for operating systems and other pre-installed software components/system software during the specified period of the equipment on which these software and operating system will be installed. The SI shall repair or replace worn out or defective parts including all plastic parts of the equipment at his own cost including the cost of transport.

2.32.7 In the event of system break down or failures at any stage, protection available, which would include the following, shall be specified.

a. Diagnostics for identification of systems failures b. Protection of data/ configuration c. Recovery/ restart facility d. Backup of system software/ configuration

2.32.8 Prompt support shall be made available as desired in this RFP during the support period at the locations as and when required by the Bank.

2.32.9 Bidder support staff should be well trained to effectively handle queries raised by the customers/employees of the Bank.

2.32.10 Updated escalation matrix shall be made available to the Bank once in each quarter and each time the matrix gets changed.

2.33 Compliance with IT and IS Security Policy

The SI shall have to comply with Bank’s IT Policy & IS Security Policy in all areas relevant to the RFP, details of which will be shared with the finally selected Bidder. Some of the key areas are as under:

i. Responsibilities for data and application privacy and confidentiality ii. Responsibilities on system and software access control and administration iii. Custodial responsibilities for data, software, equipment(IT and Non-IT) and other assets of the Bank

being managed by or assigned to the SI iv. Physical Security of the facilities




41

v. Physical and logical separation from other customers of the SI vi. Incident response and reporting procedures vii. Password Policy of the Bank viii. Data Encryption/Protection requirements of the Bank. ix. In general, confidentiality, integrity and availability must be ensured.

2.34 Penalty/SLA conditions

As mentioned in Annexure-R of this RFP.

2.35 Right to Verification

The Bank reserves the right to verify any or all of the statements made by the Bidder in the tender document and to inspect the Bidder’s facility, if necessary, to establish to its satisfaction about the Bidder’s capacity/capabilities to perform the job.

2.36 Purchase Price

2.36.1 Payment will be made in Indian Rupees (INR) only.

2.36.2 Total cost of Project with support (warranty and AMC) would be the Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) and has to be quoted in commercial Bid.

2.36.3 Bidders should ensure that exchange rate fluctuations, changes in import duty/other taxes should not affect the rupee value of commercial Bid over the validity period defined in this RFP.

2.36.4 The order will be placed for total Project Cost including but not limited to Equipment/warranty, AMC/ATS/S&S etc. Bank may also issue a separate order for AMC after expiry of the warranty period.

2.36.5 The applicable TDS will be deducted at the time of payment of invoices.

2.36.6 Terms of payment are given in Annexure-S of this RFP document.

2.36.7 Prices payable to the SI as stated in the Contract shall be firm and not subject to adjustment during performance of the Contract, irrespective of reasons whatsoever, including exchange rate fluctuations, any upward revision in duties, charges, etc.

2.36.8 The Bidder will pass on to the Bank, all fiscal benefits arising out of reductions, if any, in Government levies GST and any other applicable taxes or the benefit of discounts if any announced in respect of the cost of the items for which orders have been placed during that period.

2.36.9 The Bank reserves the right to re-negotiate the prices in the event of change in the international market prices for all Equipment.

2.37 Inspection and Quality Control Tests

2.37.1 The Bank reserves the right to carry out pre-shipment factory / godown inspection of equipment to be supplied for this Project by a team of Bank officials, or deployed experts/consultants or additional resources. BANK can demand a site visit of any prevalent/similar Data Centre on a representative basis, built by the Bidder.

2.37.2 The Inspection and Quality Control tests before evaluation, prior to shipment of goods and at the time of final acceptance would be as follows:

a) Inspection/Pre-shipment Acceptance Testing of Goods as per quality control formats including functional testing, burn-in tests and mains fluctuation tests at full load, facilities etc., as per the standards / specifications and may be done at factory site of the supplier before dispatch of goods, by the Bank / Bank’s Consultants / Testing Agency.

b) The SI shall intimate the Bank before dispatching the goods to various locations/offices for conduct of pre-shipment testing. Successful conduct and conclusion of pre-dispatch inspection shall be the sole responsibility of the supplier;




42

c) Provided that the Bank may, at its sole discretion, waive inspection of goods having regard to the value of the order and/or the nature of the goods and/or any other such basis as may be decided at the sole discretion of the Bank meriting waiver of such inspection of goods.

d) In the event of the Equipment failing to pass the acceptance test, as per the specifications given, a period not exceeding two weeks will be given to rectify the defects and clear the acceptance test, failing which, the Bank reserves the right to cancel the Purchase Order.

e) The inspection and quality control tests may also be conducted at the point of delivery and / or at the Goods’ final destination. Reasonable facilities and assistance, including access to drawings and production data, shall be furnished to the inspectors, at no charge to the Bank. In case of failure by the SI to provide necessary facility / equipment at his premises, all the cost of such inspection like travel, boarding, lodging & other incidental expenses of the Bank’s representatives to be borne by the SI.

f) Nothing stated herein above shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under this Contract.

2.37.3 The Bank’s right to inspect, test and where necessary reject the Equipment after the Equipment arrival at the destination shall in no way be limited or waived by reason of the Equipment having previously being inspected, tested and passed by the Bank or its representative prior to the Equipment shipment from the place of origin by the Bank or its representative prior to the installation and commissioning.

2.37.4 Nothing stated hereinabove shall in any way release the SI from any warranty or other obligations under this contract.

2.38 Right to Audit

2.38.1 The selected Bidder has to get itself annually audited by internal/ external empanelled

Auditors appointed by the Bank/ inspecting official from the Reserve Bank of India or any regulatory authority, covering the risk parameters finalized by the Bank/ such auditors in the areas of Equipment/products and services etc. provided to the Bank and the SI are required to submit such certification by such Auditors to the Bank. The SI and or his / their outsourced agents / sub–contractors (if allowed by the Bank) shall facilitate the same The Bank can make its expert assessment on the efficiency and effectiveness of the security, control, risk management, governance system and process created by the SI. The SI shall, whenever required by the Auditors, furnish all relevant information, records/data to them. All costs for such audit shall be borne by the Bank.

2.38.2 Where any deficiency has been observed during audit of the SI on the risk parameters finalized by the Bank or in the certification submitted by the Auditors, the SI shall correct/resolve the same at the earliest and shall provide all necessary documents related to resolution thereof and the auditor shall further certify in respect of resolution of the deficiencies. The resolution provided by the SI shall require to be certified by the Auditors covering the respective risk parameters against which such deficiencies have been observed.

2.38.3 SI shall, whenever required by the Bank, furnish all relevant information, records/data to such auditors and/or inspecting officials of the Bank/Reserve Bank of India and or any regulatory authority. The Bank reserves the right to call and/or retain for any relevant material information /reports including audit or review reports undertaken by the SI (e.g., financial, internal control and security reviews) and findings made on Selected Bidder in conjunction with the services provided to the Bank.

2.39 Insurance and Indemnification

2.39.1 SI shall, at its own expense, arrange appropriate comprehensive insurance to cover all risks assumed by the SI under this Contract in respect of its personnel deputed under this Contract as well as SI's equipment, tools and any other belongings of the SI or their personnel during the entire period of their engagement in connection with this Contract. BANK will have no liability on this account. Such insurance will include, without limitation;

a. public liability insurance in respect of claims for death or injury to persons and loss or damage to property;




43

b. Workmen’s compensation insurance policy.

2.39.2 Asset insurance, on all risk basis, in respect of all Equipment procured for setting up of Tier IV data centre until such time as such Equipment has passed acceptance tests in respect thereof.

2.39.3 Notwithstanding the above, SI agrees to keep the Bank indemnified and hold harmless against all claims, actions, loss, damages, costs, expenses, charges, including legal expenses (Attorney, Advocates fees included) which the Bank may suffer or incur on account of any deficiency in Services rendered by SI or breach of confidentiality obligations by SI or any acts of commission / omission on the part of employees, agents, representatives or sub-contractors/ OEM of SI. SI agrees to make good the loss suffered by the Bank.

2.39.4 Certificate of Insurance: Before commencing the project, SI shall furnish BANK with certificates of insurance indicating:

a. Kinds and amounts of insurance as required

b. Effective and expiry dates of policies

c. BANK shall be given thirty (30) days written advance notice of any change in the policy

d. Waiver of subrogation endorsement shall be attached to all policies and

e. The territorial limits of all policies.

If any of the above policy expire or/ are cancelled during the term of this Contract and SI fails for any reason to renew such policies, then BANK shall have right to replace or renew such policies and the charges incurred by the Bank shall be recovered from SI. Should the relapse in any insurance required to be carried out by SI hereunder for any reason; losses resulting there from shall be to the sole account of the SI. Such insurance shall be affected within Insurance Company incorporated and registered in India or jointly with a company of International repute and an Insurance Company incorporated and registered in India.

2.40 Subcontracting

2.40.1 As per scope of the RFP, subcontracting is permitted. The Bidder(s) are required to submit details of sub-contractor(s), Scope of Work proposed to be sub-contracted along with technical Bid. If the Bidder subsequently wishes to sub-contract the Scope of Work, it will have to obtain specific written permission from the Bank before contracting any work to sub-contractor. Bank at its own discretion may permit or deny the same.

2.40.2 In case of sub-contracting, all agreements will be done by BANK with the System Integrator (SI) for the entire project and subsequently the System Integrator (SI) will be subjected to all Penalties and SLA for the project. In-case of any delays by sub-contractors or OEMS, the System integrator will be held liable and responsible for all such delays and corresponding SLA’s will be applicable as per Annexure-R.

2.40.3 Notwithstanding approval of the Bank for subcontracting, the contracting SI will be responsible for providing services such as Project Management, Designing, Integration and Commissioning of Data Centre to the Bank. The contracting SI is also responsible for ensuring that the sub-contractor comply with all quality and security requirements of the contract and the Bank can obtain independent audit report for the same. In such a case, the Bidder shall provide subcontracting details to the Bank and if required, Bank may evaluate the same.

2.41 Validity of Agreement

The Agreement/ SLA will be valid for the period up to end of support period including AMC, if opted. The Bank reserves the right to terminate the Agreement as per the terms of RFP.

2.42 Limitation of liability

2.42.1 For breach of any obligation mentioned in this RFP, subject to obligations mentioned in this clause, in no event SI shall be liable for damages to the Bank arising under or in connection with this Agreement for an amount exceeding the total Cost of the Project. SI will ensure Bank’s data confidentiality and shall be responsible for liability arising in case of breach of




44

any kind of security and/or leakage of confidential customer/Bank’s related information to the extent of loss so caused.

2.42.2 The limitations set forth herein shall not apply with respect to:

a) claims that are the subject of indemnification pursuant to infringement of Intellectual Property Rights, b) damage(s) occasioned by the gross negligence, fraud or willful misconduct of SI, c) damage(s) occasioned by SI for breach of Confidentiality Obligations, d) Regulatory or statutory fines imposed by a Government or Regulatory agency for non-

compliance of statutory or regulatory guidelines applicable to the Bank, provided such guidelines were brought to the notice of SI.

2.43 Confidentiality

2.43.1 Bidder acknowledges and agrees that all tangible and intangible information obtained, developed or disclosed including all documents, contract, purchase order to be issued, data papers and statements and trade secret of the Bank relating to its business practices and their competitive position in the market place provided to the selected Bidder by the Bank in connection with the performance of obligations of Bidder under the purchase order to be issued, in part or complete shall be considered to be confidential and proprietary information (“Confidential Information”) and shall not be disclosed to any third party/published without the written approval of the Bank.

2.43.2 The Confidential Information will be safeguarded and Bidder will take all the necessary action to protect it against misuse, loss, destruction, alterations or deletions thereof. In the event of a breach or threatened breach by Bidder of this section, monetary damages may not be an adequate remedy; therefore, Bank shall be entitled to injunctive relief to restrain Bidder from any such breach, threatened or actual.

2.43.3 Any document, other than the Contract itself, shall remain the property of the Bank and shall be returned (in all copies) to the Bank on completion of the SI’s performance under the Contract, if so required by the Bank.

2.44 Delay in the SI’s Performance

2.44.1 Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer of Tier IV Data Centre shall be made by the SI within the timelines prescribed in Annexure-R of this document.

2.44.2 If at any time during performance of the Contract, the SI should encounter conditions impeding timely delivery of the Project and performance of Services, the SI shall promptly notify the Bank in writing of the fact of the delay, it’s likely duration and cause(s). As soon as practicable after receipt of the SI’s notice, the Bank shall evaluate the situation and may, at its discretion, extend the SIs’ time for performance, in which case, the extension shall be ratified by the parties by amendment of the Contract.

2.44.3 Any delay in performing the obligation/ defect in performance by the supplier may result in imposition of penalty, liquidated damages, invocation of Performance Bank Guarantee and/or termination of contract (as laid down elsewhere in this RFP document).

2.45 SI’s obligations

2.45.1 The SI is responsible for and obliged to conduct all contracted activities in accordance with the contract using state-of-the-art methods and economic principles and exercising all means available to achieve the performance specified in the Contract.

2.45.2 The SI will be responsible for arranging and procuring all relevant approvals / NOCs / permissions/ licenses/ road permits etc. (including renewals) at its own cost. The Bank would only provide necessary letters for enabling procurement of the same. All the expenses related to approvals/ licenses/ Permissions/ NOCs etc., should be included by the Bidder in the respective heads/BOM and in the Total Project cost.

2.45.3 The SI is obliged to work closely with the Bank’s staff, act within its own authority and abide by directives issued by the Bank from time to time and complete implementation activities.




45

2.45.4 The SI will abide by the job safety measures prevalent in India and will free the Bank from all demands or responsibilities arising from accidents or loss of life, the cause of which is the SI’s negligence. The SI will pay all indemnities arising from such incidents and will not hold the Bank responsible or obligated.

2.45.5 The SI is responsible for managing the activities of its personnel and will hold itself responsible for any misdemeanors.

2.45.6 SI shall provide necessary training from the OEM to the designated BANK officials on the configuration, operation/ functionalities, maintenance, support & administration for all equipment and components, installation, troubleshooting processes of the proposed solution.

2.45.7 The SI shall treat as confidential all data and information about BANK, obtained in the process of executing its responsibilities, in strict confidence and will not reveal such information to any other party without prior written approval of the Bank as explained under ‘Non-Disclosure Agreement’ in Annexure-J of this document.

2.46 Technical Documentation

2.46.1 The SI shall deliver all documents pertaining to Data Centre Building, electrical and Non-IT Equipment (including any third party software) before the Data Centre becomes operational, which includes, user manuals, installation manuals, operation manuals, design documents, process documents, technical manuals, functional specification, software requirement specification, on-line tutorials/ CBTs, system configuration documents, system/database administrative documents, debugging/diagnostics documents, test procedures etc.

2.46.2 The SI shall also provide documents related to Review Records/ Test Bug Reports/ Root Cause Analysis Report, list of all Product components, list of all dependent/external modules and list of all documents relating to traceability of the Product as and when applicable.

2.46.3 The SI should also provide Monthly/Quarterly MIS reports as per requirements of the Bank. Any level/ version changes and/or clarification or corrections or modifications in the above mentioned documentation should be supplied by the SI to the Bank, free of cost in timely manner. The SI shall develop customized documentation as per Bank’s requirement, if desired by the Bank.

2.47 Patent Rights/Intellectual Property Rights

2.47.1 For any licensed software/firmware used by the finally selected SI for performing services, the SI shall have the right as well as the right to license for the outsourced services. The SI shall, if applicable, furnish a photocopy of the Agreement with their Principals/OEM in respect of ‘Equipment/Product’ and services offered. Any license or IPR violation on the part of SI should not put the Bank at risk. The Bank reserves the right to audit the license usage of the SI.

2.47.2 The SI shall, at its own expenses without any limitation, defend, indemnify and hold the Bank harmless against all third party claims or infringements of intellectual Property Rights including patent, trademark, copyright, trade secret or industrial design rights arising from use of the Equipment or any part thereof in India or abroad. In case of violation/ infringement of patent/ trademark/ copyright/ trade secrete or industrial design, the supplier shall after due inspection and testing get the solution redesigned for the Bank, at no extra cost.

2.47.3 The SI shall expeditiously extinguish any such claims and shall have full rights to defend itself there from. If the Bank is required to pay compensation to a third party resulting from such infringement(s), the SI shall be fully responsible therefore, including all expenses and court and legal fees.

2.47.4 The Bank will give notice to the SI of any such claim without delay, provide reasonable assistance to the SI in disposing of the claim, and shall at no time admit to any liability for or express any intent to settle the claim.

2.47.5 The SI shall grant the Bank a fully paid-up, irrevocable, non-exclusive, unlimited, perpetual license throughout the territory of India or abroad to access, replicate and use software provided by the SI, including all inventions, designs and marks embodied therein perpetually.




46

2.47.6 The SI agrees that the Bank owns the entire right, title and interest to any inventions, designs, discoveries, writings and works of authorship, including all intellectual property rights, copyrights. Any work made under the Contract entered pursuant to this RFP shall be deemed to be ‘work made for hire’ under any Indian/U.S. or any other applicable copyright laws. However, any intellectual property rights owned by SI or its OEM prior to the execution date of Contract (referred to as “pre-existing IPR”) shall belong to SI or OEM as the case may be.

2.48 Liquidated Damages

If the SI fails to deliver the Project or any of the Equipment/Products or perform the services within the stipulated time schedule, as specified in the Contract, as desired in this RFP/ Contract, the Bank may, without prejudice to its other remedies under the Contract, and unless otherwise extension of time is agreed upon without the application of Liquidated Damages, deduct from the Contract Price, as liquidated damages mentioned in Section 2.3 (Schedule of Event). Once the maximum deduction is reached, the Bank may consider termination of the Contract.

2.49 Conflict of Interest

2.49.1 Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest (the “Conflict of Interest”) that affects the bidding process. Any Bidder found to have a Conflict of Interest shall be disqualified. In the event of disqualification, the Bank shall be entitled to forfeit and appropriate the Bid Security and/or Performance Security (Performance Bank Guarantee), as the case may be, as mutually agreed upon genuine estimated loss and damage likely to be suffered and incurred by the Bank and not by way of penalty for, inter alia, the time, cost and effort of the Bank, including consideration of such Bidder’s proposal (the “Damages”), without prejudice to any other right or remedy that may be available to the Bank under the bidding documents and/ or the Concession Agreement or otherwise. Without limiting the generality of the above, a Bidder shall be deemed to have a Conflict of Interest affecting the bidding process, if:

2.49.2 the Bidder, its Member or Associate (or any constituent thereof) and any other Bidder, its Member or any Associate thereof (or any constituent thereof) have common controlling shareholders or other ownership interest; provided that this disqualification shall not apply in cases where the direct or indirect shareholding of a Bidder, its Member or an Associate thereof (or any shareholder thereof having a shareholding of more than 5% (five per cent) of the paid up and subscribed share capital of such Bidder, Member or Associate, as the case may be) in the other Bidder, its Member or Associate, has less than 5% (five per cent) of the subscribed and paid up equity share capital thereof; provided further that this disqualification shall not apply to any ownership by a bank, insurance company, pension fund or a public financial institution referred to in section 4A of the Companies Act, 1956. For the purposes of this Clause, indirect shareholding held through one or more intermediate persons shall be computed as follows:

a. where any intermediary is controlled by a person through management control or otherwise, the entire shareholding held by such controlled intermediary in any other person (the “Subject Person”) shall be taken into account for computing the shareholding of such controlling person in the Subject Person; and

b. subject always to sub-clause (i) above, where a person does not exercise control over an intermediary, which has shareholding in the Subject Person, the computation of indirect shareholding of such person in the Subject Person shall be undertaken on a proportionate basis; provided, however, that no such shareholding shall be reckoned under this sub-clause if the shareholding of such person in the intermediary is less than 26% of the subscribed and paid up equity shareholding of such intermediary; or

c. a constituent of such Bidder is also a constituent of another Bidder; or d. such Bidder, its Member or any Associate thereof receives or has received any direct or

indirect subsidy, grant, concessional loan or subordinated debt from any other Bidder, its Member or Associate, or has provided any such subsidy, grant, concessional loan or subordinated debt to any other Bidder, its Member or any Associate thereof; or

e. such Bidder has the same legal representative for purposes of this Bid as any other Bidder; or




47

f. such Bidder, or any Associate thereof, has a relationship with another Bidder, or any Associate thereof, directly or through common third party/ parties, that puts either or both of them in a position to have access to each other’s information about, or to influence the Bid of either or each other; or

g. Such Bidder or any of its affiliates thereof has participated as a consultant to the Bank in the preparation of any documents, design or technical specifications of the Project.

2.50 Fraud & Corrupt Practices

2.50.1 The Bidder and their respective officers, employees, agents and advisers shall observe the highest standard of ethics during the bidding process. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the Bank shall reject an Application without being liable in any manner whatsoever to the Bidder if it determines that the Bidder has, directly or indirectly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt/fraudulent/coercive/undesirable or restrictive practices in the bidding process.

2.50.2 Without prejudice to the rights of the Bank under Clause 48(i) hereinabove, if a Bidder is found by the Bank to have directly or indirectly or through an agent, engaged or indulged in any corrupt/fraudulent/coercive/undesirable or restrictive practices during the bidding process, such Bidder shall not be eligible to participate in any EOI/RFP issued by the Bank during a period of 2 (two) years from the date if such Bidder is found by the Bank to have directly or indirectly or through an agent, engaged or indulged in any corrupt/ fraudulent/ coercive/ undesirable or restrictive practices, as the case may be.

2.50.3 For the purposes of this Clause , the following terms shall have the meaning hereinafter, respectively assigned to them:

a. “Corrupt practice” means (i) the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value to influence the actions of any person connected with the bidding process (for avoidance of doubt, offering of employment to or employing or engaging in any manner whatsoever, directly or indirectly, any official of the Bank who is or has been associated in any manner, directly or indirectly with the bidding process or the Letter of Authority or has dealt with matters concerning the Concession Agreement or arising there from, before or after the execution thereof, at any time prior to the expiry of one year from the date such official resigns or retires from or otherwise ceases to be in the service of the Bank, shall be deemed to constitute influencing the actions of a person connected with the bidding process); or (ii) engaging in any manner whatsoever, whether during the bidding process or after the issue of the Letter of Authority or after the execution of the Agreement, as the case may be, any person in respect of any matter relating to the Project or the Letter of Authority or the Agreement, who at any time has been or is a legal, financial or technical adviser of the Bank in relation to any matter concerning the Project;

b. “Fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation or omission of facts or suppression of facts or disclosure of incomplete facts, in order to influence the bidding process

c. “Coercive practice” means impairing or harming or threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any person or property to influence any person’s participation or action in the bidding process;

d. “Undesirable practice” means (i) establishing contact with any person connected with or employed or engaged by the Bank with the objective of canvassing, lobbying or in any manner influencing or attempting to influence the bidding process; or (ii) having a Conflict of Interest; and

e. “Restrictive practice” means forming a cartel or arriving at any understanding or arrangement among Bidders with the objective of restricting or manipulating a full and fair competition in the Bidding Process.

2.51 Termination for Default

2.51.1 The Bank, without prejudice to any other remedy for breach of Contract, by a written notice of not less than 30 (thirty) days sent to the SI, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part:

a. If the SI fails to deliver the project or any of the Equipment and Services within the period(s) specified in the Contract, or within any extension thereof granted by the Bank; or




48

b. If the SI fails to perform any other obligation(s) under the contract; or c. Laxity in adherence to standards laid down by the Bank; or d. Discrepancies/deviations in the agreed processes and/or Equipment/Products; or e. Violations of terms and conditions stipulated in this RFP.

2.51.2 In the event the Bank terminates the Contract in whole or in part for the breaches attributable to the SI, the Bank may procure, upon such terms and in such manner as it deems appropriate, Equipment/Products and Services similar to those undelivered, and the SI shall be liable to the Bank for any increase in cost for such similar Equipment/Products and/or Services. However, the SI shall continue performance of the Contract to the extent not terminated.

2.51.3 If the contract is terminated under any termination clause, the SI shall handover all documents/ executable/ Bank’s data or any other relevant information to the Bank in timely manner and in proper format as per scope of this RFP and shall also support the orderly transition to another SI or to the Bank.

2.51.4 During the transition, the SI shall also support the Bank on technical queries/support on process implementation or in case of software provision for future upgrades.

2.51.5 The Bank’s right to terminate the Contract will be in addition to the penalties / liquidated damages and other actions as deemed fit.

2.51.6 In the event of failure of SI to render the Services or in the event of termination of Contract or expiry of term or otherwise, without prejudice to any other right, the Bank at its sole discretion may make alternate arrangement for getting the Services contracted with another SI. In such case, the Bank shall give prior notice to the existing SI. The existing SI shall continue to provide services as per the terms of Contract until a ‘New SI’ completely takes over the work. During the transition phase, the existing SI shall render all reasonable assistance to the new SI within such period prescribed by the Bank, at no additional cost to the Bank, for ensuring smooth switch over and continuity of services. If existing SI is breach of this obligation, it shall be liable for paying a penalty of as provided in Part-II, (Schedule of Events, Sr. No 20) on demand to the Bank, which may be settled from the payment of invoices or Performance Bank Guarantee for the contracted period or by invocation of Performance Bank Guarantee. The Bank and SI shall also enter into a Transition Plan as mentioned in Annexure-M

2.52 Force Majeure

2.52.1 Notwithstanding the provisions of terms and conditions contained in this RFP, the SI shall not be liable for forfeiture of its performance security, liquidated damages, or termination for default, if any, and to the extent that the delay in performance or other failure to perform its obligations under the Contract is the result of an event of Force Majeure.

2.52.2 For the purposes of this clause, 'Force Majeure' means and includes wars, insurrections, revolution, civil disturbance, riots, terrorist acts, public strikes, hartal, bandh, fires, floods, epidemic, quarantine restrictions, freight embargoes, declared general strikes in relevant industries, Vis Major Act of Government, impeding reasonable performance of the SI but does not include any foreseeable events, commercial considerations or those involving fault or negligence on the part of the party claiming Force Majeure.

2.52.3 If a Force Majeure situation arises, the SI shall promptly notify the Bank in writing of such condition and the cause thereof. Unless otherwise directed by the Bank in writing, the SI shall continue to perform its obligations under the Contract as far as is reasonably practical, and shall seek all reasonable alternative means for performance not prevented by the Force Majeure event. If the event of Force Majeure continues for a period more than 30 days, the Bank shall be entitled to terminate this Agreement at any time thereafter

2.53 Termination for Insolvency

The Bank may, at any time, terminate the Contract by giving written notice to the SI, if the SI becomes Bankrupt or insolvent or any application for bankruptcy, insolvency or winding up has been filed against it by any person. In this event, termination will be without compensation to the SI,




49

provided that such termination will not prejudice or affect any right of action or remedy, which has accrued or will accrue thereafter to the Bank.

2.54 Termination for Convenience

The Bank, by written notice of not less than 90 (ninety) days sent to the SI, may terminate the Contract, in whole or in part, at any time for its convenience. The notice of termination shall specify that termination is for the Bank’s convenience, the extent to which performance of the SI under the Contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective.

2.55 Disputes/Arbitration [applicable in case of successful Bidder only]

All disputes or differences whatsoever arising between the parties out of or in connection with this contract or in discharge of any obligation arising out of the Contract (whether during the progress of work or after completion of such work and whether before or after the termination of this contract, abandonment or breach of this contract), shall be settled amicably. If however, the parties are not able to solve them amicably, either party (BANK or SI), give written notice to other party clearly setting out there in specific dispute(s) and/or difference(s) or shall be referred to a sole arbitrator mutually agreed upon, and the award made in pursuance thereof shall be binding on the parties. In the absence of consensus about the single arbitrator, the dispute may be referred to joint arbitrator; one to be nominated by each party and the said arbitrators shall nominate a presiding arbitrator, before commencing the arbitration proceedings. The arbitration shall be settled in accordance with the applicable Indian Laws and subject to the provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 or any amendments thereof. Any appeal will be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of courts at Mumbai. The SI shall continue work under the Contract during the arbitration proceedings unless otherwise directed by the Bank or unless the matter is such that the work cannot possibly be continued until the decision of the arbitrator is obtained. Arbitration proceeding shall be held at Mumbai, India, and the language of the arbitration proceedings and that of all documents and communications between the parties shall be in English.

2.56 Governing Language

The governing language shall be English.

2.57 Applicable Law

The Contract shall be interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Union of India and shall be subjected to the exclusive jurisdiction of courts at Mumbai.

2.58 Project Expense, Taxes and Duties

2.58.1 The entire project cost including but not limited to Designing, Procurement of Equipment installation, commissioning, operation of the Data Centre, Insurance etc. will be borne by SI at no extra cost to BANK.

2.58.2 The SI shall be liable to pay all corporate taxes and income tax that shall be levied according to the laws and regulations applicable from time to time in India and the price Bid by the SI shall include all such taxes in the contract price.

2.58.3 Prices quoted [As in Annexure D] should be exclusive of all Central / State Government taxes/duties and levies / GST but inclusive of Custom duty and also cost of incidental services such as transportation, road permits, insurance etc.

2.58.4 Prices payable to the SI as stated in the Contract shall be firm and not subject to adjustment during performance of the Contract, irrespective of reasons whatsoever, including exchange rate fluctuations, any upward revision in Custom duty. The Bidder will pass on to the Bank, all fiscal benefits arising out of reductions, if any, in Government levies viz. custom duty or the benefit of discounts if any announced in respect of the cost of the items for which orders have been placed during that period.

2.58.5 Income / Corporate Taxes in India: The Bidder shall be liable to pay all corporate taxes and income tax that shall be levied according to the laws and regulations applicable from time to time in India and the price Bid by the Bidder shall include all such taxes in the contract price.




50

2.58.6 All expenses, stamp duty and other charges/ expenses in connection with the execution of the Agreement as a result of this RFP process shall be borne by the SI.

2.59 Tax deduction at Source

2.59.1 Wherever laws and regulations that require deduction of such taxes at the source of payment, the Bank shall effect such deductions from the payment due to the SI. The remittance of amounts so deducted and issuance of certificate for such deductions shall be made by the Bank as per the laws and regulations for the time being in force. Nothing in the Contract shall relieve the SI from his responsibility to pay any tax that may be levied in India on income and profits made by the SI in respect of this contract.

2.59.2 The SI’s staff, personnel and labour will be liable to pay personal income taxes in India in respect of such of their salaries and wages as are chargeable under the laws and regulations for the time being in force, and the SI shall perform such duties in regard to such deductions thereof as may be imposed on him by such laws and regulations.

2.60 Right to use defective Equipment/ Product

If after delivery, acceptance and installation and within the warranty period, the operation or use of the Equipment/Product is found to be unsatisfactory, the Bank shall have the right to continue to operate or use such Equipment until rectification of defects, errors or omissions by partial or complete replacement is made without interfering with the Bank’s operation.

2.61 Tender Fee/Bid Participation Fee

The same should be furnished by the Bidders in the form of Demand Draft/ Bankers’ Cheque as mentioned in Section 2.3. It should be enclosed with Technical Bid. The Bids without tender fee will not be considered valid.

2.62 Notices

Any notice given by one party to the other pursuant to this contract shall be sent to other party in writing/ scanned and confirmed in writing/scanned to other Party’s address. The notice shall be effective when delivered or on the notice’s effective date whichever is later.

2.63 Transition Plan

In the event of failure of the SI to render the Services or in the event of termination of Contract or expiry of term or otherwise, without prejudice to any other right, the Bank at its sole discretion may make alternate arrangement for getting the Services contracted with another vendor. In such case, the Bank shall give prior notice to the existing SI. The existing SI shall continue to provide services as per the terms of Contract until a ‘new vendor’ completely takes over the work. During the transition phase, the existing SI shall render all reasonable assistance to the new vendor within such period prescribed by the Bank, at existing cost to the Bank, for ensuring smooth switch over and continuity of Services. If existing SI is breach of this obligation, they shall be liable for paying a penalty of as provided in Section II (2.3- Schedule of Events, Sr. No 20) on demand to the Bank, which may be settled from the payment of invoices or Performance Bank Guarantee for the contracted period or by invocation of Performance Bank Guarantee. SI shall enter into Transition Plan with the Bank as provided in Annexure–M.

2.64 Compliance with Laws

2.64.1 It shall be the sole responsibility of SI to comply with the provisions of all the applicable laws, concerning or in relation to rendering of Services by SI as envisaged under this RFP.

2.64.2 SI shall procure and maintain all necessary licenses permissions, approvals from the relevant authorities under the applicable laws towards its Services throughout the currency of the Contract.

2.64.3 SI shall be solely liable & responsible for compliance of applicable Labour Laws in respect of its employees, agents, representatives and sub-contractors and in particular laws relating to terminal benefits such as pension, gratuity, provident fund, bonus or other benefits to which they may be entitled and the laws relating to contract labour, minimum wages, etc., and the Bank shall have no liability in these regards. Further, SI would indemnify/make good for the




51

losses to the Bank for non-compliance or any claims against the Bank arising out of any non-compliance as above.

2.64.4 SI shall ensure that all persons, employees, workers and other individuals engaged by or sub-contracted by the SI in rendering the Services under the Contact entered between the Bank and SI, have undergone proper background check, police verification and other necessary due diligence checks to examine their antecedence and ensure their suitability for such engagement. No person shall be engaged by the SI unless such person is found to be suitable in such verification and the SI shall retain the records of such verification and shall produce the same to the Bank as when requested.

2.65 Non-Hire and Non-Solicitation

During the term of the Contract and for a period of one year thereafter, neither party shall (either directly or indirectly through a third party) employ, solicit to employ, cause to be solicited for the purpose of employment or offer employment to any employee/s or sub-contractor/s of the other party, or aid any third person to do so, without the specific written consent of the other party. However nothing in this clause shall affect the Bank’s regular recruitments as per its recruitment policy and not targeted to the employees of SI

2.66 Expenses to be borne by the Bank

All recurring consumables during the post go-live operations of Data Center such as Electricity, Diesel, Water, Oil consumed in running the Data center will be borne by BANK as per actual consumption to the concerned Agency. BANK shall verify the consumption from the logbook maintained and MIS report generated through the IBMS. SI has to ensure that there is an automatic system installed which allows for measurement of the consumption and this system should also be integrated with the Integrated Building Management System (IBMS). This IBMS should provide the overall statistics of the power availability, source of power etc. The Bank will pay directly any refundable fees such as security deposits to respective government agencies/authorities/ service providers for obtaining services on the basis of written advice by the SI.

2.67 Safety

2.67.1 SI must take adequate safety precautions before starting construction work to keep their employees safe as well as others from construction related hazards.

2.67.2 It is the responsibility of the SI to maintain the structural safety and integrity of the site. SI shall also ensure that the proposed property development is neither an impediment for smooth flow of traffic nor a safety hazard for the station structure and for commuters. SI shall also ensure that all station utilities and facilities falling within the Site will be kept accessible and the SI shall not interfere or tamper with those installations at any time.

2.67.3 Further, it is clarified that the SI shall be completely responsible for any loss of life or property in case of an emergency and/or due to the non-functioning of any system. BANK shall not be responsible for any loss of life and property in Data Centre premises due to any reason including but not limited to malfunctioning of any electrical or mechanical equipment or fire system at the site.

2.67.4 Standard specification for Health safety and environment management at Data Centre -As defined in Annexure-N of this document

2.67.5 Specification for Quality management system requirements from Bidders., as defined in Annexure-O of this document




1

Section 3: Annexures

Table of Contents

Annexure–A Bid Form (Technical Bid) ....................................................................................................... 3

Annexure-B: Bill of Material and Compliances (Masked Price Bid) ........................................................ 5

Annexure-C: Bidders Details ....................................................................................................................... 7

Annexure-D: Commercial Bid ...................................................................................................................... 8

Annexure-E: Undertaking of Authenticity ................................................................................................ 10

Annexure-F: Manufacturers’ authorization form ..................................................................................... 11

Annexure-G: Format for EMD Bank Guarantee ....................................................................................... 12

Annexure–H: Performance Bank Guarantee Format ............................................................................... 14

Annexure-I: PROFORMA ............................................................................................................................ 16

Annexure-J: Non-Disclosure Agreement ................................................................................................. 18

Annexure-K: Pre-Bid Format ..................................................................................................................... 21

Annexure-L: Pre Contract Integrity Pact .................................................................................................. 22

Annexure-M: Transition Plan ..................................................................................................................... 27

Annexure-N: Standard specification for Health safety and environment management at Data Center ........................................................................................................................................................... 34

Annexure-O: Specification for Quality Management System (QMS) Requirements from SI .............. 90

Annexure-P: Technical Specification (Evaluation Sheet) ....................................................................... 95

Annexure-Q: Scope of Work – Defining Phases .................................................................................... 118

Annexure-Q1: Site Assessment & Preliminary Tests ............................................................................ 128

Annexure-Q2: Civil Architecture, Plumbing and NOC .......................................................................... 129

Annexure – Q3:Electrical Guidelines and Scope of Work .................................................................... 226

Annexure-Q4: HVAC ................................................................................................................................. 270

Annexure Q5: Technical Specifications For Precision Air Conditioning Units .................................. 329

Annexure-Q6: Elevators ........................................................................................................................... 341

Annexure-Q7: Solar Power Generation system ..................................................................................... 343

Annexure-Q8: Management system – Safety and Security .................................................................. 347

Annexure-Q9: Operation and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 376

Annexure-Q10: Manpower Requirement ................................................................................................ 378

Annexure-Q11: Finishing Schedule ........................................................................................................ 380

Annexure-Q12: Warranty .......................................................................................................................... 385

Annexure-Q13: Maintenance Contract.................................................................................................... 386

Annexure-Q14: Indicative Innovation criteria ........................................................................................ 388

Annexure-Q15: Data Center Tier –IV Gold certification ........................................................................ 389

Annexure-R: Penalties & SLA Terms ...................................................................................................... 390

Annexure-S: Terms of Payment .............................................................................................................. 411




2

Annexure-T: RACI Matrix for Data Center. ............................................................................................. 413

Annexure-U Plot Layout Drawing ............................................................................................................ 415




3

Annexure–A Bid Form (Technical Bid)

[On Company’s letter head] (To be included in Technical Bid Envelope) Date: _______________ To: < Address of Bank > Dear Sir, Ref: SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 dated 05.09.2017

1. We have examined the above RFP, the receipt of which is hereby duly acknowledged and

subsequent Pre-Bid clarifications/ modifications / revisions, if any, furnished by the Bank and we offer to supply, Install, test, commission and support the desired equipment detailed in this RFP. We shall abide by the terms and conditions spelt out in the RFP. We shall participate and submit the commercial Bid through online auction to be conducted by the Bank’s authorized SI, on the date advised to us.

2. While submitting this Bid, we certify that:

▪ The undersigned is authorized to sign on behalf of the SI and the necessary support document delegating this authority is enclosed to this letter.

▪ We declare that we are not in contravention of conflict of interest obligation mentioned in this RFP.

▪ Indicative prices submitted by us have been arrived at without agreement with any other Bidder of this RFP for the purpose of restricting competition.

▪ The indicative prices submitted by us have not been disclosed and will not be disclosed to any other Bidder responding to this RFP.

▪ We have not induced or attempted to induce any other Bidder to submit or not to submit a Bid for restricting competition.

▪ The rate quoted in the indicative price Bids are as per the RFP and subsequent pre-Bid clarifications/ modifications/ revisions furnished by the Bank, without any exception.

3. If our offer is accepted, we undertake to complete the formalities for supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of the equipment within the period specified in this document.

4. We agree to abide by all the Bid terms and conditions, contents of Penalties & SLA as per sample available at Annexure-R of this document and the rates quoted therein for the orders awarded by the Bank up to the period prescribed in the Bid, which shall remain binding upon us.

5. Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, this Bid, together with your written acceptance thereof and your notification of award, shall constitute a binding Contract between us.

6. We undertake that in competing for (and, if the award is made to us, in executing) the above contract, we will strictly observe the laws against fraud and corruption in force in India namely “Prevention of Corruption Act 1988”.

7. We undertake that we will not offer, directly or through intermediaries, any bribe, gift, consideration, reward, favor, any material or immaterial benefit or other advantage, commission, fees, brokerage or inducement to any official of the Bank, connected directly or indirectly with the bidding process, or to any person, organization or third party related to the contract in exchange for any advantage in the bidding, evaluation, contracting and implementation of the contract.




4

8. We undertake that we will not resort to canvassing with any official of the Bank, connected directly or indirectly with the bidding process to derive any undue advantage. We also understand that any violation in this regard, will result in disqualification of bidder from further bidding process.

9. We certify that we have not made any changes in the contents of the RFP document read with its amendments/clarifications provided by the Bank submitted by us in our Bid document.

10. It is further certified that the contents of our Bid are factually correct. We also accept that in the event of any information / data / particulars proving to be incorrect, the Bank will have the right to disqualify us from the Bid.

11. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Bid you may receive and you may reject all or any Bid without assigning any reason or giving any explanation whatsoever.

12. We hereby undertake that our name does not appear in any “Caution” list of RBI / IBA or any other regulatory body for outsourcing activity.

13. If our Bid is accepted, we undertake to enter into and execute at our cost, when called upon by the Bank to do so, a contract in the prescribed form and we shall be jointly and severally responsible for the due performance of the contract.

14. The name(s) of successful Bidder to whom the contract is finally awarded after the completion of bidding process shall be displayed on the website of the Bank and/or communicated to the successful Bidder(s).

15. The commercial bidding process will be through the reverse auction process to be conducted by the Bank or a company authorized by the Bank. We understand that our authorized representative who would participate in the reverse auction process would be possessing a valid digital certificate for the purpose.

16. We hereby undertake and agree to abide by all the terms and conditions stipulated by the bank in the RFP document.

Dated this ....... day of ............................ 2017 ______________________________________________________________ (Signature) (Name) (In the capacity of) Duly authorized to sign Bid for and on behalf of ______________________________________

Seal of the company.




5

Annexure-B: Bill of Material and Compliances (Masked Price Bid)

Bidders must comply with all the requirements as listed below. Bidders must comply with all the requirements as listed below and must submit their response in column “E” as yes or no only, any other statement shall be treated as non-compliance.

Sr. No.

Particulars of category required

Detailed Description of items under each category to be supplied(including Product Name, Make, Model, Manufacturing Country)

Quantity (Q)

Compliance (Y / N)

List of Compliances as per scope

1 Consultancy & PMC

2 Civil & Structural

3 Architectural

4 Electrical (Transformers, PDUs, ATS, Load-bank etc.)

5 Diesel Generator Sets

6 UPS

7 Gas insulated substation

8 HVAC & Chiller

9 PAC

10 Plumbing & Sanitation

11 IBMS

12 Fire fighting

13 Elevators

14 Sewage Treatment Plant

15 Solar Power system

16 Comprehensive Annual Maintenance Contract for 5 years

17 Warranty of all equipment (Hardware/ Software)

18 One time Uptime certification




6

Sr. No.

Particulars of category required

Detailed Description of items under each category to be supplied(including Product Name, Make, Model, Manufacturing Country)

Quantity (Q)

Compliance (Y / N)

List of Compliances as per scope

along with sustenance cost for 5 years

Any other requirements as per RFP (mention here)

A Sub-Total CAPEX

Operations and Maintenance for 5 years payable quarterly

B Sub-Total OPEX

Total (A+B)

We confirm that we comply with all the specifications mentioned above & the terms & conditions mentioned in the RFP Document are acceptable to us. Dated this ....... day of ............................ 2017 ______________________________________________________________ (Signature) (Name) (In the capacity of) Duly authorized to sign Bid for and on behalf of ______________________________________ Seal of the company.




7

Annexure-C: Bidders Details

Details of the Bidder

S. No. Particulars Details

1. Name

2. Date of Incorporation and / or commencement of business

3. Certificate of incorporation

4. Brief description of the Bidder including details of its main line of business

5. Company website URL

6.

Particulars of the Authorized Signatory of the Bidder a. Name b. Designation c. Address d. Phone Number (Landline) e. Mobile Number f. Fax Number g. Email Address

Signature and Seal of Company




8

Annexure-D: Commercial Bid

Note: Suitable information may be sought in Indicative Commercial Bid. An example of Indicative Commercial Bid format is placed below for guidance. The indicative commercial Bid needs to contain the information listed hereunder in a sealed envelope bearing the identification – “Indicative Commercial Bid for Setting up a Tier IV Data Center on Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer Model for SBI”. Name of Bidder: _______ Location (A) ___________

Sr. No.

Item Detailed Description

Total Cost (in INR)

1 Consultancy & PMC

2 Civil

3 Mechanical , Electrical and Plumbing

4 Others

5 Comprehensive Annual Maintenance Contract for 5 years

6 Warranty of all equipment (Hardware/Software)

7 One time Uptime certification along with sustenance cost for 5 years

Any other requirements as per RFP (mention here)

A Sub-Total CAPEX


B Sub-Total OPEX

Total (A+B)

Note:

1. The Bidder should provide the detailed descriptions and quantities of all components in the masked commercial Bid which is part of Bidders Technical submission. The line items in the masked Commercial Bid must directly co-relate to the corresponding line items in the Bidders




9

commercial submission. The TC1 Bidder must provide the line item wise price breakup as per the masked commercial bid within 48 hours of the completion of Reverse Auction.

2. The detailed description and quantities of all

components in the masked commercial bid must be clearly marked in the design diagrams submitted by the Bidder in the technical bid submission.

3. The ‘Percentage to Total Cost (s)’ mentioned here will

have to be maintained in the final price quote also by the TC1 Bidder. The percentage should be mentioned in two decimal places. Variation in the final price should not exceed +/- 5%.

Important: The price breakup of all the line items must be provided (even if the price is zero). The Bid may be rejected if the price breakup is not provided. This will be the Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) and should be quoted in the reverse auction. Signature Seal of Company Illustration

Particulars Indicative Price Bid Quote (INR)

Proportionate price after reverse auction (INR)

A B C

(a) Item A 25 13.16

(b) Item B 50 26.32

(c) Item C 75 39.47

(d) Item D 40 21.05

(e) Grand Total (a + b + c + d) 190 100




10

Annexure-E: Undertaking of Authenticity

To: (Name and address of Procuring Office) Sub: Undertaking of Authenticity for all Equipment Supplied Ref: SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 dated 05.09.2017 1. With reference to the equipment being quoted to you vide our Quotation No:___________ dated

___________, we hereby confirm that all the components /parts /assembly / software etc. used in the equipment to be supplied shall be original new components / parts / assembly / software only, from respective OEMs of the Equipment/products and that no refurbished / duplicate / second hand components /parts/ assembly / software shall be supplied or shall be used. We also undertake to produce certificate from the Original Equipment Manufacturers (if required by you) in support of the above statement at the time of delivery / installation

2. We also confirm that in respect of licensed operating systems and other software utilities to be supplied, the same will be procured from authorized sources and supplied with Authorized License Certificate (i.e. Product keys on Certification of Authenticity in case of Microsoft Windows Operating System)

3. In case of default and the Bank finds that the above conditions are not complied with, we agree to take back the equipment supplied and return the money paid by you, in full within seven days of intimation of the same by the Bank, without demur or any reference to a third party and without prejudice to any remedies the Bank may deem fit.

4. In case of default and we are unable to comply with above at the time of delivery or during installation, of all equipment already billed, we agree to take back the equipment without demur, if already supplied and return the money if any paid to us by you in this regard.

5. We also take full responsibility of both parts & Service SLA as per the content even if there is any defect by our authorized Service Center / Reseller / SI etc.

Dated this ....... day of ............................ 2017 ______________________________________________________________ (Signature) (Name) (In the capacity of) Duly authorized to sign Bid for and on behalf of ____________________________________




11

Annexure-F: Manufacturers’ authorization form

MANUFACTURERS' AUTHORIZATION FORM No. Date: To: Dear Sir: Ref: SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 dated 05.09.2017 1. We, who are established and reputable manufacturers / producers of

________________________ having factories / development facilities at (address of factory / facility) do hereby authorize M/s ___________________ (Name and address of Agent) to submit a Bid, and sign the contract with you against the above Bid Invitation.

2. We hereby extend our full warranty for the Solution, Equipment/Products and services offered by the above firm against this Bid Invitation.

3. We also undertake to provide any or all of the following materials, notifications, and information pertaining to the Equipment manufactured or distributed by the SI:

(a) Such Equipment as the Bank may opt to purchase from the SI, provided, that this option shall not relieve the SI of any warranty obligations under the Contract; and

(b) in the event of termination of production of such Equipment:

I. advance notification to the Bank of the pending termination, in sufficient time to permit the Bank to procure needed requirements; and

II. Following such termination, furnishing, operations manuals, standards, and specifications of the Equipment, if requested.

4. We duly authorize the said firm to act on our behalf in fulfilling all installations, Technical support and maintenance obligations required by the contract.

Yours faithfully, (Name of Manufacturer / Producer)

Note: This letter of authority should be on the letterhead of the manufacturer and should be signed by a person competent and having the power of attorney to bind the manufacturer. The Bidder in its Bid should include it.




12

Annexure-G: Format for EMD Bank Guarantee

To: ------------------- -------------------

Dear Sir,

EMD BANK GUARANTEE for Setting up a Tier IV Data Center at Pune on Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer model for SBI. RFP NO: SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 DATED 05.09.2017 WHEREAS State Bank of India (SBI), having its Corporate Office at Nariman Point, Mumbai, and Regional offices at other State capital cities in India has invited Request for Proposal for Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Maintenance Operation, and Transfer a Tier IV Data center for State Bank of India and such services as are set out in the State Bank of India, Request for Proposal SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 dated 05.09.2017.

1. It is one of the terms of said Request for Proposal that the Bidder shall furnish a Bank Guarantee for a sum of Rs.__________/-(Rupees ___________________Only) as Earnest Money Deposit.

2. M/s. ________________________, (hereinafter called as Bidder, who are our constituents intends to submit their Bid for the said work and have requested us to furnish guarantee in respect of the said sum of Rs.__________/-(Rupees _____________________ Only)

3. NOW THIS GUARANTEE WITNESSETH THAT

We _____________________________ (Bank) do hereby agree with and undertake to the State Bank of India, their Successors, assigns that in the event of the BANK coming to the conclusion that the Bidder has not performed their obligations under the said conditions of the RFP or have committed a breach thereof, which conclusion shall be binding on us as well as the said Bidder, we shall on demand by the BANK, pay without demur to the BANK, a sum of Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only) that may be demanded by BANK. Our guarantee shall be treated as equivalent to the Earnest Money Deposit for the due performance of the obligations of the Bidder under the said conditions, provided, however, that our liability against such sum shall not exceed the sum of Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only).

5. We also agree to undertake to and confirm that the sum not exceeding Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only) as aforesaid shall be paid by us without any demur or protest, merely on demand from the BANK on receipt of a notice in writing stating the amount is due to them and we shall not ask for any further proof or evidence and the notice from the BANK shall be conclusive and binding on us and shall not be questioned by us in any respect or manner whatsoever. We undertake to pay the amount claimed by the BANK within 24 hours from the date of receipt of the notice as aforesaid. We confirm that our obligation to the BANK under this guarantee shall be independent of the agreement or agreements or other understandings between the BANK and the Bidder. This guarantee shall not be revoked by us without prior consent in writing of the BANK.

6. We hereby further agree that –

a) Any forbearance or commission on the part of the BANK in enforcing the conditions of the said agreement or in compliance with any of the terms and conditions stipulated in the said Bid and/or hereunder or granting of any time or showing of any indulgence by the BANK to the




13

Bidder or any other matter in connection therewith shall not discharge us in any way our obligation under this guarantee. This guarantee shall be discharged only by the performance of the Bidder of their obligations and in the event of their failure to do so, by payment to us of the sum not exceeding Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only)

b) Our liability under these presents shall not exceed the sum of Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only)

c) Our liability under this agreement shall not be affected by any infirmity or irregularity on the part of our said constituents in tendering for the said work or their obligations there under or by dissolution or change in the constitution of our said constituents.

d) This guarantee shall remain in force up to 180 days provided that if so desired by the BANK, this guarantee shall be renewed for a further period as may be indicated by them on the same terms and conditions as contained herein.

e) Our liability under this presents will terminate unless these presents are renewed as provided herein up to 180 days or on the day when our said constituents comply with their obligations, as to which a certificate in writing by the BANK alone is the conclusive proof, whichever date is later.

f) Unless a claim or suit or action is filed against us within six months from that date or any extended period, all the rights of the BANK against us under this guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be released and discharged from all our obligations and liabilities hereunder.

Notwithstanding anything contained hereinabove:

(a) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed Rs……….………/- (Rupees …………………….only)

(b) This Bank Guarantee shall be valid up to ……………………….

(c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only and only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before ……………………

Yours faithfully,

For and on behalf of

_______________________________ Authorized official. (Note: This guarantee will require stamp duty as applicable in the State where it is executed and shall be signed by the official(s) whose signature and authority shall be verified)




14

Annexure–H: Performance Bank Guarantee Format

PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE FORMAT (TO BE STAMPED AS AN AGREEMENT) THIS PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE AGREEMENT executed at ……..this…….day of ……….. 201 by ……………. (Name of the Bank)……….. having its Registered Office at …………….and its Branch at …………………………………………….(hereinafter referred to as "the Guarantor", which expression shall, unless it be repugnant to the subject, meaning or context thereof, be deemed to mean and include its successors and permitted assigns) IN FAVOUR OF State Bank of India, a Statutory Corporation constituted under the State Bank of India Act, 1955 having its Corporate Center at State Bank Bhavan, Nariman Point, Mumbai and one of its offices at------------------ (procuring office address), hereinafter referred to as "SBI" which expression shall, unless repugnant to the subject, context or meaning thereof, be deemed to mean and include its successors and assigns). WHEREAS M/s__________________________________________, incorporated under __________________________________ Act having its registered office at __________________________________ and principal place of business at __________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “SI” which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof shall include its successor, executor & assigns) has agreed to Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer a Tier IV Data Center at Hinjewadi, Pune for SBI (hereinafter referred to as “Services”) to SBI in accordance with the Request for Proposal (RFP) SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/419 dated 05.09.2017. WHEREAS, SBI has agreed to avail the above Services from the SI for a period of ______ year(s). WHEREAS, in accordance with terms and conditions of the RFP/Purchase order/Agreement dated……………, SI is required to furnish a Bank Guarantee for a sum of Rs.__________/- (Rupees _________ only) for due performance of the obligations of the SI in providing the Services, in accordance with the RFP/Purchase order/Agreement guaranteeing payment of the said amount of Rs.__________/- (Rupees __________ only) to SBI, if SI fails to fulfill its obligations as agreed in RFP/Agreement. WHEREAS, the Bank Guarantee is required to be valid for a total period of _____ months and in the event of failure, on the part of SI, to fulfill any of its commitments / obligations under the RFP/Agreement, SBI shall be entitled to invoke the Guarantee. AND WHEREAS, the Guarantor, at the request of SI, agreed to issue, on behalf of SI, Guarantee as above, for an amount of Rs.___________/- (Rupees ___________ only). NOW THIS GUARANTEE WITNESSETH THAT

1. In consideration of SBI having agreed to entrust the SI for rendering Services as mentioned in the RFP, we, the Guarantors, hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantee that SI shall fulfill its commitments and obligations in respect of providing the Services as mentioned in the RFP/Agreement and in the event of SI failing to perform / fulfill its commitments / obligations in respect of providing Services as mentioned in the RFP/Agreement, we (the Guarantor) shall on demand(s), from time to time from SBI, without protest or demur or without reference to SI and not withstanding any contestation or existence of any dispute whatsoever between SI and SBI, pay SBI




15

forthwith the sums so demanded by SBI in each of the demands, subject to a cumulative maximum amount of Rs.__________/- (Rupees ____________only).

2. Any notice / communication / demand from SBI to the effect that SI has failed to fulfill its

commitments / obligations in respect of rendering the Services as mentioned in the Agreement, shall be conclusive, final & binding on the Guarantor and shall not be questioned by the Guarantor in or outside the court, tribunal, authority or arbitration as the case may be and all such demands shall be honoured by the Guarantor without any delay.

3. We (the Guarantor) confirm that our obligation to the SBI, under this guarantee shall be independent of the agreement or other understandings, whatsoever, between the SBI and the SI.

4. This guarantee shall not be revoked by us (the Guarantor) without prior consent in writing of the SBI. WE (THE GUARANTOR) HEREBY FURTHER AGREE & DECLARE THAT- (i) Any neglect or forbearance on the part of SBI to SI or any indulgence of any kind shown by

SBI to SI or any change in the terms and conditions of the Agreement or the Services shall not, in any way, release or discharge the Bank from its liabilities under this Guarantee.

(ii) This Guarantee herein contained shall be distinct and independent and shall be enforceable against the Guarantor, notwithstanding any Guarantee or Security now or hereinafter held by SBI at its discretion.

(iii) This Guarantee shall not be affected by any infirmity or absence or irregularity in the execution of this Guarantee by and / or on behalf of the Guarantor or by merger or amalgamation or any change in the Constitution or name of the Guarantor.

(iv) The guarantee shall not be affected by any change in the constitution of SBI or SI or winding up / liquidation of SI, whether voluntary or otherwise

(v) This guarantee shall be a continuing guarantee during its validity period and the SBI can make its claim in one or more events within the total liability of the Guarantor mentioned herein.

(vi) This Guarantee shall remain in full force and effect for a period of __ years from the date of the issuance i.e. up to _________ Unless a claim under this Guarantee is made against us within three (3) months from that date i.e. on or before _____, all your rights under this Guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be relieved and discharged from all liabilities there under.

(vii) This guarantee shall be governed by Indian Laws and the Courts in Mumbai, India alone shall have the jurisdiction to try & entertain any dispute arising out of this guarantee.

Notwithstanding anything contained herein above:

a) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed Rs……….………/- (Rupees …………………….only)

b) This Bank Guarantee shall be valid up to………………………. c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only

and only if SBI serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before …………………… (date which is 3 months after date mentioned at (b) above.

Yours faithfully,

For and on behalf of Bank. __________________________ Authorized official




16

Annexure-I: PROFORMA

PROFORMA OF CERTIFICATE TO BE ISSUED BY THE BANK AFTER SUCCESSFUL COMMISSIONING OF THE DATA CENTER ON DESIGN, BUILD, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING, COMMISSIONING, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND TRANSFER MODEL Date:_________ M/s.--------------- ------------------------- Sub: Certificate of commissioning of the Data Center on Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing,

Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer Model

1. This is to certify that all the Design, Equipment/ Products as detailed below has/have been received in good condition along with all the standard and special accessories (subject to remarks in Para No. 2) in accordance with the Contract/Specifications. The same has been installed and commissioned.

a) Bid No. ._________________ dated _______________________ ___ b) Description of the Solution ________________________________ c) Quantity ____________________________________________ ____ d) Date of commissioning _____________________________________

e) Date of acceptance test _____________________________________

2. Details of equipment not yet supplied, any other Task not completed as per scope, recoveries (if any) to be made on that account:

Sr.No. Description Amount to be recovered 3. The acceptance test has been done to our entire satisfaction and Staff have been trained to

operate the Equipment/ Products. 4. The SI has fulfilled his contractual obligations satisfactorily* or The SI has failed to fulfill his contractual obligations with regard to the following:

(a) (b) (c)

5. The amount of recovery on account of non-supply of Equipment/ Products is given under Para No. 2.




17

6. The amount of recovery on account of failure of the SI to meet his contractual obligations is as indicated in endorsement of the letter. Signature _______________________ Name _______________________ Designation with stamp __________________

*Explanatory notes for filling up the certificates: (a) The SI has adhered to the time schedule specified in the contract in dispatching the

Equipment/Products / Manuals pursuant to Technical Specifications. (b) The SI has supervised the commissioning of the solution in time i.e., within the period specified in

the contract from the date of intimation by the SBI in respect of the installation of the Equipment/Product.

(c) Training of personnel has been done by the SI as specified in the contract. (d) In the event of Manuals having not been supplied or installation and commissioning of the Solution

having been delayed on account of the SI, the extent of delay should always be mentioned.




18

Annexure-J: Non-Disclosure Agreement

NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT THIS RECIPROCAL NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) is made at Mumbai between: __________________________________ constituted under the _________ Act, ______ having its Corporate Centre at ___________________________ __________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “Bank” which expression includes its successors and assigns) of the ONE PART; And ____________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “_________” which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context thereof, shall mean and include its successors and permitted assigns) of the OTHER PART; And Whereas 1. _________________________________________ is carrying on business of providing

_________________________________, has agreed to __________________________ for the Bank and other related tasks.

2. For purposes of advancing their business relationship, the parties would need to disclose certain

valuable confidential information to each other. Therefore, in consideration of covenants and agreements contained herein for the mutual disclosure of confidential information to each other, and intending to be legally bound, the parties agree to terms and conditions as set out hereunder.

NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED BY AND BETWEEN THE PARTIES AS UNDER 1. Confidential Information and Confidential Materials:

(a) “Confidential Information” means non-public information that Disclosing Party designates as being confidential or which, under the circumstances surrounding disclosure ought to be treated as confidential. “Confidential Information” includes, without limitation, information relating to installed or purchased Disclosing Party software or hardware products, the information relating to general architecture of Disclosing Party’s network, information relating to nature and content of data stored within network or in any other storage media, Disclosing Party’s business policies, practices, methodology, policy design delivery, and information received from others that Disclosing Party is obligated to treat as confidential. Confidential Information disclosed to Receiving Party by any Disclosing Party Subsidiary and/ or agents is covered by this agreement

(b) Confidential Information shall not include any information that: (i) is or subsequently becomes publicly available without Receiving Party’s breach of any obligation owed to Disclosing party; (ii) becomes known to Receiving Party prior to Disclosing Party’s disclosure of such information to Receiving Party; (iii) became known to Receiving Party from a source other than Disclosing Party other than by the breach of an obligation of confidentiality owed to Disclosing Party; or (iv) is independently developed by Receiving Party.

(c) “Confidential Materials” shall mean all tangible materials containing Confidential Information, including without limitation written or printed documents and computer disks or tapes, whether machine or user readable.

2. Restrictions (a) Each party shall treat as confidential the Contract and any and all information (“confidential

information”) obtained from the other pursuant to the Contract and shall not divulge such information to any person (except to such party’s own employees and other persons and then only to those employees and persons who need to know the same) without the other party’s written




19

consent provided that this clause shall not extend to information which was rightfully in the possession of such party prior to the commencement of the negotiations leading to the Contract, which is already public knowledge or becomes so at a future date (otherwise than as a result of a breach of this clause). Receiving Party will have executed or shall execute appropriate written agreements with its employees and consultants specifically assigned and/or otherwise, sufficient to enable it to comply with all the provisions of this Agreement.

(b) Receiving Party may disclose Confidential Information in accordance with judicial or other governmental order to the intended recipients (as detailed in this clause), provided Receiving Party shall give Disclosing Party reasonable notice prior to such disclosure and shall comply with any applicable protective order or equivalent. The intended recipients for this purpose are: (1) The statutory auditors of the Bank and (2) Regulatory authorities regulating the affairs of the Bank and inspectors and supervisory bodies

thereof (c) The foregoing obligations as to confidentiality shall survive any termination of this Agreement (d) Confidential Information and Confidential Material may be disclosed, reproduced, summarized or

distributed only in pursuance of Receiving Party’s business relationship with Disclosing Party, and only as otherwise provided hereunder. Receiving Party agrees to segregate all such Confidential Material from the confidential material of others in order to prevent mixing.

(e) Receiving Party may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble any software disclosed to Receiving Party.

3. Rights and Remedies

(a) Receiving Party shall notify Disclosing Party immediately upon discovery of any unauthorized used or

disclosure of Confidential Information and/ or Confidential Materials, or any other breach of this Agreement by Receiving Party, and will cooperate with Disclosing Party in every reasonable way to help Disclosing Party regain possession of the Confidential Information and/ or Confidential Materials and prevent its further unauthorized use.

(b) Receiving Party shall return all originals, copies, reproductions and summaries of Confidential Information or Confidential Materials at Disclosing Party’s request, or at Disclosing Party’s option, certify destruction of the same.

(c) Receiving Party acknowledges that monetary damages may not be the only and / or a sufficient remedy for unauthorized disclosure of Confidential Information and that disclosing party shall be entitled, without waiving any other rights or remedies (as listed below), to injunctive or equitable relief as may be deemed proper by a Court of competent jurisdiction. a. Suspension of access privileges b. Change of personnel assigned to the job c. Financial liability for actual, consequential or incidental damages d. Termination of contract

(d) Disclosing Party may visit Receiving Party’s premises, with reasonable prior notice and during normal business hours, to review Receiving Party’s compliance with the term of this Agreement.

4. Miscellaneous

(a) All Confidential Information and Confidential Materials are and shall remain the property of Disclosing

Party. By disclosing information to Receiving Party, Disclosing Party does not grant any expressed or implied right to Receiving Party to disclose information under the Disclosing Party patents, copyrights, trademarks, or trade secret information.

(b) Any document provided under this Agreement is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. (c) Neither party grants to the other party any license, by implication or otherwise, to use the Confidential

Information, other than for the limited purpose of evaluating or advancing a business relationship between the parties, or any license rights whatsoever in any patent, copyright or other intellectual property rights pertaining to the Confidential Information.

(d) The terms of Confidentiality under this Agreement shall not be construed to limit either party’s right to independently develop or acquire Equipment/Product without use of the other party’s Confidential Information. Further, either party shall be free to use for any purpose the residuals resulting from access to or work with such Confidential Information, provided that such party shall maintain the confidentiality of the Confidential Information as provided herein. The term “residuals” means




20

information in non-tangible form, which may be retained by person who has had access to the Confidential Information, including ideas, concepts, know-how or techniques contained therein. Neither party shall have any obligation to limit or restrict the assignment of such persons or to pay royalties for any work resulting from the use of residuals. However, the foregoing shall not be deemed to grant to either party a license under the other party’s copyrights or patents.

(e) This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof. It shall not be modified except by a written agreement dated subsequently to the date of this Agreement and signed by both parties. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived by any act or acquiescence on the part of Disclosing Party, its agents, or employees, except by an instrument in writing signed by an authorized officer of Disclosing Party. No waiver of any provision of this Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any other provision(s) or of the same provision on another occasion.

(f) In case of any dispute, both the parties agree for neutral third party arbitration. Such arbitrator will be jointly selected by the two parties and he/she may be an auditor, lawyer, consultant or any other person of trust. The said proceedings shall be conducted in English language at Mumbai and in accordance with the provisions of Indian Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996 or any Amendments or Re-enactments thereto.

(g)Subject to the limitations set forth in this Agreement, this Agreement will inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties, their successors and assigns.

(h) If any provision of this Agreement shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect.

(i) All obligations created by this Agreement shall survive change or termination of the parties’ business relationship.

5. Suggestions and Feedback (a) Either party from time to time may provide suggestions, comments or other feedback to the other

party with respect to Confidential Information provided originally by the other party (hereinafter “feedback”). Both party agree that all Feedback is and shall be entirely voluntary and shall not in absence of separate agreement, create any confidentially obligation for the receiving party. However, the Receiving Party shall not disclose the source of any feedback without the providing party’s consent. Feedback shall be clearly designated as such and, except as otherwise provided herein, each party shall be free to disclose and use such Feedback as it sees fit, entirely without obligation of any kind to other party. The foregoing shall not, however, affect either party’s obligations hereunder with respect to Confidential Information of other party.

Dated this __________ day of _________ 2017 at __________ (month) (place) For and on behalf of ___________________________

Name

Designation

Place

Signature

For and on behalf of ___________________________

Name

Designation

Place

Signature




21

Annexure-K: Pre-Bid Format

Pre-Bid Query Format (To be provided strictly in Excel format)

SI Name

Sr.No RFP Page No

RFP Clause No.

Existing Clause

Query/ Suggestions




22

Annexure-L: Pre Contract Integrity Pact

PRE CONTRACT INTEGRITY PACT (TO BE STAMPED AS AN AGREEMENT)

1. General

This pre-Bid pre-contract Agreement (hereinafter called the Integrity Pact) is made on day of the month of 201_ , between, on the one hand, the State Bank of India a body corporate incorporated under the State Bank of India Act, 1955 having its Corporate Center at State Bank Bhavan, Nariman Point, Mumbai through its -----------------------Department / Office at ----------------,----------------, (hereinafter called the "BUYER", which expression shall mean and include, unless the context otherwise requires, its successors) of the First Part and M/s represented by Shri , Chief Executive Officer (hereinafter called the "BIDDER/Seller which expression shall mean and include, unless the context otherwise requires, its / his successors and permitted assigns of the Second Part. WHEREAS the BUYER proposes to setup a Tier IV Data Center on Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer model and procure (Name of the Stores/Equipment/Item) the equipment required, and the BIDDER/Seller is willing to offer/has offered the services and WHEREAS the BIDDER is a private company/public company/Government undertaking/partnership/registered export agency, constituted in accordance with the relevant law in the matter and the BUYER is an Office / Department of State Bank of India performing its functions on behalf of State Bank of India. NOW, THEREFORE, To avoid all forms of corruption by following a system that is fair, transparent and free from any influence/prejudiced dealings prior to, during and subsequent to the currency of the contract to be entered into with a view to : ➢ Enabling the BUYER to obtain the desired service / Equipment/ product at a competitive price in

conformity with the defined specifications by avoiding the high cost and the distortionary impact of corruption on public procurement; and

➢ Enabling BIDDERs to abstain from bribing or indulging in any corrupt practice in order to secure the contract by providing assurance to them that their competitors will also abstain from bribing and other corrupt practices and the BUYER will commit to prevent corruption, in any farm, by its officials by following transparent procedures.

The parties hereto hereby agree to enter into this Integrity Pact and agree as follows: Commitments of the BUYER 1.1 The BUYER undertakes that no official of the BUYER, connected directly or indirectly with the

contract, will demand, take a promise for or accept, directly or through intermediaries, any bribe, consideration, gift, reward, favor or any material or immaterial benefit or any other advantage from the BIDDER, either for themselves or for any person, organization or third party related to the contract in exchange for an advantage in the bidding process, Bid evaluation, contracting or implementation process related to the contract.

1.2 The BUYER will, during the pre-contract stage, treat all BIDDERs alike, and will provide to all BIDDERs the same information and will not provide any such information to any particular BIDDER which could afford an advantage to that particular BIDDER in comparison to other BIDDERs.

1.3 All the officials of the BUYER will report to the appropriate authority any attempted or completed breaches of the above commitments as well as any substantial suspicion of such a breach.

1.4 In case any such preceding misconduct on the part of such official(s) is reported by the BIDDER to the BUYER with full and verifiable facts and the same is prima facie found to be correct by the BUYER, necessary disciplinary proceedings, or any other action as deemed fit, including criminal proceedings may be initiated by the BUYER and such a person shall be debarred from further dealings related to the contract process. In such a case while an




23

enquiry is being conducted by the BUYER the proceedings under the contract would not be stalled.

2. Commitments of BIDDERs

2.1 The BIDDER commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corrupt practices, unfair means and

illegal activities during any stage of its Bid or during any pre-contract or post-contract stage in order to secure the contract or in furtherance to secure it and in particular commit itself to the following:

2.. 2 The BIDDER will not offer, directly or through intermediaries, any bribe, gift, consideration, reward, favor, any material or immaterial benefit or other advantage, commission, fees, brokerage or inducement to any official of the BUYER, connected directly or indirectly with the bidding process, or to any person, organization or third party related to the contract in exchange for any advantage in the bidding, evaluation, contracting and implementation of the contract.

2.3 The BIDDER further undertakes that it has not given, offered or promised to give, directly or indirectly any bribe, gift, consideration, reward, favor, any material or immaterial benefit or other advantage, commission, fees, brokerage or inducement to any official of the BUYER or otherwise in procuring the Contract or forbearing to do or having done any act in relation to the obtaining or execution of the contract or any other contract with State Bank of India for showing or forbearing to show favor or disfavor to any person in relation to the contract or any other contract with State Bank of India.

2.4 Wherever applicable, the BIDDER shall disclose the name and address of agents and representatives permitted by the Bid documents and Indian BIDDERs shall disclose their foreign principals or associates, if any.

2.5 The BIDDER confirms and declares that they have not made any payments to any agents/brokers or any other intermediary, in connection with th is Bid/contract.

2.6 The BIDDER further confirms and declares to the BUYER that the BIDDER is the original SIs in respect of Equipment / product / service covered in the Bid documents and the BIDDER has not engaged any individual or firm or company whether Indian or foreign to intercede, facilitate or in any way to recommend to the BUYER or any of its functionaries, whether officially or unofficially to the award of the contract to the BIDDER, nor has any amount been paid, promised or intended to be paid to any such individual, firm or company in respect of any such intercession, facilitation or recommendation.

2.7 The BIDDER, at the earliest available opportunity, i.e. either while presenting the Bid or during pre-contract negotiations and in any case before opening the financial Bid and before signing the contract, shall disclose any payments he has made, is committed to or intends to make to officials of the BUYER or their family members, agents, brokers or any other intermediaries in connection with the contract and the details of services agreed upon for such payments.

2.8 The BIDDER will not collude with other parties interested in the contract to impair the transparency, fairness and progress of the bidding process, Bid evaluation, contracting and implementation of the contract.

2.9 The BIDDER will not accept any advantage in exchange for any corrupt practice, unfair means and illegal activities.

2.10 The BIDDER shall not use improperly, for purposes of competition or personal gain, or pass. on 'to others, any -information provided by the BUYER as part of the business relationship, regarding plans, technical proposals and business details, including information contained in any electronic data carrier. The BIDDER also undertakes to exercise due and adequate care lest any such information is divulged.

2.11 The BIDDER commits to refrain from giving any complaint directly or through any other manner without supporting it with full and verifiable facts.

2.12 The BIDDER shall not instigate or cause to instigate any third person to commit any of the actions mentioned above.

2.13 If the BIDDER or any employee of the BIDDER or any person acting on behalf of the BIDDER, either directly or indirectly, is a relative of any of the officers of the BUYER, or alternatively, if any relative of an officer of the BUYER has financial Interest/stake in the BIDDER's firm, the same shall be disclosed by the BIDDER at the time of filing of tender. The term 'relative' for this purpose would be as defined in Section 6 of the Companies Act 1956.

2.14 The BIDDER shall not lend to or borrow any money from or enter into any monetary dealings or transactions, directly or indirectly, with any employee of the BUYER.




24

3. Previous Transgression

3.1 The BIDDER declares that no previous transgression occurred in the last three years immediately before signing of this Integrity Pact, with any other company in any country in respect of any corrupt practices envisaged hereunder or with any Public Sector Enterprise / Public Sector Banks in India or any Government Department in India or RBI that could justify BIDDER's exclusion from the tender process.

3.2 The BIDDER agrees that if it makes incorrect statement on this subject, BIDDER can be disqualified from the tender process or the contract, if already awarded, can be terminated for such reason.

4. Earnest Money (Security Deposit)

4.1 While submitting commercial Bid, the BIDDER shall deposit an amount (specified in RFP) as Earnest Money/Security Deposit, with the BUYER through any of the mode mentioned in the RFP / Bid document and no such mode is specified, by a Bank Draft or a Pay Order in favor of State Bank of India from a nationalized Bank including SBI or its Subsidiary Banks. However payment of any such amount by way of Bank Guarantee, if so permitted as per Bid documents / RFP should be from any nationalized Bank other than SBI or its Subsidiary Banks and promising payment of the guaranteed sum to the BUYER on demand within three working days without any demur whatsoever and without seeking any reasons whatsoever. The demand for payment by the BUYER shall be treated as conclusive proof for making such payment to the BUYER.

4.2 Unless otherwise stipulated in the Bid document / RFP, the Earnest Money/Security Deposit shall be valid up to a period of five years or the complete conclusion of the contractual obligations to the complete satisfaction of both the BIDDER and the BUYER, including warranty period, whichever is later.

4.3 In case of the successful BIDDER a clause would also be incorporated in the Article pertaining to Performance Bond in the Purchase Contract that the provisions of Sanctions for Violation shall be applicable for forfeiture of Performance Bond in case of a decision by the BUYER to forfeit the same-without assigning any reason for imposing sanction for violation of this Pact.

4.4 No interest shall be payable by the BUYER to the BIDDER on Earnest Money/Security Deposit for the period of its currency.

5. Sanctions for Violations

5.1 Any breach of the aforesaid provisions by the BIDDER or any one employed by it or acting on its behalf (whether with or without the knowledge of the BIDDER) shall entitle the BUYER to take all or any one of the following actions, wherever required: (i) To immediately call off the pre contract negotiations without assigning any reason and

without giving any compensation to the BIDDER. However, the proceedings with the other BIDDER(s) would continue, unless the BUYER desires to drop the entire process.

(ii) The Earnest Money Deposit (in pre-contract stage) and/or Security Deposit/Performance Bond (after the contract is signed) shall stand forfeited either fully or partially, as decided by the BUYER and the BUYER shall not be required to assign any reason therefore.

(iii) To immediately cancel the contract, if already signed, without giving any compensation to the BIDDER.

(iv) To recover all sums already paid by the BUYER, and in case of an Indian BIDDER with interest thereon at 2% higher than the prevailing Base Rate of State Bank of India, while in case of a BIDDER from a country other than India with interest thereon at 2% higher than the LIBOR. If any outstanding payment is due to the BIDDER from the BUYER in connection with any other contract for any other stores, such outstanding could also be utilized to recover the aforesaid sum and interest.

(v) To encash the advance bank guarantee and performance bond/warranty bond, if furnished by the BIDDER, in order to recover the payments, already made by the BUYER, along with interest.

(vi) To cancel all or any other Contracts with the BIDDER. The BIDDER shall be liable to pay compensation for any loss or damage to the BUYER resulting from such cancellation/rescission and the BUYER shall be entitled to deduct the amount so payable




25

from the money(s) due to the BIDDER. (vii) To debar the BIDDER from participating in future bidding processes of the BUYER or any

of its Subsidiaries for a minimum period of five years, which may be further extended at the discretion of the BUYER. To recover all sums paid, in violation of this Pact , by BIDDER(s) to any middleman or agent or broker with a view to securing the contract. Forfeiture of Performance Bond in case of a decision by the BUYER to forfeit the same without assigning any reason for imposing sanction for violation of this Pact.

(viii) Intimate to the CVC, IBA, RBI, as the BUYER deemed fit the details of such events for appropriate action by such authorities.

5.2 The BUYER will be entitled to take all or any of the actions mentioned at para 6.1(i) to (x) of this Pact also on the Commission by the BIDDER or any one employed by it or acting on its behalf (whether with or without the knowledge of the BIDDER), of an offence as defined in Chapter IX of the Indian Penal code, 1860 or Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988 or any other statute enacted for prevention of corruption.

5.3 The decision of the BUYER to the effect that a breach of the provisions of this Pact has been committed by the BIDDER shall be final and conclusive on the BIDDER. However, the BIDDER can approach the Independent Monitor(s) appointed for the purposes of this Pact.

6. Fall Clause

The BIDDER undertakes that it has not supplied/is not supplying similar service/product/equipment/systems or subsystems at a price lower than that offered in the present Bid in respect of any other Ministry/Department of the Government of India or PSU or any other Bank and if it is found at any stage that similar Equipment/product/systems or sub systems was supplied by the BIDDER to any other Ministry/Department of the Government of Ind ia or a PSU or a Bank at a lower price, then that very price, with due allowance for elapsed time, will be applicable to the present case and the difference in the cost would be refunded by the BIDDER to the BUYER, if the contract has already been concluded.

7. Independent Monitors

7.1 The BUYER has appointed Independent Monitors (hereinafter referred to as Monitors) for this Pact in consultation with the Central Vigilance Commission.

Shri Johny Joseph

Address: 701-702, Callalily-Y,

Nagar Amrit Shakti, Chandivali,

Andheri (East), Mumbai - 400072.

E-mail: [email protected]

7.2 The task of the Monitors shall be to review independently and objectively, whether and to what extent the parties comply with the obligations under this Pact.

7.3 The Monitors shall not be subjected to instructions by the representatives of the parties and perform their functions neutrally and independently.

7.4 Both the parties accept that the Monitors have the right to access all the documents relating to the project/procurement, including minutes of meetings. Parties signing this Pact shall not approach the Courts while representing the matters to Independent External Monitors and he/she will await their decision in the matter.

7.5 As soon as the Monitor notices, or has reason to believe, a violation of this Pact, he will so inform the Authority designated by the BUYER.

7.6 The BIDDER(s) accepts that the Monitor has the right to access without restriction to all Project documentation of the BUYER including that provided by the BIDDER. The BIDDER will also grant the Monitor, upon his request and demonstration of a valid interest, unrestricted and unconditional access to his project documentation. The same is applicable to Sub-contractors.




26

The Monitor shall be under contractual obligation to treat the information and documents of the BIDDER/Sub-contractor(s) with confidentiality.

7.7 The BUYER will provide to the Monitor sufficient information about all meetings among the parties related to the Project provided such meetings could have an impact on the contractual relations between the parties. The parties will offer to the Monitor the option to participate in such meetings.

7.8 The Monitor will submit a written report to the designated Authority of BUYER/Secretary in the Department/ within 8 to 10 weeks from the date of reference or intimation to him by the BUYER / BIDDER and, should the occasion arise, submit proposals for correcting problematic situations.

8. Facilitation of Investigation

In case of any allegation of violation of any provisions of this Pact or payment of commission, the BUYER or its agencies shall be entitled to examine all the documents including the Books of Accounts of the BIDDER and the BIDDER shall provide necessary information and documents in English and shall extend all possible help for the purpose of such examination.

9. Law and Place of Jurisdiction

This Pact is subject to Indian Law. The place of performance and jurisdiction is the seat of the BUYER.

10. Other Legal Actions

The actions stipulated in this Integrity Pact are without prejudice to any other legal action that may follow in accordance with the provisions of the extant law in force relating to any civil or criminal proceedings.

11. Validity

11.1 The validity of this Integrity Pact shall be from date of its signing and extend up to 5 years or the complete execution of the contract to the satisfaction of both the BUYER and the BIDDER/Seller, including warranty period, whichever is later. In case BIDDER is unsuccessful, this Integrity Pact shall expire after six months from the date of the signing of the contract, with the successful Bidder by the BUYER.

11.2 Should one or several provisions of this Pact turn out to be invalid; the remainder of this Pact shall remain valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their original intentions.

12. The parties hereby sign this Integrity Pact at________ on _________

For BUYER for BIDDER Name of the Officer. Chief Executive Officer Designation Office / Department / Branch State Bank of India. Witness Witness 1 1. 2 2.

* Provisions of these clauses would need to be amended/ deleted in line with the policy of the BUYER in regard to involvement of Indian agents of foreign suppliers. Note: This agreement will require stamp duty as applicable in the State where it is executed.




27

Annexure-M: Transition Plan

1. Introduction

This Annexure describes the duties and responsibilities of the Systems Integrator (SI) and the STATE BANK OF INDIA to ensure proper transition of all assets and services and to ensure complete knowledge transfer related to Data Center project.

2. Objectives The objectives of this annexure are to:

(1) ensure a smooth transition of Services from the existing SI to a New/Replacement SI or back to the STATE BANK OF INDIA at the termination or expiry of this Agreement;

(2) ensure that the responsibilities of both parties to this Agreement are clearly defined in the event of exit and transfer; and

(3) ensure that all relevant Assets are transferred.

3. General 3.1. Where the STATE BANK OF INDIA intends to continue equivalent or substantially similar services to the

Services provided by the SI after termination or expiry of the Agreement, either by performing them itself or by means of a New/Replacement of SI, the existing SI shall ensure the smooth transition to the Replacement SI and shall co-operate with the STATE BANK OF INDIA or the Replacement SI as required in order to fulfil the obligations under this annexure.

3.2. The existing SI shall co-operate fully with the STATE BANK OF INDIA and any potential Replacement

SIs tendering for any Services, including the transfer of responsibility for the provision of the Services previously performed by the existing SI to be achieved with the minimum of disruption. In particular:

3.2.1. during any procurement process initiated by the STATE BANK OF INDIA and in anticipation of

the expiry or termination of the Agreement and irrespective of the identity of any potential or actual Replacement SI, the existing SI shall comply with all reasonable requests by the STATE BANK OF INDIA to provide information relating to the operation of the Services, including but not limited to equipment, hardware, software, firmware used, inter-working, coordinating with other application owners, access to and provision of all performance reports, agreed procedures, and any other relevant information (including the configurations set up for the STATE BANK OF INDIA and procedures used by the existing SI for handling Data) reasonably necessary to achieve an effective transition, provided that:

3.2.1.1. the existing SI shall not be obliged to provide any information concerning the costs of

delivery of the Services or any part thereof or disclose the financial records of the SI to any such party;

3.2.1.2. the existing SI shall not be obliged to disclose any such information for use by an actual or potential Replacement SI unless such a party shall have entered into a confidentiality agreement; and

3.2.1.3. Whilst supplying information as contemplated in this paragraph 3.2.1 the existing SI shall provide sufficient information to comply with the reasonable requests of the STATE BANK OF INDIA to enable an effective tendering process to take place but shall not be required to provide information or material which the SI may not disclose as a matter of law.




28

3.3. In assisting the STATE BANK OF INDIA and/or the Replacement SI to transfer the Services the following commercial approach shall apply:

3.3.1. Where the existing SI does not have to utilize resources in addition to those normally used to deliver the Services prior to termination or expiry, the existing SI shall make no additional Charges. The STATE BANK OF INDIA may reasonably request that support and materials already in place to provide the Services may be redeployed onto work required to effect the transition provided always that where the STATE BANK OF INDIA agrees in advance that such redeployment will prevent the SI from meeting any Service Levels, achieving any other key dates or from providing any specific deliverables to the STATE BANK OF INDIA, the STATE BANK OF INDIA shall not be entitled to claim any penalty or liquidated damages for the same. Where any support and materials necessary to undertake the transfer work or any costs incurred by existing SI are additional to those in place as part of the proper provision of the Services. The STATE BANK OF INDIA shall pay the existing SI for staff time agreed in advance at the rates agreed between the parties and for materials and other costs at a reasonable price which shall be agreed with the STATE BANK OF INDIA.

3.4. If so required by the STATE BANK OF INDIA, on the provision of no less than six (6) months’ notice in

writing, the SI shall continue to provide the Services or an agreed part of the Services for a period not less than ___month and not exceeding __ months beyond the date of termination or expiry of the Agreement. In such event the STATE BANK OF INDIA shall reimburse the existing SI for such elements of the Services as are provided beyond the date of termination or expiry date of the Agreement on the basis that:

a) materials and other costs will be charged at a reasonable price which shall be agreed between the Parties; and/or

b) any other fees agreed between the Parties at the time of termination or expiry.

3.5. The existing SI shall provide to the STATE BANK OF INDIA an analysis of the Services to the extent reasonably necessary to enable the STATE BANK OF INDIA to plan migration of such workload to a Replacement SI provided always that this analysis involves providing performance data already delivered to the STATE BANK OF INDIA as part of the performance monitoring regime.

3.6. The SI shall provide such information as the STATE BANK OF INDIA reasonably considers to be necessary for the actual Replacement SI, or any potential Replacement SI during any procurement process, to define the tasks which would need to be undertaken in order to ensure the smooth transition of all or any part of the Services.

3.7. the existing SI shall make available such Key Personnel who have been involved in the provision of the Services as the Parties may agree to assist the STATE BANK OF INDIA or a Replacement SI (as appropriate) in the continued support of the Services beyond the expiry or termination of the Agreement, in which event the STATE BANK OF INDIA shall pay for the services of such Key Personnel on a time and materials basis at the rates agreed between the parties.

3.8. The existing SI shall co-operate with the STATE BANK OF INDIA during the handover to a Replacement SI and such co-operation shall extend to, but shall not be limited to, inter-working, coordinating and access to and provision of all operational and performance documents, reports, summaries produced by the existing SI for the STATE BANK OF INDIA, including the configurations set up for the STATE BANK OF INDIA and any and all information to be provided by the existing SI to the STATE BANK OF INDIA under any other term of this Agreement necessary to achieve an effective transition without disruption to routine operational requirements.

4. Replacement SI 4.1. In the event that the Services are to be transferred to a Replacement SI, the STATE BANK OF INDIA

will use reasonable endeavors to ensure that the Replacement SI co-operates with the existing SI during the handover of the Services.




29

5. Subcontractors 5.1. The existing SI agrees to provide the STATE BANK OF INDIA with details of the Subcontracts used in

the provision of the Services. The existing SI will not restrain or hinder its Subcontractors from entering into agreements with other prospective SIs for the delivery of supplies or services to the Replacement SI.

6. Transfer of Configuration Management Database 6.1. Six (6) months prior to expiry or within 2 (two) week of notice of termination of this Agreement the

existing SI shall deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA a full, accurate and up to date cut of content from the Configuration Management Database (or equivalent) used to store details of Configurable Items and Configuration Management data for all products used to support delivery of the Services.

7. Transfer of Assets 7.1. Six (6) months prior to expiry or within 2 (two) week of notice of termination of the Agreement the existing

SI shall deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA the Asset Register comprising: (1) a list of all Assets eligible for transfer to the STATE BANK OF INDIA; and

(2) a list identifying all other Assets, (including human resources, skillset requirement and know-how), that are ineligible for transfer but which are essential to the delivery of the Services. The purpose of each component and the reason for ineligibility for transfer shall be included in the list.

7.2. Within one (1) month of receiving the Asset Register as described above, the STATE BANK OF INDIA

shall notify the existing SI of the Assets it requires to be transferred, (the “Required Assets”), and the STATE BANK OF INDIA and the existing SI shall provide for the approval of the STATE BANK OF INDIA a draft plan for the Asset transfer.

7.3. In the event that the Required Assets are not located on STATE BANK OF INDIA premises:

(1) the existing SI shall be responsible for the dismantling and packing of the Required Assets and to ensure their availability for collection by the STATE BANK OF INDIA or its authorized representative by the date agreed for this;

(2) any charges levied by the existing SI for the Required Assets not owned by the STATE BANK OF INDIA shall be fair and reasonable in relation to the condition of the Assets and the then fair market value; and

(3) for the avoidance of doubt, the STATE BANK OF INDIA will not be responsible for the Assets. 7.4 The existing SI warrants that the Required Assets and any components thereof transferred to the STATE

BANK OF INDIA or Replacement SI benefit from any remaining manufacturer’s warranty relating to the Required Assets at that time, always provided such warranties are transferable to a third party.

8. Transfer of Software Licenses 8.1. Six (6) months prior to expiry or within two (2) week of notice of termination of this Agreement the

existing SI shall deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA all licenses for Software used in the provision of Services which were purchased by the STATE BANK OF INDIA.

8.2. On notice of termination of this Agreement the existing SI shall, within 2 (two) week of such notice, deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA details of all licenses for SI’s Software and SI’s Third Party Software used in the provision of the Services, including the terms of the software license agreements. For the avoidance of doubt, the STATE BANK OF INDIA shall be responsible for any costs incurred in the transfer of licenses from the existing SI to the STATE BANK OF INDIA or to a Replacement SI provided such costs shall be agreed in advance. Where transfer is not possible or not economically viable the Parties will discuss alternative licensing arrangements.

8.3. Within one (1) month of receiving the software license information as described above, the STATE BANK OF INDIA shall notify the existing SI of the licenses it wishes to be transferred, and the existing SI shall




30

provide for the approval of the STATE BANK OF INDIA a draft plan for license transfer, covering novation of agreements with relevant software providers, as required. Where novation is not possible or not economically viable the Parties will discuss alternative licensing arrangements.

9. Transfer of Software 9.1 Wherein State Bank of India is the owner of the software, six (6) months prior to expiry or within two (2)

weeks of notice of termination of this Agreement the existing SI shall deliver, or otherwise certify in writing that it has delivered, to the STATE BANK OF INDIA a full, accurate and up to date version of the Software including up to date versions and latest releases of, but not limited to:

(a) source code (with source tree) and associated documentation; (b) application architecture documentation and diagrams; (c) release documentation for functional, technical and interface specifications; (d) a plan with allocated resources to handover code and design to new development and test teams

(this should include architectural design and code ‘walk-through’); (e) source code and supporting documentation for testing framework tool and performance tool; (f) test director database; (g) test results for the latest full runs of the testing framework tool and performance tool on each

environment; and

10. Transfer of Documentation 10.1. Six (6) months prior to expiry or within two (2) weeks of notice of termination of this Agreement the

existing SI shall deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA a full, accurate and up-to date set of Documentation that relates to any element of the Project.

11. Transfer of Service Management Process 11.1. Six (6) months prior to expiry or within two (2) weeks of notice of termination of this Agreement the

existing SI shall deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA:

(a) a plan for the handover and continuous delivery of the Service Desk function and allocate the required resources;

(b) full and up to date, both historical and outstanding Service Desk ticket data including, but not limited to:

(1) Incidents;

(2) Problems;

(3) Service Requests;

(4) Changes;

(5) Service Level reporting data;

(c) a list and topology of all tools and products associated with the provision of the Software and the Services;

(d) full content of software builds and server configuration details for software deployment and management; and

(e) monitoring software tools and configuration.

12. Transfer of Knowledge Base 12.1 Six (6) months prior to expiry or within two (2) weeks of notice of termination of this Agreement the

existing SI shall deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA a full, accurate and up to date cut of content from




31

the knowledge base (or equivalent) used to troubleshoot issues arising with the Services but shall not be required to provide information or material which the SI may not disclose as a matter of law.

13. Transfer of Service Structure 13.1 Six (6) months prior to expiry or within two (2) weeks’ notice of termination of this Agreement the

existing SI shall deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA a full, accurate and up to date version of the following, as a minimum:

(a) archive of records including:

(1) Questionnaire Packs;

(2) project plans and sign off;

(3) Acceptance Criteria; and

(4) Post Implementation Reviews.

(b) program plan of all work in progress currently accepted and those in progress;

(c) latest version of documentation set;

(d) source code (if appropriate) and all documentation to support the services build tool with any documentation for ‘workarounds’ that have taken place;

(e) source code, application architecture documentation/diagram and other documentation;

(f) source code, application architecture documentation/diagram and other documentation for Helpdesk; and

(g) project plan and resource required to hand Service Structure capability over to the new team.

14. Transfer of Data 14.1 In the event of expiry or termination of this Agreement, the existing SI shall cease to use the STATE

BANK OF INDIA Data and, at the request of the STATE BANK OF INDIA, shall destroy all such copies of the STATE BANK OF INDIA Data then in its possession to the extent specified by the STATE BANK OF INDIA.

14.2 Except where, pursuant to paragraph 14.1 above, the STATE BANK OF INDIA has instructed the existing SI to destroy such STATE BANK OF INDIA Data as is held and controlled by the existing SI, one (1) month prior to expiry or within one (1) month of termination of this Agreement, the existing SI shall deliver to the STATE BANK OF INDIA: (1) An inventory of the STATE BANK OF INDIA Data held and controlled by the existing SI, plus any

other data required to support the Services; and/or (2) a draft plan for the transfer of the STATE BANK OF INDIA Data held and controlled by the existing

SI and any other available data to be transferred.

15. Training Services on Transfer 15.1 The existing SI shall comply with the STATE BANK OF INDIA’s reasonable request to assist in the

identification and specification of any training requirements following expiry or termination. The purpose of such training shall be to enable the STATE BANK OF INDIA or a Replacement SI to adopt, integrate and utilize the Data and Assets transferred and to deliver an equivalent service previously provided by the existing SI.

15.2 The provision of any training services and/or deliverables and the charges for such services and/or deliverables shall be agreed between the parties.




32

15.3 Subject to paragraph 15.2 above, the existing SI shall produce for the STATE BANK OF INDIA’s consideration and approval six (6) months prior to expiry or within ten (10) Working Days of issue of notice of termination: (1) A training strategy, which details the required courses and their objectives;

(2) Training materials (including assessment criteria); and

(3) A training plan of the required training events. 15.4 Subject to paragraph 15.2 above, the SI shall schedule all necessary resources to fulfil the training plan,

and deliver the training as agreed with the STATE BANK OF INDIA.

15.5 SI shall provide training courses on operation of licensed /open source software product at STATE BANK OF INDIA’s Hinjewadi, Pune Premises, at such times, during business hours as STATE BANK OF INDIA may reasonably request. Each training course per day will last for minimum__hours. STATE BANK OF INDIA may enroll up to ________ of its staff or ________ employees of the new/replacement SI in any training course, and the SI shall provide a hard copy of the Product (licensed or open sourced) standard training manual for each enrollee. Each training course will be taught by a technical expert with no fewer than ……………. Years of experience in operating ……………….. software system. SI shall provide the …………………. training without any additional charges.

16. Transfer Support Activities 16.1 Six (6) months prior to expiry or within ten (10) Working Days of issue of notice of termination, the SI

shall assist the STATE BANK OF INDIA or Replacement SI to develop a viable exit transition plan which shall contain details of the tasks and responsibilities required to enable the transition from the Services provided under this Agreement to the Replacement SI or the STATE BANK OF INDIA, as the case may be.

16.2 The exit transition plan shall be in a format to be agreed with the STATE BANK OF INDIA and shall include, but not be limited to: (1) a timetable of events;

(2) resources;

(3) assumptions;

(4) activities;

(5) responsibilities; and

(6) risks.

16.3 The existing SI shall supply to the STATE BANK OF INDIA or a Replacement SI specific materials including but not limited to: (a) Change Request log;

(b) entire back-up history; and

(c) dump of database contents including the Asset Register, problem management system and operating procedures. For the avoidance of doubt this shall not include proprietary software tools of the SI which are used for project management purposes generally within the SI's business.

16.4 The existing SI shall supply to the STATE BANK OF INDIA or a Replacement SI proposals for the

retention of Key Personnel for the duration of the transition period.

16.5 On the date of expiry the existing SI shall provide to the STATE BANK OF INDIA refreshed versions of the materials required under paragraph 16.3 above which shall reflect the position as at the date of expiry.




33

16.6 The existing SI shall provide to the STATE BANK OF INDIA or to any Replacement SI within fourteen (14) Working Days of expiry or termination a full and complete copy of the Incident log book and all associated documentation recorded by the SI till the date of expiry or termination.

16.7 The existing SI shall provide for the approval of the STATE BANK OF INDIA a draft plan to transfer or complete work-in-progress at the date of expiry or termination.

17. Use of STATE BANK OF INDIA Premises 17.1 Prior to expiry or on notice of termination of this Agreement, the existing SI shall provide for the approval

of the STATE BANK OF INDIA a draft plan specifying the necessary steps to be taken by both the existing SI and the STATE BANK OF INDIA to ensure that the STATE BANK OF INDIA’s Premises are vacated by the existing SI.

17.2 Unless otherwise agreed, the existing SI shall be responsible for all costs associated with the vacation of the STATE BANK OF INDIA’s Premises, removal of equipment and furnishings, redeployment of SI’s Personnel, termination of arrangements with Subcontractors and service contractors and restoration of the STATE BANK OF INDIA Premises to their original condition (subject to a reasonable allowance for wear and tear).

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this annexure to be executed by their duly authorized representatives as of ……………..day of ……………...

State Bank of India Systems Integrator By: By: Name: Name: Designation: Designation: Date: Date: WITNESS: 1. 1.




34

Annexure-N: Standard specification for Health safety and environment management at Data Center

1. Scope

This scope specifies the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) management requirement to be complied by System Integrator (SI) including their sub-contractors during the entire term of the contract. This specification is not intended to replace the necessary professional judgment needed to design & implement an effective HSE system for construction activities and the SI is expected to fulfill HSE requirements in this specification as a minimum. It is expected that SI shall implement the best HSE practices beyond whatever are mentioned in this specification. Requirements stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirements of HSE Management mentioned in relevant Act(s)/legislations, General Conditions of Contract (GCC), Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) and Job (Technical) Specifications. Where different documents stipulate different requirements, the most stringent shall apply.

2. References

The document should be read in conjunction with following:

• General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

• Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)

• Building and other construction workers Act

• Indian Factories Act

• Job (Technical) specifications

• Relevant International / National Codes (refer Appendix-A for standards/codes on HSE)

• Statutory requirements.

3. Requirements Of Health, Safety & Environment (HSE) Management System To Be Complied By Bidders 3.1 Management Responsibility

3.1.1 HSE Policy and Objectives

The SI should have a documented HSE policy & objectives to demonstrate commitment of their organization to ensure health, safety and environment aspects in their line of operations. HSE Policy of the SI shall be made available to SBI as a valid document.

3.1.2 Management System

The HSE management system of the SI shall cover the HSE requirements & commitments to fulfill them, including but not limited to what are specified under clause 1.0 and 2.0 above.

3.1.3 Indemnification

SI shall indemnify & hold harmless, SBI & their representatives, free from any and all liabilities arising out of non-fulfillment of HSE requirements or its consequences.

3.1.4 Deployment & qualifications of safety personnel

The SI shall designate/deploy various categories of HSE personnel at site as indicated below:

a. Safety Steward

One for every 100 staff/workers or part thereof. He / She shall possess minimum one year of practical experience in construction work environment and preferably have adequate knowledge of the language spoken by majority of the workers at the construction site.




35

b. Safety Supervisor

One for every 100 staff/workers or part thereof. As a minimum. He / She minimum two years of practical experience in construction work environment and should possess requisite skills to deal with construction safety & fire related day-to-day issues.

c. Safety Officer / Safety Engineer

One for every 100 staff/workers or part thereof shall be deployed.

Safety Officer/Engineer Should Possess following Qualification & Experience: i. Recognized degree in any branch of Engineering or Technology or Architecture with

practical experience of working in a building or other construction work in supervisory capacity for a period of not less than two years, or possessing recognized diploma in any branch of Engineering or Technology with practical experience of building or other construction work in supervisory capacity for a period of not less than five years.

ii. Recognized degree or diploma in Industrial safety with one paper in Construction Safety iii. Preferably have adequate knowledge of the language spoken by majority of the workers at

the construction site. iv. Person possessing Graduation Degree in Science with Physics & Chemistry and degree or

diploma in Industrial Safety (from any Indian institutes recognized by AICTE or State Council of Tech. Education of any Indian State) with practical experience of working in a building, plant or other construction works (as Safety Officer, in line with Indian Factories Act, 1958) for a period of not less than five years, may be considered as Safety Officer, in case SBI agrees/approves the same.

d. HSE In-Charge

i. The senior most official by experience in HSE discipline, may be designated as HSE In-Charge. The person should regularly primarily coordinate with top management of SBI and SI.

ii. In case the statutory requirements i.e. State or Central Acts and / or Rules as applicable like the Building and Other Construction Workers’ Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service- Act or State Act or Rules wherever notified, the Factories Act or Rules wherever notified, etc. are more stringent than above, the same shall be followed.

iii. SI shall ensure physical availability of safety personnel at the place of specific work location, where Hot Work Permit is required. No work shall be started at any of the project sites until safety personnel & concerned Site Engineer of SI are physically present at site. The SI shall submit a HSE organogram clearly indicating the lines of responsibility and reporting system and elaborate the responsibilities of safety personnel in their HSE Plan.

iv. The SI shall verify & authenticate credentials of such safety personnel and furnish Bio-Data/ Resume/ Curriculum Vitae of the safety personnel as above for SBI’s approval, at least 1 month before the mobilization.

v. Imposition / Realization of penalty shall not absolve the SI from his/her responsibility of deploying competent safety officer at site. Adequate planning and deployment of safety personnel shall be ensured by the SI so that field activities do not get affected because of non-deployment of competent & qualified safety people in appropriate numbers

3.1.5 Implementation, Inspection/Monitoring

a. The SI shall be fully responsible for planning, implementing reporting, and monitoring all

HSE requirements and compliance of all laws & statutory requirements. b. The SI shall also ensure that the HSE requirements are clearly understood & implemented

accurately by their site personnel at all levels at site. c. SI shall furnish their annual inspection plan, with regards to project issues /subjects,

frequency and performers to SBI. d. The SI shall regularly review inspection report internally and implement all practical steps /

actions for improving the status continuously.




36

e. The SI shall carry out daily inspection to identify various unsafe conditions of work sites/equipment as well as unsafe acts on the part of workmen/supervisor/engineer while carrying out different project related works.

f. Adequate records for all inspections shall be maintained by the SI and the same shall be furnished to SBI, whenever sought.

g. The SI shall not carry-out work by engaging single worker anywhere without any supervisor anytime during day or night.

h. To demonstrate involvement/commitment of site management of SI, at least one Safety Walk through in a month shall be carried out by SI’s head of site (along with his area manager/field engineers) and a report shall be furnished to SBI as per format No: HSE-1” Safety walk through report” followed by compliance for unsatisfactory remarks.

i. Site facilities /installations/ equipment, e.g. DG-room, Electrical panels/distribution boards, etc. and site welfare facilities, such as canteen/pantry, parking-shed, First-aid centers, urinals/toilets, etc. should be periodically inspected by SI and records to be maintained.

3.1.6 Fire Prevention & First-Aid

i. The SI shall arrange suitable First-aid measures such as First Aid Box (Refer Appendix-B for details), trained personnel/nurse (male) to administer First Aid, stand-by Ambulance vehicle and

ii. The SI shall arrange installation of fire protection measures such as adequate number of steel buckets with sand & water and adequate number of appropriate portable fire extinguishers (Refer Appendix-C for details) to the satisfaction of SBI.

iii. The SI shall deploy trained supervisory personnel / field engineers to cater to any emergency situation.

iv. In case the number of workers exceeds 200 during civil, the SI shall position an Ambulance / vehicle and nurse on round the clock basis very close to the worksite.

v. In case the number of workers exceeds 100 during Operations phase, the SI shall position an Ambulance / vehicle and nurse on round the clock basis very close to the worksite.

3.1.7 Awareness and Motivation

a. The SI shall promote and develop awareness on Health, Safety and Environment protection among all personnel working for the SI and the visitors.

b. Regular awareness programs and fabrication shop / work site meetings at least on monthly basis shall be arranged on HSE activities to cover hazards/risks involved in various operations during construction.

c. SI to motivate & encourage entire staff by awarding them with tokens/ gifts/ mementos/ monetary incentives / certificates, etc.

d. Verbal warning will be issued to the worker upon first Violation of HSE and a written warning will be issued after second violation. A record of violations and warnings should be maintained by the SI.

3.1.8 Documentation

The SI shall evolve a comprehensive, planned and documented system covering the following as a minimum for implementation and monitoring of the HSE requirements and the same shall be submitted for approval to the Bank. a. HSE Organogram b. Site specific HSE Plan c. Inspections and Test Plan d. Risk Assessment & Job Safety Analysis for critical works. e. The monitoring for implementation shall be done by regular inspections and compliance of the

observations thereof. f. The SI shall get similar HSE requirements implemented at his sub-contractor (s) work

site/office. However, compliance of HSE requirements shall be the responsibility of the SI. Any review/approval by SBI shall not absolve SI of his responsibility/liability in relation to fulfilling all HSE requirements.

3.1.9 Audit




37

The SI shall submit an Audit Plan to SBI indicating the type of audits and covering following as minimum: a) Internal HSE audits regularly at least on quarterly basis by engaging internal qualified auditors

(viz. safety officers/Construction personnel having 5 years experience in construction safety and Lead Auditor Course :OSHA 18001certification).

b) External HSE audits regularly at least on every six months by engaging qualified external auditors (viz. safety officers/Construction personnel having 10 years experience in construction safety and Lead Auditor Course :OSHA 18001certification).

c) All HSE shortfalls/ non-conformances brought out during the audit, shall be resolved forthwith (generally within a week) by SI & compliance report shall be submitted to SBI.

d) In addition to above audits by SI, the SI’s work shall be subjected to HSE audit by SBI at any point of time during the pendency of contract. The SI shall take all actions required to comply with the findings of the Audit Report and issue regular Compliance Reports for the same to the SBI till all the findings of the Audit Report are fully complied.

e) Failure to carry-out HSE Audits & its compliance (internal & external) by SI, shall invite penalization.

3.1.10 Meetings

a) The SI shall ensure participation of his top most executive at site (viz. Resident Construction Manager / Resident Engineer / Project Manager / Site-in-Charge) in HSE Committee meetings arranged by SBI usually on monthly basis or as and when called for. In case SI’s top most executive at site is not in a position to attend such meeting, he shall inform SBI in writing before the commencement of such meeting indicating reasons of his absence and nominate his representative – failure to do so may invite very stringent penalization against the specific SI, as deemed fit in Contract.

b) In addition, the SI shall also arrange internal HSE meetings chaired by his top most executive at site on weekly basis and maintain records.

3.1.11 Intoxicating drinks & drugs and Smoking

a) The SI shall ensure that his staff members & workers (permanent as well casual) shall not be in a state of intoxication during working hours and shall abide by any law relating to consumption & possession of intoxicating drinks or drugs in force.

b) Awareness about local laws on this issue shall form part of the Induction Training and compulsory work-site discipline.

c) The SI shall ensure that all personnel working for him comply with “No-Smoking” requirements of the SBI as notified from time to time. Cigarettes, lighters, auto ignition tools or appliances as well as intoxicating drinks, drugs, dry tobacco powder, etc. shall not be allowed inside the project / plant complex.

d) Smoking shall be permitted only inside smoking booths exclusively designated & authorized by the SBI.

3.1.12 Penalty

As defined in Annexure-R

3.1.13 Accident/ Incident investigation

All accidents / incidents shall be informed to the SBI on Format No. HSE-2 by SI. Thereafter, a Supplementary Accident / Incident investigation Report on Format No. HSE-3 shall be submitted to SBI within 72 hours. Near Miss incident(s), dangerous accidents/incident shall also be reported on Format No. HSE-4 within 24 hours. The accident/ incident shall be investigated by a team of SI’s senior Site personnel (involving Site in-Charge or at least by his deputy) for establishing root-cause and recommending corrective & preventive actions. Findings shall be documented and suitable actions taken to avoid recurrences shall be communicated to SBI. SBI shall have the liberty to independently investigate such occurrences and the SI shall extend all necessary help and cooperation in this regard. SBI shall have the right to share the content of this report with the outside world.

3.2 House Keeping




38

The SI shall ensure that a high degree of housekeeping is maintained and shall ensure inter alia; the followings:

a. All surplus earth and debris should be removed/disposed of from the working areas to designated location(s).

b. Unused/surplus cables, steel items and steel scrap lying scattered at different places within the working areas are removed to identify location(s).

c. All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible packing materials, shall be removed from work place to identified location(s).

d. Roads shall be kept clear and materials like pipes, steel, sand, boulders, concrete, chips and bricks etc. shall not be allowed on the roads to obstruct free movement of men & machineries.

e. Fabricated steel structural, pipes & piping materials shall be stacked properly for erection. f. Water logging on roads shall not be allowed. g. No parking of trucks/trolleys, cranes and trailers etc. shall be allowed on roads, which may obstruct

the traffic movement. h. Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and proper upkeep of the working areas. i. Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverized materials etc. shall be covered while moving within the

plant area/ or these materials shall be transported with top surface wet. j. The SI shall ensure that the atmosphere in plant area and on roads is free from particulate matter like

dust, sand, etc. by keeping the top surface wet for ease in breathing. k. At least two exits for any unit area shall be assured at all times – same arrangement is preferable for

digging pits / trench excavation / elevated work platforms / confined spaces etc. l. Schedule for upkeep/cleaning of site to be firmed up and implemented on regular basis.

3.3 HSE Measures

3.3.1 Construction Hazards

The SI shall ensure identification of all Occupational Health, Safety & Environmental hazards in the type of work he is going to undertake and enlist mitigation measures. SI shall carry out Job Safety Analysis (JSA)/Risk Analysis specifically for high risk jobs/critical jobs like

a. Working at height. b. Work in confined space, c. Deep excavations & trench cutting d. Shuttering / concreting for columns, parapets & roofs. e. Radiography jobs f. Work in Live Electrical installations / circuits g. Handling of explosives & Blasting operations h. Demolishing / dismantling activities i. Welding / gas cutting jobs at height. j. Calibration of equipment, instruments and functional tests at yards / work-sites.

The necessary HSE measures devised shall be put in to place, prior to start of an activity & also shall be maintained during the course of works, by the SI. Copies of such JSAs shall be kept available at work sites by the SI to enable all concerned carrying out checks / verification.

A list of typical construction hazards along with their effects & preventive measures is given in Appendix-E.

3.3.2 Accessibility

3.3.2.1 The SI shall provide safe means of access(in sufficient numbers) & efficient exit to any working place including provisions of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various stages during all operations of the work for the safety of his workmen and SBI’s staff.

3.3.2.2 The access to operating plant / project complex shall be strictly regulated. Any person or vehicle entering such complex shall undergo identification check, as per the procedures in force.

3.3.3 Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs)




39

3.3.3.1 The SI shall ensure that all their staff, workers and visitors including their sub-contractor(s) have been issued (records to be kept) & wear appropriate PPEs like nape strap type safety helmets preferably with head & sweat band with 3/4” cotton chin strap (made of industrial HDPE), safety shoes with steel toe cap and antiskid sole, full body harness (CЄ marked and conforming to EN361), protective goggles, gloves, ear muffs, respiratory protective devices, etc. All these gadgets shall conform to applicable IS Specifications/CE or other applicable international standards.

3.3.3.2 SBI may issue a comprehensive color scheme for helmets to be used by various agencies. The SI shall follow the scheme issued by the SBI. All HSE personnel shall preferably wear dark color band on their helmet so that workmen can approach them for guidance during emergencies. HSE personnel shall preferably wear such dresses with fluorescent stripes, which are noticeable during night, when light falls on them.

3.3.3.3 For shot blasting, the usage of protective face shield and helmets, gauntlet and protective clothing is mandatory.

3.3.3.4 For off-shore jobs/contracts, SI shall provide PPEs (new) of all types to SBI & its personnel, at SI's cost. All personnel shall wear life jacket at all time.

3.3.3.5 An indicative list of HSE standards/codes is given under Appendix-A.

3.3.3.6 SI shall ensure procurement & usage of following safety equipment/ accessories (conforming to applicable IS mark / CE standard) by their staff, workmen & visitors including their sub-contractors all through the span of project:-

a. PPEs (Helmet, Spectacle, Ear-muff, Face shield, Hand gloves, Safety Shoes, Gum b. boot) c. Barricading tape / warning signs d. Rechargeable Safety torch (flame-proof) e. Safety nets (with tie-chords) f. Sound level meter g. Digital Lux meter h. Fire hoses & flow nozzles i. Fire blankets / Fire retardant cloth (with eyelets) j. Fall arresters k. Portable ladders (varying lengths) l. Life-lines (steel wire-rope, dia not less than 8.0 mm) m. Full body harness (double lanyard) n. Lanyard o. Karabiner p. Retractable fall arresters (various length) q. Portable fire extinguishers (DCP type) – 5 kg capacity r. Portable Multi Gas detector

3.3.4 Working at height

3.3.4.1 The SI shall issue permit for working at height after verifying and certifying the checkpoints as specified in the attached permit (Format No. HSE-6). He shall also undertake to ensure compliance to the conditions of the permit during the currency of the permit including adherence of personal protective equipment.

3.3.4.2 Such permit shall be initially issued for one week and further for balance duration of the project. This permit shall be applicable in areas where specific clearance from SBI’s operation Department /Safety Department is not required. SBI’s field Engineers/Safety Officers/Area Coordinators may verify and counter sign this permit (as an evidence of verification) during the execution of the job.

3.3.4.3 All personnel shall be medically examined & certified by registered doctor, confirming their ‘medical fitness for working at height. The fitness examination shall be done once in six months.

3.3.4.4 In case work is undertaken without taking sufficient precautions as given in the permit, SBI Engineers may exercise their authority to cancel such permit and stop the work till satisfactory compliance/rectification is arranged made. SIs are expected to maintain a register for issuance of permit and extensions thereof including preserving the used permits for verification during audits etc.




40

3.3.4.5 The SI shall arrange (at his cost) and ensure use of Fall Arrester Systems by his workers. Fall arresters are to be used while climbing/descending tall structures or vessels / columns etc. These arresters should lock automatically against the anchorage line, restricting free fall of the user. The device is to be provided with a double security opening system to ensure safe attachment or release of the user at any point of rope. In order to avoid shock, the system should be capable of keeping the person in vertical position in case of a fall.

3.3.4.6 The SI shall ensure that Full body harnesses conforming EN361 and having authorized CЄ marking is used by all personnel while working at height. The lanyards and life lines should have enough tensile strength to take the load of the worker in case of a fall. One end of the lanyard shall be firmly tied with the harnesses and the other end with life line. The harness should be capable of keeping the workman vertical in case of a fall, enabling him to rescue himself.

3.3.4.7 The SI shall provide Roof Top Walk Ladders for carrying out activities on sloping roofs in order to reduce the chances of slippages and falls.

3.3.4.8 The SI shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System is used wherever the hazard of fall from height is present. The safety net, preferably a knotted one with mesh ropes conforming to IS 5175/ ISO 1140 shall have a border rope & tie cord of minimum 12mm dia. The Safety Net shall be located not more than 6.0 meters below the working surface extending on either side up to sufficient margin to arrest fall of persons working at different heights.

3.3.4.9 The SI shall ensure positive isolation while working at different levels like in the pipe rack areas. The working platforms with toe boards & hand rails shall be sufficiently strong & shall have sufficient space to hold the workmen and tools & tackles including the equipment required for executing the job.

3.3.5 Scaffoldings & Barricading

3.3.5.1 Suitable scaffoldings shall be provided to workmen for all works that cannot be safely done from the ground or from solid construction except such short period work that can be safely done using ladders. When a ladder is used, an extra workman shall always be engaged for holding the ladder.

3.3.5.2 The SI shall ensure that the scaffolds used during construction activities shall be strong enough to take the designed load. SBI reserves the right to ask the SI to submit certification and or design calculations from his Head office / Design/ Engineering expert regarding load carrying capacity of the scaffoldings.

3.3.5.3 All scaffolds shall be inspected by a competent Scaffolding Inspector of the SI. He shall paste a GREEN tag (duly signed by competent Scaffolding Inspector) on each scaffold found safe and a RED tag (duly signed by competent Scaffolding Inspector) on each scaffold found unsafe. The Red tag scaffolds should be removed from site.

3.3.5.4 The SI shall ensure positive barricading (indicative as well as protective) of the excavated, radiography, heavy lift, high pressure hydrostatic & pneumatic testing and other such areas. Sufficient warning signs shall be displayed along the barricading areas.

3.3.6 Electrical installations

All electrical installations/ connections shall be carried out as per the provisions of latest revision of following codes/standards, in addition to the requirements of Statutory Authorities and IE/applicable international rules & regulations: - OISD STD 173 : Fire prevention & protection system for electrical installations - SP 30 (BIS) : National Electric Code All electrical installations shall be approved by the concerned statutory authorities. The SI shall meet the following requirements:

a. Ensure that electrical systems and equipment including tools & tackles used during the entire

term of the project phases are properly selected, installed, used and maintained as per provisions of the latest revision of the Indian Electrical/ applicable international regulations.

b. Shall deploy qualified & licensed electricians for proper & safe installation and for regular inspection of construction power distribution system/points including their earthing. A copy of the




41

license shall be submitted to SBI for records. Availability of at least one competent (ITI qualified) / licensed electrician (by State Elec. authorities) shall be ensured at site round the clock to attend to the normal/emergency jobs.

c. All switchboards / welding machines shall be kept in well-ventilated & covered shed/ with rain shed protection. The shed shall be elevated from the existing ground level to avoid water logging inside the shed. Installation of electrical switch board must be done taking care of the prevention of shock and safety of machine.

d. Fire extinguishers and insulating mats shall be provided in all power distribution centers. e. Temporary electrical equipment shall not be employed in hazardous area without obtaining

safety permit. f. Proper housekeeping shall be done around the electrical installations. g. All temporary installations shall be tested before energizing, to ensure proper earthing, bonding,

suitability of protection system, adequacy of feeders/cables etc. h. All welders shall use hand gloves irrespective of holder voltage. i. Multilingual (Hindi, English and local language) caution boards, shock treatment charts and

instruction plate containing location of isolation point for incoming supply, name & telephone No. of contact person in emergency shall be provided in substations and near all distribution boards / local panels.

j. Operation of earth leakage device shall be checked regularly by temporarily connecting series test lamp (2 bulbs of equal rating connected in series) between phase and earth.

k. Regular inspection of all installations at least once in a month. (Ref. Format HSE-12).

The following features shall also be ensured for all electrical installations during construction phase by the SI:

i. Each installation shall have a main switch with a protective device, installed in an enclosure

adjacent to the metering point. The main switch shall be connected to the point of supply by means of armored cable.

ii. The outgoing feeders shall be double or triple pole switches with fuses / MCBs. iii. The installation shall be adequately protected against overload, short circuit and earth leakage by

the use of suitable protective devices. Use of re-wirable fuses shall be strictly prohibited. iv. All connections to the hand tools / welding receptacles shall be taken through proper switches,

sockets and plugs. v. All single phase sockets shall be minimum 3 pin type only. All unused sockets shall be provided

with socket caps. vi. ON/OFF position of all switches shall be clearly designated / painted for easy isolation in

emergency.

3.3.7 Welding/ Gas cutting

3.3.7.1 SI shall ensure that flash back arrestors conforming to BS: 6158 or equivalent are installed on all gas cylinders as well as at the torch end of the gas hose, while in use.

3.3.7.2 All cylinders shall be mounted on trolleys and provided with a closing key.

3.3.7.3 The burner and the hose placed downstream of pressure reducer shall be equipped with Flash Back Arrester/Non Return Valve device.

3.3.7.4 The hoses for acetylene and oxygen cylinders must be of different colours. Their connections to cylinders and burners shall be made with a safety collar.

3.3.7.5 At end of work, the cylinders in use shall be closed and hoses depressurized.

3.3.7.6 Cutting of metals using gases, other than oxygen & acetylene, shall require written concurrence from SBI.

3.3.7.7 All welding machines shall have effective earthing at least at distinctly isolated two points.

3.3.7.8 In order to help maintain good housekeeping, and to reduce fire hazard, live electrode bits shall be contained safely and shall not be thrown directly on the ground.

3.3.8 Ergonomics and tools & tackles




42

3.3.8.1 The SI shall assign to his workmen, tasks commensurate with their qualification, experience and state of health.

3.3.8.2 All lifting tools, tackles, equipment, accessories including cranes shall be tested periodically by statutory/competent authority for their condition and load carrying capacity. Valid test & fitness certificates from the applicable authority shall be submitted to SBI for their review/acceptance before the lifting tools, tackles, equipment, accessories and cranes are used.

3.3.8.3 The SI shall not be allowed to use defective equipment or tools not adhering to safety norms.

3.3.8.4 SI shall arrange non-sparking tools for project construction works in operating plant areas / hydrocarbon prone areas.

3.3.8.5 Wherever required the SI shall make use of Elevated Work Platforms (EWP) or Aerial Work Platforms (mobile or stationary) to avoid ergonomical risks and workmen shall be debarred to board such elevated platform during the course of their shifting / transportation.

3.3.8.6 SI shall ensure installation of Safe Load Indicator (SLI) on all cranes (while in use) to minimize overloading risk. SLI shall have capability to continuously monitor and display the load on the hook, and automatically compare it with the rated crane capacity at the operating condition of the crane. The system shall also provide visual and audible warnings at set capacity levels to alert the operator in case of violations.

3.3.8.7 The SI shall be responsible for safe operations of different equipment mobilized and used by him at the workplace like transport vehicles, engines, cranes, mobile ladders, scaffoldings, work tools, etc.

3.3.9 Occupational Health

3.3.9.1 The SI shall identify all operations that can adversely affect the health of its workers and issue & implement mitigation measures.

3.3.9.2 For surface cleaning operations, sand blasting shall not be permitted even if not explicitly stated elsewhere in the contract.

3.3.9.3 To eliminate radiation hazard, Tungsten electrodes used for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding shall not contain Thorium.

3.3.9.4 Appropriate respiratory protective devices shall be used to protect workmen from inhalation of air borne contaminants like silica, asbestos, gases, fumes, etc.

3.3.9.5 Workmen shall be made aware of correct methods for lifting, carrying, pushing & pulling of heavy loads. Wherever possible, manual handling shall be replaced by mechanical lifting equipment.

3.3.9.6 For jobs like drilling/demolishing/dismantling where noise pollution exceeds the specified limit of 85 decibels, ear muffs shall be provided to the workers.

3.3.9.7 To avoid work related upper limb disorders and backaches, Display Screen Equipment' workplace stations shall be carefully designed & used with proper sitting postures. Power driven hand-held tools shall be maintained in good working condition to minimize their vibrating effects and personnel using these tools shall be taught how to operate them safely & how to maintain good blood circulation in hands.

3.3.9.8 The SI shall arrange health checkup for all the workers at the time of induction. Health check may have to be repeated if the nature of duty assigned to him is changed necessitating health check or doubt arises about his wellness. SBI reserves the right to ask the SI to submit medical test reports. Regular health check-ups are mandatory for the workers assigned with Welding, Radiography, Blasting, Painting, Heavy Lift and Height (>2m) jobs. All the health check-ups shall be conducted by registered Medical practitioner and records are to be maintained by the SI.

3.3.9.9 The SI shall ensure vaccination of all the workers including their families, during the course of entire project span.




43

3.3.10 Hazardous Substances

3.3.10.1 Hazardous, inflammable and/or toxic materials such as solvent coating, thinners, anti-termite solutions, water proofing materials shall be stored in appropriate containers preferably with lids having spillage catchment trays and shall be stored in a good ventilated area. These containers shall be labeled with the name of the materials highlighting the hazards associated with its use and necessary precautions to be taken.

3.3.10.2 Where contact or exposure of hazardous materials are likely to exceed the specified limit or otherwise have harmful effects, appropriate personal protective equipment such as gloves, goggles/face-shields, aprons, chemical resistant clothing, respirator, etc. shall be used.

3.3.10.3 The work place shall be checked prior to start of activities to identify the location, type and condition of any asbestos materials which could be disturbed during the work. In case asbestos material is detected, usage of appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs) by all personnel shall be ensured and the matter shall be reported immediately to SBI.

3.3.11 Radiation Exposure

3.3.11.1 All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing & non-ionizing radiation, including ultraviolet rays or similar other physical agents shall be provided with adequate shielding or protection commensurate with the type of exposure involved.

3.3.11.2 For Open Field Radiography works, requirements of Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC)/ Atomic Energy Regulatory Board (AERB) shall be followed.

3.3.12 Slips, trips & falls

The SI shall establish a regular cleaning and basic housekeeping program that covers all aspects of the workplace to help minimize the risk of slips, trips & falls. The SI shall take positive measures like keeping the work area tidy, storing waste in suitable containers & harmful items separately, keeping passages, stairways, entrances & exits especially emergency ones clear, cleaning up spillages immediately and replacing damaged carpet/ floor tiles, mats & rugs at once to avoid slips, trips & falls.

3.3.13 Explosives/Blasting operations

3.3.13.1 Blasting operations shall be carried out as per latest Explosive Rules (Indian / International) with prior permission. The SI shall obtain license from Chief Controller of Explosives (CCoE) for collection, transportation, storage of explosives as well as for carrying out blasting operations.

3.3.13.2 The SI shall prepare exclusive method statement (in cognizance with statutory requirements) for diffusing unfired explosives, if any, at project site before carrying out actual task. Nowhere blasting shall be carried out by the SI or its agency without the involvement of competent supervisor and licensed blaster / shot blaster.

3.3.14 Demolition/ Dismantling

3.3.14.1 The SI shall adhere to safe demolishing/ dismantling practices at all stages of work to guard against unsafe working practices.

3.3.14.2 The SI shall disconnect service lines (power, gas supply, water, etc.)/ make alternate arrangements prior to start of work and restore them, if required as directed by SBI at no extra cost.

3.3.14.3 Before carrying out any demolition/ dismantling work, the SI shall take prior approval of SBI and generate the Format No.HSE-9. For revamp jobs in operating plants where location of underground utilities is not known with certainty, the SI shall depute an experienced engineer for supervision and shall make adequate arrangements for fire-fighting & First-Aid during the execution of these activities.




44

3.3.15 Road Safety

3.3.15.1 The SI shall ensure adequately planned road transport safety management system. The vehicles shall be fitted with reverse warning alarms & flashing lights / fog-lights and usage of seat belts shall be ensured.

3.3.15.2 The SI shall also ensure a separate pedestrian route for safety of the workers and comply with all traffic rules & regulations. The maximum allowable speed shall be adhered to.

3.3.15.3 In case of an alert or emergency, the SI must arrange clearance of all the routes, roads, access. The SI shall deploy sufficient number of traffic controllers at project site routes / roads/ accesses, to alert reversing movement of vehicles & machinery as well as pedestrians.

3.3.15.4 Dumpers, Tippers, etc. shall not be allowed to carry workers within the plant area and also to & from the labour colony to & from project sites.

3.3.15.5 For pipeline jobs, the SI shall submit a comprehensive plan covering transportation, loading / unloading of pipes, movement of side booms, movement of vehicles on the ROW, etc.

3.3.16 Welfare Measures

SI shall, at the minimum, ensure the following facilities at work sites:

• A creche at site where 10 or more female workers are having children below the age of 6 years.

• Reasonable canteen facilities at site and in labour camps at appropriate location depending upon site conditions.

• Urinals, Toilets, drinking water, washing facilities, adequate lighting at site and labour camps, commensurate with applicable Laws / Legislation.

3.3.17 Environment Protection

3.3.17.1 SI shall ensure proper storage and utilization methodology of materials that are detrimental to the environment. Where required, SI shall ensure that only the environment friendly materials are selected and emphasize on recycling of waste materials, such as metals, plastics, glass, paper, oil & solvents. The waste that cannot be minimized, reused or recovered shall be stored and disposed of safely. In no way, toxic spills shall be allowed to percolate into the ground. The SI shall not use the empty areas for dumping the wastes.

3.3.17.2 The SI shall ensure dust free environment at workplace by sprinkling water on the ground at frequent intervals. The air quality parameters for dust, poisonous gases, toxic releases, harmful radiations, etc. shall be checked by the SI on daily basis and whenever need arises.

3.3.17.3 The SI shall strive to conserve energy and water wherever feasible.

3.3.17.4 The SI shall not be allowed to discharge chemicals, oil, silt, sewage, sullage and other waste materials directly into the controlled waters like surface drains, streams, rivers, ponds. A discharge plan suggesting the methods of treating the waste before discharging shall be submitted to SBI for approval.

3.3.17.5 For pipeline jobs, top soil shall be stacked separately while making ROW through fields. This fertile soil shall be placed back on top after backfilling.

3.3.17.6 For offshore construction barges, arrangements shall be made for safe disposal of human, food & other wastes and applicable laws in this regard shall be followed.




45

3.3.18 Rules & Regulations

All persons deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply with the environmental laws, rules & regulations relating to the hazardous materials, substances and wastes. SI shall not dump, release or otherwise discharge or disposes off any such materials without the express authorization of SBI. An indicative list of Statutory Acts & Rules relating to HSE is given under Appendix-D.

3.3.19 Weather Protection

SI shall take appropriate measures to protect workers from solar radiations, severe storms, rain, poisonous gases, dust, etc. by ensuring proper usage of PPEs like Sun glasses, Sun screen lotions, respirators, dust masks, etc. and rearranging/ planning the construction activities to suit the weather conditions. Effective arrangement (without creating inconvenience to project facilities & permanent installations) for protecting workmen from hailstorm, drizzle in the form of temporary shelter shall be made at site.

3.3.20 Communication

All persons deployed at the work site shall have access to effective means of communication so that any untoward incident can be reported immediately and assistance sought by them. All health & safety information shall be communicated in a simple & clear language easily understood by the local workforce)

3.3.21 Confined Space Entry

The SI shall generate a work permit (Format No. HSE -7) before entering a confined space. People, who are permitted to enter into confined space, must be medically examined & certified by registered doctor, confirming their ‘medical fitness for working in confined space’. All necessary precautions mentioned therein shall be adhered to. An attendant shall be positioned outside a confined space for extending help during an emergency. All appropriate PPEs and air quality parameters shall be checked before entering a confined space. It shall be ensured that the piping of the equipment which has to be opened is pressure- free by checking that blinds are in place, vents are open and volume is drained. Inside confined space works, only electrical facilities / installations of 24V shall be permitted. Contactor shall ensure usage of safe & suitable arrangement of oxygen supply for individual workmen (during the course of work in confined space), if oxygen concentration is found to be less than 19.5% (v/v) there.

3.3.22 Heavy Lifts

3.3.22.1 The SI shall submit detailed rigging studies plan for SBI approval prior to lifting equipment which cannot be erected with a crane due to constraints of its dimensions, location of foundation height, approach & weight.

3.3.22.2 SI shall generate the format no:HSE-15 “Permit for heavy lift/critical erection”

3.3.22.3 Prior to actual lifting activities, SI shall check the validity of the crane inspection certificate issued by statutory/ competent authority. This requirement shall also apply to all rigging equipment utilized for the job.

3.3.22.4 The SI shall, at all times, be responsible for all rigging activities.

3.3.22.5 The SI shall ensure medical fitness of all workmen who are engaged / involved in erection of equipment, vessels etc. and such fitness checks shall be carried-out every six months interval with the help of a registered medical practitioner & record shall be maintained

3.3.22.6 Adequate safety measures such as positive barricading, usage of appropriate PPEs, permit to work, etc. shall be taken during all heavy or critical lifts.




46

3.3.23 Key Performance Indicators

The SI shall measure an activity in both leading & trailing indicators for statistical and performance measurement. The activities pertaining to key performance indicators are covered in Monthly HSE Report (Format No. HSE-5). The SI shall try to achieve a statistically fair record and strive for its continual improvement.

3.3.24 Unsuitable Land Conditions

SI shall take appropriate measures and necessary work permits/clearances if work is to be done in or around marshy areas, river crossings, mountains, monuments, etc. The SI shall make right assessment and take all necessary action for developing work areas to make them safe & suitable for crane operations or other vehicular movement before carrying out any project related activity / operation. SI shall take all necessary actions to make the surroundings of its site establishments (site office, stores, lay-down area etc.) work-worthy safe and secure.

3.3.25 Under Water Inspection

SI shall ensure that boats and other means used for transportation, surveying & investigation works shall be certified seaworthy by a recognized classification society. It shall be equipped with all life saving devices like life jackets, adequate fire protection arrangements and shall possess communication facilities like cellular phones, wireless, walkie-talkie. All divers used for seabed surveys, underwater inspections shall have required authorized license, suitable lifesaving kit. Number of hours of work by divers shall be limited as per regulations. SBI shall have the right to inspect the boat and scrutinize documents in this regard.

3.3.26 Excavation

The SI shall obtain permission from competent authorities prior to excavation wherever required. The SI shall locate the position of buried utilities (water line, cable route, etc.) by referring to project / plant drawing / in consultation with SBI. The SI shall start digging manually to locate the exact position of buried utilities & thereafter use mechanical means.

3.4 Tool Box Talks (TBT)

3.4.1 SI shall conduct daily TBT with workers prior to start of work and shall maintain proper record of the meeting. A suggested format is given below. The TBT is to be conducted by the immediate supervisor of the workers

3.4.2 The SI shall conduct TBT before start of every morning or evening shift or night shift activities, for alerting the workers on specific hazards and their appropriate dos & don’ts. The SI shall provide sufficient rests to the site workmen and their foremen to avert fatigue & thereby endangering their lives during the course of site works.

TOOL BOX TALK RECORDING SHEET

Date & Time

Subject (Nature of work)

Presenter

Hazards involved

Precautions to be taken

1. 2. 3.

Workers Name Signature Section

Remarks, if any

The topics during TBT shall include - Hazards related to work assigned on that day and precautions to be taken. - Any forthcoming HSE hazards/events/instruction/orders, etc.




47

The above record can be kept in local language, which workers can read. These records shall be made available to SBI whenever demanded.

3.5 Training & Induction Program

3.5.1 Initial induction of workers into Construction oriented activities and appraising them about the methodology of works and how to carry-out safely and the same should not be inter mixed with Tool Box Talks or HSE Training. In this regard careful action should be made & maintained for imparting HSE induction to every individual, irrespective of his task/designation/level of employment, whereas, HSE Training should be imparted to specific person/group of people who are to carry-out that specific task more than once – for example, Riggers must be trained for working at heights, welders must be trained for work in confined space, fitters/carpenters, mesons must be trained for work at heights, etc.

3.5.2 SI shall conduct Safety induction program on HSE for all his workers and maintain records. The Gate Pass shall be issued only to those workers who successfully qualify the Safety induction program.

3.5.3 SI shall ensure that all his personnel possess appropriate training to carry out the assigned job safely. The training should be imparted in a language understood by them and should specifically be trained about

- Potential hazards to which they may be exposed at their workplace - Measures available for prevention and elimination of these hazards - The topics during training shall cover, at the minimum: -

- Why safety should be considered during work - explanation - Education about hazards and precautions required - Employees’ duties & responsibilities - Emergency and evacuation plan - HSE requirements during project activities - Firefighting and First-Aid - Use of PPEs - Occupational health issues – dos & don’ts - Local laws on intoxicating drinks, drugs, smoking in force

3.5.4 Records of the training shall be kept and submitted to SBI.

3.5.5 The SI shall make regular program for conducting Safety Training on various topics related to various activities & their safe-guarding utilizing experienced persons / outside agency / faculty.

3.6 Additional Safety Requirements for Working at Data Center Plant

3.6.1 As a minimum, the SI shall ensure adherence to following safety requirements while working in or in the close vicinity of an Data center:

3.6.2 SI shall obtain permits for hot work, Cold work, Excavation and Confined Space from SBI in the prescribed format.

3.6.3 The SI shall monitor record and compile list of his workers entering the Data center/unit each day and ensure & record their return after completing the job.

3.6.4 SI’s workers and staff members shall use designated entrances and proceed by designated routes to work areas only assigned to them. The workers shall not be allowed to enter units' area, tanks area, pump rooms, etc. without work authorization permit.

3.6.5 Work activities shall be planned in such a way so as to minimize the disruption of other activities being carried out in an operational plant/unit and activities of other SIs.

3.6.6 The SI shall submit a list of all chemicals/toxic substances that are intended to be used at site and shall take prior approval of the SBI.

3.6.7 Proper barricading/cordoning of the site shall be done before starting the construction activities. No unauthorized person shall be allowed to trespass. The height and overall design of the barricading structure shall be finalized in consultation with the SBI and shall get it approved.




48

3.6.8 Care shall be taken to prevent hitting underground facilities such as electrical cables, hydrocarbon piping during execution of work.

3.6.9 Emergency evacuation plan shall be worked out and all workmen shall be apprised about evacuation routes. Mock drill operations may also be conducted.

3.6.10 Flammable gas test shall be conducted prior to any hot work using appropriate measuring instruments. Sewers, drains, vents or any other gas escaping points shall be covered with flame retardant tarpaulin.

3.6.11 Respiratory devices shall be kept handy while working in confined zones where there is a danger of inhalation of poisonous gases.

3.6.12 Positive isolation of line/equipment by blinding for welding/cutting/grinding shall be done. Closing of valve will not be considered sufficient for isolation.

3.6.13 Welding spatters shall be contained properly and in no case shall be allowed to fall on the ground containing oil. Similar care shall be taken during cutting operations.

3.6.14 The vehicles, cranes, engines, etc. shall be fitted with spark arresters on the exhaust pipe and got it approved from Safety Department of the SBI.

3.6.15 Plant air should not be used to clean any part of the body or clothing or use to blow off dirt on the floor.

3.6.16 Gas detectors should be installed in gas leakage prone areas as per requirement of SBI's Data center operation personnel.

3.6.17 Experienced full time safety personnel shall be exclusively deployed to monitor safety aspects in running plants.

3.7 Self-Assessment and Enhancement

The SI shall develop a method of check & balance through self-assessment & enhancement techniques and shall explore the opportunities for continual improvement in the HSE system.

3.8 HSE Promotion

The SI shall encourage his workforce to promote HSE efforts at workplace by way of organizing workshops/seminars/training programs, celebrating HSE awareness weeks & National Safety Day, conducting quizzes & essay competitions, distributing pamphlets, posters & material on HSE, providing incentives for maintaining good HSE practices and granting incentives / bonus for completing the job without any lost time accident.

3.9 Details of HSE Management System By SI

3.9.1 On Award of Contract

The SI shall submit a comprehensive Health, Safety and Environment Plan or program for approval by SBI prior to start of work. HSE Plans which shall include the following:

i. HSE policy & Objectives ii. Job procedure to be followed by the SI for construction activities including handling of

equipment, scaffolding, electric installations, etc. describing the risks involved, actions to be taken and methodology for monitoring each activity.

iii. SBI review/audit requirement. iv. Organization structure along with responsibility and authority, on HSE activities. v. Administrative & disciplinary steps involving implementation of HSE requirements vi. Emergency evacuation plan/ procedures for site and labour camps vii. Job Safety Analysis for high risk jobs viii. Procedures for reporting & investigation of accidents and near misses. ix. HSE Inspection & Reporting x. HSE Training programs at project site




49

xi. HSE Awareness programs, at project site xii. Reference to Rules, Regulations and statutory requirements. xiii. HSE documentation viz. reporting, analysis & record keeping

3.9.2 During Job Execution

SI shall implement approved Health, Safety and Environment management program including but not limited to as brought out under para 3.0. SI shall also ensure:

i. to arrange workmen compensation insurance, registration under ESI Act, third party liability insurance, as applicable.

ii. to arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable), like permits for hot work, working at heights (Refer Format No. HSE-6), confined space (Refer Format No. HSE-7), Radiation Work Permit (Refer Format No. HSE-8), Demolishing/ Dismantling Work Permit (Refer Format No. HSE-9), storage of chemical / explosive materials & its use and implement all precautions mentioned therein. In this regard, requirements of Oil industry Safety Directorate Standard No. Std -105 "Work Permit Systems” shall be complied with while working in existing Oil or Gas processing plants. List of the persons involved shall be maintained as annexure to the work permit issued for a particular activity.

iii. to submit, timely, the completed checklist on HSE activities in Format No.HSE-1, Monthly HSE report in Format No.HSE-5, accident/ incident reports, investigation reports etc. as per SBI requirements. Compliance of instructions on HSE shall be done by SI and informed urgently to SBI.

iv. that his top most executive at site attends all the Safety Committee/HSE meetings arranged by SBI and carries out safety walk through regularly. Only in case of his absence from site that a second senior most person shall be nominated by him, in advance, and communicated to SBI for performing the above tasks.

v. display at site office and at prominent locations HSE Policy, caution boards, list of hospitals, emergency services available, safety signs like Men at work, Speed Limits, Hazardous Area, various do’s & don’ts, etc.

vi. provide posters, banners for safe working to promote safety consciousness. vii. identify, assess, analyze & mitigate the construction hazards viii. carryout audits/inspection (internal & external) at his works as well as sub contractor works as

per approved HSE plan/procedure/program & submit the compliance reports of identified shortfalls for SBI review.

ix. arranging HSE training for site workmen (of his own & sub contractors) through internal or external faculty at periodical intervals.

x. assistance & cooperate during HSE audits by SBI or any other 3rd party and submit compliance report.

xi. generate & submit of HSE records/report as per this specification. xii. apprise SBI on HSE activities at site regularly. xiii. carry-out all dismantling activities safely, with prior approval of SBI representative. xiv. SI shall ensure that “Hot works” and painting works do not continue at the same place /

location at project site for which chance or probability of “fire” incident exists.

4. During Short Listing of The Sub-contractors The SI shall review the HSE management system of the sub-contractors in line with the requirements given in this specification. The SI shall be held responsible for the shortcomings observed in the HSE management system of the sub-contractor (s) during execution of the job.

5. Records

At the minimum, the SI shall maintain/ submit HSE records in the following reporting formats/:

Checklist cum Compliance Report HSE-1

Accident/ Incident Report HSE-2

Supplementary Accident/ Incident Investigation report HSE-3

Near Miss Incident Report HSE-4




50

Monthly HSE Report HSE-5

Permit for working at height HSE-5

Permit for working in confined space HSE-7

Permit for radiation work HSE-8

Permit for demolishing/ dismantling HSE-9




51

APPENDIX-A

A. IS CODES ON HSE

SP: 53 Safety code for the use, Care and protection of hand operated tools.

IS: 838 Code of practice for safety & health requirements in electric and gas welding and cutting operations

IS: 1179 Eye & Face precautions during welding, equipment etc.

IS: 1860 Safety requirements for use, care and protection of abrasive grinding wheels.

IS: 1989 (Pt -II) Leather safety boots and shoes

IS: 2925 Industrial Safety Helmets

IS: 3016 Code of practice for fire safety precautions in welding & cutting operation.

IS: 3043 Code of practice for earthing

IS: 3764 Code of safety for excavation work

IS: 3786 Methods for computation of frequency and severity rates for industrial injuries and classification of industrial accidents

IS: 3996 Safety Code of scaffolds and ladders

IS: 4082 Recommendations on stacking and storage of construction materials and components at site

IS: 4770 Rubber gloves for electrical purposes

IS: 5121 Safety code for piling and other deep foundations

IS: 5216 (Pt-I) Recommendations on Safety procedures and practices in electrical works

IS: 5557 Industrial and Safety rubber lined boots

IS: 5983 Eye protectors

IS: 6519 Selection, care and repair of Safety footwear

IS: 6994 (Pt-I) Industrial Safety Gloves (Leather & Cotton Gloves)

IS: 7293 Safety Code for working with construction Machinery

IS: 8519 Guide for selection of industrial safety equipment for body protection

IS: 9167 Ear protectors

IS: 11006 Flash back arrestor (Flame arrestor)

IS: 11016 General and safety requirements for machine tools and their operation

IS: 11057 Specification for Industrial safety nets

IS: 11226 Leather safety footwear having direct molded rubber sole

IS: 11972 Code of practice for safety precaution to be taken when entering a sewerage system

IS: 13367 Code of practice-safe use of cranes

IS: 13416 Recommendations for preventive measures against hazards at working place

B. INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ON HSE

Safety Glasses ANSI Z 87.1, ANSI ZZ 87.1, AS 1337, BS 2092, BS 1542, BS 679, DIN 4646/ 58311

Safety Shoes ANSI Z 41.1, AS 2210, EN 345

Hand Gloves BS 1651

Ear Muffs BS 6344, ANSI S 31.9

Hard Hat ANSI Z 89.1/89.2, AS 1808, BS 5240, DIN 4840

Goggles ANSI Z 87.1

Face Shield ANSI Z 89.1

Breathing Apparatus BS 4667, NIOSH

Welding & Cutting ANSI Z 49.1

Safe handling of compressed

P-1 (Compressed Gas Association Gases in cylinders 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington VA 22202 - USA)

Full Body harness EN-361

Lanyard EN-354

Karabiner EN-362 and EN-12275




52

APPENDIX-B

DETAILS OF FIRST AID BOX

Sr.no Description Quantity

1. Small size Roller Bandages, 1 Inch Wide (Finger Dressing small)

6 Pcs.

2. Medium size Roller Bandages, 2 Inches Wide (Hand & Foot Dressing)

6 Pcs.

3. Large size Roller Bandages, 4 Inches Wide (Body Dressing Large)

6 Pcs.

4. Large size Burn Dressing (Burn Dressing Large) 4 Pkts

5. Cotton Wool(20 gms packing) 4 Pkts

6. Antiseptic Solution Dettol (100 ml.) or Savlon 1 Bottle

7. Mercurochrome Solution (100 ml.) 2% in water 1 Bottle

8. Ammonia Solution (20 ml.) 1 Bottle

9. A Pair of Scissors 1 Piece

10. Adhesive Plaster (1.25 cm X 5 m) 1 Spool

11. Eye pads in Separate Sealed Pkt. 4 pcs.

12. Tourniquet 1 No.

13. Safety Pins 1 Dozen

14. Tinc. Iodine/ Betadine (100 ml.) 1 Bottle

15. Polythene Wash cup for washing eyes 1 No.

16. Potassium Permanganate (20 gms.) 1 Pkt.

17. Tinc. Benzoin (100 ml.) 1 Bottle

18. Triangular Bandages 2 Nos.

19. Band Aid Dressing 5 Pcs.

20. Iodex/Moov (25 gms.) 1 Bottle

21. Tongue Depressor 1 No.

22. Boric Acid Powder (20 gms.) 2 Pkt.

23. Sodium Bicarbonate (20 gms.) 1 Pkt.

24. Dressing Powder (Nebasulf) (10 gms.) 1 Bottle

25. Medicinal Glass 1 No.

26. Duster 1 No.

27. Booklet (English & Local Language) 1 No. each

28. Soap 1 No.

29. Toothache Solution 1 No.

30. Vicks (22 gms.) 1 Bottle

31. Forceps 1 No.

32. Note Book 1 No.

33. Splints 4 Nos.

34. Lock 1 Piece

35. Life Saving/Emergency/Over-the counter Drugs As decided at site

Box size: 14" x 12" x 4" Note: The medicines prescribed above are only indicative. Equivalent medicines can also be used. A prescription, in this regard, shall be required from a qualified Physician.




53

APPENDIX-C

TYPE OF FIRES VIS-À-VIS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Fire Extinguisher Fire

Water Foam CO2 Dry Powder

Multi-purpose (ABC)

Originated from paper, clothes, wood

can control minor surface fires

can control minor surface fires

Inflammable liquids like alcohol, diesel, petrol, edible oils, bitumen

Originated from gases like LPG, CNG, H2

Electrical fires

LEGEND : CAN BE USED

: NOT TO BE USED Note: Fire extinguishing equipment must be checked at least once a year and after every use by an authorized person. The equipment must have an inspection label on which the next inspection date is given. Type of extinguisher shall clearly be marked on it.




54

APPENDIX-D List of Statutory Acts & Rules Relating to HSE - The Indian Explosives Act and Rules - The Motor Vehicle Act and Central Motor Vehicle Rules - The Factories Act and concerned Factory Rules - The Petroleum Act and Petroleum Rules - The Workmen Compensation Act - The Gas Cylinder Rules and the Static & Mobile Pressure Vessels Rules - The Indian Electricity Act and Rules - The Indian Boiler Act and Regulations - The Water (Prevention & Control & Pollution) Act - The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Cess Act - The Mines & Minerals (Regulation & Development) Act - The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act - The Atomic Energy Act - The Radiation Protection Rules - The Indian Fisheries Act - The Indian Forest Act - The Wild Life (Protection) Act - The Environment (Protection) Act and Rules - The Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules - The Manufacturing, Storage & import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules - The Public Liability Act - The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Condition of service)

Act - Other statutory acts Like EPF, ESIS, and Minimum Wage Act.




55

APPENDIX-E

Construction Hazards, Their Effects & Preventive Measures

ACTIVITY TYPE OF HAZARD

EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

A.

EXCAVATION: Pit Excavation up to: 3.0 m

Falling into pit Personal injury

• Provide guard rails/ barricade with warning signal

• Provide at least two entries/ exits.

• Provide escape ladders.

Earth Collapse Suffocation/ Breathlessness Buried

• Provide suitable size of shoring and strutting, if required.

• Keep soil heaps away from the edge of pit.

• Don't allow vehicles to operate too close to excavated areas.

• Maintain sufficient angle of repose.

Contact with buried electric cables Gas/ Oil Pipelines

Electrocution Explosion

• Obtain permission from competent authorities, prior to excavation, if required.

• Locate the position of buried utilities by referring to plant drawings.

• Start digging manually to locate the exact position of buried utilities and thereafter use mechanical means.

Pit Excavation beyond 3.0m

• Same as above plus

• Flooding due to excessive rain/

• underground water

Can cause drowning situation

• Prevent entry of water

• Provide ring buoys

• Identify and provide suitable size dewatering pump or well point system

Digging in the vicinity of existing Building/ Structure

• Building/Structure may collapse

• Loss of health & wealth

• Obtain prior approval of excavation method from local authorities.

• Use under-pining method

• Construct retaining wall side by side.

Movement of vehicles/ equipment close to the edge of cut.

• May cause cave-in or slides.

• Persons may get buried.

• Barricade the excavated area with proper lighting arrangements

• Maintain safe distance from edge of cut and use stop blocks to prevent over-run

• Strengthen shoring and strutting

Narrow deep excavations for pipelines, etc.

• Same as point A

• Frequent cave-in or slides

May cause severe injuries or prove fatal

Battering/benching of sides Provide escape ladders




56


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Flooding due to Hydro- static testing

May arise drowning situation

Bail out accumulated water Maintain adequate ventilation.

Rock by excavation blasting

Improper handling of explosives

May prove fatal

• Ensure proper storage, handling & carrying of explosives by trained personnel.

• Comply with the applicable explosive acts & rules.

Uncontrolled explosion


• Allow only authorized persons to perform blasting operations.

• Smoking and open flames are to be strictly prohibited

Scattering of stone pieces in atmosphere

Can hurt people Use PPE like goggles, face

mask, helmets etc.

Entrapping of persons/ animals.


Barricade the area with red flags and blow siren before blasting.

Misfire May explode suddenly

Do not return to site unless announced safe by designated person.

Piling Work

Failure of pile- driving equipment

Can hurt people Inspect Piling rigs and pulley

blocks before the beginning of each shift.

Noise pollution

Can cause deafness and psychological imbalance.

Use personal protective equipment like ear plugs, muffs, etc.

Extruding rods/casing

Can hurt people Barricade the area and install

sign boards Provide first-aid

Working in the vicinity of 'Live- Electricity'

Can cause electrocution/ Asphyxiation

• Keep sufficient distance from Live-Electricity as per IS code.

• Shut off the supply, if possible

• Provide artificial/rescue breathing to the injured

B.

CONCRETING Air pollution by cement

May affect Respiratory System

Wear respirators or cover mouth and nose with wet cloth.




57


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Handling of ingredients

Hands may get injured

Use gloves & other PPE.

Earthing of electrical mixers, vibrators, etc. not done.

Can cause electrocution/ asphyxiation

Ensure earthing of equipment and proper functioning of electrical circuit before commencement of work.

Falling of materials from height

Persons may get injured

• Use hard hats

• Remove surplus material immediately from work place.

• Ensure lighting arrangements during night hours

Continuous pouring by same set of workers

Cause tiredness of workers and may lead to accident.

Insist on shift pattern

Provide adequate rest to workers between subsequent pours.

Revolving of concrete mixer/ vibrators

Parts of body or clothes may get entrapped.

• Allow only mixers with hopper

• Provide safety cages around moving motors Ensure proper mechanical locking of vibrator

Super-structure

Same as concreting point above plus Deflection in props or shuttering material

Shuttering/props may collapse and prove fatal

• Avoid excessive stacking on shuttering material

• Check the design and strength of shuttering material before commencement of work

• Rectify immediately the deflection noted during concreting.

Passage to work place

Improperly tied and designed props/planks may collapse

• Ensure the stability and strength of passage before commencement of work.

• Do not overload and stand under the passage.

C.

REINFOR- CEMENT

Curtailment and binding of rods

Persons may get injured

Use PPE like gloves, shoes, helmets, etc. Avoid usage of shift tools

Carrying of rods for short distances/at heights

Workers may get injured their hands and shoulders.

• Provide suitable pads on shoulders and use safety gloves.

• Tie up rods in easily liftable bundles

• Ensure proper staging.




58


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Checking of clear distance/ cover with hands

Rods may cut or injure the fingers

Use measuring devices like tape, measuring rods, etc.

Hitting projected rods and standing on cantilever rods.

Persons may get injured and fell down

Use safety shoes and avoid standing unnecessarily on cantilever rods Avoid wearing of loose clothes

Falling of material from height

May prove fatal Use helmets Provide safety nets

Transportation of rods by trucks/ trailers

Protruded rods may hit the persons

• Use red flags/lights at the ends

• Do not protrude the rods in front of or by the side of driver's cabin.

• Do not extend the rods 1/3rd of deck length

D.

WELDING AND GAS CUTTING

Welding radiates invisible ultraviolet and infra-red rays

Radiation can damage eyes and skin.

• Use specified shielding devices and other PPE of correct specifications.

• Avoid throated tungsten electrodes

Improper placement of oxygen and acetylene cylinders

Explosion may occur

• Move out any leaking cylinder

• Keep cylinders in vertical position

• Use trolley for transportation of cylinders and chain them

• Use flashback arrestors

Leakage/ cuts in hoses

May cause fire

• Purge regulators immediately and then turn off

• Never use grease or oil on oxygen line connections and copper fittings on acetylene lines

• Inspect regularly gas carrying hoses

• Always use red hose for acetylene & other fuel gases and black for oxygen

Opening-up of cylinder

Cylinder may burst

Always stand back from the regulator while opening the cylinder

Turn valve slowly to avoid bursting Cover the lug terminals to prevent short

circuiting




59


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Welding of tanks, container or pipes storing flammable liquids

Explosion may occur

• Empty & purge them before welding

• Never attach the ground cable to tanks, container or pipe storing flammable liquids

• Never use LPG for gas cutting

RADIOGRAPHY

Ionizing radiation

Radiations may react with the skin and can cause cancer, skin irritation, dermatitis, etc.

• Ensure Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB before commencement of job.

• Cordon off the area and install Radiation warning symbols

• Restrict the entry of unauthorized persons

• Wear appropriate PPE and film badges issued by BARC/AERB

Transportation and Storage of Radiography source

Same as above

• Never touch or handle radiography source with hands

• Store radiography source inside a pit in an exclusive isolated storage room with lock and key arrangement. The pit should be approved by BARC/AERB.

• Radiography source should never be carried either in passenger bus or in a passenger compartment of trains.

BARC/AERB has to be informed before source movement.

Permission from Director General of Civil Aviation is required for booking radio isotopes with airlines.

Loss of Radio isotope

Same as above Try to locate with the help of Survey

Meter. Inform BARC/AERB (*)




60


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND USAGE

Short circuiting Can cause Electrocution or Fire

• Use rubberized hand gloves and other PPE

• Don't lay wires under carpets, mats or door ways. Allow only licensed electricians to perform on electrical facilities

• Use one socket for one appliance

• Ensure usage of only fully insulated wires or cables

• Don't place bare wire ends in a socket

• Ensure earthing of machineries and equipment Do not use damaged cords and avoid temporary connections

• Use spark-proof/flame proof type field distribution boxes.

• Do not allow open/bare connections

• Provide all connections through ELCB

• Protect electrical cables/equipment's from water and naked flames

• Check all connections before energizing

Overloading of Electrical System

Bursting of system can occur which leads to fire

• Display voltage and current ratings prominently with 'Danger' signs.

• Ensure approved cable size, voltage grade and type

• Switch off the electrical utilities when not in use.

• Do not allow unauthorized connections.

• Ensure proper grid wise distribution of Power




61


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Improper laying of overhead and underground transmission lines/cables

Can cause electrocution and prove fatal

• Do not lay unarmored cable directly on ground, wall, roof of trees

• Maintain safe distance from HT cables All temporary cables should be laid below ground on fine sand and covered by brick soling

• Provide proper sleeves at crossings/ intersections

• Provide cable route markers indicating the type and depth of cables at intervals not exceeding 30m and at the diversions/termination G

FIRE PREVENTION AND PROTECTION

Small fires can become big ones and may spread to the surrounding areas

Cause burn injuries and may prove fatal

• In case a fire breaks out, press fire alarm system and shout "Fire, Fire"

• Keep buckets full of sand & water/ fire extinguishing equipment near hazardous locations

• Confine smoking to 'Smoking Zones' only. Train people for using specific type of fire-fighting equipment under different classes of fire Keep fire doors/shutters, passages and exit doors unobstructed

• Maintain good housekeeping and first-aid boxes (for details refer Appendix-B)

• Don't obstruct assess to Fire extinguishers.

• Do not use elevators for evacuation during fire. Maintain lightening arrestors for elevated structures

• Stop all electrical motors with internal combustion

• Move the vehicles from dangerous locations

• Remove the load hanging from the crane booms

• Remain out of the danger areas.




62


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Improper selection of Fire extinguisher

It may not extinguish the fire

• Ensure usage of correct fire extinguisher meant for the specified fire (for details refer Appendix-C).

• Do not attempt to extinguish Oil and electric fires with water. Use foam cylinders/CO2/sand or earth.

Improper storage of highly inflammable substances

Same as above

• Maintain safe distance of flammable substances from source of ignition

• Restrict the distribution of flammable materials to only minimum necessary amount

• Construct specifically designed fuel storage facilities

• Keep chemicals in cool and dry place away from heat. Ensure adequate ventilation

• Before welding operation, remove or shield the flammable material properly

• Store flammable materials in stable racks, correctly labeled preferably with catchment trays.

• Wipe off the spills immediately

Short circuiting of electrical system

Same as above Can cause Electrocution

• Don't lay wires under carpets, mats or door ways.

• Use one socket for one appliance.

• Use only fully insulated wires or cables

• Do not allow open/bare connections

• Provide all connections through ELCB

• Ensure earthing of machineries and equipment




63


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

H

VEHICULAR MOVEMENT

Crossing the Speed Limits (Rash driving)

Personal injury

• Obey speed limits and traffic rules strictly Always expect the unexpected and be a defensive driver

• Use seat belts/helmets

• Blow horn at intersections and during overtaking operations.

• Maintain the vehicle in good condition

• Do not overtake on curves, bridges and slopes

Adverse weather condition

Same as Above

• Read the road ahead and ride to the left Keep the wind screen and lights clean

• Do not turn at speed.

• Recognize the hazard, understand the defense and act correctly in time.

Consuming alcohol before and during the driving operation

Same as above

• Alcohol and driving do not mix well. Either choose alcohol or driving.

• If you have a choice between hitting a fixed object or an on-coming vehicle, hit the fixed object

• Quit the steering at once and become a passenger. Otherwise take sufficient rest and then drive.

• Do not force the driver to drive fast and round the clock.

• Do not day dream while driving

Falling objects/ Mechanical failure

May prove fatal

Ensure effective braking system, adequate visibility for the drives, reverse warning alarm. Proper maintenance of the vehicle as per manufacturer instructions




64


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

I

PROOF TESTING (HYDROSTATIC /PNEUMATIC TESTING)

• Bursting of piping

• Collapse of tanks

• Tanks flying off

May cause injury and prove fatal

• Prepare test procedure & obtain SBI's approval

• Provide separate gauge for pressurizing pump and piping/equipment

• Check the calibration status of all pressure gauges, dead weight testers and temperature recorders

• Take dial readings at suitable defined intervals and ensure most of them fall between 40-60% of the gauge scale range

• Provide safety relief valve (set at pressure slightly higher than test pressure) while testing with air/ nitrogen

• Ensure necessary precautions, stepwise increase in pressure, tightening of bolts/nuts, grouting, etc. before and during testing

• Keep the vents open before opening any valve while draining out of water used for hydro-testing of tanks.

• Pneumatic testing involves the hazard of released energy stored in compressed gas. Specific care must therefore be taken to minimize the chance of brittle failure during a pneumatic leak test. Test temperature is important in this regard and must be considered when the designer chooses the material of construction.

• A pressure relief device shall be provided.

• The gas used as test fluid, if not air, shall be nonflammable and nontoxic.




65


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

J

(J) Working at Heights

Person can fall down

May sustain severe injuries or prove fatal

• Provide guard rails/barricade at the work place.

• Use PPE like full body harness, life line, helmets, safety shoes, etc.

• Obtain a permit before starting the work at height above 2 meters

• Fall arrest and safety nets, etc. must be installed

• Provide adequate working space (min. 0.6 m)

• Tie/weld working platform with fixed support

• Use roof top walk ladder while working on a slopping roofs

• Avoid movement on beams

May hit the scrap/material stacked at the ground or in between

Keep the work place neat and clean Remove the scrap immediately

Material can fall down

May hit the workers working at lower levels and prove fatal

• Same as all above plus

• Do not throw or drop materials or equipment from height.

• All tools to be carried in a tool-kit Bag or on working uniform

• Remove scrap from the planks

• Ensure wearing of helmet by the workers working at lower levels




66


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

K

Confined Spaces Suffocation/ drowning

Unconsciousness, death

• Use respiratory devices, if reqd.

• Avoid overcrowding inside a confined space

• Provide Exhaust fans for ventilation

• Do not wear loose clothes, neck ties, etc.

• Fulfill conditions of the permit

• Check for presence of hydrocarbons, O2 level

• Obtain work permit before entering a confined space

• Ensure that the connected piping of the equipment which is to be opened is pressure free, fluid has been drained, vents are open and piping is positively isolated by a blind flange

Presence of foul smell and toxic substances

Inhalation can pose threat to life

• Same as above plus

• Check for hydrocarbon and Aromatic compounds before entering a confined space

• Depute one person outside the confined space for continuous monitoring and for extending help in case of an emergency

Ignition/ flame can cause fire

Person may sustain burn injuries or explosion may occur

• Keep fire extinguishers at a hand distance Remove surplus material and scrap immediately Do not smoke inside a confined space

• Do not allow gas cylinders inside a confined space

• Use low voltage (24V) lamps for lighting

• Use tools with air motors or electric tools with max. voltage of 24V

• Remove all equipment at the end of the day




67


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

L.

Handling And Lifting Equipment

Failure of load lifting and moving equipment

Can cause accident and prove fatal

• Avoid standing under the lifted load and within the operating radius of cranes

• Check periodically oil, brakes, gears, horns and tyre pressure of all moving machinery

• Check quality, size and condition of all chain pulley blocks, slings, U-clamps, D-shackles, wire ropes, etc.

• Allow crane to move only on hard, firm and leveled ground.

• Allow lifting slings as short as possible and check gunny packings at the friction points

• Do not allow crane to tilt its boom while moving Install Safe Load Indicator

• Ensure certification by applicable authority

Overloading of lifting equipment

Same as above • Safe lifting capacity of derricks and winches written on them shall be got verified

• The max. safe working load shall be marked on all lifting equipment

• Check the weight of columns and other heavy items painted on them and accordingly decide about the crane capacity, boom and angle of erection

• Allow only trained operators and riggers during crane operation. Overhead

electrical wires

Can cause electrocution and fire

• Do not allow boom or other parts of crane to come within 3m reach of overhead HT cables

• Hook and load being lifted shall preferably remain in full visibility of crane operators.




68


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

M

Scaffolding, Formwork And Ladders

Person can fall down

Person May sustain severe injuries and prove fatal

• Provide guard rails for working at height

• Face ladder while climbing and use both hands. Ladders shall extend about 1m above landing for easy access and tying up purpose

• Do not place ladders against movable objects and maintain base at 1/4 unit of the working length of the ladder.

• Suspended scaffolds shall not be less than 500

• mm wide and tied properly with ropes No loose planks shall be allowed

• Use PPE, like helmets, safety shoes etc.

Failure of scaffolding material

Person May sustain severe injuries and prove fatal

• Inspect visually all scaffolding materials for stability and anchoring with permanent structures.

• Design scaffolding for max. Load carrying capacity.

• Scaffolding planks shall not be less than 50X250 mm full thickness lumber or equivalent. These shall be cleated or secured and must extend over the end supports by at least 150mm

• Don't overload the scaffolds

• Do not splice short ladders to make a longer one.

Material can fall down

Persons working at lower level gets injured

• Remove excess material and scrap immediately.

• Carry the tools in a tool-kit bag only

• Provide safety nets




69


EFFECT OF HAZARD

PREVENTIVE MEASURES

N

Structural Works

Personal negligence and danger of fall

Can cause injury or casualty

• Do not take rest inside rooms built for welding machines or electrical distribution system.

• Avoid walking on beams at height

• Wear helmet with chin strap and full body harness while working at height.

• Use hand gloves and goggles during grinding operations

• Cover or mark the sharp and projected edges Do not stand within the operating radius of cranes

Lifting/ slipping of material

Can cause injury or casualty

• Do not stand under the lifted load

• Stack properly all the materials. Avoid slippage during handling

• Control longer pieces lifted up by cranes from both ends

• Remove loose materials from height Ensure tightening of all nuts & bolts

O.

Pipeline Works

Erection/ lowering failure

Can cause injury

• Do not stand under the lifted load

• Do not allow any person to come within the radii of the side boom handling pipes

• Check the load carrying capacity of the lifting tools & tackles

• Use safe Load Indicators

• Use appropriate PPEs

Other Can cause injury or casualty

• Wear gum boots in marshy areas

• Allow only one person to perform signaling operations while lowering of pipes

• Provide night caps on pipes

• Provide end covers on pipes for stoppage of pigs while testing/ cleaning operations




70

FORMAT NO. : HSE-1 HSE Checklist Cum compliance Report (Name & signature of walk through performer to be inserted at the bottom of each page)

Project : _____________ Report no. :

Date : SI/ Contractor :

Inspection by : _______________________ Owner :

Frequency : Fortnightly Job no. :

Note: Write ‘NA’ wherever the item is not applicable

Sr NO

ITEM Yes No Remarks Action

1. HOUSEKEEPING

a) Waste containers provided and used

b) Sanitary facilities adequate and Clean

c) Passageways and Walkways Clear

d) General neatness of working areas

e) Other

2. PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

a) Goggles; Shields

b) Face protection

c) Hearing protection

d) Foot protection

e) Hand protection

f) Respiratory Masks etc.

g) Full body harness conforming to CE, EN 361

h) Hard hat (HDPE)

i) Other

3. EXCAVATIONS/OPENINGS

a) Openings properly covered or barricaded

b) Excavations shored

c) Excavations barricaded

d) Overnight lighting provided

e) Other




71

Sr NO


4. WELDING & GAS CUTTING

a) Gas cylinders chained upright

b) Cables and hoses not obstructing

c) Screens or shields used

d) Flammable materials protected

e) Live electrode bits contained properly

f) Fire extinguisher (s) accessible

g) Other

5. SCAFFOLDING & BARRICADING

a) Fully decked platforms

b) Guard and intermediate rails in place

c) Toe boards in place

d) Adequate shoring

e) Adequate access

f) Positive barricading for critical activities

g) Installation of warning signs

h) Other

6. LADDERS

a) Extension side rails 1 m above

b) Top of landing

c) Properly secured

d) Angle + 700 from horizontal

e) Other

7. HOISTS, CRANES AND DERRICKS

a) Condition of cables and sheaves OK

b) Condition of slings, chains, hooks and eyes O.K.

c) Inspection and maintenance log-books maintained

d) Outriggers used




72

Sr NO


e) Reverse horn installed / active / coupled with gear

f) Signs/barricades provided

g) Signals observed and understood

h) Qualified operators

i) Other

8. MACHINERY, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

a) Proper instruction

b) Safety devices

c) Proper cords

d) Inspection and maintenance

e) Other

9. VEHICLE AND TRAFFIC

a) Rules and regulations observed

b) Inspection and maintenance

c) Licensed drivers

d) Other

10. TEMPORARY FACILITIES

a) Emergency instructions posted

b) Fire extinguishers provided

c) Fire-aid equipment available

d) Secured against storm damage

e) General neatness

f) In accordance with electrical requirements

g) Other

11. FIRE PREVENTION

a) Personnel trained & instructed to make use of facility

b) Fire extinguishers checked periodically & record maintained

c) No smoking in Prohibited areas.




73

Sr NO


d) Fire Hydrants Clear not obstructed

e) Other Regular fire drill conducted

12 Electrical

a) Use of 3-core armored cables everywhere

b) Usage of ‘All Insulated’ or ‘Double Insulated’ electrical tools

c)

All electrical connection are routed through ELCB Natural Earthing at the source of power (Main DB) Continuity and tightness of earth conductor Effective covering of junction boxes, panels and other energized wiring places Ground fault circuit interrupters provided Prevention of tripping hazards maintained DCP extinguishers arranged & licensed electrician engaged at site

d) Natural Earthing at the source of power (Main DB)

e) Continuity and tightness of earth conductor

f) Effective covering of junction boxes, panels and other energized wiring places

g) Ground fault circuit interrupters provided

h) Prevention of tripping hazards maintained

i) Other

13. HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

a) Safely stored or stacked

b) Passageways clear / free from obstructions

c) Firefighting facility in place

14. FLAMMABLE GASES AND LIQUIDS

a) Containers clearly identified / protected from fire

b) Safe storage & transportation arrangement made




74

Sr NO


c) Fire extinguishers positioned nearby

d) Facilities kept away from electric spark, hot spatters & ignition source.

15. WORKING AT HEIGHT

a) Approved Erection plan and work permit in place

b) Safe access, Safe work platform & Safety nets provided

c) Life lines, Fall arrester, Full body harness and with double lanyards used;

d) Health Check record available for workers going up?

e) Protective handrails arranged around floor openings

16. CONFINED SPACE

a) Work Permit obtained from requisite authority

b) Test for toxic gas and sufficient availability of oxygen conducted & status

c) Supervisor present at site & at least one person outside the confined space for monitoring deputed

d) Availability of safe means of entry, exit and ventilation (register for entry & exit maintained)

e) Fire extinguisher and first-aid facility ensured

f) Lighting provision made by using 24V Lamp

g) Proper usage of PPEs ensured

17. RADIOGRAPHY

a) Proper storage and handling of source as per BARC/ AERB guidelines (authorized radiographer available)

b) Work permit obtained




75

Sr NO


c) Cordoning of the area done

d) Use of appropriate PPE's ensured

e) HSE training to workers/supervisors imparted during the fortnight (indicate topic)

f) Minimum occupancy of workplace ensured

18. HEALTH CHECKS

a)

All Workers medically examined and found be fit for working at heights (slinging, rigging, painting etc.) in confined space in excavation / trenching in shot blasting

b) Availability of First Aid box with contents

c) Proper sanitation at site, office and labour camps

d) Arrangement of medical facilities.

e) Measures for dealing with illness at site & labour camps.

f) Availability of Potable drinking water for workmen & staff.

g) Provision of crèches for children.

h) Stand by vehicle / ambulance available for evacuation of injured

19. ENVIRONMENT

a) Chemical and Other Effluents properly disposed

b) Cleaning liquid of pipes disposed of properly

c) Seawater used for hydro-testing disposed of as per agreed procedure

d) Lubricant Waste/Engine oils properly disposed

e) Waste from Canteen, offices, sanitation etc. disposed properly

f) Disposal of surplus earth, stripping materials, Oily rags and combustible materials done properly

g) Green belt protection




76

FORMAT NO.: HSE-2 ACCIDENT / INCIDENT REPORT (To be submitted by Contractor after every Incident / Accident within 24 hours to SBI)

Report No.: _______________________________________ Date: _____________

Project site: ____________________________ Name of work: _____________

SI/Contractor’s name: _____________SI’s Job Engineer (name)____________

Type of Accident/Incident: 1. Fatal

2. Other Lost time

3. Non-Loss Time

4. First Aid Case

Name of the injured: _______________________

Age: _______________

Father's name of victim: ____________________

SI/Sub Contractor’s Name: ____________________________________

Date & Time of Accident/Incident: _____________

Location: ________________

Brief Description of Accident / Incident:

Cause of Accident/Incident:

Nature of Injury/Damage:

Medical Aid provided/Action taken:

Intimation to Local Authorities (if applicable):

Signature of SI/Sub-Contractor

(Signature and Name)

Stamp of SI/Sub-Contractor

To : SBI Site-in-charge SBI




77

FORMAT NO.: HSE-3 Supplementary Accident/Incident Investigation Report

Supplementary to Report No: (Copy Enclosed)

Project: __________________________________________ Date: _____________

Project site: ____________________________ Name of work: _____________

SI/Contractor’s name: _____________Work Order/ LOI No:____________

Name of the injured: _________________________________________________

Age: _______________

Father's name of victim: ____________________

SI/Sub Contractor’s Name: ____________________________________

Date & Time of Accident/Incident: _____________

Location: ________________

Brief Description & Cause of Accident / Incident:

Nature of Injury/Damage:

Comments of Medical Practitioner, who attended the victim/injured:

Suggested improvement in the working condition, if any:

Loss of man days and impact on site works:

Any other comment by Safety Officer:




To: SBI Site-in-charge SBI




78

FORMAT NO.: HSE-4 Near Miss Incident/ Dangerous Occurrence Suggested Performa

(To be submitted within 24 hours)

• Near Miss: Human injury escaped & no damage to property, equipment or interruption to work.

• Dangerous Occurrence: Damage to property, equipment or interruption of work, but not resulting in personal injury/illness, e.g. Fire incident, collapse of structure, crane failure, etc.

Report No.: ___________________________________________

Name of Site: ________________________________ Date:________________

Name of work: Contractor:

Incident reported by :

Date & Time of Incident :

Location :

Brief description of incident

Probable cause of incident

Suggested corrective action




79

Steps taken to avoid recurrence




To: SBI Site-in-charge SBI

NO YES




80

FORMAT NO.: HSE-5 MONTHLY HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) REPORT (To be submitted by each Contractor) Actual work start Date: __________________________ For the Month of: _______________ Project: _____________________________________ Report No:____________ Name of the SI/Contractor: ____________________ Status as on: ____________ Name of Work: _______________________________ Job No: ________________________

S No

ITEM UPTO PREVIOUS MONTH

THIS MONTH

CUMULATIVE

1 Average number of Staff & Workmen (average daily headcount, not man days)

2 Man-hours worked

3 Number of Induction programs conducted

4 Number of HSE meetings organized at site

5 Number of HSE awareness programs conducted site

6 Number of Tool Box Talks conducted

7 Number of Lost Time Accidents (LTA) Fatal

8 Other LTA

9 Number of Loss Time Injuries (LTI) Fatalities

10 Other LTI

11 Number of Non-Loss Time Accidents

12 Number of First Aid Cases

13 Number of Near Miss Incidents

14 No. of unsafe acts/ practices detected

15 No. of disciplinary actions taken against staff/ workmen

16 Man-days lost due to accidents

17 LTA Free man-hours i.e. LTA free man-hours counted from the Last LTA (enter date: )

18 Frequency Rate (No. of LTA per 2 lacs man-hours worked)

19 Severity Rate (No. of man days lost per 2 lacs man-hours worked)

20 Loss Time Injury Frequency (No. of LTI per 2 lacs man-hours worked)

21 No. of activities for which Job Safety Analysis (JSA) completed

22 No. of incentives/ awards given

23 No. of occasions on which penalty imposed by SBI

24 No. of Audits conducted

25 No. of pending NCs in above Audits

26 Compensation cases raised with Insurance

27 Compensation cases resolved and paid to workmen




81

S No

ITEM UPTO PREVIOUS MONTH

THIS MONTH

CUMULATIVE

28 Whether workmen compensation policy taken

Yes No

29 Whether workmen compensation policy is valid Yes No

30 Whether workmen registered under ESI Act, as applicable

Yes No

Remarks, if any

Date: Prepared by Safety Officer Approved by Site Head / Resident Construction Manager

(Signature and Name) (Signature and Name)

To: SBI




82

FORMAT NO.: HSE-6 PERMIT FOR WORKING AT HEIGHTS (ABOVE 2.0 METER)

(In duplicate to be issued daily for site and for office) Project Site: .................................................................. Sr.No: Name of Work: ............................................................. Date: ............................................................. Name of SI/Sub-Contractor: ....................................... Nature of Work: ........................................... Total No. of Worker ..................................................... Exact Location of Work .............................. Duration of work: from ...............................................to ................................................................

Sl. No.

Items / Subjects

Status of compliance (Yes / No)

Done(Y/N) Not Reqd.

1 Work areas / Equipment inspected

2 Work area cordoned off

3 Adequate lighting is provided

4 Precautions against public traffic taken

5 Concerned persons in & around have been alerted & cautioned

6 Hazards / risks involved in routine / non-routine task assessed and control measures have been implemented at specific task

7 ELCB provided for electrical connection & found working

8 Ladder safely attached / fixed

9 Scaffoldings are checked and TAGs are found used correctly

10 Working platforms are provided and are found sound /safe for use

11

Safe access & egress arrangements (e.g. ladders, fall arresters, life-lines etc.) are satisfactorily incorporated

12

a. Openings on platform / floors are effectively cordoned /covered

b. Safety Nets are provided wherever required

13

Use of following safety gadgets by people working at area under this permit, is checked and found satisfactory -

1. Safety helmet

2. Safety harness (full body) with double lanyard

3. Safety Shoes

4. Safety gloves

5. Safety goggles

14 Housekeeping of work area found satisfactorily tidy / clean & clear

15

Adequate measures have been taken for works being continued at the ground level, when simultaneous works are permitted overhead at that very location.

16 Materials are not thrown from heights on to ground

17 Medical examination of workers are made & found satisfactory




83

18

Responsible job engineer / supervisor found physically present at work spot for overall administration of work as well as safety of people.

Above items have been checked & compliance has been found in place. Hence work is permitted to start / continue at the above-mentioned location. Work shall not start till identified lapses are rectified.

Additional Precautions, if any ...............................................................................................

Work Permit issued by:

SI/Sub-Contractor Engineer

(Name and Signature)

Verification By:

Contractor Safety Officer

(Name and Signature)

AT THE END OF THE DAY/WORK: All works at height are completed & workmen have returned safely from work location at (time) ............. . (date) .................

(Sig. SI/Sub-Contractor Engineer)




84

FORMAT NO.: HSE-7 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT Project site __________________________Sr.No. _______ Name of the work _____________________________ Date Name of SI/Sub-Contractor _____________________ Nature of work__________ Exact location of work_____________________

Safety Requirements POSITIVE ISOLATION OF THE VESSEL IS MANDATORY

A. Has the equipment been?

Y Not Reqd.

Isolated from power/steam/air

Isolated from liquid or gases

Depressurized &/or drained

blanked/blinded/disconnected

Water flushed &/or steamed

Man ways open & ventilated

Continued inert gas flow arranged

Adequately cooled

Radiation sources removed

Proper lighting provided

B. _____________________________________________ Expected Residual Hazards

Y Not reqd.

lack of O2

corrosive chemicals

heat/ steam / frost

combustible gas/ liquid

pyrophoric iron / scales

high humidity

H2S / toxic gases

electricity / static

Ionizing radiation

C. _____________________________________________ Protection Measures

Y Not reqd.

gloves

protective clothing




85

Grounded air blower/blower AC

Fire Fighting measures

Ear plug/ muff

dust / gas / airline mask

attendant with air mask

safety harness & lifeline

goggles / face shield

personal gas alarm

rescue equipment/team

communication equipment

Authorization / Renewal (It is safe to enter the confined space)

S No

No. of persons allowed

Name of persons allowed

Signature Time Signature

Contractor's Contractor's From

To

Workman

Supervisor Safety Officer

Permit Closure :

(A) Entry was closed stopped will continue on ...

(B) Site left in a safe condition Housekeeping done

(C) Mult i - lock Removed Keys transferred Ensured all men have come out Man-ways barricaded

Remarks, if any:




86

FORMAT No: HSE-8 RADIATION WORK PERMIT

Project: Sr.No: Name of the Work: Date: Name of the SI/Sub-Contractor: Job No: Location of Work:

Source strength :

Cordoned distance (m) :

Name of Radiography agency: Approved by SBI

No. of workers engaged : (List enclosed with name & gate pass numbers.)

The following items have been checked & compliance shall be ensured during currency of

the permit:

Additional precautions, if any __________________________

(Radiography Agency’s BARC/AERB authorized supervisor) Permission is granted.

Permit is valid from _______________ AM/PM ______________ Date to ______________ AM/PM Date

(Signature of permit issuing authority of site contractor)

Sr.no

Item Description Done (Y/N)

Remarks

1 Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB ensured while source in use/in transit & during storage

2 Area cordoned off / safe working platform provided

3 Lighting arrangements for working during nights ensured

4 Warning signs/ flash lights installed

5 Cold work permit taken (if applicable)

6 PPEs like film badges, dosimeters used




87

Name Designation: Date:

Permit renewal:

Permit extended up to Additional precautions required, if any

Sign of issuing authority with

Date Time

Work completed/ stopped/ area cleared at _____Hrs. of Date____ (Sign. of permit issuing authority)

Name & Signature of site contractor:




88

FORMAT No: HSE-9 Demolishing/Dismantling Work Permit

Project: Sr.No: Name of the Work: Date: Name of the SI/Sub-Contractor: Job No: Location of Work:

No of Workers to be engaged:

Line no/ Equipment No. / Structure to be dismantled:

The following items have been checked & compliance shall be ensured during currency of the permit:

(SI/Sub-Contractors Supervisor) (Contractors Safety Officer)

Permission is granted

(Permit Issuing Authority)

Name:

Sr.no

Item Description Done (Y/N) Not Applicable

1 Services like Power, Gas Supply, water, etc. disconnected

2 Dismantling/Demolishing method reviewed & approved

3 Usage of appropriate PPEs ensured

4 Precaution taken for neighboring structures

5 First Aid arrangements made

6 Fire-Fighting arrangements ensured

7 Precautions taken for blasting




89

Date:

Completion Report:

Dismantling/Demolishing is completed on ___________ date at _________hrs.

Materials/ debris transported to identify location Tagging completed (as completed)

Services like power, Gas, supply, Water etc. restored

(Permit issuing authority)




90

Annexure-O: Specification for Quality Management System (QMS) Requirements from SI

1. Scope

This specification establishes the Quality Management System requirements to be met by SI/Sub-contractors after award of work/during contract execution.

2. Definitions 2.1 Project Quality Plan

Document tailored from Standard Quality Management System Manual of SI, specifying how the quality requirements of the project will be met.

2.2 Owner

Owner means the owner of the project (i.e. SBI) for which services / equipment are being purchased and includes their representatives, successors and assignees.

3. Reference Documents

6-78-0002: Specification for Documentation Requirements from Contractors 6-78-0003: Specification for Documentation Requirements from Suppliers

4. Quality Management System - General

Unless otherwise agreed with SBI, the SI proposed quality system shall fully satisfy all relevant requirements of ISO 9001 "Quality Management Systems Requirements." Evidence of compliance shall be current certificate of quality system registration to ISO 9001 or a recent compliance audit recommending registration from a registrar. The quality system shall provide the planned and systematic control of all quality related activities for execution of contract. Implementation of the system shall be in accordance with SI'S Quality Manual and PROJECT specific Quality plan.

5. Quality System Requirements 5.1 SI shall ensure that the responsible authority for execution of the contract has communicated the contract

requirements including any identified or intended statutory and regulatory requirements to all concerned in their organization and sub-contractor's organization who are contributing to the execution of this contract.

5.2 SI shall establish a documented Quality policy and Quality Objectives to achieve the specified and intended requirement of this contract.

5.3 SI shall identify and communicate the responsibilities and authorities of the personnel contributing to the execution of this contract.

5.4 SI shall deploy competent and trained personnel for various activities for fulfillment of the contract. SI shall arrange adequate infrastructure and work environment to ensure that the specification and quality of the deliverable are maintained.

5.5 SI shall do the quality planning for all activities involved in delivery of order. quality planning shall cover as minimum the following:

a) Resources

b) Product deliverable characteristics to be controlled.

c) Process characteristics to ensure the identified product characteristics are realized

d) Identification of any measurement requirements, acceptance criteria




91

e) Records to be generated

f) Need for any documented procedure

The quality planning shall result into the quality assurance plan, inspection and test plans and job procedures for the project activities in the scope of SI. These documents shall be submitted to SBI for review/approval, before commencement of work.

5.6 Requirements for sub-contracting / purchasing of services specified in contract / tender shall be adhered to. Wherever requirements are not specified, the SI shall establish and maintain a system for purchasing / sub-contracting to ensure that purchased product / service conforms to specified requirement. Criteria for selection of sub-contractor, evaluation, re-evaluation, maintenance of purchasing data and verification of purchased product (sub-contractor services), constitute important components of this requirement.

5.7 SI shall plan and carry production and service provision under controlled conditions.

Controlled conditions shall include, as applicable

a) the availability of information that describes the characteristics of the product

b) the availability of work instructions

c) the use of suitable equipment

d) the availability and use of monitoring and measuring devices

e) the implementation of monitoring and measurement

f) the implementation of release, delivery and post-delivery activities

5.8 SI shall validate any processes for production and service provision where resulting output cannot be verified by subsequent monitoring and measurement. This includes any process where deficiencies become apparent only after the product is in use or service has been delivered.

5.9 SI shall establish a system for identification and traceability of product / deliverable throughout product realization. Product status with respect to inspection and testing requirements shall be identified.

5.10 SI shall identify, verify, protect and safeguard SBI property (material / document) provided for use or incorporation into the product. If any SBI, property is lost, damaged or otherwise found to be unsuitable for use, this shall be reported to the SBI.

5.11 SI shall preserve the conformity of product / deliverable during internal processing and delivery to the intended destination. Requirements mentioned in the tender shall be adhered to.

5.12 SI shall establish system to ensure that inspection and testing activities are carried out in a manner that is consistent with the inspection and testing requirements. Where necessary, measuring equipment shall be calibrated at specified frequency, against national or international measurement standards; where no such standard exists, the basis used for calibration shall be recorded. The measuring equipment shall be adjusted or re-adjusted as necessary, identified to enable the calibration status to be determined. The measuring equipment shall be protected from damage during handling, maintenance and storage.

5.13 SI shall ensure effective monitoring, using suitable methods, of the processes involved in production and other related processes for delivery of the scope of contract.

5.14 SI shall monitor and measure the characteristics of the product/deliverable to verify that product requirement has been met. The inspection by SI and SBI personnel shall be carried out strictly as per the Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs) forming part of the contract. Product release or service delivery shall not proceed until the planned arrangements have been satisfactorily completed, unless otherwise approved by relevant authority and where applicable by SBI.

5.15 SI shall establish and maintain a documented procedure to ensure that the product which does not conform to requirements is identified and controlled to prevent its unintended use or delivery

5.16 All non-conformities (NCs) / deficiencies found by the SI'S inspection / surveillance staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action shall be recorded and resolved suitably. Effective corrective and preventive action shall be implemented by the SI so that similar NCS including deficiencies do not recur.




92

5.17 All deficiencies noticed and reported by SBI shall be analyzed by the SI and appropriate corrective and preventive actions shall be implemented. SI shall intimate SBI of all such corrective and preventive action implemented by him.

5.18 SI should follow the standards, specifications and approved drawings. Concessions/Deviations shall be allowed only in case of unavoidable circumstances. In such situations Concession/deviation request must be made by the SI in attached Format A.

5.19 SI shall have documented procedure for control of documents.

5.20 All project records shall be carefully kept, maintained and protected for any damage or loss until the project completion, then handed over to SBI or disposed of as per Annexure–M of the contract requirement.

5.21 SI shall prepare and submit for review and approval, project Quality plan / Quality Assurance Plan for contracted scope I job. The SI'S Quality Plan shall address all of the applicable elements of ISO 9001, identify responsible parties within SI'S organization, for the implementation / control of each area, reference the applicable procedures used to control / assure each area, and verify the documents produced for each area. The Project Quality Plan shall necessarily define control or make reference to the relevant procedures, for design and engineering, documentation, record control, bid evaluation, inspection, production/manufacturing, preservation, packaging and storage, quality control at construction site, pre-commissioning, commissioning and handing over (as applicable) in line with contract requirement and scope of work

6. Audits

SI shall plan and carry out the QMS audit for the job. Quality audit program shall cover design, procurement, construction management, commissioning and Operation as applicable including activities carried out by sub-vendors / sub-contractors. This shall be additional to the certification body surveillance audits carried out under BIDDERS own ISO 9001 certification scheme. The audit programs and audit reports shall be submitted to SBI as per specified documentation requirements. SBI's representative reserves the right to attend, as a witness, any audit conducted during the execution of the Project. In addition to above any third party may be appointed by SBI to perform Quality and Technical compliance audits. SI shall provide assistance and access to their systems and sub-contractor / vendor systems as required for this purpose. Any deficiencies noted shall be immediately rectified by SI.

7. Documentation Requirements 7.1 SI shall submit following QMS documents immediately after award of work (within one week) for record /

review by SBI.

a. Organization chart (for complete organization structure and for the project) b. Project Quality plan/Quality Assurance Plan c. Job specific Inspection Test Plans d. Job Procedures e. Inspection test Formats

7.2 In addition to above QMS documents, following documentation shall be maintained by the SI for

submission to SBI on demand at any point of time during execution of the project.

a. Quality Manual b. CVs of the personnel in SI'S QA Organogram c. Certificate of approval for compliance to ISO: 9001 standard d. Procedure for Control of Non-conforming Product e. Procedure for Control of Documents f. Sample audit report Of the QMS internal and external audits conducted during last one year g. Customer satisfaction reports from at least 2 customers, during the last One year h. Project audit report i. Corrective action report on the project audits j. Technical audit reports for the project




93

7.3 Documents as specified above are minimum requirements. SI shall submit any other document/data required for completion of the job as per SBI’s instructions.

Abbreviation:

MR Material Requisition

PR Purchase Requisition

PO Purchase Order

QA Quality Assurance

QMS Quality Management System

ISO International Organization for Standardization

CV Curriculum Vitae




94

Format A: Concession / Deviation Permit

(Only this page for communication with SI/Sub- Contractor)

To be filled by Originator

Project: Originator Ref:

Job No: Order/Contract No:

Equipment Title: Item No

Originator: SI/ Sub-Contractor Caution : Originator to note that any delay in processing Of concession/deviation permit

shall be to originator's account and shall not be used as a reason for extension in delivery

Requirement as per Specification Description of Concession/Deviation Sought

Why the Concession/Deviation is required? Supporting evidence/calculations enclosed/not enclosed

Time impact More/Less/No change Cost impact More/Less/No change Performance Warranty/Guarantee Affected/N0t affected Under present constraints requested Concession/deviation is most optimum for the

project and does not involve any hazard, and shall meet the stipulated performance requirements.

Date: Signature Vendor /Contractor (with seal)

Decision on Concession/Deviation including decision, on time and cost implications (To be filled by the Inspection Engineer, responsible for conveying the decision to the originator, after resolution) Whether any SI/Sub-contractor made ‘Technically not Acceptable’ during bid evaluation, on the aspect of which this concession deviation is sought (yes/No): _______ Date: Name: Clients Decision, if required Date: Name:




95

Annexure-P: Technical Specification (Evaluation Sheet)

Sr. No

Category Sub-Category Technical Specifications Requirements

1 Certification Uptime Design certification

Uptime Institute Tier Certification IV of Design Documents for the complete Data Center Facility Design

2 Certification Uptime Facility certification

Uptime Institute Tier Certification IV of constructed Facility for all areas of the Data Center Facility

3 Certification Operations certification

Uptime Institute Gold Certification of operational sustainability for all areas of the Data Center

4 Civil Parking Separate visitor and employee parking areas: Physically separated by fence or wall with separate entries

5 Civil Parking Separate from loading docks: Physically separated by fence or wall with separate entries

6 Civil Parking

Proximity of visitor parking to data center perimeter building walls: 18.3 m (60 ft) minimum separation with physical barriers to prevent vehicles from driving closer

7 Civil Building Construction

Type of construction (IBC 2006): Type IA or 1B Standards such as ISI/NBC/BSI needs to be referred as applicable for TIER 4 data Centre

8 Civil Design Minimal disturbance to landscape and site condition.

9 Civil Design Use of recycled environmental friendly building materials

10 Civil Design Use of non-toxic and recyclable materials

11 Civil Design Efficient use of water and water recycling

12 Civil Design Use of energy efficient and eco-friendly equipment

13 Civil Design Leeds compliance for Green Building

14 Civil Design Quality of indoor air quality for human safety and comfort.

15 Civil Design Effective controls and building management systems.

16 Civil Design Alternate energy source like solar panels in the Admin Block

17 Civil Design Facility design to International Building Code (IBC)/ISI/NBC/BSI codes of Practice as applicabel for Seismic Design Category (SDC) requirements

18 Civil Design Floor loading capacity 1500 kg/sq.mt. & Battery Room with Load of 2000 kg/sq.mt

19 Civil Design Floor hanging capacity of 250 kg/sq.mt

20 Civil Design Concrete Slab Thickness at ground : Minimum 127 mm (5 in), suitable to sustain floor load requirement of different parts of DC area

21 Civil Design Minimum concrete topping over flutes for equipment anchorage when concrete filled metal deck structure used for elevated floors : Minimum 102 mm (4 in)

22 Civil Design Building LFRS (Shear wall/Braced Frame/Moment Frame) indicates displacement of structure : Concrete Shear wall / Steel Braced Frame

23 Civil Design Building Energy Dissipation - Passive Dampers/Base Isolation (energy absorption) : passive dampers/base isolation for IBC Seismic Zone IV Design.

24 Civil Design Elevated floor construction: Steel Deck & Fill




96

Sr. No


25 Civil Telecommunication Diversely routed access provider entrances and maintenance holes with minimum 20 m separation

26 Civil Telecommunication Redundant entrance room

27 Civil Telecommunication Redundant main distribution area

28 Civil Telecommunication Redundant backbone cabling and pathways

29 Civil Telecommunication Redundant horizontal cabling and pathways

30 Civil Telecommunication Routers and switches have redundant power supplies, processors

31 Civil Telecommunication Redundant routers and switches with redundant uplinks

32 Civil Fire resistive requirements

Exterior bearing walls : 4 Hours minimum


Interior bearing walls : 2 Hour minimum


Exterior nonbearing walls : 4 Hours minimum


Structural frame : 2 Hour minimum


Interior non-computer room partition walls : 1 Hour minimum


Interior computer room partition walls : 2 Hour minimum


Shaft enclosures : 2 Hour minimum


Floors and floor-ceilings : 2 Hour minimum


Roofs and roof-ceilings : 2 Hour minimum


Meet requirements of NFPA 75


Vapor barriers for walls and ceiling of computer room


Building entrances with security checkpoints


Access floor panel construction : Computer grade all steel or computer grade steel with concrete fill

45 Civil Roofing Class : Class A

46 Civil Roofing Type : double redundant with concrete deck (no mechanically attached systems)

47 Civil Roofing Wind uplift resistance : FM 1-120 minimum

48 Civil Roofing Roof Slope : 1:24 (1/2 in per foot) minimum

49 Civil Doors and windows

Fire rating : Minimum Code requirements (not less than 1 1/2 hour at computer room)


Door size : Minimum Code requirements (not less than 1.2 m (4 ft) wide into computer, electrical, & mechanical rooms) and not less than 2.49 m(8 ft) high


Windows on perimeter of computer room : Interior windows allows with minimum 2-hour fire rating, no exterior windows allowed

52 Civil Entry Lobby Physically separate from other areas of data center

53 Civil Entry Lobby Fire separation from other areas of data center : Minimum 2 hour




97

Sr. No


54 Civil Entry Lobby Security counter : Physically separated from other areas of the data center

55 Civil Entry Lobby Single person interlock, portal or other hardware designed to prevent piggybacking or pass back

56 Civil Administrative offices

Physically separate from other areas of data center

57 Civil Administrative offices

Fire separation from other areas of data center : Minimum 2 hour

58 Civil Security office Physically separate from other areas of data center

59 Civil Security office Fire separation from other areas of data center : Minimum 2 hour

60 Civil Security office 180-degree peepholes on security equipment and monitoring rooms

61 Civil Security office Dedicated and hardened security equipment and monitoring rooms : Minimum 16 mm (5/8 in) plywood lined walls and solid core door

62 Civil Operations Center Operations Center physically separate from other areas of data center, with a backup service/facility in a separate location

63 Civil Operations Center Fire separation from other non-computer room areas of data center : Min 2 hour

64 Civil Operations Center Directly accessible to computer room

65 Civil Restrooms and break room areas

Proximity to computer room and support areas : Not immediately adjacent and provided with leak prevention barrier

66 Civil Restrooms and break room areas

Fire separation from computer room and support areas : Minimum 2 hour

67 Civil UPS and Battery Rooms

Aisle widths for maintenance, repair, or equipment removal : Minimum 1.2 m (4 ft) clear


Proximity to computer room : Immediately adjacent


Fire separation from computer room and other areas of data center : Minimum 2 hour

70 Civil Required Exit Corridors

Fire separation from computer room and support areas : Minimum 2 hour

71 Civil Required Exit Corridors

Width : Minimum requirements of 1.5 m (5 ft) clear

72 Civil Shipping and receiving area

Shipping and receiving area physically separate from other areas of data center


Fire separation from other areas of data center : Minimum 2 hour


Physical protection of walls exposed to lifting equipment traffic : Steel bollards or similar protection


Number of loading docks : 1 per 2500 m2 (25,000 ft2) of Computer room (2 minimum)

76 Civil Generator and fuel storage areas

Proximity to computer room and support areas : Separate building or exterior weatherproof enclosures with adequate separation between buildings

77 Civil Generator and fuel storage areas

Proximity to publicly accessible areas : 19 m (60 ft) or greater separation

78 Civil Bullet resistant walls, windows & doors

Security Counter in Lobby




98

Sr. No


79 Civil Rodent Repellant All computer rooms and server farm areas should be provided with Rodent repellant system

80 Civil Rodent Repellant Configuration : Master console with necessary transducer

81 Civil Rodent Repellant Mounting: Wall / Table Mounting

82 Electrical System

Design System allows concurrent maintenance : Throughout Distribution System


Design

Each and every capacity component and element in the distribution paths can be removed from service on a planned basis without impacting any of the critical environment


Design The manufacturer will supply the certification that the equipment meets or exceeds the specification of fault-tolerant power compliance.


Design All IT equipment is dual powered


Design

For single or three phase power sources, the neutral conductor in the AC power input shall not be bonded to the chassis ground inside the equipment. This will prevent circulating ground currents between the two external power sources


Design

A fault inside the manufacturer's equipment that results in the failure of one AC power source shall not be transferred to the second AC power source causing it to also fail


Design Single Point of Failure : No single points of failure for distribution systems serving electrical equipment or essential load


Design Computer & Telecommunications Equipment Power Cords : Redundant Cord Feed with 100% capacity on remaining cords.


Utility Entrance Utility Entrance : 2N Redundant Feed from different utility substations or generator plant


Main Utility Switchboard

Dedicated Service



Construction : Switchgear with draw out circuit breakers



Surge Suppression


Uninterruptible Power Supply System (UPS)

The Essential Service Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system would be a modular, scalable, detachable & integrable individual tower with 15 minutes back up time.



All cables at incoming and outgoing of UPS shall be copper



Redundancy : 2(N+1)



Topology : Distributed Redundant Modules or Block Redundant System



Automatic Bypass with dedicated feeder to automatic bypass




99

Sr. No




Maintenance Bypass Arrangement : Dedicated maintenance bypass feeder serving UPS output switchboard



Output Power Distribution : Switchboard incorporating removable circuit breaker with adjustable long time, short time and instantaneous functions with provision to turn off instantaneous function



Battery String : Dedicated String for each module



Battery type : 20 Year Modular Lithium



Battery minimum back up time with design load at end of battery life : 15 minutes



Battery Monitoring System : Centralized automated system to check each cell for, voltage, and impedance or resistance


Transformer Transformer : K-Rated or harmonic cancelling, low In rush high efficiency


Automatic Static Transfer Switch

Over-current Device : Circuit Breaker



Maintenance Bypass Procedure : Automatic operation



Output : Dual Circuit Breaker


Ventilation

Ventilation fans for transformer rooms, electrical rooms, purging system for server area, UPS area, pressurization system for staircase, lift lobby & lift should be a well pressurized system.


Cabling Duct for power cables/bus to be rated for high current capacity with cables having PVC insulated copper conductor of low loss.


Sensors Human movement sensing electrical lighting sensor should be deployed for all the low personnel movement areas.


PAHU

The cabinet of the PAHU would be so designed that the main components of the machine can be accessed from the front phase of the cabinet for installation and routine servicing purposes.


PAHU

The following microprocessor controls features shall be displayed on the units: a. Room temperature and humidity i. Supply fan working status ii. Compressor working status iii. Condenser fans working status iv. Electric heaters working status v. Humidifier working status vi. Manual/Auto unit status vii. Line voltage value


PAHU

b. Temperature set point i. Humidity set point ii. Working hours of main component i.e. compressors, fans, heater, humidifier.




100

Sr. No


iii. Unit working hours iv. Current date and time v. Type of alarm (with automatic reset or block) vi. The last 10 intervened alarms


PAHU

The microprocessor shall be able to perform following functions: a. Testing of the working of display system b. Password for unit calibration values modification c. Automatic restart of program d. Cooling capacity control e. Compressor starting timer f. Humidifier capacity control g. Date and time of last 10 intervened alarm h. Start/Stop status storage i. Random starting of the unit. j. Outlet for the connection to remote system k. Temperature and humidity set point calibration l. Delay of general alarm activation m. Alarm calibration


PAHU

Following alarms shall be displayed on screen of microprocessor unit: a. Air flow loss b. Clogged filters c. Compressor low pressure d. Compressor high pressure e. Smoke /ire f. Humidifier low water level g. High/Low room temperature h. High/Low room humidity i. Spare external alarms j. Water under floor


PAHU

The control system shall include the following settable features: a. Unit identification number b. Start-up delay, cold start delay, and fan run on timers c. Sensor calibration d. Remote shutdown and general alarm management e. Compressor sequencing f. Return temperature control g. Choice of modulating output types


PAHU

The humidifier and heaters shall be built-in features in each machine individually. Humidification shall be provided by boiling water in a high-temperature, polypropylene steam generator. The steam shall be distributed evenly into the bypass airstreams of the environment control system to ensure full integration of the water vapor into the supply air without condensation. The humidifier shall have an efficiency of not less the 1.3 kg/kw and be fitted with an auto-flush cycle activated on demand from the microprocessor control system. The humidifier shall be fully serviceable with replacement electrodes. Wastewater shall be flushed from the humidifier by the initiation of the water supply solenoid water valve via a U-pipe overflow system. Drain solenoid valves shall not be used. A microprocessor shall control the humidification and heating through suitable sensors.




101

Sr. No



PAHU

Dehumidification shall be achieved by either reducing effective coil area by solenoid valve arrangement or using the dew point method of control. Whenever dehumidification is required, the control system shall enable a solenoid valve to limit the exchange surface of the evaporating coil, thereby providing a lower evaporating temperature.


PAHU

The evaporator coil shall be A-shape coil for down flow, incorporating draw-through air design for uniform air distribution. The coil shall be constructed of rifled bore copper tubes and louvered aluminum fins with the frame and drip tray fabricated from heavy gauge aluminum. Face area of coil shall be selected corresponding to air velocity not exceeding 2.5 m/sec.


PAHU

The fans shall be located downstream of the evaporator coil and be of the electronically commuted, backward, curved, centrifugal type, double-width, double-inlet, and statically and dynamically balanced. Each fan shall be direct-driven by a high efficiency direct current (DC) motor.


PAHU Thermal and computational fluid dynamics (CFD) analysis diagrams shall be provided


PAHU

The unit shall incorporate the following protections: a. Single phasing preventers b. Reverse phasing c. Phase misbalancing d. Phase failure e. Overload tripping (MPCB) of all components


PAHU The system shall include fully deployed Dynamic Smart Cooling with auto sequencing and auto power management features.


PAHU

The refrigerant used shall be environmentally friendly HFC, R-407-C or equivalent in view of the long-term usage of the Data Centers equipment as well as the availability of spares and refrigerant.


PAHU The internal rack layout design shall follow the Cold aisle / Hot aisle concept as recommended by ASHRAE.


PAHU The fans would be electrically commuted centrifugal fans made of aluminum with backward curved blades enabling higher useful static pressure.


PAHU

The important component, that is, heat exchanger (evaporator coil made of cooper tubes mechanically expanded on aluminum fins with hydrophilic treats), shall have sufficient front surface area to ensure a low airflow velocity through the exchanger preventing any entrainment of droplets of condensation, reduction of air’s load losses for efficient heat exchange during cooling and dehumidifier processes. The PAHU will have microprocessor controller to manage all operations autonomously. The algorithms in the controller would ensure integral controls of all the sub-units and components at the device level from remote location.


PAHU Cool air feed to the Data Centers shall be bottom-charged or downward flow type using the raised floor as




102

Sr. No


supply through perforated aluminum tiles for airflow distribution. The return airflow should cater to the natural upwardly movement of hot air.


PAHU

The Precision Air-Conditioning system shall capable to be integrated with the IBMS for effective monitoring. The environment inside the Data Centers shall be continuously maintained and the temperature & humidity shall be controlled at desired levels as per Tier IV standards.


PAHU

Ambient RH levels shall be maintained at 50% ± 5 non-condensing. Humidity sensors shall be deployed. The necessary alarms for variation in RH shall be monitored on a 24/7 basis and logged for providing reports.


PAHU

The Data Centers shall be deployed with efficient air filters to eliminate and arrest the possibility of airborne particulate matter which may cause air-flow clogging, gumming up of components, causing short-circuits, or blocking the function of moving parts.


PAHU

The precision air conditioners shall have two (2) independent refrigeration circuits, each comprised of one scroll compressor, refrigeration circuit and condenser, and dual blowers for flexibility of operations and better redundancy.


PAHU The unit casing shall be in double-skin construction for longer life of the unit and low noise level.


PAHU

For close control of the Data Centers temperature and relative humidity (RH) environment conditions, the controller shall have proportional integration and differential (PID).


Electrical Substation

The Installed Transformers shall be of Dry type (Dry Transformer).


Air circuit Breaker The circuit breakers shall be of the air break type, robust and compact design suitable for indoor mounting and shall comply with the requirement IEC 60947-1 and 2.


Air circuit Breaker ACB with molded case design to ensure high endurance without maintenance, and the Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) = Ics = Icw as per SLD for 1 Sec.


Air circuit Breaker

The Circuit Breaker shall be flush front, metal clad, horizontal draw-out pattern, three/four pole as required and fully interlocked. Each Circuit Breaker shall be housed in a separate compartment enclosed on all sides.


Air circuit Breaker

The Circuit Breaker cradle shall be designed and constructed to permit smooth withdrawal and insertion. The movement shall be free of jerks, easy to operate. Mechanical Latch to be provided to identify the isolated, test & service position of breaker to prevent over racking.


Air circuit Breaker

All current carrying parts in the breaker shall be silver plated and suitable arcing contacts shall be provided to protect the main contacts which shall be separate from the main contacts and easily replaceable. In addition, Arc chutes shall be provided for each pole, and these shall be suitable for being lifted out for the inspection of the main and the arcing contacts.




103

Sr. No



Air circuit Breaker The cubicle for housing the Breaker shall be free standing dead front pattern, fabricated from the best quality sheet steel.


IMCCB

All IMCCBs shall have rated service breaking capacity (Ics) = Icu= 100% at defined operational voltage and should be rated for appropriate impulse withstand voltage.


IMCCB The IMCCBs shall be of double break rotary contact mechanism, having current limiting feature to limit through energy on the installation.


IMCCB

There should be total coordination between upstream and downstream to switchgear and protection devices such as ACB, IMCCB, MCB etc. up to service level breaking capacity.


IMCCB

Operating Mechanism: • The operating handle of the IMCCBs shall be quick make / break, trip free type. • The operating handle of the IMCCBs shall have suitable, ON, OFF and TRIPPED indicators. • The operating handle and mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of and integral with the circuit breaker • IMCCBs shall be capable of limiting the fault currents. The maximum thermal I^2 t shall be indicated by the manufacturer. • IMCCBs shall comprise of the mechanism designed to trip the circuit breaker in the event of high value short circuit currents. • The electrical endurance of IMCCBs shall be more or equal to that specified by IEC 60 947-2 standard. • Earth fault protection if specified should be provided by integral / add on module with time delay and earth fault differentiation, there should be fault differentiation of over current and earth fault on IMCCB or panel door.


Diesel Generator All DG sets should be rated for continuous usage of 72 hours to run the Data Center.


Diesel Generator The storage capacity should hold Diesel to run Data center for 24 hrs.


Diesel Generator

A Tier IV engine-generator system, along with its power paths and other supporting elements, shall meet the Concurrently Maintainable and/or Fault Tolerant performance confirmation tests


Diesel Generator Critical Silencer


Diesel Generator Lightning arrestor for DG Stack


Diesel Generator Aviation Lamp for DG Stack


Electrical Panels

The Panels shall be of compartmentalize design so that circuit arc / flash products do not create secondary faults and be fabricated out of high quality CRCA sheet, suitable for indoor installation having dead front operated and floor mounting type.


Electrical Panels All CRCA sheet steel used in the construction of Panels shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a




104

Sr. No


rigid support for all components. Joints of any kind in sheet steel shall be seam welded, all welding slag grounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal.


Electrical Panels

The Panels shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof and degree of protection being not less than IP: 54 to IS: 2147. Gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all covers shall be provided to render the joints dust proof. All doors and covers shall be fully gasketed with foam rubber and /or rubber strips and shall be lockable.


Electrical Panels

Panels shall be preferably arranged in multi-tier formation. The size of the Panels shall be designed in such a way that the internal PAHU is sufficient for hot air movement. If necessary, openings shall be provided for natural ventilation, but the said openings shall be screened with fine weld mesh.


Electrical Panels The Panels shall be provided with removable sheet steel plates at top and bottom to drill holes for cable / conduit entry at site.


Electrical Panels The Panels shall be designed to facilitate easy inspection, maintenance and repair.


Electrical Panels

The Panels shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment without distortion under normal and under short circuit condition. They shall be suitably braced for short circuit duty


Gas Insulated Substation- Design

The design should be such that all parts subjected to wear and tear are easily accessible for maintenance purposes.



The equipment offered shall be protected against all types of voltage surges



The arrangement of gas sections or compartments shall be such as to facilitate future expansion of incomer bay with any make on either end without any drilling, cutting or welding on the existing equipment.


Gas Insulated Substation

The equipment shall be built according to the SF6 gas insulation technology rated at 66KV/33KV and the same should satisfy as per specification



The GIS as offered should be fully type tested as per latest IEC standards at the time of submitting the bid.



In the event of arcing in a compartment, the arcs should not extend to the neighboring compartment. Any failure to the enclosure of the compartment shall not lead to damages in the neighboring compartments.



Suitable means of expansions should be provided in the metal enclosure and pipelines to absorb the actual thermal expansion and contraction of the SF6 equipment and to facilitate the alignment of switchgear assembly.



The metal enclosures for the SF6 gas insulated equipment modules shall be made from aluminum alloy.



GIS should be of modular design, and it should be possible to add feeder bays for additional transformers, if required.

169 Electrical Gas Insulated GIS supplier OEM should have minimum 5 years




105

Sr. No


System Substation experience in design and manufacturing of similar GIS substations, with adequate trained personnel .



The Disconnectors and earthing switches shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked against mal-operation.



Feeder earthing switch shall be fast acting type and isolated from earthed enclosures and shall permit testing of switchgear.



It shall also be possible to carryout high voltage testing of cable cores without having to open the breaker assembly or SF6 chamber without disconnecting the cables. Suitable adapter for such testing should be provided.



The conductors/bus bars shall be of copper/ Aluminum and enclosure shall be made of Aluminum Alloy.



The gas barrier insulators shall withstand 1.5 times maximum rated pressure on one side and vacuum on the other side.



All gas sampling shall be possible during normal operation and without loss of gas.



The instrument transformer shall have separate metering cores to permit measurement of values of energy, power, current and voltage as per required accuracy.



Clear visual indication of isolator and earthing switch, switch blade position, whether open or closed shall be provided.



Each component shall be modular and complete with ancillary equipment



The circuit breakers shall be provided with an “anti-hunting” coil for all commands going to the switchgear.



All interlock and automatic systems within the actuation system shall be designed so that the circuit breaker executes operations only when it is in a position enabling to do so completely and reliably



The isolators shall be fitted with a suitable actuation system operating simultaneously on all three poles, backed up by an emergency manual actuation in case of malfunction of the former. The isolators shall not change position under the effect of electro dynamic loads.



In case of any internal arc fault – regardless whether it occurs in a bus bar section, a busbar isolator or the circuit breaker-repair works should be possible without shutting down the substation; at least one busbar and the undisturbed feeder should remain in operation.



It should be possible to remove and replace a fully assembled circuit breaker without interfering the operation of the adjacent feeder. All circuit breakers should be interchangeable.



The GIS equipment shall be arranged in such a manner that in case of maintenance work on any of the equipment, at least one bus bar should be available for operation.



Each bay shall be segregated from its neighbor bays by means of gas tight barrier insulators to ensure that in case of an internal arc the fault will be restricted to the




106

Sr. No


concerned bay.



Each gas compartment should have its own SF6 pressure monitoring facilities as well as static filters.



The protection devices for this equipment shall ensure permanent monitoring of gas pressure inside each compartment by means of temperature compensated monitoring devices.



The design of the cable termination shall allow plugging and unplugging the HV cable without need of opening the GIS and without any gas work.


Earthing/Grounding SI should also include Lightning Arrestors Lightning protection system in the electrical architecture.


Earthing/Grounding Lighting fixtures neutral isolated from service entrance derived from lighting transformer for ground fault isolation


Earthing/Grounding Data center grounding infrastructure in computer room : As required by ANSI/I-IA-607-B


Central Power Monitoring

Monitored Points : Utility, Main Transformer, UPS, Generator, Feeder Circuit Breakers, Automatic Static Transfer Switch, PDU, Automatic Transfer Switches, Surge Protection Device, Critical Load Branch Circuits


Central Power Monitoring

Notification Method : Control Room Console, Email, and/or text message to multiple facility personnel


Battery Room Separate from UPS/Switchgear Equipment Rooms


Battery Room Individual Battery Strings Isolated from Each Other


Battery Room Shatterproof Viewing Glass in Battery Room Door


Standby Generating System

Generator Sizing : Sized for total building load with 2(N +1)distributed redundancy


Standby Generating System

Generators should not be on Single Bus


Load bank Installation : Permanent sized for single largest equipment


Load bank Auto Shutdown : Automatic upon failure of utility


Bus Bar Trunking The busbar shall be air insulated and made of high quality, high conductivity, high strength Aluminum.


Bus Bar Trunking

The busbar shall be of 3 phases and neutral system with separate neutral and earth bar. The size of neutral busbar in all main panels or lighting panels and feeders for panel shall be equal to phase busbar.


Bus Bar Trunking The busbar and interconnection between busbar and various components shall be of high conductivity Aluminum.


Bus Bar Trunking

The busbar shall be of rectangular cross-section designed to withstand full load current for phase busbar and also full rated current for neutral busbar in case of MCC panels only and shall be extensible on either side.


Bus Bar Trunking The busbar size shall be as per the rating of the panel. The busbar shall have uniform cross-section throughout the length.




107

Sr. No



Bus Bar Trunking

The busbar and interconnections shall be insulated with epoxy-coated busbar. The busbar shall be supported on bus insulators of nonflammable type with high creep age and high anti tracking property and non-hydroscopic SMC / DMC insulated supports at sufficiently close intervals to prevent busbar sag and shall effectively withstand electromagnetic stresses in the event of short circuit.


Bus Bar Trunking

The busbar shall be housed in a separate compartment. The busbar shall be isolated with 3-mm. thick Bakelite sheet to avoid any accidental contact. The busbar shall be arranged such that minimum clearance between the busbar are maintained as below:


Bus Bar Trunking All busbar connections shall be done by drilling holes in busbar and connecting by chromium plated or tinned plated brass bolts and nuts.


Bus Bar Trunking Additional cross-section of busbar shall be provided in all Panels to cover up the holes drilled in the busbar. Spring and flat washers shall be used for tightening the bolts.


Bus Bar Trunking

All connections between busbar and circuit breakers / switches and cable terminals shall be through aluminum strips of proper size to carry full rated current. These strips shall be insulated with insulating taps.


Bus Bar Trunking

Panel to panel entry of bus bar shall be effectively sealed by electrical and thermal insulation barriers so that products of flashover do not travel from one panel to another panel creating multiple faults.


Bus Bar Trunking All joint shall have non-flammable insulation shrouds for secondary insulation purpose


Bus Bar Trunking Should have IMCCB integratable with IBMS. Provision for multiple tapping at Rack level.

214 Elevators Passenger Lift Passenger Gear less and Machine Room Less with ARD (Min 544 Kg for 8 Passenger VVVF Automatic lift)

215 Elevators Passenger Lift In case of earth quake or seismic waves is found lift will go to the home floor and open the door.

216 Elevators Passenger Lift Automatic rescues device.

217 Elevators Passenger Lift Over speed safety system with testing at site facility.

218 Elevators Passenger Lift DC Alarm Bell

219 Elevators Passenger Lift Multi beam sensor

220 Elevators Passenger Lift Safety landing mason

221 Elevators Passenger Lift Next landing operation

222 Elevators Passenger Lift Independent operation

223 Elevators Passenger Lift Hand winding operation for safety emergency purpose

224 Elevators Passenger Lift Hand operation (slow speed maintenance purpose)

225 Elevators Passenger Lift Emergency Stop Button and Emergency car lighting

226 Elevators Passenger Lift Emergency Interphone system incorporated on cabin operating panel

227 Elevators Passenger Lift Re-open with hall call button operation

228 Elevators Passenger Lift Automatic door open time adjustment operation

229 Elevators Passenger Lift AC Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF) invertor control door operation

230 Elevators Passenger Lift Car call registered light

231 Elevators Passenger Lift Fireman emergency operation




108

Sr. No


232 Elevators Passenger Lift Hall Call registered light

233 Elevators Passenger Lift 2 hours Fire rated doors

234 Elevators Passenger Lift Handrail in Cabin

235 Elevators Passenger Lift Voice Announcing System

236 Elevators Passenger Lift In case of emergency landing device is operated car will open the door and floor level should be matched.

237 Elevators Passenger Lift Call cancel and next call registration for next floor.

238 Elevators Passenger Lift Duplex operation may be shifted to simplex operation of the lifts as and when required without making any extra efforts (home floor) and open the door.

239 Elevators Passenger Lift Traction Hoist ropes with self-lubricating as per relevant ISI code.

240 Elevators Passenger Lift Car safety and Governor to control excessive descending speed.

241 Elevators Passenger Lift Counter balance to promote smooth and economic operation.

242 Elevators Passenger Lift Terminal and final limits.

243 Elevators Passenger Lift Terminal buffer.

244 Elevators Passenger Lift Controller to control starting speed of elevator motor and supply brake automatically in case of application of any of the safety device or power failure.

245 Elevators Passenger Lift Steel glides for the car and counter weight.

246 Elevators Passenger Lift The elevator should be equipped with the over speed governor safety system.

247 Elevators Passenger Lift Inspection unit shall be provided at the top of car.

248 Elevators Passenger Lift Rechargeable battery based Emergency light & alarm.

249 Elevators Passenger Lift Fireman's Switch

250 Elevators Passenger Lift Minimum Height of the lift should be 8 ft.

251 Elevators Freight lift 2000 Kg Freight Gear less with Machine Room (Speed Min 0.75 Meter/Sec

252 Elevators Freight lift In case of earth quake or seismic waves is found lift will go to the home floor and open the door.

253 Elevators Freight lift Automatic rescues device.

254 Elevators Freight lift Over speed safety system with testing at site facility.

255 Elevators Freight lift DC Alarm Bell

256 Elevators Freight lift Multi beam sensor

257 Elevators Freight lift Safety landing mason

258 Elevators Freight lift Next landing operation

259 Elevators Freight lift Independent operation

260 Elevators Freight lift Hand winding operation for safety emergency purpose

261 Elevators Freight lift Hand operation (slow speed maintenance purpose)

262 Elevators Freight lift Emergency Stop Button and Emergency car lighting

263 Elevators Freight lift Emergency Interphone system incorporated on cabin operating panel

264 Elevators Freight lift Re-open with hall call button operation

265 Elevators Freight lift Automatic door open time adjustment operation

266 Elevators Freight lift AC Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF) invertor control door operation

267 Elevators Freight lift Car call registered light

268 Elevators Freight lift Fireman emergency operation




109

Sr. No


269 Elevators Freight lift Hall Call registered light

270 Elevators Freight lift 2 hours Fire rated doors

271 Elevators Freight lift Handrail in Cabin

272 Elevators Freight lift Voice Announcing System

273 Elevators Freight lift In case of emergency landing device is operated car will open the door and floor level should be matched.

274 Elevators Freight lift Call cancel and next call registration for next floor.

275 Elevators Freight lift Duplex operation may be shifted to simplex operation of the lifts as and when required without making any extra efforts (home floor) and open the door.

276 Elevators Freight lift Traction Hoist ropes with self-lubricating as per relevant ISI code.

277 Elevators Freight lift Car safety and Governor to control excessive descending speed.

278 Elevators Freight lift Counter balance to promote smooth and economic operation.

279 Elevators Freight lift Terminal and final limits.

280 Elevators Freight lift Terminal buffer.

281 Elevators Freight lift Controller to control starting speed of elevator motor and supply brake automatically in case of application of any of the safety device or power failure.

282 Elevators Freight lift Steel glides for the car and counter weight.

283 Elevators Freight lift The elevator should be equipped with the over speed governor safety system.

284 Elevators Freight lift Inspection unit shall be provided at the top of car.

285 Elevators Freight lift Rechargeable battery based Emergency light & alarm.

286 Elevators Freight lift Fireman's Switch

287 Elevators Freight lift Door open & Door close button

288 Elevators Freight lift Full Height Infrared Curtain

289 Elevators Freight lift Auto On/Off for car light and fan

290 Elevators Freight lift Minimum Height of the lift should be 9ft.

291 Elevators Passenger Lift Foundation: The machine will be placed directly above the Overhead area in the hoist way and machine resting arrangement will be provided by the tenderer

292 Elevators Passenger Lift Speed: Min 1.25 Meter/ Sec

293 Elevators Passenger Lift Design of Cars Body: Constructed out of Stainless Steel in Etched Finish Car and Car Doors with Stainless Steel

294 Elevators Passenger Lift Flooring: Granite

295 Elevators Passenger Lift Car Light and Fan: LED fitting to have daylight effect inside the Car cabin. Fan/blower as per manufacturing enriched design.

296 Elevators Passenger Lift Car Position Indicator: Floor position indicator at all floors along with direction of travel indicator.

297 Elevators Passenger Lift Guide rails: The guide rails should be steel dually toughened and ground section to ensure position tract and smooth running of the elevator.

298 Elevators Passenger Lift Displaying indicator

299 Elevators Passenger Lift Floor Position

300 Elevators Passenger Lift Announcement System

301 Elevators Passenger Lift Door safety interlock

302 Elevators Passenger Lift Signals: (A) Luminous hall buttons at all floors.




110

Sr. No


(B) Digital hall position indicators at all floors. (C) Car operating panel with luminous floor buttons (D) Digital car position & Direction indicator. (E) AC/ DC VF Door Drive. (F) Emergency light & emergency alarm through inverter (Rechargeable batteries).

303 Fire Management System

Fire Detection All system common control functions shall be automatically routed to any node of the system as a function of the time of day and date.


Fire Detection There would be audio Paging and Emergency Evacuation subsystem with fully digitized and multiplexed audio.


Fire Detection

The fire alarm system shall be an automatic 1–n zone, single-loop, addressable, fire detection and alarm system, utilizing conventional detection and alarm sounders.


Fire Detection

Detection shall be by means of automatic heat and smoke detectors located throughout the Data Centers (i.e. ceiling, raised floor and other appropriate areas where fire can take place) with break glass units on escape routes and exits


Fire Detection

The control panel shall be a microprocessor-based, single-loop, addressable unit, designed and manufactured to the requirements of EN54 Part 2 for the control and indicating component and EN54 Part 4 for the internal power.


Fire Detection Cable Entries: The control panel will include the necessary top entry and rear entry cable entry points


Fire Detection Manual Call Points (MCP): MCPs shall be addressable and of the steady-pressure-break glass type manufactured to the requirements of BS 5839.


Fire Detection VESDA: Smoke Detectors: Smoke detectors shall be optical or ionization type.


Fire Detection VESDA: Heat Detectors shall have minimum one LED to indicate the device has operated and shall fit a common addressable base.


Fire Detection VESDA- Heat Detectors: Devices shall be compatible with the CIE, conforming to the requirements of EN54 Part 7 and be LPCB-approved.


Fire Detection

VESDA -Addressable Detector Bases:a. All bases shall be compatible with the type of detector heads fitted and the control system. Each base shall include all necessary electronics including a short-circuit isolator.


Fire Detection VESDA -Addressable Detector Bases:b:Detector bases shall fit onto an industry standard conduit box


Fire Detection

VESDA- Alarm System: a.Electronic sounders shall be colored red with adjustable sound outputs and at least three (3) sound signals. The sounders shall be suitable for operation with a 24V DC supply providing a sound output of at least 100dBA at 1 meter and 75 dBA min, for a bed head or sounder base type device. The sounder frequency shall be in the range of 500Hz to 1000Hz




111

Sr. No



Fire Detection VESDA- Alarm System: b.The fire detection and alarm system will be programmable and configurable via an alphanumeric keypad on the control panel


Fire Detection VESDA- Alarm System: c. The labeling of device and zone labels shall be part of the system


Fire Detection VESDA- Alarm System: c. The labeling of device and zone labels shall be part of the system


Fire Detection The detectors shall have twin LEDs to indicate the device has operated and shall fit a common addressable base.


Water Leak Detection System

LED screen displays alarm location in meters



Integral indication showing areas being protected.



Audible and visual alarm



Battery backup


Fire Suppression system

The clean agent considered for the suppression system shall be suitable for occupied areas with No Observable Adverse Effect Level of 10% as compared to the design concentration to ensure high safety margin for the human who might be present in the hazard area. Clean agents listed in NFPA 2001



The storage container offered shall be of seamless type, with UL/FM/VdS/LPC/CNPP-component approved. Welded cylinders are not permitted.



The gas valve shall be differential pressure design and shall not require an explosive- or detonation-type consumable device to operate it.



The gas valve operating actuators shall be of electric (solenoid) type and shall be capable of resetting manually. The valve shall be capable of being functionally tested for periodic servicing requirements and without any need to replace consumable parts.



The individual gas cylinder bank shall also be fitted with a manual mechanism operating facility that shall provide actuation in case of electric failure



The system flow calculation is to be carried out on certified software, suitable for the seamless steel cylinder being offered for this project. Such system flow calculations shall be also approved by UL/FM/VdS/LPC/CNPP.



The system shall utilize 42-bar/high-pressure (600 psi) technology that allows for a higher capacity to overcome frictional losses, higher distances of the agent flow, and better agent penetration in enclosed electronic equipment such as server racks and electrical panels.

331 Fire Fire Suppression The system discharge time shall be 10 seconds or less,




112

Sr. No


Management System

system in accordance with NFPA standard 2001.



The detection and control system that shall be used to trigger the Fire suppression system shall employ cross-zoning of photoelectric and ionization smoke detectors. A single detector activated in one zone shall cause an alarm signal to be generated. Another detector activated in the second zone shall generate a pre-discharge signal and start the pre-discharge condition.



The discharge nozzles shall be located in the protected volume in compliance to the limitation with regard to the PAHU, floor and ceiling covering. The nozzle locations shall be such that the uniform design concentration will be established in all parts of the protected volumes. The final number of the discharge nozzles shall be according to the OEM’s certified software, which shall also be approved by third-party inspection and certified such as UL/FM/VdS/LPC/CNPP.



The cylinder shall be equipped with differential pressure valves and no replacement parts shall be necessary to recharge the Gas containers.



The releasing device shall be easily removable from the cylinder without emptying the cylinder. While removing from cylinder, the releasing device shall be capable of being operated with no replacement of parts required after this operation



The manual release device fitted on the Gas cylinders shall be the manual-lever type and a faceplate with clear instruction of how to mechanically activate the system. In all cases, Gas cylinders shall be fitted with a manual mechanical operating facility that requires two-action actuation to prevent accidental actuation.



All the major components of the Fire Detection and suppression system such as the cylinder, valves and releasing devices, nozzles, and all accessories shall be supplied by one single manufacturer under the same brand name.


Fire Alarm system

Main fire panel shall consist of LCD display, Battery, Battery charger, with inbuilt supervised voice evacuation system with amplifier cards, Microphone, Digital message card and Auto dialer etc.,


Fire Alarm system The panel of fire alarm system shall be UL listed / approved.


Fire Alarm system Glass break manual call point and Hooter cum strobe units shall be provided at fire escape areas such as fire escape door and staircases.


Fire Alarm system

The entire wiring shall be using 2Core 1.5Sqmm FRLS armored copper cable. Costing of conduits and other accessories shall be included in cabling (wherever required).


Fire Alarm system The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation.

343 Fire Fire Alarm system All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile




113

Sr. No


Management System

programmable memory within the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.


Fire Alarm system

Remote panel site-specific software and executive firmware downloads shall be capable of being performed over proprietary fire alarm network communications and via TCP/IP Ethernet network communications. Ethernet access to any fire alarm panel shall be capable of providing access only to authenticated users through a cryptographically authenticated and secure SSL tunnel.


Fire Alarm system

Panels shall automatically store all program changes to the panel’s non-volatile memory each time a new program is downloaded. Panels shall be capable of storing the active site-specific configuration program. A compare utility program shall also be available to authorized users to compare any two of the saved programs. The compare utility shall provide a deviation report highlighting the changes between the two compared programs.


Fire Alarm system

Panels shall provide electronic file storage with a means to retrieve a record copy of the site-specific software. Sufficient file storage shall be provided for other related system documentation such as record drawings, record of completion, owner’s manuals, testing and maintenance records, etc.


Fire Alarm system

The media used to store the record copy of site-specific software and other related system documentation shall be electrically supervised. If the media is removed a trouble shall be reported on the fire alarm control panel.


Fire Alarm system

The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. A separate alarm and trouble log shall be provided.


Fire Alarm Remote Access

Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall have the capability to provide a remote service access feature using Ethernet and TCP/IP communications protocol. The Remote Access feature shall provide automatic notification of system faults and remote diagnostics of system status for responding technicians prior to arrival on site.



The internet remote access service function shall provide automated real time off-site reporting of discrete system events to a remote service support center with details of internal



FACP fault conditions allowing a pre-site visit analysis of repair requirements.



Existing FACP controls shall be capable of retrofitting the Remote Service module as a plug-in upgrade feature.



The remote service network shall work on the customers Ethernet infrastructure and be Fire-Wall friendly for two-way communications for off-site reporting. The feature shall be compatible with existing proxy servers and firewalls shall not require any special changes or




114

Sr. No


modifications.



The remote service system shall be a non-Windows based application to protect against conventional virus attacks.



The remote service system shall be compatible with virtual LANS (VLAN).



The remote service system shall work on an outbound communication premise (panel calls home) in order to eliminate the possibility of any inbound connection into the network (from trusted or non-trusted sites).



The remote service system shall have capability to provide an audit trail of all events and service connections.



The FAS shall be compatible to Remote Service program that provides the following requirements.



24/7 recording of FACP service activity

360 IBMS IBMS IBMS Compatibility– MODBUS / Bacnet IP output

361 IBMS IBMS All equipment and systems such as Chillers, UPS, Fire Management system, DG etc. should be compatible with IBMS

362 Mechanical General

Redundancy for mechanical equipment (e.g. air conditioning units, coolers, pumps, cooling towers, condensers) : N+1 redundancy for mechanical equipment. Extended loss of electrical power should not cause loss of cooling outside operational range of critical equipment

363 Mechanical General Routing of water or drain piping not associated with the data center equipment in data center PAHU is not permitted

364 Mechanical General Floor drains in computer room for condensate drain water, humidifier flush water, and sprinkler discharge water

365 Mechanical General Mechanical systems on standby generator

366 Mechanical General HVAC Control System : Control system failure should not interrupt cooling to critical areas

367 Mechanical General Power Source to HVAC Control System : Redundant, UPS electrical power to IBMS Control

368 Mechanical Chiller Chiller should be provided with high ambient temperature control options to ensure unit is capable of operation up to 119° F (48° C) ambient temperature.

369 Mechanical Chiller

All the chillers should be combination of water cooled (100% capacity) and air cooled chillers (100% capacity). Air cooled chillers shall be VFD driven screw chillers and water cooled chillers shall be centrifugal chillers. All chillers shall be selected based on ASHRAE n= 20 years maximum temperature.

370 Mechanical Chiller Thermal storage tanks

371 Mechanical Chiller Chillers should have a Quick start facility.

372 Mechanical Chiller Electrical Service to Mechanical Equipment : Multiple




115

Sr. No


paths of electrical power to AC equipment. Connected in checkerboard fashion for cooling redundancy

373 Mechanical Chiller Piping System : Dual path condenser water system

374 Mechanical Chiller Chilled Water Piping System : Dual path chilled water system

375 Mechanical Chiller Make-up Water : Dual sources of water, or one source + on-site storage

376 Mechanical Chiller Points of Connection to Condenser Water System : Two points of connection

377 Mechanical Chiller Multiple Bulk storage tanks

378 Mechanical Chiller Storage Tank Pumps and Piping : Multiple pumps, multiple supply pipes. Refueling can happen either by Pipeline or by refueling tank

379 Physical Security

Security Checkpoints

Boom Bar should be integrated to IBMS



Bollard operations should be both from IBMS and Manual



Car Underbody Scanner should be integrated to IBMS



Vehicle speed sensor to generate alert



Vehicle Number plate reader/recognition mechanism



Vehicle RFID Tag for automated operation of Boom bar for employee vehicle



Precast reinforced concrete Boundary wall of 10 ft up to 1m below ground level



Blast /Explosion proof data center wall



Barbed wire fencing on wall with electronic sensor



Baggage X ray checker



Explosive Checking Device



Door frame with hand held for scanning human beings

392 Plumbing Works

Water Closet(WC)

Water Closet shall be wash down or symphonic wash down type floor or wall mounted set, designed for low volume flushing minimum 7 liters of water, flushed by means of a porcelain flushing cistern or an exposed or concealed type CP brass flush valve with regulator valve.

393 Plumbing Works

Urinals Urinals shall be lipped type half stall with glazed vitreous China.

394 Plumbing Works

Urinals Flushing for urinals shall be by means of no hand operation, infrared electric flush valve with complete kit of plumbing.

395 Plumbing Works

Urinals The automatic flush sensor plate shall be flush and press fitted and be of high quality mirror polish finish.

396 Plumbing Works

Urinals Each urinal shall be provided with sensor based one flush valve unit.

397 Plumbing Works

Urinals Flush pipes shall be UPVC pipes concealed in wall chase.




116

Sr. No


398 Plumbing Works

Urinals Porcelain partitions shall be fixed at proper heights with CP brass bolts, anchor fasteners and MS clips.

399 Security Physical Security

Audible Alarms: Electronic sounders shall be colored with adjustable sound outputs and at least three (3) sound signals. The sounders shall be suitable for operation with a 24V DC supply providing a sound output of at least 100dBA at 1 meter and 75 dBA min, for a bed head or sounder base type device. The sounder frequency shall be in the range of 500Hz to 1000Hz.

400 Security Physical Security Physical security staffing : 7 days a week, 24 hours a day with sufficient spare personnel to allow for physical inspections, walk along, supervisions etc.

401 Security CCTV Monitoring Building perimeter and parking

402 Security CCTV Monitoring Generators

403 Security CCTV Monitoring Access Controlled Doors

404 Security CCTV Monitoring Computer Room Floors

405 Security CCTV Monitoring UPS, Telephone & MEP Rooms

406 Security CCTV Digital CCTV Recording of all activity on all cameras

407 Security CCTV Recording rate (frames per second) : Minimum 20 frames/sec

408 Security CCTV All surveillance cameras should be Digital and IP Based.

409 Security Access Management

Generators : RFID enabled card access


UPS, Telephone & MEP Rooms : RFID enabled card access


Fiber Vaults : RFID enabled card access


Emergency Exit Doors : delay egress


Accessible Exterior Windows/openings : intrusion detection


Security Operations Center : RFID enabled card access


Network Operations Center : RFID enabled card access


Security Equipment Rooms : RFID enabled card access


Doors into Computer Rooms : RFID enabled card and biometric access for ingress and egress (Unauthorized egress shall be alarmed and monitored, but unrestricted at all times for life/safety)


Perimeter building doors : RFID enabled card access all entrances


Anti-Black pass system


Mantrap before Server farm area


Main door onto computer room floor : single person interlock, portal or other hardware designed to prevent piggybacking or pass back of access credential, preferably with biometrics

422 Solar Power Generation

Photovoltaic (PV) Arrays

The SPV cells shall be manufactured using unique highly efficient diffusion process or any other technology




117

Sr. No


System in vogue so as to ensure uniform diffusion profiler to achieve close spread and higher efficiency for each cell.

423 Solar Power Generation System


Stabilized net output of the Solar PV Array for the Solar Power System should not be less than the Nominal design level for the System under Standard Test Condition. The PV module shall perform satisfactorily in humidity with temperature between -10 deg. C to +50 deg C and with stand wind dust as per MNRE norms from back side of the panel. Photo / electrical conversion efficiency of the modules of SPV module shall be greater than or equal to 15.2 %. Since the modules would be used in a low/medium voltage circuit, the insulation test shall be carried out on each module and a test certificate to that effect provided. The bidder shall indicate minimum efficiency.



The panel should have positive tolerance of 0 to +5 Wp (Watt Peak), Maximum output voltage shall not exceed 1000V. The PV modules shall be suitable for continuous outdoor use.



PV module shall be provided with frame of anodized channels for size and simplicity in installation offered as a single module or series parallel combination of modules. The PV module shall be provided with screen-less frame with solar cable and connector. The module frame, if any, shall be made of a corrosion-resistant material which shall be electrolytic ally compatible with the structural material used for mounting the modules.



The PV modules shall be made of light weight cells, resistant to abrasion, hail PAHU, rain, water and environmental pollution. The PV modules shall be provided with anti-reflection coating and back surface field (BSF) structure to increase conversion efficiency.



The PV module shall use lead wire with weatherproof connector for output terminal.


Solar Panels Solar Panels should have minimum life of 10 years from date of commissioning of FAT




118

Annexure-Q: Scope of Work – Defining Phases

1. Objective:

SBI intends to establish a new Tier IV Data Center (DC) to accommodate approximately 1500 racks and 60 racks for two (2) MUX rooms (30 racks each) at its Pune, Hinjewadi Location. The selected bidder shall Design, Build, Supply, Install, Test, Commission, Operate, Maintain and Transfer the Data Center for a period of 5 years from the date of successful completion of Acceptance Test by SBI and can be extendable for the further period of 3 years depending on the satisfactory performance of the Bidder and at the same discovered price and at sole discretion of SBI. The minimum specified work to be undertaken by the bidder for setting up and operating this Data Center has been categorized in the phases below:

Phase Description

Phase 1 Consultancy & PMC, Data Center Design

Phase 2 Data Center physical build (Civil & Architectural work) including Campus development.

Phase 3 Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of MEP, Data

Phase 4 Center Security, Lighting system, Modular UPS, DG, Transformer etc.

Phase 5 Final Acceptance Testing

2. General Terms and Conditions including but not limited to:

2.1 SBI reserves the right to vary the Rack size (Numbers), Electrical requirements, Manpower deployed and Electro-Mechanical equipment as per the discovered prices and rates.

2.2 This project will be on a turnkey basis with implementation period of 18 months including (integrated system testing) and Operation and Maintenance period of 5 years, post which it is at Banks discretion to extend the O&M contract with the SI.

2.3 The entire project and deployed equipment shall have an onsite comprehensive warranty of minimum 1 year and Operation and Maintenance of 5 years from the date of Final Acceptance by SBI.

2.4 All the designs pertaining to Civil and Non-IT infrastructure will be independently certified by authorized third Party appointed by SBI, post validation and certification by SI. SBI reserves the right to conduct Independent Quality Assurance tests from an appointed Third Party during all phases of the project. In case deviations are identified, SI has to rectify deviations, if any at no extra cost to SBI.

2.5 The project should comply with all relevant Fire and Safety requirements as defined by MIDC, Local Authorities & Statutory bodies.

2.6 The project shall be in compliance to the Environmental Clearance as per State Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) and as per State-Level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC) or any other applicable competent authority.

2.7 Power Usage Efficiency (PUE) at minimum 50% of IT Load should not be more than 1.5

2.8 SI shall obtain all Uptime certifications including Gold Tier IV Certification of Operational sustainability for all Phases of the Development and shall maintain them for the Contract period.

2.9 SI should obtain ISO 27001 certification for the data center within first quarter after completion of final acceptance test. SI has to maintain this certification for entire period of this project.

2.10 Any hazardous material storage, disposal permission needs to be taken from competent authority.




119

2.11 For the entire Data Center infrastructure, there should be a clear maintenance schedule such as a Preventive Maintenance Program, Housekeeping policies, Maintenance Management system, Vendor Support, Deferred Maintenance Program, Defective Maintenance Program, Lifecycle Planning, Failure Analysis Program, Data Center Staff Training Program, Vendor Training (Part Time support). Any deficiencies arising through the operational period should be rectified, otherwise penalties will be levied as per Annexure-R Penalties and SLA Terms and conditions.

2.12 SI has to adhere to all the best Industry standards for the complete solution including but not limited to the standards specified in the scope below.

2.13 SI shall comply with the Technical Specifications as mentioned in Annexure-P.

2.14 All equipment and systems such as Chillers, UPS, Fire Management system, DG, Surveillance Cameras etc. should be compatible and integrated with IBMS. All such equipment should be IP based.

2.15 All equipment supplied should be of latest make and manufacturing date should not be more than one year from publishing date of this tender. No quoted equipment should End of Sale, End of Support or End of Life at the time of quoting for the same in this tender. Any of the equipment coming under these categories during the contract period, it should be replaced by the SI at no extra cost to SBI

2.16 SI has to immediately submit to SBI the order/Invoice copies of the equipment to be procured.

2.17 SI has to fulfill all the Technical Specifications mentioned in Annexure-P. Non-compliance to any specification will be considered as violation of this Contract.

3. Brief Scope

The specified work to be undertaken by the selected bidder for setting up and operating DC has been categorized as per below mentioned phases:

3.1 Phase 1: Consultancy, PMC and Data Center Design

3.1.1 Site Assessment and Preliminary Test including but not limited to Soil Quality test, Soil Bearing Capacity test, Contour Map, Air Quality test, Water Level test.

3.1.2 Conduct a site survey of the proposed location of the Data Center to measure and understand the layout of the allocated space.

3.1.3 Design an efficient layout for the entire space, taking into account space for the heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC), Modular Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS), electrical panels, walkways, door swings, and any other equipment to be installed in the Data Centers. SI has to ensure that any applicable statutory requirement is fulfilled in this regard.

3.1.4 Develop and submit a detailed list of activities to be performed to complete the entire Data Centers civil work. Data Centers design shall comply with the Tier IV Category Data Center standards.

3.1.5 Design doors for commissioning or decommissioning large and/or heavy equipment inside the Utility Area, Server/Storage/Network Farm as well as UPS Room, Fire Suppression Gas Cylinder Room, Electrical / integrated Building Management System (IBMS) room.

3.1.6 Develop One (1) design diagram/layout of the proposed Data Center (engineering drawings) with 2D and 3D graphical views and submit to the SBI for approval. The One (1) submitted design should be supported with PROS/CONS along with the rationale behind the design.

3.1.7 Develop and submit a detailed list of Major Components along with specifications for Data Center civil work.

3.1.8 Design overhead and/or below-floor cable trays and cable ladder system throughout the Data Centers, based on the design layout created by the SI and should be submitted to SBI for consideration.




120

3.1.9 All entry and exits should be designed as per Uptime Institutes Tier IV requirement and as per applicable Local Authorities guidelines.

3.1.10 Obtain the approval from SBI for the design and list of major components before starting civil work.

3.1.11 SI shall obtain all the necessary Approvals/NOCs/Permissions including but not limited to ‘Data Center under Continuous Process Industry’, ‘Consent for Establishment’, ‘Environmental Clearance’, ‘Occupancy Certificate’, Data Center and its Ancillary Building height clearance from Airport Authority of India’, ‘Storage of Explosive materials such as Gas, Diesel, etc. from Chief Controller of Explosives (CCOE) and any other approvals deemed necessary from the appropriate issuing authorities. Cost for all approvals shall be borne by SI only

3.1.12 The Electrical Drawings, Structural Drawings and Architectural Drawings shall have to be properly Co-related before executing the works. In case of any difference noticed between Architectural and Electrical Drawings, the fact shall be immediately brought to be notice of SBI whose decision in writing shall be obtained by the SI.

3.1.13 SI has to prepare the material and equipment checklist for Bank’s approval. SI has to intimate Bank three (3) weeks in advance before delivery of materials and equipment at site. Factory visits as required for this project to be arranged by SI for Bank officials, Consultants and any other officials authorized by SBI (maximum 4). All expenses related to Travel, Boarding, Lodging and Conferencing etc. will be borne by SI.

Deliverable Documents:

1. Site Assessment and Preliminary Test Reports 2. Requirements Study Report 3. Master Requirement Traceability Matrix for all Five (5) Phases. 4. Project Plan on detailed activity level 5. MIDC, Local Authority & Statutory body Approvals, Permissions, Sanctioned Plan & Drawing

and No objection Certificate 6. Detailed Design Report containing site layout, Landscape Plan, Site topography and other Data

Centers design layouts 7. Detailed Design, including engineering drawings/Tender Drawings such as but not limited to :

i. Data center 2D and 3D view (along with walk through model) ii. Data center column layout iii. Data Center Floor Plan including Entry and Exits iv. Plumbing Plan v. Elevation and Section Plan vi. Staircase Plan vii. Doors and window Plan viii. Lift Detail plan ix. Washrooms & Cafeteria x. Pile Foundation Plan xi. Foundation and RCC Details xii. Slab plan xiii. Beam and Slab RCC Details xiv. Ground floor and roof Foundation Plan xv. Mumty Roof Slab Plan

8. Bill of Material, including all components along with specification and standards of the material 9. Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency 10. Detailed report on international standards relevant to Data Center and duly approved and

acceptable by local authority being followed or considered while designing the Data Centers. 11. Detailed Finishing Schedule 12. Schedule of Delivery should be submitted to SBI for consideration. 13. Low level Editable drawing in hard and soft copies. 14. Details of contractors and labors employed during the entire project should be provided to SBI

for approval.




121

Payment of Phase 1 will be made post acceptance of entire deliverable of this phase as per the Timeline mentioned in Annexure-S Terms and Payment.

3.2 Phase 2: Data Center physical build (Civil & Architectural work) including Campus development.

The SI shall procure, construct, test, and commission the physical build of the Data Centers. The SI shall be responsible for:

3.2.1 Civil structure has to be constructed as per the applicable National Building standards and has to be certified by independent structural engineer. The structure should have a minimum sustenance of 35 years from completion of construction.

3.2.2 Procure the required items to construct the physical build of the Data Centers in accordance with the approved design layout.

3.2.3 Construct and commission the physical build of the Data Centers covering but not limited to activities in accordance with the approved design as mentioned in Scope of work, Annexure-Q.

3.2.4 Develop the Acceptance Testing Plan and Testing Procedures for SBI approval.

3.2.5 Execute Testing Procedures as per the Acceptance Testing Plan.

3.2.6 Prepare a Requirements Traceability Matrix (RTM) mapping the requirements specified in this document as well as in the approved detailed design.

3.2.7 LEED GOLD general requirement includes submittals and execution procedures for compliance with IGBC (Indian Green Building Council) for the project. SI has to obtain LEED Green Interior Design and Construction 2009 or latest Gold rating.

3.2.8 Temporary setup such as Electrical connection, Water connection, Sewage connection, Labour shelter, Site office, Security arrangement and any other incidental site development related work will be arranged by SI.

3.2.9 Building Stability Testing to be done by SI at every stage of Building Construction.

Deliverable Documents: 1. Detailed Work Activity Report containing Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) along with delivery

milestones 2. Material Delivery Document 3. Detailed report containing type of work, material used, quantity used, engineering drawing,

load/testing method, and test results of all scope tasks as listed under Scope of Work. 4. Commissioning Plan 5. Operational Requirements 6. System Design Manual 7. Testing Plan and Testing Procedures 8. MIDC, Local Authority & Statutory body Approvals, Permissions, Sanctioned Plan & Drawing

and No objection Certificate 9. Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency (Uptime) 10. Testing Execution Report including acceptance testing results 11. Warranty Information 12. Approval required for Continuous process Industry to get benefits of Power (reduction in

Power Tariff): From applicable authority. 13. Schedule of Delivery should be submitted to SBI for consideration. 14. Low level Editable drawing in Hard and soft Copies. 15. Acceptance Testing Plan and Testing Procedures 16. Building Stability Testing Report 17. Training manuals, Standard Operating Procedures (SOPS), Site Configuration Procedures

(SCPs), Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs) and Method of Procedures (MOPs).




122

Payment of this entire Phase 2 will be made post acceptance of entire deliverable of this phase as per the Timeline mentioned in Annexure-S: Terms of Payment.

3.3 Phase 3: Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of MEP, Data

Center security, Lighting system, Modular UPS, DG, Transformer etc.

3.3.1 Phase 3.1: Requirements Definition and Detailed Design, of Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Components

3.3.1.1 Phase 3.1.1 Design Requirement

i. Conduct the site survey and measure the availability of existing utility power in terms of overall capacity of installed transformer, peak time load on transformer, and capacity of diesel generator along with peak load.

ii. Develop Total IT, Non-IT electrical load calculation sheet. iii. Calculate and design the capacity of transformer which should be adequate enough to

support load of entire Data Center. iv. Design electrical switchboards for the Data Center. v. Calculate the required capacity of the generator system to support additional load of the

Data Center during the power failure. vi. Calculate and design the cooling requirements of the entire Data Centers to include Utility

Area, Server/Storage/Network Farm , UPS Room, Fire Suppression Gas Cylinder Room and electrical/IBMS rooms etc.

vii. Develop and submit a detailed list of Major Components along with the specifications for SBI approval.

viii. Design an energy-efficient electrical system, taking into consideration Tier IV Data Center standard for Modular UPS and HVAC for the Data Center.

ix. Propose fuel-efficient, low-carbon-emission, low-noise diesel generator sufficient to support Data Centers’ electrical peak load.

x. Develop and submit a design document for the electrical Single Line Diagram (SLD). xi. Submit the design for validation and approval of the SBI. xii. Obtain the required permissions, permits, and no-objection certificates from the appropriate

agencies to start the electrical and mechanical work. xiii. Usage of Renewable energy, e.g. ‘Solar’ xiv. Establishing connection from two different sub-station. xv. Use of state of the art Technology / Products or equipment. xvi. Emergency Lighting system in all areas.


1. Site Survey Report 2. Power Requirements Study for Data Center IT and non-IT infrastructure (including Utility

areas). The detailed report shall include vertical and horizontal bus bar capacity and current utilization

3. Detailed Design Report containing Single Line Diagram (SLD), power load calculations panel schedule, and design layouts.

4. Detailed design, including engineering drawings and Scope of Work 5. Bill of Material including all components and specification and standards of equipment and

materials. 6. Detailed report on the capacity and type of total Precision Air-Conditioning System for Data

Centers, including air-flow mechanism and redundancy design. 7. SI has to submit OEM certificate specifying lifespan of supplied equipment. 8. Permits, licenses, and No-Objection Certificates from appropriate agencies to perform the

required work. 9. MIDC, Local Authority & Statutory body Approvals, Permissions, Sanctioned Plan & Drawing

and No objection Certificate 10. Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency 11. Schedule of Delivery should be submitted to SBI for consideration. 12. Low level Editable drawing in Hard and soft Copies.




123

13. Training manuals, Standard Operating Procedures (SOPS), Site Configuration Procedures (SCPs), Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs) and Method of Procedures (MOPs).

3.3.1.2 Phase 3.1.2 Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Electrical and

Mechanical Components

The SI shall carry out procurement, implementation, testing and commissioning of electrical and mechanical components as described below:

1. Procure the required electrical and mechanical components and equipment in accordance with the approved design and list of Major Components.

2. Installation, Testing, and Commissioning of below mentioned including but not limited to electrical and mechanical components in accordance with the approved design: i. Connection of the Data Center to the main utility feed of the Building from two sub-stations ii. Transformers, Chillers iii. Electrical supply, including outlets to all rack locations, based on the design layout iv. Earthing v. Surge protection vi. Utility for Cable tray and UPS power, Cable Labelling, Cable Laying etc. vii. Two (2) power distribution points coming from two (2) separate UPS(Modular) under raised

floor and multiple power distribution units (PDU) for each rack to provide power to equipment rack cabinets.

viii. Configured static transfer switch (STS) for single corded equipment (which do not have dual power supplies).

ix. Electrical distribution system for Modular UPS and utility including panel board and switchboard

x. Non-UPS utility electrical outlets around the perimeter of the room xi. Modular UPS and Modular Lithium batteries xii. HVAC xiii. Diesel generator set (including automatic transfer switch) xiv. Fuel tank storage (suitable to meet DG requirement for continuous 24 hours). Refueling

can happen either by Pipeline or by refueling tank. xv. Bus Bar system xvi. Sensor deployment and monitoring Data Center through IBMS


1. Detailed Activity Report containing work breakdown structure and delivery milestones 2. Material Delivery Document 3. Data Centers Thermal Mapping Report 4. Cable Route Map with labeling and drawings 5. Commissioning Plan 6. System Design Manual 7. Service Level Requirements 8. Warranty Information 9. MIDC, Local Authority & Statutory body Approvals, Permissions, Sanctioned Plan &

Drawing and No objection Certificate 10. Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency 11. Full Load Testing Report 12. Schedule of Delivery should be submitted to SBI for consideration. 13. Low level Editable drawing in Hard and soft Copies. 14. Training manuals, Standard Operating Procedures (SOPS), Site Configuration Procedures


3.3.2 Phase 3.2: Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Data Center Security

The SI shall complete the detailed design, procurement, implementation, testing and commissioning of the Data Center Security System:




124

1. Develop a design document for the Data Center Security System based on international

standards. 2. Develop and submit a detailed list of Major Components along with the specifications. 3. Procure the required Data Center Security System in accordance with the approved design

and List of Major Components. 4. Implement, test, and commission the Data Center Security System covering the following (but

not limited to) items in accordance with the approved design and list of Major Components: i. Two-layer door access control ii. Motion detectors. iii. PTZ - CCTV Cameras for outside and normal CCTV cameras for inside Data center.

These cameras to be integrated with IBMS with 365x24x7 availability. iv. Fire suppression system including Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA) v. Smoke, heat and Fire detection sensors above and below floors vi. Integrated Building Management System (IBMS) vii. Water leakage detection system viii. Rodent repellent

5. Latest advanced Peripheral surveillance system


1. Detailed Activity Report containing work breakdown structure and delivery milestones 2. Detailed Technical Design Report for Data Center Security system 3. Bill of Material including all components along with specifications and standards of the

Equipment. 4. IBMS Integration Report 5. Detailed Engineering drawing on position of fire and smoke sensors, VESDA, fire alarm, gas

release points, and zone mapping 6. CCTV and Door Access Control Report 7. Detailed Design report on CCTV position inside the Data Center allowing no blind spots 8. Material Delivery Document 9. Testing Plans and Testing Procedures 10. Test Execution Report 11. Implementation Plan 12. System Design Manual 13. Warranty Information 14. MIDC, Local Authority & Statutory body Approvals, Permissions, and Sanctioned Plan &

Drawing and No objection Certificate 15. Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency 16. Schedule of Delivery should be submitted to SBI for consideration. 17. Low level Editable drawing in Hard and soft Copies. 18. Training manuals, Standard Operating Procedures (SOPS), Site Configuration Procedures


3.3.3 Phase 3.3: Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Lighting System

The SI shall complete detailed design, procurement, implementation, testing and commissioning of the Data Center Lighting System: 1. Develop a Design Report for an energy-efficient lighting system based on international

standards. 2. Develop and submit a detailed list of Major Components along with the specifications. 3. Procure the required lighting system in accordance with the approved design and list of Major

Components. 4. Implement, test, and commission the lighting system covering the following items in

accordance with the approved design and list of Major Components: i. Energy savings lighting fixtures like LED or better on false ceiling/ceiling ii. Sufficient Lights under the false ceiling and sufficient lights under the raised floor for use

during maintenance work




125

iii. Fifty percent (50%) of total number of critical light fixtures for each room or area to be fed from the UPS for Data Centers and remaining to be fed by utility power. These critical light fixtures shall be evenly distributed across the room or area to have uniform lighting through Modular UPS. Entire Setup to be made in alternate arrangement with utility and UPS power feed so that entire area Black out can be avoided.


1. Detailed Activity Report containing work breakdown structure and delivery milestones 2. Detailed report and engineering drawing on position of lights and its control switches 3. Detailed report on possible yearly energy savings of installed lighting system 4. Detailed Design Report of the lighting system 5. Bill of Material includes all components along with specification and standards of the

lighting Material. 6. Material Delivery Document 7. Testing Plans and Testing Procedures 8. Test Execution Report 9. Implementation Plan 10. System Design Manual 11. Requirements Traceability Matrix (RTM) 12. Warranty Information 13. MIDC, Local Authority & Statutory body Approvals, Permissions, Sanctioned Plan &

Drawing and No Objection Certificate (NOC) 14. Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency. 15. Schedule of Delivery should be submitted to SBI for consideration. 16. Low level Editable drawing in Hard and soft Copies. 17. Full Load testing report 18. Training manuals, Standard Operating Procedures (SOPS), Site Configuration Procedures


3.3.4 Phase 3.4: Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Fire Suppression Gas Cylinder, Electrical Distribution/IBMS Rooms/UPS & Battery Rooms etc.

The SI shall complete the detailed design, procurement, implementation, testing, and Commissioning of the Modular UPS, fire suppression gas cylinder, electrical distribution, and IBMS rooms as described below: 1. Conduct the site survey on the space requirement for the UPS room based on the capacity

and size of the UPS to be installed for Data Center. 2. Strengthen the floor slab of the room, in accordance with the requirement of the floor-strength

requirement for the new equipment. 3. Conduct the site survey on the space requirement for the Gas Cylinder Room based on the

size of the cylinders and as per building designs. 4. Conduct the site survey on the space requirement for the Electrical Distribution Room based

on the type and dimension of the required electrical panels. 5. Conduct the site survey on the space requirement for the IBMS Room. 6. Design Report covering UPS room, Electrical/IBMS room, Fire Suppression Gas Cylinder

room, Generator room along with a separate underground fuel & water tank, Chiller and base for transformer.

7. SI to submit a detailed list of all the components along with their specifications. 8. Provide fire suppression gas requirement for Data Center as well as UPS Room, Utility

Area, Telco Room and Electrical/IBMS Room. 9. Procure the required items for the construction of the UPS Room, Fire Suppression Gas

Cylinder Room, and Electrical/IBMS Room in accordance with the approved design. 10. Implement and commission the following in accordance with the approved design and list of

Major Components: i. UPS & Battery Room with access control and fire security ii. Electrical / IBMS Room with access control and fire security iii. Fire Suppression Gas Cylinder Room with access control and fire security




126


1. Detailed Activity Report containing work breakdown structure and delivery milestones 2. Site Survey Report 3. Requirements Study Document 4. Design Report containing engineering drawing 5. Bill of Materials including all components along with the specifications and standards 6. Material Delivery Document 7. Testing Plans and Testing Procedures 8. Test Execution Report 9. Implementation Plan 10. Operational requirements 11. System Design Manual 12. Warranty Information 13. MIDC, Local Authority & Statutory body Approvals, Permissions, Sanctioned Plan & Drawing

and No objection Certificate 14. Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency. 15. Schedule of Delivery should be submitted to SBI for consideration. 16. Low level Editable drawing in Hard and soft Copies. 17. Full Load Testing Report 18. Training manuals, Standard Operating Procedures (SOPS), Site Configuration Procedures


Payment of this entire Phase 3 will be made post acceptance of entire deliverable of this phase as per the Timeline mentioned in Annexure-S: Terms of Payment.

3.4 Phase 4: Final Acceptance Testing

System Integrator (SI) must acquire the certificate from SBI after successfully completing the final acceptance criteria including all the contractual obligations and requirements. The FAT shall include the following: 1. Measurement and verification of all the items supplied and installed at the Data center as per

specified specifications on actual basis 2. Availability of all the specified services shall be verified to make the Data Center operational. 3. The SI shall be required to demonstrate all the features / facilities / functionalities as mentioned in

the RFP 4. The SI will arrange the test equipment required for verification of specifications defined, standards

and performance thereof. 5. Successful bidder shall provide documented test results. 6. The SI shall demonstrate all the services with their efficiency in integrated manner effectively.


SI shall be responsible for providing following (but not limited) test reports to SBI for consideration of Final Acceptance test 1. Factory Test Report 2. Delivery Inspection report 3. Installation report 4. Functional Testing report 5. Fail Over Testing 6. Integration Testing report

All above test reports & documents shall be validated by Tier certifying authority and/or SBI authorized agency.

Payment of this Phase 4, will be made post acceptance of entire deliverable of this phase as per the Timeline mentioned in Annexure-S: Terms of Payment.




127

3.5 Phase 5: Operation & Maintenance and Documentation for Entire Tier IV Data Center including Non-IT Infrastructure

The SI shall ensure completeness and exhaustiveness of the documentation desired for the entire lifecycle of the project. In addition to the documentation requirements defined, the SI shall be responsible for: 1. The selected bidder shall operate and maintain the Data Center for a period of 5 years from the

date of (FAT) post successful completion of installation, commissioning and acceptance testing. 2. Prepare and submit the operations and maintenance (O&M) manual containing the following

information: i. Periodical maintenance procedure ii. Warranty Void Clauses iii. Emergency Bridge/Number iv. Escalation Call Tree v. Detailed explanation of error/warning messages displayed on different control panels and

required action 3. Submit the OEM’s technical & operational documents for all the equipment deployed. 4. Software based SLA monitoring and compliance system to be integrated with IBMS. 5. Defect Liability period for all equipment (including but not limited to Hardware/ Software/

Firmware etc.) covered under this contract should be 1 year from Final Acceptance Testing.


1. Operations and Maintenance Documentation 2. OEM’s Technical & Operational Documents 3. Documented Formal classroom, operational demonstration, and/or shift drills covering the

following: I. On-Job Training for all Data center employees, II. Formal Classroom shift drills covering:

a. All Policies, processes and procedures for the operation and maintenance of data center systems

b. Site configuration Procedures (SCPs) - how the infrastructure is configured for normal operation.

c. Standard Operating Procedures (SOPS)- how the infrastructure configuration is changed during normal operations

d. Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs)- how the site is controlled and operated during abnormal circumstances or emergency situations

e. Method of Procedure (MOPs) f. MMS Procedures

4. Training Program include training schedule, lesson plans, required reference materials, and record of attendance.

5. Formal Qualification program for designated personnel performing data center operations 6. Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency Payment of Phase 5 will be made as per the Timeline mentioned in Annexure-S: Terms of Payment.




128

Annexure-Q1: Site Assessment & Preliminary Tests

1. Type of Tests Following test (but not limited to) to be conducted and report to be submitted to SBI:

i. Soil Test

• Soil Quality test

• Soil Bearing Capacity Test ii. Contour Map iii. Air Quality Test including Pollution test iv. Water Level Test

2. Minimum deliverables: Site Assessment and Preliminary test results. Note: SBI has discretionary rights to scrap the project, in case any of the above test results are negative and below desired standards and leads to unfavorable conditions to build certified tier IV Data Center.




129

Annexure-Q2: Civil Architecture, Plumbing and NOC

1. Civil, Architectural and Interior Works

1.1. SCOPE

The proposed land for building the Tier IV Data Center is located in Pune, Hinjewadi Phase-3. A land of 4.09 acres will be allocated for the development of the Data Center and Campus development(including but not limited to Landscaping, Car Parking, Peripheral roads, Common Area lighting, Security fencing, Physical Security, Utility Areas etc.).

All works shall be carried out as per the project specifications and in accordance with the requirements of all relevant Indian standard codes.

Major Civil works include, but not limited to: a) Main building b) Ancillary building c) Guard rooms d) Other related buildings

▪ All Works shall be carried out as per the certified Tier IV Data Center Design, Build, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance and Transfer guidelines & specifications and in accordance with the specifications of all relevant Indian standard codes along with MIDC guidelines and MIDC DCR Rules 2009 or latest.

▪ SI shall acquire the necessary environmental clearances before initiating the build stage of the project.

▪ The civil structure should comply with all relevant Fire and Safety requirements as defined in ISI/NBC/BSI standards and comply with MIDC, Local Authorities & Statutory bodies.

▪ The entire campus and Data Center building designs, plans, layouts, development, construction, testing, maintenance, etc., needs to be carried out by the selected SI. Super imposed floor loads shall be considered as explained in the following sections. The structural frame system shall be of reinforced cement concrete. All server floors shall be designed based on minimum 1500 kg/ sq. m live load and 250 kg/sq. m hanging load. Total capacity of 1500 Kg/ Sq. Mtrs. of each server floor. Battery rooms shall be designed based on minimum 2000 kg/ sq. m live load.

1.2. PREAMBLE

These specifications cover the items of work in structural and non- structural parts of the works coming under Preview of this document. All work shall be carried out in conformation with this. In general, provisions of Indian Standards, Indian Roads Congress Codes and other national standards shall be followed. These specifications are not intended to cover the minute details. The work shall be executed in accordance with best modern practices. All codes and standards referred to in these specifications shall be the latest thereof.

1.3. Inclusive Documents

The provision of Special Conditions of Contract, General Conditions of Contract, those specified on the tender as well as execution drawings and notes or other specifications issued in writing by competent authorities.

1.4. Order of Precedence, Clarification and Interpretation

When the various specifications and codes referred to in preceding portion are at variance with these specifications and each other the following order of precedence will generally be accepted.




130

1.4.1 Special conditions of contract, item wise technical specifications as per approved designs and

drawings. 1.4.2 Provisions of general specifications. 1.4.3 I.S. Codes. 1.4.4 IRC Codes, M. O. R. T. H, specifications etc.

The attention of the SI is drawn to those clauses of IS codes, which require either specification by Engineer-In-charge or the mutual agreement between the SI and purchaser. In such cases it is the responsibility of the SI to seek clarification on any uncertainty and obtain previous approval of SBI before taking up the supply/ construction.

1.5. General Specifications:

1.5.1. The minimum life span of all civil structures (units & offsite) shall be taken as 35 years. 1.5.2. SI has to adhere to the National Building code standards, as applicable for such construction. 1.5.3. These specifications are for work to be carried out, item to be supplied and materials to be used in the

works to the satisfaction of the MIDC, Local authorities / statutory bodies, Certifying agency/authorities and SBI.

1.5.4. The workmanship should be of the highest quality. The SI shall take all steps immediately to make up deficiency if any noticed by the MIDC, Local authorities / statutory bodies and Certifying agency/authorities and SBI.

1.5.5. The materials to be provided by the SI shall be in accordance with the samples already approved from the Local authorities / statutory bodies, MIDC, Certifying agency/authorities and SBI in conformity with specification. The SI shall produce all invoices, vouchers, receipts for all materials procured.

1.5.6. A sample of all materials is to be submitted to the SBI authorized Engineer/Site-Incharge/3rd party agency appointed by SBI for their approval before the SI orders or delivers the material to the site. Samples together with their packing are to be provided free of charge by the SI and should any materials if rejected will be removed from the site immediately at the SI’s expense. All samples should be retained by the respective Engineer-In charge / bodies, for comparison with materials which will be delivered at site. Also, the SI will be required to submit specimen finishes colors, Glass, etc., for approval of the SBI authorized Engineer/Site-In charge/3rd party agency appointed by SBI.

1.5.7. The SI shall be responsible for providing and maintaining temporary coverage required for the protection of finished work. The SI is also to clean out all wood shavings; cut ends and other waste from all parts of the works before covering of infillings are constructed.

1.5.8. The SI shall provide: All materials, labor, maintenance, fixing, carrying, cleaning, temporary canvas, plastics and any other requisite protection of the works, all the necessary equipment’s, labor and removal of the same at the completion of the work. The SBI authorized Engineer/Site-In charge/3rd party agency appointed by SBI will be the sole authority in deciding the suitability of the tools or plants that may be brought on to the site by SI.

1.5.9. The SI is to take care in loading and unloading materials for the works, so that the roads and footpaths are not obstructed, damaged or the traffic impeded, and they must take approvals from all concerned authorities carrying, loading and unloading all materials, plant, earth, debris, etc., to and from the site.

1.5.10. Any loss or damage caused due to fault or negligence on the part of SIs labors, staff etc. during working in the premises will be sole responsibility of SI and the damage / repair cost will be borne by the SI.

1.5.11. SI shall also consider the below mentioned points: 1.5.12. All vitrified tiles/granite/marble samples to be approved prior to fix the same wherever applicable. 1.5.13. The expenses for paying Municipal Taxes for dumping materials on/off site, etc. to be borne by the SI. 1.5.14. Expenses of bearing MIDC, local authorities/ statutory body, officers sanctions and approvals etc. to be

borne by the SI. 1.5.15. SI shall be responsible for the security of the materials on site. 1.5.16. SI shall be responsible for lifting of the material to the respective floors 1.5.17. All works shall be to true line, level, plumb and square corners, edges and arises in all cases shall be

unbroken and finished neatly. SI shall maintain uniform quality and consistency in workmanship throughout the execution of the work.




131

1.5.18. The SBI authorized Engineer/Site-In charge and /or 3rd party agency appointed by SBI or SBI itself may order for the inspection of any finished work as SBI chooses and in a manner SBI decides, and the SIs shall bear all expenses in this connection. If the results of such inspection prove that the material used and/or workmanship is not as per the standard required, the work will be rejected and removed forthwith and be replaced by works of the accepted standard of quality and material. The rejected material must be stored in a separate room created to keep such nonstandard / rejected materials with proper labelling of “Rejected Material Store” and will be there till it gets disposed of from the site. This is done to demark the rejected material properly.

1.5.19. Minimum slab to slab height = 5.5 Mtrs and 6.5 Mtrs for MUX and Utility Rooms respectively and as per uptime norms.

1.5.20. Boundary wall to be designed for 10 feet height and additional 3 feet barbed wire with electronic fencing.

1.5.21. All internal walls of the Data Center building are to be 2 hours fire rated and all external walls to be 4 hour fire rated.

1.5.22. Construction of building as per Seismic Zone IV requirement. 1.5.23. False ceiling should not be considered for server farm area. 1.5.24. Compartmentalization shall be considered for server, Transformer, Modular UPS, Meet me room

(Telco room), Battery room, Panel room etc. 1.5.25. These specifications are for work to be done, item to be supplied and materials to be used in the works

as shown and defined on the drawings and herein to the satisfaction of the SBI/ Architect. 1.5.26. The workmanship is to be the best possible and of a high standard. The SI shall take all steps

immediately to make up deficiency if any noticed by the SBI / Architect. Use must be made of special tradesmen in all aspects of the work and allowance must be made in the rates for the same.

1.5.27. The materials to be provided by the SI shall be in accordance with the samples already got approval from the SBI / Architect by the SI and in conformity with specification and approved is list of manufacture and brand. SI shall produce all invoices, vouchers or receipts as soon as it gets generated.

1.5.28. A sample of all materials is to be submitted to the SBI/ Architects for their approval before the SI orders or delivers the material to the site. Samples together with their packing are to be provided free of charge by the SI and should any materials be rejected they will be removed from the site at the SI’s expense. All samples will be retained by the SBIs / Architects for comparison with materials which will be delivered at site. Also the SI will be required to submit specimen finishes colors, Glass, etc., for approval of the SBIs / Architects before proceeding with the works.

1.5.29. The SI shall be responsible for providing and maintaining temporary coverage required for the protection of finished work. He is also to clean out all wood shavings; cut ends and other waste from all parts of the works before covering of infillings are constructed.

1.5.30. SI shall maintain uniform quality and consistency in workmanship throughout the execution of the work. 1.5.31. The SI shall provide: All materials, labour, maintenance, fixing, carrying, cleaning, and making good,

etc. temporary canvas, plastics and any other requisite protection of the works, all the necessary equipment, labour and removal of the same at the completion of the work. The Architect will decide suitability of the tools or plants that may be brought on the works by the SIs, for the proper execution of the work.

1.5.32. The head masons and the supervisors on the works shall always carry with them a two feet rule, a measuring tape (15 meters.) a spirit level, a plumb bob and a square and shall check that the work is being done according to the drawings and specifications. The Architect or its representative will use any OR all measuring instruments / tools belonging to the SIs in checking the works executed.

1.5.33. All measuring tapes shall be of steel and scaffolding and ladders that may be required for taking measurements shall be supplied by the SIs.

1.5.34. The SI shall place at the disposal of the Employer and the Architect and the advice of himself and his firm, and their staff or Foreman of trades or other skilled person employed by him or them for the conduct of the works comprised in the Contract.

1.5.35. The SIs are to take care in loading and unloading materials for the works, so that the roads and footpaths are not obstructed, damaged or the traffic impeded, and they must conform with the Police Regulations for carrying, loading and unloading all materials, plant, earth, debris, etc. to and from the buildings.

1.5.36. The Architect shall have full powers and authority to issue such instructions as to the order of proceeding with or carrying out the work as he may deem necessary for the guidance of the SI and SI




132

shall be bound by such instructions of the Architect or any person authorized by the Architect to give such instructions.

1.5.37. The levels and measurements of the existing site, as shown in the drawings, are believed to be correct, but the SI should verify them for himself. No claim or allowance whatsoever will be entertained hereafter on account of any errors or omission in the description of the site turning out different from what was expected or shown in the drawings.

1.5.38. All floors, paving, staircase, etc. are to be scrubbed, all glasses to be cleaned on both sides of windows/curtain wall including its members, screens, doors, sky-lights, roof lights, etc., all gulley, gutters, pipe heads, etc. to be cleaned out and the premises left clean, perfect and water tight upon completion. However, a proper care needs to be taken during such cleaning works that the original finishing such as polishing, painting, anodizing, powder coating etc. are not scratched/damaged. In case of any such damage, the SI shall have to reinstate the same as original as per the instructions of Employer/Architects, without any cost to Employer.

1.5.39. The SI shall work in co-ordination with all electrical, Air-Conditioning/HVAC, Fire Fighting/Detection, Security System and any other SIs working for other works involved in the project and provide all necessary assistance to them for successful completion of the project.

1.5.40. Any loss or damage caused due to fault or negligence on the part of SIs labors, staff etc. during working in the premises will be made good by SI at no extra cost or the damage and repair cost will be reimbursed in full to the Employer.

1.5.41. The SI shall be responsible to provide and maintain temporary coverage required for the protection of finished work. He is also required to clean out all wood shavings; cut ends and other waste from all parts of the works before covering of infillings are constructed.

1.5.42. The SI shall be responsible for providing and maintaining any boxing or other temporary coverage's required for the protection of dresses or finished work if left un-protected. He is also to clean out all shavings, cut ends and other waste from all parts of the work before coverings or in-fillings are constructed.

1.5.43. Templates, boxes and moulds shall be accurately set out and rigidly constructed so as to remain accurate during the time they are in use.

1.5.44. All unexposed surfaces of timber e.g. backing fillets, backs of door frames, cupboard framing, grounds, etc., are to be treated with two coats of approved timber preservative before fixing or covering.

1.5.45. All the SIs should consider the below mentioned points before quoting for the job.

i. All vitrified tiles/granite/marble samples to be approved prior to fix the same wherever mentioned. ii. The expenses for paying Municipal Taxes for dumping materials on/off site, etc. to be borne by the

SI. iii. Expenses of bearing ward officer’s sanction, etc. To be borne by the SI. iv. SI should be responsible for the security of the materials on site. v. SI should be responsible for lifting of the material to the respective floors and expenses of the same

should be borne by him.

1.6. Civil, Architectural and Interior works

Below is the indicative but not exhaustive list of the Civil, Architectural and Interior works to be carried out that should also be included in the design and solution proposed by the SI

1.6.1. Site Leveling and readiness 1.6.2. Main building 1.6.3. Bullet proof (outer walls of the building) 1.6.4. Ancillary building (like Security Building)

i. Security Room along with washrooms and waiting Area for minimum 10 individuals ii. Scanning area iii. CCTV monitoring room iv. Courier In/OUT Room v. Material In/Out

1.6.5. Fuel Storage for DG Sets 1.6.6. Water Storage for Chiller Plants, Fire Fighting and Utility. 1.6.7. Access routes for all External and Internal areas of Data Center. 1.6.8. Installation of facilities like security fencing, ramps and placing of Illuminated signs.




133

1.6.9. Separate Trenches for Electrical cables, Telecom, Water supply, Fuel supply, Sewerage etc. 1.6.10. Campus / plot development. Campus layout plan to meet the Data Center requirements including all the necessary support infrastructures 1.6.11. Architectural concept for the building infrastructure 1.6.12. Landscaping 1.6.13. Construction of building 1.6.14. Foundation of 2 electrical substation, DG sets, Transformer, Chillers etc. 1.6.15. Pre & post construction anti-termite treatment and Anti-Dampness Treatment 1.6.16. Room Leakage Proofing for entire Data center area 1.6.17. Masonry works 1.6.18. Waterproofing 1.6.19. Plastering 1.6.20. Gypsum plaster and pop punning 1.6.21. Floor finishes 1.6.22. Partitions 1.6.23. Paneling and boxing 1.6.24. Shutters and doors 1.6.25. Loose furniture, chairs 1.6.26. Fire proof Media Storage room 1.6.27. Painting and finishing 1.6.28. False/Raised floor 1.6.29. Railings 1.6.30. Toilet cubicles 1.6.31. Fire proof Windows, ventilators, louvers windows etc. 1.6.32. Control desk for NOC 1.6.33. Roads and pavements 1.6.34. Paving, external lighting 1.6.35. Multi-level physical security such as but not limited to:

i. Turnstile Gates ii. Boom barriers, Anti Crash Barrier iii. Perimeter security with electrical fence with infrared cameras iv. Visitor Register v. Verification by security Guard including metal detector, Under vehicle scanner system (UVSS), vi. Baggage Scanners vii. RFID Enabled Access Cards viii. Camera Surveillance across Data Center and Outdoor PTZ camera (with 360 rotation) ix. All rooms such as UPS, electrical panel room secured with RFID Enabled Access Cards

1.6.36. Fire safety systems for the campus as per the MIDC, Local authorities, statutory Bodies rules & regulations and as per Uptime requirements. 1.6.37. Interiors of the building. 1.6.38. Hydraulic Loading/unloading deck near each service lift 1.6.39. Utilities such as Rain Water Harvesting (RWH), High speed Diesel (HSD) tank, Water table recharging

pits etc. should be build and made available at the Date Center 1.6.40. Foundations for Transformers, DG, two GIS based electrical sub-stations, DG Fuel Tank and Water

Tank in the plot. 1.6.41. Optimum utilization of Natural light for office, cafeteria and other non-critical areas. 1.6.42. Interior finishing & external facade works 1.6.43. Other functional support areas required for the datacenter:

i. Staging area (on each server floor) ii. Storage room (Ground Floor) iii. NOC (at least 50 seats) iv. BMS Room v. Office administration space on Top Floor vi. Conference hall (at least 50 seats) on Top Floor vii. Scanning room on ground floor viii. Cafeteria with heating and refrigeration facilities on Top Floor ix. Training Room (at least 25 seats) x. E-waste Handling room on Top Floor




134

xi. Dormitory with at least 12 rest places/ loungers xii. Meet me room (Telco Room) on Ground floor xiii. Media Storage room(fire proof facility) on top floor xiv. Fire rated doors, windows and walls as per standard specifications xv. Fire rated Toughen glass xvi. Flood control mechanism xvii. Changing rooms(one for Gents and Ladies Each) either on Top/Ground Floor xviii. Watch Towers xix. Separate Security Building and support areas xx. Design consideration for wind & sun movement xxi. Two wheeler and four wheeler Parking should be as per the employees in a shift and should

comply with MIDC, Uptime and all Local and Statutory authorities. xxii. All other related & necessary statutory approval.

In general, provisions of Indian Standards and other DC related standards shall be followed. These specifications are indicative and not exhaustive. The work shall be executed in accordance with best modern practices including innovative ways to design and Green Building Practices and as per certified Tier IV Data Center guidelines and compliance. All codes and standards referred to in these specifications shall be the latest thereof.

1.7. Sub-Standard Work

All defective works are liable to be demolished, rebuilt and defective material replaced by the SI at its own cost without delay in timelines. In the event of such works being accepted by carrying out repairs, etc. as specified by the engineer, the cost of repairs will be borne by the SI. In the event of the work being accepted by giving Design Concession, arising out of but not limited to under sizing, under strength, shift in location and alignment, etc. and accepting design stresses, which are higher than those provided for in the original design or by accepting materials not fully meeting the specifications, etc., the SI will be paid for the works actually carried out by him at the suitable reduced rate of the tendered rates for the portion of the work thus accepted.

1.8. Site Clearance

The scope of SI includes clearing and stripping vegetation, grass, brush wood, removing the roots and stacking of serviceable material and disposal of unserviceable material.

1.9. Earth Work Excavation & Site Levelling Works

All excavation shall be to the exact length, width and depth as per approved tender drawings. SI shall correct all work if excavated to a greater or lesser length, width or depth than shown or required. Extra depth excavated if any shall be brought up by Plum concrete filling only with necessary compaction prior to laying PCC for structural element. SI shall remove all accumulated water in all areas, trenches and similar areas during the progress of work. No fill or compaction is allowed in bailed or pumped areas without SBI’s inspection and approval. Foundations or trenches shall be kept free of water while masonry or concrete works are in progress. Provide all shoring and strutting as needed to protect the sides of excavation where it is required. Trenches of excavation work shall be properly protected from rain, bad weather and accidents.

1.10. Roads and Pavements

These specifications deals with the general requirements of the work and materials used for building roads and pavements in the Data Center Campus. The SI shall be responsible for obtaining consents of SBIs of approved quarries and lands, payment of royalties, duties, fees, rent, taxes etc., compensation due to injuries to persons or damages to property in anyway connected with the execution of whole work and for loss of materials due to improper stacking etc., without extra claims.

1.11. Unacceptable Work




135

All defective works are liable to be demolished, rebuilt and defective materials replaced by the SI at his own cost. In the event of such works being accepted by carrying out repairs etc. as specified by the engineer, the cost of repairs will be borne by the SI. In the event of the work being accepted by giving ‘Design Concession’, arising out of but not limited to under sizing, under strength, shift in location and alignment, etc. and accepting design stresses in members which are higher than those provided for in the original design or by accepting materials not fully meeting the specifications etc. the SI will be paid for the works actually carried out by him at the suitable reduced rate of the tendered rates for the portion of the work thus accepted.

1.12. General Specifications for Material and Workmanship

1.12.1 All materials brought on the site of works and meant to be used for the said project site, shall be as per the approved makes mentioned and shall be deposited with architect before the order for the materials is placed with the SIs / manufacturers and should be prior approved from the Architect before execution.

1.12.2 The workmanship is to be the best available and of a high standard, use must be made of a special tradesman in all aspects of the work and allowances must be made in the rates for so doing.

1.12.3 Workmanship: All works shall be to true line, level, plumb and square corners, edges and arises in all cases shall be unbroken and finished neat. SI shall maintain uniform quality and consistency in workmanship throughout the execution of the work.

1.12.4 Skilled head masons / tradesman for the respective trades shall be employed by the SIs to check the work in progress and to instruct and extract the right kind of workmanship from the men employed on the works. Instructions given to such head masons by the Architect or his Representative shall be carried out with a view to get the work executed in a neat and workman like manner, according to the specifications.

1.12.5 The Architect may order for the inspection of any finished work as he chooses and in a manner he decides, and the SIs shall bear all expenses in this connection. If the results of such inspection prove that the material used and/or workmanship is not of the standard required, the work will be rejected and removed forthwith and be replaced by works of the accepted standard of quality and material. The rejected material must be stored in separate room created to keep such non-standard / rejected materials with proper labelling of “REJECTED MATERIAL STORE” and will be there till it gets disposed of from site. This is done to demark the rejected material properly.

1.12.6 The SI shall produce all invoices vouchers or receipts for any materials if called upon to do so by the Employer /Architects.

1.12.7 Samples together with their packing are to be provided free of charge by the SI and should any materials be rejected, they will be removed from the site at the SI’s expense. All samples will be retained by the Employer/Architects for comparison with materials, which will be required to submit specimen finishes of colors, fabrics, etc., for the approval of the Architects before proceeding with the work.

1.13. Stacking And Storing Of Materials

1.1.3.1 Cement

Cement shall be stored at the work site in a shed, which is dry, leak-proof and as moisture proof as possible. The building or shed for storage should have minimum number of windows and close fitting doors and these should be kept closed as far as possible.

Cement bags shall be stacked off the floor on wooden planks in such a way as to keep about 150 mm to 200 mm clear above the floor. The floor may comprise of lean cement concrete or two layers of dry bricks laid on well consolidated earth. A space of 600 mm minimum shall be left all-round between the exterior walls and the stacks. In the stacks the cement bags shall be kept close together to reduce circulation of air as much as possible. Owing to pressure on the bottom layer of bags, sometimes ‘warehouse pack’ is developed in these bags. This can be removed easily by rolling the bags when the cement is taken out for use. Lumped bags, if any should be removed and disposed of.




136

Cement bags shall be stacked in a manner to facilitate their removal and use in the order in which they are received; a label showing date of receipt of cement shall be put on each stack to know the age of cement.

For extra safety during the monsoon, or when it is expected to store for an unusually long period, the stack shall be completely enclosed by a water proofing membrane such as polyethylene, which shall close on the top of the stack. Care shall be taken to see that the waterproofing membrane is not damaged any time during use.

Cement in gunny bags, paper bags and polyethylene bags shall be stored separately.

In case cement is received in drums these shall be stored on plane level ground, as far as possible near the concrete mixing place. After taking out the required quantity of cement, the lid of the drum shall be securely tied to prevent ingress of moisture. In case cement is received in silos the silos shall be placed near the concrete batching plant. Proper access shall be provided for the replacement of silos.

Different types of cements shall be stacked and stored separately.

1.1.3.2 BLOCKS

Blocks are available as hollow and solid concrete blocks, hollow and solid light weight concrete blocks, autoclaved aerated concrete blocks, concrete stone masonry blocks and soil based blocks.

Blocks shall be unloaded one at a time and stacked in regular tiers to minimize breakage and defacement. These shall not be dumped at site.

Blocks shall be placed close to the site of work so that least effort is required for their Transportation. The date of manufacture of the blocks shall be suitably marked on the stacks of blocks manufactured at factory or site.

1.1.3.3 FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF TILES

Floor, wall and clay roof tiles of different types, such as, cement concrete tiles (plain, colored and terrazzo) and ceramic tiles (glazed and unglazed) shall be stacked on regular platform as far as possible under cover in proper layers and in tiers and they shall not be dumped in heaps. In the stack, the tiles shall be so placed that the mould surface of one faces that of another. Height of the stack shall not be more than one meter. During unloading, these shall be handled carefully so as to avoid breakage.

Tiles of different quality, size and thickness shall be stacked separately to facilitate easy removal for use in work. Tiles when supplied by manufacturers packed in wooden crates shall be stored in crates. The crates shall be opened one at a time as and when required for use. Ceramic tiles and clay roof tiles are generally supplied in cartons, which shall be handled with care. It is preferable to transport these at the site on platform trolleys.

1.1.3.4 AGGREGATES

Aggregates shall be stored at site on a hard dry and level patch of ground. If such a surface is not available, a platform of planks or old corrugated iron sheets, or a floor of bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be made so as to prevent contamination with clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign matter.

Stacks of fine and coarse aggregates shall be kept in separate stock piles sufficiently removed from each other to prevent the material at the edges of the piles from getting intermixed. On a large job, it is desirable to construct dividing walls to give each type of aggregates its own compartment. Fine aggregates shall be stacked in a place where loss due to the effect of wind is minimum.




137

Unless specified otherwise or necessitated by site conditions stacking of the aggregates should be carried out in regular stacks. The suggested sizes for stacks are as follows:

1.1.3.5 STEEL

For each classification of steel, separate areas shall be earmarked. It is desirable that ends of bars and sections of each class be painted in distinct separate colors.

Steel reinforcement shall ordinarily be stored in such a way as to avoid distortion and to prevent deterioration and corrosion. It is desirable to coat reinforcement with cement wash before stacking to prevent scaling and rusting.

Bars of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately to facilitate issues in such sizes and lengths so as to minimize wastage in cutting from standard lengths.

In case of long storage, reinforcement bars shall be stacked above ground level by at least 150mm. Also in coastal areas or in case of long storage a coat of cement wash shall be given to prevent scaling and rusting.

Structural steel of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately. It shall be stored above ground level by at least 150 mm upon platforms, skids or any other suitable supports to avoid distortion of sections. In coastal areas or in case of long storage suitable protective coating of primer paint shall be given to prevent scaling and rusting.

1.1.3.6 ALUMINIUM SECTIONS

Aluminum sections of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be stored separately, on a level platform under cover. The aluminum sections shall not be pulled or pushed from the stack nor shall be put over each other, to protect the anodizing layer.

1.1.3.7 DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

While unloading, shifting handling and stacking timber or other lingo-cellulosic material based, metal and plastic door and window frames and shutters, care shall be taken that the material is not dragged one over the other as it may cause damage to the surface of the material particularly in the case of decorative shutters. The material should be lifted and carried preferably flat avoiding damage of corners or sides.

Metal and plastic doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked upright (on their sills) on level ground preferably on wooden battens and shall not come in contact with dirt and ashes. If received in crates they shall be stacked according to manufacturer’s instructions and removed from the crates as and when required for the work.

Metal and plastic frames of doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked upside down with the kick plates at the top. These shall not be allowed to stand for long in this manner before being fixed so as to avoid the door frames getting out of shape and hinges being strained and shutters drooping.

During the period of storage all metal doors, windows and ventilators shall be protected from loose cement and mortar by suitable covering such as tarpaulin. The tarpaulin shall be hung loosely on temporary framing to permit circulation of air to prevent condensation.

All timber and other lingo-cellulosic material based frames and shutters shall be stored in a dry and clean covered space away from any infestation and dampness. The storage shall preferably be in well ventilated dry rooms. The frames shall be stacked one over the other in vertical stacks with cross battens at regular distances to keep the stack vertical and straight. These cross battens should be of uniform thickness and placed vertically one above the other. The door shutters shall be stacked in the form of clean vertical stacks over the other and at least 80 mm above ground on pallets or suitable beams or rafters. The top of the stack shall be covered by a protecting cover and weighted down by means of scantlings or other suitable weights. The shutter stack shall rest on hard and level ground.




138

If any timber or other lingo-cellulosic material based frame or shutter becomes wet during transit, it shall be kept separate from the undamaged material. The wet material may be dried by stacking in shade with battens in between adjacent boards with free access of dry air generally following the guidance laid down in IS 1141. Separate stacks shall be built up for each size, each grade and each type of material. When materials of different sizes grades and types are to be stacked in one stack due to shortage of space, the bigger size shall be stacked in the lower portion of the stacks. Suitable pallets or separating battens shall be kept in between the two types of material.

1.1.3.8 ROOFING SHEETS

Roofing sheets shall be stored and handled in such a manner as not do damage them in any way.

Plain and corrugated asbestos cement sheets shall be stacked horizontally to a height of not more than one meter on a firm and level ground, with timber or other packing beneath them. If stacked in exposed position, they shall be protected from damage by the winds. Asbestos cement sheets of same variety and size shall be stacked together. Damage sheets shall not be stacked with sound materials. All damaged sheets shall be salvaged as early as possible.

Corrugated galvanized iron sheets and aluminum sheets shall be stacked horizontally to a height of not more than 0.5 m on a firm and level ground, with timber or other packing beneath them. To protect them from dust and rain water, these shall be covered with tarpaulin or polyethylene sheets.

Plastic sheets and glass reinforced plastic (GRP) sheets shall be stacked under a shed to a height of not more than 0.5 m on a firm and level ground with timber or other packing beneath them.

1.1.3.9 GYPSUM BOARDS, PLYWOOD, FIBREBOARD, PARTICLE BOARD, BLOCK BOARD, ETC.

These boards shall be stored flat in a covered clean and dry place. Different sizes and types of each of these boards shall be stacked separately. The board shall be stacked on a flat platform on which a wooden frame shall be constructed with 50mm x 25 mm battens in such a way that it will give support to all four edges and corners of the boards with intermediate battens placed at suitable intervals to avoid warping. The boards shall be stacked in a solid block in a clear vertical alignment. The top sheet of each stack shall be suitably weighed down to prevent warping wherever necessary. The boards shall be unloaded and stacked with utmost care avoiding damage to the corners and surface. In case of decorative plywood and decorative boards, the surfaces of which are likely to get damaged by dragging one sheet over another it is advisable that these are lifted as far as possible in pairs facing each other.

1.1.3.10 GLASS SHEETS

It is important that all glass sheets whether stored in crates or not shall be kept dry. Suitable covered storage space shall be provided for the safe storage of the glass sheets. In removing glass sheets from crates, great care shall be taken to avoid damages. The glass sheets shall be lifted and stored on its long edges against a vertical wall or other support with the first sheet so placed that its bottom edge is 25 mm from the vertical support. The stacks shall be of not more than 25 panes and shall be supported at two points by fillets of wood at 300 mm from each end. The whole stack shall be as close and as upright as possible. The glass sheets of different sizes, thickness and type shall be stacked separately.

1.1.3.11 CAST IRON, GALVANIZED IRON AND ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND FITTINGS

The pipes shall be unloaded where they are required when the trenches are ready to receive them. Storage shall be done on firm, level and clear ground and wedges shall be provided at the bottom layer to keep the stack stable.




139

The stack shall be in pyramid shape or the pipes length-wise and cross-wise in alternate layers. The pyramid stack is advisable in smaller diameter pipes for conserving space in storing them. The height of the stack shall not exceed 1.5 m.

Each stack shall contain only pipes of same class and size, with consignment or batch number marked on it with particulars of SIs wherever possible.

Cast iron detachable joints and fittings shall be stacked under cover separately from the asbestos cement pipes and fittings.

Rubber rings shall be kept clean, away from grease, oil heat and light.

1.1.3.12 UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES

The pipe should be given adequate support at all times. Pipes should be stored on a reasonably flat surface free from stones and sharp projections so that the pipe is supported throughout its length. In storage, pipe racks should be avoided. Pipe should not be stacked in large piles, especially under warm temperature conditions as the bottom pipes may distort, thus giving rise to difficulty in jointing. Socket and spigot pipes should be stacked in layers with sockets placed at alternate ends of the stacks to avoid lopsided stacks.

It is recommended not to store pipe inside another pipe.

On no account should pipes be stored in a stressed or bent condition or near the sources of heat. Pipes should not be stacked more than 1.5 m high. Pipes of different sizes and classes should be stacked separately. The ends of pipe should be protected from abrasion particularly those specially prepared for jointing either spigot or socket solvent welded joints or shouldered for use with couplings.

In tropical conditions, pipes should be stored in shade. In very cold weather, the impact strength of PVC is reduced making it brittle and more care in handling shall be exercised in wintry condition. If due to unsatisfactory storage of handling a pipe becomes kinked, the damaged portion should be cut out completely. Kinking is likely to occur only on very thin walled pipes.

1.1.3.13 WATER

Wherever water is to be stored for construction purposes this shall be done in proper storage tanks to prevent any organic impurities getting mixed up with it.

1.1.3.14 OIL PAINTS

All containers of paints, thinners and allied materials shall preferably be stored in a separate room on floors with sand cushions. The room shall be well-ventilated and free from excessive heat, sparks of flame and direct rays of sun. The containers of paint shall be kept covered or properly fitted with lid and shall not be kept open except while using. The containers of paints have expiry date marked by the manufacturers, which should be highlighted so as to facilitate use of paint within due period.

1.1.3.15 SANITARY APPLIANCES

All sanitary appliances shall be carefully stored under cover to prevent damage. When accepting and storing appliances, advance planning shall be made regarding the sequence of removal from the store to the assembly positions. Supporting brackets shall be so stored as to be readily accessible for use with the appliances.

1.1.3.16 OTHER MATERIALS

Small articles like nails, screws, nuts and bolts, door and window fittings, polishing stones, protective clothing, spare parts of machinery, linings, packing, water supply and sanitary fittings, electrical fittings, insulation board, etc., shall be kept in suitable and properly protected store rooms. Valuable small material such as, copper pipes and fittings shall be kept under lock and key.




140

1.14. Green Building Requirements For Civil SI

Section includes general requirements, submittals and execution procedures for compliance with USGBC (United States Green Building Council) for the project to obtain LEED Green Interior Design and Construction 2009 Gold rating at a minimum of 60 points.

1.15. General requirements and submittals

1.1.5.1 To provide the total materials cost (excluding labour). Provide a tabulation of each recycled/regional/ rapidly renewable /certified wood materials used using the master material sheet.

1.1.5.2 To reuse salvaged, refurbished or used building materials for 5%/10% of total materials cost, excluding

cost of furniture and furnishings. SI’s certificate to support the amount of reuse content within materials to be provided. Provide photographs of building materials in pre-modified condition, if the said materials are to be reused at the same project site. Provide cost of comparable material available in the local market (replacement value) for all materials to be reused.

1.1.5.3 To use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-

half of the post-industrial content constitutes at least 10%/20% of the total value of the materials in the project. Listing of all materials having recycled content and manufacturer’s / SI’s certificate to be provided to show the percentage of post-consumer and post industrial recycled content. Provide cost of each item containing post-consumer and/or post industrial content and total cost of items containing recycled content.

1.1.5.4 To utilize rapidly renewable materials (materials made from plants which have less than 10-year

harvesting life cycle such as bamboo, MDF, linoleum, wool etc.) for 5% of the total value of building materials. SI’s certificate/ manufacturer’s product data to support material life cycle period to be provided. Provide listing of all items and cost of each item that is rapidly renewable.

1.1.5.5 At least 50% of the wood used in the project must be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council

(FSC) .A narrative indicating the list of materials/components/products claimed as FSC certified including product type, manufacturer, and appropriate entity's COC (chain of custody) certification number needs to be attached. Provide listing of all items and cost of each item that is FSC certified.

1.1.5.6 The VOC (volatile organic compound) content of adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the

building must be less than VOC content limits mentioned below. A list of all the adhesives and sealants used for the project is to be submitted along with the manufacturer’s certificate supporting the VOC content.

1.1.5.7 Architectural paints and coatings used in the interior of the building should not exceed the VOC content

limits established in Green Seal Standard GS-11, Paints, 1st Edition, May 20, 1993. A list of all the paints and coatings used in the project is to be submitted along with the manufacturer’s certificate not exceeding the prescribed VOC limit mentioned below.

1.1.5.8 Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates used in the interior of the

building should not exceed the VOC content limit of 250g/L established in Green Seal Standard GS-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints, 2nd Edition, January 7, 1997.

1.1.5.9 Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers and shellacs applied to interior elements must not

exceed the VOC content limits established in SCAQMD (South Coast Air Quality Management District, Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, effective January 1, 2004.

1.1.5.10 A list of all the architectural paints, coatings, anti-corrosive or anti-rust paints, clear wood finishes,

floor coatings, stains, primers and shellacs used for the project is to be submitted along with the manufacturer’s certificate complying with the VOC content limit.

1.1.5.11 Concrete, wood, bamboo and cork floor finishes such as sealer, stain and finish must meet the

requirements of SCAQMD (South Coast Air Quality Management District) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, effective January 1, 2004. Tile setting adhesives and grout must meet SCAQMD Rule 1168




141

as of July 1, 2005 and rule amendment date of January 7, 2005. A list of all floor finishes used for the project is to be submitted along with the manufacturer’s certificate providing compliance with VOC content limit.

1.1.5.12 All carpet and carpet cushion installed in the building interior must meet the testing and product

requirements of the CRI (Carpet and Rug Institute) Green Label Plus program. All carpet adhesive must have less than 50g/L VOC. A list of the different carpet types and adhesive used for the project is to be submitted along with the manufacturer’s certificate confirming CRI Green Label Plus compliance and compliance of VOC content of carpet adhesive.

1.1.5.13 All hard surface flooring must be certified by an independent third-party as Floor score standard

compliant. 1.1.5.14 Composite wood and agrifiber products used on the interior of the building must contain no added

urea formaldehyde resins. Composite wood and agri fiber products are defined as particleboard, medium density fiberboard (MDF), plywood, wheat board, strawboard, panel substrates and door cores. A list of all the composite wood materials used in the project should be submitted along with the manufacturer’s certificate supporting that the materials contain no urea formaldehyde resins.

1.1.5.15 All furniture and seating are Green guard Indoor Air Quality Certified. Provide a list of all furniture and

seating in the project along with manufacturer’s certificate showing Green guard If task lighting is provided at workstations, provide a list of number of task lights and product data of the luminaries and lamp type used

1.1.5.16 Indoor Air Quality seal 1.1.5.17 If individual thermal controls are provided in the project, submit a list of number of controls and

product data of the controls used 1.1.5.18 In order to obtain six, eight or eleven points – refer to water consumption requirements as mentioned

in the table below. Provide a listing of the number of the total number of fixtures and product data mentioning water consumption.

Execution procedures 1.16. Construction waste management

Develop a waste management plan that results in recycling of 50%/75% of waste generated during construction, calculated either by weight or volume of total waste generated by the work. Materials that maybe included are aerated concrete blocks, brick masonry, wood trim, composite wood products, agrifiber boards, gypsum board, metals, piping electrical conduit and packaging such as paper, cardboard, boxes, plastic sheet and film, polystyrene packaging, wood crates and plastic packaging. Provide separate garbage areas or containers to separate concrete or brick masonry, paper, plastic, metals, gypsum board, plywood, flooring and carpet on the project site. Submit waste management report consisting of material category, total quantity of waste in kgs, tons or cubic meter, quantity of waste recycled and quantity of total waste Provide receipt of each batch of disposal with weight or volume mentioned on the receipt. Use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

1.1.6.1 Housekeeping 1.1.6.2 After construction, the entire work area (including walls, ceilings, floors, etc.) should be cleaned. 1.1.6.3 Building materials should be protected from weather and stored in a clean, dry area prior to unpacking

for installation. Pay close attention to absorptive materials such as drywall and ceiling tile. 1.1.6.4 All coils, air filters, and fans should be cleaned before performing testing and balancing procedures

and especially before conducting baseline air quality tests 1.1.6.5 No food or drink should be permitted in construction areas. An area away from the construction area

has to be designated as a break/lunch area.




142

1.1.6.6 Scheduling 1.1.6.7 Specify construction sequencing to reduce absorption of VOC’s by materials that act as sinks or

contaminant sources 1.1.6.8 Complete applications of wet and odorous materials such as paints, sealants and coatings before

installing “sink” materials such as ceiling tiles, carpets, insulation, gypsum products, and fabric-covered furnishings

1.17. Materials

GENERAL:

The SI under this contract commits himself to use best quality material and assume full responsibility for the quality of all material incorporated or brought for incorporation in the work. The work shall be executed in accordance with the best engineering practice and as per instruction of Architect. All materials shall confirm to respective Indians Standards. SI must allow in his rates for all the wastage in all the materials.

1.17.1 Cement

1.17.1.1 All types and brands of cement shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. 1.17.1.2 All cement used for the work shall be ordinary Portland cement or such other cement as may be

permitted by the Engineer-in-charge. Portland cement shall comply with requirements of the latest issue of IS 269. High alumina cement, rapid hardening cement and Portland Slag cement etc. can be used only when permitted by the Engineer-in-charge. Such cements shall be in accordance with relevant IS codes. Portland Pozzolana cement when permitted by the Engineer-in-charge shall conform to IS 1489.

1.17.1.3 Cement which has remained in bulk storage at the mill for more than 6 months, or which has remained in bags at the dealer’s storage for over 3 months, or which has been stored at project site for more than 3 months shall be re-rested before use. Cement shall also be rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications.

1.17.1.4 The Cement to be used in the work shall be of grade not less than Grade 43 which shall be got approved by the Engineer –in-charge.

1.17.1.5 The following other types of cement may be used in works if specified or with prior approval of the Engineer in Charge in writing purpose. Specialist literature shall be consulted for guidance regarding use of these types of cement.

i. 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 8112 ii. 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 12269 iii. Portland slag cement conforming to IS 455 iv. Portland pozzolana cement (fly ash based) conforming to IS 1489 (Part- v. Portland pozzolana cement (calcined clay based) conforming to IS 1489 (Pt –2) vi. Sulphate resisting Portland cement conforming to IS 12330 vii. Fly ash when used for partial replacement of cement, shall conform to the requirements of

IS: 3812 (part I)-1966. 1.17.2 Fine Aggregates

Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, or an approved combination thereof and shall conform to IS: 383. The grading zone of sand proposed for use shall be supplied by the SI and got approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The sand shall be of siliceous material, sharp, hard, strong and durable and shall be free from adherent coatings, clay, dust, alkali, organic material, deleterious matter, lumps, etc. Either natural or manufactured sand shall be prepared for use by such screening or washing, or both, as necessary, to remove all objectionable foreign matter. Natural sand shall be washed, unless specific written authority is given by the




143

Engineer-in-charge to use sand that meets specifications and standards of cleanliness without washing. The cost of screening and washing must be borne by the SI. The fine aggregate shall be taken from a source approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Sometimes sand is obtained from crushed stone screening but often contains a high percentage of dust and clay. It tends to be flaky and angular. This type produces harsh concrete and should be avoided. Sea sand should not be used unless approved by the EIC. If approved, the required treatment shall be done at the SI’s cost. Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain any appreciable amount of clay, Sand shall not contain harmful impurities such as iron, pyrites, coal particles, lignite, mica shale or similar laminated material, alkali, and organic impurities in such form or quantities as to affect the strength of durability of concrete or mortar. Also it should not contain any material liable to attack the steel reinforcement.

1.17.3 Water

Water shall be potable. Fresh, clean and free from impurities and should be from an approved source. SI can provide and maintain sufficient storage accommodation for the water as and where directed by Architect. Water for mixing cement mortar or concrete shall not be salty or brackish and shall be clean, reasonably clear and free from objectionable quantities of silt and races of oil, acid and injurious alkali, salts, organic matter and other deleterious material which will either weaken the mortar or concrete or cause efflorescence. Sea water shall not be used. Water fit for drinking shall generally be found suitable for mixing cement mortar. Water fit curing mortar or concrete shall not be too acidic or alkaline. It shall have pH value above 6. Sea water shall not be used for curing purpose.

1.17.4 Coarse Aggregate

This shall be machine crushed from hard (granite) trap stone, grading of aggregate shall be within the limits to produce a dense mix. And shall conform to IS: 383 and IS: 515; mix will work into position without segregation and without excessive quantity of water being required it also shall be strong and durable and shall be free any clay films and other adherent/coating. It shall be washed with clean water if required by the Architect. This shall be well graded between the limit as specified in the items of the work and the grading tests shall be carried out. Aggregates shall be screened. If required by Architect to obtain proper proportion to his approval. The quality shall confirm to IS: 383-1970.

1.17.5 Scaffolding

Scaffolding shall be double and shall be erected with steel sections or pipes of adequate strength so as to be safe for construction operations. The SI shall take all measures to ensure the safety of the work and working people. Any instructions of the Engineer in this respect shall also be complied with. The SI shall be entirely responsible for any damage to properly or injury to persons resulting from ill erected scaffolding, defective ladders and materials or otherwise arising out of his default in this respect. Proper scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy approach to every part of the work. Overhead work shall not be allowed.

1.17.6 Timber

Timber shall be considered as well seasoned in case its moisture free. Timber shall be of quality as specified in BOQ and well-seasoned. It shall have uniform color, be free from defects such as cracks, dead knots, soft spongy spots and waves of injurious open shakes. Grains shall be reasonably straight. The individual hard and sound knot shall not be larger than 6 sq. cm. The aggregate area of all knots shall not exceed 0.5% area of a piece. All timber shall be treated with chemical wood preservatives and be kiln seasoned to IS 1141 and conform to IS 287 for moisture content. Maximum permissible limit shall be +3% for average moisture content of all samples from a given lot and +5% for individual sample of the given lot. This is applicable when thickness of timber is more than 50 mm.




144

Small size tolerance shall be + 2% and +3% respectively. Timber used shall be treated with a 10 years guaranteed and approved anti-termite treatment. Wood work in contact with masonry of concrete shall be painted with hot bitumen coal tar before being placed in position. Timber received at site shall be marked and stamped for approval prior to being used at site. All timber shall be finished to required dimension and texture prior to being treated for chemical preservation.

1.17.7 Flush Doors

Flush doors shall be of factory finished kiln seasoned timber, of solid core construction with frame, lock rail and well balanced backings and shall be faced with high quality commercial or teak veneering as specified. The flush doors shall be specified make and thickness as specified in the BOQ/Drawings, with matching teak/veneer wood lipping glued and machine pressed along with core. The lipping to be finished in melamine polish, unless otherwise specified in the BOQ/Drawings

1.17.8 Block Board

These boards are used for paneling on wall surface or door shutters, shall be grade I exterior grade, which is of the following types:

i) Type I block boards, decorative type. These are block boards with ornamental veneers on one side or on both sides.

ii) Type II block boards, commercial type. These are block boards with faces of commercial timber. The block boards grade I shall have been bonded with B.W.R. (Boiling Waterproofing) type synthetic resin adhesive.

1.17.9 Particle Board

The particle board used for the paneling in door shutters, wall cladding, etc. shall be FPS (Flat Pressed Single layer board) or FPTH (Flat Pressed Three layer board) type. It shall have been bonded with B.W.R. (boiling Waterproofing) type synthetic resin adhesive. The shrinkage in thickness and length of particle shall not exceed 5 percent.

Types of particle boards:- a) Flat pressed particle board:

This is manufactured my mixing wood particles of pre-determined sizes and shapes with synthetic resins of Phenol formaldehyde or urea formaldehyde types and curing and pressing in a parallel platen hot press of the usual multiplayer types but may be pressed in a continuous band type of press. The applied pressure is perpendicular to the plane of the board which orientates the particles mainly with the larger dimension parallel with the plane of the board. b) Single layer particle board: A board made of one uniform layer or particles and resin mix and predominantly of uniform texture and strength in the whole depth of the board. c) Three layer particle board: A particle board made of three layers of particles and resin mix, usually with finer and thinner particles for the top and bottom layers and coarser and bigger particles for the core layer. Resin content in a three layer board is usually higher in the face layer than in the core layer leading to a sandwich construction with stronger and denser skin.

1.17.10 Plywood

Plywood for general purpose shall be of three grades, namely, BWR, WWF and CWR, depending upon the adhesives used for bonding the veneers. The plywood used for paneling for door shutters, wall cladding, etc. shall be BWR grade and shall not be less than 10mm thickness for two or more panel shutters and 12mm thickness for single panel shutters. The thickness in case of wall cladding/false ceiling etc., all not be less than 6mm. The thickness of all veneers shall be uniform, within a tolerance of ± 5%.




145

Requirements of thickness of face and core veneers shall be as follows:

i) In 3-ply boards, up to 5mm thick, combined thickness of the face veneers shall not exceed twice the thickness of center ply.

ii) In multiple boards, the thickness of any veneer shall not be more than thrice the thickness of any other veneer.

iii) The sum of the thickness of the veneers in one direction shall approximate to the sum of the thickness of veneers at right angles to them and shall not be greater than 1.5 times the sum, except for 3 ply as specified above.

1.17.11 Hard board

Hard boards are generally classified into the following three types according to their method of manufacture, density and other related mechanical and physical properties: a) Medium hard board: A homogeneous fibre building board having a density exceeding 480 kg/M3 but not exceeding 800 kg/M3 b) Normal hard board Same as above, but having density exceeding 800 kg/M3, but not exceeding 1200 kg/M3. c) Tempered hard board: Hard board further treated in the course of manufacture to increase its density, strength and water resistance is tempered hard board. The hard board used for paneling of door shutters, wall cladding, false ceiling, etc. shall be of tempered quality. The thickness of hard board paneling shall not be less than 12mm dia in case of single panel shutter and 10mm in the case of two or more panel shutters. The hard boards shall be regular and unless otherwise specified, shall have square edges. The length of the two diagonals of the board shall not differ by more than ± 3mm per meter length of the diagonal. The tolerance in length, width shall be ± 3mm and on thickness ± 0.3mm. The boards shall be of uniform thickness subject to tolerance as above. They shall be free from warp. The surface shall be flat, free from cracks and lumps and of normal color. At least one face shall be smooth.

1.17.12 Glass

The glass shall be reasonably free from blisters, stains, scratches and bubbles, so as not to disturb the visibility through the glass. The glass shall be of good and durable quality conforming to IS:1761-1960 The glass shall be special selected / selected ordinary quantity of approved make as specified and it shall be free from bubbles, flaws specks, waves, air holes, distortion, scratches or other defects. The glasses in bulk quantities shall be brought to site in Makers original packing and makers guarantee shall be predicted if called for by the Engineer-in-charge. The glass shall be required thickness as mentioned in the items of schedule of quantities and / or shown in drawing. In case of windows, the beading shall be anodized aluminum beading of channel section as per sizes mentioned in the drawing. The junction of the beadings shall be mitre jointed. Irregular shaped or circular glass shall be measured as smallest rectangular area from which the irregular or circular pane can be cut. Glass panes shall be fixed by wooden beading having mitred joints. A thin layer of clear silicon sealant shall be applied between glass panes and the beading. Fixing of glass panes with simple putty and beads shall not be permitted.

1.17.13 Insulating Board

Insulating board tile for suspended ceilings and walls shall be as specified and approved and shall be fix according to manufacturer’s instruction.

1.17.14 Holdfasts for Doors and Windows

Holdfasts for steel or timber frame shall be as per specified makes. 1.17.15 Nails Etc.

Nails and staples shall be of hard drawn galvanized wire and shall be of specified makes.




146

1.17.16 Bolts Nuts Etc.

Bolts, Nuts, and holdfast, shall be of mild steel painted with Bitumen based paints as specified before fixing. The threads of bolts, nuts and washers shall be truly fitting and shall be painted with zinc chromate before fitting the nuts.

1.17.17 Screws

Screws shall be of make as approved and specified. 1.17.18 Paints

Filler, primer enamels, paints and various and external finishing application to cement plaster shall be of an approved best quality, property brand similar shall be bituminous based. Distemper shall be either water bound or oil bound as stated in the schedule of quantities. These shall be approved brand in sealed drums of the packages.

1.17.19 Special Materials

If materials of a particular brand are specified in the schedule of quantities these shall be procured accordingly from approved manufactures. These shall include materials like bitumen, bituminous compounds, waterproofing compounds and hardening compounds, special paints acoustic and insulation boards and other finishing materials. The responsibility for the use of these materials lies with the SI and he should avail himself of the necessary guarantee as may be required by the architect and give the same to the Architect.

1.17.20 MDF

MDF/HDF is Medium Density And High Density Fiber board, with board densities ranging from 700 Kgs to 1000 Kgs per cubic meter. The range of MDF/HDF includes Plain Medium Density Fiber Board, Laminated Medium Density Fiber Board, Plain High Density Fiber Board, Laminated High Density Fiber Board for Flooring, etc. The thickness of the board range from 6 mm to 25 mm and board size of 8 ft. x 4 ft.

1.17.21 Tiles/Marble/Granite

Vitrified tiles, Granite, Italian Marble for lift lobby shall conform to IS 1237 and other relevant standards. For neutral shade tiles grey/white cement with necessary pigment shall be used. Tiles shall be compacted by mechanical vibration and hydraulically pressed. It shall be of choice shade and shall have desired pattern of chop distribution. The size and thickness of tiles shall be as approved by the Architect. It shall be from an approved manufacturer and shall be flat and true to shape. They shall be free from cracks, crazing, spots, chipped edges and corners. The glazing and color shall be of uniform shade.

1.17.22 Glass Wool Insulation

Fiber glass wool insulation should be made of fine, long, inorganic glass fibers bonded by high temperature resin and should be energy conserving with sound insulating properties. It should be suitable for applications ranging from 1950C to 2300C.

Chemical Stability: It should be chemically inert. The application should not cause or accelerate corrosion. It should also be rot proof and odourless.

Fire Safety: It should be non-combustible in accordance with BS 476 Part 4, 1970. Incombustible low fire propagation extremely low spread of flame (class 1 BS 476 Part 7) non-emission of dense smoke and toxic gases (low toxicity index 0.86) non-depletion of oxygen (high oxygen index 70%)




147

1.17.23 Flexible Plywood

Wherever flexi-ply is used the thickness should be in multiples of 6 mm or 8 mm. It can mould and bend into any shape without chipping, cracking, peeling or staining.

1.17.24 Gypboard Plain

A Gypsum panel is composed of a non-combustible gypsum core encased in a strong, smooth-finish paper on the face side and a natural-finish paper on the back side. The face paper is folded around the long edges to reinforce and protect the core, and the ends are square-cut and finished smooth. The long edges of the panels are available in a choice of designs (including tapered), allowing joints to be reinforced and concealed with approved joint treatment system

Application:- Suitable for most applications where normal fire, structural performance and acoustic levels are specified Board color:- Grey face paper, Brown reverse side paper Standards and certification:- IS 2095 - Part l, 1996 Thermal Conductivity: 0.16 (W/m°K ) Moisture Content: Should be less than 2% in accordance with BS 2972. Water Absorption: Should be less than 2% in accordance with BS 2972. Product conformity British European standard – BS EN 438, American NEMA LD – 3, FIRA England, BS EN-476 part 7,

Warrington Research UK, IS -2046 BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards)

Care & maintenance Cleaning should be carried out with a soft moist cloth and warm soap solution. Do not use detergents containing abrasive particles or excess soda. Care & maintenance instructions do not apply to the range of metallic patterns (6000 & 7000) series as they are very sensitive.

Note Samples presented are indicative of color, pattern and surface finish but not the actual thickness. All metallic patterns (6000 & 7000) series are recommended for vertical applications only. Information and samples for special cabinet liners, phenolic boards, special purpose compact laminates and post forming laminates are available on request. Phone / fax /email for larger samples of your choice.

1.18 Construction Material

1.18.1 Post Construction Anti-Termite Treatment

STAGE 1: Treatment to wall and floor junction: Termiticide solution will be injected under pressure into these holes to create barrier against termites. If heavy infestation is noticed on 2nd and above floors the same treatment will be carried out on that particular floor. Mode of measurement will be Carpet area on Ground and 1st floor only

STAGE 2: Treatment to wooden fixtures: Holes should be drilled at the base of wooden-fixtures such

as window frames and doorframes adjoining the flooring and termiticide solution will be injected. This treatment will be carried out on all floors (except basements/Terrace). An oil-based termiticide will be sprayed on all the woodwork infested by the termites within the premises. Special care will be taken in case furniture attached to the wall as the termites can easily attack them. Drilling will be carried out at the base of all such fixture and termiticide solution will be injected. The rate for this treatment to be included in Stage 1, no separate measurements for the same will be done All existing woodwork in the building which is in contact with the floor or walls and which is in contact with the floor or walls and which is infested by termites, shall be treated by spraying at the points of contacts with the adjoining masonry with the chemical emulsion of concentration given below by drilling 6 mm holes at a downward angle of about 45° at the




148

junction of woodwork and masonry and squirting chemical emulsion into these holes till refusal or to a maximum of half a litre per hole. The treated holes shall than be sealed. Treatment of Electrical Fixtures Holes drilled in the floors, walls or wood work sides will be sealed with white cement mixed with matching pigment by the SI with the above tender items without any extra payment. Damaged parts of the wood work, plaster, masonry will be made good by the SI. Contactor has to use approved brand conforming IS-8944 latest version. The treatment will be carried out as per latest version of IS- 6313 ( Part III )

TERMINATION OF TERMITE RUNWAYS/TUBES

This treatment shall be carried out in a through manner seeking the termites from their eouts, such as ceiling, behind wooden paneling, inside electric wires, switch boards Water base chemical shall be sprayed over and above all the termite runways/mud. After 15 minutes these treated runways shall be removed from the existing solution.

TREATMENT OF ELECTRICAL FIXTURES

Disinfestations in electrical fixture (like switch boxes in the wall) is noticed, covers of the attach boxes shall be removed and Inside of such boxes shall be treated liberally with mice dust. The covers of the switch boxes shall be reaffixed after dusting.

CHEMICALS

Any one of the following chemicals conforming to relevant Indian Standard in water emulsion may be used for the soil treatment in order to protect a building from termite attack. Chlorpyrifos 20 EC as per IS 8944 Lindane 20 EC as per IS 632

NOTE— The chemicals described in this code are insecticides with a persistent action and is to be regarded as highly poisonous. These chemicals can have an adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the skin, inhaled as vapors or spray-mists or swallowed. Detailed precautions for the safe handling of these chemicals should be submitted. Persons carrying out chemical soil treatments in accordance with IS 6313 Part 3 should familiarize themselves for these precautions and exercise due care when handling the chemical whether in concentrate or in diluted form. The use of the chemical should be avoided where there is any risk of wells or other water supplies becoming contaminated. Oil or kerosene based solution of chlorpyrifos 20 EC or Lindane 20 EC 1.0 percent (by weight) concentration is useful for treatment of wood.

SERVICE GUARANTEE

After complete measure as mentioned above are backed up with the service guarantee of FIVE YEARS from the date of completion of work. If unlikely rectifications occur during guarantee period, the same shall be treated on free of cost basis.

INSPECTION

The company undertakes periodical inspection of the treated area after the full execution Post Construction Termite Treatment. The inspection continues till, the service guarantee period of FIVE YEARS.




149

1.18.2 MASONRY WORKS

1.18.2.1 SCOPE

These specifications cover the use of Concrete Block Masonry for the structural / non-structural purposes.

1.18.2.2 GENERAL

The provision of the latest Indian Standards listed below form part of these specifications: All relevant Standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are also applicable.

IS 269: Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland cement IS 383: Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete. IS 455: Specification for Portland slag cement IS 456: Code of Practice for plain and reinforced concrete. IS 2185 (Part I): Solid cement concrete blocks. IS 2572: Code of practice for construction of hollow concrete block masonry. IS 2645: Specification for integral waterproofing compound. IS 9103: Specification for admixtures for concrete.

1.18.2.3 MATERIAL 1.18.2.3.1 Cement & Aggregates

Ordinary Portland cement complying with IS 269 shall be used unless specified. Cement complying with any of the following Indian Standards may be used at the discretion of the Engineer-in Charge: IS 269-1989. 455-1989, 1489-1999, 6909-1990, 8041-1990, 8043-1991. When cement conforming to IS: 269-1989 is used, replacement of cement by fly ash conforming to 1S:3812-1981 may be permitted up to a limit of 20%. However, it shall be ensured that blending of fly ash with cement is as intimate as possible, to achieve maximum uniformity.

Aggregates shall conform to IS 383. Grading shall be as indicated in IS 383. Fineness modules of the combined aggregates shall be between 3.6 and 4. The aggregates used in the manufacture of block shall be clean and free from all deleterious matter, and shall conform to the requirements of IS:383-1970. Maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 10 mm. Sand used in the manufacture of blocks shall be well graded, clean and free from deleterious matter, and shall conform to the requirements of IS: 383-1970.

1.18.2.3.2 Water

Water conforming to IS 456 and as approved by the EIC shall be used.

1.18.2.3.3 Admixtures

Additives or admixtures may be added to the cement or concrete mix conforming to the IS specifications. Admixtures shall be chloride free and melamine polymer based. Other additives or admixtures not being governed by Indian Standards shall be tested and checked that the same are not detrimental to durability. However any addition shall only be after approval of the EIC.

1.18.2.3.4 FLY ASH

Fly Ash conforming to IS: 38121981 may be used for part replacement of fine Aggregate up to a limit of 20% or as directed by the Structural consultant.




150

1.18.2.4 MANUFACTURE:

1.18.2.4.1 Concrete blocks may be hollow (open or closed cavity) or solid and shall be referred to by its nominal dimension. The term nominal dimension includes the thickness of the mortar joint. All specifications of solid concrete blocks including specifications for actual dimensions, tolerances, sizes, shapes and webs, grades of blocks etc. shall conform to IS : 2185. Blocks may be manufactured either at construction site or in factory on a central casting platform using steel moulds with or without surface vibration for compaction of cement concrete.

1.18.2.4.2 Mould: - Moulds shall be fabricated using mild steel plates and mild steel angles for stiffening the plates. The mould shall pc either fixed type (box with four side walls fixed at corners, and top and bottom open) or split type. Split type may be either individual or gang mould. Where the compaction of the concrete is done manually, the mould may be either fixed type or split type. When the compaction of the blocks is done with surface vibrator, the mould shall be only split type (individual• or gang mould).

1.18.2.4.3 Concreting Concrete shall be mixed in the mechanical mixer. Blocks shall be molded, laid and compacted with automatic machines table vibrator. Care shall be taken to see that the mix mould is properly filled up. Block shall be protected until they are sufficiently hardened to permit handling without damage. Consistency (10-12 mm slump) shall be used in order to enable proper compaction and de-moulding. The consistency of the mix should be such that it may cohere when compressed in the hand without free water being visible. In case of blocks where compaction is done by external vibrator, concrete mix of very low consistency (zero slumps) shall be used in order to vibrate and compact the concrete under pressure. Mixing:- Concrete shall normally be mixed in a mechanical mixer unless otherwise permitted by Engineer-in-charge. In case of hand mixing 10% extra cement shall be used without any extra payment. Mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution of the materials, and the mass is uniform in color and consistency. De-moulding shall be done 5 to 10 minutes after compaction. In case of fixed type mould it shall be pulled up with side handles while pressing down the block with the plate at top with thumb. In case of split type mould, the sides shall be removed first and the partition plates (gang mould) shall be pulled up subsequently. After de-moulding, the blocks shall be protected until they are sufficiently hardened to permit handling without damage.

1.18.2.4.4 Curing and Drying Blocks shall be cured in the curing yard by keeping them continuously moist for at least 14 days. Steam-cured blocks shall be preferred. Cured blocks shall be allowed to dry for a period of 4 weeks before being used. The blocks shall be allowed to complete their initial shrinkage before they are laid in the wall.

1.18.2.4.5 Physical requirements All blocks shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects. For exposed construction face or faces shall be free of chips, or other imperfections, and the overall dimensions of the blocks shall be in accordance to tolerance as specified. Minimum compressive strength shall be as per table 2 below, maximum permissible water absorption shall not exceed the limit specified in I.S: 2185, dimensional variations shall conform to I.S. 2185.Testing




151

1.18.2.4.6 IS 2185 shall be conducted on samples of units selected according to the sampling procedure given here under to ensure conformity with the physical requirements as specified.

1.18.2.4.7 Sampling A sample of 20 blocks shall be taken from every consignment of 5000 blocks or part thereof of the same size and same batch of manufacture. From these samples, the blocks shall be taken at random for conducting the test. The blocks shall be taken at regular intervals during the course of work, preferably while being loaded or unloaded. In case samples are to be taken from the stacks, blocks shall be taken at random from across the top of the stacks, the sides accessible and from the interior of the stacks.

1.18.2.4.8 The blocks shall be kept under cover and protected from extreme conditions of temperature, relative humidity and wind until they are required for test. The test shall be conducted as soon as the sample has been taken.

1.18.2.4.9 Number of Tests All the 20 blocks shall be checked for dimensions and inspected for visual defects. Out of the 20 blocks, 3 blocks shall be subjected to the test for block density, 8 blocks to the test for compressive strength, 3 blocks to the test for water absorption and 3 blocks to the test for drying shrinkage and later to the test for moisture movement. The remaining 3 blocks shall be reserved for retest for drying shrinkage and moisture movement if a need arises.

1.18.2.4.10 Blocks shall be approved as per requirements given below) of IS 2185 (Part I) are satisfied.

i. The number of blocks with dimensions outside the tolerance limit and / or with visual defects, among those inspected shall not be more than two.

ii. For Block density and compressive strength, the mean value determined shall be greater than or equal to the minimum limit specified in Table 2 of IS 2185 (Part I) .

iii. For drying shrinkage and moisture movement, all the test specimens shall satisfy the requirements of the test. If one of more specimens fails to satisfy the requirements, the remaining 3 blocks shall be subjected to these tests. All blocks shall satisfy the requirements. Drying shrinkage shall not exceed 0.1 percent.

iv. For water absorption, the mean value determined shall not be more than 10 percent by mass.

1.18.2.5 Hollow and solid concrete block masonry

1.18.2.5.1 Hollow and solid concrete blocks- Shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2185--1979. 1.18.2.5.2 Specification for hollow and solid concrete blocks except with regard to the mix of cement concrete

and sizes of aggregates shall be as indicated. Hollow blocks shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges, honey combing and other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of block or impair the strength or performance of construction.

1.18.2.5.3 Concrete Block-hollow (open or closed cavity) or solid shall be referred to by its nominal dimensions.

1.18.2.6 Workmanship

1.18.2.6.1 In total dry climate top and sides may be slightly moistened to avoid absorption of water from mortar. 1.18.2.6.2 Joints shall not be bigger than 10mm and will be perfectly horizontal and vertical. Joints shall be

raked 10mm deep while mortar is wet. 1.18.2.6.3 Cut blocks shall not be used. Special solid pre-cast blocks at site shall be cast well in advance to be

used as spacers and to adjust breaking of vertical joints. 1.18.2.6.4 Cracks in block masonry are due to shrinkage or expansion of blocks or due to settlement, thermal




152

expansion or changes in moisture content in the structural members enclosing the block walls. The following measures are recommended to prevent formation of cracks.

i. While curing, the block masonry should be lightly sprinkled with water and not made excessively wet.

ii. Expansion joints shall be provided in walls exceeding 30 m in length. iii. Reinforcement should be provided in the bed joints in block work, one course above and

course below windows and above doors in order to distribute the shrinkage/ temperature stresses occurring at the corners of openings, more uniformly throughout the walls.

iv. The gap between the topmost layer of block and the soffit of the beam shall be packed by lightly hammering flat pieces of Shahabad/ Kota tiles and then the gaps will be covered by weld mesh before closing them by cement plaster. The weld mesh will be extended at least 150 mm on the R.C.C. beam and 150 mm on block masonry and nailed to them with strong nails.

v. Provisions for door and window frames:- A course of solid concrete block masonry shall be provided under door and window openings (or a 10em thick pre-cast concrete sill block under windows). The solid course shall extend for at least 20cm beyond the opening on either side. For jambs of very large doors and windows either solid unit are used, or the hollows shall be filled in with concrete of mix 1:3:6 using 12.5 mm nominal size aggregates.

vi. Provisions for Roof/ceiling:- The course immediately below the roof slab shall be built with solid blocks: The top of the roof course shall be finished smooth with a layer of cement and coarse sand mortar 1:3, 10mm thick and covered with a thick coat of white wash or crude oil, to ensure free movement of slab.

vii. Intersecting walls:- When two walls meet or intersect and the courses are to be laid up at me same time, a true masonry bond between at least 50% of the units at the intersection is necessary. When such intersecting walls are laid up separately, pockets with 20mm maximum vertical spacing shall be left in the first wall laid. The corresponding course of the second wall shall be built into these pockets. Fixtures, fittings, etc. shall be built into the masonry in cement and coarse sand mortar 1:3 while laying the blocks where possible. Hold fasts shall be built into the joints of the masonry during laying. Holes, chases, sleeves, openings, etc. of the required size and shape shall be formed in the masonry with special blocks while laying, for fixing pipes, service lines, passage of water etc. After service lines, pipes etc. are fixed, voids left, if any, shall be filled up with cement concrete 1:3:6(1 cement 3 coarse sand: 6 stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) and neatly finished.

1.18.2.7 SCAFFOLDING

Scaffolding shall be double and shall be erected with steel sections or pipes of adequate strength so

as to be safe for construction operations. The SI shall take all measures to ensure the safety of the work and working people. Any instructions of the Engineer in this respect shall also be complied with. The SI shall be entirely responsible for any damage to properly or injury to persons resulting from ill erected scaffolding, defective ladders and materials or otherwise arising out of his default in this respect. Proper scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy approach to every part of the work. Overhead work shall not be allowed. Block work shall be carried out with double scaffolding only. Making holes of any kind for the purpose of supporting the scaffolding shall not be permitted.

1.18.3 WATERPROOFING

1.18.3.1 SCOPE

These specifications cover the requirements of various waterproofing treatments for waterproofing various components of structures. The specifications cover the detailed procedure adopted.

1.18.3.2 CODES TO BE FOLLOWED

IS 6494 Code of Practice for waterproofing of Underground Water Reservoir




153

IS 2645 Indian Standard Specifications for integral cement waterproofing

1.18.3.3 WATERPROOFING COATINGS

SUMMARY Section Includes: Furnishing of all labour, materials, services and equipment necessary for the supply and installation of waterproofing systems (as described in the BOQ) to concrete substrates, above-grade, on either dry or wet side of substrates, as indicated on drawing and as specified herein.

REFERENCES

A. Applicable Standards: The following standards are referenced herein. 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 2. Army Corps of Engineers (CRD) 3. NSF International (NSF) 4. Bureau of Indian Standard (IS) – 2720

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Acrylic Polymer-Modified Flexible Cementitious Membrane / Coating: having UV resistance, underground ground-chemical resistance, and high melting points, flexible and elastic with high adhesive strength. The membrane shall be reinforced with a layer of non-woven polyester fabric of minimum 30 g/Sqm. The Acrylic Polymer-Modified Flexible Cementitious Membrane / Coating shall be protected with a subsequent protective cementitious layer of concrete screed / plaster in thickness as specified in the BOQ. The total coating thickness shall be as specified by the manufacturer’s technical literature but not less than 1.5 mm and shall be applied in 2 - 3 coats. All necessary terminations to be taken care by the SI.

1.18.3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer: Provide products of manufacturer with no less than 20 years of experience in manufacturing the waterproofing materials offered by them for the required work. Manufacturers that cannot provide the performance test data specified herein will not be considered for the project.

Specialized Executing Waterproofing Agency: Specialized Executing Waterproofing Agency shall be experienced in the installation of the offered waterproofing materials as demonstrated by previous successful installation, and shall be approved by the manufacturer in writing. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to installation of waterproofing, conduct meeting with waterproofing agency, Architect/Engineer, SBI’s representative, and waterproofing manufacturer’s representative to verify and review the following: 1 Project requirements for waterproofing as set out in Contract Documents. 2 Manufacturer’s product data including application instruction. 3 Substrate conditions, and procedures for substrate preparation and waterproofing installation. Technical Consultation: The waterproofing manufacturer’s representative shall provide technical consultation on waterproofing application.

1.18.3.5 GUARANTEE

Manufacturer’s Guarantee: Manufacturer shall provide standard product guarantee executed by authorized company official. Term of guarantee shall be 20 years from Date of Substantial Completion. Guarantee of the Specialized Executing Waterproofing Agency: The specialized Executing Waterproofing Agency shall guarantee the waterproofing installation against defects caused by faulty workmanship or materials for a period of 20 years from Date of Substantial Completion. The guarantee will cover the surfaces treated and will blind the agency to repair, at his expense, any and




154

all leaks through the treated surfaces which are not due to structural weaknesses or other causes beyond applicator’s control such as fire, earthquake, tornado and hurricane. The guarantee shall read as follows. Guarantee: The agency guarantees that, upon completion of the work, surfaces treated with offered waterproofing material will be and will remain free from water leakage resulting from defective workmanship or materials for a period of 20 years from Date of Substantial Completion. In the event that water leakage occurs within the guarantee period from such causes, the agency shall, at his sole expense, repair, replace or otherwise correct such defective workmanship or materials. Agency shall not be liable for consequential damages and the agency’s liability shall be limited to repair, replacement or correcting of defective workmanship or materials. Agency shall have no responsibility with respect to water leakage or other defects caused by structural failure or movement of the structure, or any other causes beyond the Agency’s control.

i. Source Quality: Obtain proprietary waterproofing products directly from the manufacturer. ii. iii. Other Civil Materials related with waterproofing : Cement, screened river sand, brick-bats, iv. Aggregates, integral waterproofing compounds, etc. required for screeds, protective toppings and

plasters shall conform to the pertaining IS standards (IS 269, IS 8112, IS 13286, IS 383, IS 2645, IS 12118 and IS 3495). The Consultants / PM shall demand the conformance of these materials from the Specialized Executing Waterproofing Agencies / civil SI from time to time and they shall have to produce test reports / documents to prove the conformance of these materials with their applicable standards, without any argument.

1.18.3.6 EXECUTION

1.18.3.6.1EXAMINATION

a) Site Visit: Prior to waterproofing installation, arrange visit to project site with waterproofing manufacturer’s representative. Representative shall inspect and certify that concrete surfaces are in acceptable condition to receive waterproofing treatment.

b) Verification of Substrates: Verify that concrete surfaces are sound and clean, and that form release agents and materials used to cure the concrete are compatible with waterproofing treatment.

c) Examination for Defects: Examine surfaces to be waterproofed for form tie holes and structural defects such as honeycombing, rock pockets, faulty construction joints and cracks. Such defects to be repaired in accordance to manufacturer’s product data and 3.02 below.

1.18.3.6.2 PREPARATION

a) Concrete Finish: Concrete surfaces to receive waterproofing treatment shall be free from scale, excess form oil, laitance, curing compounds and foreign matter. Horizontal surfaces shall have a rough wood float, smooth or broom finish, as required by the waterproofing material manufacturer.

b) Surface Preparation: Smooth surfaces (e.g. where steel forms are used) or surfaces covered with excess form oil or other contaminants shall be washed, lightly sandblasted, water blasted, or acid etched with muriatic acid (as necessary) to provide a clean absorbent surface. Surfaces to be acid-etched shall be saturated with water prior to application of acid.

c) Repair of Defects: Surface defects shall be repaired in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions as follows:

i. Form Tie Holes, Construction Joints, cracks: Chip our defective areas in a ‘U’ shaped slot 25 mm wide and a minimum of 25 mm deep. Clean slot of debris and dust. Soak area with water and remove excess surface water. Apply a polymer modified cementitious bonding coat of approved material to the slot. Then fill cavity with a non-shrink, waterproof, cementitious grout / mortar, while the bonding coat is tacky. Compress tightly into cavity using pneumatic packer or block and hammer. Where the concrete is defective, do injection grouting with high pressure (140 psi) grouting machine using cement admixed with non-shrink grouting admixture.




155

ii. Rock Pockets, Honeycombing or Other Defective Concrete: Rout out defective areas to sound concrete. Remove loose materials and saturate with water. Remove excess surface water and apply a polymer modified cementitious bonding coat of approved material to the area. While the bonding coat is still tacky, fill cavity to surface level with non-shrink grout. Where the concrete is defective, do injection grouting with high pressure (140 psi) grouting machine using cement admixed with non-shrink grouting admixture.

1.18.3.6.3 APPLICATION

A. Construction Joints: Apply Cementitious bonding material in slurry form to joint surfaces between concrete pours, just prior to pouring fresh concrete. Moisten surfaces prior to the bonding coat application. Where joint surfaces are not accessible prior to pouring new concrete, consult manufacturer for application procedure.

B. Coves (vata): Make a minimum 4 inch (diagonal) cove / vata at all 900 interfaces in concrete surfaces where waterproofing is carried out, without fail.

C. Surface Application: After repairs, surface preparation, treatment of construction joints, cracks,

honeycombs, tie-holes, etc., have been completed in accordance with manufacturer’s product data and as specified herein, apply / provide the waterproofing material as specified in the manufacturer’s technical and application data sheet to concrete surfaces. Application rates, thicknesses and locations shall be as indicated in the drawing. When brushing, work slurry well into surface of the concrete, filling surface pores and hairline cracks. When spraying, hold nozzle close enough to ensure that slurry is forced into pores and hairline cracks. When torching, uniformly burn the surface when overlapping, to ensure that the membrane adheres uniformly.

Sandwich (Topping) Application: When treated structural slabs are to receive a concrete or other topping, place the topping only after the initial curing period of the material being used, is completed. Lightly pre-water when rapid drying conditions exist.

1.18.3.6.4 CURING

A. General: For cementations materials: Begin curing as soon as the applied waterproofing material has hardened sufficiently so as not to be damaged by a fine spray. Cure the treatment with water as per the manufacturer’s instructions. In warm climates, more-than-normal curing duration may be necessary to prevent excessive drying of coating. For liquid applied membranes / Pre-fabricated membranes: natural air curing for duration as described in the manufacturer’s technical data sheet.

B. Air Circulation: Do not lay plastic sheeting directly on the waterproofing coating as air contact is required for proper curing. If poor circulation exists in treated areas, it may be necessary to provide fans or blown air to aid in curing of waterproofing treatment.

C. Water-holding Structures: For concrete water-holding structures such as swimming pools, reservoirs, water treatment tanks and wet wells, cure the waterproofing system for a minimum of three days and then allow the waterproofing system to set for 7 days before filling structure with liquid. For structures holding hot or corrosive liquids, cure waterproofing treatment for three days and allow to set for 15 days before filling.

D. Protection: During the curing period, protect the treated surfaces from damage by wind, sun, rain and temperatures below 20 C. If plastic sheeting is used for protection, it must be raised off the waterproofing coating to allow sufficient air circulation.




156

1.18.4 PLASTERING

1.18.4.1 SCOPE

These specifications cover the use of plastering for masonry and RCC work, pointing for brick and stone masonry work.

1.18.4.2 Applicable Indian Standards

The provision of the latest revisions of the following IS codes shall form a part of this specification to the extent they are relevant.

IS: 269 Specification for ordinary rapid hardening and low heat Portland cement

IS: 712 Building Lines

IS: 1200 (Part XII) Method of measurement of building and Civil Engg. Works - Plastering and Pointing

IS: 1542 Specification for sand for plaster

IS: 1630 Mason's Tools for Plaster work and pointing work.

IS: 1661 Code of practice for application of cement lime plaster finishes

IS: 10067 Material Constants for Building Works

Other I. S. Codes, not specifically mentioned here, but pertaining to plastering work, form part of these specifications.

1.18.4.3 GENERAL

1.18.4.3.1 Cement Mortar

Cement mortar shall have the proportion of cement to sand as specified and shall comply with relevant clauses of concrete specifications. Cement: Cement shall conform to IS: 269 Ordinary Portland cement shall be used. The weight of ordinary Portland cement shall be taken as 50 kg per bag. The SI shall ensure that the cement is of sound and requiring quality before using it. Any cement which has deteriorated caked or which has been damaged shall not be used. The specifications covered under the section Concrete' shall be applicable in addition. Water: Water for mixing cement mortar or concrete shall not be salty or brackish and shall be clean, reasonably clear and free from objectionable quantities of silt and races of oil, acid and injurious alkali, salts, organic matter and other deleterious material which will either weaken the mortar or concrete or cause efflorescence. Sea water shall not be used. Water fit for drinking shall generally be found suitable for mixing cement mortar. Water fit curing mortar or concrete shall not be too acidic or alkaline. It shall have pH value above 6. Sea water shall not be used for curing purpose.

Fine Aggregate All fine aggregate shall conform to IS: 383 - 1963 and relevant portion of IS: 515-1959. Sand shall be clean, well graded, hard, strong, durable and gritty particles free from injurious amounts of dust, clay, kankar nodules, soffit or flaky particles, shale, alkali, salts, organic matter loam mica or other deleterious substances and shall be approved by the Engineer. The maximum size of particles shall be limited to 5 mm (about 3/16"). If the fine aggregate contains more than 4 per cent of clay, dust or silt, it shall be washed.




157

The fineness modulus shall not exceed 3.00. The fineness modulus shall not exceed 1.6 IS: 2116 - 1980 shall generally apply for sand for plaster. The fine aggregate should be stacked carefully on a clean, hard surface so that it will not get mixed up with deleterious foreign materials.

1.18.4.3.2 Scaffolding,

Scaffolding shall be erected with steel sections or pipes of adequate strength so as to be safe for construction operations. The SI shall take all measures to ensure the safety of the work and working people. Any instructions of the Engineer in this respect shall also be complied with. The SI shall be entirely responsible for any damage to properly or injury to persons resulting from ill erected scaffolding, defective ladders and materials or otherwise arising out of his default in this respect. Proper scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy approach to every part of the work. Overhead work shall not be allowed.

1.18.4.3.3 Tools and Accessories

Tools and accessories used in plaster work shall conform to IS: 1630. All tools shall be cleaned by scrapping and washing at the end of each day's work or after use. Metal tools shall be cleaned after each operation. All tools shall be examined to see that they are thoroughly cleaned before plastering is begun.

1.18.4.3.4 Program of work in relation to plastering

The program of other building operations before, during and after plastering shall be according to the instructions contained in clause 9 of IS: 1661.

1.18.4.3.5 General Precaution in plastering

All general precautions as specified in IS. 1661, Clause 9, shall be taken and preparation of the background shall be done as laid down in IS: 1661, Clause 13. Care shall be taken to see that other parts of the work or adjacent works are not damaged while plastering.

1.18.4.3.6 Preparatory work

All joints in the face work that is to be plastered shall be raked out to depth equal to not less than the width of the joints or as directed by the Engineer. The raking shall be done taking care not to allow by chipping of masonry. In new work the raking out shall be done when the mortar in the joints is still green. Smooth surfaces of concrete, old plaster, etc. must be suitably roughened to provide necessary bond for the plaster. All dirt, soot, oil paint or any other material that might interfere with satisfactory bond shall be removed. In the case of stone masonry, scrubbing on the walls to receive the plaster shall not be more than 12 mm (1 ½"). The surface to be plastered shall be cleaned and scrubbed with fresh water and kept wet for 6 hours prior to plastering. It shall be kept damp during the progress of the work. The plastering shall not be commenced unless the preparatory work is passed in writing by the Engineer. In hand mixed mortar, cement and sand in the special proportions shall be thoroughly mixed dry on a clean impervious platform. Fresh and clean water as specified above shall be added gradually and thoroughly mixed to form a stiff plastic mass of uniform color so that, each particle of sand shall be completely covered with a film of wet cement. The water cement ratio may be as under or as directed by the Engineer. Machine mixed mortar shall be prepared in an approved mixer. Water cement ratio shall be as per hand mixed mortar. The mortar so prepared shall be within 30 minutes of adding water should be




158

used in the work. The mortar remaining unused after that period mortar which has partially hardened or is otherwise damaged shall not be re-tempered or remixed. It shall be destroyed or thrown away.

1.18.4.3.7 Gauges

Patches of plaster 15cm x 15cm shall be put on about 3 m apart as gauges to ensure even plastering

in one plane.

1.18.4.3.8 Workmanship

Plastering: In all plaster work the mortar shall be firmly applied with somewhat more than the required thickness and well pressed into the joints and on the surface and rubbed and levelled with a flat wooden rule to give required thickness. Long straight edges shall be freely used to give perfectly plane and even surface. All corners must be finished to their true angles or rounded as directed by the Engineer. The surface shall be finished to plane or curved surface as shown on the plan or directed by the Engineer, and shall present a neat appearance. The mortar shall adhere to the masonry surface intimately when set and there should be no hollow sound when struck. Cement plastering should be done in squares or strips as directed. Plastering shall be done from top downward.

First or Backing Coat The first coat of the specified thickness shall be applied as described above. The subsequent coat shall be applied after this coat has been allowed to set for 3 to 5 days depending upon weather conditions. The surface shall not be allowed to dry during this period.

Plastering to Ceiling Projecting burrs of mortar formed due to the gaps at joints in shuttering shall be removed. The surface shall be scrubbed clean with wire brushes. In addition concrete surface shall be poke marked with a pointed tool at spacing of not more than 50 mm centers, the pokes being made not less than 3 mm deep, to ensure a proper key for the plaster. The mortar shall be washed off and surface cleaned of all oil, grease etc., and well wetted before the plaster is applied.

1.18.4.4 MESH TO WALLS:

1.18.4.4.1 Netlon Mesh

Single layer “Netlon” Mesh (Diamond) of HDPE 105 gms/Sqm, 300 mm wide shall be provided at junctions of brick masonry and concrete members to be plastered and other locations with overlap of 150 mm on either sides of the junction, properly stretched and nailed, ensuring equal thickness/width of plaster on both sides of the mesh.

1.18.4.4.2 GI Plaster Mesh

Single layer of GI expanded metal mesh of 0.35 mm nominal thickness and 125 mm width shall be provided at junctions of brick masonry and concrete members to be plastered and other locations with equal overlap on either sides of the junction, properly stretched and nailed, ensuring equal thickness/width of plaster on both sides of the mesh.

1.18.4.4.3 PVC Plaster Mesh

PVC Plaster mesh should be made from Polypropylene products and should possess good chemical and heat resistance. They should be semi rigid with good impact strength, appearance and are easily welded. The thickness of mesh to be 0.9mm




159

1.18.5 GYPSUM PLASTER AND POP PUNNING

(Base coat), is a gypsum based material in a handy application can be applied over any normal background in not more than one coat, depending on evenness or the back ground. Smooth finish and good impact strength are its virtue. Gypsum plaster base coat plaster is a calcium sulphate hemihydrates plaster with additives including light weight aggregate to improve plasters handling workability and application. It attains early strength and is free from shrinkage cracks. The thickness of the plaster should be a maximum of 13 mm on uneven background but should not exceed 10 mm or less than 5 mm on a level and even background. The setting time of plaster is approximately 30 minutes after the application, depending upon suction of background. The setting progresses evenly and gradually until the surface is hard enough to receive a final stroke of a trowel, at approximately 45 to 60 minutes. The coverage is approximately 65 to 75 Sqm per 1000 kg at 13 mm thickness. For application of gyp-plaster/POP Punning, the wall is first marked vertically at 1220 mm centers, then checked with straight edge, or line (preferably aluminum square tube) centers to find the high spots which are used as guide for level to be set. The background should be suitably wetted with a brush 5-10 minutes before plastering to displace the trapped air and for a good plaster contact with the surface. Four points (by putting plaster with flat surface) are fixed in level and plumb to each corner of the wall to determine the thickness of the plaster required to be done. 40 mm wide strips of plaster are fixed. Then the points are applied vertically, in level and plumb of both ends of the wall. These vertical strips are then made with plaster at even 1220 (or 1550 mm) centers on the entire area of the wall, to ensure level and plumb of the strips, to be in line. The plaster is applied to surface of the wall with a trowel to required thickness and finish the surface by setting straight edge (sq. tube) horizontally by them placing on the vertical strips already fixed above, with firm pressure. A tight coat is applied then turned back with the same batch material to fill out to required thickness. A feather edge should be used to straighten the plaster to a reasonable plane, whilst at the same time filling in any slacks or hollows when the plaster has stiffened sufficiently, further ruling out the feather edge is necessary to achieve a flat surface. As the plaster stiffens progressively, further flattening and paring should be carried out with a spatula. When the plaster is sufficiently formed, the surface should be soaked lightly with a sponge float and light application of water if necessary to raise the flat and bring the surface to a suitable condition for finishing. Closing in with the trowel should commence as soon as plaster starts to set, followed by a final trowel at the appropriate time. Over polishing should not be done at any cost. Decoration and final finish should be delayed until the plaster work has dried out thoroughly.

Precautions:

i. Tools and water used in mixing must be clean and free from set plaster and other impurities. ii. Set plaster shortens the setting time and thus reduces the strength of plaster which sets. iii. Surfaces should be protected from weather and should be reasonably wetted 5-10 minutes before

plastering so that the plaster holds on the background satisfactorily. iv. Fittings and plugging of all kinds should be done before proceeding to plaster. v. Openings, chases or other apertures for cable conduits and other’s should be cut before plastering. vi. Background to be plastered should be thoroughly brushed with broom to remove dust and loose

mortar. vii. Once a mix has started to set, it should not be re-tempered neither should be a fresh gauging be mixed

with an old one.

Background surface should be reasonably dry and protected from the weather. The suitability of a particular background for plastering should be considered in relation to its length, suction, bonding properties, shrinkage or thermal movement characteristics, water and soluble salt content. The high




160

suction of certain backgrounds (like concrete block masonry) should be adjusted by sprinkling water. Plaster is not supposed to isolate dampness and they are not suitable for use in continuously damp or humid conditions. During application of Gyplaster in hot or dry conditions, care should be taken to ensure that rapid loss of water is avoided. The reason is that Gyplaster requires a proportion of the mixing water in order to set and achieve full strength. If the water is dried off too rapidly then the strength of the plaster will be impaired. Once set and fully dry, it is suitable for use in situation where the inside temperature is 50 degree Celsius maximum.

1.18.6 FLOOR FINISHES

1.18.6.1 SCOPE

These Specifications covers flooring, skirting, dado or cladding works using different types of stone/

slabs/ tiles as detailed hereunder:

1.18.6.2 GENERAL

The provision of the latest revisions of the following IS Codes shall form a part of this specification to the extent they are relevant:

IS: 269 Specification for ordinary, rapid hardening and low beat Portland cement.

IS: 383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete

IS: 777 Specification for glazed earthenware tiles.

IS: 1200 Part XI

Method of measurements for Building and Civil Engg. Works, paving, floor finishes, dado and skirting.

IS: 1237 Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles.

IS: 1443 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles.

IS-. 2541 Code of practice for use of lime concrete' in buildings.

IS: 2571 Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring

IS: 10067 Material Constants in Building Work

Other I.S Codes not specifically mentioned here, but pertaining to Floor Finishes form part of these

specifications.

1.18.6.3 INDIAN PATENT STONE FLOORING. a) Materials

Cement concrete: The cement concrete shall generally conform to specifications for ordinary concrete. The coarse aggregates shall be carefully selected, sufficiently tough and hard stone pieces broken in a manner that will provide particles of approximately cubical shape affording good interlocking. The fine aggregate shall consist of properly graded particles. The proportion of mix shall be M15. The least amount of mixing water that will produce a workable mix and will allow finishing without excessive trovelling shall be used.




161

b) Workmanship:

The sub-grade in all cases shall be formed to proper levels and slopes, well compacted and cured. The top surface shall be kept slightly rough. The surface of the sub-grade shall be cleaned off all loose materials and moistened immediately before laying the concrete floor. The edge of each panel into which the floor is divided should be supported by flat bars of steel or wood duly oiled to prevent sticking. Their depth shall be the same as that proposed for the finished floor as mentioned in the item. The bars should be removed before filling in the adjoining panels. At least 48 hours shall elapse before the concreting in the adjacent bays is commenced. The concrete shall be laid immediately after mixing. While being placed the concrete shall be vigorously sliced and spaded with suitable tools to prevent formation of voids or honey comb pockets. The concrete shall be brought to the specified levels by means of a heavy straight edge resting on the side forms and drawn ahead with a sawing motion in combination with a series of lifts and drops alternating with small lateral shifts. While concreting the adjacent bays care shall be taken to ensure that the edges of previously laid bays are not broken by careless or hard tamping. Immediately after laying the concrete, the surface shall be inspected for high or low spots and any needed correction made up by adding or removing the concrete. After striking off the surfaces to the required grade concrete shall be compacted with a wooden float. The blows shall be fairly heavy in the beginning but as consolidation takes place, light rapid strokes shall be given to complete the ramming. The floating shall be followed by steel trovelling after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess of fine material from working to the surface. The finish shall be brought to a smooth and even surface free from defects and blemishes and tested with straight edges. No dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be sprinkled directly on the surface of the concrete to absorb moisture or to stiffen the mix. After the concrete has been thoroughly rammed and has dried sufficiently to allow rendering to be worked up, surface shall be rendered with a thin coat of 1:1 cement mortar with fine sand and uniformly floated. If so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, approved mineral color pigment conforming to appendix-B of IS 657 shall be added to the cement mortar to give the required color and shade to the flooring. When the cement mortar rendering is sufficiently stiff, lines shall be marked on it with strings or by any other device to give the appearance of tiles 30 x 30 cm or of any other size laid diagonally or square as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The junctions of floor and walls shall be rounded off if so directed, without any extra payment. After the concrete in the bays has set, the joints of the panels shall be filled with cement cream or with suitable bitumastic compound as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Vertical edge of the bays shall be neatly marked on the surface of the concrete with a pointed trowel after filling the joints. Finishing: When the rendering is somewhat stiff, neat cement may be sprinkled on sparingly through a paper pot on the surface and rubbed lightly to give smooth polished ordinary cement colored surface. If colored flooring is required by the Engineer-in-Charge the approved colored cement shall be used. Surface shall be protected from direct sun when it is green. Curing: Curing shall start on the next day after finishing and shall be continued for 14 days.

c) Cement Concrete Floor With Metallic Hardener Topping

The top surface shall be roughened with brushes while the concrete is still green and the forms shall be kept projecting up 12mm. Over the concrete surface to receive the metallic hardening compound topping. Metallic concrete hardener topping shall consist of 12mm thick layer of cement hardener of mix 1:2 (1 cement hardener: 2 stone aggregate 6mm nominal size by volume). The metallic concrete hardening compound of approved quality is mixed in the ratio of 1:4 (1 metallic concrete hardener: 4 cement by weight). Concrete hardener shall be fry mixed with cement and then with stone aggregate. The mixture by adding water so obtained shall be laid in 12mm




162

thickness after putting cement slurry on cement concrete under-layer but within 2 to 4 hours of laying the under-layer. The surface shall be finished smooth and true to slope with steel floats. 3. RCC Floor Slab this shall be of RCC 1:2:4 nominal mix (M15 grade) of thickness 130mm or as indicated otherwise. The slab shall be reinforced with 8 mm MS bars at 200mm. Spacing both ways. The water cement ratio shall be adjusted suitably to provide a Slump of not more than 35mm. The flooring shall be laid in continuous panels of about 3 meter width dummy joints at every 6 meter length and full depth transverse expansion joints at every 30 to 40 meters. The expansion joints shall be filled with compressible pre-molded joint filler such as Choksi or other approved make. The floor slab shall be laid in a workmanlike manner by workers skilled in this trade. Proper slopes and levels as indicated shall be maintained. Shuttering to sides of panels shall be of steel channels only. Concrete shall be vibrated after pouring with needle type vibrators. The work shall be measured and paid for as per IS 1200 inclusive of form work. Reinforcement shall be measured and paid for separately.

1.18.6.4 Marble Stone Slab / Granite Stone Slab/Limestone Flooring

1.18.6.4.1 Material

Machine cut marble stone / granite stone slabs shall be of 20, 25, 30, thickness as specified in the item description. Color shall be uniform and the slabs free from all defects. Tiles used at site shall be machine-cut. The slabs shall be made from selected stock, which are hard, sound, homogeneous and dense in texture and free from flaws, angles and edges shall be true, square, and free from chipping and surface shall be plane. The slabs shall preferably to machine cut the required dimensions. Tolerance of +- 5mm in dimensions and +- 2mm in thickness will be allowed. In machine-cut tiles, edges shall be protected from any damage in transit. No breakage shall be permitted. All edges shall be sharp, perfectly rectangular. Edges shall be pencil-rounded and polished for exposed corners and faces.

At its thinnest part, no stone shall be thinner than 25 mm. The flagstones shall be hard, sound, durable and wear resistant. Uniformity of size shall generally be maintained for the flags used in any one room. The stone flags shall be without any soft veins cracks or flows and shall have a uniform color. They shall have even natural surfaces free from broken flakes on top and shall be true and square to ensure uniform width of joint. Samples of stone slabs to be used shall be got approved by the Engineer and the slabs to be used shall conform to the approved sample.

The slabs would be cut by Gang saw and the lubricant for cutting will be water only. Multiple Blade cutters should be used for cutting large sizes/ blocks. Polishing /Honing should be done by ‘21 Head polisher’ Packing of stones - Packaging should be done with following steps: a) Base will be wooden planks. b) Over it, there would be Thermocol sheet. c) Vertically, perimeter will be a wooden box d) First sheet of Thermocol sheet would be put. e) Stone slab will be placed vertically f) Thermocol sheet would be put on the other side of slab g) Another stone slab would be placed. Quantities/lots have to be blocked based on the following parameters: a) Color Consistency b) Tonal Range c) Cutting direction (it should be along the length)




163

1.18.6.4.2 Bedding

Bedding shall be of cement-sand-mortar mix in a ratio of 1:4 unless specified otherwise in the BOQ/drawings. The base of cement or lime concrete shall be laid and compacted to a reasonably true plain surface and to the required slopes and level. The amount of water added shall be the minimum necessary to give just sufficient plasticity for laying and satisfactory bedding. Before spreading mortar, the sub-floor or base shall be cleaned off all dirt, scum or laitance and of loose material and then well wetted without forming any pools of water on the surface. In case of R.C.C floors, the top shall be left a little rough. The mortar shall then be evenly and smoothly spread over so much area as will be covered with slabs within half an hour. The thickness of the mortar bedding shall not be less than 12 mm and not more than 25 mm.

1.18.6.4.3 Laying

Laying of marble /granite stone slab flooring shall be as follows:- Before laying, the stone slab shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water. Neat cement grout

(pigmented to match the shade of the stone slab) of honey like consistency shall be spread on the mortar bed over as much areas as could be covered with the slabs. Each stone slab shall be gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is firmly and properly bedded. If there is a hollow sound on gentle tapping of the slabs such slabs shall be removed and reset properly. The joints shall be as thin as possible and limited to 2mm at the maximum. The stone slab shall be laid so as to give continuous parallel long joints with cross joints at right angles to them. The edges of the adjoining slabs shall be in one plane. Where the slabs cover open edges of floor or window sills the edges shall be neatly rounded off.

Laying shall start after due consideration is given to following points and approved by the Engineer. Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as given in the description of the item. The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 25 mm and the thickness at any place under the slab shall be not less than 12 mm. The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Joint thickness shall not be more than 1 mm.

1.18.6.4.4 Polishing and Finishing

The day after the tiles are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout with a wire brush or trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey or white cement mixed with or without pigment to match the shape of the topping of the wearing layer of the tiles. The same cement slurry shall be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat with a view to protect the surface from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on the surface. The floor shall then be kept wet for a minimum period of 7 days. The surface shall thereafter be grounded evenly with machine fitted with coarse grade grit block (No. 60). Water shall be used profusely during grinding. After grinding the surface shall be thoroughly washed to remove all grinding mud, cleaned and mopped. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey or white cement, mixed with or without pigment to match the color of the topping of the wearing surface in order to fill any pin hole that appear. The surface shall be again cured. The second grinding shall then be carried out with machine fitted with fine grade grit block (No. 120).




164

The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks (No. 320) shall be carried out the day after the second grinding described in the preceding Para or before handing over the floor, as ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. For small areas or where circumstances so require, hand grinding/polishing with hand grinder may be permitted in lieu of machine polishing after laying. For hand polishing the following carborundum stones, shall be used: 1st grinding — coarse grade stone (No. 60) Second grinding — medium grade (No. 80) Final grinding — fine grade (No. 120) In all other respects, the process shall be similar as for machine polishing. After the final polish, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface at the rate of 33 gm per square meter sprinkled with water and rubbed hard with a ‘namdah’ block (pad of woolen rags). The following day the floor shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried with a soft cloth and finished clean. If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced, properly jointed and polished. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

1.18.6.4.5 Measurement shall be done in square meters. Steps and risers for specified width and height shall be measured in running meters or as detailed in BOQ. Rates shall include costs for all labour, material, cutting, dressing, polishing of exposed faces and edges, wastage etc. including dry laying in pattern, providing dividing strips, special cut pieces of various sizes to create the pattern as shown in the drawing and polishing to required standard etc. No extras shall be permitted on any account.

Coating:

Before laying all limestones/Marbles/Italian Marble and Granite exposed to external agencies to be treated with UV resistant, water resistant coat, fungus resistant coats having low VOC and all laying and applying specifications as per manufacturer’s specifications

1.18.6.5 MARBLE STONE / OTHER STONE SLAB FLOORING FOR Treads

The method of laying, bedding etc. for marble / other stone flooring in treads shall be similar to that for marble stone slab / granite stone slab flooring as specified in 4.0 above. Chamfering/Bull nosing of the treads shall be done as mentioned in the BOQ. All edges after rounding/chamfering will be machine mirror polished as directed.

1.18.6.6 SKIRTING / DADO OR CLADDING OF POLISHED STONE SLAB

The backing for skirting / dado or cladding shall be cement plastered mentioned in the item, 12 mm to 20 mm thick and this plastering shall be done in a single coat. Final polishing may be done by rubbing. The top of skirting or dado shall be jointed neatly with the plaster above as directed. The joints between the two slabs shall be filled with neat white cement and matching colored pigment grout of appropriate consistency. All cutting joints to be in 450 machine cut, only for the staircase

1.18.6.7 Joints in Flooring 1.18.6.7.1 Joints

Joints shall be provided in flooring to take care of expansion and contraction due to variations in temperature. In addition, construction joints shall also be provided in case of compulsory break in continuity of slabs due to the close of day's work and the commencement of the same the next day. The location and type of joints provided shall be as shown in the drawing or as directed by Engineer-in-charge. The edge of the slab at all joints shall be rounded with an edging tool having




165

radius not greater than 6mm. It should be carefully ensured by proper vibration, that concrete at joints is free from honeycomb.

1.18.6.7.2 Transverse Joints.

Transverse joints shall be expansion, contraction or construction joints and shall be provided as shown in the drawing or as directed by Engineer-in-charge. They shall be at right angles to longitudinal joint surface of the floor. Contraction and expansion joints shall be continuous from edge to edge.

1.18.6.7.3 Transverse Expansion Joints:

These joints shall be provided at an interval or spacing of 30 m. They shall be pre molded type and shall extend the entire width of the pavement and form sub-base to 25mm below the surface of the pavement. The gap width for this type of Joint shall be approximately 20 to 25mrn. The filler shall be held accurately in place during the placing of the concrete by a metal bulkhead, a metal channel cap or other approved method, Load transfer is effected through a system of reinforcement called dowel bar. Dowel bars are embedded and kept fixed in concrete at one end and is kept free to expand or contract by providing a thin coating of bitumen over it. Metal cap is provided at this end to offer a space of about 25mrn for movement during expansion.

1.18.6.7.4 Transverse Contraction Joints

These joints shall be provided at an interval on spacing of 10m, depending upon the type of aggregates. They shall be placed as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. They shall be constructed by forming in the surface of the slab, a slot not less than 6mm wide and having a depth equal to one fourth depth of the concrete slab. This slot may be formed such as by pushing into concrete a flat bar or the web of a 'T' bar and keeping the slot open or any manner approved by the Engineer-in-charge. It shall be filled flush with top surface by using approved sealant.

1.18.6.7.5 Longitudinal Joints

Longitudinal joints, parallel to longer side of floor slab shall be of plain type and shall be formed by placing the concrete against the faces of the slabs concreted earlier. The faces of the old concrete shall be painted with bitumen before placing fresh concrete. The bar shall be used at longitudinal joints and they shall be of the dimensions and at spacing as shown in drawing or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Tie bars shall be fairly well supported so as not to be displaced during construction operations.

1.18.6.8 Glazed Tile Flooring and Dado

Glazed tiles shall be of best quality, Indian make obtained from approved sources. Glazed tiles shall be pure white or of color as indicated. The tiles shall be sound hard, well and evenly glazed, free from twist, with fine and sharp edges. Different makes of tiles shall be brought for approval and samples of tiles shall be first got approved by the Engineer and all the tiles which shall be used in the work shall strictly conform to the approved sample otherwise all the tiles will be rejected. The surface to be laid for flooring or dado shall be thoroughly hacked; joints of masonry raked cleaned of all mortar scales, concrete lumps, loose materials, etc., and washed to remove mud, dirt, etc., from the surface. Unless and until the surface is approved by the Engineer, the flooring or dado shall not be started. The prepared surface shall be thoroughly drenched with water. The glazed tiles and all specials shall be soaked in water for a minimum period of 6 hours before use.




166

1.18.6.8.1 Flooring:

A bedding of 20 mm thick (unless otherwise specified) cement mortar 1:4 shall be laid evenly to levels or slope as directed. The tiles shall then be laid on the bedding with a backing of thin cement paste. All tiles shall truly and evenly set and pressed in position to obtain a uniform plane surface. The tiles shall be close jointed and all joints shall be uniform and run in perfect straight lines. The joints shall be staggered or continuous as directed. The other specials like, corner angles, elephant foots, bull eyes etc. shall be used at the proper places whenever required and as directed. The entire finished surface shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all cement stains etc. The joints shall be kept wet for 7 days. All joints to be finished with Epoxy grouts as mentioned in the BOQ

1.18.6.8.2 Dado:

The prepared surface shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:3 to get bedding of 12mm thick. The plastered surface shall be even uniform and true to plumb. The tiles shall be fixed in position with a backing of cement paste. All tiles shall be evenly set and pressed in position to a true plane surface. The specifications for workmanship regarding joints, specials, cleaning, pointing, curing etc. shall be exactly similar to tile flooring. The flooring and dado shall be finally cleaned with diluted hydrochloric acid and water to produce a clean white and shining surface. Measurement shall be for the actual area. The dimensions shall be taken on the glazed tiled surface. The rate shall include for all specials such as comer angles, elephant foots, bulls eyes etc. The unit of measurement shall be 1 Sqm. All joints to be finished with Epoxy grouts as mentioned in the BOQ

1.18.6.8.3 Ceramic Tiles /Vitrified tiles

The tiles shall be sound, hard, well and evenly treated, free from twist, with fine and sharp edges. Sample of the tiles shall be first got approved by the Engineer in case of the SI's supply and all the tiles which shall be used in the work shall strictly conform to the approved sample otherwise all the tiles will be rejected. The surface to be laid for the flooring or dado shall be thoroughly hacked, joints of masonry racked, cleaned of all mortar scales, concrete" lumps, loose materials, etc. and washed to remove mud, dirt, etc. from the surface. Unless and until the surface is approved by the Engineer, the flooring and dado shall not be started. The prepared surface shall be thoroughly drenched with water. All joints to be finished with Epoxy grouts as mentioned in the BOQ

1.18.6.8.4 Flooring

A bedding 20 mm thick (unless otherwise specified) of cement mortar 1:3 shall be laid evenly to levels or slope as directed, the tiles shall then be laid on the bedding with a backing of thin cement paste. All tiles shall be truly and evenly set and pressed in position to obtain a uniform plane surface. The tiles shall be closed jointed and ail joints shall be uniform and run in perfect straight lines. Joints shall be filled with matching cement paste. Entire finished surface shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all cement stains, etc. The joints shall be kept wet for 7 days. Epoxy joints can also be used as a substitute for cement paste if mentioned in the BOQ.

When tile flooring is to be laid over the existing flooring without dismantling old flooring it can be laid with adhesive. The old flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned and checked for undulations, if any shall be rectified with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand). Old cement concrete surface shall be hacked and cleaned off to have proper bond with the old surface. High polymer modified quick set tile adhesive (conforming to IS 15477) shall be thoroughly mixed with water and a paste of zero slump shall be prepared so that it can be used within 1.5 to 2 hours. It shall be spread over an area not more than one Sqm at one time. Average thickness of adhesive shall be 3 mm. The adhesive so spread shall be combed using suitable trowel. Tiles shall be pressed firmly in to the position with slight twisting action checking it simultaneously to ensure good contact gently being tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly backed with adjoining tiles. The tiles shall be fixed within 20 minutes of application of adhesive. The surplus adhesive from the joints, surface of the tiles shall be immediately cleaned. The surface of the flooring shall be frequently checked during laying with straight edge of above 2m long so as to attain a true surface with required slope. Where spacer




167

lugs tiles are provided these shall be filled with grout with lugs remaining exposed. Where full size tile cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in floor adjoining to wall shall enter not less than 10 mm under plaster, skirting or dado.

1.18.6.8.5 Dado:-

The prepared surface shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:3 to get a bedding of 12mm thick. The plastered surface shall be even, uniform and true to plumb. The tiles shall be fixed in position with a backing of cement paste or water proof adhesive of approved manufacturer as specified in the item. All tiles shall be evenly set and pressed in position to a true plane surface. The specifications for workmanship shall be exactly similar to tile flooring. The joints shall be filled with matching cement paste or with joint filler material of approved manufacturer as specified in the item.

1.18.6.9 TWIN GRANITE/MARBLE STONE FRAMES

Bedding shall be of grey cement-paste with minimum cement consumption of 0.21 bags per Sqm. Of applied area, unless specified otherwise in the BOQ/drawings. The base of cement shall be compacted to a reasonably true plain surface and to the required and level. The amount of water added shall be the minimum necessary to give just sufficient plasticity for laying and satisfactory bedding. Before spreading paste, the sub- base shall be cleaned off all dirt, scum or laitance and of loose material and then well wetted without forming any pools of water on the surface. The paste shall then be evenly and smoothly spread over so much area as will be covered with slabs within half an hour. The thickness of the paste shall not be less than 6 mm and not more than 12 mm. The joints shall be cleaned and properly grouted with a neat paste of white cement with minimum cement consumption of 0.55 kg per Sqm The proportion of mortar bedding shall be 1:4, unless and otherwise prescribed any other proportion and shall be as per IS 2116-1965, as applicable to non-reinforced masonry work. The adhesion of two slab frames overlay shall be ensured with araldite or approved BAL adhesive.

Laying

Laying of marble /granite stone slab frame shall be as follows:- Before laying, the stone slab shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water. 20mm thick marble slab /

tiles shall be fixed with polymer modified cement adhesive or cement paste (as per BOQ) each stone slab then shall be gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is firmly and properly bedded. If there is a hollow sound on gentle tapping of the slabs such slabs shall be removed and reset properly. The joints shall be as thin as possible and limited to 2mm at the maximum. Unless and until detailed in the BOQ or Drg, exposed edges of window sills/door frames, the edges shall be neatly rounded off.

Laying shall start after due consideration is given to following points and approved by the Engineer. The vertical surface for frame cladding work should be rough, fairly in plumb and in right angles with each other, Concealed plumbing and electric conducting shall be complete before the execution of frame cladding work. Check all the right angles of the corners of bath/W.C. /toilet or pantry area. Please ensure that the plaster is in plumb.

Check the level of the wooden Patti with spirit level before commencing the cladding work. After the frames are laid, surplus cement slurry from the joints shall be cleaned. The following day the joints shall again be cleaned, washed and wire brushed. In case not specified in the Drawing or BOQ, and if the projection is not recommended, 6mm groove to be provided at the junction of the wall and stone frame.

Polishing and grinding shall be completed on the surfaces and edges before the laying of the stone frames. At first the grinding shall be with rough stone of grade 48 to 60. All chips shall be visible and grinding shall be uniform. It shall be cleaned with water. All pin-holes and opened out




168

joints shall be grouted with matching colored cement grouts supplied by the tile manufacturer. It shall be cured for a period of 7 days by keeping it moist.

Second coat cutting/grinding shall be done with carborandum stone of grade 120. The same procedure as for the first coat shall be repeated till curing is completed.

The final cutting/grinding shall be with a fine stone of 220-320 grade and shall be done with ample water. Oxalic acid powder shall be spread 33 gm/Sqm. and polished by machine fitted with Hessian bobs. The floor shall then be washed, cleaned and dried with a soft cloth or linen. They should be hand polished by using rubbing stone.

In case of wax polishing, wax polish shall be applied to the surface. It shall be rubbed with machine. Then clean saw-dust shall be spread over the slab and rubbed with polishing machine. This will remove wax, leaving a glossy surface underneath.

Rates: Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, the rate shall include for the following:

i. All labour, materials (except for SBI supplied ones), equipment, cleaning of the sub-base, laying mortar bed and adhesives, grout, fixing marble slabs as specified above and making up the joints.

ii. Transportation of material / equipment iii. Any cutting and wasting if required iv. Mouldings and edge polishing v. All adhesives, grouts and mastic sealants etc. vi. Curing vii. Cleaning the floor and surrounding areas all stains, etc.

1.18.6.10 Epoxy Coating:-

Epoxy coating should be based on carefully selected solvent less Epoxy resin composition. It should be a 3 component system consisting of base, hardener and hard wearing quartz fillers. It should be self levelling composition and forms a very smooth, attractive hygienic, hard wearing and chemical resistant floor topping. It should provide a joint less flooring making it dust free and is easy to clean because of smooth surface. Chemical Resistant – It should have excellent chemical resistance to most chemicals Wear Resistant – It should provide a tough floor topping to withstand foot and light vehicular traffic.

SURFACE PREPARATION

The long term durability of the applied Epoxy topping is dependent upon the adhesive bond achieved between the flooring material and substrate. It is most important therefore, that substrate surface is correctly prepared prior to application.

Substrate must be of sufficient strength to support loads applied through the topping. New concrete or cementitious substrates should have been placed for at least 28 days and have a moisture content of less than 5% before topping. Before application, the surface to be coated should be free from loose particles, rust, oils, grease or earlier coatings and should be thoroughly dry. After surface is dry, all repair work like sealing of joints, cracks filling of cavities and crevices should be carried out. 5. The self levelling action is localized and does not eradicate irregularities of level present in the original substrate. It is most important, therefore, that adequate surface preparation and repair is undertaken prior to application of flooring systems.

PRIMING To be as per manufacturer’s specifications.

MIXING To be as per manufacturer’s specifications.




169

LAYING Spread the mixture on the floor immediately to the required thickness by means of rollers and

serrated trowels. The floor should be rolled by a spike roller to remove trapped air. The floor shall self-level to uniform color and smoothness.

1.18.6.11 KOTA FLOORING

Kota Stone Slabs

The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness. They shall be of the color indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before starting the work the SI shall get the samples of slabs approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Dressing

Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact with it. The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and plane. The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be 20, 25, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the description of the item. Tolerance of ±2 mm shall be allowed for the thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of ± 5 mm for hand cut slabs and ± 2 mm for machine cut slabs shall be allowed.

Preparation of Surface and Laying Laying

Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as given in the description of the item. The slabs shall be laid in the following manner: Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the average thickness specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and brought to level with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per Sqm. The edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey cement with or without admixture of pigment to match the shade of the Kota slabs as given in the description of the item. The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Polishing and Finishing

The day after the tiles are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout with a wire brush or trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey or white cement mixed with or without pigment to match the shape of the topping of the wearing layer of the tiles. The same cement slurry shall be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat with a view to protect the surface from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on the surface.




170

The floor shall then be kept wet for a minimum period of 7 days. The surface shall thereafter be grounded evenly with machine fitted with coarse grade grit block (No. 60). Water shall be used profusely during grinding. After grinding the surface shall be thoroughly washed to remove all grinding mud, cleaned and mopped. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey or white cement, mixed with or without pigment to match the color of the topping of the wearing surface in order to fill any pin hole that appear. The surface shall be again cured. The second grinding shall then be carried out with machine fitted with fine grade grit block (No. 120).

The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks (No. 320) shall be carried out the day after the second grinding described in the preceding Para or before handing over the floor, as ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge.

For small areas or where circumstances so require, hand grinding/polishing with hand grinder may be permitted in lieu of machine polishing after laying. For hand polishing the following carborundum stones, shall be used: 1st grinding — coarse grade stone (No. 60) Second grinding — medium grade (No. 80) Final grinding — fine grade (No. 120)

In all other respects, the process shall be similar as for machine polishing. After the final polish, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface at the rate of 33 gm per square meter sprinkled with water and rubbed hard with a ‘namdah’ block (pad of woolen rags). The following day the floor shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried with a soft cloth and finished clean. If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced, properly jointed and polished. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet

PANTRY COUNTER 1. Necessary chases to be made in the wall for supporting the backing materials 2. The backing materials should be either 19mm thick marine ply or 25mm thick one side

polished Kota. The backing materials should be suitably inserted in the wall by means of chasing. In case wall supports are not there, a vertical support of either 19mm thick marine ply or 25mm thick one side polished Kota.

3. Approved stone as per BOQ, to be laid on this backing on a bed of cement mortar 1:4, not

exceeding 25mm thick. In case of Corian counter 12mm thick Corian to be fusted on to the ply backing. The cost to also include making cut outs for Corian basin. All edges of the stone to be molded and machine polished. Openings for Counter to be cut in the stone. The cost to include providing and fixing, front facia and band above the counter top of same shade granite. All exposed surfaces of platform to be finished in same granite slab. Necessary cut-outs for sink to be provided and all cut-outs, exposed edges to be half round bull nosed with mirror polished. Cost to also include making necessary cut-outs for taking pipes through counter top.

4. The cost to include storage below counter as per BOQ

1.18.7 PARTITIONS

DOUBLE SKINNED GYPSUM PARTITIONS

1.18.7.1 Dry wall Partitions

Frame work:-




171

1. which includes 48mm Gypsteel Ultra C studs (0.50mm thick having one flange of 34 mm and another flange of 36 mm made of completely ribbed GI steel) which is placed at 600mm center to center vertically, in 50mm Gypsteel Ultra floor and ceiling channels (0.50mm thick having equal flanges of 32mm made of completely ribbed GI steel). Rate shall be also inclusive Gypsteel fixing channel of 99mm width (0.9mm thick having two flanges of 9.5mm each) has to be provided at the horizontal joints of the two boards screw fixed to the studs using metal to metal flat head screws. The GI framework to be continued right up to the True ceiling and which is anchored to the floor and true ceiling using suitable anchor fasteners or metal screws with PVC plugs. All GI sections used in the partition frame should confirm to IS 277-1992 and should have galvanization 120 GSM both side included (9 microns each side thickness), with tolerance of sections conforming to IS 1852-1987. The cost to also include necessary strengthening of GI frames to take the additional load of ply paneling at locations as shown in the drawings.

First skin on either side of frame work:-

Can be either First skin of partition which includes tapered edge 12.5mm thick Gypboard (conforming to IS 2095-1982 and 2542-1981) screw fixed with Gypsteel (or equivalent make) drywall screws of 25mm at 300mm centers to either side of existing framework studs. Necessary cut-outs shall be provided for taking of supply and return air ducts/openings which shall be neatly finished with PU sealant of approved make after fixing of ducts thereby leaving no gaps. The layer should be finished so as to take on second skin in Gypsum/Ply/MDF directly. The first skin of Gypboard to be carried right up to the true ceiling.

OR

First Skin of partition can also be which includes tapered edge 12.5mm thick Gyproc (MR) grade (conforming to BS 1230 part 1) screw fixed with approved drywall screws of 25mm at 300mm centers to each side of existing framework studs. Necessary cut-outs shall be provided for switches which shall be neatly finished with PU sealant of approved make after fixing of the same thereby leaving no gaps. Finally square and tapered edges of the boards are to be jointed and finished so as to have a flush look which includes filling and finishing with Gyproc Jointing compound, Gyproc Joint Paper tape and two coats of Drywall Top Coat (as per recommended practices of manufacturer) or equivalent. Ceramic tiles up to 32kg/sqms and 12.5mm can be fixed using suitable adhesive. Water proofing & sealants manufactured by others shall be applied as per the manufacturers' recommendations. Mode of measurement to be running length of the Partition of any one side into the height with door deductions

Second Skin: - The second skin can be either Gypsum Board or Ply/MDF.

Gypboard:- Second Skin of Partition which includes tapered edge 12.5mm thick Gypboard

(conforming to IS 2095-1982 and 2542-1981) screw fixed with 35mm dry wall screw at 300mm c/c to Existing first skin of Partition. Care should be taken that the joint should be staggered to avoid leakage. Finally square and tapered edges of the boards are to be jointed and finished so as to have a flush look which includes filling and finishing with Jointing compound, Joint Paper tape and two coats of Drywall Top Coat (as per recommended practices of Saint- Gobain India Gypsum or equivalent). All the perimeters and penetration through the partition should be fire stopped using suitable in tumescent fire sealant. Angle bead has to be used at the external angles to get straight line and finish and protection from impacts. Edge bead has to be used to protect the exposed edges of Gypboard.

The second layer of Gypsum shall be stopped 150mm above false ceiling in that area. The partition should be finished so as to take on wall paper/paint directly by applying suitable base coats, prime coats, etc. complete. Necessary cut-outs shall be provided wherever required which shall be neatly finished with PU sealant of approved make after the intended work is complete thereby leaving no gaps.

Ply:- Which includes 12mm/8mm thick commercial ply screw fixed with wooden screws to Existing first skin of Partition. Care should be taken that the joint should be staggered to avoid leakage. The ply to be pasted with approved shade and sample 1.5mm thick laminate/4mm thick veneer (As per BOQ). The junction between the ply panel and Gypboard is to be finished with SS/Aluminum grooves/hat sections as shown in the Drawings or mentioned in the BOQ. This second skin of




172

plywood shall be stopped 75mm above false ceiling in that area. Necessary cut-outs shall be provided wherever required which shall be neatly finished with PU sealant of approved make after the intended work is complete thereby leaving no gaps.

Skirting : - should be100mm high consisting of 12mm/8mm thick commercial plywood backing fixed

to Gypsum backing and finished in 1.5mm thick approved shade laminate/4mm thick veneer. The skirting to be flushed to surface of wall / partitions in line and level and 6mm wide groove to be made in the wall/ partition at the junction and inclusive of SS/Aluminum (as per drawings) inserted between the groove formed. The strip to be glued to the surface with approved make instant glue. In case we have stone/tile flooring the same to be used. The stone/tile to be stuck to ply by means of approved adhesive.

1.18.7.2 MODULAR GLASS PARTITION

All Frame works used for modular partition to be as per manufacturer’s specifications in Aluminum. The Glass used should be 10mm/12mm thick clear toughened glass of approved make. Fixing details for Glass Partition should be as per the manufacturer’s specifications. Measurements includes the door frame area, no deduction of the door will be done. Rates for Partition should include all glass as per BOQ, clear acoustic sealant to seal the glass to glass joints. The rate should also include the Partition above false ceiling which will be single skinned Gypsum Partition with glass wool insulation, 24 kg per cum, 50mm thick all as per the drawings and Bill of Quantity. Necessary cut-outs shall be provided for taking of supply and return air ducts/openings which shall be neatly finished after fixing of ducts thereby leaving no gaps.

1.18.7.3

All Patch fittings to be of approved make in Brushed finish Stainless Steel. The top, bottom patch, over

head, corner lock etc. shall all be as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Rates for Partition should include all patches required, glass as per BOQ, clear acoustic sealant to seal the glass to glass joints. The rate should also include the Partition above false ceiling which will be single skinned Gypsum Partition with glass wool insulation, 24/32/48 kg per cum, 50mm thick all as per the drawings and Bill of Quantity. Necessary cut-outs shall be provided for taking of supply and return air ducts/openings which shall be neatly finished after fixing of ducts thereby leaving no gaps.

1.18.8 PANELLING AND BOXING

1.18.8.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELLING

The acoustic boards to be used for paneling should be of approved make. They shall be cladded with fabric. The installation work of this Section shall be performed by an authorized applicator, licensed by the manufacturer. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements, as indicated, and industry standards applicable to the work. The technical details for the board to be as per the following

Tech Primer

No Description Materials Specifications

1 Thickness (mm) As per BOQ

2 Size (mm) Width 600 / Length up to 2400

3 Core Sound Smooth / SoundSynth




173

Tech Primer

No Description Materials Specifications

4 Nominal Density (Kg/m3) 400 to 500

5 Weight (Kg/m2) up to 25

6 Edge Square with long edges Kerfed

7 NRC / STC Up to 0.9

8 Fire Class I

9 Moisture Resistance (%) RH 90

10 Light Reflectance (%) As per manufacturer’s specifications

11 Warranty 10 years

12 Installation As per manufacturer’s specifications

13 Color As per Architect’s sample

14 Maintenance As per manufacturer’s specifications

FABRIC Fabric should be non-woven, needle-punched, chemically-free, thermally-bonded, multi-purpose acoustical

fabric which is highly durable with exceptional performance and has been specially developed for the Acoustic panels.

The following are the specifications for the fabric • 100% polyester • Safe, non-toxic • Recyclable, environmentally-friendly • UV stable - resistant to fading • Moisture-resistant - rot-resistant, stain resistant • Durable - infinite product life • Does not fray or zipper when cut • Density 400 gsm

1.18.8.2 PANELLING AND BOXING

Frame work: - The timber shall be planed smooth and accurate to the full dimensions, rebates, rounding,

mouldings, as shown in drawings, before assembly. Grounds shall be provided where so specified. These shall consist of second class T.W. or any other wood as mentioned in the BOQ, with dimensions as per BOQ, fixed over the wall, with 50mm long wood screws. The rate should include a coating of anti-termite solution on all unexposed surfaces of wooden frame work.

Plywood paneling/Boxing: The thickness of the panel shall be as per the BOQ. The plywood panels to be finished in approved make

and shade 1.5mm thick laminate or 4mm thick veneer with grains running along the longer dimensions of the panel. The finished work must be within a tolerance of ± 1 mm in thickness may be accepted. When made from more than one piece, the pieces shall be joined with a continuous tongue and groove joint glued together. The junction with dis-similar materials should have either a stainless steel or Aluminum Patti as per drawings. All veneer to be melamine polished in at least 3 coats. The dimensions mentioned in the drawings should be followed. Any other materials like




174

plywood, particle board, asbestos sheeting, etc. may also be fixed over framework on walls, as shown in drawings, including necessary grooves, etc.

Measurements: Length and breadth shall be measured correct to cm. Wall paneling such as T.W. paneling, block board,

plain lining, plain skirting each shall be measured separately in square meter nearest to two places of decimal. The molded work shall be measured in running length. ONLY SEEN AREA IS TO BE PAID. ANY PART WHICH IS HIDDEN IN THE BOXING WILL NOT BE MEASURED AND PAID. The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour required for all the operations described above.

1.18.8.3 MIRROR PANELLING AND TOILET MIRROR

The item includes providing bevelled or plain edges glass mirror with or without frame of size as

mentioned in the schedule including fixing. MATERIAL: Glass mirror shall be 6mm thick plate glass unless specified with silvered polish and protective

coat of copper sulphate. Backing shall be provided with marine plywood of thickness as specified in the BOQ. Edges to be bevelled or machine polished as per BOQ

FIXING: Glass mirror shall be fixing to proper line and level as indicated in drawing with Mirror studs or

mirror head screws or 3M tapes as per BOQ, and making good the wall to the original condition after fixing the glass mirror etc.

THE RATE INCLUDES FOR:

1. Glass mirror with plywood backing, all studs, screws, bolts etc. 2. All necessary labour, material and the use of tools.

MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit square meter of each, unit of glass mirror

as specified in the schedule. PELMETS

Material: MDF or Ply of thickness as specified in the BOQ shall have best approved quality as directed. Workmanship: The work shall be done as per drawing and description given in the item of work the wooden planks shall be planed smooth and even on the exposed surface. The pelmet shall be fixed to level by means of 10 cms long x 25 mm x 3 mm M. S. flat brackets lent in the form of angle and wooden plug fixed in the wall using wooden screws. For pelmet up to 1.5 meter long two such brackets shall be used and additional bracket provided for longer pelmet at the rate of one per meter length extra.

Mode of measurements and payment: Pelmets shall be measured in running meters along the sides and

face. The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter

1.18.9 SHUTTERS AND DOORS

WOOD WORK AND JOINERY

1.18.9.1 SCOPE

The specifications refer to wood work in general including carpentry and joinery work in the building.




175

1.18.9.2 GENERAL

The provision of the latest revisions of the following I.S. codes shall form a part of these specifications. IS 205 Specifications for non-ferrous metal butt hinges IS 287 Recommendation for maximum permissible moisture content of timber used for different

purposes. IS 303 Specification for plywood for general purpose. IS 362 Specification for parliamentary hinges IS 419 Specification for putty for the use on window frames IS 883 Code of practice for design of structural timber in building. IS 1003 Specification for Timber panelled and glazed shutters Part II - Window and ventilator

shutters. IS1200 Method of measurement of building and Civil Part XXI Engineering Works - Wood Work

and Joinery. IS:1341 Specification for steel butt hinges IS:1658 Specification for Fiber Hard Boards IS: 1761 Specification for transparent sheet glass for glazing and framing purposes. IS: 3087 Specification for wood particle boards (medium density for structural timber in building) Other I.S. codes not specifically mentioned here, but pertaining to wood work and joinery form part of these

specifications.

1.18.9.3 MATERIALS 1.18.9.3.1 Sawn Timber

Timber is classified as under : (i) Teak wood (ii) Deodar wood (iii) Non-coniferous timbers other than teak (iv) Coniferous timber other than deodar. The timber shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or streaks on the exposed

edges, splits and cracks. The timber shall be graded as first grade and second grade on the basis of the permissible defects in the timber. For both the grades, knots should be avoided over a specified limit.

Teak Wood (Tectona Grandis)

It is of outstanding merit in retention of shape and durability. The heart wood is one of the most naturally durable woods of the world. It usually remains immune to white ant attack and insect attack for very long periods. It is, however, not always immune from fungus attack (rot). Taken as a whole, good quality teak is very durable, it is relatively easy to saw and work. It can be furnished to a fare surface and takes polish well. It is generally used for making furniture and all important timber construction.

Superior Class Teak Wood such as Balarsha, Malabar and Dandeli : Individual hard and sound knot shall not be more than 12 mm in diameter and the aggregate area of all the knots shall not exceed one half per cent of the area of the piece. It shall be close grained.

Deodar Wood (Cedrus Deodars)

It is the strongest of the Indian conifers. Its weight and strength is 20% per cent less than teak. It is easy to saw and works to a smooth finish. It is not, however, a suitable wood for polish or paint work as the oil in the wood and especially near knots, always seeps through such finishes and discolours them. It is used for house building, furniture and other construction work. It is also suitable for beams, floors, boards, posts, window frames and light furniture etc.

Sal Wood (Shoera Robusta)

Sal is about 30 per cent heavier than teak, 50 per cent harder, and about 20 to 30 per cent stronger. In shock resistance it is about 45 per cent above teak. Its heart wood is a naturally durable wood, and




176

usually remains immune to attack by white ants and fungi for a long period, while its sapwood is very perishable and should not be used. Well dried sal is not a really easy wood to saw and work. It is a rough constructional wood than a carpentry timber. No individual hard and sound knot shall exceed 25 mm in diameter and the aggregate area of all the knots shall not exceed 1% of the area of the piece. It can be used for a variety of purposes, such as for beams, rafters, flooring, piles, bridging, tool handles, picker arms and tent pegs, etc.

Kail Wood (Pinus Roxburghie)

Kail Wood is not a very durable wood. But it is easy to saw and work and usually very popular in workshops. It can be brought to a fine smooth surface, but is more suitable for paint and enamel finishes than for polish work. It is useful for joinery works, constructional work, light furniture and house fitments All wood to be FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) certified Forests certified to be in compliance with the standards endorsed by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC). Products milled or otherwise altered by manufacturers certified to be in compliance with the standards endorsed by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).

1.18.9.3.2 Glazing materials

Glass Panels: Unless otherwise specified, glass panes used in glazed or panelled and glazed shutters, shall be of good quality glass of thickness not less than 2 mm for panes up to 0.1 Sqm in area not less than 3 mm for glass panes of area larger than 0.1 Sqm with a tolerance of 0.2 mm in both cases. The glass shall be free from flaws such as specks, bubbles, smoke waves, air holes, etc. and shall conform to the relevant IS : 1761. Unless otherwise specified, glass panes used in shutters of bath room and lavatories shall be frosted and of thickness as mentioned above and shall be free from any flaws. Where so specified, special quality glass such as plate glass, pin heads glass, wired glass, float glass etc. shall be used. They shall conform to relevant IS standards as regards quality.

Putty for glazing in wooden frames of doors and windows Putty shall be prepared by mixing one part of white lead with three parts of finely powdered chalk and then adding boiled linseed oil and mixing the whole thing into a homogeneous stiff paste. It shall be free from impurities like dust, grit, etc. and shall conform to IS: 419.

1.18.9.3.3 Fittings

The item of wood work of joinery generally includes fittings such as hinges and screws for fixing of door shutters and is explicitly so mentioned in the item. Hinges - Hinges shall be of iron, brass, aluminum or any other material as specified. They shall present a neat appearance and shall operate smoothly. All hinges shall be of steel and their riveted heads shall be well formed and smooth. Hinges shall be of the type specified and shall conform to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications.

1.18.9.3.4 Framing

Framed woodwork includes all sawing, cutting, planning, jointing framing, supply and use of straps, bolts holdfasts, nails treenails, spikes, screws etc. necessary for framing and fixing. Framing and trussing are to be done in the best possible manner. Holes of correct size shall be drilled before inserting screws. Driving in or starting the screws with hammer is prohibited. All screws shall be dipped in oil before being inserted in the wood. The kind of nails and screws shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

1.18.9.3.5 Scaffolding

The SI shall provide all labour, scaffolding ladders and tackle necessary for hoisting and fixing woodwork in position and afford facilities for its inspection during construction. The SI shall be responsible for the safety of the work, workmen and for any action or compensation that may arise in this connection.




177

1.18.9.3.6 Iron Work

All iron work connected with woodwork which are going to be embedded in masonry shall before erection, receive two coats of hot coal tar. If it is to be painted, it shall be given the first two coats on the ground before being fixed in position and the third coat after erection in position.

1.18.9.3.7 Precautions against Fire

During the progress of work all shavings, cutting and other rubbish shall be cleared away as the work progresses and all precautions shall be taken against fire.

1.18.9.3.8 Inspection

All woodwork shall be inspected and passed by Engineer before being put into actual position. In no case the woodwork shall be painted or otherwise treated before it is inspected and approved by the Engineer. After approval it shall have the primary coat of paint put on or otherwise treated before being fitted in position. The subsequent coats of paint or other finish shall be applied after the woodwork is fixed in position.

1.18.9.3.9 Defective Work

If within three months after the work is completed any undue shrinkage or bad workmanship is discovered the SI shall forthwith replace or refix the same to the satisfaction of the Engineer, without extra charge.

1.18.9.3.10 Moisture Content

Control on moisture content of timber is necessary to ensure its proper utility in various climatic conditions. For specifying the permissible limit of moisture content in the timber the country has been divided into four climatic zones. In each of the zones, maximum permissible limit of moisture content of timber for different uses.

Tolerance on Moisture Content : Average Moisture content of all the samples from a lot shall be within + 3 per cent and moisture content of individual samples within + 5 per cent of maximum permissible moisture content Seasoning of Timber The process of drying timber under controlled conditions is called seasoning of timber. Timber shall be either air seasoned or kiln seasoned and in both cases moisture content of the seasoned timber shall be as specified in Table 9. 2 above unless otherwise specified, air seasoned timber shall be used. Kiln seasoning of timber, where specified, shall be done as per IS 1141 in a plant approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Preservation of Timber Preservative treatment does not improve basic properties of timber but gives varying degree of protection against deterioration due to attacks by fungi, termites, borers and marine organisms. Preservative treatment, where specified, shall be done using Oil type, Organic solvent type or Water-soluble type preservative. Oil type preservatives shall be used if the timber is not required to be polished or painted. Before preservative treatment, the timber shall be sawn and seasoned. All surfaces exposed after treatment, except due to planning, shall be thoroughly brushed with the preservation before jointing. Preservative treatment of timber shall be done as per IS 401 in a plant approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.18.9.4 WORKMANSHIP

1.18.9.4.1 Wood Work, Wrought, Framed and Fixed

General: The work shall be carried out as per detailed drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The wooden members of the frame shall be planed smooth and accurate to the full




178

dimensions. Rebates, rounding, mouldings, etc. as shown in the drawing shall be done before the members are joined into frames. Where wood work is not exposed to view as in the case of frames for false ceiling, however, no planning is required to be done unless specified expressly as rough timber work. Note: The work wrought shall mean 'planed'. Jointing in timber frames must be made carefully and accurately. They shall be strong, neat and shall fit without edging or filling. The joints shall be pinned with hard wood or bamboo pins of 10 to 15 - dia after the members of the frame are pressed together in a suitable vice-mechanism The door and window frame shall have rebate to house the shutters and the depth of such rebate shall be 1.25 cm. Timber for door, window and ventilators frames shall be as specified. Timber shall be sawn in the direction of the grains. All members of a frame shall be of the same species of timber and shall be straight without any warp or bow. Frames shall have smooth, well-planed (wrought) surfaces except the surfaces touching the walls, lintels, sill etc., which may be left clean sawn. Rebates, rounding or moulding shall be done before the members are jointed into frames. The depth of the rebate for housing the shutters shall be 15 mm, and the width of the rebates shall be equal to the thickness of the shutters. A tolerance of ± 2 mm shall be permitted in the specified finished dimensions of timber sections in frames. Wood work shall be painted, oiled, polished or otherwise treated as specified. All portions of timber abutting against masonry or concrete portion of building shall be coated with boiling coal tar or other type of approved wood preservatives primer, before placing them in final position. Before any surface treatment is applied in the wood work shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The Jamb posts shall be through tenoned in to the mortise of the transoms to the full thickness of the transoms and the thickness of the tenon shall be not less than 2.5 cm. The tenons shall closely fit into the mortise without any wedging or filling. The contact surface of tenon and mortise before putting together shall be glued with polyvinyl acetate dispersion based adhesive conforming to IS 4835 or adhesive conforming IS 851 and pinned with 10 mm dia hard wood dowels, or bamboo pins or star shaped metal pins. The joints shall be at right angles when checked from the inside surfaces of the respective members. The joints shall be pressed in position. Each assembled door frame shall be fitted with a temporary stretcher and a temporary diagonal brace on the rebated faces. Fixing in Position: The frames shall be fixed only after acceptance by the Engineer-in-Charge. In case of door frames without sills, the vertical members shall be buried in floor for the full thickness of the floor and the door frame shall be temporarily braced at the sill level so as to prevent warping or distortion of frame during construction. The frames shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before being painted, oiled or otherwise treated and before fixing in position. The surface of the frames abutting masonry or concrete and the portions of the frames embedded in floors shall be given a coating of coal tar. Frames shall be fixed to the abutting masonry or concrete with holdfasts or metallic fasteners as specified Hilti or equivalent make. After fixing, the jamb posts of the frames shall be plugged suitably and finished neat. Vertical members of the door frames shall be embedded in the floor for the full thickness of the floor finish and shall be suitably strutted and wedged in order to prevent warping during construction. A minimum of three hold fasts shall be fixed on each side of door and window frames one at center point and other two at 30 cm from the top and bottom of the frames. In case of window and ventilator frames of less than 1 m in height two hold fasts shall be fixed on each side at quarter point of the frames. Hold fasts and metallic fasteners shall not be measured and paid for separately.

1.18.9.4.2 Panelled, Glazed or Panelled and Glazed Shutters:

General The work shall be carried out as per detailed drawing. The wooden members shall be planed smooth and accurate. They shall be cut to the exact shape and sizes without patching or plugging of any kind. Mouldings, rebates, rounding, etc. shall be done, as shown in the drawing, before the pieces are assembled into the shutter. Joinery work:




179

The thickness of the styles and rails shall be as specified in the item of work. The minimum thickness of panels shall normally be 15 mm where the clear width of panel is not more than 300 mm and 20 mm where the clear width of the panel is more than 300 mm. However, where the Engineer-in-Charge so considers lesser thickness up to 12 mm and 15 mm respectively may be allowed by him instead of 15 mm and 20 mm specified above. Solid wood panel for door and window shutters shall be made out of one or more strips of timber planks of not less than 125 mm width. It is preferable to use strips of not more than 200 mm width to reduce chances of warping, splitting or other defects. The timber strips shall be joined together with continuous tongued and grooved joints, glued together and reinforced with metal dowels. The grooving of the solid panel shall normally run along the longer dimensions of the panel unless otherwise directed. The corners and edges of panels shall be finished as shown in the drawing and these shall be feather tongued into styles and rails. Sash bars shall have mitres joints with the styles. Styles and rails of shutters shall be made out of single piece. Lock and intermediate rails exceeding 200 mm in width if permitted by the Engineer-in-charge may be made out of one or more pieces of timber but the width of each pieces shall not be less than 125 mm. Where more than one piece of timber is used, they shall be joined with a continuous tongued and grooved joint glued together and reinforced with metal dowels (rust proof) at regular intervals of 20 cm or pinned with not less than three 40 mm rust proof pins of the lost head type. The tendons shall pass clear through styles. The styles and rails shall have a 12 mm groove to receive the panel. In case the double shutters the rebate at the closing junction of the two shutters shall be of depth not less than 2 cm. Shutters shall not be painted or otherwise treated before these are passed by the Engineer-in-Charge and fixed in position.

1.18.9.4.3 Glazing:

The glazing work shall be done in accordance with the specification given separately elsewhere.

1.18.9.4.4 Hold Fasts

Hold fasts used for fixing doors and window frames shall be made of 40 x 3 mm flat iron and 40 cm long. It shall have two holes on one end for fixing to frame with long screws, and at the other end, the flat iron shall be split and bent at right angles in the opposite direction. The hold fast shall be tightly fixed to the frame by means of bolts, the bolt hole in frame being plugged suitably and finished neat. The hold fast shall be embedded into masonry by concrete block of 200 x 250 x 400 mm size.

1.18.9.5 FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS 1.18.9.5.1 General

The door shall be of flush type solid core with single or double shutter as the case may be.

1.18.9.5.2 Shutters

Flush door shutters shall have a solid core and may be of the decorative or non-decorative (Paintable type as per IS 2202 (Part I). Nominal thickness of shutters may be 25, 30 or 35 mm. Thickness and type of shutters shall be as specified. Width and height of the shutters shall be as shown in the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer-in-Charge. All four edges of the shutters shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. The moisture content in timbers used in the manufacture of flush door shutters shall be not more than 12 per cent when tested according to IS 1708.

Core: - The core of the flush door shutters shall be a block board having wooden strips held in a frame constructed of stiles and rails. Each stile and rail shall be a single piece without any joint.




180

The width of the stiles and rails including lipping, where provided shall not be less than 45 mm and not more than 75 mm. The width of each wooden strip shall not exceed 30 mm. Stiles, rails and wooden strips forming the core of a shutter shall be of equal and uniform thickness. Wooden strips shall be parallel to the stiles.

End joints of the pieces of wooden strips of small lengths shall be staggered. In a shutter, stiles and rails shall be of one species of timber. Wooden strips shall also be of one species only but it may or may not be of the same species as that of the stiles and rails. Any species of timber may be used for core of flush door. However, any non-coniferous (Hard wood) timber shall be used for stiles, rails and lipping.

Face Panel:- The face panel shall be formed by gluing, by the hot-press process on both faces of the core, either plywood or cross-bands and face veneers. The thickness of the cross bands as such or in the plywood shall be between 1.0 mm and 3.0 mm. The thickness of the face veneers as such or in the plywood shall be between 0.5 mm and 1.5 mm for commercial veneers and between 0.4 mm and 1.0 mm for decorative veneers, provided that the combined thickness of both is not less than 2.2 mm. The direction of the veneers adjacent to the core shall be at right angles to the direction of the wooden strips. Finished faces shall be sanded to smooth even texture. Commercial face veneers shall conform to marine grade plywood and decorative face veneers shall conform to type I decorative plywood in IS 1328. Lipping:- Lipping, where specified, shall be provided internally on all edges of the shutters. Lipping shall be done with battens of first class hardwood or as specified of depth not less than 25 mm. For double leaved shutters, depth of the lipping at meeting of stiles shall be not less than 35 mm. Joints shall not be permitted in the lipping. Rebating:- In the case of double leaves shutters the meeting of stiles shall be rebated by 8 mm to 10 mm. The rebating shall be either splayed or square type as shown in drawing where lipping is provided. The depth of lipping at the meeting of stiles shall not be less than 30 mm. Opening for Glazing:- When required by the purchaser opening for glazing shall be provided and unless otherwise specified the opening for glazing shall be as per drawings. The bottom of the opening shall be at a height as shown in the drawings. Opening for glazing shall be lipped internally with wooden batten of width not less than 25 mm. Opening for glazing shall be provided where specified or shown in the drawing. Tolerance:- Tolerance on width and height shall be + 3 mm and tolerance on nominal thickness shall be ± 1.2 mm. The thickness of the door shutter shall be uniform throughout with a permissible variation of not more than 0.8 mm when measured at any two points. Adhesive:- Adhesive used for bonding various components of flush door shutters namely, core, core frame, lipping, cross-bands, face veneers, plywood etc. and for bonding plywood shall conform to BWP type, phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin adhesive conforming to IS 848. Tests

Samples of flush door shutters shall be subjected to the following tests:

End Immersion Test Knife Test Glue Adhesion Test

Fixing:- For side hung shutters of height up to 1.2 m, each leaf shall be hung on two hinges at quarter points and for shutter of height more than 1.2 m, each leaf shall be hung on three hinges one at the center and the other two at 200 mm from the top and bottom of the shutters. Top hung and bottom hung shutters shall be hung on two hinges fixed at quarter points of top rail or bottom rail. Centre hung shutter shall be suspended on a suitable pivot in the center of the frame. Size and type of hinges and pivots shall be as specified. Flap of hinges shall be neatly counter sunk into the recesses cut to the exact dimensions of flap. Screws for fixing the hinges shall be screwed in with screw driver and not hammered in. Unless otherwise specified, shutters of height more than 1.2 mm shall be hung on butt hinges of size 100 mm and for all other shutters of lesser height butt hinges of size 75 mm shall be used. For shutter of more than 40 mm thickness butt hinges of size 125 × 90 × 4 mm shall be used. Continuous (piano) hinges shall be used for fixing cup-board shutters where specified.




181

1.18.9.6 DOOR HARDWARE a. Mortise Latch

1. Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 year 2. Euro Mortise Passage Latch - Inside and Outside shall be opened by handle at all times 3. Shall comply with EN12209-1 and BS 5872 Standards 4. Shall be Tested for 5,00,000 cycles 5. Shall be suitable for wooden, metal and fire doors (latch functions) with 60mm standard back set 6. Shall be suitable for doors of thickness range 30mm to 50mm 7. Latch bolt, Deadbolt, Faceplate shall be made of Stainless Steel 8. Shall have Satin Stainless Steel finish 9. As an option locks may be Fire tested to GB7633 standards, CNACL certified, AS 130.4-2005

Standard 10. Euro Mortise Lock - Outside – Shall be opened by handle when unlocked. Lever shall withdraw latch

bolt. Key shall lock or unlock bolt, key shall withdraw latch bolt. Inside – Shall be opened by handle when unlocked. Lever shall withdraw latch bolt. Key shall lock or unlock bolt, key shall withdraw latch bolt.

11. Euro Mortise Deadbolt - Outside - Bolt shall be locked or unlocked by key or turn. Inside - Bolt shall be locked or unlocked by key or turn

12. Euro Mortise Night latch – Outside – Latch bolt shall be withdrawn by key or turn. Inside – Latch bolt shall be withdrawn by key or turn.

13. Euro Mortise Privacy Lock – Outside – Shall be opened by handle except when bolt is thrown by turn knob from inside. Bolt may be unlocked from outside by coin or screwdriver by operating the slotted emergency button. Inside – Shall be opened by handle except when bolt is thrown by inside turn knob.

1.18.9.6.2 Euro Cylinder –

1) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 2) Shall be of 5 pin Euro Double Cylinder 3) Shall be suitable to be used with Euro Profile Mortise Locks 4) Shall have C4 Key Profile, 70mm length and have 3 keys 5) Shall have Satin Chrome Finish Euro Single Cylinder with Thumb turn - 1) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 2) Shall be of 5 pin Euro Single Cylinder with Turn 3) Shall be suitable to be used with Euro Profile Mortise Locks 4) Shall have C4 Key Profile 5) Shall be of 65mm length 6) Shall have 3 keys 7) Shall have Satin Chrome Finish

1.18.9.6.3 Tubular Lever Handle –

1) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 2) Tubular Lever on Rose shall be with Euro Profile Escutcheon 3) Shall be made of Stainless Steel Grade 304 4) Shall have Satin Stainless Steel Finish 5) Shall be tested for corrosion resistance in accordance with AS 2331.3.1 Neutral Salt Spray Test 6) Euro Profile Escutcheon or Rose – 7) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 8) Euro Profile Rose material 9) Stainless Steel Grade 304 10) Satin Stainless Steel Finish 11) Tested for corrosion resistance in accordance with AS 2331.3.1 Neutral Salt Spray Test




182

1.18.9.6.4 Entrance Handle –

1) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 2) Shall be tubular Back to Back Pull Handle 3) Shall have spigots to suit 10 – 12mm thick glass doors as well as spigots to suit aluminum and timber

doors up to 50mm thick 4) Shall be made of 304 grade stainless steel construction suitable for use in external environments 5) Shall have Satin Stainless Steel Finis

1.18.9.6.5 Cylindrical lever –

1) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 2) Shall be suitable for semi commercial applications such as apartments and offices 3) Backseat shall be 60mm standard. Extension tubes shall be available for 127mm back set 4) Latch bolt shall be of Stainless Steel 5) Shall suit door thickness of 35-46mm 6) Shall have standard T Strike 7) Shall have Satin Stainless Steel finish 8) Shall have field changeable handing 9) Shall be successfully tested up to 4 hours on fire door assemblies in accordance with Australian

Standards AS-1905 Part 1, fire resistant door sets

1.18.9.6.6 Patches – 1) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 2) Shall be suitable for doors with maximum weight 80Kgs and maximum width 1100mm 3) Shall have Satin Stainless Steel Finish

1.18.9.6.7 Door stop/ Security door chain/ door guard / other door accessories– 1) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 2) Shall be made of 304 Grade Stainless Steel 3) Shall have Satin Stainless Steel finish

1.18.9.6.8 Hinges– 1) Shall carry manufacturer’s warranty of 1 yr. 2) Stainless Steel Ball Bearing Button Tip Hinge 3) Shall be suitable for interior / exterior doors 4) Shall be with two ball bearings 5) Shall be manufactured of 304 Stainless Steel 6) Shall be with Fixed Pins of Standard Imperial Hole pattern 7) Shall be of size as per manufacturer’s specifications 8) Finish shall be Satin Stainless Steel

1.18.9.6.9 Kick Plates–

This shall be of brass (finished bright or chromium plated or oxidised) bronze, stainless steel, aluminum or as specified. Aluminum kicking plates shall be anodised and the anodic coating shall not be less than grade AC-10 of IS 1868. It shall be made from a plate of minimum thickness 3.0 mm & 1.5mm in case of stainless steel. Shape of the plate shall be as specified. This shall have bevelled or straight edges and shall be fixed by means of counter sunk or rounded screws of the same material and finish as that of the plate. The shape and pattern shall be according to the drawings and as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.




183

1.18.10 STORAGES

All storages should be factory finished and brought to site. The width of the storages should be as per BOQ. The specifications mentioned in the BOQ have to be treated as FINAL. The specifications given here are indicative and general in nature. The top, sides, bottom for the storages should be in 19mm MDF (Exterior grade) or 19mm thick commercial ply unless otherwise specified. All shutters to have post formed edges unless it is a veneered shutter. Extra top should be as per BOQ/Drawings. The finishes for all exposed surface shall be either 1.5mm thick laminate or 4mm thick veneer as per BOQ. All veneer surfaces should be melamine polished. Shutters to be as per BOQ. Intermediates should be in 19mm MDF or commercial ply as per drawings. The rate should also include all hardware as per detailed drawings and should be of makes as specified in the list of approved makes. Mode of measurement will be elevation area.

1.18.11 PAINTING AND FINISHING

1.18.11.1 SCOPE

These specifications cover the use of paints for the plastered and concrete surfaces. It also includes the painting of wood and metal surfaces. The paint to be low VOC. Conventional paints contain Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), which are petroleum-based solvents that evaporate from paint films while the paint is drying. These compounds are the unpleasant solvent fumes that may trigger respiratory reactions including asthma and breathing discomfort, when using conventional paints. They also contribute to greenhouse gas emissions. Traditional oil based paints (also known as alkyd enamels) have a solvent level of approximately 50% or more. This means that for every four-litre can of enamel, two liters go straight into the atmosphere, compounding the “Greenhouse Effect”. Conventional water-borne paints have a solvent level of around 7%, so obviously using water-borne paints is a far more environmentally responsible option. Additives classified as VOCs are included to achieve some of the positive attributes of paint, such as good coverage, easy application and wash ability. The challenge for manufacturers, is delivering the quality of paint finish customers have come to expect, whilst reducing the overall environmental impact of each tin. Low VOC paints, stains and varnishes use water as a carrier instead of petroleum-based solvents. As such, the levels of harmful emissions are lower than solvent-borne surface coatings. These certified coatings also contain no, or very low levels, of heavy metals and formaldehyde. The amount of VOC's varies among different "low-VOC" products, and is listed on the paint can or MSDS. Paints and stains, to meet EPA standards. Must not contain VOCs in excess of 200 grams per litre. Varnishes must not contain VOCs in excess of 300 grams per litre. As a general rule, low VOC paints marketed by reputable paint manufacturers usually meet the 50 g/L VOC threshold. Paints with the Green Seal Standard (GS-11) mark are certified lower than 50 g/L. Low VOC paints will still emit an odor until dry. If you are particularly sensitive, make sure the paint you buy contains fewer than 25 grams/liter of VOC's

1.18.11.2 GENERAL

The provisions of the latest revisions of the following IS: Codes shall form a part of this specification.

IS: 63 Whiting for Paints Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for Enamels, for use over primers.

IS: 426 Specification for paste filler for colour coats.

IS: 428 Specification for Distemper, Oil Emulsion, and colour as required.

IS: 710 Marine Plywood

IS: 1200 (Part XIII) Method of Measurement of Building and Civil Eng. Works - White Washing, colour washing, distempering and other finishes.




184

IS: 1477 (Part 1) Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings Pre-treatment

IS: 1477 (Part 11) Code of practice for finishing of ferrous metals in buildings. Painting

IS: 2338 (Part 1) Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials Operations and workmanship for finishing.

IS: 2338 (Part 11) : Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials, Schedule

IS: 2395 (Part 1) : Code of practice for painting concrete masonry and plaster surfaces. Operation and workmanship

IS: 2395 (Part 11) Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces. Schedule.

IS: 159 Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, acid resistant.

IS: 2524 (Part 1) Code of practice for painting of non-ferrous metal in buildings Pre-treatment

IS: 2524 (Part all) Code of practice for painting of non-ferrous metal in buildings Painting

IS: 3140 Code of practice for painting asbestos cement buildings:

IS: 5410 Specification for cement paints, color as required.

Other IS Codes not specifically mentioned here, but pertaining to painting form part of these specifications.

1.18.11.3 MATERIALS

Materials shall strictly conform to the relevant IS: Specifications.

1.18.11.4 PLASTERED OR CONCRETE SURFACES 1.18.11.4.1 General

Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible no part of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be painted. Properly secured and well tied suspended platforms (JHOOLA) may be used for painting. Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied at top and cotton to prevent scratches to the walls and floors. For painting of ceilings, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected, where necessary. Please note that the figures below are a guide only, as the actual VOC rating will depend on gloss level selected. All figures exclude tinting. -Note that the exact VOC rating will vary depending on the sheen level, so the range is given to cover all. -All measurements are in grams per liter for untainted product The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned off all dirt, dust, mortar dropping and other foreign matter, before paint is to be applied. New plaster surfaces shall be allowed to dry for at least 2 months, before applying paint. All unnecessary nails shall be removed. Pitting in plaster shall be made good with putty. The surface shall then be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth. The surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular cost of paint is allowed. The surface affected by moulds moss, fungi, algae, linens, efflorescence shall be treated in accordance with IS 2395 (Part 1) before applying paint.

1.18.11.4.2 Oil-Bound Distempering

Preparation of Surfaces: Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the undulation and then sand papering the same after it is dry. Primer Coat:




185

The primer where used as on undercoated surfaces shall be alkali resistance primer or distemper primer as specified in the item. These shall be of the same manufacture as of oil bound distemper. If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely alkali resistance primer shall be applied before distempering the walls. But if the distempering is done after the wall surface is dried completely, distemper primer shall be applied. Application: Primer shall be applied with a brush on the clean dry and smooth surface. Horizontal strokes shall be given first and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards. This entire operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours, before oil bound distemper or paint is applied. Preparation of oil bound distemper: The distemper shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed thinner in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of distemper required for days work shall be prepared. Application of distemper coat: After the primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered to make it smooth for receiving the distemper, taking care not to rub out the printing coat. All loose particles shall be dusted off after rubbing. Minimum two coats of distemper shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed to immediately by vertical which together shall constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall be applied after a time interval of at least 24 hours between consecutive coats to permit the proper drying of the preceding coat. The finished surface shall be even and uniform without patches, brush marks, distemper, drops, etc. Sufficient quantity of distemper shall be mixed to finish one room at a time. The application of a coat in each room shall be finished in one operation and no work shall be started in any room, which cannot be completed the same day. 15 cm. double bristled distemper brushes shall be used. After each day’s work, brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap solution and hung down to dry. Old brushes which are dirty and caked with distemper shall not be used on the work.

1.18.11.4.3 Water Proof Cement Paint

Preparation of Surfaces: The surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before the water proof cement paint is applied. Preparation of Paint: Portland cement paints are made readily by adding paint power to water and stirring to obtain a thick paste which shall then be diluted to a brush able consistency. Generally equal volumes of paint powder and water make a satisfactory paint. In all cases the manufacturer's instructions shall be followed. The paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within an hour of mixing as otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish. The lids of cement paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use, as by exposure to atmosphere the cement paint rapidly becomes air set due to its hydroscopic qualities. Application of Paint: No painting shall be done when the paint is likely to be exposed to a temperature of below 7 degree within 48 hours after application. When weather conditions are such as to cause the paint to dry rapidly, work shall be carried out in the shed as far as possible. This helps the proper hardening of the paint film by keeping the surface moist for a longer period. To maintain a uniform mixture and to prevent segregation the paint shall be stirred frequently in the bucket. For undecorated surfaces, the surface shall be treated with minimum two coats of water-proof cement paint. Not less than 24 hours shall be allowed between two coats and the second or subsequent coat shall not be started until the preceding coat has become sufficiently hard to resist marking by the brush being used. In hot dry weather the preceding coat shall be slightly moistened before applying the subsequent coat. The finished surface shall be even and uniform in shade without patches, brush marks, paint drops, etc. Cement paints shall be applied with a brush with relatively short stiff hog or fibre bristles. The paint shall be brushed in uniform thickness and shall be free of excessively heavy brush marks. The laps shall be well brushed out.




186

Curing Painted surfaces shall be sprinkled with water two or three times a day. This shall done between coats and for at least two days following the final coat. The curing shall be started as soon as the paint has hardened so as not to be damaged by the sprinkling of water say about 12 hours after its application.

1.18.11.5 PAINTING WOOD AND METAL SURFACES

1.18.11.5.1 General Requirement:

The materials required for the execution of painting work shall be obtained directly from approved manufacturers and brought to the site in maker's drums, with seals unbroken. All paints shall conform to relevant Indian Standards as mentioned under sub-head "Material". All materials not in actual use shall be kept properly protected. Lids of containers shall be kept closed and surface of paint in open or partially open containers covered with a thin layer of turpentine to prevent formation of skin. Materials which have become stale or fat due to improper and long storage shall not be used. The paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its container before pouring into small containers. While applying also, the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller container. No left over paint shall be put back into stock tins. When not in use, the containers shall be kept properly closed. If for any reason thinning is necessary, in case of ready mixed paint, the brand of thinner recommended by manufacturer shall be used. Painting except the priming coat shall generally be taken in hand after all other builder's work is practically finished. The rooms shall be thoroughly swept out and the entire building cleaned up at least one day in advance of the paint work being started. The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted. All rust, dirt scales, smoke and grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. No painting on exterior or other exposed parts of the work shall be carried out in wet, humid or otherwise unfavorable weather and all the surfaces must be thoroughly dry before painting work is started.

Brushing of Paint: The brushing operations are to be adjusted to the spreading capacity advised by the manufacturers of the particular paint. The painting shall be applied evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off, the later in the direction of the grain of wood. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time over and then brushing alternatively in the opposite directions two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.

During painting, every time after the paint has been worked out of the brush bristles or after the brush has been unloaded, the bristles of the brush. (Which are drawn together due to the high surface tension) shall be opened up by striking the brush against a portion of the unpainted surface with the end of the bristles held at right angles to the surface, so that bristles thereafter will collect the correct amount of paint when dipped again into the paint container.

Spraying: Where so stipulated, the painting shall be done with spray. Spray machine used may be (a) high

pressure (small air aperture) type or (b) a low pressure (large air gap) type, depending on the nature and location of work to be carried out. Skilled and experienced workmen shall be employed for this class of work. Paints used shall be brought to the requisite consistency by adding a suitable thinner.

Spraying should be done only when dry conditions prevails. During spraying the spray gun shall be held perpendicular to the surface to be coated and shall be passed over the surface in a uniform sweeping motion. Different air pressures and fan adjustment shall be tried so as to obtain the best application with the minimum wastage of paint. The air pressure shall not be kept too high as otherwise the paint will clog up and will be wasted.

Spots that are inaccessible to the spray pattern shall be touched up by brush after spraying.




187

At the end of the job, the spray-gun shall be cleaned thoroughly so as to be free from dirt. Incorrect adjustments shall be set right, as otherwise they will result in variable spray patterns, runs, sags and uneven coats.

Each coat shall be allowed to dry completely and lightly rubbed with very fine grade of sand paper and loose particles brushed off before next coat is applied. Each coat shall vary slightly in shade and shall be got approved `from the Engineer-in-charge before next coat is started.

Each coat except the last coat shall be lightly rubbed down with sand paper or fine pumice stone and cleaned off dust before the next coat is applied.

No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint puddles in the corner panels, angles of moulding, etc. shall be left on the works. In painting doors and windows, the putty round the glass panes shall also be painted but care shall be taken to see that no paint stains etc. are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and surfaces in similar hidden locations shall not be left out in painting.

In painting steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets, overlaps etc. The additional specifications for primer and other coats of paints shall be according to the detailed

specifications under the respective headings. Brushes and containers:

After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned off paint and linseed oil by rinsing with turpentine. After cleaning, the brushes are wrapped in heavy paper or water proof paper for storage. It is to be used the next day; it shall be hung in a thinner or linseed oil in a container. On no account shall brushes to be made to stand on bristles. A brush in which paint has dried up is ruined and shall on no account be used for painting work. The containers, when not in use, shall be kept closed and free from air so that paint does not thicken and also shall be kept guarded from dust. When the paint has been used, the containers shall be washed with turpentine and wiped dry with soft clean cloth, before they can be used again.

1.18.11.5.2 Steel and other Metal Surfaces

Preparation of Surfaces: The surface before painting shall be cleaned of all rust, scale, dirt and other foreign matter sticking to it with wire brushes, steel wool, scrappers, sand papers etc. The surfaces shall then be wiped finely with mineral turpentine which shall also remove grease and perspiration of hand marks. The surface shall then be allowed to dry. Preparation of Surfaces The surface shall be treated with Mordant Solution (5 liters for about 190 Sqm) by rubbing the solution generously, with a brush or bundle of rags on a stick. After about half an hour, the surface will turn grey and parts remaining bright shall be retouched and the extra surface washed down thoroughly with clean cold water and allowed to dry. Application of primers and paints: After preparation of the surface, the priming coat shall be applied immediately.

1.18.11.5.3 Wood and wood Based Materials:

Preparation of Surface: All wood work shall be dry and free from any foreign matter, incidental to building operation. Nails shall be punched well below the surface to provide a firm key for stopping. Moulding shall be carefully smoothened with abrasive paper and projecting fibers shall be removed. Flat portions shall be smoothened off with abrasive paper used across the grain prior to painting. Any knots, resinous, streaks or bluish sap wood that are large not enough to justify cutting out shall be treated with two coats of pure shellac knotting, applied thinly and extended about 25 mm beyond the actual area requiring treatment. Plywood and Block Board: This shall be treated as for solid wood, described above. Hard Boards: The surface shall be dusted off and painted with a coat of plastic emulsion paint thinner with water or with a coat of shellac varnish as specified. The surface shall then be rubbed down with fine grade abrasive paper and followed with required under coating and finishing coat as for soiled wood. Particle Board: The surface shall be filled with thin brush able filler and finished as for solid wood. Insulation Boards:




188

Two thin coats of water based paints shall be applied by spraying. Priming Coat: The dirt or any other extraneous material shall be removed from the surface to be painted. In case the surface is already finished with printer coat but unsatisfactory, it shall be rubbed down to bare wood and surface re-primed. Primer shall be applied by brushing. Application for transparent wood filler: The filler shall be applied with brush or rag in such a way that it fills up all the pores and indentations and levels up the surface. It shall be allowed to dry for 24 hours and it shall then be cut and rubbed with emery paper so that the surface of the wood is laid bare, with, the filler only in the pores and crevices of the wood. Stopping: All holes, cracks, crevices, etc. shall be stopped carefully to true and level surface with putty before the main undercoat is applied and after the application of the priming coat, stopping shall be prepared as below: Bees wax, resin and lac (orange in color) in the proportion of 1: 1: 16 by weight shall be melted down together in a suitable pot using slow heat, the mix being kept well stirred. Colouring materials to produce the required shade shall be added into molten mixture and stirred. Stopping shall on cooling be rolled into stick forms for use. Application of Paints: This shall conform to specifications under Para 5. 1 Applying wood preservatives: The preservatives of specified quality shall be applied in two coats. On new wood work, it shall be applied liberally with a stout brush and not doubled with rags or cotton waste, the first coat shall be allowed at least 24 hours to soak in before the second coat is applied. The excess of preservative which does not soak into the wood shall be wiped off with a clean dry piece of cloth.

1.18.11.6 WHITE WASHING

General The item refers to white-washing over old and new concrete, stone masonry brick plastered surfaces and asbestos cement sheets. White wash shall be prepared from fresh burnt white stone lime or shell lime. This lime shall be of class C type as per IS: 712. Surkhi lime or lime of equivalent quality may be used. The lime shall be dissolved in a tub with sufficient quality of water (about 4.5 liters/Kg. of lime) and the whole shall be thoroughly mixed and stirred until it attains the consistency of thin cream. The white wash shall be taken out in small quantities and strained through a clear course cloth. Alternatively with IS: 63 may also be used. Clean gum dissolved in hot water shall then be added in suitable proportion of 2 gm of gum Arabic to a liter of lime or whiting to prevent the white- wash coming off easily when rubbed. Rice may be used instead of gum. Scaffolding: This may be double or single according to requirements. If ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags or cloth rags shall be tied on their tops to avoid damage or scratches to the wall. Proper stage scaffolding shall be created when white-washing ceiling. The SI shall be responsible for accidents if any taken place. Preparation of Surface: The surface shall be prepared by removing all mortar dropping and foreign matter and thoroughly cleaned with wire or fibre brush or other means as may be ordered by the Engineer to produce an approved clean and even surface. All loose pieces and the scales shall be scraped off and holes stopped with mortar. In case where the surface have been previously colored-washed, the old color wash must be entirely removed before the white-wash is applied. In the case of surface which have once been white-washed, the old loose white-wash shall be broomed down. In case, the loose white-wash cannot be removed by brooming, the Engineer may order scraping of the surface. After cleaning the surface as specified above, the unwanted nails shall be removed and all nail holes, cracks and crevices stopped with mortar similar in composition to the surface to be stopped. The mortar should be cured. Application of white-wash:




189

On the surface so prepared, the white-wash shall he laid. Each coat shall be laid on with a brush. The first stroke of the brush shall be from the top downwards, another from bottom upwards over the first stroke, and similarly, one stroke from the right and another from the left over the first brush before it dries. This will form one coat. Each coat must be allowed to dry and shall be subject to inspection before the next coat is applied. When dry, the surface shall show no signs of cracking. It shall present a smooth and uniform finish free from brush marks and it should not come off easily when rubbed with a finger. No portion in the surface shall be left out initially, to be patched up later on. For new work, the white washed surface shall present a smooth and uniform finish. For old work, patches and repairs shall be white washed first. Thereafter, the whole surface shall be white washed with the required number of coats. Doors, windows, floors and other articles of furniture, etc., shall be protected from being splashed upon. Splashing and droppings, if any, shall be removed and the surfaces cleaned. Preparing the surface for white wash including the scaffolding. Applying the white wash in required number of coats as specified above and prior white washing of repaired patched.

1.18.11.7 PLASTIC EMULSION PAINTING ON WALL AND CEILING

General Plastic emulsion paints are not suitable for application on external wood and iron surfaces and surfaces which are liable to heavy condensation and are to be used generally on masonry or plastered surfaces. Suitable primer as per manufacturer shall be provided. Paint Plastic emulsion paint of approved brand and manufacture and of the required shade shall be used. Preparation of Surface The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or color wash by washing and scrubbing. The surface shall then be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. It shall then be sand papered to give a smooth and even surface. Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the undulation and then sand papering the same after it is dry. Application The number of coats shall be as stipulated in the item. The paint will be applied in the usual manner with brush or roller. The paint dries by evaporation of the water content and as soon as the water has evaporated the film gets hard and the next coat can be applied. The time of drying varies from one hour on absorbent surfaces to 2 to 3 hours on non-absorbent surfaces. The thinning of emulsion is to be done with water and not with turpentine. Thinning with water will be particularly required for the undercoat which is applied on the absorbent surface. The quantity of thinner to be added shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions. The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. If necessary more coats will be applied till the surface presents a uniform appearance. Precautions

(a) Old brushes if they are to be used with emulsion paints, should be completely dried of turpentine or oil paints by washing in warm soap water. Brushes should be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept immersed in water during break periods to prevent the paint from hardening on the brush.

(b) In the preparation of walls for plastic emulsion painting, no oil base putties shall be used in filling cracks, holes etc.

(c) Splashes on floors etc. shall be cleaned out without delay as they will be difficult to remove after hardening. (d) Washing of surfaces treated with emulsion paints shall not be done within 3 to 4 weeks of application. Other Details: These shall be as per specification for “Painting” as far as they are applicable.




190

1.18.11.8 Bees Waxing of Polishing With Readymade Wax Polish (New Work):

Materials: The polishing shall be done with bees waxing prepared locally or with readymade wax polish of approved brand and manufacture, as stipulated in the description of item. Where bees waxing are to be prepared locally, the following specifications for the same shall apply: Pure bees wax free from paraffin or steering adulterants shall be sued. Its specific gravity shall be 0.965 to 0.969 and melting point shall be 630 C. The polish shall be prepared from a mixture of bees wax, linseed oil, turpentine and varnish in the ratio of 2:1.5:1:05 by weight. The bees wax and boiled linseed oil shall be heated over a slow fir. When the wax is completely dissolved, the mixture shall be cooled till it is just warm and turpentine and varnish added to it in the required proportions and the entire mixture shall be well stirred. Preparation of Surface : Preparation of surface will be as mentioned herein under painting with the exception that knotting, holes and cracks shall be stepped with a mixture of fine saw dust formed of ht wood being treated, beaten, beaten up with sufficient bees wax to enhance cohesion. Application: The polish shall be applied evenly with a clean soft pad of cotton cloth in such way that the surface is completely and fully covered. The surface is then rubbed continuously for half an hour. When the surface is quite dry, a second coat shall be applied in the same manner and rubbed continuously for one hour or until the surface is dry. The final coat shall then be applied and rubbed for two hours (more if necessary) until the surface has assumed a uniform gloss and is dry showing no sign stickiness. The final polish depends largely on the amount of rubbing which should be continuous and with uniform pressure with frequent changes in the direction. Other details: The specifications for painting (general) as mentioned herein before shall hold good as far as they are applicable.

1.18.11.9 French Spirit Polishing (On New Work With A Coat Of Wood Filler):

Polish: Pure shellac varying from pale orange to lemon yellow colour, free from resin or dirt shall be dissolved in methylated spirit at the rate of 140 gm. Of shellac to 1 litre of spirit. Suitable pigment shall be added to get the required shade. Preparation of surface: The surface shall be cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand paper and well dusted off. Knots if visible shall be covered with a preparation to red lead and glue size laid on while hot. Holes and indentations on the surface shall be stopped with glazier’s putty. The surface shall then be given a coat of wood Filler made by mixing whiting (ground chalk) in methylated spirit the surface shall again be rubbed down perfectly smooth with glass paper and wiped clean. Application: The number of coats of polish to be applied shall be as described in the item. A pad of wooden cloth covered by fine cloth shall be used to apply the polish. The pad shall be moistened with the polish and rubbed hard on the wood, in a series of overlapping circles applying the mixture sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to give an even level surface. A trace of linseed oil on the face of the pad facilitates this operation. The surface shall be allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the same way. To finish off, the pad shall be covered with a fresh piece of clean fine cotton cloth, slightly damped with methylated spirit and rubbed lightly and quickly with circular motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform texture and high gloss. Measurement, Rate and other details: These shall be as for painting (general) mentioned herein before as far as they are applicable.

1.18.11.10 Melamine Polish Glossy / Matt

Clear glossy / matt premium quality melaminised coating specially formulated as a protective and decorative finishing clear coating for wood should be as per the specifications given below

Technical Data Method of application: Brushing at 25-30 seconds at 30 degree C or Spraying for 20-25

seconds at 30 degree C.

Thinner recommended: Brushing - Thinner 106 Spraying - Thinner 124




191

Thinner intake: 20-25% by volume Mixing ratio: Base to hardener in 10:1 by volume Drying Time: 8 hours Surface dry - less than 30 minutes Hard dry 16-20 hours Recoating period - Overnight Finish: 25 microns film thickness smooth and glossy / matt Flash point: Above 14 degree C (57o F)

Sand the surface along the grains with Sand Paper No.180 or with a suitable grade sand paper. Brush

the surface free of loose dust. Fill the wood using approved Wood Filler. Remove excess filler immediately after applications. Allow 2-3 hours of drying, before sanding with Paper No.240 or 280. If desired, apply approved make Natural Wood Finish up to 20% by volume and apply by spraying after Sealer Coat. In application by ragging allow a drying time of 5-10 minutes in between coats and 30-60 minutes before over coating with finish coats. Apply a coat of Natural Wood Finish Clear Sealer. After overnight drying, smooth sand with Emery Paper No.320 and wipe the surface free of loose dust. Apply approved Natural Wood Finish Clear Glossy / Matt as follows. Ensure that the surface to be coated is free from loose matter. Natural Wood Finish Clear Glossy / Matt is a two component system consisting of base and hardener. These should be mixed in the recommended ratio. The two components should be mixed in a glass, plastic or enamelled container. Allow the mixture to stand for 30 minutes and then apply by brushing or spraying using the recommended thinner for consistency adjustment. The mixture of base and hardener should be used within 8 hours.

1.18.12 VINYL FLOORING

The Vinyl flooring shall be of thickness as specified in the BOQ. The make and sample to be approved by the Architect before laying. All laying, warranties have be as per manufacturer’s specifications. The Vinyl flooring material shall conform to IS: 3462. It may in the form of tiles, sheets or rolls as specified. It shall consist of thoroughly blended composition of thermoplastic binder, filler and pigments. The thermoplastic binder shall consist substantially to one or both of the following:

a) Vinyl chloride polymer b) Vinyl chloride copolymer.

The polymeric material shall be compounded with plasticizers & stabilizers. The thickness for normal floor covering shall be normally1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, or 4.0mm and only specified thickness shall be used for work. Tiles shall be laid as per the design/details furnished by the Engineer conforming to the relevant IS Standards. Rubber based adhesives are suitable for fixing over concrete, wooden and metal sub-floors. PVA based adhesives shall be used for concrete and wooden sub-floors. PVA based adhesives are not suitable for metallic surfaces and also for locations where there is constant spillage of water.

Laying and fixing

The surface of the floor or wall to be treated with these tiles shall be smooth and even. This surface as also the back side of the tile sheets shall be cleaned with dry cloth or cotton waste and then the sticking solution shall be applied evenly thereto and the same shall be allowed to dry. The sheets shall be placed with absolutely close joints and pressed at top from one end to the other to ensure proper sticking without any air gap. The sheets shall finally be cleaned with cotton waste dipped in cleaning solution to remove any stains etc.




192

1.18.13 LAMINATED FLOOR

All Laminated floor/wooden floor to be as per the thickness mentioned in the BOQ and approved sample. The floor should be a floating installation i.e. not screwed, glued or stapled down. Store your floor flat and in unopened packages at normal room temperature and relative humidity for at least 48 hours prior to installation. The Ideal indoor climatic conditions are 18-22°C and 50-60% RH. Outside these conditions the flooring will expand or contract slightly. Do not install the floor in wet or damp rooms, such as bathrooms or rooms with a floor drain. Use felt pads on furniture legs to prevent scratching. Use a vacuum cleaner or non-abrasive, soap free mop cleaner on a regular basis to clean your floor. Always use manufacturer’s Accessories for perfect result. Cost to be inclusive of 0.2mm polythene film and 5mm thick underlay foam. All guarantees and warrantees' documents provided by the manufacturer to be taken on SBI's name and shall be passed on to the SBI after completion of works, during final handover

Preparations 1) The sub floor must be even and clean. The flooring should be such that it can be installed on top of

vinyl, linoleum, wood and ceramic tiles. Remove textile carpets and underlay before installing. 2) On slab/concrete floors (max 75% RH, min 18° C [65 F]) - including those with vinyl or ceramic tiles

installed – or floors with under heating-system, begin (after cleaning) by placing a 0.2 mm [6-mil] polyethylene film with an overlap of 200 mm [8”] (with CM version: Screed 2.0 CM%, floor heating 1.8 CM% and Anhydrite 0.5 CM%, floor heating 0.3 CM%).

3) For timber floors, check that any loose floorboards are securely fixed. 4) Expansion gap of minimum 5 mm [5/16”] should be left at walls, thresholds, pipes and other fixed

objects. An expansion profile must be used in door openings, angled rooms, corners in corridors and if the floorings are longer than 10 meters [30’].

Installation 1) Generally, the flooring will lock best if it is installed parallel to the length of the room or so that in

coming light falls along the length of the planks with a random installation pattern. 2) Start the installation in the left-hand corner. Assemble the planks together in the first Row so that they form a straight line. Remove the tongue (male) facing the wall. Check so that the last row

will be bigger than 50 mm [2”]. 3) If the starting wall is uneven or you need to balance the plank width, scribe the contour of the wall on

the panels in the first row, disassemble and cut. Check that the distance between the first row and the wall is correct, min 5 mm [5/16”]

WOODEN SKIRTING IN LAMINATE/VENEER

The skirting is to be 100mm high. It should consist of 12mm/8mm thick commercial plywood as per the specifications given above and finished with 1.5mm/4mm thick veneer glued on to the ply backing by means of approved Glue. The junction of the skirting to have Aluminum or Stainless Steel grooves as shown in the drawings. All veneer surfaces to be melamine polished

1.18.14 FROSTED FILM

The frosted film to be of approved make. It should be installed by a SI as specified by the manufacturer. The film should be electronically/computer plotter cut applied on glass and other rigid, clear substrates like partitions, doors, windows etc. The following are the characteristics of the film

1.18.15 WALL PAPER

WALL PAPER

Wall paper should be commercial grade wall paper of approved make and shade. The SI should submit the sample to the Architect for approval before starting the work of installation.




193

Installation

Always use the appropriate tool for the job. Safety goggles or glasses should be worn when using power tools, especially if you wear contacts. Wipe up spills immediately.

1. The first step is to prepare the wall itself. Arguably, this is the most important step. The wall should be completely smooth, otherwise bumps and crevices will show through the paper. Too make sure that the wall is dry and clean. If the wall is wet, it will reduce the stickiness of the wallpaper paste since the adhesive is usually water based. For the same reason, the wall should also be clean. Usually 2 coats of primer is to be applied on to the punned surface before any wall paper is laid

2. You will want the paper to hang straight. Therefore, divide the wall into sections. It would be easier for you if you would mark the divisions with a pencil. The mark will serve as a guide. Measure each section so you would know the amount of wallpaper you need. Cut the paper to the right size according to the measurements. It would be wise to add a few inches to the measurement to ensure that no bare space would show.

3. Put the first strip on top of the wall. Apply the glue to each subsection as you work your way down. If the wallpaper you are using has a self-adhesive backing, peel back the wax paper little by little. As you work your way down, get rid of any air bubbles by pressing the paper firmly against the wall. Try to keep the paper straight until you reach the bottom.

4. Once the sections are installed and dry, remove hand stains by wiping the wallpaper with a damp cloth, followed by a dry cloth.

1.18.16 RAILINGS

STAINLESS STEEL RAILINGS The work shall be carried out as described and as per the drawing. All rails and other tubular components shall be constructed using the following:

Stainless steel grade AISI, type 316; surface to be 320 grain/grit finish; tubes 1-1/2” (38mm) outside diameter by 5/64” (2 mm) wall thickness.

All posts and other components shall be constructed using the following:

a) Stainless steel grade AISI type 316, surface to be 320 grain/grit finish; posts to be 2” (50 mm) by 1/2” flat bar, finish and final design to be strictly in accordance with d line design guidelines.

b) Stainless steel grade AISI type 316, surface to be bead blasted for: component fittings including handrail attachment support and post attachment components strictly in accordance with d line design guidelines.

c) Fastening bolts to be stainless steel or other high strength material as determined by engineering requirements

Fasteners for railings

Anchors shall be fabricated from stainless steel or other materials as determined by engineering requirements with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E488.

Fabrication a. Fabricate railing system for compliance with structural requirements of applicable code. b. Pre-assemble railings prior to shipping to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and for coordination with shop drawings.

c. Stainless steel tubing cuts shall be square, without burrs and where exposed, rounded to produce smooth rigid and hairline joints

Installation

Installation shall be by done a qualified, authorized representative of the manufacturer. Installation must be in accordance with standard or non-standard, yet applicable details




194

(instructions) included on installation/shop drawings provided by the manufacturer. Install components plumb and in-line, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects and securely

anchored to structure. Provide anchors, plates, angles, etc., necessary for connecting railings to structure. Any and all field welding shall be by a certified welder. Access for anchors that require through bolting either vertically or horizontally to be made available

through General SI. Erection tolerances

Maximum variation from plumb shall be 1/4". Maximum offset from true alignment for every 50-foot of railing shall be 1/4", non-accumulative. Protection after installation

General SI to provide protective covering on handrails and guardrails if construction is not yet finished in the area where the railings are installed.

Correction of deficiencies

All deficiencies in work and/or items not meeting specified requirements shall be corrected in order to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to SBI.

M.S. GRILLS/RAILING Materials:

All structural steel shall conform to IS 226-1963 sections for grills and shall be free from loose mill scales, rusts, pitting or any other defects affecting its strength and durability. Fabrication: The grill/railing shall be fabricated to the design and pattern shown in the drawings. All joints shall be made in best workman like manner with slotting and welding as required to the specified size and shape. The edge of the M.S. flats shall be suitably mitred before welding to get the desired shape. The joints shall be filled to remove excess stay after welding screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and any other miscellaneous fastenings devices shall be of steel and shall be provided by the SI. Manufactured Rails then be fixed in between the posts, balusters, M.S. frame work etc. to correct alignment. Any undulations, bends etc. found shall be rectified by the SI at his own cost. The complete assembly of railing so fixed shall be firm and there shall not be any lateral movements. Samples: Samples of grill and railings shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer-in-charge and to be got approved before taking up for mass fabrication. Installation: The approved grills shall be fixed in position where specified and shown in drawings including in masonry walls, teakwood frames, hand railings etc. Any damages to walls, frames etc. caused during fixing the grills shall be made good by grouting with cement mortar/packing /repairing properly at the SIs cost. Painting: Painting shall be done as per the specification specified under painting. Mode of measurement: The railing shall be measured correct to two decimal places. Only the running length of the railing shall be considered for payment. Individual rails not to be measured separately. The rate is to include the cost of all materials, labour, transporting, fabricating, installing, scaffolding if necessary, painting, grouting etc. complete.

1.18.17 TOILET CUBICLES

Toilet cubicles shall be of size as per approved design and drawings. They should be of approved make and series as approved by the Architect.




195

1.18.18 WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

Aluminum standard tubular sections / appropriate Z sections and other sections of approved make conforming to IS:733 and IS:1285. Anodized Aluminum (anodized transparent or dyed to required shade according to IS: 1868, Minimum anodic coating of grade AC 15), PVC/neoprene felt, cleat angle, Aluminum snap beading for glazing, C.P. brass / stainless steel screws, etc. Float glass panels of 5.50 mm thickness.

Hinges/pivots and making provision for fixing of fittings.

Workmanship:

Aluminum work for windows and ventilators with extruded built up standard tubular sections /

appropriate Z sections and other sections fixed with raw plugs and screws or with fixing clips, or with expansion hold fasteners including necessary filling up of gaps at junctions, at top bottom and sides with required PVC/neoprene felt etc. Aluminum sections shall be smooth, rust free, straight, mitred and jointed mechanically wherever required including cleat angle, Aluminum snap beading for glazing with PVC/ neoprene gasket etc., complete as per architectural drawings and directions of engineer-in-charge.

1.18.19 CONTROL DESK SPECIFICATIONS FOR NOC

1.18.19.1 Scope of Work 1.18.19.1.1 The scope of the work shall be Design-Build-Install basis but shall not be limited to the

following: - a) Designing, manufacturing, testing, integration etc., all complete, preparation of the related

drawings, documents, etc. of the consoles shall be in the SI's scope. The consoles shall confirm the requirements & specifications of this bid document.

b) In broad, the scope of work and supply shall consist of the following parts: - i. Design, engineering of Consoles. ii. All related services for supply, installation, testing. iii. Spares & Documentation

c) Detailed scope of work and supply shall include but not be limited to the following: - i. Data Collection: Gather all information related to design of the control desk ii. Design Proposal: - Submission of various options of control desk layout for SBI’s approval,

strictly complying with ISO 11064. iii. General: -

(a) The tentative control room area shall be provided to the desk manufacturer to develop the various options.

(b) Supply of the product catalogue, technical proposals including but not limited to drawings, documentation, 3D views, color pallets, for the complete desking solution.

iv. Spares: -A list of manufacturer’s recommended spares for operation and maintenance shall be provided.

v. Provide commissioning & warranty spares (SI shall utilize these spares of all the equipment that may be required during commissioning & warranty period separately).

vi. Bidder shall be responsible for safety and security of the installed items till commissioning and final acceptance by SBI (before start of warranty period).

vii. Quality assurance & commissioning of the complete system at site to the complete satisfaction of the SBI/Consultant

1.18.19.2 Mandatory Requirement: Proven Track Record, Quality Assurance, Submittals, Printed Catalogue, Manufacturing Unit, Documentary Evidence, Factory Norms and Appreciation Certificate.




196

The project demands for a contemporary, visually light and ergonomically designed 24X7 desking solution. Traditional bulky box type control desk should not be quoted.

a) Submittals (Mandatory for bid qualification):-

General Mandatory Requirement i. Certificate for ISO 9001-2008 quality certification and proof of quality system implementation

in Manufacturing processes for at least 5 years. ii. Certificate for ISO 14001 for Environment Management System. iii. Certificate for OHSAS 18001 for Occupational Health and Safety. iv. FSC: Forest Stewardship Council. The manufacturer should be a FCS Certified manufacturer

from a reputed certifying agency. v. Ergonomic compliance report as per ISO 11064 to be submitted along with the bid vi. The consoles shall be suitable for areas of Seismic zone 4 or better vii. Manufacturing Unit/Capability: If asked, SI to arrange factory and product inspection before

placement of order, to ensure that the SI is capable of in-house production of the ordered goods.

viii. To prove SI's seriousness in the business; Printed Catalogues and Locations of Demo rooms to be furnished.

ix. Warranty: 1. Lifetime warranty on structural stability. 2. Five year’s warranty against any manufacturing defect on complete desking solution.

x. The Console offered under this project should have been supplied and working satisfactorily for a period of minimum one year on the bid issue date in reputed organization.

xi. Minimum 100 installation of control desk with reputed companies of similar reputation. b. Design Criteria: -

i. Front end should be Removable Modular Polyurethane edge casted on industrial grade core fastened on table top. Nosing will be mechanically replaceable in the event of damage or wear (not glued in place).

ii. An edge slope and radius spreads the weight over a larger surface. Enhancing end-user comfort.

iii. Consoles must be of modular design, facilitating future equipment retrofits and full reconfigurations without requiring any major modification to the structure or exterior elements

c. Product Specific Mandatory Requirement

i. Greenguard (UL) Certification: Entire product to comply with minimum indoor air quality standards as per ANSI/BIFMA M7.1-2007 to be submitted along with the technical BID.

ii. ANSI BIFMA X5.5 Certified console (on all parameters). 1. Concentrated Functional Load Test. 2. Distributed Functional Load Test. 3. Concentrated Proof Load Test. 4. Distributed Proof Load Test. 5. Stability Under Vertical Load Test. 6. Tests must be based on ANSI BIFMA X5.5 -2008 standards applied to the proposed product

solution. iii. Copy of Test certification for ASTM E84-06a for the surface burning characteristics of

products and materials. Test must reference the actual assembled components for wood-core panels including core, laminates, edging.

iv. Raw-material SI data alone is not acceptable. d. Quality Criteria: -

i. To ensure uniformity, consistency & quality in final product the desk manufacturer should have In-house Powder Coating Plant, metal manufacturing and wood processing plant.

e. Proven Track Record: -




197

i. The desk manufacturer must produce documents proving that they have executed order(s) with 200 plus CPU free consoles/desks/operator station at single location with scratch resistant laminate molded Polyurethane edging.

1.18.19.3 Equipment Mounting

The control desk shall house KVM equipment's/extenders, Ethernet switches, Power Distribution Unit. All the cables to be taken into the cabinet through desk legs to ensure completely hidden wire management.

1.18.19.4 Structure

a. Made of heavy duty Extruded Vertical and Horizontal Aluminum profiles of 6063T6 grade. The Extrusions shall be duly powder coated with 40+ micron over all surfaces.

b. All sheet metal parts must be finished with a durable, black, electrostatic powder coating with average application of 60-90 microns over all surfaces.

c. Pre-treatment process shall not generate sludge or heavy material.

i. The SI to perform following tests during inspection: - ii. Adhesion test : ISO 2409 : iii. Impact test : ASTM D 2794 : 40kg iv. Conical mandrel test : ASTM D 522 : v. Scratch test : IS 101-1964 : vi. Salt spray (FOG) test : ASTM B 117 : 600 hrs.

d. To allow future extension and expansion; a weld free system to be proposed. Interconnecting joints should not be visible.

e. The structure should be rigid enough to withstand BIFMA X5.5. The structure should allow easy assembly of Hinged Shutters, Slat wall, Gland Plate, Monitor arms in extremely rigid manner.

f. Grouting of the desk is not allowed for BIFMA test as well as site installation. g. Standard office type, panel, post and open furniture will not be acceptable. Structural integrity of

the Console System is a priority; therefore “cubicle” type walls shall be deemed unacceptable.

1.18.19.5 Work Surface

The material of the working surface should be High Pressure Laminate, minimum 25 mm thick MDF, fire retardant, Insulated, Water Proof, Scratch proof and high hardness. a) The MDF shall confirm to ANSI A208.2 b) The Laminate shall conform to ANSI/NEMA LD3-2005 for HGF (Type SR605). c) The laminate shall be Greengaurd certified. This laminate shall have added benefit of an extra-

wear surface and provide a high resistance to scuffing, and cigarette burns. The material shall also have a skid resistant surface.

1.18.19.6 Edging Option

Front ergonomic edge shall be Removable Modular Polyurethane edge casted on industrial grade core fastened on table top which gives cushion/comfort to wrist/palm during working hours. It should be perfectly flushed with the laminate to give a seamless finish and should not obstruct during operations. a) Shore hardness: 80 for rugged application b) PU edge shall have flexibility to design at radius. c) T shape of PU / PVC / PP shall not be acceptable as they can be pulled out manually. d) Shape of the PU shall have an ergonomic slant with min 50 mm in depth. This is to give a grand

look and maximum comfort. e) Other open edge shall be of PVC / ABS / PP with greenguard specs. f) Manufacturer to show in-house facility to ensure smooth service in case of any such requirement

in future.




198

1.18.19.7 Shutters

a) The cabinet front and back shutter should be made of CRCA with overall thickness of 18 mm duly powder coated with min 60+ micron over all surfaces.

b) Shutters should be supplied with high quality Foam Filter to avoid dust and dirt to enter the equipment cabinet.

c) It should be on snap fit clamps to avoid sagging over a period of time.

1.18.19.8 Monitor Arms/Arrays and Attachments

a) Monitor and Functional holder shall guarantee optimum viewing distance. All ergonomic aspects shall be taken in to account. It shall be capable for mounting all type of LCD display with Dimensions between 17” to 27” using suitable adopter/additional base plate for complying VESA standards 75 x 75, 100 x 100, 200 x 100 & 200x200 mm.

b) For configuration of working position, it shall allow the technical staff to rotate/ tilt/ raise/the monitors as well as fix their adjustment in a quick and easy manner

c) The Monitor and functional holder shall bear the weight of the mounted Monitors; hold the monitors firmly without shaking. Max load for single monitor 10kgs for & for dual tier 20 kgs.

d) The monitor arm should be Articulating monitor arm. e) Die cast mounted Aluminum arm; fixed on MS Pole. f) Up-down moment can be performed without tools. g) Dual Pole Height - 455mm h) Extension - 400mm i) Tilt - 180 Deg j) Swivel - 270 Deg k) Rotation around Monitor Pole 360 l) It shall be designed to enable replacement of existing LCD display with other type during monitor

changes necessitated by future developments. m) Articulating monitor arm, Flexible monitor arm, depending on console configuration. e. Upper-level

articulating monitor arm (Double high option).

1.18.19.9 Modular Rear Wall (Slat Wall)

Modular rear walls shall made of heavy duty extruded aluminum profile. It shall be vertically stackable; allowing for various viewing levels and privacy.

a) Min 75 mm Walls shall be available in approx. 150/175mm, 300/350mm and 450/500 mm heights with tier 1/2/3 capabilities.

b) Modular walls shall be made of 2mm thick Extruded Aluminum (6063T6 aluminum alloy). c) Weight per meter : min 5 Kg (for single tier stacking). d) Shall be designed in such a way that no joints or gaps are visible in the entire width of the

console. e) Load bearing capacity shall be min 30 kg per meter. f) It should have linear slots running throughout the length so as to accept modular components (slat

wall mounting system, telephone arms, pen holders, paper holders) g) Load bearing capacity. h) No buckling when arms are fully extended i) No screws should be visible when joining table top to the Slat wall. j) Slat wall shall allow monitors fixing on either side of the wall. This is required to add big size screens

in future.

1.18.19.10 Electricals

a) Each console shall be equipped with individual power distribution unit. The Electrical power distribution unit shall be capable of being switched on/off and provide safe supply to all the consuming equipment individually. The console should be electrically earthed for all the body part which are conductive.




199

b) Power supply socket should be dual type i.e. Universal type. c) PDU shall be ROHS, CE certified d) It shall be a part while testing for Green Guard Certificate. e) Rear vertical mounting with powder coated CRCA body with RAL 9005 color having universal

sockets with Inbuilt 16A single pole MCB. f) Shall confirm to BS 546

1.18.19.11 Cable Routing Arrangement

Designed with vertical and horizontal cable trays to allow for continuous cable management between the cabinets.

1.18.19.12 Illumination

a) Service light should be provided inside the cabinet enclosure for maintenance of equipment with provision of manual on/off switch.

b) The illumination of service lights shall be such as not to interfere with the vision of the operator sitting in front of the console.

c) LED shall be of 14 Watt, with 5 years life.

1.18.19.13 Hardware

All bolts must be of SS material to avoid rust due to environment. Remaining hardware shall be Nickle Plated with RoHS certificate.

1.18.19.14 Communication, Execution and Site Installation Matrix

SI should provide Communication, Execution and Site Installation Matrix plan.

1.18.19.15 Delivery Schedule

Negotiable will be considered from the date of manufacturing clearance in all respect.

1.18.19.16 Sustainability Requirements

a. Total recyclable content shall be greater than 50%. b. All metal components shall be 100% recyclable. c. All materials shall be free of hexavalent chrome, CFC's, and PDBE's. d. Adhesives used shall be solvent free and free of any hazardous air pollutants. e. Metal parts shall be powder coated and finished with a durable VOC-free finish which is applied in a

process that generates low levels of recyclable waste.

1.18.19.17 Logistics

As per negotiation during Ordering stage.

1.18.19.18 Warranty

a) 10 years against manufacturing defects. b) Life time on structure stability. c) 10 Years on all moving / non-moving parts.




200

1.18.19.19 Quality Assurance of Consoles

Quality Assurance Plan to be submitted during designing stage and All raw material should be from verified SI and confirming to IS standard.

1.18.19.20 Certificate for Maintenance Support

SI to generate the same with BID document. SI to maintain the components for 5 years to support expansion and similarity.

1.18.19.21 Self-Declaration format

SI to declare; whatever has been complied will be there in the end-product. If anything is faulty then the consoles are liable for rejection and shall be replaced on FOC.

1.18.19.22 Checklist for Certificates, Norms etc.

a) BIFMA X5.5 for desk quality. b) ISO 9001. c) ISO 14001. d) OHSAS 18001 e) Seismic Test Report f) Greenguard (UL) Certification

1.18.19.23 Testing Methods (As per Standard Norms)

To be shown during Inspection or BID time as per the Banks requirement. a) Drop Test b) Abrasion Test c) Conical Mandrel d) Powder Hardness test e) Load Bearing Capacity of Desk

1.18.19.24 In House Quality Lab

SI to demonstrate in-house test lab to prove quality consciousness / seriousness.

1.18.19.25 Accessories

SI to demonstrate the following attachments in BID, to quote unit price of each if not asked. 3 sets of printed catalogue to be submitted for attachments.

a) Articulating monitor Arm, b) Telephone arm, c) Key board tray, d) Task Light, e) Service light, f) File storage, g) Monitor arm, h) File holder, i) Pen holder, j) Telephone holder




201

1.18.19.26 Packing

Wooden crate packing. Time being the crux of the project, suppler to ensure quality packing is done to avoid any damages and consecutive delays.

1.18.19.27 Dispatch Instructions

The material to be dispatched to site in Semi Knock down condition for quick installation at site.

1.18.19.28 SI Selection Criteria

SI to give point by point compliance on all points mentioned in the specification document.

1.18.20 ROADS AND PAVEMENTS

ROADS AND PAVEMENTS

1.18.20.1 Scope

These specifications deals with the general requirements of the materials used in the flexible and rigid pavements, procedure of preparing the subgrade to receive the pavements, and, the methods of laying the pavements. Reference is made to other sections of the technical specifications for relevant items not specifically covered in this section. The SI shall be responsible for obtaining consents of SBIs of approved quarries and lands, payment of royalties, duties, fees, rent, taxes etc., compensation due to injuries to persons or damages to property in anyway connected with the execution of whole work and for loss of materials due to improper stacking etc., and shall make good loss without extra claims.

1.18.20.2 Applicable Codes

The provision of the latest Indian Standards and IRC Codes listed blow, but not restricted to, Form part of these specifications:

IS -73 Paving bitumen IS -215 Road tar IS -217 Cutback bitumen IS -334 Glossary of terms relating to bitumen & tar IS -454 Digboi type cutback bitumen IS -1196 Code of Practice for laying bitumen mastic flooring IS -1514 Methods of sampling and test for quick lime and hydrated lime IS -1200 Method of measurement of building and Civil Engineering works IS – 1201 to IS-1220 Methods for testing tar & bituminous materials IS - 1322 Bitumen feats for waterproofing and dam-proofing IS- 1609 Code of practice for laying damp-proof treatment using bitumen felts IS -1838 Preformed fillers for expansion jointing concrete (non-extruding and resilient type) IS- 1838 Part 1 - Bitumen-impregnated fibre IS -2386 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete (part I to VIII) IS -2720 Methods of test for soils (Part I to XLI) IS -3117 Bitumen emulsion for roads (anionic type) IS -3575 Bitumen drums IS -4198 Emulsion spraying machine for roads IS -4911 Glossary of terms relating to bituminous waterproofing and damp-proofing and damp-proofing of

buildings IS - 5317 Bitumen mastic for bridge decking & roads.




202

IS- 5502 General requirement for smooth-wheeled diesel road roller. IS - 5640 Methods of test for determining aggregates impact value of soft coarse aggregates. IS-6241 Method of test for determination of stripping value of road aggregates. Other Codes and Specifications Other IS codes pertaining to the road works and not listed above and, relevant M.0.T. Specifications and B.S

Codes & ASTM standards shall also deemed to come under the purview of this clause. U.S.B.R Earth Manual (1965 Indian Edition published by Oxford IBH Publishing Co., Calcutta) will form part of these specifications.

When the various specifications and codes referred to in preceding portions are at variance with these specifications and with each other the following order of precedence will generally be accepted.

1. Special conditions of contract, special specifications and execution drawings. 2. Provision of specifications 3. IRC Codes 4. IS Codes 5. MOST Specifications 6. British standard codes & ASTM standards 7. USBR Earth Manual

1.18.20.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

Excavation for road work will be done as per approved design and drawings.

1.18.20.4 Filling In Embankment And Compaction

This will be done as per approved design and drawings.

1.18.20.5 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE 1.18.20.5.1 The subgrade shall be levelled to the proper level and camber by filling depressions with

excavated material and cutting of protuberances. The subgrade shall be cleaned of all dust, black cotton soil, dirt and other extraneous matters. Any ruts or soft yielding places that have appeared due to improper drainage, service under traffic or other reasons shall be corrected and rolled with 10 T roller till 95 per cent modified proctor density is achieved.

1.18.20.5.2 The subgrade shall be made to have as nearly as practicable a uniform bearing power and all hard spots therefore be properly excavated to the level indicated by the Engineer, refilled and compacted.

1.18.20.5.3 All soft and sponge parts of the subgrade shall also be excavated and refilled with approved

materials in 15 cm. layers for the same reason. (The cost of this excavation will be paid under the item for excavation).

1.18.20.5.4 The subgrade shall be watered as directed at least 12 hours before a roller is put on it. 1.18.20.5.5 Proper access should be prepared for the roller to get to the subgrade and all manholes frames

and covers should be removed and replaced by plates free of cost whenever they interfere with the free rolling of the subgrade.

1.18.20.5.6 All places where trenches of more than 60 cm. in depth have been taken shall be marked for providing reinforcement where there is concrete base, after filling them in layer of 23 cm. thick and ramming to level few cms. above the formation level as directed.

1.18.20.5.7 Trenches less than 60 cms. in depth may be filled with alternate layers of rubble and earth and properly consolidated without providing any reinforcement on them.

1.18.20.5.8 Where concrete is to be placed on an existing base of concrete the following preparatory work should be carried out before placing of new concrete. All the joints and cracks in the base slab shall be cleaned and scaled with a suitable bituminous sealing compound, where the base slab shows signs of settlement at the edges or joints or in cracked areas such portions shall be removed and subgrade strengthened by placing on an additional granular material and compacting it either by rolling or by heavy rammer weighing not less than 15 Kg water being added to bring it to a stiff consistency.

1.18.20.5.9 After treating the subgrade in the weak spots in the above manner the area shall be filled in with fresh cement concrete (1:3:6) conforming to the relevant concrete specifications to correspond




203

to the levels of surrounding base concrete. Such freshly laid concrete shall be cured in the normal way for 10 days or till such time as the top concrete is laid. However, no top concrete shall be laid within 48 hours of laying the base concrete.

1.18.20.5.10 After rolling, the camber, super-elevation and longitudinal slope, etc., of the subgrade shall conform in shape to those of the finished surface. This should be checked with the help of level stakes, strings and camber board, if necessary.

1.18.20.6 SUB-BASE, BASE AND SHOULDERS

1.18.20.6.1 Materials

The materials to be used in the work shall be natural sand, murrum, gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, and crushed concrete, brick metal, laterals, Kankar etc. or combinations thereof depending upon the grading required. The mixed material shall be free from adherent coating, clay, black cotton soil, dirt, dust, alkali, organic material, deleterious matter or other extraneous matter. Kutcha Tough Metal This shall be obtained from Kutcha Tough Rock and shall be broken by hand. The size shall be between 90 mm and 40 mm.

1.18.21 Stabilised Soil

Approved soil with the C.B.R not less than 10 (in soaked condition) shall be laid to the proper shape and camber to the required consolidated depth, and satisfactorily rolled, stabilised soil may be obtained by thoroughly mixing two or more soils, sand and stone dust. Lime of suitable quality will also be allowed to be thoroughly mixed with suitable soil for the propose. The mixed soil as prepared shall be made slightly moist before the same is spread and rolled. The testing of the C.B.R value shall be done at the SI's cost.

1.18.22 Kutcha Tough Metal Sub-base

Metal for this sub-base shall be obtained from Kutcha Tough rock. The Kutcha tough metal should stand rolling satisfactorily with a 10 tonne roller without getting crushed into power. The metal shall be obtained by hand breaking and the size shall be graded form 90 to 40 mm. The metal shall be spread over a prepared sub-grade to a thickness of 12 cm. and compacted by a roller weighing 10 tonnes to the thickness of 12 cm. and compacted by a roller weighing 10 tonnes to the thickness of about 8 cm. The rate of spreading grit/dust/sand/burnt brick power shall not be less than 3.35 cu. m. per 100 sq. for each layer. All other operations such as rolling watering etc. shall conform to the specifications under the Clause 7.1.

1.18.23 Rubble Packing

Murrum laid to camber shall be properly consolidated by rolling with a heavy roller not less than 10 tonnes to receive the foundations of rubble 25 cm. thick. Rubble shall be large and flat bedded and as regular in shape as possible. The stone for rubble soling shall be of best quality of not less than 25 cm. size. The stones shall be sound, angular, durable dense, clean and free from flaws such as salt cavities, bends, etc. No earthy discoloured, weathered or traversed with beams of perishable material and water-worn stones or boulders shall be used. The stones shall be obtained either from quarries or from boulders to be approved by the engineer. All stones shall be hand packed and all voids shall be filled with chips and hammered in well. The stones shall be set on their natural bed. The layer of the rubble shall be composed of large stones. The soiling shall be carried out to the required camber and grade in regular line to contour of street and the surface will be rolled by a power roller weighing not less than 10 tonnes. Each rubble pieces shall have a horizontal based and shall be set vertically. All such rubble pieces shall be set and packed close to each other. Large stones will be kept at the edges of the roadway so as to enclose and protect top layers on the subgrade and the area will be counted as soling as measured superficially. Dry rubble packing shall consist of a layer of uniform thickness of stone rubble carefully set on ground properly formed for the purposes. The stones shall be laid upon their largest face. The interstices between the rubble stone shall be filled up with stone chips and the whole packing made compact. If the packing be required for road work or other similar purposes, the layer of rubble shall




204

be composed of large stones. A layer of 60 mm metal 6 cm thick shall be evenly spread over the rubble and the same shall be rolled and well consolidated as specified and directed, by rolling with a heavy roller not less than 10 tonnes in weight.

1.18.23.1 WATER BOUND MACADAM

Water bound macadam shall consist of clean aggregates mechanically interlocked by rolling and bonded together with screenings, binding material where necessary and water, laid on a prepared subgrade, sub-base, base or existing pavement, as the case may be, and finished in accordance with the requirements given below and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the drawings or otherwise directed by the engineer.

1.18.23.2 BITUMINOUS COURSES

1.18.23.2.1 Material

The bitumen shall conform to IS-73. The SI shall furnish on demand, laboratory test certificates to show that the material satisfied the requirements of the specified grade. The tests in bitumen will be carried out as specified in the IS- 73 and following table at the SI's cost.

1.18.23.2.2 CONSTRUCTION i. Asphalt Primer Coat

Asphalt Primer Coat preferably of low viscosity cutbacks shall be applied to water bound macadam preparatory to any superimposed treatment or construction, if dustless stones mosaic surface cannot be obtained by cleaning. The rate of application shall be 195 Kgs. per 100 Sq.mt. The primer shall be spread under pressure so as to penetrate into the road surface and plug the capillary void and to coat and bind surface dust, loose mineral particles, etc. and ensure a good adhesion between the old surface and the new bitumen film.

ii. Tack Coat 1: The entire surface of existing concrete or bituminous base on which the treatment is to be such as asphalted concrete, etc. is to be superimposed shall be cleaned thoroughly with base brooms and wire brooms if necessary. No foreign matter such as mud, cow dung, etc. shall remain on the surface. The surface shall then be swept clean with clean gunny bags. Tack coat of bitumen emulsion shall then be applied evenly to the entire surface with base brooms, brushes etc. at the rate of 75 Kgs. per 100 sq. m leaving no part of the surface unpainted.

iii. Premixed (hot mix) seal coat for foot-path. Thickness of this coat wiII vary between 12 mm and 20 mm. The aggregates used shall have the grading as follows.

B. S. Sieve Designation Percentage Passing 6 mm 100 5 mm 86 - 100 No. 7 60 - 78 No. 14 42 - 58: No. 25 26 - 41 No. 52 14 - 26 No. 100 6 - 15 No.200 4 - 10 The lime filler shall not be less than 6% by weight of total mix. Bitumen grade S-65 will be 6.25 to

6.50% by weight of total mix.

iv. Hot-mix asphalted concrete

Asphalt carpet laid to the required thickness shall conform to the B.S.S No. 594 of 1958, B.S.S No. 410, B.S.S. No. 598, B.S.S No. 817 so far as the materials and their laying and testing are concerned. The asphaltic concrete will usually be laid in two layers:




205

• A binder (base) course laid to a thickness of 40 mm to 50 mm after consolidation.

• A surface (wearing) course laid to a thickness of 40/50 mm after consolidation.

a) Materials

The bitumen to be used shall be of 60/70 penetration or as specified and shall have properties as per Table II of I. S. 73

The filler added shall be dry and clean lime-stone powder or hydrated lime, having content of not less than 60 per-cent and properties as per Table 4 of B. S. S No. 594 of 1958.

The sand shall consist of approved clean, natural, river bank, or pit sand or quarry sand produced in a crushing plant. It shall consist of hard, non- absorbent, but not necessarily sharp grains.

The coarse aggregate shall consist of clean trap stone of approved quality, free from dust and angular but not flaky.

If for any practical reason, grading as stated in the above cannot be adopted, written permission

should be same characteristic of the above grading. In each case suitability of the alternative grading should be established by Laboratory tests, the costs of which shall be borne by SI.

b) Construction:

The SIs shall be responsible to see that the sub-grade is properly consolidated so as to give a uniform and adequate support to the asphalt carpet for the period of its useful life. A thin layer of sand or stone dust should be spread over the compacted base and rolled before the asphaltic concrete carpet is laid where the base is water bound macadam otherwise the concrete base should be swept clean.

The asphalt mix will be laid by a mechanical compactor and finisher, the final consolidation being by means of a power roller preferably a tandem roller weighing not less than 10 tonnes. In other respect the method of transporting hot mix, laying and compacting shall be in accordance with clause 21 of B.S.S No. 594 of 1958. The cross fall from the crown to the water-tables or kerbs of the footpaths shall be between 1 in 40 to 1 in 50.

If the surface (wearing) course mix is laid without a base course on an existing asphalt surface, a tack of bitumen of rate 75 to 97 Kgs. per 100 sq.mt. shall be applied to the existing surface. The SI shall have a well-equipped testing laboratory with a competent laboratory staff. Daily tests shall be made by them on asphalt mixes produced to ensure compliance with this specification and a copy of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for record. Tests shall include, water absorption, stability flow, filler content, grading of aggregates, bitumen content, specific gravity, void content etc. The SI shall give all facilities at all times to the Engineer and his assistant to inspect the work of testing done by them. Each lorry leaving the plant must be weighed on Weigh Bridge in the presence of Engineer's Representative and challan must be issued along with the lorry in duplicate showing the weight of the material loaded in the lorry. As and when required the said lorries shall be taken to other weigh bridges to check the weight of the materials stated on the challan and the charge for weighing shall be borne by the SIs. Prior to the commencement of the work the Engineer and the SI shall carry out a joint inspection of the existing surface to locate any areas where defective foundations or improperly consolidated trenches may have contributed to surface failure. During the progress of the regarding work, further checks on the adequacy of the foundations by means of trial holes, plate bearing tests, etc. shall be made and any defects noted shall be pointed out to the Engineer who will issue instruction for the necessary remedial action to be taken to ensure that a satisfactory foundation is available throughout the areas to be resurfaced. When the asphaltic concrete is to be laid at the bus stop the flow shall not exceed 12. It will be binding to the SI to maintain free of cost these roads and pavements for a period of 1 year from the last day of the month in which a particular work is completed. The defects in the asphalt paving which the SIs may be called upon to rectify are of the following types:

I. Deformation of the asphalt pavement resulting in waves, ruts showing on unevenness.




206

II. Cracking of the asphalt pavement resulting in admission of water to the sub-grade and the deterioration of the asphalt pavement adjoining the cracks, provided that if such cracking results from defective foundations, the SBIs will at their own cost carry out the necessary remedial work before the defects are rectified.

III. Disintegration/levelling of the asphalt resulting in the formation of pot holes. IV. Polishing of the asphalt pavement under traffic resulting in a surface on which the vehicles are liable

to skid.

Before calling upon the SI to remedy any defects in the surface an examination of the areas concerned shall be conducted by the Engineer in the presence of the SI. The limiting values of defects shall be as following:

I. Deformation 25 mm in 3 mts. II. Cracks exceeding 1.5 metres in length of 3 mm. in width. III. Disintegrated/ revelled surface exceeding 188 sq.cms in area and/or 12 mm in depth. IV. Polishing to the extent greater than that of a sample agreed to as a representative border line case

by the SI and the Engineer, cut from the road, divided into two approximately equal portions and retained for reference by the Engineer and by the SI.

v. Specification for hot mix asphalt macadam

Specification under the clause 8.2.4 for Asphaltic concrete shall apply to Asphalt Macadam also as far as mixing, weighing, transporting, laying, rolling etc. are concerned.

a) 50 mm to 80 mm thick Asphalt Macadam

Aggregates will have following grading: I.S Sieve Designation Percentage Passing 40 mm 100 25 mm 50 - 100 12.5 mm 26 - 26 6.3 mm 18 - 30 1. 18mm 10 - 20 75 micron 0 – 5 Bitumen (60/70 Penetration) content - 4.00 to 4.50 % by wt. of the total mix.

b) Asphalt Macadam of thickness 80 mm and above

Aggregates will have following grading: I.S. Sieve Designation Percentage Passing 50 mm 100 40 mm 55 - 100 20 mm 0 - 20 Bitumen (60/70 Penetration) Content 2.25 to 2.75% by wt. of total mix.

vi. Asphalt Macadam with premixed seal coat

a) Asphalt Macadam shall have thickness of 63 mm after consolidation. b) The bituminous macadam shall be laid by a mechanical compactor and finisher, the final

consolidation being by means of power roller weighing not less than 10 tonnes. The finished surface shall not very more than 12 mm above or below the designed level and the average thickness shall not be less than that specified.

c) The grading, composition and characteristics of the bituminous macadam shall be as follows: Aggregate grading: I. S Sieve Designation Percentage Passing 50mm 100 40 mm 60 - 100 25 mm 30 - 70




207

20 mm 20 - 60 6.3 mm 10 - 20 2.36 mm 0 - 5 Bitumen (60/70 penetration) content. 3.5 to 4 percent by wt. of the total mix. d) The bituminous macadam may be prepared in a hot mix plant. The bitumen may be cut back

with a suitable solvent so that the heated cut back bitumen may be mixed with the aggregate. In either case mixing shall be carried out in a power driver purging mixer and shall be continued until all the aggregate are coated.

e) Pre-mixed Seal Coat After the bituminous macadam has been rolled, the interstices shall be completely filled with pre-

coated grit of the following composition: Aggregate Grading: I.S. Sieve Designation Percentage Passing 6.3 mm 100 2.36 mm 70 - 100 600 micron 25 - 50 300 micron 0 - 10 Bitumen (60/70 penetration) content ... 7.5 to 8 % by wt. of total mix. f) The premixed seal may be prepared in a hot mix plant and the bitumen may be cut back with a

suitable solvent so that the heated cut back bitumen may be mixed with the aggregate. In either case mixing shall be carried out in a power driven pug mill mixer and shall be continued until all the aggregates are coated.

d) Premixed seal must be brushed in to fill the interstices, additional material being applied during rolling if found necessary. The quantity of premixed seal required for this purpose will be approximately 1.2 cu.m per 1 00 sq. mt.

vii. Asphalt Macadam with liquid seal coat

a) Specifications for asphalt macadam will be the same as above. b) Liquid Seal Coat- On the completion of consolidation, which may be assisted by opening the road to traffic, a liquid seal coat of 80/100 penetration bitumen shall be applied at a temperature of from 325 degree F to 357 degree F at the rate of 123 Kg. per 100 sq.mt. c) The application of bitumen shall be immediately followed with cover coated of clean dry 6 mm cubical chipping at the rate of 1.2 cum. per 100 sq. mt. The surface shall then be rolled with a power roller weighing not less than 10 tonnes.

viii. Premixed Chip-coat

Aggregate Grading I.S Sieve Designation Percentage Passing 12.5 mm 100 1 8 mm 70 - 100 4.75 mm 20 - 40 2.36 mm 8 - 20 75 micron 0 - 4 Thickness 20 mm to 40 mm Bitumen (60/70 penetration) Content ... 4.5 to 5 percent by weight of the total mix.

ix. Construction of full gout and semi-grout road surface with seal coat

Specifications for preparation of sub-grade or sub-base for receiving the asphalting courses remain same as those given under section 8.2.4 & 8.2.5 above for bituminous concrete macadam courses.




208

a) Materials

The aggregates and bitumen for providing full grout or semi grout surface shall comply with specifications given earlier.

b) Construction I. Spreading

After preparation of sub-base 40 mm size metal shall in spread evenly at the rates indicated above to form uniform layer over the width of the road. It shall be completed to the required compacted thickness by rolling with 10-12 Ton roller.

II. Applying bitumen

Bitumen of I.S grade S.35, having 30/40 penetration shall be heated in a bitumen boiler to a temperature of 177 degree C to 191 degree C (350 degree F to 375 degree F) and that temperature shall be maintained at the time of actual application. Heating of bitumen shall be done in bitumen boilers with cock unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge. The heated bitumen shall be handled in iron buckets with handles or sprayers. The labour engaged in handling the heated bitumen shall use full length gumboots, leather hand gloves and leather jacket with fire proof apron to cover the chest and the back and reaching up to the knees. Two thermometers shall be maintained on the site and used for checking the temperature of the heated bitumen. The hot bitumen shall be applied through a pressure sprayer or when permitted, though a can with a rose to the road surface uniformly at the rates indicated above. The road surface shall be divided into suitable rectangles marked by chalk so as to ensure correct rate of application of the bitumen to penetrate to the full depth of the aggregate. Bitumen of I.S grade S-65 with 60/70 penetration may be used in cold weather, if so directed. When supply is made in bulk, pressure sprayers, or 'bowers' shall necessarily be used.

III. Blinding,

mm chips shall then be spread evenly over the road surface at a uniform rate indicated above immediately after applying the bitumen when it is still hot. Brooms shall also be used to ensure uniform thickness of the layer of chips

IV. Compacting Immediately after spraying the bitumen and spreading the blinding chips as specified the surface shall be rolled with a power roller to obtain full compaction and to force the blinding chips into the interstices of the coarse aggregate to pack them tightly. The rolling shall be continued till the asphalt hardens and the chips stop moving under the roller wheels.

V. Seal Coat Bitumen of I.S Grade S.90 having 80/100 penetration shall be heated in a bitumen boiler to a temperature ranging between 163 degree C to 177 degree C (325 Degree to 350 Degree F) which shall be maintained at the time of actual application. Hot bitumen shall be applied evenly at a uniform rate of 170 Kg/ 1100 sq.m (about 35 Ibs.1100 lbs/100 Sq.ft.) with a sprayer or a rose can.

VI. Blinding Immediately after applying the bitumen, the road surface shall be blinded evenly with 10 mm (about 318") size chips at a uniform rate of 1.2 cu.m/100 sq.m (about 4 cft.1100 sft.) Brooms shall be used to ensure the evenness of the layer of chips.

VII. Rolling over the seal coat The seal coat when laid as specified shall be rolled lightly with a power roller so as not to crush the chips.

1.18.23.3 PLANT, EQUIPMENT AND GENERAL METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION

1.18.23.2.1 Plant and Equipment

All equipment furnished by the SI shall be of approved design and shall be maintained in its best mechanical condition. Equipment if supplied on hire by the SBI shall be operated, maintained and serviced in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Equipment shall be serviced and




209

lubricated away from the paving site. Drip fuel, oil and grease shall be removed from the site until such leakage is corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.18.23.2.2 Asphalt mixing plants

All plants used by the SI for the preparation of asphalt paving mixes shall confirm to all the requirements of the job except that scale requirements shall apply only where weight proportioning is used. All batch mixing plants shall conform to the special requirements of the job.

1.18.23.2.3 Requirement for all plants

i) Uniformity The plants shall be designed, co-ordinated and operated so as to produce a mixture of proper and

uniform quality within limits specified. ii) Plant scales:

Scales for any weigh box or hopper may be either of the beam or springless dial type and shall be of standard make and design, sensitive to one half to one percent of the maximum load that may be required.

iii) Bituminous binder control unit: Satisfactory means either by weighing, metering, or volumetric measurements shall be provided to

obtain the proper amount of bituminous binder. All measuring devices are to be sensitive to not more than two per cent variation above or below the actual weight required to be measured.

1.18.23.2.4 Construction Method

i. Weather Limitation

The mixing and laying of asphalt mixes shall be performed only when weather conditions are suitable. When the moisture of the aggregate interferes with the uniformity of temperature of continuous plant operations, or pools of water are observed on the base, mixing and placing will not be permitted.

ii. Job mix formula

The SI shall make frequent gradation analysis of the hot aggregates and of the completed mix to be certain that the materials being used and produced are within the tolerances of the job mix formula and the specifications of the mix being used. If the mix is found to be outside the job mix formula tolerances or outside the specification limits, correction shall be made in the aggregate and bitumen proportions being used.

iii. Sampling and Testing

Stockpiles and bins shall be sampled for gradation analysis, dust coating and for other purposes, at the option of the Engineer-in-Charge. Gradation analysis of each type of aggregate shall be made at least twice a day. If the material does nor run uniform, more frequent tests shall be made in approved laboratory. The coat of tests shall be borne by SI.

iv. Proportioning and mixing

When the mix is produced in a hot mix type plant, the aggregate shall be accurately weighed or measured in the designed proportions to provide the specified batch weight. The temperature of the aggregate at the time of introduction into the mixer shall be as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge with a tolerance of ± 8.33 degree C. ( ±15 degree F). In no case shall the temperature of the mixture exceed 163 degree C (about 325 degree F) or be less than 121 degree C (about 250 degree F) unless otherwise specified elsewhere. Arrangements to watch and control the temperature shall be made by the SI by providing a thermometer to each boiler. The bitumen shall be heated so that it can be properly circulated through the pumping system and uniformly distributed throughout the batch. The degree of heat shall provide a material sufficiently fluid to produce a uniform coating on every particle of aggregate within the specified time. The temperature




210

of the aggregates and bitumen immediately prior to mixing be approximately that of the completed batch. In no case shall the temperature of the bitumen and the aggregate vary by more than 15 degree C (about 25 degree F) when placed in the mixing chamber. Continuous mix plants shall conform to these requirements and in general shall be controlled in the same manner as batch type plants. Details of control, differing because of the continuous mixing principles, shall be governed by the instructions issued by the plant manufacturer wherever the instructions are not contrary to this specification. When a continuous mix type plant is used and the number of revolutions of the feeder is indicated by a counter, a lorry load of mixture shall be weighed whenever an alteration is made in the feeder gate setting in order to determine the weight of aggregate delivered per revolution.

v. Spreading and finishing

These operations shall be conducted in the following manner: a) Mechanical Spreaders

The binder course mixture shall be spread and struck off with an approved self-powered and propelled mechanical spreader capable of spreading and finishing the mix true to the line grade and cross-section without the use of forms or side supports. Finishing machines shall be operated so that material does not accumulate and remain along the sides of the receiving hopper.

The finishing machine shall be equipped with a positive controlled mechanical screed. The screed shall be equipped with a suitable controlled heating device to be used when required. The screed shall strike off the mix to the elevation and cross-section specified without the aid of manual adjustment during operation. The term 'screed' includes any cutting or other practical device which will produce a smooth and uniform texture without tearing, showing or gauging.

Longitudinal joints and edges shall be constructed true to line marking. Lines shall be established by the Engineer parallel to the centreline of the proposed roadway for the paver to follow in placing individual lanes. The paver shall be positioned and operated to closely follow the established line. When using paver in echelon, the first paver shall follow the marks of lines and the second paver shall follow the edge of material placed by the first paver. In order to assure a hot joint and obtain proper compaction, the paver shall work as closely together as possible and in no case shall they be more than 75 m. (about 250') apart. In backing trucks against the finisher care shall be taken not to jar the finisher out of its proper alignment. Delivery of material to the paver shall be at a uniform rate in an amount well within the capacity of the paving and compacting equipment.

As soon as the first load of material has been spread, the texture of the unmilled surface shall be

checked to determine its uniformity. The adjustment of the screed, tamping bars, fees screws, hopper feed, etc. shall be checked frequently to assure uniform spreading of the mix to proper line and section and adequate initial compaction. Segregation of the materials shall not be permitted. If segregation occurs, the spreading, operation shall be immediately suspended until the cause is determined and corrected.

Construction joints shall be placed in the same vertical plans. Longitudinal joints shall be offset at least 8 cm (about 3") and transverse joints in succeeding course shall be offset at least 60 cm (about 2').

Any irregularities in alignment left by the payer shall be corrected by trimming directly behind the machine. Immediately after trimming, edges of the course shall be thoroughly compacted by tamping. Distortion of the pavement during this operation shall be avoided.

Edges against which additional pavement is to be placed shall be vertically formed true to line. A lute or covered rake shall be used immediately behind the finisher, when required, to obtain a true line and vertical edge. Any irregularities in the surface of the pavement course shall be corrected directly behind the paver. Excess material forming high spots shall be removed by a shovel or lute. Indented areas shall be filled with hot mix and smoothed with the back of a shovel being pulled over the surface. Fanning of material over such areas shall not be permitted

b) Motor Grader When the Engineer-in-Charge permits the use of motor graders, for the spreading of the mix, the

material shall be placed on the road bed in a window by window leveller, measuring devices or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge so that the proper amount of material is available. The mix shall be spread to the required thickness, line, section and grade with a uniform surface texture at a workable temperature. The Engineer-in-Charge may specify the length of the




211

windowed mix ahead of the spreading operations based upon the workability of the mix, weather conditions and the time required for the spreading operation.

c) Hand Spreading In small areas where the use of mechanical finishing equipment is not practicable, the mix may be

spread and finished by hand, if so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Approved wood or steel forms, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section, may be

used. In such instances measuring blocks and intermediate strips shall be used for obtaining the required cross section. Placing by hand shall be performed carefully, the material being distributed uniformly to avoid segregation of the coarse and fine aggregate during the spreading operation. All material shall be thoroughly loosened and uniformly distributed by lutes or covered rakes. Material that has formed into lumps and does not break down readily shall be rejected. Following placing and before rolling the surface shall be checked with templates and straight edges and all irregularities corrected.

Heating equipment for keeping hand tools free from asphalt shall be provided. Caution shall be exercised to prevent high heating temperature, which may burn the material. The temperature of the tools when used shall not be greater than the temperature of the mix being placed. Only heat will be employed to clean hand tools, petroleum oils or volatile shall not be permitted.

vi. Compaction

a) The wheels of the rollers shall be wetted while rolling over the premix etc. Rolling shall be by overlapping on successive trips by at least one half the width of tandem rollers

and uniformity lapping each preceding track or covering the entire surface with the rear wheels when three wheel rollers are used. The rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed (not to exceed five kms. per hour) with the drive roller or wheel nearest the paver. They shall be in good condition capable of being reversed with backlash and the line of rolling shall not be suddenly changed or the direction of rolling suddenly reversed, thereby displacing the mix. If rolling causes displacement of the material, the affected areas shall be loosened at once with lute or shovels and restored to the original section of the loose material before being re-rolled. Heavy equipment or rollers shall not be permitted to stand on the finished surface until it has thoroughly cooled.

(b) Transverse Joints: Transverse joints in both binder and surface course shall be carefully constructed and thoroughly

compacted to provide a smooth riding surface over these points in the pavement. Joints shall be straight edged and string lined to assure smoothness and true alignment. If the joint is formed with a bulk head such as board to provide a straight and vertical face, the joint face need not be trimmed before fresh material is placed against it to complete the joint. If a bulkhead is not used to form the joint and the roller is permitted to roll over the end of the new material, the line of joint shall be located back of the rounded edge a sufficient distance to provide a true surface and cross section. If the joint has been distorted by traffic or by other means, it shall be trimmed to line. In either case the joint face shall be painted with a thin coating of asphalt before the fresh material is placed against it.

(c) Longitudinal Joints: Longitudinal joints shall be rolled directly behind the paying operation. The first line placed shall be

true to line, section and grade and have a vertical face. The material being placed in the abutting lane shall then be tightly crowded against the vertical face of the previously placed lane. The finishing machine shall be positioned so that in spreading the material overlaps the edge of the lane previously placed by 3 to 5 cm shall be left sufficiently high to allow for compaction. The machine shall closely follow the line of markings placed along the joint for alignment purposes. The width and depth of the overlapped material shall be kept uniform at all times. Before rolling, the material overlapping the joint shall be carefully moved with a broom or lute on to the surface of the unrolled lane. Rolling shall be continued until a thoroughly compacted, neat joint is obtained. If only tandem rollers are available they shall be similarly operated to complete the joint. When abutting lane is not placed in the same day, or the joint is distorted during the day's work by traffic or by other means, the edge of the lane shall be carefully trimmed to line and painted with a very thin coating of asphalt before the abutting lane is placed.




212

vii. Density and surface requirements

The completed pavement shall have a density equal to or greater than 95 percent of a laboratory specimen made in the proportions of the job mix formula as specified above. The final surface shall be of a uniform texture conforming to line, section and grade shown on the plans. Before final acceptance of the project, or during the progress of the work, the thickness of the binder and surface course shall be determined by the Engineer and any unsatisfactory work shall be repaired, replaced or corrected. Both the density and thickness shall be carefully controlled during construction and shall be in full compliance with plans and specifications. During the compaction, preliminary tests as an aid for controlling the thickness shall be made by inserting a flat blade correctly graduated, through the material on top of the previously placed base or by other means acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge.

The checking of depth, cutting of test holes, refilling with acceptable materials and proper compaction shall be done by the SI under the supervision of the Engineer-in-Charge.

For the purpose of testing the finished surface on both binder and surface course, a straight edge 5m (about 16') long shall be used on vertical curves. The straight edge shall be held in successive positions parallel to the road centreline in contact with surface and the entire area checked from one side to the other. Advance along the pavement shall be in successive stages of not more than half the length of the straight edge. Any irregularities, which may develop before the completion of rolling, shall be remedied by loosening the surface mix and removing or adding material as may be required. Should any irregularities or defects remain after the final compaction, the surface course shall be removed promptly and sufficient new material laid to form a true and even surface. All minor surface projections, joint and minor honey-combed surfaces shall be ironed smooth as 'may be directed.

In order to check the average thickness, trial area shall be laid with a known weight of material in order to determine the area covered per tonne and daily checks shall be made on the coverage obtained with the assessed daily tonnage laid.

1.19 MODE OF MEASUREMENT

Note: Measurements shall be recorded only up to two digits after decimal point

ITEM UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

Pest Control Sq.mt of Carpet Area and not area of application

Breaking of IPS Demolition of walls greater than 175mm thick (with plaster)

Sq.mt in required thickness

Core cuts Removal of existing Plaster, tiles, flooring Breaking of IPS

Nos Sq.mt in required thickness

Making openings in wall Core cuts Removal of existing Plaster, tiles, flooring

Sq.mt mentioning the thickness.

POP Punning/Gypsum Punning Making openings in wall Core cuts

Sq.mt mentioning the thickness.

Gypsum False ceiling POP Punning/Gypsum Punning Making openings in wall

Sq.mt Verticals of all heights to be paid separately in Sq.mt mentioning the thickness.

Modular false ceiling Gypsum False ceiling POP Punning/Gypsum Punning

Sq.mt as per laid area. No deductions for light fittings Sq.mt. Verticals of all heights to be paid separately in Sq.mt

Modular ceiling 1200x1200mmModular false ceiling Gypsum False ceiling

Rate to include band rasters Sq.mt as per laid area. No deductions for light fittings Sq.mt. Verticals of all heights to be paid separately in Sq.mt




213


Trims, Axioms and band rasters Modular ceiling 1200x1200mmModular false ceiling

Rmt. Different widths to be paid separately Sq.mt Rate to include band rasters Sq.mt as per laid area. No deductions for light fittings

Double skinned Gypsum Partition Trims, Axioms and band rasters Modular ceiling 1200x1200mm

Rmt. Different widths to be paid separately Sq.mt. Rate to include band rasters

GI Frame work Double skinned Gypsum Partition Trims, Axioms and band rasters

Sq.mt up to true ceiling Rmt. Different widths to be paid separately

Glass wool insulation GI Frame work. Double skinned Gypsum Partition

Sq.mt up to true ceiling Sq.mt, up to true ceiling

First Skin of Gypsum Glass wool insulation GI Frame work

Sq.mt up to true ceiling. Running length of the Partition multiplied by the height Sq.mt, up to true ceiling Sq.mt, up to true ceiling

Second Skin of Gypsum, ply First Skin of Gypsum Glass wool insulation

Sq.mt Mode of measurement to be actual area on both sides Sq.mt, up to true ceiling. Running length of the Partition multiplied by the height Sq.mt, up to true ceiling

Modular Partition Second Skin of Gypsum, ply First Skin of Gypsum

Sq.mt Mode of measurement, up to false ceiling. Rate to include single skin Gypsum above the false ceiling as described in the BOQ Sq.mt. Mode of measurement to be actual area on both sides Sq.mt, up to true ceiling. Running length of the Partition multiplied by the height

Modular Glass Partition Modular Partition Second Skin of Gypsum, ply

Sq.mt Mode of measurement, up to false ceiling. Rate to include single skin Gypsum above the false ceiling as described in the BOQ. Sq.mt . Mode of measurement, up to false ceiling. Rate to include single skin Gypsum above the false ceiling as described in the BOQ Sq.mt. Mode of measurement to be actual area on both sides

Panelling and Boxing Modular Glass Partition Modular Partition

Sq.mt. All portions hidden behind the boxing will not be measured. Height of boxing will be not be greater than false ceiling height Sq.mt. Mode of measurement, up to false ceiling. Rate to include single skin Gypsum above the false ceiling as described in the BOQ. Sq.mt. Mode of measurement, up to false ceiling. Rate to include single skin Gypsum above the false ceiling as described in the BOQ

Doors Panelling and Boxing Modular Glass Partition

Sq.mt The rate to include shutter, finishes on shutter, frame, finishes on frames, all hardware like hinges, door closer, vision panel (if applicable), floor spring, locks, handles etc. as specified in the Drawings/BOQSq.mt . All portions hidden behind the boxing will not be measured. Height of boxing will be not be greater than false ceiling height Sq.mt. Mode of measurement, up to false ceiling. Rate to include single skin Gypsum above the false ceiling as described in the BOQ.




214


Loose furniture Doors Panelling and Boxing As per BOQ Sq.mt. The rate to include shutter, finishes on shutter, frame, finishes on frames, all hardware like hinges, door closer, vision panel (if applicable), floor spring, locks, handles etc. as specified in the Drawings/BOQSq.mt . All portions hidden behind the boxing will not be measured. Height of boxing will be not be greater than false ceiling height

Storages Loose furniture Doors Sq.mt. ELEVATIONAL area for a specified thickness as per BOQ Sq.mt. The rate to include shutter, finishes on shutter, frame, finishes on frames, all hardware like hinges, door closer, vision panel (if applicable), floor spring, locks, handles etc. as specified in the Drawings/BOQ

Paint Storages Loose furniture Sq.mt . ELEVATIONAL area for a specified thickness as per BOQ

Cavity floor Paint Storages Sq.mt for a thickness as specified in the BOQ Sq.mt . ELEVATIONAL area for a specified thickness

Vinyl floor Cavity floor Paint Sq.mt. The rate to include skirting Sq.mt for a thickness as specified in the BOQ Sq.mt.

Wooden floor Vinyl floor Cavity floor Sq.mt. The rate to include skirtingSq.mt for a thickness as specified in the BOQ

Skirting Wooden floor Vinyl floor Rmt. Sq.mt. The rate to include skirting

Frosted Film Skirting Wooden floor Sq.mt Rmt.

Railing Frosted Film Skirting Rmt of the Railing. Individual Pipes not to be paid separately Sq.mt Rmt.

Wall Paper Railing Frosted Film Sq.mt Rmt of the Railing. Individual Pipes not to be paid separatelySq.mt

Wall Paper Railing Sq.mt Rmt of the Railing. Individual Pipes not to be paid separately

Wall Paper Sq.mt

1.20 CALIBRATION OF EQUIPMENT

SI must keep the measuring devices to check the products for adherence to the specifications and quality mentioned in the tender documents.

Measuring devices as mentioned below must be kept at site along with the calibration report of the device used:

1. Metal Tape 2. Vernier Calliper 3. Screw Gauge 4. Pressure Gauge

It is the responsibility of the SI to provide calibration report of each device mentioned above. In case the validity of the certificate expires, then the SI has to either bring a new device with valid certification or get the old device re-certified through the accreditation agency.




215

All the measuring devices used at the time of execution for testing and checking of products should be calibrated from National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration, Laboratories Assessed and Accredited Agency.

1.21 Standard Practices and Codes

The following Standards and Codes are made part of this Specification. All the Standards and Codes of Practice referred to herein are references to the latest editions. SI has to incorporate any and all official amendments and revisions in below mentioned Standards and Codes.

Reinforcement

High yield strength deformed steel bars conforming to IS 1786 shall be used.

Structural Analysis and Design

Standard Design Codes

The latest versions of the following Indian Standard codes shall be used for the building design:

Standard Specification

IS 456: 2000 Plain and reinforced Concrete — Code of Practice

IS SP 34: 1987 Handbook on Concrete reinforcement and Detailing

IS 13920:1993 Ductile Detailing of Reinforced Concrete Structures Subjected to Seismic Forces

IS 875: 1987 Part 1 Code of Practice for Design Loads (other than earthquake) for Buildings and Structures — Dead Loads

IS 875: 1987 Part 2 Code of Practice for Design Loads (other than earthquake) for Buildings and Structures — Live Loads

IS 875: 2013 Part 3 Code of Practice for Design Loads (other than earthquake) for Buildings and Structures — Wind Loads

IS 875: 1987 Part 5 Code of Practice for Design Loads (other than earthquake) for Buildings and Structures — Special Loads and Load Combinations

IS 1893: 2002 Part 1 Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of structures - General Provisions and Buildings

IS 4326: 1993 Part 1 Code of Practice for Earthquake Resistant Design and Construction of Buildings

IS 800: 2007 General Construction in Steel — Code of Practice

IS 1904 (1986) Code of practice for design and construction of foundations in soils General requirements

IS 2911: 2010 Part 1 Section 1 Code of practice and construction of pile foundations - Driven cast in-situ concrete piles

IS 2911: 2010 Part 1 Section 2 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations - Board cast in-situ concrete piles

IS 2911: 2010 Part 1 Section 3 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations – Driven precast concrete piles

IS 2911: 2010 Part 1 Section 4 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations – Board precast concrete piles

IS 2911: 2010 Part 3 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations Under-reamed Pile concrete piles

IS 2950: 1981 Part 1 Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundations




216


IS 3370: 2009 Part 1 Code of Practice Concrete structures for the storage of liquids-General Requirements

IS 3370: 2009 Part 2 Code of Practice Concrete structures for the storage of liquids Reinforced concrete structures

Design Loads

Structures shall be designed to have sufficient structural capacity and integrity to resist safely and effectively all loads and effects of load combinations that may reasonably be expected. The design loads used for the structures, buildings and foundations shall conform to the requirements of the governing codes and specifications. As a minimum the design loads shall include dead load, operating loads, live load, rain load, wind load and seismic load. Where applicable, the design loads shall also include thermal load, impact load, vibration load, surcharge load etc. For the design and construction of basements, retaining walls, slabs on grade etc., the loads from soil earth pressures and buoyancy effects, if any, shall be considered. The units to be used for design and drawings are SI units (International System of Units).

Dead Loads

Self-weight of the structural members, weight of the floors, floor finishes, roofs, roof treatment, walls etc. shall be assumed as per the standard values available. Dead load will comprise of the weight of all permanent construction including walls, fire-proofing, water-proofing, floors, roofs, partitions, stairways, fixed services and all other equipment.

Live Loads

Live Loads shall consist of loads due to intended use and occupancy of the structure as per IS 875 Part 2 latest edition. The loads from equipment' on floors, terrace and on structural steel platforms shall also be not less than the load information provided by the respective OEMs/SIs. In addition to the live loads mentioned above, loads imposed by OH Tanks, machinery, including the effect of dynamic characteristics shall be considered. The loads due to the machinery and equipment shall be as specified by the manufacturer. Resonant conditions should be avoided by suitably proportioning the supporting structural members.

Wind Loads

The guidelines as per IS 875 part-3 shall be considered for actions of wind forces on the structure. Seismic Loads

IS 1893 latest edition shall be followed for calculating Seismic Loads. Pune city falls under Seismic Zone III. Since the project site is located close to the border of Seismic Zone III, all structures in this project development shall be designed in accordance with Zone IV requirement. Importance factor of less than 2 shall not be considered.

Thermal Loads

Thermal Loads caused by expansion and contraction due to a change in temperature from the erection condition shall be carefully considered. Included are forces due to anchorage of ping and equipment, sliding and rolling of equipment, and expansion and contraction of structures.




217

Impact Loads

Impact loads (I) shall be calculated in accordance with the requirements of IS: 875 (Part 5) and IS: 2974 codes. For loads being given by equipment SI, impact loads shall be as per information given on civil assignment drawing of equipment SI. Impact loads shall be considered in design & it shall not be used with wind/seismic load cases.

Vibration loads (V)

Vibration loads (V) shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations & Indian standards. Loads from the Fire Engine

The access (road) way shall be constructed to sustain the load of a 30 tonne fire engine. The wheel load shall be considered separately with the jack loads.

Material Grades

Severe condition of exposure as per IS: 456 shall be considered for concrete mix designing for all RCC structures except for RCC in pavements which shall be designed for moderate exposure condition. Reinforcement Bars - High strength deformed steel bars of grade Fe 500- corrosion resistant conforming to IS: 1786 shall be used.

Design Submissions

All designs shall be as per the relevant Indian Codes of Practice and all building structures and enabling works will meet the functional requirements. In general, all buildings shall be in reinforced cement concrete construction with suitable walk cladding. Chiller and other utility equipment’s will be supported on structural steel platforms.

Structural Safety during Construction

Proper provision shall be made, including temporary bracings to take care of all stresses due to erection loads. The structures as a whole and all parts of structure in conjunction with the temporary bracings shall be capable of sustaining these erection loads without exceeding the permissible stresses specified in respective codes of practice.

Fire Resistance

The design and construction methods shall be in accordance with Indian Standard Codes and other relevant Data Center standard codes.

Construction Works

The specification given by SI should cover the requirements for plain and reinforced cement concrete of different grades and structural steel works. The concrete shall comply with the requirements of latest IS: 456. Plain Cement Concrete (PCC) works shall be inclusive of formwork, centering, compaction, shuttering, de-shuttering, curing etc.

2. Plumbing Works

Basis of Design

The Plumbing, Sanitary, Drainage System for the project is designed for the following:

1. Requirement of adequate and equal pressure availability of water lines t o all Washrooms,




218

cafeteria, and any other areas etc.

2. Adequate storage of water in underground raw + treated domestic water tanks, preferably for 2 Days’ consumption.

3. Levels of roads / pavements and other services in the area.

4. Landscape layout.

The execution of works and materials used shall be as per the latest relevant IS specifications.

CONCEPT OF THE SYSTEM

The following services are envisaged for the complex:

1. Water Treatment Plant for meeting the domestic requirement should be as per SP: 35(S & T) 1987 which is considered safe for human consumption.

2. Sewage and Sullage collection system based on IS: 1742 and applicable standards for domestic drainage.

3. Storm / Rain water drainage system from various source of the buildings and disposal should be as per regulatory requirement.

Water Storage & Distribution System

Water Requirement

The water requirement for the project is proposed to be based on the provisions of IS: 1172 and prevalent practice

Source of Water

It is expected that part of the daily domestic water requirement for the Data Center Complex shall be through municipal/MIDC/Local Authority’s mains supply. Since it is unlikely that municipality would be able to meet the entire daily requirement, supply will have to be supplemented by having provision of adequate number of tube wells.

Drinking Water

It is proposed to provide localized UV units for water consumption points for direct consumption in Cafeteria.

Sewage and Sullage

The soil and waste shall be carried down in separate independently vented pipes. Two pipe drainage systems shall be adopted as per NBC (Part-IX). Provision of ASP vertical vent shall also be made for hygiene, safety consideration and to avoid foul smell.

Sanitary Fixtures & Fittings

Scope of Work

The scope of this section consists of but is not limited to supply, installation, testing and commissioning of following items:

• Sanitary appliances and fixtures for washrooms.

• Stainless steel/Ceramic sinks

• Accessories e.g. towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap dish, liquid soap dispensers, towel rails, coat




219

hooks etc.

• Hand driers, drinking water fountains etc.

• Water Purifiers with Water coolers

Whether specifically mentioned or not the SI shall provide for all appliances and fixtures all fixing devices, nuts, bolts, screws, hangers as required.

All exposed pipes within washrooms and near appliances/fixtures shall be of chromium plated brass or copper unless otherwise specified.

Washrooms

Gents Washroom:

SI shall provide 1 Gents washroom with minimum 2 western Comode, with all necessary fittings on each floor of the Data Center except server farm floor. There shall be minimum 3 urinals in each Gents washroom or as per the norms of statutory bodies.

Ladies Washroom

SI shall provide minimum 1 Ladies washroom with minimum 2 western Comode, with all necessary fittings on each floor of the Data Center except server farm floor or as per the norms of statutory bodies.

Gents and Ladies washroom will be opposite to each other and at two extreme ends of the floor.

Cisterns / Flush Valve

Low level flushing cistern (exposed or concealed) shall be provided for Water Closet (WC) in all washrooms. Provision of flush valve shall be made for all washrooms.

Jet Spray

Every western and Indian Commode should be fitted with a Jet Spray with minimum 1 Mtrs pipe.

Final Installation

The SI shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their final position in accordance with approved design. The installation shall be complete with all supply and waste connections. The connection between building and piping system and the sanitary fixtures shall be through proper unions and flanges to facilitate removal/replacement of sanitary fixtures without disturbing the built in piping system. All unions and flanges shall match in appearance with other exposed fittings.

Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets of water closet pans and similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are clear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall be paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by other causes. Overflows shall be made to ensure that necessary anchoring devices have been provided for supporting water closets, wash basins, sinks and other appliances.

Protection against damage

The SI shall take every precaution to protect all plumbing material including sanitary fixtures against damage, misuse, cracking, staining, breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement till the completion of the installation. At the time of handing over, the SI shall clean, disinfect and polish all the fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked chipped stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings free from defects shall be installed at SI’s cost to complete the work.




220

3. Specifications for NOC room

Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Interior Items for NOC

1. Scope of Work

The scope of the project includes design, engineering, supply, installation testing & commissioning of 24X7 mission critical Network Operation Center Interiors. As the NOC room is a significant place, it is imperative that it is designed properly in terms of Aesthetics, Ergonomics and Functionality. Various aspects should be considered while designing NOC area to create ideal work place, considering physiological aspects such as line of sight and field of vision and cognitive factors such as concentration and perceptivity as per ISO 11064.

The design of systems, equipment and facilities shall reflect human factors requirements including the following:

I. Satisfactory environmental conditions for operator personnel. Including noise, air flow, temperature and humidity, and precautionary measure under uncontrolled conditions (like fire) beyond acceptable limits.

II. Adequate space for personnel and equipment for the movements and activities that are required to be performed during operation and maintenance, under both normal and emergency conditions.

III. Adequate visual / auditory status information and other communication links between personnel and equipment under normal and emergency conditions.

IV. Adequate illumination for the performance of operation, control, maintenance and training.

V. The control room shall be built as per the criteria of “Human Factor Engineering” to improvise the efficiency utilization of the operators and provide them Fatigue free working environment.

VI. Objective: -

a. Ensure maximum standard of Safety.

b. Allow Flexibility

c. Minimize maintenance

d. Improve operator’s efficiency & alertness.

VII. Designing, manufacturing, testing, integration etc., all complete, preparation of the related drawings, documents, etc. of the NOC room shall be in the SI's scope. The NOCs design shall confirm the requirements & specifications of this bid document.

VIII. In broad, the Scope of Work and supply shall consist of the following parts: -

a. Interior Design, engineering of NOCs.

b. All related services for supply, installation, testing.

c. Spares & Documentation

IX. Detailed Scope of Work and supply shall include but not be limited to the following: -

a. Data Collection: Gather all information related to design of the NOC rooms.

b. Design Proposal: - Submission of various options of NOC room layout for SBI’s approval, strictly complying with ISO 11064.

X. General: -

a. The tentative control room area shall be provided to the NOC room designer to develop the




221

various options.

b. Supply of the product catalogue, technical proposals including but not limited to drawings, documentation, 3D views, color pallets, for the complete solution.

c. Provide commissioning & warranty spares (SI shall utilize these spares of all the equipment that may be required during commissioning & warranty period separately).

d. Manufacturer shall be responsible for safety and security of the installed items till commissioning and final acceptance by SBI (before start of warranty period).

e. Quality assurance & commissioning of the complete system at site to the Complete satisfaction of the SBI/Consultant.

Acoustic Requirements of NOC room

1. NOC room being dead zone in acoustical terms, threshold should be lower than the normal.

2. Use of Acoustics and psychoacoustics measurements are must. SI to highlight the same in drawings.

3. Selection of fire retardant/rated material is must.




222

4. Civil Formats

Format 1: Format of Concrete Cube Test Report

i. Name of the Project:

ii. Name of the SI/ Sub-Contractor:

Sr.No

Date of casting

Identification Mark and Location in

which the representative

concrete is placed

Mix Proportion

Date of Testing

Crushing strength as on the date of Testing

1 2 3 4 5 6

Crushing Strength as on 28th day

Average Crushing Strength (Average of 3 companion cubes)

as on the 28th Day

Remarks Signature of the Site

Engineer

7 8 9 10

Format 2: Format of Hindrance Register

Name of Work Date of State of Work

Name of Contractor Period of Completion

Agreement No. Date of Completion

Sr.no Nature of Hindrance

Date of Occurrence of Hindrance

Date of Which hindrance was removed

Period of Hindrance

Signature site Engineer / Project Engineer

Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6 76 7




223

Format 3: SPECIMEN OF LETTER GIVEN TO THE SI/SUB-CONTRACTOR IN REGARD TO THE RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTIVE VVORK AND REMOVAL OF SUBSTANDARD MATERIAL

To

M/s. _

Sir,

SUB: NATURE OF WORK

1. I, whereas the above work has been awarded to you under the subject contract and the same is in progress/the same has been completed.

2. Whereas the items of works as detailed in schedule attached herewith have been executed with unsound, imperfect and unskillful workmanship /with materials of inferior description and that materials and/or articles provided for the execution of the work are unsound and of a quality inferior to the contracted for.

3. Whereas the materials and/or articles provided by you for execution of the work as detailed in the schedule hereto are unsound and of quality inferior to that contracted for.

4. Now you are hereby called upon to rectify or remove and reconstruct forthwith each item of work as detailed in the said schedule of work in whole or in part as the case may require with sound, perfect and skillful workmanship and/or with materials and articles of sound and proper quality as per the contract at your own cost and charge.

5. I, in exercise of the powers conferred on me by the aforesaid agreement, hereby give you notice to remove the cause set out above within _______days to my satisfaction, falling which action will be taken against you under clause ___________of the agreement.

Yours faithfully,

Dy.GeneraI Manager




224

Format 4: Details of Insurance Policies

Type of policies Name of Insurance

Amounts Rs.

Policy No. Validity

Vehicle Policy including 3rd Party Liability

Workmen’s Compensation

Remarks:

1. This is only an ‘on-account' payment and is not to be interpreted either as approval of work, materials brought or affixed at site or for that matter approval of any sort.

2. The quantum of work done and materials delivered at site have been certified by __________

3. Should you wish to audit such work, kindly contact the undersigned and oblige.




225

Format 4: Format for Materials at Site

Sr.no Description Opening Balance

Receipt during month

Consumption During month

Closing Balance

Total Quantity received till date

1 Cement(M.T)

2 Mild Steel

(M.T)

3

Tor Steel (M.T)/ Fusion bonded Steel

4 Coarse

Aggregate (cu.mt)

5 Fine

Aggregate (cu.mt)

6 Teal Wood

(cu.mt)

7 Bricks (nos.)

8 Tiles (nos.)

9 Other items

10

Sr.no Description of work Date of Commencement

Due Date of Completion

Percentage Progress achieved

1 General Building Work

2 Security Equipment Work

3 Pest Control Equipment Work

4 Sanitary and Plumbing work

5 Electrical work

6 Air Conditioning work

7 Other work

8




226

Annexure – Q3: Electrical Guidelines and Scope of Work

SI to provide detailed electromechanical solution including (but not limited to) concepts design, detailed design, supply, installation, testing & commissioning, as per details provided below:

1. Electrical infrastructure for the entire campus including the Data Center as per TIER 4 norms. 2. Physical and electronic security and surveillance system catering to the campus and Data Center

modules. 3. Commissioning of redundant utility power as per DC design requirement.

1.1. POWER REQUIREMENTS (Indicative)

Functional Area

Power Load

Data Center

Total Number of Racks = 1500

Indicative Rack power requirement as follow:

1. IT Load @15 KVA per Rack × 300 Racks



4. MUX Room load@6 KVA per Rack x 30 Racks x 2

Approx. Total IT Load required = 13860KVA or 13.86MVA

However, the SI shall be responsible to conduct a detailed study of the power requirement in order to propose and receive SBI approval and required electrical infrastructure (e.g. transformers, switchboards, PDUs etc.). Different power density for racks considered are indicative, moreover actual power requirement at individual rack level may change during the installation of racks, hence power cabling consideration should be such that it can withstand even higher power load requirement till rack level. SI to provide dual path for fibre and Ethernet cabling. Power and network cabling should be separated as per DC cabling standard requirement. Ceiling strength should be capable of sustaining the load of entire power and network cabling. Meet me room (Telco room) should be considered a separate entry. Bus bar system should be Top designed for every floor.

1.1.1. General Scope of Work

i. Power backup system should cater to all the IT and Non-IT load.

ii. Distribution transformer shall be in redundant set up, each unit to be independently capable to delivering 100% electrical load of the facility.

iii. SI to propose high efficiency diesel generator with its fuel efficiency certified by the Pollution Control Agency. The diesel generator to work as per the load conditions synchronized through the sync panel and number of diesel generators will be decided as per the availability requirements of the facility and corresponding facility requirements.

iv. High efficiency modular UPS to be deployed as per load requirements with flexibility for expansion. The Modular UPS to have inbuilt redundancy along with a redundant power delivery path.

v. Power to PDUs and Power from PDUs to racks shall be with Bus Bar trunking.

vi. Treated Fresh Air (TFA) to be considered for all areas.




227

vii. Lithium Battery banks for the Modular UPS shall be considered for high efficiency operation and long service life. Any addition of module to UPS and Battery bank should be non-disruptive and be replaced without any downtime of UPS and Batteries.

viii. The entire data center facility to be monitored through Integrated Building Management System.

ix. Full Load Testing shall be performed for all Electro-Mechanical Equipment and corresponding satisfactory report shall be submitted to SBI immediately after installation of each equipment. Necessary Load for Full load testing shall be arrange by SI.

x. The SI shall carry out and complete the entire electrical work under this contract in every respect in conformity with the contract documents and with the direction of and to the satisfaction of SBI authorized Engineer/Site-In charge and /or 3rd party agency appointed by SBI or SBI itself.

xi. All items procured under this contract should be maintainable for the entire period of the contract (including extensions, if any). The SI has to replace non-maintainable items, maintain DC uptime as per SLA.

xii. Separate shaft to be created for Electrical, HVAC, PAC, CAC etc. and Network requirements across all floors.

xiii. Power System Analysis: Up-to-date short circuit study, coordination study, arc flash analysis, and load flow study and submit these reports to SBI.

xiv. MUX room should be designed such as to maintain optimum network latency.

xv. Automatic Transfer Switch IS rated shall be included in design as per the design requirements and specifications.

xvi. Central Power Monitoring

a) "Monitored Points : Utility, Main Transformer, UPS, Generator, Feeder Circuit Breakers, Automatic Static Transfer Switch, PDU, Automatic Transfer Switches, Surge Protection Device, Critical Load Branch Circuits"

b) "Notification Method: Control Room Console, Email, and/or text message to multiple facility personnel" or any other remote monitoring facility.

xvii. Computer Room Emergency Power system shall be deployed by the SI.

xviii. Data center grounding infrastructure in computer room : As required by ANSI/I-IA-607-B

xix. SI should also include Lightning Arrestors Lightning protection system in the electrical architecture.

xx. Thermal, motion sensors etc. should be used in the design as per the design requirements and specifications for automation and saving electricity.

xxi. Factory Acceptance Testing for all equipment’s shall be done before installation, commissioning, erection of any equipment.

xxii. Ventilation / Exhaust Fans for transformer rooms, electrical rooms, purging system for server area, UPS area, pressurization system for staircase, lift shaft, electrical shafts etc. shall be designed while designing the electrical architecture.

The SI shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment transportation and incidental necessary for supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete electrical system as described in this document. This includes but not limited to any material, equipment, appliances and incidental work not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Drawings/Documents as being furnished or installed, but which are necessary to be performed under this contract as per list (indicative but not limited to) provided below:

i. All conduit work including junction boxes, outlet boxes and wiring for lighting and power circuit ii. Supply and installation of two (2) substation equipment like HT panels and Sub Station

earthing iii. HT & LT panels, Transformers & DG iv. Switches, plug sockets, cover plates and other wiring accessories




228

v. Cables (LT), Mains and Sub-Mains vi. Bus Ducts, bus trunking, rising mains, sandwiched busbar system vii. GI raceways and junction boxes viii. LT panel, Main Distribution / Sub Distribution panels, Final Distribution panels & Capacitor

Panels and distribution boards. ix. Cables on cable trays and / or within suspended ceiling spaces including installation, cable

trays, hangers, supports, cable terminations and all fixing accessories. x. Earthing (Grounding) System (for LT panels, modular UPS, HVAC, Lightning arrestors, DB‟s,

Motors, cable trays, raceways etc. xi. Advance Lightning Protection System. xii. Supply and installation of Lighting Fixtures- Energy saving LED with sensors / dimmable facility

as per the LUX levels set. xiii. Installation of transformers and terminations to HVAC equipment, modular UPS, Plumbing, Fire

Fighting, IBMS equipment, HSD, STP, WTP etc. xiv. Supply and installation of conducting & cabling for Voice & Data Network. xv. Supply and installation of Landscape lighting, supply and installation of cabling, feeder pillars,

earthling. xvii. Integration with Solar Power for entire utility load.


IS: 694

PVC insulated Electric cable for working voltage up to and including 1100 volts.

IS: 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring and installation

IS: 1255 Code of Practice for installation and maintenance of Power Cables up to and including 33 KV rating (Second Revision)

IS: 1258 Bayonet lamp holders(Third revision)

IS : 1554 (Part - I)

PVC insulated (Heavy Duty) electric cables for working voltages up to and including 1100 volts.

IS: 1646 Electrical installation fire safety of buildings (general) Code of practice.

IS: 1885 Glossary of items for electrical cables and conductors

IS: 1913 General and safety requirements for fluorescent lamps luminaries Tubular.

IS: 2026 (Part I to IV)& IS:11171

Power Transformers

IS: 2071 -1 High Voltage Test techniques (General Definition & Test requirements)

IS: 2071 -2 Method of High voltage Testing (Test Procedure)

IS: 2071 -3 Method of High voltage Testing (Measuring Devices)

IS: 2309 Protection of building and allied structures against lightning




229

IS: 2551- Danger notice plate.

IS: 3043 Code of practice for earthing.

IS: 13118 AC Metal enclosed switch gear and control gear for rated voltages above 1 KV and up to and including 52 KV.

IS: 4146 Application guide for voltage transformers

IS: 5133 (Part -I) Boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories.

IS: 5216 (Part-I) Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work.

IS: 5424 Rubber mats for electrical purposes.

IS: 5578 & 11353 Marking and arrangement of bus bars

IS: 7098 - (Part - II) Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables. For working voltages from 3.3 KV up to and including 33 kV

IS: 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords

IS: 8623 - (Part -I) Factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear for voltages up to and including 1000 V AC and 1200 V D C.

IS: 8623 - (Part -II) Bus Bar trucking system

IS: 8828 Miniature Circuit Breakers

IS: 9537 Rigid Steel Conduits for electrical wiring (Second Revisions)

IS: 10810 Methods of test for cables.

IS: 12640 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

IS: 13947 -1 Specification for Low voltage switchgear and control gear (general)

IS: 13947 -2 Specification for Low voltage switchgear and control gear(circuit breakers)

IS: 13947 -3 Specification for Low voltage switchgear and control gear (Switches and disconnectors).

1.2. HT CABLES

All the HT cables used should be minimum 11KV/33KV earthed (as per local supply authority) or suitable as per the state grid supply and all the cables used should be multi core copper conductor XLPE cables. The cables shall confirm to IS Standards IS 7098 (Part-II): Specifications for cross linked polyethylene Insulated PVC sheathed cables for working voltages from 3.3 KV up to and including 33 kV.




230

1.2.1. General Technical Requirements

i. Maximum continuous operating temperature shall be 90° C under normal operation and 250° C under short circuit condition.

ii. The insulation (XLPE) screening shall be provided consisting of extruded semi-conducting cross link material in combination with a metallic layer of copper tapes.

iii. The PVC compound for the outer sheath shall conform to type ST-2 of IS: 5831 - 1984 (amended up to date). The color of the outer sheath shall be black.

iv. The cable shall bear ISI mark.

v. Non erasable Sequential Marking of length shall be provided by embossing on outer sheath of the cable for each meter length.

vi. The quality of insulation should be good and insulation should not be deteriorated when exposed to the climatic conditions.

vii. Outer sheath shall be designed to afford high degree of mechanical protection and shall also be heat, oil, chemical and weather resistant, Common acid, alkalis and sealing solution shall not have adverse effect on material of PVC sheath.

viii. The cable conductor shall be made from high conductivity stranded High Density aluminum to form compacted circular shaped conductor having resistance within limits specified in IS: 8130/1984 and any latest amendment to it.

ix. The conductor having semi-conducing screen shall ensure perfectly smooth profile and avoid concentration of stress. The conductor screen shall be extruded in the same operation as the insulation. The semiconducting polymer shall be cross linked.

x. Insulation shield: Non-metallic semi-conducting shield shall be provided over the insulation to confine electrical field to the insulation. The insulation shield shall be extruded in the same operation as the conductor shield and the insulation by suitable extrusion process. The XLPE insulation shield shall be of tended type. The copper metallic overlapped tape shield shall be provided.

xi. Filler and Inner-Sheath: The sheath shall be suitable to withstand the site conditions and the desired temperature. It shall be of adequate thickness, consistent quality and free from all defects. The PVC sheath shall be extruded. The material of fillers and inner-sheath shall be compatible with the temperature ratings of the cable and shall have no dexterous effect on any other component of the cable. Central PVC filler shall also, be provided with other peripheral PVC fillers to have proper circular section.

xii. Outer-Sheath: Extruded type ST-2 PVC outer-sheath, conforming to IS: 5831-(1984) (latest edition) over armoring with suitable additives (to prevent attack by rodents and termites), shall be provided.

xiii. Armour: Armoring of galvanized steel strip shall be provided. The dimensions of steel strips shall be as per latest edition of IS: 3975 – 1979.

xiv. Cable shall be suitable for lying in covered trenches and / or buried underground in outdoor.

1.2.2. Tests And Testing Facilities (As per IS 1554) a) TYPE TESTS:

All the type tests in accordance with IS: 7098 (Part 2) - 1985, amended up to date, shall be performed on cable samples drawn by SI. Type tests are required to be carried out from the first lot of supply on a sample of any one size of cable ordered for each voltage grade. In case facilities of any of the type tests are not available at the works of the supplier, then such type test shall be carried out by the supplier at the




231

independent laboratory at the cost of supplier. Sample for the type test will be drawn by the purchaser's representative and the type test will be witnessed by him.

b) ROUTINE TESTS:

All the Routine tests as per IS: 7098 (Part 2) - 1985 amended up to date shall be carried out on each and every delivery length of cable. The result should be given in test report. Partial discharge test must be carried out in a fully screened test cell. It is, therefore, absolutely essential that the manufacturer should have the appropriate type of facility to conduct this test which is routine test. The details of facility available in the manufacturer's works in this connection should be given in the bid.

c) ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

All Acceptance tests as per IS:7098 (Part 2) - 1985 as modified up to date including the optional test and Flammability Test shall be carried out on sample taken from the delivery lot.

d) SHORT CIRCUIT TEST:

The SI shall also undertake to arrange for the short circuit test as a type test on any one size of each voltage grade i.e. on one size of 11 kV, one size of 22 kV and one size of 33 kV earthed grade shielded XLPE cables ordered at a recognized testing center such as Central Power Research Institute at Bangalore/ Bhopal at the cost of supplier. If facilities for carrying out short circuit tests are available at the works of the supplier, and provided the certification procedure is approved by the Purchaser, testing at the supplier's works will be acceptable. The short circuit test shall be preceded and followed by the following tests so as to ensure that the characteristics of the cable remain within the permissible limits even after it is subjected to the required short circuit rating.

(1) Partial Discharge Test. (2) Conductor Resistance Test.

(3) High Voltage Test. e) Testing during Erection and Commissioning:

(1) Continuity Resistance test prior to laying cable. (2) Physical and visual check for any damages, cuts, armor piercing etc. (3) Insulation Resistance Test (4) Complete cable route should have route marker.

1.2.3. Service Conditions:

HT Cables shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions. Maximum ambient temperature (deg C) 50 Maximum temperature in shade (deg C) 45 Minimum temperature in air (deg C) in shade 3.5 Relative Humidity (%) 10 to 100 Maximum annual Rainfall (mm) 1450 Maximum Wind Pressure (kg/mm2) 150 Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50 Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) 0.3 g Moderately hot and humid tropical climate, Conducive to rust and fungus growth.

1.3. CONTROL / LT CABLES:

i) The control cables shall be round copper conductor (of required size) with PVC insulation, armoring and sheath, color coded as per relevant standards

ii) The LT Power cables shall be of copper conductor (of required size) PVC insulated, armoring and PVC sheathed, color coded as per relevant standards




232

iii) The control cables shall be rated for minimum 1100V and LT Power cables for minimum 6600V, however Bidder may quote for higher voltage ratings as per electrical system design, which shall be clearly brought out in the Technical Bid.

iv) All the cables quoted / supplied shall bear ISI mark.

v) The insulation of each core and outer and inner sheath, shall comply with the relevant IS / this Specification, whichever is stringent, for control and / or power cables.

vi) All the armoring shall be strip / round wire type, hot dip galvanized. The armoring and galvanizing shall comply with relevant standards and or this specification shall also bear ISI mark.

vii) The copper conductor used shall be electrolytic grade annealed and shall be made of minimum 99.5% pure copper, thus the total impurities shall not exceed 0.5%. The Aluminum conductor shall be of EC Grade 99.5% pure aluminum and thus the total impurities in this case also shall not exceed 0.5%. Both the copper and aluminum shall possess ISI mark.

viii) If the conductor is a bought out item or manufactured by the supplier, the proof to satisfy the above conditions shall be produced.

ix) The cables shall be suitable for being installed directly in the ground, in the pipes or in the cable trays/trenches.

1.4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 3000/2750/1500/630KVA, 11/33KV/ 0.415 KV DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS.

1.4.1. SCOPE:

a) The specification covers design manufacture, testing packing and delivery of 3 phase 50 Hz, Dry Type (VPI) distribution transformer of rating 3000/2750/1500/630KVA 33/11KV/0.433 kV or as required by MSEB (Indoor) confirming IS: 2026 1981 Part ( I TO IV), IS: 11171 1985 and IEC 76.

(1) To meet the load requirements the transformers shall be used as suitable for the design requirements.

(2) The transformers are intend to step down 11/33KV power supply up to 415V three phase and the transformer shall be with ON load tap changer.

(3) The distribution transformers shall be dry type . Transformers shall operate without injurious heating at the rated capacity within +10 percent of the rated voltage of the particular tap.

(4) Transformers shall be capable of delivering the rated current at a voltage equal to 105 percent of the rated voltage without exceeding the limiting temperature rise.

(5) The maximum loading of each transformer shall not be more than 80% in all situations.

(6) All the equipment’s to be used shall be designed, manufactured and tested with the latest applicable Bureau of Indian Standards.

(7) The transformers shall be capable of operating in 50 degree C outdoor temperature and relative humidity of 10 – 100%

(8) The transformers rating should be maintained at 0.9pf for minimum period of 10 years from the date of its use.

(9) All the transformers used shall be grounded with minimum copper plate earthing.

(10) Total No load and load losses shall not be more than 1%.

(11) HV and LV windings shall be wound from Super Enamel covered / Double Paper covered copper conductor/foil winding for ratings above 100 kVA




233

(12) Design and quantity of the transformer should be considered for fault tolerant. The HT panel and the transformers preferably to be placed on ground. These redundant transformers shall be providing power to the racks of all the floors. SI to provide 2(N+1) provision for maximum availability of economic grid power. Distribution transformer should not be of oil type.

(13) SI to consider separate distribution transformers for chiller plant.

(14) SI to consider separate distribution transformer to common area load of office area, IBMS room, MDA room as well as utilities like a STP, fire pumps, lifts, basement ventilation, lift pressurization system.

b) The equipment offered shall be complete with all necessary parts for effective and trouble-free operation in the distribution system. Such parts will be deemed to be within the scope of the supply irrespective of whether they are specifically indicated in the commercial order or not.

c) It is not the intent to specify herein complete details of design and construction. The equipment offered shall conform to all relevant standards and be of high quality, sturdy, robust and of good workmanship and complete design in all respects. The equipment shall be capable to perform continuous and satisfactory operations in the actual service conditions at site and shall have sufficiently long life in service as per statutory requirements.

d) The Tenderer/supplier shall bind himself to abide by these considerations to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser and will be required to adjust such details at no extra cost to the purchaser over and above the tendered rates and prices.

e) TOLERANCES: Tolerances on all the dimensions shall be in accordance with provisions made in the relevant Indian standards and in these specifications. Otherwise the same will be governed by good engineering practice in conformity with required quality of the product.

f) GUARANTEE: The equipment shall be guaranteed for the period of five years from the date of commissioning. The equipment found defective within above guarantee period shall he replaced / repaired by the supplier free of cost, within one month of receipt of intimation. If defective equipment are not replaced / repaired within the specified period as above, the Employer shall recover an equivalent amount plus 15% supervision charges from any of the bills of the supplier.

1.4.2. SYSTEM PARTICULARS:

a) The transformers shall be suitable for indoor installation with following system particulars and should be suitable for service under fluctuations in supply voltage as permissible under Indian Electricity Act & Rules there under.

b) Nominal System Voltage as per MSEB requirements and guidelines

c) Corresponding Highest System Voltage as per MSEB requirements and guidelines

d) Neutral Earthing : Solidly earthed

e) Frequency : 50 Hz with ±3 % Tolerance

1.4.3. DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION:

a) CORE

(1) The core shall be of high grade cold rolled grain oriented (C.R.G.O) annealed steel lamination, having low loss and good grain properties, coated with insulation, bolted together to the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. All core clamping bolts shall be effectively insulated. The complete design of core must ensure permanency of the core losses with continuous working of the transformers.




234

(2) Core insulation –C-Class grade insulation paper of thickness 20 mils (0.5 mm) shall be used and make should be clearly stated in the offer along with test certificates.

(3) The successful bidder, shall be required to submit the manufacturer’s test report showing the Watt Loss per kg and the thickness of the core plate, to ascertain the quality of Core materials.

(4) The purchaser reserves the right to get tested at any Government recognized laboratory.

(5) The transformer core shall not be saturated for any value of V/f ratio to the extent of 112.5% of the rated value of V/f ratio (i.e. 11000 / 50) (due to combined effect of voltage and frequency) up to 12.5% without injurious heating at full load conditions and will not get saturated. The bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this situation.

b) FLUX DENSITY

Flux density should not be more than 1.55 Tesla at the rated voltage and frequency. The value of the flux density allowed in the design shall be clearly stated in the offer along with graph. The No load current shall not exceed 1.5 % of the full load current. The no load current shall not exceed 3 % of the full load current in L. V. Winding when the applied voltage is 112.5%

c) WINDING:

H. V. & L. V. Coils

(1) Material – Electrolytic copper.

(2) LV Winding -Conventional spiral winding should be in even layers. so that the neutral formation will be at top..

(3) Coil Insulation (HV/LV) – Insulated with class ‘C’ class insulation paper with vacuum pressure impregnated process in Varnish.

(4) Coil spacers and duct – For sectional winding high temperature Epoxy fiberglass or porcelain and for disc winding epoxy fiberglass (Minimum class F insulation & above) shall be used.

d) CORE CLAMPING:

(1) M.S channel used should be as per design requirements.

(2) 2 x 16 mm. High tensile bolts in parallel at each end will be used.

(3) The top yoke channels to be reinforced by adequate size of M.S flat with thickness not less than 6 mm, at equidistance if holes cutting is done for LT lead so as to avoid bending of channel.

(4) MS channels are to be painted by heat resistant paint.

e) TIE BOLTS:

(1) 8 nos. of tie rods of 20 mm. dia. high tensile steel in vertical formation.

(2) All top and bottom yoke nut bolts, if any, shall be MS and painted with heat and corrosion resistant paint before use.

(3) Drawing of the building of core to be approved before start of work.

(4) The base channels of the core shall not be cut channel.




235

f) CURRENT DENSITY:

Current density for HV and LV winding should not be more than 1.4 A/sq.mm. (However, ± 5 % tolerance for LV winding is permissible) for copper conductor.

g) LOSSES:

The losses at rated voltage for various ratings of transformers of 11/33 kV class shall be as per relevant IS and shall be calculated at 75°C as per limits specified in IS 2026.

1.5. HT/LT Power Panels, ACB, IMCCB’s All codes & standards means the latest, wherever not specified. The SI shall generally follow the Indian Standard codes of practice or the relevant British Standard Codes of Practice in the absence of corresponding Indian Standard. All Panels shall be fabricated only by a CPRI approved Panel builder i. The panel shall be metal-enclosed, free-standing compartmentalized, modular type suitable for

indoor installation. The panel shall be dust and vermin proof and the enclosure shall provide a degree of protection of not less than IP-52, IP54 or IP 55 .

ii. Control panel shall be fabricated out of 14 SWG cold rolled steel plates & properly supported using angles & channels. The Panels shall be divided into convenient continuous line. The whole panel shall be mounted on a base frame made out of suitable structural, preferably ISMC Channels. Joints of any king in sheet shall be seam welded, all welding slag grounded off and welding pit wiped smooth with plumber metal. All panels and covers shall be Vendor’s seal and signature properly fitted and square with the frames and holes in the panel correctly positioned. Self-threading screws shall not be used in the construction of switchboards.

iii. The Panel shall be fully compartmentalized with all doors on the front only. When compartment door is opened, busbar and cable alley shall be shrouded by barrier plates.

iv. All panels shall be provided with suitable cable alley and vertical bus bar alley. Vendor shall submit Busbar Calculation confirming the suitability of Busbars offered along with the bid.

v. Compartment door shall be inter-locked with the switch unit in such a way that the switch compartment door shall be hinged when the feeder switch is ON. The door of the compartment should be hinged and busbar chamber shall be fully removable type.

vi. All similar materials and removable parts of the panel shall be interchangeable. The panel shall be filled with the same family of switches for various ratings with a view to ensure uniformly of design, maintenance and replacements. A horizontal wire way with screwed cover shall be provided at the top/bottom to take inter-connecting control wiring between different vertical sections. Separate and adequate compartments shall be provided for accommodating instruments, indicating lamps, control contractors and control fuses etc. These shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without any danger of accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker busbar connections.

vii. Earth Busbar shall be provided all around the cubicle at the bottom & it shall be of the same size as neutral busbar.

1.5.1. LT Panels

This Specification covers the general requirements for design, manufacture, testing and supply of Main Distribution Boards (MDB / L.V. Panel). The SI shall install the Main Distribution Boards (MDB / L.V. Panel) and in full compliance to the specification of the international standards and same thing will be made available on Electrical Drawings (SLD)




236

APPLICABLE STANDARDS Unless specified otherwise Main Distribution board / L.V. Panel shall conform design, material, construction and performance to the International recommendations (IEC standards) and its corresponding Indian standards (IS standards) and in particular to the following publications: a) Low Voltage Switchboard IEC 60439-1/ IS: 8623 b) Degree of protection IEC 60529. In addition to the above listed standards, SI will also adhere to the local authority regulations, MIDC and Statutory Bodies.

a) The Panels shall be of compartmentalize design so that circuit arc / flash products do not create secondary faults and be fabricated out of high quality CRCA sheet, suitable for indoor installation having dead front operated and floor mounting type.

b) All CRCA sheet steel used in the construction of Panels shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. Joints of any kind in sheet steel shall be seam welded, all welding slag grounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal.

c) The Panels shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof and degree of protection being not less than IP: 54 IS: 2147 or IP: 55. Gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all covers shall be provided to render the joints dust proof. All doors and covers shall be fully gasketed with foam rubber and /or rubber strips and shall be lockable.

d) All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and secured with the frame and holds in the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes, taped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with bolts and nuts. Self-threading screws shall not be used in the construction of Panels.

e) Panels shall be preferably arranged in multi-tier formation. The size of the Panels shall be designed in such a way that the internal space is sufficient for hot air movement. If necessary, openings shall be provided for natural ventilation, but the said openings shall be screened with fine weld mesh.

f) The Panels shall be provided with removable sheet steel plates at top and bottom to drill holes for cable / conduit entry at site.

g) The Panels shall be designed to facilitate easy inspection, maintenance and repair.

h) The Panels shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment without distortion under normal and under short circuit condition.

i) The Panels shall be treated in seven tank process and powder coated

1.5.2. MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS / LOW VOLTAGE PANELS

a) GENERAL

(1) This Specification covers the general requirements for design, manufacture, testing and supply of Main Distribution Boards (MDB / L.V. Panel). The specific requirements and details of the main distribution board(s) or L.V. Panel(s) required are given on the drawings.

(2) In case of difference between this specification and the specified international standards and the local authority regulations, the more stringent requirements in compliance with local authority regulations shall prevail.




237

b) MANUFACTURER & PANEL BUILDER

(1) Panel Builder shall have type test for 5000Amp 100KA short circuit breaking capacity or above from CPRI/ERDA and shall have the reference of successful operation of same rating for more than two years.

(2) Panel Builder shall have type test for Form 4B construction and have the experience of supply Form 4B type panels.

c) APPLICABLE STANDARDS

(1) Unless specified otherwise Main Distribution board / L.V. Panel shall conform design, material, construction and performance to the International recommendations (IEC standards) and its corresponding Indian standards (IS standards) and in particular to the following publications:

(i) Low Voltage Switchboard IEC 60439-1/ IS: 8623

(ii) Degree of protection IEC 60529.

In addition to the above listed standards, the local authority regulations shall also be adhered to.

d) DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

(1) The main distribution boards shall be of standard, well tested and proven design which ensures maximum safety to personnel, maximum service reliability and economic operations for a lifetime of at least 20years. Design and construction shall be simple, well laid-out and shall provide good accessibility to components and parts.

(2) Unless specified otherwise, the form of construction for the main distribution board shall comply with Form-4b requirements of IEC 60439-1.

(3) Unless specified otherwise, the main distribution board shall be fixed version, ACB devices shall be withdrawable type and the IMCCB shall be fixed type.

(4) Main distribution boards shall be rated on the basis of voltage, current, frequency and the symmetrical breaking capacity of incorporated switching devices.

(5) The electrical system for all main distribution boards shall be 415 V, 50 Hz 3phase and neutral, 4-wire solidly earthed. The main distribution boards shall be suitable for operating voltage up to 690 V and Insulation voltage of 1000V.

(6) The fault level withstands capacity of the main distribution board busbar system rated up to 5000Amps shall be 100KA RMS for 1second as minimum standard. The breaking capacity of the ACB shall be 50KA as minimum standard. The type test certificate shall be submitted for consultant engineer verification, to prove the fault level withstand capacity of the main distribution boards.




238

(7) All equipment and components of the main distribution boards shall be capable of continuous operation at their full current and voltage ratings and without detriment or malfunction at system continuous deviation of up to and including the following percentages of the normal values.

(i) Voltages ± 10%

(ii) Frequency ± 5%

All components shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic, thermal and dielectric stresses resulting from prospective short circuit currents without damage or injury to personnel.

e) CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

(1) General

(i) The main distribution boards shall be manufactured by an approved panel builder, who shall pre-qualify and comply with requirements specified this specification. The main distribution boards shall be manufactured by the same panel builder / manufacturer, who shall manufacture the sub-main, motor control center and final distribution boards.

(ii) Type test certificates shall be available for the proposed type of enclosure and the busbar system. The type test certificates shall clearly state type, model and main characteristics of the assembly, references of the standards applied for the tests, results obtained and the observations made during & after the tests.

(iii) Design drawings, component catalogues and type test certificates shall be submitted for consultant approval prior to placement of order for the main distribution boards.

(2) General Arrangement & Assembly

(i) L.V Panel shall comprise of free standing enclosure, bus bar system, switching devices such as ACB/IMCCB, metering equipment, current transformers and all other necessary components as required. Panel shall be assembled in a systematic manner such as Transformer Incomer section, Generator Incomer section (if applicable), Bus coupler section (if applicable), Incomer Metering / Indication section and Outgoing section.

(ii) Unless otherwise specified the panels shall be designed to accept bottom/top entry of cables. The rear access shall only be provided for termination of cables, all other equipment shall be accessible / operable from the front of panel. If front access is specified, the panel shall be designed completely for front access only (with cable alley in front).

(iii) Each panel section (cable compartment) shall be provided with thermostatically controlled space heater.

(iv) Each section shall be arranged typically as described below and as per the details shown in the drawings:

(a) Incomer section (Transformer Incoming)

Transformer Incomer panel shall be a 3 compartment enclosure with Top & Bottom compartment dedicated for metering / controls and the Middle compartment shall be dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not limited to the following: Bottom Compartment

• Incomer supply cable / bus duct

Middle Compartment

• Main Incoming circuit breakers with rating and type as per the drawing.




239

Top Compartment (i) Any control component for Incoming circuit breaker. (ii) Digital power meter to indicate various electrical parameters (iii) Phase indication lamps (R, Y, B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker. (iv) Power factor meter (If required as per local authority requirement). (v) KWH energy meter (If location of KWh is approved by local authority).

(b) Incomer section (Generator Incoming) – (If applicable)

Generator Incomer panel shall be a 3 compartment enclosure with Top & Bottom compartment dedicated for metering / controls and the Middle compartment shall be dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not limited to the following: Bottom Compartment

• Incomer supply cables/bus duct

Middle Compartment

• Main Incoming circuit breakers with rating and type as per the drawing.

Top Compartment (i) Any control component for Incoming circuit breaker. (ii) Digital power meter to indicate various electrical parameters (iii) Phase indication lamps (R, Y, B) wired to the line side of the circuit breaker. (iv) KWH energy meter (If shown in the drawings).

(c) Bus coupler / Bus Tie section – (If applicable)

The Bus Tie / Bus Coupler Panel shall be a 3 compartment enclosure to match with the incomer panels. The Top & Bottom compartment can be used for accommodating the common controls of the incoming and the bus tie circuit breakers. The Middle compartment shall be dedicated for the circuit breaker. It shall comprise of but not limited to the following: Notes:

(i) Where ACB’s are used as incoming or bus coupler, the front face of the ACB shall be accessible for operation from the front without opening the feeder door.

(ii) Where IMCCB’s are used as incoming or bus coupler circuit breakers a Direct Rotary handle shall be provided at the front face of the IMCCB which is operated from front door. All such handles shall be door interlocked wherever required.

(d) Outgoing section(s)

The outgoing section(s) enclosure shall accommodate the outgoing circuit breakers which shall be arranged in a systematic and symmetrical manner. It shall comprise of but not limited to the following: Each panel shall have various fixed compartments with individual doors for each compartment and each compartment shall accommodate the following: (i) Circuit breakers with rating and type as specified in the drawings.

(ii) Any other controls, which may be part of the outgoing circuit breakers. Notes: (i) All circuit breakers and other controls pertaining to a feeder shall be accommodated in its own compartment, which shall have its own feeder doors. Keys for all such External door shall be common. (ii) Moulded case circuit breaker in each compartment shall be equipped with an operating handle extended to the front face of the door for operation. All such door handles shall be door interlocked, wherever required. (iii) Air circuit breaker front face shall be accessible without opening the door. (iv) Circuit breakers and other control components shall be fully accessible after opening the panel door, however no live parts shall be exposed. (v) All the bus bar connections / terminations to the outgoing circuit breakers shall be taken from the rear side of the circuit breaker, which shall be shrouded properly using metallic /




240

poly carbonate sheets. All the incomer IMCCB terminals shall be fully shrouded with original terminal shrouds from the IMCCB manufacturer, in such a way that no live parts of incomer side are exposed, when the front door is opened. (vi) Opening of the front door shall give access to the circuit breaker for rating adjustments etc. (vii) Maximum 2 nos. air circuit breakers shall be installed in one enclosure, provided that sufficient space for cable termination is provided and derating of circuit breaker is carried out as per manufacturer recommendations. (viii) Maximum 9 nos. of molded case circuit breakers (rated less than 250Amps) shall be installed in one enclosure, provided that sufficient cable termination is provided. (ix) All Partitioning and shrouding shall comply the requirements of Form-4b, construction as per IEC standards.

(3) Enclosure manufacturing

(i) Main distribution board enclosure shall be CRCA with bolted construction. CRCA shall be provided on the sheets, which shall prevent rust formation during storage and handling for processing, 13 tank pre-treatment process to be done on CRCA for corrosion protection before painting. The sheets have a fine surface finish, which gives good presentation to the painted components of the enclosure.

(ii) The enclosure shall be powder coated to an approved color. The painting process shall include removal of moisture on the sheet steel surface using and applying epoxy powder coating using automatic guns. Polymerization of the powder shall take place when the components are cured at about 180ºC, forming a continuous integrated coating. A fairly uniform coating of at least 70-80 microns shall be provided.

(iii) The pre-treated and powder coated sheet steel components shall be at least tested randomly at regular intervals for coating thickness measurement, bending test, impact test, hardness test, salt spray test etc.

(4) Enclosure construction

(i) Main distribution board enclosure shall be fabricated of minimum 2 mm thick CRCA sheet steel folded construction. Door and partitions shall be minimum 1.6mm think CRCA Sheet. The enclosure shall be of simple and robust construction designed for a variety of dimensions obtainable by means of standardized basic elements. Main distribution board shall consist of several enclosures of equal height and depth mounted side by side to form a composite board of uniform assembly.

(ii) Unless specified otherwise, the main distribution board shall be with ingress protection rating of IP41 for 3200Amp and above. Below 3200Amp panel shall be with IP54 degree of protection.

(iii) Unless specified otherwise, Main distribution boards shall be designed for front access for the purpose of operation and access to all components and shall suit front or rear access for cable connections and top or bottom for cable entries. Wherever required, enclosure shall be suitable for bus duct entry at the top. The access and entries shall be provided as per site requirements.

(iv) Adequate care shall be taken while designing the main distribution board connection spaces for the external cables. Sufficient cable supports shall be provided for routing the cables inside the enclosure.

(v) Enclosure system shall effectively dispose the heat produced by the main circuits and shall integrate a high performance natural or force ventilation system which shall be aimed at regulating the internal temperature based on the actual capacities of the components.




241

(vi) Form-4 construction assembly shall provide protection against contact with internal live parts and components. Busbars, functional units and cable termination shall be segregated from each other as given below:

(a) Busbars shall be separated from functional units;

(b) Functional units / switching devices shall be separated from each other;

(c) Cable termination and functional units / switching devices shall be separated from each other;

(d) Incoming and outgoing terminals shall be separated from each other.

Busbars shall be accommodated in a separate chamber/alley with metallic shrouds and partitions to avoid accidental external contacts.

Incoming switching device shall be located in separate section and outgoing switching devices in other sections, wherever applicable. Each switching device shall be segregated from each other and located in individual compartment with hinged door.

External cable termination to the switching device terminals shall be outside the functional unit / switching device compartment. Segregation shall be made between the switching device terminal and the switching device within its compartment by means of rigid barriers and partitions.

All segregation shall be achieved by means of rigid metallic sheet partitions. Segregation and partition shall ensure protection against contact with live parts and limitation of the faults within each of the functional unit compartment.

A cable alley shall be provided either at rear or at the side of each section as per site conditions and requirements to facilitate the switching device cable glanding. Cables shall be glanded on the bottom/top plate of common cable alley/chamber. External cable termination shall be carried out in an enclosed individual termination compartment for each switching device, which is external to but separated from functional unit compartment. The cable termination compartment shall be provided with cable entry shrouds at the cable entry in to the compartments. Supports shall be provided to fasten the power and control cables inside cable alley/chamber.

(5) Busbars

(i) The fault level rating of the busbar system shall be as per the drawings however the minimum short circuit withstand capacity shall be 50KA RMS for 1second. Neutral busbar shall be able to withstand a thermal stress of at least 50%, corresponding to the main phase busbar rated short circuit withstand capacity.

(ii) The busbar shall be high grade electrolytic tin plated copper (with 99.9% conductivity), rectangular and rigid construction. The phase busbar and neutral busbar shall be arranged systematically in a busbar chamber/ alley. The busbar shall be color sleeved throughout the length for phase identification (except for the distribution busbar of the withdrawable sections). The busbar shall be shrouded completely using metallic partitions and/or polycarbonate shrouds as applicable. The busbar assembly shall be shrouded (at least IP20) by shrouds so that no live parts are accessible. Phase identification shall be done systematically.

(iii) The busbar system shall be supported adequately at regular intervals. The supports shall be independently fixed to structure to strengthen the busbar arrangement. Wherever required additional intermediate supports shall be provided between the busbar. All vertical droppers shall also be adequately supported. The distribution busbar shall be connected to the main busbar by suitable sized and graded bolt & nut and contact washers. Connections to the switching devices to the main or distribution busbar shall be carried out using rigid bars of




242

adequate and standard sizes. It shall be possible to replace the switching devices with different rating with same frame sizes.

(iv) The main busbar shall be accommodated on a separate busbar chamber running horizontally at top or bottom or middle of the panel. Main busbar running behind the functional units (the switching device mounting plates) will not be permitted.

(v) Busbar rated 3200A & above shall be interleaved for better conductivity and heat dissipation.

(vi) The dimensioning of the busbar system shall be as per the rated current of the main switching device, the short circuit current, the maximum rated permissible temperature at permanent operation and the ambient temperature around the busbar. The selection of busbar shall be supported by calculations.

(vii) The neutral busbar shall run along with the phase busbar and shall outgoing switching devices neutral connection terminal shall be provided with in the switching device compartment.

(viii) Earth busbar shall be running throughout the panel fitted directly on to the structure for connection of the protective conductors to provide equipotential bonding of exposed conductive parts. Earth busbar shall be located at the bottom of the panel and in the cable chamber/ alley to facilitate easy connection of protective conductor.

(ix) All wiring for relays and meters shall be with PVC insulated copper conductor wires. The wiring shall be coded and labelled with approved ferrules for identification. The minimum size of copper conductor control wires shall be 1/1.5/2.5 sq. mm. Runs of wires shall be neatly bunched and suitably supported and clamped. Means shall be provided for easy identification of wires. Identification ferrules shall be used at both end of wires. All control wires meant for external connections are to be brought out on a terminal board.

(x) Anti- condensation heaters shall be fitted in each cubicle together with an ON/OFF isolating switch suitable for electrical operation at 230 volts A.C 50 Hz single phase of sufficient capacity to raise the internal ambient temperature by 5O C. The electrical apparatus so protected shall be designed so that the maximum permitted rise in temperature is not exceeded if the heaters are energized while the switchboard is in operation. As a general rule, the heaters shall be placed at the bottom of the cubicle.

(xi) The Switchboard shall be provided with panel mounting type ventilation fans in each panel with switchgear rated for 3200 amp and above. The fan shall be interlocked with switchgear operation. The degree pf enclosure protection to be maintained even with Fans.

(xii) Suitable engraved white on black name plates and identification labels of metal for All Switchboards and Circuits shall be provided. These shall indicate the feeder Number and feeder designation.

(6) Instrument Accommodation

(i) All voltmeter and ammeter and other instruments shall be digital flushed mounted type of size 96 sq. mm conforming to class 1.5 to IS 1248 for accuracy. All voltmeter shall be protected with MCBs.

(ii) Instruments and indicating lamps shall not be mounted on the Circuit Breaker Compartment door for which a separate and adequate compartment shall be provided and the instrumentation shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without danger of accidental contact with live parts of the Switchboard.

(iii) For IMCCBs, instruments and indicating lamps can be provided on the compartment doors. (iv) The current transformers for metering and for protection shall be mounted on the solid

copper/aluminum busbar with proper supports. (v) On all the incomers of switch boards ON/OFF indicators lamps shall be provided suitable for

operation on AC 230 volts’ supply. All lamps shall be protected by MCBs. (vi) For Incomer and important outgoing feeders comprehensive digital power meters shall be

provided which shall display A, V, Pf, Hz, Kw, KVA, KVAr, Kwh ,Kvarh, average and maximum values , demand values , THD on current and Voltages,.. Also add on modules for RS485 port, programmable contacts, analogue output etc. to link to BMS/SCADA system.




243

(7) Testing

(i) Type test

The main distribution board and the components as applicable shall be type tested in accordance with the IEC/IS standards to verify the specified fault level withstand capacity from a reputed and approved type testing laboratory and certified by an competent authority.

Type test certificates shall be submitted to the consultant engineer for verification.

(ii) Routine test

The panel assembler shall perform the routine test and provide the test certificates as defined in IEC standards. The routine test shall include but not limited to the following:

(a) Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical operational test.

(b) Dielectric test & Insulation resistance test.

(c) Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protective circuits.

(d) Functional test as per the approved test procedure. Routine test certificates and test readings shall be submitted to the consultant engineer for verification.

1.5.3. SWITCHGEAR

a) LT Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)

(1) General

(i) The circuit breakers shall be of the air break type, robust and compact design suitable for indoor mounting and shall comply with the requirement IEC 60947-1 and 2. Rupturing capacity shall be as stipulated in Schedule of quantities. Heat loss per pole shall be low.

(ii) ACB with molded case design to ensure high endurance without maintenance, and the Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) = Ics = Icw as per SLD for 1 Sec.

(iii) The breaker shall comply with the isolation function requirement of IEC 60 947-2 to be marked as suitable for isolation / disconnection to facilitate safety of operating personal while the breaker is in use.

(iv) Protective devices, metering, CTs, PTs, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be provided as per schedule of quantities.

(2) Constructional Features

(i) The Circuit Breaker shall be flush front, metal clad, horizontal draw-out pattern, three/four pole as required and fully interlocked. Each Circuit Breaker shall be housed in a separate compartment enclosed on all sides.

(ii) The Circuit Breaker cradle shall be designed and constructed to permit smooth

withdrawal and insertion. The movement shall be free of jerks, easy to operate. Mechanical Latch to be provided to identify the isolated, test & service position of breaker to prevent over racking.

(iii) All current carrying parts in the breaker shall be silver plated and suitable arcing contacts shall be provided to protect the main contacts which shall be separate from the main contacts and easily replaceable. In addition, Arc chutes shall be provided




244

for each pole, and these shall be suitable for being lifted out for the inspection of the main and the arcing contacts.

(iv) Self-aligning cluster type isolating contacts shall be provided for the Circuit Breaker,

with automatically operated shutters to screen live cluster contacts when the Breaker is withdrawn from the cubicle. Sliding connections including those for the auxiliary contacts and control wiring shall also be of the self-aligning type. The fixed portion of the sliding connections shall have easy access for maintenance purposes.

(v) The cubicle for housing the Breaker shall be free standing dead front pattern,

fabricated from the best quality sheet steel.

(3) Operating Mechanism

(i) The Circuit Breaker shall be trip free with independent manual spring operated or motor wound spring operated mechanism as specified and with mechanical ON/OFF indication. The operating mechanism shall be such that the circuit breaker is at all times free to open immediately the trip coil is energized. The breaker shall be provided with in built antidumping mechanism.

(ii) The operating handle and mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of and

integral with the Circuit Breaker.

(iii) The Circuit Breaker shall have the following four distinct and separate positions

which shall be indicated on the face of the panel. The breaker shall get latched in each of three position namely Service, Test and Isolated, operator to de latch before racking in/out to other position

"Service" -- Both main and secondary isolating contacts closed "Test" -- Main isolating contacts open and secondary isolating contacts closed

"Isolated" -- Both main and secondary isolating contacts open "Maintenance" -- Circuit Breaker fully outside the panel ready for maintenance

(4) Circuit Breaker Interlocking

Sequence type strain free interlocks shall be provided to ensure the following: (i) It shall not be possible for the Breaker to be withdrawn from the cubicle when in the

"ON" position. To achieve this, suitable mechanism shall be provided to lock the Breaker in the tripped position before the Breaker is isolated.

(ii) It shall not be possible for the Breaker to be switched "ON" until it is either in the fully inserted position or, for testing purposes, it is in the fully isolated position.

(iii) It shall not be possible for the Circuit Breaker to be plugged in unless it is in the OFF position.

(iv) A safety latch shall be provided to ensure that the movement of the Breaker, as it is withdrawn, is checked before it is completely out of the cubicle, thus preventing its accidental fall due to its weight.

(v) Mechanical and electrical antipumping devices shall be incorporated in the ACB's as required.

(5) Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts

The Circuit Breaker shall have suitable free / minimum 6 NO/NC auxiliary contacts rated at 10 amps 415 volts 50 Hz. These contacts shall be approachable from the front for connecting all external wiring from the front. They shall close before the main contacts when the Circuit Breaker is plugged in and vice versa when the Circuit Breaker is Drawn Out of the cubicle.




245

Electrical Auxiliaries (i) All electrical auxiliaries, including the spring charging gear motor shall be installable on

site without requiring adjustment or any tools other than a screw driver

(ii) The auxiliaries shall be placed in a compartment which under normal operating conditions, shall not contain any conducting parts capable of entering into electrical contact with the circuit breaker poles. It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the front of the circuit breaker.

(6) Circuit breaker Releases

The Air Circuit Breakers should have microprocessor release. The circuit breaker to be equipped with the microprocessor based release with adjustable short circuit protection with adjustable time delay, Overcurrent protection, and adjustable earth fault protection with adjustable time delay. The bar graph to show percentage loading of the breaker, Release should have LCD display with Phase currents. It should be possible to store tripping history of last ten faults with time and date of fault and the type of fault with values. The control unit shall have thermal memory throughout the range to store temperature rise data in case of repetitive overload or earth fault for protecting the cables and loads. ACB should have built in Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) for logic discrimination to reduce thermal/electrodynamics stresses in the event of short circuit and earth fault. Individual fault trip LED indications (OL, SC & EF) shall be available on trip units for easy & faster identification of cause of fault. On line setting of the parameters should be possible. The setting of the ACB should be possible digitally as well as with dial settings with the help of screwdriver.

(7) Earthing

The frame of the Circuit Breaker shall be positively earthed when the Circuit Breaker is racked into the cubicle.

b) ITELLIGENT MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(1) General

(i) The circuit breakers shall comply with the requirement of IEC 60 947 / IS 13947: 1993. IMCCBs shall be suitable for nominal voltage of 3 phase 690 Volts AC 50 HZ supply.

(ii) The circuit breaker shall comply with the isolation function requirement of IEC 60 947-2 to be marked as suitable for isolation / disconnection to facilitate safety of operating personnel while the breaker is in use.

(iii) All IMCCBs shall have rated service breaking capacity (Ics) = Icu= 100%) at defined operational voltage and should be rated for appropriate impulse withstand voltage.

(iv) The IMCCBs shall be of double break rotary contact mechanism, having current limiting feature to limit let through energy on the installation.

(v) Thermal magnetic release for IMCCB up to 250A should provide with adjustable settings for O/L (70 to 100%) and Short circuit fixed and microprocessor release for IMCCB above 250A should have both overload and short circuit adjustable.




246

(2) Operating Mechanism

(i) The operating handle of the IMCCBs shall be quick make / break, trip free type.

(ii) The operating handle of the IMCCBs shall have suitable, ON, OFF and TRIPPED indicators.

(iii) The operating handle and mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of and integral with the circuit breaker

(iv) IMCCBs shall be capable of limiting the fault currents. The maximum thermal I2 t shall be indicated by the manufacturer.

(v) IMCCBs shall comprise of the mechanism designed to trip the circuit breaker in the event of high value short circuit currents.

(vi) The electrical endurance of IMCCBs shall be more or equal to that specified by IEC 60 947-2 standard.

(vii) Earth fault protection if specified should be provided by integral / add on module with time delay and earth fault differentiation, there should be fault differentiation of over current and earth fault on IMCCB or panel door.

(3) Circuit Breaker Interlocking

IMCCBs shall be provided with following interlocking devices. (i) Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker.

(ii) Door interlock to prevent door being opened when the breaker is in ON position

(iii) De interlocking device to open the door even if the breaker is in ON position.

(4) Circuit breaker auxiliaries

The circuit breaker shall be provided with following accessories, if specified in drawings/ schedule of quantities

(i) Under voltage trip (ii) Shunt trip (iii) Alarm switch (iv) Auxiliary switch (v) Should have IBMS interface through MODBUS, BACNET, SNMP, Ethernet.

1.6. MCB: Miniature Circuit Breaker

i. MCB shall comply with IEC 898-1995 and IS: 8828.

ii. The MCB shall be made of self-extinguishing tropicalized (95% humidity 55 degree centigrade) material.

iii. The terminal shall be protected against any finger contact to IP20 degree of protection with no restriction for line and load.

iv. The watt loss per pole shall be as per relevant IS.

1.7. Power Capacitors

i. The Capacitor units shall comply with IEEE STD 18-2002 and IEEE STD 1036-1992 (or equivalent IS/IEC standards like IS: 13340/1998, IEC: 60831) and other components including MCBs, Thyristors, etc., shall comply with the latest versions of relevant Indian Standards.




247

ii. The Capacitor units shall be approved by NABL agency like CPRI / ERDA tested or at internationally accredited testing Laboratory like KEMA or UL.

iii. The measuring and controlling instrumentation equipment’s should be tested for electrical measurement accuracy class of 1.0 from NABL approved laboratory like CPRI / ERDA/ETDC etc. for measurement standards.

iv. Applicable standard IS-13410, 13411 etc. for enclosure’s cover in case of Sheet Molding Compound (SMC) use as per clause 9.0 (Sub clause 9.4).

v. The capacitor shall be either dry design heavy duty metalized polypropylene self-healing category or oil-immersed non-PCB type and all polypropylene film capacitors. The metallization shall be done preferably in-house to ensure good quality of metallization.

vi. The capacitor units shall be three phase units. vii. The dielectric material shall be low loss less than 0.2 watts per kVAr. viii. The capacitors shall be covered for FIVE YEARS of GUARANTEE against manufacturing, design or

workmanship defects. ix. Capacitors are intended to operate at or below their rated voltage. Capacitors should be capable of

continuous operation under contingency system and bank conditions provided that none of the following limitations are exceeded including harmonic contents.

• 110 % of the rated rms voltage • 120 % of the peak voltage • 180% of rated rms current • 135 % of the rated kVAr

x. Capacitors shall be capable of withstanding with full life expectancy switching transients having crest voltages up to 2-times the peak of the capacitor rated voltage, and other transient over voltages and over currents normally associated with the operation of shunt capacitors.

1.8. Bus Ducts & Bus Bars and Sandwich type Bus Ducting system

i) The bus bars shall be air insulated and made of high conductivity, high strength aluminum alloy complying with the requirements of grade E91E of IS 5082 and suitable for 415 Volts, 4 wire 50 Hz system.

ii) The bus bars and connections shall be suitably supported/braced with non-hygroscopic DMC/FRP/SMC supports to provide a fault withstand capacity as specified.

iii) Sandwich type Bus ducting system shall be designed as per requirements.

iv) High tensile bolts and spring washers shall be provided at all bus bar joints.

a) The Bus duct shall be dust and Vermin proof and the enclosure shall be provided protection of minimum IP54 rating for indoor application and minimum IP rating- (min. IP67) and/or (IP65 with enclosure) suitable for installation type.

b) All bus connections, joints and taps shall be short and as straight as possible, and applied with contact grease in the mating surface.

c) The main horizontal bus bars shall be run through the entire length of the panel and shall be accessible for maintenance from the front as well as rear. Bus bar chamber shall have separately screwed covers. All bus bars, links etc. shall be provided with insulating cover to prevent accidental contacts. The natural bus bars shall have a continuous rating of at least 50% of the phase bus bars.

d) The Bus bars shall be made up of high conductive Aluminum / Copper in Sandwich configuration.

e) The Bus bars shall have a continuous current rating and fault withstand capacity.

f) Both ends of the bus duct shall be provided with necessary flexible connector with appropriate termination chamber.




248

g) Bus bars shall be identified with red, yellow, blue and black, Green/Yellow color tape bands at appropriate places and at termination / joints.

h) The bus bar shall be of 3 phases and neutral system with separate neutral and earth bar. The size of neutral bus bar in all main panels or lighting panels and feeders for panel shall be equal to phase bus bar.

i) The bus bar and interconnection between bus bars and various components shall be of high conductivity Aluminum.

j) The bus bar shall be of rectangular cross-section designed to withstand full load current for phase bus bars and half rated current for neutral bus bars in case of MCC panels only and shall be extensible on either side.

k) The bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with epoxy-coated bus bar. The bus bar shall be supported on bus insulators of nonflammable type with high creep age and high anti tracking property and non-hydroscopic SMC / DMC insulated supports at sufficiently close intervals to prevent bus bars sag and shall effectively withstand electromagnetic stresses in the event of short circuit.

l) All joint shall have non-flammable insulation shrouds for secondary insulation purpose.

m) Panel to panel entry of bus bar shall be effectively sealed by electrical and thermal insulation barriers so that products of flashover do not travel from one panel to another panel creating multiple faults.

v) The Busway System shall be designed and implemented to meet the following standards:

a) Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) including Amendment (93/68/EEC)

b) Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) including Amendment (93/68/EEC)

c) Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies, Part 1: Type Tested and partially type tested Assemblies, IEC 61439-1: 1999 (amended up to date)

d) Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies, Part 2: Particular Requirements for Bus bar Trunking systems (Busways), IEC 61439-6

e) Underwriters Laboratory Standard, UL 857 – The common UL, CSA, and ANCE Standard for Busways that is derived from the fifth edition of CSA Standard C22.2 No. 27, the twelfth edition of UL 857, and the second edition of NMX-J-148-1998-ANCE.

f) CUL Listing

g) National Electric Code (NEC) – Article 368 – Busways

h) NEMA AB1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches

i) NEMA KS-1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600VAC)

j) NFPA 70 – National Fire Protection Agency

1.9. LT Cable / Wiring

1.9.1. LT Cable work:

a) The cables for applications for low and medium voltage supply shall be PVC insulated and PVC sheathed, armored conforming to IS:1554 (Part1)-1976.

b) The copper cables shall only be used and shall have high conductivity stranded copper conductor.




249

c) The conductors shall be insulated with high quality dielectric grade PVC based compound conforming to IS 5831-1970.

d) The three core / four core cables shall be used as per the design specifications and requirements.

e) The specifications and ratings of the cable should be as per the design requirements for TIER4 Data Centre and as per the load requirements.

f) All cabling shall have tags at both ends with proper circuit number, detail of load, machine name etc., marked on it.

1.9.2. Testing during Erection and Commissioning

a) Continuity test prior to laying cables.

b) Physical and visual check for any apparent damage cuts and armor piercing.

c) Insulation resistance test prior to cable laying

d) Insulation resistance test after cable laying

1.9.3. Internal Wiring, lighting fixtures, Switches and Junction Boxes.

a) Internal wiring should be used as per design specifications.

b) Only copper conductor multi stranded wires shall be used for all light & power load.

c) All PVC insulated copper conductor wires shall confirm to ISI standards

d) All the cables used shall be of high grade and not substandard size or quality or make.

e) All internal wiring cables shall be laid in PVC / GI / MS conduits concealed or exposed as per the design specifications and requirements.

f) All the joints shall be fully water tight and sealed after threading by applying sealing compound as per respective IS standards.

g) All lighting fixtures, lighting sockets, power sockets, Foot lighting, emergency lighting, ceiling fans , etc. in the complete campus shall be included in internal wiring electrical design.

1.10. Lightning Protection System

a) Lightening Protection system shall be provided with the optimum performance and flexibility of design.

b) Lightening Arrestors shall be installed in the complete campus and DG area and GIS Sub-Station and / or wherever necessary as per the design specifications prepared by SI.

c) Low impedance grounding system shall be provided in a way to provide totally integrated system having, Air Terminal, Down Conductor, Lighting event counter, Purpose designed low impedance ground system.

1.11. DG System

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 415V, 2250 KVA DIESEL POWER GENERATING MACHINES WITH AUTO SYNCHRONISATION FACILITY




250

GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR D.G SET

1.11.1. SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection and testing at vendors / sub vendors works, packing, transportation from place of manufacture to site, unloading and storing at site, complete erection, testing and commissioning of various electrical equipment required for operation of, 415V 2250KVA DG SETS With Auto Synchronization Facility. The HT/LT DG Sets shall be designed as per design requirements. The design, material, construction, manufacture, inspection, testing and performance of all equipment shall comply with all currently applicable standards, statutory regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed.

The scope of work is as follows but not limited to:

a) Diesel Generator complete with base plate, anti-vibration mounting pads and all fixing accessories as required.

b) Acoustics for DG Room.

c) Auto Synchronizing Control Panel with Auto start/stop and Auto load sharing panel.

d) Exhaust piping, duly insulated with mineral wool and aluminum sheet cladding.

e) Residential type Silencer, complete with GI supports, brackets hardware etc.

f) Starting battery electrolyte in non-returnable containers complete with stand and other accessories.

g) Day oil tanks of suitable size in the case of diesel generator complete with supporting stand, all accessories, filters, valves, fittings, level indicators and level controllers with contacts.

h) MS pipes for fuel system, including all accessories, fittings, painting of pipes and supports etc.

i) Hoisting and handling facilities such as cranes, tools and tackles specially required for this kind of equipment and for lowering equipment wherever it is to be installed.

j) LT Cabling

k) Manual emergency hand pumps shall be provided in case of failure of the automatic arrangements.

l) AMF Panel

m) Supply and installation of Earthing System.

n) Interlocking and interconnection between DG PANEL and existing LT panel.

o) GENSET CONTROLS - is a microprocessor based generator set monitoring, metering, protection and control system.

1.11.2. PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS AT SITE

All standards checks including the ones elaborated in the specifications to ensure that the installation of the DG sets and associated systems shall be carried out on completion of installation. These shall include.

i. DG sets - Checking of piping interconnections




251

ii. Checking electrical interconnections

iii. Checking of insulation resistance

iv. Checking of earthing

v. Checking of instruments and controls.

vi. Checking of alignment

vii. Checking of vibration transmission to building structure.

viii. Checking of expansion joints.

ix. Exhaust system

x. Checking of silencer operation

xi. Checking of surface temperature of exhaust piping

xii. Fuel system Checking of automatic operation of fuel transfer pumps

1.11.3. GENERAL

Upon completion of work the performance test shall demonstrate the following among other things:

i. Equipment installed complies with specification in all respects and is of the correct rating for the duty and site conditions.

ii. All items operate efficiently and quietly to meet the specified requirements.

iii. All circuits are correctly protected and protective devices are properly coordinated.

iv. All non-current carrying metal parts are properly and safely grounded in accordance with the specifications and appropriate codes of practice.

1.11.4. TRIAL RUN AT SITE

DG sets shall be tested at varying loads at site in addition to the full load tests at factory before dispatch. The performance tests at the works shall be carried out in presence of authorized representative from the Client.

i. The performance test on each DG sets shall be of minimum for 15 days and 6 hours each

day duration. It should also include measurement of noise and emission as per standards and CPCB guidelines. Vibration measurement shall also be done as per engine manufacturer’s recommendation and ISO – 8528 Part - 9.

ii. All instruments, materials, consumables (fuel oil, lube oil etc.) load and labour required for carrying out of the test shall be provided by the SI.

1.11.5. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

All materials and equipment shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards and shall be of the approved make and design. Makes shall be strictly in conformity with list of approved manufacturers as per mentioned in Technical specification.




252

1.11.6. COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

On completion of the Generator installation, certificate shall be furnished by the contractor countersigned by the licensed electrical supervisor under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out. This certificate shall be in the prescribed form as required by the local supply authority.

1.11.7. TRAINING OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Upon completion of all work and all tests, the Contractor shall furnish necessary operators, labor and helpers for operating the entire installation for a period of contract of ten (10) hours each, to enable the Owner’s staff to get acquainted with the operation of the system. During this period, the contractor shall train the Owner’s personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment installed.

1.11.8. GUARANTEE

Upon complete of work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion by the Project Manager, the contractor shall furnish written guarantee indemnifying the owner against defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year after acceptance. The contractor shall hold himself fully responsible for reinstallation and / or replacement, free of cost to Owner the following: a) ANY DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY THE

CONTRACTOR

Any material or equipment supplied by the Owner which is damaged or destroyed as result of defective workmanship by the contractor. In case of failure of the supplier, to get any defect rectified within forty eight (48) hours, the Owner reserves the right to get necessary repairs done on his own at the supplier cost.

b) ENGINEER AND FOREMAN

The SI shall employ a competent, fully licensed, qualified full time electrical / mechanical engineer and foreman to direct the work of installation in accordance with drawings and specifications. The foreman shall be available at all times at site to receive instructions from the Project Manager / Consultant for day to day activities throughout the duration of the contract. The foreman shall correlate the progress of the work in conjunction with all relevant requirements of the supply authorities.

c) DEMONSTRATION TO SBI

The SI shall provide performance tests upon completion or pre dispatch inspection of the installation. He shall arrange all necessary instruments, tools and tackles to check sound level, vibration and the effectiveness of acoustical treatment and vibration isolator installed.

d) TOOLS AND TACKLES

The SI shall provide and install all necessary hoists, ladders, scaffolding, tools, tackles, transportation of labor and materials necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work to the satisfaction of the SI.

e) APPROVAL & CLEARANCE

All associated activities required for necessary clearances / permissions / approvals / licenses from concerned authorities are in the scope of Bidder including but not limited to Explosive permission for fuel tanks, fire department permission, PCB permission, Central Electrical Inspector etc.




253

f) STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND STRUCTURAL STABILITY CERTIFICATE OF EXHAUST PIPES STACK

The SI shall submit the structural design of Exhaust pipes stack of height as per CPCB and local PCB norms to the concerned Civil engineer for approval. After receipt of approval from Civil engineer, BDL, the contractor shall start the erection works of stack. After completion of stack works, the contract shall submit a structural stability certificate approved structural engineer and competent authority / Chief Electrical Engineer.

g) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

ELECTRICAL SUPPLY PARTICULARS

(1) System Voltage (Normal) : As per MSEB norms and guidelines

(2) No. of Phases : 3 (3) Frequency : 50 c/s (4) Fault level : 40 KA at 11KV (5) Neutral Earthing : Solidly earthed (6) Auxiliary supply : 12 V D.C. supply for D.G Set starting Motor.

h) STANDARDS

The Diesel Generating set and accessories shall conform to the requirements of latest editions of relevant India Standards some of are listed below: -

(1) BS : 649 - Diesel Engines for general purposes (2) IS : 4722 - Electrical performance of rotating electrical Machinery. (3) IS : 2516 - Air Circuit Breaker (4) IS : 2147 - Degree of protection for LT Switchgear

BS 5000, IS 1460, ISO 8528, BS 5514, ISO 3046 Prime Power Rating (PRP) conforming to ISO 8528 specifications.

i) ENGINE

Engine: direct injection, water cooled engine, 16 cylinder, 4 stroke, rated at 1500 RPM, conforming to ISO 3046 / BS 5514 has the following specifications:

i. PT fuel pump, Electronic governor heavy duty STC injectors.

ii. Holset turbocharger with low temperature after cooler, pulse tuned exhaust manifold, stainless steel exhaust flexible connections Radiator or heat exchanger, coolant inhibitor, Plate type lube oil cooler.

iii. Outboard Aftercoolers

iv. Full flow paper element filters - fuel, lube oil and by-pass

v. Dry type replaceable paper element air cleaner with restriction indicator

vi. Flywheel housing & flywheel to suit single / double bearing alternator

vii. Holset flexible coupling for double bearing alternator

viii. Starting motor – Electric, battery charging alternator

ix. Microprocessor based genset Controller PC 3.3.

x. First fill lube oil & coolant inhibitor Full Authority Electronics, Residential Silencers.




254

j) ALTERNATOR:

Alternator 2250KVA at 1500 RPM, 3 phase, LT/HT as per design requirements conforming to BS / IS Standards. The Alternator is brushless alternator. The alternator has the following features Separately excited, self-regulated

i. Class ‘H’ insulation

ii. Salient pole revolving field

iii. Single / double bearing

iv. PMG standard

v. Voltage regulation -+ 0.5 %

vi. It shall offer advanced levels of functions for reliability and optimum genset performance.

The control system shall have easy servicing capabilities that allow system parameters to be interrogated, monitored and adjusted with a PC. Features:

i. Digital governing

ii. Digital voltage regulation protection for true alternator O/C protection

iii. Analog/ bar graph/ digital AC output metering

iv. Battery monitoring system to sense and warn against a weak battery condition

v. Digital alarm and status message display

vi. Genset monitoring : Displays status of all critical engine and generator set functions

vii. Smart starting control system: Integrated fuel ramping to limit black smoke and frequency overshoot

viii. Advanced serviceability

k) MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT:

(1) Engine and alternator are mounted on a common MS fabricated base frame

(2) DG sets plinth should be designed and built in manner that DG vibration & its impact is not transferred to the DC building.

l) FUEL TANK:

(1) M.S Fabricated standalone external Fuel Tank with storage of Diesel to run DG sets continuously for 72 hours, complete with level indicator, fuel inlet and outlet, air vent, drain plug, inlet arrangement for direct filling and Man hole.

(2) The fuel tank shall be connected through a pipeline from where the Fuel Tanker shall fill the fill Fuel Tank.

(3) The Fuel Tanker shall not be allowed to enter the DC Campus.

(4) The Fuel Tank should be as per Oil Companies norms.

(5) Necessary explosive, fire, Police approvals etc. to be obtained.




255

The present scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following: -

i. Supply and Installation of Diesel Engine, Alternator and AMF with Auto Synchronization control panel.

ii. Supply and Installation of all accessories and components for assembly such as couplings, base frame, silencers, fuel day tank, power and control cables up to MAIN panel and earthing including maintenance free earth pits as per IE rules.

iii. Supply and Installation of battery and battery charger.

iv. Supply and installation of fuel and exhaust piping and insulation as required for exhaust piping.

v. Supply of all special tools for maintenance, and safety accessories as per standard practice and anti-vibration pads.

vi. Supply of all drawings and documentation as called for.

vii. Checking all electrical connections.

viii. Carrying out tests and load trials on assembled unit at site in the presence of owner to fulfill the performances guarantee.

ix. Obtaining Electrical Inspectorate’s approval of layout drawings and Installation.

x. Getting safety and approval certificate from Local CEIG/ CEA Authorities for D.G.-Sets.

xi. Local PCB Norms to be implemented for getting NOC for installation of D.G.-Sets, Stack height and noise level as per PCB norms. It is the responsibility of the D.G.-Set manufacturer/Contractor to get the necessary license from local PCB for operating the D.G.-Sets.

xii. Liaison with concerned authorities and obtaining Explosive License and Liasoning and getting necessary approvals.

xiii. The stack height shall be as per the PCB norms and the stack structure shall be provided with Lightning Arrestor (ERICO) with aviation lamp and with separate two earth pits for the structure.

xiv. One number synchronizing panel.

xv. The Auto-Synchronization panel with AMF module should have BMS options for monitoring the parameters and controlling the D.G.-Sets in Auto as well as in manual mode.

m) TESTING

SI should ensure all the essential tests including but not limited to as mentioned below should be conducted and positive results achieved

i. All DG’s shall run individually on NO LOAD & FULL LOAD successfully without any problem controller / PLC mode separately.

ii. All testing and maintenance charts shall be displayed in DG house along with operating instruction to operators.

iii. Sharing of equal loads in each generators with auto start, auto load sharing, relay, auto load management successful for a minimum period of 15 days (refer trial run at site) in PLC/ Controller mode.

iv. Efficiency Test

v. Temperature rise test on full load.




256

vi. Momentary overload test

vii. Noise Level and Vibration test

viii. Measurement of open circuits and short circuit tests

1.12. Earthing Requirements

Various IT and non-IT components in the DC facility and complete campus would need the earthing to meet the performance quality for respective system/equipment and also to meet the personnel safety. Minimum Earthing value should be maintained as per design requirement and complying to relevant standards.

1.12.1. Scope of Work

i. SI shall perform assessment of conducting specific resistivity of soil of the site, having conducted the earth resistance test, as per NEC (USA) standard and design earthing requirement bases upon the test result.

ii. SI should also include Lightning Arrestors in the electrical architecture. iii. SI shall design and specify the BOM/BOQ for the facility and accordingly requirements of

earth points should be worked out. iv. The earthing shall be designed and implemented in accordance with the ANSI/TIA-942-A-

2012: section 6.4.6.3, ANSI/TIA-607-B standards or any equivalent standards. SI to ensure any update in the relevant standards should be taken under consideration during the implementation and complete tenure of the project. SI to submit compliance report in this regard post completion of work and on quarterly basis to SBI.

v. Earthing system shall be suitable to maintain the Tier IV requirements of Data center considering the actual soil conditions at the site.

vi. IS: 3043 latest revision Code practice for Earthing shall be followed by the SI. vii. IEEE 80 (2000) – IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation grounding.

viii. Various earth pits should be created around the building premises physically separated from each other and the dimensions for earthing rods, straps, physical spacing etc. would depend on the quantum of earth current in each case.

1.12.2. Grounding System

The basic goal of any grounding or earthing system is to provide protection to personnel and equipment. Proper grounding is essential even for efficient system performance. Lightning, fault currents, circuit switching (motors turning on and off), electrostatic discharge etc. are the common causes of surges and transient voltages. Standards for Data Center Grounding

Grounding infrastructure requirement details for the data center equipment and for the entire facility are defined by TIA/EIA-942 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers. These requirements are additional to the attributes defined in the National Electrical Code (NEC) to protect equipment and to improve system reliability· TIA‐942 outlines many practical methods to ensure electrical continuity throughout the rack materials and proper grounding of racks and rack‐mounted equipment. This is the only global standard that addresses issues specific to data centers.

There is another generic standard J‐STD‐607‐A‐2002 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, which focuses on grounding for telecommunications. This standard defines the important elements in the grounding system infrastructure e.g. telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB) which usually exists at the beginning of the system and it ends at the local telecommunications grounding bus bars (TGB) which is usually available in the telecommunications rooms. The IEEE Standard 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment— provides further detail on how to design the grounding structure for a computer room environment through a Common Bonding




257

Network (CBN). The CBN is the set of metallic components that are intentionally or incidentally interconnected to provide the principal bonding and grounding inside a telecommunications building. These components include structural steel or reinforcing rods, metallic plumbing, AC power conduit, cable racks, and bonding conductors. The CBN is connected to the exterior grounding electrode system.

1.13. Gas Insulated Sub-Station

The SI Scope of work shall include Design, Manufacture, Supply, Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Operation & Maintenance of Gas Insulated Switchgear Sub-Station. This also includes the following but not limited to: Installation, Erection, Testing (Testing includes testing of GIS Panels, Breakers and Protection Relays, HV Test, Interlocking check, Relay setting, etc.), Termination of cable and commissioning at site. Preparation of Sub-station layout, detailed engineering, supply & delivery of all Sub-stations structures including equipment structures, GIS equipment’s and associated outdoor equipment’s conforming to technical specification, civil foundations, Integrated GIS buildings, utility buildings/quarters, etc. as applicable and other civil works etc. along with erection, testing and commissioning of substation in all respects including laying of cables from dual power source or substation up to DC. All the clearances of Electrical Inspector and other statutory bodies / authorities shall be the responsibility of SI. The metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear, including the operating devices, accessories and auxiliary equipment forming integral part thereof, shall be designed, manufactured and assembled.

Specifications for GIS Switchgear

The Gas Insulated switchgear shall, unless otherwise specified herein, conform to the latest revision of specifications/IEC as indicated below and the Indian Electricity Rules, wherever applicable.

1. IEC 62271-200 High-voltage switchgear and control gear – Part 200: AC metal-enclosed switchgear and control gear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV

2. IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switchgear and control gear – Part 1: Common specifications

3. IEC 62271-102 High-voltage switchgear and control gear – Part 102: Alternating current disconnectors and earthing Switches

4. IEC 62271-100 High-voltage switchgear and control gear – Part 100: Alternating-current circuit-breakers

5. IEC 61869-1/ 61869-2

Current transformer

6. IEC 61869-1/ 61869-3

Voltage transformer




258

7. IEC 61243-5 Voltage detection systems (VDS)

8. IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

9. IEC 62271-203 Gas Insulated Metal enclosed switchgear for rated voltage above 52kV.

10. IEC:60376 SF6 Gas

11. IEC:61936-1 Installation

12. IS:1554 & IS:694 Specification for PVC Insulated Electric Cables for working voltage up to including 11000 Volts.

13. EN 50525-3-41 For Wiring

14. RDSO’s Specification no. TI/SPC/OHE/ FASTNERS/0120

Specification for Steel and Stainless Steel Bolts, nuts and Washers

15. IEC 60376

New Sulphur hexafluoride

16. IEC 62271- 100 High voltage alternating current Circuit breakers.

17. IEC 60694

Common clauses for high voltage Switchgear and control-gear standards.

18. IEC 61128 Alternating current disconnectors. Bus-transfer current switching by disconnectors.

19. IEC 61129 Alternating current earthing switches. Induced current switching

20. IEC 60137 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V 21. IEC 60859 Cable connections for gas-insulated switchgear

22. IEC 60480 Guide to checking of Sulphur hexafluoride taken from electrical equipment.

Protection specifications

Degree of Protection:

Main circuits IP 65

Drives IP 4X

Cable connection compartment

IP 31D

Low voltage cabinet IP 4X

1.14. UPS & Batteries i) The Essential Service Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system would be a modular and scalable, individual tower with 15 minutes back up time. The UPS system should be expandable/ scalable on each side (minimum 10% of total capacity). The UPS and all associated equipment and components shall be




259

manufactured in accordance with the following applicable standards. In addition, the UPS should be CE marked in accordance with EEC directives 73/23 “low voltage” and 89/336 “electromagnetic compatibility”. ii) SI to ensure following below features are available in UPS system & design:

a) Safety Requirements: IEC 62040‐1‐1, EN50091‐1‐1

b) EMC: IEC 62040‐2 (Class A), EN 50091‐2 (Class A)

c) Performance: IEC 62040‐3 (VFI SS 111), EN50091‐3 d) Battery minimum Backup time with design load at end of Battery life: 15 minutes on each source, as per ANSI/TIA-942-A Standards e) UPS efficiency above 95% at >50% load capacity

iii) Modular design of the UPS system shall enable ease of service and upgradability or downgrade‐ability of the UPS rack system without interruption to the whole system. Standards, Tests and Quality Assurance All equipment shall be designed and built in accordance with accepted engineering practice for Data Center and applicable international standards, such as but not limited to the standards listed below.

a) IEC 6014B-4: UPS – Performance or EN 62040-3.

b) IEC 62040-1 and EN 62040-1: UPS - Safety.

c) IEC 62040-2 level A: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility [level C3 / C2 class A is optional].

d) IEC 62040-3 and EN 62040-3: UPS - Performance.

e) IEC 60950 / EN 60950: Safety of IT equipment, including electrical business equipment.

f) IEC 61000-2-2: Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signaling in public low-voltage power supply systems.

g) IEC 61000-3-4: Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current > 16 A/ph).

h) IEC 61000-4: EMC - Electrical fast transient/burst immunity.

i) IEC 439: Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies or comply with LVD/2006/95/EC

j) IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).

k) ISO 3746: Sound power levels. Surge Withstand IEEE, 587, ANSI C62.41-199 or comply with IEC 62040

l) CE marking

m) The equipment must comply with environmental-protection standards, with production taking place on premises certified ISO 14001, ISO9001, ISO 50001. The UPS design procedure shall be covered by an ISO 9001 quality system as well as a dependability study to ensure maximum reliability. The R&D and production both should be an ISO 14001 certified site.

n) The Essential Service Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system would be a modular, scalable, detachable & integrable individual tower with 15 minutes back up time.

o) All cables at incoming and outgoing of UPS shall be copper

p) Redundancy : 2(N+1)

q) Topology : Distributed Redundant Modules or Block Redundant System

r) Automatic Bypass with dedicated feeder to automatic bypass

s) Maintenance Bypass Arrangement : Dedicated maintenance bypass feeder serving UPS output switchboard




260

t) Output Power Distribution : Switchboard incorporating removable circuit breaker with adjustable long time, short time and instantaneous functions with provision to turn off instantaneous function

u) Battery String : Dedicated String for each module

v) Battery type : 20 Year Modular Lithium Ion

w) Battery minimum back up time with design load at end of battery life : 15 minutes

x) Battery Monitoring System : Centralized automated system to check each cell for, voltage, and impedance or resistance

y) Separate from UPS/Switchgear Equipment Rooms

z) Individual Battery Strings Isolated from Each Other

aa) Shatterproof Viewing Glass in Battery Room Door

bb) Batteries shall be installed in a way to ensure uniform Load distribution

iv) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) a) GENERAL

(1) PREFACE

This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics and requirements for a continuous duty, highly reliable, solid state in Uninterruptible Power Supply systems. The UPS shall provide high quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads. It should also supply clean power automatically without any break in the supply in the absence of raw power. Under no conditions will the protected system get direct supply from the raw mains unless there is fault in the protected system.

(2) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

(i) Design Requirements - UPS Module

(a) Voltage

Input / Output specifications of the UPS shall be Input (340/400/415/460 Volts - Three Phase) Bypass Input (340/400/415/460 Volts - Three Phase) Output - 415Volts, 3PH, 50 Hz

(b) Capacity

UPS Capacity shall be equivalent to 100% IT Load and Emergency Load.

(c) Loading

UPS Loading shall not be more than 80% at any given time

(d) UPS Architecture

UPS Architecture and design shall be as per TIER IV norms i.e. 2(N+1) Architecture.

(ii) Modes of Operation




261

The UPS shall be designed to operate as an ON LINE reverse transfer system in the following modes: (a) Normal- The critical AC load is continuously supplied by the UPS Inverter. The rectifier/

charger derives power from AC Input source and supplies DC power to the Inverter while simultaneously load charging power reserve battery.

(b) Emergency- Upon failure of AC Input power, the critical AC load is supplied by the Inverter, which without any switching obtains power from the battery. There shall be no interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC input source.

(c) Recharge - Upon restoration of AC input power during the mode of operation, the rectifier/ charger shall automatically restart, walk-in and gradually assume the inverter and battery recharge loads.

(d) Bypass - If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair or should the inverter overload capacity be exceeded, static transfer switch shall perform reverse transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass source with no interruption in the power to the critical AC load. The static bypass switch should be double ended. The static switch should also have the overload rating of 14 times of rated load for 10 msec (1/2 cycles).

A manually operated Maintenance Bypass Switch should be incorporated into UPS cabinet that will connect the load to AC power source bypassing the rectifier/charger, Inverter and Static transfer switch.

(iii) Battery Requirements

Selection of battery will be done considering 0.9 output power factor and end cell voltage as 1.75 V. Battery should be imported sealed maintenance free type. The UPS module should have the Battery Circuit breaker with under voltage mounted near to the batteries duly connected to UPS. Separate breaker will be provided for separate string of batteries. Battery breaker shall be installed on rack. When this breaker is opened no battery voltage should be present in the UPS enclosure. The UPS module should be automatically disconnected when the battery reaches to the minimum discharge voltage level or when signaled by other control functions. Remote tripping of Battery Circuit breaker facility shall be also incorporated. Batteries will be provided with Battery Rack, base frame, Powder coated Rack covers, louvers and batteries duly interconnected. Wiring between Batteries and UPS will be carried out by UPS vendor. Vendor is supposed to submit calculations of battery selection after receipt of order on basis of battery manufacturer’s data with constant power discharge. And vendor will be responsible to carry out full load battery discharge test with load bank ensuring the battery gives support on full load for the stipulated time.

b) PRODUCT

(i) FABRICATION

(a) Materials

All materials of the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, high grade and free from all defects and shall been in prior service except as required during factory testing.

(b) Construction and Mounting

The UPS unit comprised of Input Isolator, Rectifier/ Charger, Inverter, Static Transfer switch, Internal Maintenance Bypass switch and static bypass Input switch shall be housed in a free standing steel enclosure with key lockable doors. Front access only shall be required for expedient servicing, adjustment and installation. The enclosure will be built to comply with




262

IP20 when the door are open. The UPS shall be constructed of replaceable sub-assemblies. Printed circuit assemblies shall be plug-in type.

(c) Cooling

Cooling of the UPS shall be by forced air. Low velocity fan shall be used to minimize audible noise output. Fan power shall be provided by the UPS output. Temperature shall be monitored by thermal censors.

(d) Cable Entry

Standard cable entry for the UPS module shall be through the enclosure or from bottom with cable end box to house cables.

(e) Service Area Requirements

All serviceable subassemblies shall be modular and capable of being replaced from front of the UPS (Front access only). The UPS module shall require no more than 1.5 meter of front service access room and shall not require rear or side access for service.

(ii) COMPONENTS

(a) Rectifier / Charger

(1) General

The term rectifier/ charger shall denote the solid- state equipment and controls necessary to convert incoming AC power to regulator DC power for input to the inverter and for Battery charging. The rectifier/ charger shall be three phase controlled, IGBT bridge type with constant voltage/ current limiting control circuitry.

(2) Input current Walk-in

The rectifier/ charger shall contain time walking circuit that causes the unit to gradually assume the load over a 10 sec time interval after input voltage is applied.

(3) Soft Start Facility

(4) Fuse failure Protection

Power semi-conductors in rectifier/charger shall be fused with fast acting fuses so that loss of any power semi-conductor shall not cause cascading failures.

(5) DC Filter

The rectifier/charger shall have an output filter to minimize ripple voltage into the battery. Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 1% RMS. The filter shall be adequate to ensure that the DC output at the rectifier charger will meet the input requirements of the Inverter. The inverter shall be able to operate from the rectifier charger with the Battery disconnected.

(6) Battery Recharge

In addition to supply power for the inverter load, the rectifier/charger shall be capable of producing battery-charging current to recharge the batteries. After the battery is recharged, the rectifier/charger shall maintain the battery at full charge until the next emergency operation. Charging shall be an automatic cycles per DIN 41772 characteristics I-U. Both float and recharge voltages shall be adjustable. Charge voltage can also be manually controlled.

(b) INVERTER

(1) The term inverter shall denote the solid-state equipment and controls to convert DC power from the rectifier/charger or battery regulated AC power for supporting the




263

critical load. The inverter shall be IGBT based pulse width modulated (PWM) design capable of providing the specified AC output.

(2) Overload capacity

Inverter shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding 100% and up to 150% of full load current for min. of 1minute. A status indicator and audible alarm shall indicate overload operation. The UPS shall transfer the load to bypass when overload capacity is exceeded.

(3) Fault clearing and current Limit

Without bypass supply available, the inverter shall be capable of supplying an overload current of 150% of its full load rating in excess of 60 secs. For greater currents, or longer time duration, the inverter shall have electronic current limiting protection to prevent damage to components. The inverter shall be self-protecting against any magnitude of connected output overload.

(4) Output Frequency

The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled by an oscillator. The oscillator shall hold the inverter output frequency to +/- 0.1 % for steady state and transient conditions.

(5) The UPS shall be capable of handling load of crest factor more than 3:1.

(6) Inverter efficiency shall be greater than 94% at 100% load.

(c) DISPLAY AND CONTROLS

Monitoring and Control The UPS shall be provided with a microprocessor based unit status display and controls section designed for convenient and reliable user operation. A system power flow diagram, a percentage load and battery time remaining display shall be provided as part of the monitoring and controls sections, which depicts a single-line diagram of the UPS. Illuminated visual indicators shall be of the long-life light-emitting diode (LED) type. All of the operator controls and monitors shall be located on the front of the UPS cabinet. The monitoring functions such as metering, and alarms shall be displayed on an alphanumeric LCD panel. LCD panel shall be provided with following monitoring functions and indicators (each alarm and notice conditions shall be accompanied with an audible alarm) (1) NORMAL : This symbol be lit when the UPS is operating in Normal Mode.

(2) BATTERY : This symbol shall be lit when the UPS is operating in battery mode.

(3) BYPASS : This symbol shall lit when the UPS is operating in bypass mode.

(4) WARING : This symbol shall lit when the system needs attention. Some notices shall be displayed and shall include.

i. UPS on Maintenance Bypass

ii. Inverter Unsynchronized

iii. Battery on load

iv. Load on Bypass.

v. Mains Failure

(5) ALARM: This symbol shall lit when a situation requires immediate attention. All alarms shall be accompanied by the Audio alarms. Alarm shall include-

i. Emergency Stop

ii. Inverter Off Or Failed




264

iii. Over-temperature

iv. Overload

v. Battery C. B. Open

vi. Rectifier off or Failed

vii. Input C. B. Open

viii. Output C. B. Open

ix. DC Under Voltage

x. DC Over Voltage

(d) STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

(1) General

A static transfer switch and bypass transfer switch shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS. The Static switch shall be a Bi-directional naturally commutated high-speed static (SCR type) device rated to carry full load current continuously. The static transfer switch control logic shall contain an automatic transfer logic circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals, and operating and alarm signals. This control circuit shall provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate bypass source, without exceeding the transient limits, when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS, or bypassing the UPS for maintenance.

(2) Uninterrupted Transfer

The transfer control logic shall automatically turn on the static transfer switch, transferring the critical AC load to the bypass source, after the transfer logic senses any of the following conditions. Inverter Overload capacity exceeded Critical AC load over voltage OR under voltage UPS fault conditions The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic transfer of the critical load to the bypass source if any of the following conditions are present. Inverter/Bypass Voltage difference exceeding presets limits Bypass frequency out of limits Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output.

(3) Uninterrupted Retransfer

Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass source to Inverter output shall be automatically initiated unless inhibited by manual control. The transfer control logic shall Inhibit an automatic retransfer of the critical load to the inverter if one of the following conditions exists. Bypass out of synchronization range with Inverter output. Inverter/Bypass voltage difference exceeds the preset limits UPS faulty conditions presents. Overload conditions exists in the excess of inverter full load ratings.

(e) MAINTENANCE BYPASS ISOLATOR

A manually operated maintenance bypass isolator shall be incorporated into the UPS cabinet to directly connect the critical load to the input AC power source, bypassing the rectifier, inverter and static transfer switch. With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, it shall be possible to check out the operation of the rectifier / charger, inverter, battery and static switch.




265

(f) REMOTE EMERGENCY POWER OFF (REPO)

Provision shall be available for adding a REPO switch to meet specific site needs. The REPO switch shall be electronically shut down the UPS by turning off the rectifier, inverter static switch and battery circuit breaker.

c) ISOLATION TRANSFORMER

1) Features

Isolation transformer to support harmonic rich non-linear loads while maintaining safe operating temperatures and shall include superior transverse and common mode noise attenuation along with transient spike attenuation. Transformer should eliminate ground loop, ground line noise & interference

2) Construction

Transformer should be copper wound, multi-shielded, three phase Star connected Input and three phase Star connected output with Neutral available for connection, 600 volt class, convection Air cooled, dry type, continuous duty. Terminals shall be provided for isolated three phase output conductors, neutral conductor and ground. All leads, wires and terminals shall be labeled to correspond with circuit wiring diagram. Cabinets shall be manufactured from 14 gauge steel with base sub-structure adequate for fork lifting. The cabinet shall have a baked on paint finish with proper pre-treatment. Output connections made of copper standoff bus.

3) Rating-K13

The nominal AC input voltage rating of the transformer shall be 415V AC, three phase with sufficient margin to sustain a constant input of +10% without saturation. Frequency 50 c/s +/-3 When energized the current inrush shall not exceed a maximum of 20 times the full load input current for 1/2 cycle or less. Temperature - Transformers shall be required to operate without overheating in an ambient temperature range of -20 degrees Celsius to +50 degrees Celsius. Humidity - Transformers shall operate in a relative humidity of 0 to 95% non-condensing. The transformer shall have an efficiency more than 95%. Audible noise - Maximum allowable noise level shall not exceed 70dBA when measured at one meter distance. Cabling between Isolation transformer and UPS is in scope of UPS vendor if Isolation transformer is externally connected to UPS.

4) General

UPS vendor will ensure that incoming circuit breakers are sufficient to take care of inrush current at UPS, isolation transformer as well as in electrical panel supplied by electrical contractor. In case of isolation transformer soft starter should be inbuilt feature. Transformers must be designed and manufactured in accordance with the following, Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE 519-1992 and C62.41-1991) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

d) EXECUTION

1) Field Quality Control

The following inspections and test procedures shall be performed by factory trained field service personnel during UPS startup.




266

2) Visual Inspection

Inspect equipment for sign of damage Verify installation as per drawing Inspect cabinet for foreign object Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured. Inspect battery cases. Inspect battery for proper polarity Verify all printed boards are configured properly

3) Mechanical Inspection

Check all control wiring connections for tightness Check all power wiring connections for tightness Check all terminals screws, nuts, and / or spade lugs for tightness

4) Electrical Inspections

Check all fuses for continuity Confirm input voltage and phase rotation is correct Verify control transformer connections are correct for the voltage being used Assure connections and voltage of the battery strings

5) Documentation

The manufacturer shall supply minimum 2 sets of an installation manual with installation Start-up trouble shooting guide and operation instruction of the specified system. The manufacturer shall be trained at least two engineer at their factory free of cost.

6) Installation-

The UPS shall be installed by a service engineer fully trained on the UPS by the manufacturer. The manufacturer will have conduct load/site study prior to the commissioning of the UPS. A copy of the load/site study report will have to be submitted with required comments. Service engineer will ensure- (i) Dimension of UPS and battery room are acceptable after receipt of order and the

drawing.

(ii) Inspection of the UPS room and confirm that room is deemed fit for installation.

(iii) Room should be dust free with lockable door.

(iv) HVAC should be in working condition.

(v) All the cabling will be completed.

(vi) Earthing is done properly.

(vii) Batteries are clean and connections are done properly.

(viii) When the charging will be taken place service engineer should be available 24x7 near UPS.

(ix) Charging of batteries will be monitored hourly and will ensure excessive charging is not happening.

(x) It will be entire responsibility of UPS vendor till the installation is handed over for UPS, batteries and accessories for safety.

Testing at site:

1) UPS vendor will ensure the site is ready for cleanliness, ventilation, air conditioned, electrical cabling, switchgear etc.

2) Accordingly UPS vendor shall inform the readiness of UPS and battery room.




267

3) Then only initial charging of batteries will be started. After initial charging of batteries testing and commissioning of UPS with batteries will be started.

4) During starting of battery charging till handover UPS vendor will depute his representative round the clock and will be solely responsible for safety of UPS and batteries.

Site acceptance testing shall consist of a complete test of the UPS system and the associated accessories supplied by the manufacturer.

1) 100% load will be applied to UPS calculated on basis of full load UPS in kW as mentioned in

product literature.

2) As a part of the standard start-up procedure ‘burn in load power test’ for UPS will be done by applying full load in kw as mentioned in product literature for 24 hours and after 24 hours, battery will be discharged for 10 min. During that period battery will support 100% Load.

3) Overload test for 10min at 125%load, 30Sec at 150%load

This shall be accomplished without disturbing user wiring and completed prior to operation of the site critical load from the UPS output. The test result shall be documented, signed and dated for future reference. A copy of the manufactured site acceptance procedure shall be submitted to the SBI, one month before actual test, load bank for actual testing shall be provided by UPS manufacturer.

Warranties Provide 3-Years full battery replacement (material and labour) warranty from the manufacturer.

1.15. Electric Work Requirements The electrical cabling Work should be as per TIA 942-A standards and shall include the following:

i) Main electrical panel in Data Center

ii) Power cabling

iii) UPS Distribution Board

iv) UPS point wiring

v) Power Cabling for Utility component and Utility Points etc.

vi) Online UPS

vii) Separate Earth Pits for the component

The distribution of power from the UPS room to the following shall be considered:

i) All proposed component for the production environment

ii) Existing servers and other component

iii) Sub distribution panels for UPS

iv) Final Distribution shall be through Power Distributions Units (PDU)/MCB Distribution Boxes. Power in the racks and other component’s shall be provided with three sockets with power coming from separate UPS in each of these sockets.

v) The bidder is required to maintain two electrical distribution paths (one normal & one alternate) for the cabling inside the server farm area in the proposed State Data Centre

vi) Lighting arrangements for the Data Centre and surrounding areas. Specifications for Electrical Cabling – Fire retardant cables of rated capacity exceeding the power requirement of fully blown configuration of the existing and proposed component have to be used. For expansion needs suitable redundant power points to be provided at suitable locations. All materials used shall conform to IS standards as per industry practice.




268

i) Bunching of Wires – Wires carrying current shall be so bunched in the conduit that the outgoing and return wires are drawn into the same conduit. Wires originating from two different phases shall not be run in the same conduit. Separate conduits shall be used for UPS & Raw power.

ii) Drawing of Conductors – The drawing Aluminum / Copper conductor wires shall be executed with due regards to the following precautions while drawing insulated wires in to conduits. Care shall be taken to avoid scratches and kinks, which cause breakages.

iii) Joints – All joints shall be made at main switches, distribution boards, socket outlets, lighting outlets and switch boxes only. No joints shall be made inside conduits and junctions boxes. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet.

iv) Mains & Sub-Mains – Mains & sub-mains wires where called for shall be of the rated capacity and approved make. Every main and sub-main shall be drawn into an independent adequate size conduit. Adequate size draw boxes shall be provided at convenient locations to facilitate easy drawing of the mains and sub-mains. An independent earth wire of proper rating shall be provided. The earth wires shall run along the entire length of the mains and sub-mains.

v) Load Balancing – Balancing of circuits in three-phase installation shall be planned before the commencement of wiring.

vi) Color Code of the Conductors – Color code shall be maintained for the entire wiring installation, Red, Yellow, Blue for three phases and “OFF” circuit black for neutral and green for earth (or bare earth).

vii) Fixing of the Conduits – Conduits junction boxes shall be kept in position and proper holdfasts shall be provided. Conduits shall be so arranged as to facilitate easy drawing of the wires through them. Adequate junction boxes of approved shape & size shall be provided. All conduits shall be installed so as to avoid stream and hot water pipes. After conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes & switch boxes are installed in position their outlets shall be properly plugged so that water, mortar, insects or any other foreign matter does not enter into conduit system. Conduits shall be laid in a neat and organize manner as directed and approved by the Information Technology Department Personnel or person on their behalf. Conductors shall be planned so as not to conflict with any other service pipe lines / ducts.

viii) Protection – To minimize condensation or sweating inside the conductors all outlets of conduit system shall be adequately ventilated and approved by the proper competent authority. All screwed and socketed connections shall be adequately made fully water tight by use of proper jointing materials.

ix) Switch-Outlet Boxes and Junction Boxes – All boxes shall conform to all prevailing Indian Standards. The cover plates shall be of best quality Hylam sheets or ISI grade Urea Formaldehyde Thermosetting insulating material, which should be mechanically strong and fire retardant. Proper support shall be provided to the outer boxes to fix the cover plates of switches as required. Separate screwed earth terminals shall be provided inside the box for earthling purpose.

x) Inspection Boxes – Rust proof inspection boxes of required size having smooth external and internal Finish shall be provided to permit periodical inspection and to facilitate removal and replacement of wires when required.

xi) Data Center Lighting Requirements

a) TIA, TIA-942-A Data Centers

b) TIA-942-A provides guidance for lighting in the data center and that should be followed.




269

c) Maximum use of LED lighting with automated Motion/IR sensors with wide angle coverage Sensors to be deployed. Light fixtures should be located above the aisles and between cabinets.

d) Furthermore, it is recommended that a three-level lighting protocol be adopted in the data centers:

e) Level 1: Data center unoccupied

f) Level 2: Initial entry into the data center

g) Level 3: Occupied space

h) At Level 1, the lighting should allow effective use of video surveillance equipment.

i) At Level 2, at the initial entry into the data center, motion sensors should be used to activate lights in the immediate area of entry and be programmed to illuminate aisles and passageways. Sufficient lighting should be provided to allow safe passage through the space and to permit identification via security cameras.

j) At Level 3, when the data center is occupied for purposes of maintenance or interaction with equipment, lighting shall be 500 lux in the horizontal plane and 200 lux in the vertical plane, measured 1 m (3 ft) above the finished floor in the middle of all aisles between cabinets. In data centers larger than 230 m2 (2500 ft2) zone lighting is recommended that provides Level 3 in the immediate area of work and Level 2 in all other zones.




270

Annexure-Q4: HVAC

1. INTRODUCTION

2. CODES AND STANDARDS

The design/selection shall in accordance with the applicable portions of the latest revisions of the following Standards and Codes.

i. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) [2003-2013]. ii. National Building Codes - Building Services – 2005, Addendum 2015; iii. Ventilation for acceptable indoor air quality 62.1-2010. iv. Energy standards for buildings 90.1-2007. v. ASHRAE handbooks: vi. 2006 ASHRAE Handbook, Refrigeration. vii. 2007 ASHRAE Handbook, Applications. viii. 2008 ASHRAE Handbook, Systems and applications. ix. 2009 ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals. x. Air Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI). xi. Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): xii. HVAC duct construction standards, metal and flexible, 1995. xiii. ASHRAE 52.1-1992, 52.2-2007. xiv. IMD Weather Data. xv. ARI 550/590- 2003/Euro vent

The following IS codes shall be applicable: S. No. Material/item of Work Standard/Code 1. Ducting Fabrication IS: 655 (Latest Rev.)/ SMACNA 2. Galvanized Sheets/Wires IS: 277-1977 3. Aluminum Sheets/Wires IS: 737 4. Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps IS: 1620 5. Mild Steel, ERW Pipes IS: 1239, IS: 3589 6. Pipe Fittings IS: 1239 7. Steel Pipe Flanges IS: 6392 8. Gate, Globe & Check Valves

Up to 40 mm gun metal IS : 778 Butterfly valves of 50 mm and Above (cast iron) S: 780, IS: 2906 Balancing Valves IS : 778

Non Return Valves IS : 5312 9. Color Code for Identifications of pipes IS: 2379-1963 10. 3 Phase induction motors IS: 325 11. Burden type pressure gauges IS: 3624 12. PVC insulated electric cables IS: 1554 13. HRC cartridge fuse links IS: 2208 14. Starters sheets/wires IS: 8555 15. Specific requirements for Direct switching of motors IS: 4064 (Part II) 16. Inspection and testing of Installation IS: 732 (Part III) 17. Glossary of terms used in refrigeration and Air-conditioning IS: 3615 18. Hot die zinc coated steel pipes IS: 4736-1968 19. Expanded polystyrene IS: 4671




271

Safety codes The following safety codes as laid down by ISI shall be followed: a) Safety code for mechanical refrigeration IS : 660 b) Safety code for air-conditioning IS : 659 c) Safety code for scaffolding and ladders IS : 3696 d) Code for practice for safety and health Requirements

in electrical and gas Welding & cutting operations IS: 3696 e) Code of safety procedures and practices In electrical works IS: 5216 f) NBC / NFPA 70, 71, 101




272

3. DESIGN BASIS

3.1. DESIGN AMBIENT:

The external environmental conditions used in the mechanical design are as follows: Location = Pune, Maharashtra (India) Latitude = 18.57 N Longitude = 73.69 E Design ambient as per latest ASHRAE standards for N=20 years as recommended by Uptime Institute, shall be followed INSIDE DESIGN CONDITIONS DC Module: - 22 degree C (inlet to racks) ; as per New ASHRAE TC 9.9 guidelines - 2011. Electrical Room = 30±2ºC, no RH Control UPS Room = 25±2ºC , no RH Control. If required temperature can be set at 23 deg C Battery Room = 25±2ºC , no RH Control. Office Area = 24±2ºC , RH ≤ 65%, However temp can be set to maintain 22 deg C.

3.2. DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR SELECTION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS & ITS COMPONENTS SHALL BE:

Maximum face velocity across pre-filter : 500 Ft/Min. (152M/Min.) Maximum face velocity across Cooling Coil : 500 Ft/Min. (152M/Min.) Maximum fan outlet velocity : 2200 Ft/Min. (700M/Min) Maximum fan Speed a) Fans above 300 mm dia. : 900 RPM b) Fans up to & including 300 mm dia : 1440 RPM Maximum Fan Motor Speed : 1440 RPM

3.3. PIPING SHALL BE SIZED FOR THE FOLLOWING DESIGN PARAMETERS:

Maximum Velocity : 8 Ft/Sec. (2.5 M/Sec.) Maximum Friction : 4 Ft/100 Ft Run (4 M/100 M Run) Maximum Velocity (Main Header) : 7 Ft/Sec. (2.2 M/Sec.) Maximum Friction (Main Header) : 4.4 Ft/100 Ft Run (4.4 M/100 M Run)

3.4. DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR DUCT DESIGN SHALL BE:

Maximum flow velocity : 1500 Ft./Min (450 M/Min) Maximum Friction : 0.1inch WG/100ft. Run (1 cm WG/100M Run) Maximum Velocity at Supply Air Outlet : 500 Ft./Min. (150 M/Min.)




273

3.5. SYSTEM PROPOSED:

3.5.1. CHILLERS

The number of Chillers shall be decided based on the design with redundancy.

3.5.2. PUMPS:

A primary Variable chilled water loop is proposed. Chilled water will be circulated using variable discharge pumps run by high efficiency motors to save energy. Primary Variable discharge pumps will save energy by varying the discharge depending upon the demand. All the Chilled Water Pumps will have UPS power supply for continuous circulation during the power failure.

3.5.3. OTHERS SYSTEM

Free cooling system has been given for the DC Server hall cooling which comprises of Cooling towers, PHE, Primary & Secondary Pumps and Auxiliary coil in the CRAC (CW).

Office areas including NOC, BMS room, cooling is being catered by VRF system.

3.5.4. DRAWINGS:

All the drawings, including SLD’s shall be provided by the SI’s including complete design.

3.5.5. TOILETS:

A central ducted mechanical ventilation system shall be provided to serve all guestroom toilets and bathrooms. There shall be an enthalpy recovery device before exhaust to recover cooling enthalpy from exhaust air.

3.5.6. PLANT ROOM & ELECTRICAL AREAS:

Plant rooms shall be provided with mechanical ventilation. Mechanical supply and extract air ventilation shall be provided to plant rooms..

3.5.7. SMOKE CONTROL:

3.5.7.1. INTERNAL STAIRCASES AND LIFT LOBBIES:

Internal staircases and lift lobbies shall be provided with pressurization systems, so as to maintain 50 pa positive pressure in case of fire. Pressurization fans shall be located at roof level.

3.5.7.2. NOISE CRITERION:

All air conditioning equipment and materials (like pumps, chiller, motors, ducts, grilles, acoustic lining etc.) will be selected, designed and installed in such a manner that the inside noise criterion for all conditioned spaces will be in the range NC-35 to NC-40. The noise levels in plant area due to all air conditioning equipment will not exceed NC-65 at 125 Hz when measured at any point less than 1.5 meter above floor level and not closer than 1.5 meter from any supply air register or 60 cm from any return air grille.

When taking noise level measurements, the background noise level without the equipment operating shall be at least 7 DB below the actual background noise level when the equipment is in operation.




274

3.5.8. DEVIATIONS:

Any deviations from specifications may be acceptable, provided such deviations are found necessary and appropriate for fulfilling the overall intent and purpose of the system after taking approval from Client.

3.5.9. TECHNICAL DATA:

The contractor shall furnish complete technical data of the equipment offered by him as required under the heading "technical data".

3.5.10. GUARANTEE:

a) The contractor shall guarantee the system to be free from any vibrations and noise. b) The contractor shall guarantee that the capacity of various components as well as the

whole system shall not be less than specified.

4. PUMPS

4.1. GENERAL:

The various items of the water circulating system shall be complete in all respects and comply with the specification given below. The total sound intensity shall not practically exceed NC-65 at a distance of 15 meters.

4.2. SCOPE:

Scope of work under this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of pumps of the type and capacities. Pumps shall be suitable for the purpose they are intended. Pumps shall be UL-listed.

4.3. PUMP SETS (NON OVERLOADING)

END SUCTION BACK PULL OUT PUMPS (BASE MOUNTED):

1. The pumps shall be long coupled, base mounted, single stage, End suction design, in cast iron bronze fitted construction specifically designed for quiet operation. Suitable standard operations between 175 PSIG to 280PSIG working pressures. Working pressures shall not be de-rated at temperatures up to 250F. The pump internals shall be capable of being services without disturbing piping connections or electrical motor connections, and the pump’s internal seals and bearings shall be serviceable without disturbing the upper casing half.

2. A bearing housing shall supply support for a pair of heavy-duty re-grease able ball bearings designed to circulate in oil. An inboard single row bearing shall absorb thermal expansive forces while an outboard double row bearing shall be clamped in place to absorb both radial and thrust loads and keep the rotating element in proper axial alignment. Bearings shall be replaceable without disturbing the system piping, the upper casing half, and shall be regreaseable without removal of the bearings from the bearing housing.

3. The impeller shaft shall be a solid 416 stainless steel shaft.

4. Pump shall be equipped with a pair of internally self-flushing mechanical seal assemblies in direct contact with the pump shaft. Mechanical seals shall be replaceable without disturbing the upper casing half and system piping.

5. Impeller shall be of the end suction should be of both hydraulically and dynamically balanced to ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5-1994, section 1.4.6.1.3,




275

6. A flexible type coupling, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, shall be employed between the pump and motor. On variable speed applications the coupler sleeve should be constructed of an EPDM material to maximize performance life.

7. An OSHA and ANSI rated coupler guard shall shield the coupler during operation. Coupler guard shall be dual rated ANSI B15.1, Section 8 and OSHA 1910.219 compliant coupling guard and contain viewing windows for inspection of the coupling. No more than .25 inches of either rotating assembly shall be visible beyond the coupling guard.

8. Motors shall meet scheduled horsepower, speed, voltage, and enclosure design. Pump and motors shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned after installation by the manufacturer’s representative. Motors shall be non-overloading at any point on the pump curve and shall meet NEMA specifications and conform to the standards outlined in EPACT 92.

9. Pump shall be of a maintainable design and for ease of maintenance should use machine fit parts and not press fit components

10. Base plate shall be of structural steel or fabricated steel channel configuration fully enclosed at sides and ends, with securely welded cross members and fully open grouting area (for field grouting). The minimum base plate stiffness shall conform to ANSI/HI 1.3.4-1997 for Horizontal Baseplate Design standards.

11. Pump rotation shall be right-hand or left-hand as viewed from the pump’s motor end and in respect to the discharge flange.

12. The pump(s) selected shall conform to ANSI/HI 9.6.3.1 standards for Preferred Operating Region (POR) unless otherwise approved by the engineer. The pump NPSH shall conform to the ANSI/HI 9.6.1-1997 standards for Centrifugal and Vertical Pumps for NPSH Margin.

13. The pump(s) vibration limits shall conform to Hydraulic Institute ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5-1994, section 1.4.6.1.1 for recommended acceptable unfiltered field vibration limits (as measured per H.I. 1.4.6.5.2, Figure 1.108) for pumps with rolling contact bearings.

14. Pump manufacturer shall be ISO-9001 certified.

15. The seismic capability of the pump shall allow it to withstand a horizontal load of 0.5g, excluding piping and/or fasteners used to anchor the pump to mounting pads or to the floor, without adversely affecting pump operation.

16. Each pump shall be factory hydrostatically tested per Hydraulic Institute standards and name-plated before shipment. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high grade paint prior to shipment.

17. Base shall be capable of being field grouted.

18. Performance: - Minimum pump efficiency shall be 75 %.

Accessories:

1. Vertically mounted design with a steel fabricated cradle base and a vertical solid shaft type P motor. 2. Provided with internal bronze pump wear rings, special shaft materials, or special spacer couplers. 3. Mechanical seals of EPR Carbon/Ni-Resist seals, EPR Tungsten/Carbide seal, or packing gland

material should be used in lieu of the standard seal.

4.3.1. PUMP ALIGNMENT

Split casing pumps, prior to testing shall be aligned with a dial indicator within 0.05 mm. Mono bloc pumps shall be factory aligned with motor on common base, and need not be realigned at site.

4.3.2. TESTING

i. Pump performance at site shall be computed from the pump curves provided by manufacturer.




276

ii. The SI shall inspect the strainer prior to star-up of the pump and shall remove the fine mesh brass filter after short running period. Space shall be provided for removal of strainer and for connection of blow down valve.

4.4. MISCELLANEOUS

The following items shall be provided:-

1. Water pressure gauges at inlet and outlet of each pump complete with gauges cocks and connected tubing.

2. Vibration isolation pads for each pump. 3. Drain line from each pump up to drain pit,(priced separately) 4. Pumps shall be furnished complete with an approved type of flexible couplings. Spacer type

couplings shall be provided, when required, to permit disassembling, or without disturbing pump driver, coupling guards, shall be made of expanded metal and bolted to the base plate, shall be furnished for all coupled pumps.

4.5. EXECUTION:

INSTALLATION AND TESTS

a) The pump sets shall be mounted on cement concrete foundation which shall be provided by other agencies. However grouting nuts, bolts, channels etc. Shall be provided by the contractor. Vibration isolator shall be provided by the Contractor as per site Engineer’s instruction.

b) On installation the capacity of the pumps shall be checked by measuring water flow, motor current and

pressure difference at inlet and outlet. The readings shall be recorded to compare actual performance with the specified data.

4.6. INSTALLATION:

The installation of pumps shall be carried out by the contractor as per manufacturer recommendations. The pumps shall be mounted on concrete foundations with vibration isolator’s sandwiched between foundation and floor. As far as possible, the pump sets shall be factory aligned and if necessary site alignments shall be done by experienced and trained person. The pumps shall be installed in a manner that would allow maintenance without causing damage to the insulation.

4.7. VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING SYSTEM:

4.7.1. SECTION INCLUDES:

4.7.1.1. VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING PACKAGE

1) Individual Components 2) Pump Control Panel 3) Adjustable Frequency Drive 4) Sensor Transmitters 5) Sequence of Operation

4.7.2. SUBMITTALS

4.7.2.1. SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

1) System summary sheet 2) Sequence of operation 4) Power and control wiring diagrams 5) System profile analysis including variable speed pump curves and system curve. The analysis shall also

include pump, motor and VFD efficiencies, job specific load profile, staging points, horsepower and kilowatt/hour consumption.




277

6) Pump data sheets

4.7.2.2. SUBMITTAL MUST BE:

Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted.

4.7.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A) The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer. The manufacturer shall assume "Unit Responsibility" for the complete pumping package. Unit responsibility shall be defined as responsibility for interface and successful operation of all system components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.

B) The local supplier of Chilled Water Variable Speed Pumping System (VSPS) must have relevant

expertise in all aspects of design, application engineering, Installation, programming, interfacing, commissioning and after sales service.

C) All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment.

This test shall be conducted with motors connected to VFD output and it shall test all inputs, outputs and program execution specific to this application.

D) Bidders shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged pumping systems. Any

deviations from this specification shall be bid as a voluntary alternate clearly defined in writing. If no exceptions are noted, the supplier or contractor shall be bound by these specifications.

4.7.4. MANUFACTURED UNITS

A) The control system shall include as, a minimum, the programmable logic pump controller, adjustable frequency drive(s) and all remote sensor/transmitters e.g. differential pressure switches etc. Provide additional items as specified or as required to properly execute the sequence of operation.

B) The variable speed pump logic controller, variable frequency drive(s), VFD bypass and remote

sensor/transmitter(s) shall ship as individual components to the job site. C) Pump logic controller, adjustable frequency drives, sensor/ transmitters and related equipment shall be

installed by the mechanical contractor as shown on the plans.

4.7.5. COMPONENTS

4.7.5.1. PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER

1) The controller shall be specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications. 2) The controller shall function to a proven program those safeguards against damaging hydraulic

conditions including: i) Pump Flow Surges ii) Hunting iii) End of Curve iv) System Over Pressure

3) The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to two discrete analog inputs from zone

sensor/transmitters. It will then select the analogue signal that has deviated the greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each input signal shall be capable of maintaining a different set point value. Controller shall be capable of controlling up to three pumps in parallel.

4) The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting an additional analog input for a flow sensor. This

input shall serve as the criteria for the end of curve protection algorithm.




278

5) The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional-integral-derivative control function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be user adjustable over an infinite range.

6) The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be displayed in plain English. The

operator interface shall have the following features: i) Multi-fault memory and recall last 10 faults and related operational data. ii) Red fault light, yellow warning light, and Green power on light iii) Soft-touch membrane keypad switches.

7) The display shall have four lines, with 20 characters on three lines and eight large characters on one

line. Actual pump information shall be displayed indicating pump status. 8) Controller shall be capable of performing the following pressure booster function:

i. Low suction pressure cutout to protect the pumps against operating with insufficient suction pressure.

ii. High system pressure cutout to protect the piping system against high pressure conditions.

4.7.5.2. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

1. The Variable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type, microprocessor controlled design.

2. The VFD, including all factory installed options, be tested to UL standard 508. The VFD shall also meet

C-UL and be CE marked and built to ISO 9001 standards. 3. The VFD shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. AFF with plastic enclosure shall not be acceptable. 4. The VFD shall employ an advanced sine wave approximation and voltage vector control to allow

operation at rated motor shaft output speed with no derating. This voltage vector control shall minimize harmonics to the motor to increase motor efficiency and life. Power factor shall be near unity regardless of speed or load.

5. The VFD shall have balanced DC link reactors to minimize power line harmonics. VFDs without a DC

link reactor shall provide a 3% impedance line reactor. 6. Input and output power circuit switching can be done without interlocks or damage to the VFD. 7. The following customer modifiable adjustments shall be provided:

Accel time Decel time Minimum frequency Maximum frequency

8. An automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided. This feature shall reduce voltages

when lightly loaded and provide a 3% to 10% additional energy savings. 9. The VFD shall be suitable for elevations to 3300 feet above sea level without derating. Maximum

operating ambient temperature shall not less than 104 degrees F. VFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95% non-condensing humidity.

10. The VFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English via an alphanumeric

display: Frequency Voltage Current




279

Kilowatts per hour Fault identification Percent torque Percent Power RPM

4.7.5.3. SENSOR / TRANSMITTERS

Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20mA dc signal indicative of process variable to the pump logic controller via standard two wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have a corrosion resistant steel body with 1/8” NPT process connection.

It shall have a NEMA 1 electrical enclosure capable of withstanding 450 PSI static pressure. Accuracy shall be within 0.5% of full span.

4.7.5.4. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A) The system shall consist of a pump logic controller, multiple pump/VFD sets, with manual and automatic

alternation. B) Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller, indicative of process

variable condition. C) The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, engineer/user determined set

points. D) When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the

optimum energy consumption level. E) The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its individual

set point and control to the least satisfied zone. F) If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a

timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump [wherever applicable]. G) The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until they equalize in speed

[wherever applicable] . H) Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together [wherever

applicable]. I) When the set point criteria can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the pump logic controller shall

initiate a timed defined sequence and continue variable speed operation [wherever applicable]. J) As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the appropriate

analog signal to the VFD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor. K) In the event of a VFD fault, the pump logic controller automatically initiates a time sequence of events to

start the redundant pump/VFD set in the variable speed mode. The redundant variable speed system shall be started through the pump logic controller.

L) Upon VFD fault(s), the pump controller shall display an alarm condition through a plain English

message. M) VFD fault indication shall be continuously displayed on the operator interface of the pump until the fault

has been corrected and the controller has been manually reset.




280

N) In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for control.

O) Upon sensor failure a plain English warning message shall be displayed on the operator interface of the

pump logic controller. P) In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, a user selectable number of VFDs

shall maintain a user adjustable speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure.

5. COOLING TOWERS:

5.1. SCOPE:

The scope of this section comprises the supply at site of cooling towers in accordance with design requirements and solutions as per design.

5.2. TYPE:

The system design, basis of design, estimated requirements and other relevant data are outlined in this section. The detailed specifications and specific requirements are outlined in the subsequent sections. Cooling towers shall be HDG Construction casing, induced draft type or in accordance with design specification and solution proposed by the SI.

5.3. HDG CONSTRUCTION INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWERS:

Hot dipped galvanized iron sheet construction, cooling towers shall be of approved equal make, suitable for outdoor use. Tower shall be vertical, induced draft, counter flow type, Hot Dipped Galvanized Iron sheet Construction, in circular or rectangular Shape, square or bottle shape, complete with fan, motor, surface and spray sections, eliminators, automatic controls and sound attenuation equipment.

5.4. CAPACITY:

The cooling tower capacities shall be as per the design and solution requirements.

5.5. SIDE CASING:

This shall be made out of HDG with both side smooth surface for minimum resistance to air flow. It shall have sufficient structural strength to adequately withstand high wind velocities and vibration. The casing shall be installed on the Hot Dipped Galvanized Iron basin. The tower supporting structure shall be made out of hot dipped galvanized steel frame suitable for seismic zone 4.

A hot dip galvanized expanded metal mesh screen shall protect the air intake. Sufficient clearance between casing and water basin shall be provided to enable servicing and periodically cleaning.

5.6. COLD WATER BASIN:

Cold Water Basin shall be of Hot Dipped Galvanized Iron, deep sump on which cooling tower super structure shall be supported. Suction tank with easily removable double brass strainers shall be provided with this tank.

Basin fittings shall include the following; a. Bottom outlet. b. Suction screen assembly constructed with the casing. c. Drain connection at underside of suction side. d. Overflow connection constructed inside of casing side. e. Built in bleed off attached to inlet header & connected to overflow pipe. f. Ball type automatic make up water valve. Quick fill connection to inside of casing side with stop valve. Stop valve is to be provided. g. Equalizing connection.




281

5.7. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:

Hot water distribution shall be by sprinkler or gravity obstructive path, and system consisting of PVC/brass sprinkler pipes screwed into a rotating head and mounted on brass top of the vertical pipe installed centrally in the tower. Alternately, hot water shall be discharged onto a basin & allowed to flow down on PVC fill through distributors, by gravity. Depth of hot water basin shall be adequate to avoid water overflow.

5.8. FILLING:

Filling shall be made of corrosion proof and rigid PVC fill in honeycomb design and arranged in circular form to facilitate easy replacement. They shall be arranged in such a manner to ensure sornegligible resistance to air flow and to eliminate back water spots and prevent fouling through scales that may form. In order to reduce carry over losses through entrainment of moisture drops in air streams, multiple drift eliminators shall be installed.

5.9. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:

Fan shall be of the propeller type, the primary air delivery system for each cell shall consist of an electric motor, a multi-bladed axial type fan of belt driven or direct driven and rigid unitized support. All components shall be corrosion resistant in 100% humidity climates. 1. Motors shall be one speed single winding, and specially insulated for cooling water duty. The

load applied to the motors shall not exceed 90% of their nameplate rating. 2. Motors shall be located outside the fan stacks. The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed fan

cooled weather proof IP55 with Class F Insulation type suitable for 415 volts/3 phase/50 Hz power supply and shall be located outside the discharge air stream through a set of wedge belt. A belt cover shall be provided to protect the wedge belt and shall be of FRP construction.

3. Fans shall be composite multi-blade, axial type with appropriate twist and taper to produce the design airflow at high efficiency and low operating horsepower. The fans and all blades shall be fabricated with consistent moment weights to permit the change-out of individual blades without need for total re-balance. Hubs shall be fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel and ductile cast iron assembled with HDGS / 316/304 stainless steel (optional) hardware. Hubs shall be statically balanced at the factory. All the components shall be fabricated of corrosion resistant materials throughout for long life when handling saturated air at high velocities. The construction material of the fan blade shall be FRP/Aluminum (optional). Hot dipped galvanized fan guard shall be provided over the fan cylinder.

4. The wedge- belt shall be with fabric impregnated type design to B.S 1400 standard. Means for adjusting the belt tension shall be provided. Positives means of locking shall be employed in order to maintain tension during operation. A spray galvanized service ladder shall also be provided for maintenance. The mechanical equipment assembly shall be adequately supported on a rigid steel base welded to tubular support assuring vibration free support and support suitable for seismic zone 4.

Motor shall be mounted directly on fan through common shaft or shall be belt driven to suit required fan rpm.

5.10. PAINTING:

The exterior steel surfaces of all towers shall be Powder Coated, approved/ standard finish. If these shop coats become marred during shipment or erection, the affected areas shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed then coated with enamel paints of matching shades. FRP towers shall be provided of color approved by Architect.

5.11. PERFORMANCE DATA:

Complete performance ratings and power consumption at varying loads and outdoor wet bulb temperatures, shall be submitted with the tender and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation.




282

6. PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER

6.1. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS :

a) Application : Chilled Water Cooling (Water –

1. Water Heat exchanger OR Water – Brine Heat exchanger) 2. Steam heater (water Vs Dry Sat. steam.)

b) Type : Counter current and parallel flow only with 1 Pass Arrangement c) Performance Requirements

Units shall be sized to meet design conditions as per specified in the schedule with a maximum Allowable pressure drop as per schedule in each circuit. In addition, units shall be sized with allowance for 15% extension for future addition of plates.

d) Plate Heat Exchanger shall be AHRI 400 Certified for Thermal Performance e) Design Pressure / Temperature : 10 bar/ 100 deg C or as per schedule f) Test Pressure : 1.3 times the design pressure g) The design shall prevent intermixing and leakage of fluid to outside of unit. h) The units shall withstand the maximum test pressure on either hot or cold side with the opposite side at

0 bar gauge or as per schedule. i) Units to be factory tested in accordance with applicable code.

6.2. MATERIALS

6.2.1. PLATES

a) One step pressed type AISI 316 stainless steel plate, and tapered gasket groove. b) Each plate to have herringbone corrugations & chocolate distribution to optimize heat

transfer with minimum pressure losses c) The channel depth between two plates should be in between 1.9mm to 2.5mm both values

inclusive. d) End plates shall be of AISI 316 material and minimum 0.6mm thickness. e) Design of plates to strictly follow countercurrent and parallel flow principle f) Design to allow for removal and replacement of single plate without removal of the plate on

either side. g) Design shall prevent fluid intermixing and provide leakage to the outside of the unit h) Plates should not lock to adjacent plates i) Each plate should strictly have a built in five point alignment system with reinforced hanger

arrangement to accurately locate the plates in the frame assembly to prevent lateral plate movement under pressure.

j) Plates shall be reinforced at the upper and lower mounting slots to prevent bending hangers on the plate.

k) The plates shall have no welded stiffeners etc. and should be designed to allow pressurization of each circuit to a full differential of 1.3 times the design pressure without buckling or deformation of heat transfer plates

l) Plates to be specifically manufactured in order to obtain design delta T (Close LMTD)

6.2.2. GASKET

a) One-piece, molded Nitrile Butyl Rubber (NBRP) gasket.




283

b) Gaskets shall have relieving grooves to prevent intermixing of fluids and cause leak to outside of unit.

c) The gaskets shall be locked into the groove by Clip On / Clip AD / Tape On method. Glued gaskets are not preferable.

d) Gasket should be suitable for fluid & given process temperature e) Gaskets should be Roof Top type gaskets for better sealing.

6.2.3. FRAME

a) The frame assembly should be bolted construction and not welded frame assembly b) The frame shall be carbon steel construction sand blasted and two coats of blue paint.

Manufacturer painting specifications to be provided. c) The moveable cover shall have only stainless steel material roller for ease of movement

without additional rigging or handling equipment. d) Provide lifting lugs to allow lifting of entire units flooded weight. e) Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and minimum high width

hexagonal nuts to adequately distribute the load. f) Critical bolts to strictly have ball bearing boxes. g) Provide plastic covers over threaded rod extension for protection of threads h) Connections to be studded port design with connection lining to be of constructed of same

plate material and electrometric liner. i) The plates shall only contact with stainless steel surfaces. j) The portion of the carrying bar in contact with plates shall be an integrated into the carrying

bar. k) Tilted Bolt openings in Pressure Carrying Plates, for safety & easy maintainability

6.3. PHE INSULATION

Manufacturer shall supply pre-fabricated insulated cover and drip tray. Removable and reusable panel type insulation cover for the PHE enables expedient removal and replacement of insulation to facilitate removal and cleaning of plates. To facilitate assembly and disassembly the insulation pieces shall be held together with stainless steel “suitcase” type latches.

7. THERMAL STORAGE TANK

7.1. SUMMARY:

The data center is employed for primarily high density racks, any power outage may result in shifting the rack inlet conditions above the desired level as starting of the chiller and then loading of the chiller to 100 % capacity takes nearly 10 minutes after DG operation. Continuous cooling is mandatory requirement. Considering that we are selecting chillers of data center grade with quick recovery facility within 5 minutes, storage will be selected for 5 minutes. Chilled water at 14 degree shall be stored for 5 minutes to be used for cooling of servers during power failure.

7.2. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT:

The vessel need to be designed for site applicable seismic and wind load criteria depending on installation location. The manufacturer need to confirm dynamic stability of the vessel through calculations based on the ratio of height and diameter of the tank, wall thickness and radius of tank. While assessing wind load necessary form factor needs to be considered. The design and construction details for the tank shall be as follows:- Operating temperature: - 14- 21 degree C. Working pressure: - Minimum 7.5 kg/ sq cm. Design working pressure: - 10 kg/sq cm. Test pressure :- 1.5 times design working pressure.




284

Top head and bottom head:- - Hemispherical. Support: - Skirt. Material of construction: - Carbon steel. Nozzles diameter: - As per design. Minimum corrosion allowance: - 1.5 mm. Ancillaries:- Ladder, Platform, vortex breaker, flow diffuser.

Thermal storage tank shall be provided with all necessary internal flow distributors required to meet thermal performance required by the design. The design shall be based on proven flow distribution calculations for maintaining an operating thermo cline between cold and hot water. The diffuser shall be designed based on modular construction corrosion resistant materials in such a way that it can be assembled and disassembled for easy removal through shell manholes. All components of diffuser shall be supported from tank structural members without the use of pipe hanger. Any assembling and disassembling of diffuser components shall be done without welding, cutting, gluing etc. All adjacent components of diffuser shall be self-interlocking and aligning. The modular diffuser construction shall be based on design approved by factory mutual used for thermal storage applications. All welded inlet/outlet connections shall be provided with flanged fittings so that they can be connected to the pipe lines at the site. All outlet pipes shall be provided with anti-vortex plate, pressure relief and vacuum breaker valves shall be provided at the dome of the tank. The valves shall have capacity to remove air based on maximum water inflow/outflow without exceeding maximum design pressure. Insulation panels shall be prefabricated with poly-isocyanurate insulation with aluminum cladding of 0.6 mm thickness on both sides. The tanks shall be provided with cathodic protection system complete with all electrical conduits, welded steel tabs for connections to tank.

7.3. QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENT:

The vessel shall be fabricated as per section ASME section VIII, Division 1, ASME U stamp required. Post weld heat treatment shall be carried out. The manufacturer shall provide material test certificates, radiographic test certificates on welds & hydrostatic pressure test.

8. AIR HANDLING UNITS (DOUBLE SKIN)

8.1. GENERAL:

The air handling units shall be complete in all respects and shall generally comply with the specifications as given in the following paragraphs.

8.2. SCOPE:

Scope of work under this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of double skin air handling units, with Thermal break Profile.

8.3. AIR HANDLING UNITS:

The air handling units shall be double skin, draw through type and shall include pre filter, fan section, coil section, filter sections, mixing chamber etc. as mentioned below. Panels should confirm to class D1 of EN 1886, air leakage as per class L1 of EN 1886,thermal bridging of minimum TB2 class and thermal transmittance of minimum T2 class as per EN 1886. shall be suitable for on site assembly with continuous foam gasket. All fixing and gaskets shall be concealed.

8.3.1. MIXING BOX

AHU’s requiring mixing boxes as specified in shall be complete with fresh and return air dampers.




285

8.3.2. THERMAL BREAK CSU

AHU’s such as TFA units, AHU with mixing box having return air ducted shall be provided with thermal break. Also these AHU’s shall be provided with 40 +/- 2 mm thick panel. In case of AHU casing design with no contact between inner and outer surface, thermal break should not be avoided.

8.3.3. FAN SECTION

Fans shall be backward curved plenum/plug fan with aerofoil design blades for Floor Mounted /TFA units and Ceiling Suspended unit with Forward Curved Direct Driven Fan so as to give maximum efficiency for given duty condition. In case of Plug fan, the entire fan with casing will be certified by a reputed 3rd party internationally acclaimed certifying body like Eurovent, or ARI or AMCA, and the entire Fan + Motor assembly will be balanced at supplier’s works before dispatch. Fans driven by variable frequency drive shall be backward inclined irrespective of static pressure value. Fans shall be selected for minimum efficiency of 70% Fan casing shall be made of galvanized steel sheet. Fan wheels shall be made of galvanized steel in case of forward curved , MS epoxy coated in case of backward curved DIDW fans and MS epoxy coated/composite material in case of plug fans. Fan array with multiple fans should be used for capacities more than 15000 CMH. Plug fans in fan array shall have individual VFDs for every motor fan set. For DIDW Fan shaft shall be grounded C40 carbon steel and supported in self-aligning plummer block operating less than 75% of first critical speed, grease lubricated bearings. Fan wheels and pulleys shall be individually tested and precision balanced dynamically. Fan motor assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced to G6.3 grade as per relevant ISO/AMCA standard. Certified Computerized selection for CSU shall be with fan selection.

Motors shall be mounted inside the CSU casing on slide rails for alignment, and be totally enclosed, fan cooled, to be class `F’ insulation.

Both fan and motors assemblies shall be mounted on a deep section aluminum alloy or galvanized steel (depending on size) base frame.

Heavy duty anti-vibration mounts shall be provided for isolating the unit casing. Frame retardant, waterproof silicone rubber impregnated flexible connection shall be provided at the fan discharge.

8.3.4. COOLING COIL:

Computerized cooling coil selection output shall be submitted. Coil rating shall be certified as per ARI-410/2006.

Certified Computerized selection for AHU shall be with coil selection.

8.3.5. DAMPER

Dampers shall be opposed blade type. Blades shall be made of double skinned aero foil aluminum sections with integral gasket and assembled within a rigid extruded aluminum alloy frame. All linkages and supporting spindles shall be made of aluminum or nylon, turning in teflon bushes. Manual dampers shall be provided with a Bakelite knob for locking the damper blades in position. Linkages shall be extended wherever specified for motorized operation. Damper frames shall be sectionalized to minimize blade warping. Air leakage through dampers when in the closed position shall not exceed 1.5% of the maximum design air volume flow rate at the maximum design air total pressure.

8.3.6. FILTER SECTION:

Each unit shall be provided with a factory assembled filter section containing washable synthetic type air filters having GI frame. Filter media and frame shall be rust proof and corrosion resistant. The filter shall have minimum 90% efficiency down to 10 microns. The media shall be supported with HDP mesh on one side and aluminum mesh on other side. Filter banks shall be easily accessible and designed for easy withdrawal and renewal of filter cells. Filter framework shall be fully sealed and constructed from aluminum alloy. For green buildings, AHUs shall also be provided with MERV-8 filters. Filter by pass rating shall ensure F9 standard. Certified Computerized selection for AHU shall be with filter selection.




286

8.3.7. DRAIN PAN:

The sandwiched drain pan shall be of 18 gauge or better stainless steel internal sheet and SS drain connection of suitable size, complete with 25mm rigid insulation. The external sheet shall be 22 gauge or better galvanized steel.

8.3.8. COIL AND FILTER HOUSING:

The cooling coils, special and standard filters etc., shall all be housed in a separate enclosure of suitable size and length.

The enclosure shall be sized to accommodate the absolute and high efficiency filters. The inspection doors, shall have double synthetic rubber seals doors and locking arrangements. The gaps between filter frames and housing shall have synthetic rubber packing, to eliminate any air leakage. All filter frames shall be of aluminum.

8.3.9. AHU ENCLOSURE/HOUSING:

The AHU housing shall be made of double skin design with main structure made of structural channel frame work in different sections.

8.3.10. FAN MOTOR & STARTER:

Fan motors shall be energy efficient and shall be 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, three phases, totally enclosed fan-cooled class F, with IP-55 protection. Motors shall be especially designed for quiet operation and motor speed at 50 Hz shall not exceed 1440 rpm. Drive to fan shall be provided through belt-drive arrangement. Belts shall be of the oil-resistant type. For three stage filtration AHUs, belt drive shall not be used and direct driven plug fans shall be used. Frequency converter (VFD) shall be supplied by the AHU manufacturer for all AHUs with direct driven fans.

8.3.11. CONTROLS:

Each air handling unit shall be provided with temperature sensor and a 2 - way modulating valve for temperature control,

8.3.12. FRESH AIR INTAKES

Extruded aluminum construction duly anodized (20 microns and above) fresh air louvers with bird screen and dampers shall be provided in the clear openings in masonry walls of the air handling unit rooms having at least one external wall. Louvers, damper, pre-filters, ducts and fresh air fan with speed regulator . Fresh air dampers shall be of the interlocking, opposed-blade louver type. Blades shall be made of extruded aluminum construction and shall be rattle-free. Dampers shall be similar to those specified in “Air Distribution”. Fresh air fans and fresh air intakes.

8.4. ACCESSORIES:

Each air handling unit shall be complete with:

a) Stem type thermometers at coil inlet and outlet, with tubing and gauge cocks. b) Pressure gauge with cock at inlet and outlet of the coil, with tubing and gauge cocks. c) Butterfly valves at coil inlet and outlet and balancing valve at coil outlet. d) Drain line from the unit up to drain trap with compact drain pump. e) Fire rated double canvas flexible connection between the fan outlet and duct. f) Door limit switch shall be provided for automatically trip the fan when the door is opened. g) View port is provided on fan door panel which help to monitor fan and motor status. Marine lamp

with toggle switch to be provided for easy visibility. h) Spring type of Vibration isolators.




287

9. FAN COIL UNITS

9.1. GENERAL

The fan coil units shall be complete in all respects and shall generally comply with the specifications as given hereunder.

9.2. FAN COIL UNITS:

The fan coil units shall be ceiling mounting type complete with finned coil, fan section with motor, drain pans, air filters, filter box, fan speed regulator and other controls.

9.3. COOLING COIL :

The cooling coil tubes shall be made of best quality seamless annealed copper not less than 5/8 inch. O.D. 1.00 mm thick, the coil shall have continuous aluminum plate fins of adequate cross section area. The fins shall be spaced by collars forming integral part of the fins. The tubes shall be staggered in the direction of air flow. The coil circuit should be sized for adequate water velocity but not exceeding 1.8 m/s (6 f.p.s) the fins shall be uniformly bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of the tubes.

9.4. DRAIN PANS:

The drain pan shall be extended type of double skin sandwich construction made of 1.25 mm (16 gauge) G.I. sheet, covering the whole of coil section and extended on one side for accommodating coil connection, valve etc. and complete with a 25 mm drain connection. The drain pan shall be insulated with 25 mm polyurethane foam and covered with second G.I. tray. Drain pans connection shall be complete with drain pump arrangement.

9.5. AIR FILTER:

The filter shall be cleanable (washable) type 12 mm thick, of GI wire mesh to be mounted, behind the pan in a filter box made of G.I. sheet. The filter rating should be minimum of G4.

9.6. SPEED CONTROL:

A sturdy switch shall be provided with the unit complete with wiring, for ON/OFF and with minimum (3) three speed control, of the fan.

9.7. PAINTING:

The fan coil units would powder coated in suitable color.

9.8. MISCELLANEOUS:

The operating noise level at the supply air grill shall not exceed 35 dB.

F.C.U. shall be manufactured in such a way that the unit can be dismantled through the trap door without disturbing the drain pan. Rubber anti-vibration mountings shall be provided between the drain pan and F.C.U. body. The drain pan shall be independent assembly from FCU.

10. CEILING SUSPENDED UNIT (CSU):

10.1. SCOPE

The scope of this section, comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of double skin construction Ceiling Suspended air handling units,




288

10.2. TYPE

The CSU shall be double skin construction, draw-thru type comprising of various sections, filter section, coil section and fan section, mixing box, (wherever the return air and fresh air are ducted) .

10.3. CASING

Outer sheet of panels shall be made of as per class D1 of EN 1886, air leakage as per class L1 of EN 1886,thermal bridging of minimum TB2 class and thermal transmittance of minimum T2 class as per EN 1886.

The entire framework shall be mounted on an aluminum alloy or galvanized steel or heavy duty engineering composite material (depending on size) channel base as per manufacturer’s recommendation. Panels shall be assembled together to form an enclosure that is capable of low air leakage potential, conforming to class A of EN 1886:2007. Handles shall be made of hard nylon and all access panels should be openable with Allen key arrangement. Units supplied with various sections shall be suitable for on site assembly with continuous foam gasket. All fixing and gaskets shall be concealed.

Units shall have hinged, quick opening access door in the fan section and also in filter section where filters are not accessible from outside. Access doors shall be double skin type.

Condensate drain pan shall be fabricated from 18 gauge or better stainless steel sheet with all corners welded.

10.4. THERMAL BREAK CSU

CSU’s such as TFA units, CSU with mixing box having return air ducted shall be provided with thermal break. Also these CSU’s shall be provided with 40 +/- 2 mm thick panel. In case of CSU casing design with no contact between inner and outer surface, thermal break Should not be avoided.

10.5. DAMPER

Dampers shall be opposed blade type. Blades shall be made of double skinned aero foil aluminum sections with integral gasket and assembled within a rigid extruded aluminum alloy frame. All linkages and supporting spindles shall be made of aluminum or nylon, turning in teflon bushes. Manual dampers shall be provided with a Bakelite knob for locking the damper blades in position. Linkages shall be extended wherever specified for motorized operation. Damper frames shall be sectionalized to minimize blade warping. Air leakage through dampers when in the closed position shall not exceed 1.5% of the maximum design air volume flow rate at the maximum design air total pressure.

10.6. MOTOR AND DRIVE

Fan motors shall be energy efficient and shall be 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, three phases, totally enclosed fan-cooled class F, with IP-55 protection. Motors shall be especially designed for quiet operation and motor speed at 50 Hz shall not exceed 1440 rpm. For three stage filtration CSUs, belt drive shall not be used and direct driven plug fans shall be used. Frequency converter (VFD) shall be supplied by the CSU manufacturer for all CSUs with direct driven fans.




289

10.7. FAN

Fans shall be backward curved plenum/plug fan with aero foil design blades for Ceiling Suspended unit with Forward Curved Direct Driven Fan so as to give maximum efficiency for given duty condition. In case of Plug fan, the entire fan with casing will be certified by a reputed 3rd party internationally acclaimed certifying body like Eurovent, or ARI or AMCA, and the entire Fan + Motor assembly will be balanced at supplier’s works before dispatch. Fans driven by variable frequency drive shall be backward inclined irrespective of static pressure value. Fans shall be selected for minimum efficiency of 70% Fan casing shall be made of galvanized steel sheet. Fan wheels shall be made of galvanized steel in case of forward curved , MS epoxy coated in case of backward curved DIDW fans and MS epoxy coated/composite material in case of plug fans. Fan array with multiple fans should be used for capacities more than 15000 CMH. Plug fans in fan array shall have individual VFDs for every motor fan set. For DIDW Fan shaft shall be grounded C40 carbon steel and supported in self-aligning plummer block operating less than 75% of first critical speed, grease lubricated bearings. Fan wheels and pulleys shall be individually tested and precision balanced dynamically. Fan motor assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced to G6.3 grade as per relevant ISO/AMCA standard. Certified Computerized selection for CSU shall be with fan selection.

Motors shall be mounted inside the CSU casing on slide rails for alignment, and be totally enclosed, fan cooled, to be class `F’ insulation.

Both fan and motors assemblies shall be mounted on a deep section aluminum alloy or galvanized steel (depending on size) base frame.

Heavy duty anti-vibration mounts shall be provided for isolating the unit casing. Frame retardant, waterproof silicone rubber impregnated flexible connection shall be provided at the fan discharge.

10.8. COOLING COILS

i. Water pressure drop in coil shall not exceed 10 PSIG. ii. Computerized cooling coil selection output shall be submitted. Coil rating shall be certified as

per ARI-410/2006. iii. Certified Computerized selection for CSU shall be with coil selection.

10.9. FILTERS

Each unit shall be provided with a factory assembled filter section containing washable synthetic type air filters having GI frame. Filter media and frame shall be rust proof and corrosion resistant. The filter shall have minimum 90% efficiency down to 10 microns. The media shall be supported with HDP mesh on one side and aluminum mesh on other side. Filter banks shall be easily accessible and designed for easy withdrawal and renewal of filter cells. Filter framework shall be fully sealed and constructed from aluminum alloy. For green buildings, CSUs shall also be provided with MERV-8 filters.

10.10. ACCESSORIES

Each air handling unit shall be provided with manual air vent at high point in the cooling coil and drain plug in the bottom of the coil. In addition, the following accessories may be required at air handling units.

a. Insulated butterfly valves, balancing valves, `Y’ strainer, union & condensate drain piping with ‘U’

trap up to sump or floor drain in air handling unit room, as described in section “Piping”. b. Thermometers in the thermometer wells & pressure gauge (with cocks) within gauge ports in chilled

water supply and return lines as per the section “Instruments”. c. Water resistance marine light with power cabling.




290

d. Drain pans connection shall be complete with drain pump arrangement.

10.11. FRESH AIR INTAKES

Extruded aluminum construction duly anodized (20 microns and above) fresh air louvers with bird screen and dampers shall be provided in the clear openings in masonry walls of the air handling unit rooms having at least one external wall(if Required). Louvers, damper, pre-filters, Chemical Filters, ducts and fresh air fan with speed regulator shall be provided. Fresh air dampers shall be of the interlocking, opposed-blade louver type. Blades shall be made of extruded aluminum construction and shall be rattle-free. Dampers shall be similar to those specified in “Air Distribution”.

10.12. PAINTING

Shop coats of paint that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop painted surface.

10.13. PERFORMANCE DATA

Air handling unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level of the equipment.

10.14. TESTING

Cooling capacity of various air handling unit models be computed from the measurements of air flow and dry and wet bulb temperatures of air entering and leaving the coil. Flow measurements shall be by an anemometer and temperature measurements by accurately calibrated mercury-in-glass thermometers. Computed results shall conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input current.

11. AIR COOLED VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEM (VRV) for Service Area & Cafeteria’s etc.

11.1. SCOPE:

The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection testing and commissioning of inverter based Variable Refrigerant Volume/ Flow System with Scroll / Twin Rotary Compressor conforming to the specifications as per design requirements.

11.2. TYPE OF UNITS:

Units shall be air cooled, variable refrigerant volume air conditioner of R410A gas based consisting of one outdoor unit and multiple indoor units. Each indoor units having capability to cool or heat independently for the requirement of the rooms.

a) Ceiling mounted round flow cassette type a) Ceiling mounted Ductable ( HS/LS) type b) Ceiling suspended type c) Wall mounted type d) Floor standing type e) Floor standing Duct Type

Outdoor unit shall be suitable for mix match connection of all type of indoor units.

The refrigerant piping between indoor units and outdoor unit shall be extended up to 165m with maximum 90m level difference without any oil traps and total piping length with 1000m.




291

Both indoor units and outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, tested and filled with first charge of refrigerant before delivering at site.

11.3. OUTDOOR UNIT

The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, weather proof casing, constructed from heavy gauge mild steel panels and coated with baked enamel finish. The

Unit should be completely factory wired tested with all necessary controls and switch gears: 1. All outdoor units above 16 HP shall have minimum two scroll/ Twin Rotary compressors and be able

to operate even in case one of compressor is out of order. 2. All outdoor units must be equipped with optimized e-pass heat exchanger. 3. At full load condition, minimum COP level of outdoor unit should be more than 3.6 in cooling mode at

ARI condition. 4. All outdoor units must be equipped with night time quite operation function which results in less

sound level in night time operations of the outdoors. 5. It should also be provided with duty cycling for switching starting sequence of multiple outdoor units. 6. The noise level shall not be more than 68 dB (A) at anechoic chamber conversion value, measured

horizontally 1m away and 1.5m above ground level. 7. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should be allowed for side by side installation 8. The unit shall be provided with its own microprocessor control panel.

The outdoor unit should be fitted with low noise, aero spiral design fan with large airflow and should be designed to operate compressor-linking technology. The unit should also be capable to deliver 78 Pa external static pressure to meet long exhaust duct connection requirement.

The condensing unit shall be designed to operate safely when connected to multiple fan coil units, which have a combined operating nominal capacity up to 160 % of indoor units for outdoor units up to 40 HP.

11.3.1. COMPRESSOR

The compressor shall be highly efficient Inverter scroll / Twin Rotary type and capable of inverter control. It shall change the speed in accordance to the variation in cooling or heating load requirement: a) The inverter shall be IGBT type for efficient and quiet operation. b) All outdoor units shall have at least 10 steps of capacity control to meet load fluctuation and indoor

unit individual control. All parts of compressor shall be sufficiently lubricated stock. Forced lubrication may also be employed.

c) Oil heater shall be provided in the compressor casing.

11.3.2. HEAT EXCHANGER

The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins to form a cross fin coal. a) The aluminum fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion resin film. b) The unit shall be provided with necessary number of direct driven low noise level propeller type fans

arranged for vertical discharge. Each fan shall have a safety guard.

11.3.3. REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

The refrigerant circuit shall include liquid & gas shut-off valves and a solenoid valves at condenser end.

All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safely operation of the system.

11.3.4. SAFETY DEVICES

All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure safe operation of the system.




292

Following safety devices shall be part of outdoor unit; high pressure switch, fuse, crankcase heater, fusible plug, over load relay, protection for inverter, and short recycling guard timer.

11.3.5. OIL RECOVERY SYSTEM

Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with long refrigeration piping lengths.

11.4. INDOOR UNIT

This section deals with supply, installation, testing, commissioning of various type of indoor units confirming to general specification and suitable for the duty selected.

11.4.1. GENERAL

Indoor units shall be either ceiling mounted cassette type, or ceiling mounted ductable type or floor standing duct type or wall mounted type. These units shall have electronic control valve to control refrigerant flow rate respond to lead variations of the room.

a) The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and group control

b) In case of centralized control, it shall be set by liquid crystal remote controller

The fan shall be dual suction, aerodynamically designed turbo, multi blade type, statically & dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation of the system. The fan shall be direct driven type, mounted directly on motor shaft having supported from housing.

The cooling coil shall be made out of seamless copper tubes and have continuous aluminum fins. The fins shall be spaced by collars forming an integral part. The tubes shall be staggered in the direction of airflow. The tubes shall be hydraulically/ mechanically expanded for minimum thermal contact resistance with fins. Each coil shall be factory tested at 21kg/sqm air pressure under water.

Unit shall have cleanable type filter fixed to an integrally molded plastic frame. The filter shall be slide away type and neatly inserted.

Each indoor unit shall have computerized PID control for maintaining design room temperature. Each unit shall be provided with microprocessor thermostat for cooling and heating.

Each unit shall be with wired LCD type remote controller. The remote controller shall memorize the latest malfunction code for easy maintenance. The controller shall have self-diagnostic features for easy and quick maintenance and service. The controller shall be able to change fan speed and angle of swing flat individually as per requirement.

11.4.2. CEILING MOIUNTED CASSETTE TYPE UNIT

The unit shall be ceiling mounted type with eight directional flows. The unit shall include pre-filter, fan section and DX-coil section. The housing of the unit shall be powder coated

Galvanized steel. The body shall be light in weight and shall be able to suspend from four corners.

Unit shall have an external attractive panel for supply and return air. Unit shall have four way supply air grilles on sides and return air grille in center.

Each unit shall have high lift drain pump, fresh air intake provision (if specified) Low gas detection system and very low operating sound.

All the indoor units regardless of their difference in capacity should have same decorative panel size for harmonious aesthetic point of view. It should have provision of connecting branch ducts.




293

11.4.3. CEILING MOIUNTED DUCTABLE TYPE UNIT

Unit shall be suitable for ceiling mounted type. The unit shall include pre filter, fan section & DX coil section .The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel. The unit shall have high static fan for Ductable arrangement.

11.4.4. CEILING SUSPENDED TYPE

Unit shall be suitable for ceiling suspended arrangement below false ceiling. The unit includes pre filter, fan section & DX coil section. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel.

11.4.5. HIGH WALL MOUNTED UNITS

The units shall be wall-mounted type. The unit includes pre filter, fan section & DX coil section. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel.

Unit shall have an attractive external casing for supply and return air.

11.4.6. FLOOR STANDING TYPE

Unit shall be suitable for floor standing arrangement. The unit includes pre filter, fan section & DX coil section. The housing of unit shall be powder coated galvanized steel.

11.4.7. FLOOR STANDING DUCT TYPE

Unit shall be suitable for floor standing arrangement. The unit shall be Belt Driven type and high static pressure type which include pre filter, fan section & DX coil section.

11.5. INSTALLATION:

The units shall be mounted on ribbed rubber pads for vibration isolation. The contractor shall supply the required charge of refrigerant, lubricant and other consumables, for commissioning and testing of the equipment.

All the equipment shall be thoroughly tested and checked for leaks. All safety controls shall be suitably set and a record of all setting shall be furnished to SBI.

11.6. TESTING:

Unit capacity in tons Refrigeration, shall be computed from the temperature readings and air-flow measurements. Flow measurements shall be preferably by a hot-wire anemometer or a velometer. Computed results shall conform to the specified capacities and the power consumption shall conform to the figures furnished by the manufacturer.

11.7. PAINTING:

Shop coats of paint that have become marred during transportation or erection shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with enamel paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop- painted surfaces.

11.8. CONDENSER DRAIN PIPING :

All pipes to be used for cold water (makeup), drain, and condensate drain shall be PVC pipe conforming to IS: 4985 - Class I & all joints should be Gluing or solvent cementing as per manufacturer recommendation.




294

11.9. PIPE INSULATION

a. Refrigerant Pipe Insulation The whole of the liquid and suction refrigerant lines including all fittings, valves and strainer bodies, etc. shall be insulated with elastomeric nitrile rubber.

b. Drain Pipe Insulation

Drain pipes carrying condensate water shall be insulated with 6 mm thick elastomeric nitrile rubber insulation.

For proper drainage of condensate, U Trap shall be provided in the drain piping (wherever required). All pipe supports shall be of pre fabricated & pre painted slotted angle supports, properly installed with clamps etc.

11.10. TESTING & BALANCING:

a. All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least two and half times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified and gotten approved at site.

b. Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test shall be retested in the same manner. c. System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be securely capped, then retested for

entire system. d. The contractor shall give sufficient notice to all other agencies at site, of his intention to test a

section or sections of piping and all testing shall be witnessed and recorded by Consultant/Project Manager.

e. The contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation of fluid is achieved through all

coils and other heat exchange equipment in the system concerned. If proper circulation is not achieved the SI shall rectify the defective connection. He shall bear all expenses for carrying out the above rectifications, including the tearing up and refinishing of floors and walls as required.

f. The SI shall provide all materials, tools, equipment, instruments, services and labour required to

perform the test. g. Complete certified report shall be submitted to SBI for evaluation and approval. Upon approval,

four copies of the balance report shall be submitted with complete drawings and documents.

11.11. CENTRALIZED TYPE REMOTE (TOUCH SCREEN TYPE) CONTROLLER

A multifunctional compact centralized controller shall be provided with the system.

The Graphic Controller must act as an advanced air-conditioning management system to give complete control of VRV air-conditioning Equipment, It should have ease of use for the user through its touch screen, icon display and color LCD display.

It shall be able to control up to 64 groups of indoor units with the following Functions: a) Starting/stopping of Air-conditioners as a zone or group or individual unit. b) Temperature settling for each indoor unit or zone. c) Switching between temperature controls modes, switching of fan speed and direction of airflow, enabling/disabling of individual remote controller operation. d) Monitoring of operation status such as operation mode & temperature setting of individual indoor units, maintenance information, trouble shooting information.




295

e) Display of air conditioner operation history.

f) Daily management automation through yearly schedule function with possibility of various schedules.

11.12. UNIFIED ON/OFF CONTROLLER

Unified ON/OFF controller shall be supplied. The controller shall be able to control minimum 15 groups (each group containing maximum 16 indoor units) or 128 nos. of indoor units with the following functions:

a) On/Off as a zone or individual unit. b) Indication of operation condition of each group. c) Select one of 4 operation modes.

11.13. SCHEDULE TIMER

A schedule timer shall be supplied as an optional accessory. a) The timer shall be able to set operation schedule for all indoor units. b) The timer shall be able to set 8 pattern of schedule combined with centralized controller.

12. HEAT RECOVERY WHEEL:

12.1. GENERAL:

Heat recovery wheel shall be complete in all respect and generally comply with the specifications given below or needed to fulfill the intent and purpose of the unit.

12.2. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION:

a) The heat recovery wheel shall be of rigid construction with the wheel balanced both statically and dynamically and mounted on a rigid shaft.

b) The efficiency of the wheel shall not be below 74%. c) The whole heat recovery wheel assembly shall be duly painted with two coats of corrosion

resistant paint and mounted on vibration isolation. d) The heat transfer media shall be non-clogging type with low pressure drop, and shall be rigidly

held.

12.3. THE SUBSTRATE:

The substrate or wheel matrix should be only of pure aluminum foil so as to allow. a) Quick and efficient uptake of thermal energy. b) Sufficient mass for optimum heat transfer c) Maximum sensible heat recovery at a relatively low rotational speed of 20 to 25 rpm. Non metallic substrates made from paper, plastic, synthetic or glass fibre media, will therefore, not be acceptable. The substrate shall not be made from any material which is combustible or supports combustion.

12.4. DESICCANT

The desiccant should be water molecule selective and non-migratory. The desiccant, of sufficient mass, should be coated with non masking porous binder adhesive on the aluminum substrate so as to allow quick and easy uptake and release of water vapor. A matrix




296

with desiccants impregnated in non-metallic substrates, such as synthetic fiber, glass fiber, etc. will not be accepted. The rotor/wheel matrix shall have equal sensible and latent recovery. The weight of desiccant coating and the mass of aluminum foil shall be in a ratio so as to ensure equal recovery of both sensible and latent heat over the operating range. Accordingly, a rotor matrix which has an etched or oxidized surface to make a desiccant on a metal foil and results in insufficient latent recovery and hence unequal recovery, or a rotor matrix made from desiccant integrated in a synthetic fiber matrix which result in insufficient sensible recovery, high rotation speed, and unequal recovery, will not be accepted.

12.5. ROTOR:

With optimum heat and mass through matrix formed by desiccant, of sufficient mass, coated on an aluminum foil, the rotor should rotate at lower than 20 to 25 RPM, thereby also ensuring long life of belts and reduced wear and tear of seals.

The rotor shall be made of alternate flat and corrugated aluminum foil of uniform width.

The rotor honeycomb matrix foil should be so wound and adhered as to make a structurally very strong and rigid media which shall not get cracked, deformed etc. due to change of temperature or humidity.

The surface of the wheel/rotor should be highly polished to ensure that the vertical run out does not exceed + 1 mm for every 1 meter diameter, thereby ensuring, negligible leakage, if labyrinth non contact seals are provided, and minimal drag, if contact wiper seals are provided.

The radial run out also shall not exceed + 1 mm for every 1 meter diameter, thereby minimizing the leakage/drag on the radial seals, and minimize the fluctuation in the tension of the drive belt.

The number of wraps (of alternative corrugated and flat foil) for every inch of rotor radii shall be very consistent so as to ensure uniform air flow and performance over the entire face in the air stream. Flute height and pitch will be consistent to a very tight tolerance to ensure uniform pressure drop and uniform airflows across the rotor face.

The rotor shall be a non-clogging aluminum media, having a multitude of narrow aluminum foil channels, thus ensuring a laminar flow, and will allow particles up to 800 microns to pass through it.

The media shall be cleanable with compressed air, or low pressure steam or light detergent, without degrading the latent recovery.

12.6. THE CASSETTE / CASING

The recovery wheel cassette/casing shall be manufactured from tubular structure to provide a self supporting rigid structure, complete with access panels, purge sector, rotor, bearings, seals, drive mechanism complete with belt.

The rotor/wheel should have a field adjustable purge mechanism to provide definite separation of airflow minimizing the carryover of bacteria, dust and other pollutants, from the exhaust air to the supply air. It shall be possible, with proper adjustment, to limit cross contamination to less than 0.04% of that of the exhaust air concentration.

The face and radial seals shall be four (4) pass non contact labyrinth seals for effective sealing between the two air streams, and also for a minimum wear and tear ensuring infinite life of the seals.




297

FRESH AIR INTAKES

Extruded aluminum construction duly anodized (20 microns and above) fresh air louvers with bird screen and dampers shall be provided in the clear openings in masonry walls of the air handling unit rooms having at least one external wall. Louvers, damper, pre-filters, Chemical filters, Sand trap, ducts and fresh air fan with speed regulator . Fresh air dampers shall be of the interlocking, opposed-blade louver type. Blades shall be made of extruded aluminum construction and shall be rattle-free. Dampers shall be similar to those specified in “Air Distribution”.

CHEMICAL FILTERS

Extruded aluminum sectioned construction Chemical filter required for horizontal placement at Heat Recovery Unit in inlet Air stream. Chemical filter media shall be selected as per its deliverable Out let, it should be maintain the G1 class of Indoor Air Quality As per ASHRAE Standard. Carbon Dioxide or CO2 Cannot exceed 1000 PPM, Carbon Monoxide or CO ≤ 35 PPM Sulfur dioxide or SO2 < 0.5 PPM Magnesium <0.02 PPM The chemical filter will be provided only for the TFA unit selected for Data Center Server halls and the MSC server halls. Only space provision for Chemical filter suitable for GX class air has to be done in the TFA unit for getting G1 class of air in the Data hall. It will be installed at later date when the air quality of site degrades.

13. DUCT WORK AND OUTLETS:

This section deals with supply, erection, testing & balancing of GI sheet metal duct work and air registers conforming to specifications as given below:

13.1. MATERIAL FOR DUCTING

All the ducts shall of LFQ (Lock Forming Quality) grade prime G.I. raw material furnished with accompanying Mill Test Certificates. Galvanizing shall be 120gms/sq.m. ( total coating on both sides).

In addition, if deemed necessary, sample of raw material, selected at random by owner’s site representative shall be subject to approval and tested for thickness and zinc coating at contractor’s expense.

The G.I. raw material should be used in coil-form (instead of sheets) so as to limit the longitudinal joints at the edges only, irrespective of cross-section dimensions.

Governing Standards

Unless otherwise specified here, the construction, erections, testing and performance of the ducting system shall conform to the SMACNA standards and Addendum of SMACNA

Duct connectors and Accessories

All the transverse duct connectors (Flanges\Cleats) and accessories related hardware such as support system shall be zinc coated (galvanized). All supports should be suitable for seismic zone 4.

Fabrication standards

All the ductwork including straight sections, tapers, elbows, branches, shoe pieces, collars, terminal boxes and other transformation pieces shall be factory-fabricated. Equivalency will require fabrication by utilizing the following machines and process to provide the requisite quality of ducts and speed of supply.




298

Coil lines to ensure location of longitudinal seams at corners\folded edges only to obtain the required duct rigidity and low leakage characteristics. No longitudinal seams permitted along any side of the ducts.

All ducts, transformation pieces and fittings shall be made on CNC profile cutters for required accuracy of dimensions, location and dimensions of notches at the folding lines.

Selection of G.I. and Transverse Connectors

Duct construction shall be in compliance with 1” (250 Pa) w.g. static norms as per SMACNA.

All transverse connectors shall be 4-bolt system.

To avoid any leakage additional sealant shall be used.

The specified class of transverse connectors and duct gauge for a given duct dimensions shall be 1”( 250 Pa) pressure class.

Non-toxic, AC-application grade P.E. or PVC gasketing shall be provided between all mating flanged joints. Gasket sizes shall conform to flange manufacturer’s specification.

Duct construction

The fabricated duct dimensions shall be as per approved drawings and all connecting sections shall be dimensionally matched to avoid any gaps.

Dimensional Tolerances: All fabricated dimensions shall be within + 1.0mm of specified dimension. To

obtain required perpendicularity, permissible diagonal tolerance shall be +1.0mm per meters.

Each duct pieces shall be identified by coded sticker, which shall indicate specific part number, job name, drawing number, duct sizes and gauge.

Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside. Longitudinal seams shall be airtight and at corners, which shall be either Pittsburgh or snap button punch as per SMACNA practice, to ensure air tightness.

Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual (between 1:4 and 1:7) turning vanes or air splitters shall be installed in all bends and duct collars designed to permit the air to make the turn without appreciable turbulence.

Plenum shall be factory fabricated panel type and assembled at site.

13.2. THE SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR GRILLS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS

The supply and return air grills and ceiling diffusers shall be made of powder coated extruded aluminum sections. The supply air grills / diffusers shall be provided with screw operated opposed blade volume control device made of extruded aluminum in black anodized finish.

All grills / diffusers shall have soft continuous rubber / foam gasket between the periphery of the grills / diffusers and surface on which it has to be mounted. The color of grills / diffuser shall be as per the approval of the Engineer in Charge.

13.3. LINEAR SUPPLY AND RETURN GRILLS

The linear continuous supply / return air grills shall be made of powder coated extruded aluminum construction with fixed horizontal bars. The thickness of fixed bar louvers shall be 5mm in front and the flange shall be 20mm wide with round edges. The register shall be suitable for concealed fixing and horizontal bars of the grills shall mechanically crimped from the back to hold them.




299

13.4. FRONT FIXED BAR REAR ADJUSTABLE LOUVERED GRILLS

The grills shall be made of powder coated extruded aluminum construction with front fixed horizontal bar at 0 degree inclination with one way or two way deflection with rear vertical individually adjustable louvers in black shade mounted on Nylon bushes to hold deflection setting under all conditions of velocity and pressure.

The color of grills shall be as per the approval of the Engineer in Charge. The volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in black anodized finish shall be provided in supply air duct collars.

13.5. SQUARE / RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS

The square / rectangular ceiling diffusers shall be made of powder coated extruded aluminum construction with flush fixed pattern. The diffusers shall have Anti-Smudge ring and spring loaded removable central core in various pattern for air flow direction. The diffusers shall be mounted by concealed screw fixing arrangement. The volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in black anodized finish shall be provided in supply air diffusers.

13.6. VOLUME CONTROL DAMPER

The opposed blade volume control device shall be made of Powder Coated extruded aluminum construction in black anodized finish. Opposed blades shall be pivoted to extruded aluminum frame with Nylon bushes. Specially designed blade shall have an overlapping lip which shall ensure a tight closure.

13.7. MOTORIZED FIRE DAMPERS:

a) Fire Dampers shall be installed in the openings/passage fromed by supply and return air ducts when they pass through AHU room walls as well as when passing through all floors. MFD will be provided at all places where ever duct is crossing from one fire zone to other fire zone.

Fire dampers shall be multi leaf type. The blades and outer frame shall be made of 16G galvanized steel sheet. Fire damper assembly shall be factory fitted in a sleeve made of 18G galvanized steel sheet of minimum 400mm long. The blades shall be pivoted on both sides using chrome plated spindles in self lubricated bronze bushes. Metallic compression seal shall be provided on both ends to prevent smoke leakage. Stop seal shall be provided on top & bottom. Dual side linkage shall be provided for better structural stability. The construction of the fire damper shall allow maximum free area to reduce pressure drop and noise in the air passage.

Fore wall mounted fire dampers retaining angles shall be supplied and installed by HVAC contractor as per established installation procedure. Whereas the fire damper is also to be used for smoke management (smoke and fire damper) the same shall be as per UL 555S – Class II.

Every motorized fire damper/smoke and fire damper shall be tested for in the factory and will be certified by the manufacturer in form of the test certificate.

For fire dampers/smoke fire dampers of size higher than one approved by certifying agency the damper shall be supplied in multiple units of size not exceeding the tested damper by CBRI. All the multiple units shall be housed in a common factory fitted sleeve.

b) Actuators

The actuator used shall be maintenance free direct coupled spring return type suitable to work on 24V electric supply. The torque rating of the actuator shall exceed at least by 15% over torque required to open/close the damper. The selection of actuator size shall be the responsibility of the manufacture of the fire damper. Spring return time shall be 20 seconds or less at ambient temperature. The tamper proof housing with IP-54 protection rating.




300

c) The control panel shall have at least following features: Power on indicating lamps with 230V/24V Transformer. Damper close & open indication. Reset push button Push button for manual running of actuator for periodic inspection. Auxiliary contacts 24V & 230V Contact points to receive signal from smoke defector/fire alarm panel.

Access door will be provided in the duct before each fire damper.

13.8. FRESH AIR INTAKE LOUVERS WITH BIRD SCREEN

The fresh air intake louvers at least 50mm deep will be made of powder coated extruded aluminum construction. Bird / insect screen will be provided with the intake louvers. The blades shall be inclined at 45 degree on a 40mm blade pitch to minimize water ingress. The lowest blade of the assembly shall be extended out slightly to facilitate disposal of rain water without falling on door / wall on which it is mounted.

The intake louvers shall be provided with factory fitted aluminum construction volume control dampers in black anodized finish.

13.9. PAINTING

All ducts collar / shoot behind the grills / diffuser shall be given at least two coats oil black enamel paints.

13.10. TESTING

The complete duct system shall be tested for air leakage & complete air distribution system shall be balanced in accordance with air quantities.

13.11. FLANGES:

a) All flanges shall be of mild steel as per relevant latest IS code and shall be steel slip-on-type, welded to the pipes, flange thickness shall be to suit class-ii pressures. No site manufactured flanges, bolt & gasket sets.

b) Flanges may be tack welded into position, but all final welding shall be done with joints

dismounted. Thick gaskets shall be used with all flanged joints. The gaskets shall be fiber reinforced rubber as approved by Project Manager/Engineer-in-charge. Special adhesive compound shall be used between flanges of steam, air and gas lines.

c) Flanges shall be used as follows:

• Counter flanges for equipment having flanged connections.

• Flanged pairs shall be used on all such equipment, which may require to be isolated or removed for service e.g. Pumps, refrigeration machines, air handling units etc.

• All threaded valves shall be provided with nipples and flanged pairs on both sides to permit flange connections, for removal of valves from main lines for repair/replacement.

13.12. VALVES:

13.12.1. BUTTERFLY VALVES - WAFER TYPE:

The butterfly valve shall consist of cast iron body preferably in two-piece construction. Valves shall be gear driven suitably designed to suit duty and flanges as per IS 6392. The disc shall consist of disc pivot and driving stem and shall be in one piece centrally located and epoxy coated. The valve seat shall be Nitrile Rubber/EPDM Sheet, SS410 stem with Teflon Bush suitable for required duty. It shall line the




301

whole body. The disc should move in slide bearings on both ends with ‘o’ ring to prevent leakage. The handle should have arrangement for locking in any set position.

a) The butterfly valve shall consist of cast iron body preferably in two piece construction. b) The disc shall consist of disc pivot and driving stem shall be in one piece centrally located. c) The valve seat shall be EPDM material suitable for water duty. It shall line the whole body. d) The disc should move in slide bearings on both ends with `O' ring to prevent leakage. e) The handle should have arrangement for locking in any set position. f) The valves should be suitable for 16 kg/Sq.cm working pressure.

13.12.2. AUTOMATIC BALANCING VALVE

Automatic Balancing Valves shall be of Class 150 Wafer and shall consist of dynamic, flow limiting device. Class 150 Wafer valve housings shall consist of Grey iron (ASTM A126-61T, Class 30); and rated at 1400 kPa/120º C, with single or multiple, parallel-installed stainless steel cartridge assemblies, to provide rated flow rate. Valve shall include all plated steel studs required for installation. Valve shall be permanently marked to show direction of flow, and shall have body tag to indicate model number, flow rate and DP control range. Sizes 40 mm (“3”) through 600mm (“24”) shall be mechanically compatible with ANSI B/16.1-1967 125 lb. Cast iron flanges. Flow regulation cartridge assembly shall be precision ground, all AISI type 300 Series stainless steel; shall be available in four kPa D control ranges; minimum range shall be capable of being activated by less than 10 kPa, and shall be capable of controlling flow within +/-5% of rated flow. Dual pressure or pressure/temperature test valves for verifying accuracy of flow performance shall be provided for all valve sizes.

13.12.3. CHECK VALVES

a) The check valves shall be wafer type. The body shall be of cast iron and the plate of aluminum bronze. The valve shall have plain face and shall have a synthetic seal. The valve shall be suitable for 16 kg /cm2 pressure.

b) All gauge cocks shall be of gunmetal plug type, complete with siphon (brass chrome

plated). c) All drain valves shall be of gunmetal with a hose union connection of one hand. d) All valves on the return line of fan coil units shall be ball valves without integral water

strainer.

13.12.4. BALANCING VALVES:

a) The balancing valves shall be as per design requirements confirming to BS: 5154 or equivalent specifications.

b) The valve shall be cast gunmetal ASTM B-62 and complete with non rising spindle.

PTFE disc seal cast metal hand wheel. c) The port opening shall permit precise regulation of flow rate, by accurately measuring the

pressure drop across the port.




302

d) The valve shall be complete with two ports for connections to a mercury manometer, to measure the pressure drop, as well as a drain port.

e) The spindle shall have a shielded screw to set the flow at the desired level. f) The valves should be suitable for 16 kg/Sq.cm working pressure.

13.12.5. AIR VALVES:

Automatic Air valves shall be provided at all high points in the piping system for venting. Discharge from the air valves shall be piped through an equal sized mild steel or galvanized steel pipe to the nearest drain or sump. All pipes shall be pitched towards drain points. This item is a part of piping and shall not be charged separately.

13.13. EXPANSION TANK:

The Online Expansion tanks shall be have full acceptance factor and shall be ASME rated pre-charged bladder-type pressure vessels. The thank shall be designed to absorb the expansion forces of heating /cooling system water while maintaining proper system pressurization under varying operating conditions. The heavy duty bladder should contain system water thereby eliminating tank shall be provided with insulation. Working Pressure shall not be less than 2.5 Kg or as per design requirement.

Material of Construction: i. System Connection: Forged Steel ii. Shell: Carbon Steel iii. Bladder: Heavy Duty Butyl Rubber iv. Designed and Constructed per ASME section VIII, division 1

13.14. AIR SEPARATOR

Furnish and install, as shown on plans, a centrifugal type air separator. The unit shall inlet and outlet connections tangential to the vessel shell. The unit shall be designed to direct accumulated air to the compression tank on an air control system or an air vent on air elimination via an NTP vent connection at top of the unit.

A blow down connection shall be provided to facilitate routine cleaning of the separator. Manufacturer to furnish data sheet specifying air collection efficiency and pressure drop at rated flow.

Vessel shell diameter is to be three times the nominal inlet/outlet pipe diameter, with a minimum vessel volume for sufficient velocity reduction.

13.15. MISCELLANEOUS:

a) Provide all pipe work as required to make the apparatus connected complete and ready for regular and safe operation. Unless otherwise noted, connect all apparatus and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's standard details, as approved by Project Manager/Engineer-in-charge.

b) Unless otherwise specified, pitch the lines of piping as follows:-

All condensation drainage shall be pitched in the direction of flow to ensure adequate drainage, with an adequate trap seal to prevent leakage of air due to static pressure developed by air conditioning units. Pitch, 20 mm per meter wherever possible, but not less than 10 mm per meter piped to nearest drain.

c) Provide valves and capped connections for all low points in piping system, where necessary or

required for draining systems. Provide isolating valves & drain valves in all risers to permit repairs without interfering with the rest of the system.




303

d) During construction, temporarily close, open ends of pipes with sheet metal caps, where necessary, or required to prevent debris from entering the piping system.

e) Extra supports shall be provided at the bends and at heavy fittings like valves to avoid undue stresses on the pipes. Pipe hangers shall be fixed on walls and ceiling by means of metallic approved concrete inserts and riser glands.

f) Insulated piping (if any) shall be supported in such a manner as not to put undue pressure on the insulation, blocks, shields etc.

13.16. HANGERS & SUPPORTS:

a) Hangers and supports shall be provided and installed for all piping and tubing wherever indicated, required or otherwise specified. Wherever necessary, additional hangers and supports shall be provided to prevent vibration or excessive deflection of piping and tubing.

b) All hangers and supports shall be made of steel or other durable and non-combustible materials, galvanized or plated or painted with anti-corrosion paint. Wood wire or perforated strap iron shall not be used as permanent hangers or supports.

c) Hangers shall be supported from structural steel, concrete inserts & pipe racks, as specifically

approved. d) No hangers shall be secured to underside of light weight roof decking and light weight floor

glass. e) Mechanical equipment shall be suspended midway between steel joists and panel points. f) Drilling or punching of holes in steel joist members will not be permitted.

13.17. EXPANSION OR CONTRACTION:

The contractor shall provide for expansion and contraction of all piping installed by the use of swing connections and expansion loops.

13.18. ARRANGEMENT AND ALIGNMENT OF PIPING (TO BE COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES):

i. All piping shall be arranged and aligned in accordance with design requirements. Where

special conditions are encountered in the field, the arrangement and alignment of piping shall be as directed by the Project Manager/Engineer-in-charge.

ii. The piping shall be installed in a uniform manner, parallel to or perpendicular to walls or

ceilings, and all changes in directions shall be made with fittings. The horizontal piping shall be run at right angles and shall not run diagonally across rooms or other piping. Wherever possible all piping shall be arranged to provide maximum head room.

iii. All piping shall be installed as directly as possible between connecting points in so far as the

work of other trades permits. Where interference occurs with another trade whose work is more difficult to route, this contractor shall reroute his pipes as required to avoid interference, at the discretion of the Project Manager/Engineer-in-charge.

iv. All piping shall be carefully installed to provide for proper alignment, slope and expansion.

v. The stresses in pipe lines shall be guided and pipes shall be supported in such a manner that

pipe lines shall not creep, sag or buckle.




304

vi. Anchors and supports shall be provided wherever necessary to prevent any misalignment of piping.

vii. Small tubing gauges, controls or other equipment installed on any apparatus, shall not be

coiled nor excessive in length, but shall be installed neatly, carefully bent at all changes in direction, secured in place and properly fastened to equipment at intervals to prevent sagging.

viii. The piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be installed uniformly in straight

parallel lines in either vertical or horizontal positions.

ix. The piping connection to all dynamic equipment e.g. AHUs chillers, pumps, cooling towers etc. shall be of flexible type. This item shall be treated as a part of piping and shall not be charged separately.

13.19. FLOW METER/ BTU METER (ULTRA SONIC)

Flow and energy meters are based on the transit‐time measurement principle, where the system utilizes a pair of sensors that function as both ultrasonic transmitter and receiver. The sensors are installed on the pipe wall, either clamped on the outside of the pipe or inserted into the pipe at a specific distance from each other. The flow meter operates by alternately transmitting and receiving a coded burst of sound energy between the two sensors and measuring the transit time it takes for sound to travel between the two sensors. The difference in the transit time is directly related to the velocity of the liquid in the pipe. The flow-rate is then calculated based on the transit‐time difference, the geometry of the pipe and

the fluid dynamics formula. The sensors are commonly mounted with the Z‐method or the

V‐method. With the Z‐method, the two sensors are installed on opposite sides of a pipe. This method offers a shorter sound path, thus, better signal strength. It is often used for large size pipes where signal strength is more important. With the V‐ method, the two sensors are installed on the same side of a pipe. The sound path is doubled, thus, the measurement accuracy is better.

13.20. TESTING:

a) In general, tests shall be applied to piping before connection of equipment and appliances. In no case shall the piping, equipment or appliances be subjected to pressures exceeding their test ratings.

b) The tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is applied. Testing of

segments of pipe work will be permitted, provided all open ends are first closed, by blank-offs or flanges.

c) After tests have been completed the system shall be drained and flushed 3 to 4 times and

cleaned of all dust and foreign matter. All strainers, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of all dirt, fillings and debris.

d) All piping shall be tested to hydraulic test pressure of at least one and half times the maximum

operating pressure but not less than 16 kg/Sq.cm for a period of not less than 12 hours. All leaks and defects in the joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Project Manager/Engineer-in-charge, without any extra cost.

a) All the piping systems shall be tested in the presence of Owner/Project Manager or their

authorized representative. Advance notice of test dates shall be given and all equipment, labour, materials required for inspection, and repairs during the test shall be provided by the contractor. A test shall be repeated till the entire systems are found to be satisfactory to the above authority. The tests shall be carried out for a part of work if required by Owner/Project Manager in order to avoid hindrance in the work of the insulation contractor.




305

b) The contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation is achieved through all piping systems. If due to poor bond, proper circulation is not achieved, the contractor shall bear all expenses for carrying out the rectification work including finishing of floors, walls and ceiling damaged in the process of rectification.

c) The contractor shall provide all labour and materials to make provision for removing water and

to the proper place, during the testing or/and after the testing to avoid damages to employer or other contractors properties. Any damages caused by the contractor to the employer or other contractors properties, shall be borne by the contractor.

13.21. DRAIN PIPING:

a) The drain piping shall be medium class galvanized steel as per relevant latest IS code. b) The fittings shall be of 'R' brand or equal forged with screwed connections. c) The gate valves shall be of gun metal as described earlier. a) Pipe crosses shall be provided at bends, to permit easy cleaning of drain line or plugged tees. b) The drain line shall be provided up to the nearest drain trap and pitched towards the trap. c) Drain lines shall be provided at all the lowest points in the system, as well as at equipment, or

to remove condensate and water from pump glands.

13.22. PAINTING:

a) All pipes supports, hangers, etc., Shall be given two coats of red oxide primer. b) All pipes, which are not to be insulated, shall then be given one coat of finish paint, of a type

and color, as approved by the Project Manager.

Treatment:

a) Low temperature hot water, closed cooling and chilled water - Mixture of sodium nitrite, borax and molybdate with other copper alloy inhibitor. For the chilled water a non-nitrite program of phosphate, polymer borate and copper alloy inhibitors: non-oxidizing, non-cationic biocide.

b) Glycol low temperature – Ethylene glycol with buffered phosphate based corrosion inhibitor with copper alloy inhibitor in deionized water, if water chloride levels are 750 ppm and contains hard water ions.

13.23. CHEMICAL DOSING SYSTEM (FOR OPEN LOOP)

13.23.1. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Water treatment equipment shall feed and control chemicals to protect the following systems including but not limited to:

Condenser Water Systems: a. Scale control. b. Corrosion control. c. Microbiological control.

13.23.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Comply with the provisions of Section Basic Mechanical Requirements. 2. Water Treatment Company shall submit proof of a fully documented, accredited, and

operational quality assurance program.




306

13.23.3. TREATMENT FOR CONDENSER WATER SYSTEMS

General:

Provide a completely automatic, proportional water treatment system for condenser water. System shall provide for the feed of a scale inhibitor and bleed off for scale control. Corrosion control shall be provided by the feed of a corrosion inhibitor. Microbiological control shall be provided by a pot feeder on a bypass around the condenser water pumps to feed biocides.

System shall provide the following sequence:

A water meter in the water make-up to cooling tower shall transmit momentary electrical impulses to a controller. Controller after a preset number of impulses energizes timers for chemical feed pump and bleed-off solenoid valve respectively. Each timer shall operate its system for a preset amount of time. Controller and timers shall automatically reset themselves after each cycle. An electrical interlock shall prevent system from operating unless condenser water pump is operating. Complete installation shall include piping and wiring required for proper operation of system.

CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

1. Water Meter: Water meter in cooling tower make up shall be a provided complete with following features:

i. Cast bronze or forged brass body, corrosion resistant polymer internal components, inlet strainer. ii. Horizontal 5- or 7-digit totalizer with minimum indication of one gallon and glass facing with metal

cover. iii. NEMA 4 enclosure electric contact register to transmit signal to controller based on rate of flow.

2. Controller: Controller shall be the pulse counter type with counter, timer, relays, selector switch,

indicator lights and power on-off switch to control chemical feed pump and solenoid valve on bleed-off pipe complete with following features:

i. Indicator lights for power on, solenoid, pump on, and pulse count. ii. NEMA 4 enclosure for wall or panel mounting. 3. Chemical Feed Unit: Scale and corrosion-inhibiting feed unit shall be furnished with proportioning

pump, tank, piping, and accessories. Pump shall be proportional, positive displacement, diaphragm, chemical-metering type suitable for feeding a solution of polyphosphates, molybdates, or phosphonates.. Corrosion-proof housing of glass fiber reinforced polypropylene; and integral anti-syphon valve.

4. Bleed-Off Unit: Bleed-off unit shall be furnished with a Y-strainer, flow control valve and solenoid valve

installed in bleed pipe from condenser water return line. Bleed-off shall discharge into a drain with 8 inches of space between end of bleed line and drain so container may be inserted to measure flow. Provide splash shield between end of bleed line and drain.

5. Algaecide Feed System: Algaecide feed system shall consist of a pot feeder on a bypass around

condenser water pump. . Install complete with piping, valves, and fittings.

WATER TREATMENT

Formulations shall be as prescribed for the various systems specified. Formulations shall not contain any ingredients, which may be harmful to system materials of construction and shall not endanger the health or safety of persons coming into contact with the materials. System shall not be operated without benefit of chemical protection unless specified. Once initial passivation is achieved, any additional chemical necessary to recharge the system due to water loss shall be provided as required.

For cooling tower system with make-up water containing less than 200 ppm total hardness, as expressed in CaCO3 equivalent. Scale and corrosion inhibition shall be provided with a non-acid formulation based on phosphonate in SEQ test.




307

At the moment a complete make-up water analysis is not available, the local service representative of the water treatment service company shall designate type of chemical treatment most desirable. The treatment prescribed shall be based on local make-up water quality and the application of sound water treatment practice.

TEST EQUIPMENT

Provide necessary test equipment and reagents to maintain chemicals in the control ranges specified. Test kits shall be furnished with carrying cases.

WATER TREATMENT SERVICE PROGRAM

The selected water treatment company shall provide consulting services for one year from the date of Substantial Completion. Services shall be provided by fully trained representatives of the water treatment company. Services provided shall include:

a. Installation and system start-up recommendations. b. Initial water analysis and recommendations. c. Training of operating personnel on proper feeding and control techniques. d. Periodic field service and consulting meetings. e. Log sheets and record forms. f. Any required laboratory and technical assistance

13.23.4. EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

Installation of water treatment equipment and startup shall be performed under the observation of a representative of the water treatment equipment supplier.

Provide water treatment system as specified in this section and of the type required for the treatment of water in the system for cooling tower, evaporative cooler, chiller, boiler, etc. Provide bleed-off as required and specified for cooling tower.

On condenser water systems, water meter controller and chemical pump shall be mounted on a polypropylene panel. Mounted on same panel shall be piping manifold to include chemical injection fitting and all other valves, piping and fittings required for a complete installation.

PRE-OPERATIONAL CLEANING

Provide assurance that no untreated water shall be circulated through heating and air conditioning system components for operation. Systems shall be flushed clean before operation. In the event untreated water causes contamination of the system, remove resulting scale or deposits from lines and equipment, and repair all damage.

Provide chemical cleaning, flushing and charging. Notify the IOR when system is ready for operation and filling with water.

Prior to operation, condenser water, chilled water, hot water, and steam systems shall be cleaned to remove oil, grease, and rust oxides by the following:




308

Flood system with a solution containing cleaning compound.

Cleaning solutions shall be drained and flushed with clean water until stable pH is provided. Refill with treated water to stabilize water in system.

13.24. TEST INSTRUMENTS

a) All instruments for testing shall be provided by the SI. b) Thermometers used for measurements of temperature of water/ refrigerant shall have

graduations of 0.1 degree C and shall be got calibrated from N.P.I., or any recognized test house before hand.

c) Thermometers used in the psychrometers shall have graduations of 0.2 degree C and shall be

calibrated as above. d) Pressure gauges shall also be got calibrated before hand from a recognized test house. e) Orifice type flow meters shall be used for measuring flow rate through chillers. f) Where flow rates vs. pressure drop curves for the heat exchangers of the same model as

installed, certified by Consultants on the basis of tests conducted at manufacturer’s works are produced, flow meters for measuring water flow rate through these may not be provided. Actual water flow shall in such a case, be computed with reference to these curves and the actual pressure drop measured at site.

g) Integrating type flow meters may be used for measuring water flow through the individual air handling units.

14. WELDING

14.1. GENERAL

This specification covers field and shop welding for carbon steel piping system. In particular, following types of joints are considered: Butt welds between pipes, flanges, bends, branch connection valves, etc. Fillet welds for junction of slip on flanges; butt and socket weld fittings, reinforcing pads, etc. The following accepted standard and procedures shall be applicable: Standard for welding pipes and related facilities - ANSI - B 31.3. - latest edition. Code of practice for manual for welding of mild steel - IS: 823 latest edition (for structural work only) In case of any variation between the provisions of the codes and the specifications given below the later shall prevail.

14.2. WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION

Welding procedure qualifications for all piping except those under the purview of IBR, shall be as per the latest edition of Standard for welding pipelines and related facilities, ASME section IX. The contractor shall submit the welding procedure after receipt of work order. Owner inspector shall review, check and approve welding procedure after conducting such tests as are necessary. It shall be the responsibility of contractor to arrange and carry out such tests at his own costs.

14.3. WELDER'S QUALIFICATION

Welder's qualification for all piping except those coming under the purview of IBR, shall be in accordance with ASME Sec IX. Owner's Inspector shall witness the test and certify the qualification of each welder. Welders approved by the owners' Inspector only shall be employed. Contractor shall submit the welder qualification reports before the commencement of work. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to carry out the




309

qualification test of the welders at his own cost at the job site all the tools, tackles and auxiliaries required for carrying out Welder's test shall be supplied by SI at his own cost.

14.4. WEATHER CONDITIONS

If the welding is to be performed during rain or strong wind, suitable protection shall be provided for the parts to be welded and the welder.

14.5. BASE MATERIALS

In general this specification shall be used in welding the carbon steel materials having a specified tensile strength of 60,000 psi or as per design. Backing rings, if required, shall be similar in chemical composition to the base material.

14.6. FILLER MATERIALS

Electrodes: Electrodes used for welding shall conform to IS 814 and IS 815 latest editions. The electrodes to be used by the Contractor shall be approved by the Engineer in charge after conducting tests as per IS: 814 testing procedure. These tests shall be carried out by the SI at his own cost. The contractor shall submit manufacturer's certificates for each batch of electrodes supplied by him. Electrodes shall be stored in unopened original containers. They shall be stored adequately to prevent moisture loss or moisture absorption and shall be handled in such a manner so as to avoid the damage of coating. Electrodes when used shall be free of rust, oil, grease, earth or any other matter which could be harmful for the quality of welding. The electrodes used shall be suitably to the welding process and the base metal and the weld properties shall not be lower than those of base metal.

14.7. WELDING PROCESS

Welding under this specification shall be done with the manual shielded metal arc process. Automatic or semi automatic welding shall be done only after the procedure and materials have been specifically approved by the Engineer in charge. The welding shall conform to the standard codes of welding practice. Welding of carbon steel in general shall be in accordance with IS: 823 - Code of practice for use of metal arc welding in mild steel (for structural work only). The welding of pipes shall conform to ANSI B 31.3 (latest edition) the compliance with this specification does not relieve fully or partially the contractor, responsible for piping fabrication and erection of his own responsibilities as well as on any contractual obligations.

14.8. JOINT COMPLETION

15. INSULATION:

This section deals with supply and fixing of Thermal/Acoustic insulation of ducts, pipes etc. as per the specification given in this section.

15.1. INSULATION ON SHEET METAL DUCTING

i. The air handling ducts shall be insulated with closed Cell-Crossed link Elastomeric sheet ii. Installation




310

iii. Clean the surface with a wire brush and make it free from rust and oil. iv. Apply one coat of cold setting compound. v. The ducts in areas exposed to the weather shall be additionally covered with one layer of UV

protected cloth shall be stuck with suitable adhesive.

15.2. ACOUSTIC LINING:

a) The acoustic lining shall be of non-fibrous material with acoustic property with the minimum density 35 kg/m³.

b) Installation i. The duct surface shall first be cleaned from inside. ii. The insulation boards shall be wrapped in RP Tissue paper with the end stitched. iii. Then the boards/Sheets shall be fixed inside the duct. iv. The non fibrous material sheet shall be covered with tissue foil.

16. VENTILATION FANS:

16.1. SCOPE:

Scope of this section comprises of supplying, erection, testing and commissioning of following type of fans.

EXHAUST FANS (TUBE AXIAL):

a) The exhaust fans shall be propeller type with steel hub and blades, mounted directly on the shaft of a totally enclosed motor.

b) The fan blades shall be of pressed steel of aero foil design for high efficiency and static pressure. c) The mounting frame shall be of cast /sheet steel brackets to connect the frame, with the fan/motor

assembly. Rubber mounts shall be provided between the mounting frame and the mounting brackets. d) The fan motor shall be totally enclosed squirrel cage type. e) All wall mounted exhaust fans shall be provided with gravity back draft louvers.

16.2. CENTRIFUGAL FANS:

a) Scroll Casing shall be welded construction fabricated with 14 gauge M.S. Sheet with spray galvanization. Minimum zinc deposition shall conform to class 375 of relevant latest IS code or as per design requirements.

The minimum thickness of casing shall not be less than 3 mm. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plate by means of continuous lock seam.

Housing shall be provided with standard clean out and door with quick locking tension handles and neoprene gasket. Rotation arrow shall be clearly marked on the housing.

b) Impeller

The impeller shall have die-formed, forward/backward curved blades, welded to the rim and back plates to have a non-over loading characteristic of the fan. Rim shall be spun to have a smooth contour if required, intermediate stiffening rings shall be provided. Shaft sleeves shall be furnished wherever required. The impeller, pulley and housing shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan velocity shall not exceed 2200 FPM.

c) Shaft

Shaft shall be constructed of SAE 1040 steel turned, ground and polished. Shaft sizes shall be carefully calculated and designed such that the maximum operating speed (RPM) shall not exceed 75% of the first critical speed.




311

a) Bearings

The bearing shall be self-aligning, heavy duty ball, roller or sleeve bearings. Bearing shall be selected for quiet operation and shall be grease pack, pillow block type. Bearings shall be maintenance free with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearing type.

b) Base Plate Base plate shall be provided for each fan. Base for both fans and motor shall be built as an integral part

and shall be mounted on a concrete foundation through cushy foot mountings for vibration isolation. c) Vibration Isolation

Fan with motor shall be mounted on a concrete foundation through spring type of spring isolators vibration.

16.3. AXIAL FLOW FANS:

Axial flow fan shall be of vane axial type and shall be suitable for mounting in duct or floor/slab as required

a) IMPELLERS: Single piece cast aluminum or steel impeller shall be with blades of aerofoile design to give maximum efficiency and shall vary in twist and width from hub to top to effect equal air distribution along the blade length. Single piece fan and hub shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Maximum clearance between blade tip and the fan housing at the specified speed shall be 5 mm. Impellers blades shall be whirl tested to a speed 25% above the design operating speed. Extended grease leads for external lubrication shall be provided.

b) DRIVE:

i. For Duct/Wall Mounted Fan: For duct/wall mounted fans the impeller shall be mounted directly on the motor. Drive unit and impeller shall be totally enclosed inside the duct.

ii. For Floor/Ceiling Mounted Fan: The fan shall be provided with belt drive and adjustable motor sheave, standard sheet steel belt guard with vented front for heat dissipation. Belt shall be of the oil resistant type.

16.4. IN-LINE FANS:

In-line fans shall be Centrifugal type direct/belt driven complete with motor, belt guard, motor mount and vibration isolation type suspension arrangement mounted within/end of duct.

a) Casing: (Tube Axial Fan)

Shall be constructed of 14 gauge sheet steel or better. Fan casing, motor mount and straightening vane shall be of welded steel construction. Casing shall be provided with two Nos. wide hinged doors which open easily. Inspection doors with handle and neoprene gasket shall also be provided. Casing shall have flanged connections on both ends for ducted applications. Support brackets for ceilings suspensions shall be welded to the casing for connection to hanger bolts. Straightening vanes shall be aerodynamically designed for maximum efficiency by converting velocity pressure to static pressure potential and minimizing turbulence. Casing shall be bonderized, primed and finish coated with enamel paint.

b) Rotor:

Hub and blades shall be cast aluminum construction. Blades shall be die formed Aero foil section for maximum efficiency and shall vary in twist and width from hub to top to effect equal air distribution along the blade length. Fan blades mounting on the hub shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Maximum clearance between blade tip and fan housing at the specified duty blade setting shall be 5 mm or better. Rotor blades shall be whirl tested to speed of 25% above the design operating speed and certification of the test shall be provided by the manufacturer. Extended grease leads for external




312

lubrication shall be provided. Rotor shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan pitch control shall be manually readjusted at site upon installation for obtaining actual air flow values as specified and quoted. The impeller blade shall be of adjustable type blade.

a) Vibration Isolation:

The assembly of fan and motor shall be suspended from the ceiling by spring type vibration isolators.

16.5. ACCESSORIES:

The following accessories shall be provided with all fans: a) Outlet cone for static pressure regain. b) Inlet cone. c) Fan silencers if required. Fan shall be factory assembled and shipped with all accessories factory-mounted.

17. CONTROLS:

17.1. GENERAL:

i. The various controls listed below shall be electrically operated and generally comply with the

specifications listed below.

ii. In case of low voltage controls, necessary step down transformers shall be provided with each control as required.

17.2. AIR HANDLING UNIT CONTROLS:

The controls for Air Handling Units and Fan Coil Units shall comply with the following: Sectional Type and High Pressure AHU’s:

a) Return Air/Room Thermostat: The Thermostat shall be suitable for mounting in the room or return air passage, as required. The

thermostat shall be modulating potential-meter type with an adjustable throttling range and required accuracy.

b) Motorized Water Valve: The Motorized Water Valve shall consist of gunmetal valve body with stainless steel trim and equal

percentage flow characteristics, modulating motor and linkage.

17.3. CHILLING UNIT CONTROLS:

Each Water Chilling Unit shall be complete with following: a) Refrigerant Control: As per chiller manufacturer’s standard. b) Safety Controls: As per chiller manufacturer’s standard. c) Chilled Water Outlet Control: As per chiller manufacturer’s standard.




313

17.4. GAUGES:

The water pressure gauges shall be of robust construction with minimum 100mm dia, of suitable range and accuracy calibrated or as per design requirements.

17.5. THERMOMETERS:

The thermometers shall be digital, with metal casing and threaded fixing arrangement.

18. Tests at Site:

18.1. GENERAL:

The Contractor must perform all inspection and tests of the system as a whole and of components individually as required, under the supervision of the Architect, in accordance with the provisions of the applicable AHSRAE Standards or approved equal and furnish necessary test certificates from manufacturers.

18.2. SYSTEM AND PUMPS ETC.:

Identification of materials in accordance with test certificates.

i. Inspection of various laboratory test certificates for physical properties and technical composition conducted on test samples of materials to be used for fabrication, forgings etc. for all important components of various equipment.

ii. Hydraulic test for various components and assembled equipment at 1.5 times design pressure or

double the operating pressure whichever is higher.

iii. Pneumatic leak test after assemblies at design pressure.

iv. Static and dynamic balancing on electronic precision machine for rotating parts, links, impeller/crank shaft assemblies etc.

v. Inspection of assemblies and disassembles of various parts of equipment and complete equipment

themselves as desired by Architect.

vi. Noise level test for various rotating/reciprocating equipment.

vii. Pressure drop test for condenser, chiller and evaporator.

viii. Inspection of manufacturer's test certificates shall be supplied for all electrical motors.

ix. Inspection of welding including welders qualifications as desired by Architect.

18.3. FOR ASSOCIATED WORKS AT SITE:

i. All electrical items will be subjected to inspection at any stage during manufacturing activity. Routine

electrical test as per relevant codes. Inspection of Manufacturer's Test Certificates.

ii. Inspection of raw materials to be used for fabrication and assembly and inspection of Manufacturer's Certificates.




314

iii. Inspection of welding including welders qualification as desired by inspection Engineers. Inspection of fabricated items.

iv. Pressure testing of pipe fittings used for the refrigerant and water services.

v. Pressure testing, leak testing of complete piping network for chilled water and condenser water.

vi. Vacuum missing and gas/oil charging for refrigeration system.

vii. Checking of electrical circuits (power & controls) and checking functioning of controls of refrigerant

systems and other circuits of air conditioning plant.

viii. Checking of calibration of controls and instrumentation

ix. Checking of assemblies for electrical control panel, instruments panels, local panels (dimensional and functional) annunciator panels etc.

x. Inspection of complete electrical installation at site.

xi. Installation of main equipment like compressor, condenser, chiller, evaporator.

xii. Performance testing of complete A.C. plant as per Specifications.

18.4. PIPING SYSTEM:

i. In general pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before connection of equipment and

appliances. In no case shall piping, equipment or appliances be subjected to pressure exceeding their test ratings.

ii. Tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is applied.

iii. After tests have been completed, the system shall be drained and cleaned of all dust and foreign

matter. All strainers, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of all dirt, fittings, and debris.

18.5. WATER PIPING

All water piping shall be tested and proven tight under hydrostatic pressure of 1 ½ times the design pressure unless stated otherwise in the specifications. Prescribed pressure shall be maintained for four hours.

18.6. DUCT WORK:

All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity, and the total of the air quantities shall be within plus five percent (5%) of fan capacity.

i. Fire Dampers, Volume Dampers and Splitter Dampers shall be tested for proper operation.

ii. All ducting shall be smoke tested for any leakages.

18.7. BALANCING AND ADJUSTMENT:

All air handling ventilation equipment, duct work and outlets shall be adjusted. If these air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of the sheaves or the available horse power, the architect shall be notified before proceeding with the balancing of air distribution system.




315

18.8. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT:

i. All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and adjusted on site before application of power.

ii. The following tests shall be carried out: iii. Wire and cable continuity tests.

iv. Insulation resistance tests, phase to phase and phase to earth, on all circuits and equipment,

using a 500 volt meggar or as per design requirements. The meggar reading shall be not less than one megaohms.

v. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed half (1/2) chm.

vi. Phasing out and phase rotation tests.

vii. Operating tests on all protective relays to prove their correct operation before energizing the

main equipment.

viii. Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers, etc.

18.9. PERFORMANCE TESTS:

i. The installation as a whole shall be balanced and tested upon completion, and all relevant information, including the following shall be submitted to SBI

ii. Air volume passing through each unit, duct, grilles, apertures.

iii. Differential pressure readings across each filter, fan and coil, and through each pump.

iv. Electrical current readings, in amperes of full and average load running, and starting, together with name plate current of each electrical motor.

v. Continuous recording over a specified period, of ambient wet and dry bulb temperatures under

varying degrees of Internal Heat Loads and use and occupation, in each zone of each part of the building.

vi. Daily records should be maintained of hourly readings, taken under varying degrees of internal

heat load and use and occupation, of Wet and Dry Bulb Temperatures, upstream "ON-COIL" of each cooling coil. Also suction temperatures and pressures for each Refrigerating Unit. The current and voltage drawn by each machine.

vii. Any other readings shall be taken which may subsequently be specified by the Architect.

18.10. ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING:

The SI shall carry out the complete erection and commissioning. All work shall commence on previously prepared foundation. All the materials shall be moved from their place of storage into the plant by the Contractor. The contractor shall make his own arrangement to OFF load equipment/material received at respective Rail/Road Transport Terminal Points, dispatched to site and to store all material received at site. The purchaser shall provide clear storage and erection space only. All erection tools and tackles as and when required to suit the erection program shall be provided by the Contractor. All consumables required for erections such as cotton waste, kerosene, oil, emery paper, coil string, bamboo’s and planks for scaffolding etc. as well as necessary welding rods, gases etc. shall be provided by the contractor. Protective and finish painting shall be carried out by the contractor. Carbon steel surface shall be thoroughly cleaned before painting. The contractor shall




316

indicate the water and electricity requirements during erection. The contractor shall remove all the waste material or rubbish from and about the work site and leave the job thoroughly cleaned up and ready for use.

19. BALANCING AND COMMISSIONING:

19.1. GENERAL:

Perform following testing and commissioning to approval: Air balancing of each system (each supply air system, fans, cooling tower blower, air handling units. Hydronic tests (testing and balancing) including water flow balancing and thermal capacity testing of chilled water system, circulating pumps and chiller. Excessive noise & vibration testing.

19.2. CRITERIA:

Systems shall be balanced and adjusted to give design/operating conditions under following criteria:

i) Tolerance of air flow quantities : 3% S.A. Ducts, 5% other ducts ii) Tolerance of water flow quantities : 5% iii) Maximum noise level reading : NC-35 in occupied spaces. iv) Maximum current load on motors : 100% of nameplate capacity

19.3. REPORTS:

a) On completion, supply at least six copies of balancing and test report, suitably bound, 8 ½” x 11” size for checking and review. Submit completed reports within three weeks of testing and balancing.

b) Reports shall include all design data together with recorded data of all tests for comparison and

schematic of each system and components. c) Report all temperatures in Degree Celsius. For convenience, reports may also show

temperature in Fahrenheit but only as secondary data. d) Reports should show schematic of each system. Location of each traverse should be mark and

each outlet should have corresponding number. e) Keep a record of all tests and have these signed by General Contractor’s superintendent and

where applicable, equipment Manufacturer’s Representative. Show in an approved schedule form, record of systems or parts of systems tested or intended to test, date of test, circumstances such as pressure, temperature, duration of test and any special remarks pertaining to events during test.

f) Final Report Shall Include:

i. Specified and achieved total air quantities per system. ii. Specified and achieved individual air quantities for each VAV box complete with sp. iii. Specified and achieved individual air quantities per outlet with supporting schematic

diagrams. iv. Specified and actual fan total SP with breakdown showing inlet and discharge pressure. v. Sheaves and belt sizes and quantities per unit. vi. Each pump suction pressure, head pressure, amps and voltage, nameplate amperage

and voltage.




317

vii. Specified and achieved total water flow per system. viii. Specified and achieved individual water flow and pressure drop though Cooling Tower

and Chiller.

19.4. TESTING:

i. Carry out all tests specified. Test equipment to requirement of and where necessary, in presence of equipment manufacturer.

ii. Tests for balancing shall proceed only after system installation has been completed and system

has been put into continuous operation.

19.5. SANITARY EXHAUST & MISCELLANEOUS EXHAUST SYSTEMS:

i. Test each system as herein described. Pre-set system as follows: o Set exhaust (backdraft) dampers to fully open position. o Close doors for those rooms being exhausted. o Start related supply air system.

ii. Make pitot tube traverse, velocity and static pressure readings in ducts wherever needed as specified for test.

iii. When airflow capacity is within 5% of design, test and balance individual inlets starting with those

closets to fan.

iv. Adjust system to normal operating audition and record all data.

19.6. MISCELLANEOUS AIR FLOW AND PRESSURE TESTING:

After all systems are balanced, set supply air systems to maximum outdoor air and maximum relief position and test building pressures in main lobby relative to atmosphere. Adjust air flows to direction of engineer when unsuitable building pressure occurs.

19.7. FLUID CARRYING SYSTEMS:

i. Test adjust and balance each fluid carrying system as further described by use of flow meter,

fittings and pressure drop and temperature readings for components. Submit full test report listing actual data versus design and manufacturer data. Include in report, schematics, reference numbers, any changes that may have occurred, electrical and other pertinent information like noise level, vibration, etc. relative to particular system or components. Make visible all settings of adjusting devices showing proper setting of each device, valve or fitting.

ii. Test each circulating pump for shut off head. Open valves gradually to obtain design flow rate as

required and measured by flow meter. Record pump pressures for suction and discharge. Test and record motor data and load (amperage and voltage).

iii. Test each alternate or standby pump in same manner for each zone and service and adjust

balance valve to suit each zone flow rate and head.

iv. Adjust and record all water flows to specified requirements through individual chilled water coil, heat exchanger; circulating pumps, chiller and through the cooling tower. Insure that water temperature drop is based on unit Manufacturer’s Catalogue ratings for conditions at time of test.

v. Test and balance each complete system by means of flow meter and system valves.




318

19.8. CHILLED WATER SYSTEM:

i. Test and balance complete system by means of flow meter and system valves. Test primary

chilled water circuit by means of flow meter. Adjust as required. Test each chilled water pump for shut-off-head. Open valve gradually to obtain design flow rate as measured by flow meter. Record pump pressure for suction discharge. Test and record motor data and load (amperage and voltage).

ii. Test and balance the water flow through the chiller and ice storage circuits. Adjust flow as

required.

iii. When testing and chiller, make voltage and current readings in each phase condition. Check and set operation of safety cutouts, controls and interlocks. Verify chiller operates to required performance in safe and efficient manner.

iv. Perform temperature testing on each piping circuit.

19.9. TEMPERATURE TESTING:

i. Record temperatures of air and liquid flow for all heat exchangers, refrigeration machines and

DX coils on air and water sides as applicable. Calculate heat exchange performance in BTU/hour, compare to design data.

ii. Record for each room DBOC and WBOC temperatures and R.H. and re-adjust readings for

local conditions at time of test.

19.10. EXCESSIVE NOISE & VIBRATION TESTING:

Test and explore all sources of excessive noise generation or vibration caused by mechanical system. Perform octave band sound measurements at locations requested by Architect/ Client. Tests shall be done after systems have been balanced.

19.11. COOLING TOWER:

a) Test and balance complete system by means of flow meter and system valves. b) Test airflow through the cooling tower at each fan speed. Test and adjust water flow through

the tower.

20. Water -COOLED Centrifugal CHILLERS

SCOPE

a) Manufacture and supply of AHRI / Eurovent Certified Imported Water cooled Centrifugal chillers with VFD/ closed transition starter as specified with associated motors, and accessories. In case of 11 KV chiller, it shall be DOL.

b) Chiller shall be TIER4 data center grade with quick start and quick recovery facility. i. Assembly of chiller components including connection of cooler, condenser, motor, compressor and

starter into complete refrigeration machine. ii. Provide manufacturer’s factory representative’s services, including coordination, and start-up and

erection & testing supervision. iii. Carry out performance test run at factory at 4 points in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590.

c) C.O.P. of selected chiller at ARI conditions shall be > 6.1 i. Advanced microprocessor control center with graphics and all interconnecting unit piping and wiring

d) IBMS Compatibility– MODBUS / Bacnet IP output.




319

e) Chiller plant manager along with necessary sensors. f) Lifting of the chiller and position at the Location. g) Installation of the chiller with all the required accessories. h) Commissioning of the chiller and record all the performance data i) Handing over of the chiller after successful commissioning for the client’s beneficial use.

21. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM

1. Pressure vessels shall be designed, constructed, tested as per ASME / GB Code.

2. Chiller shall be the product of a manufacturer / licensee normally supplying this type of equipment and who can show evidence, having completed five installations of approximately the same capacity that have been in successful operation for at least three years.

3. The chiller shall be designed / manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable portions of the latest revisions of the following Standards and Codes.

ARI 550 / 590 – 2003 - Performance rating of water chilling packages using the

vapor compression cycle.

ARI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Equipment

ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration ANSI/ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation and Safety Classification of

Refrigerants

ASHRAE 90.1 Number Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (N.E.C.)

ASME CODE - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. (Div. 1 Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels - Section VIII, Design, construction, testing and certification of pressure vessels).

ANSI-B9.1 - American National Standards Institute. Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (overall general safety requirements, relief device sizing, etc.)

22. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Chiller shall be water cooled complete with including, multiple independent refrigerant circuits, open /semi hermetic compressor, shell and tube type evaporator, condenser, R134a refrigerant, lubrication system, interconnecting wiring, safety and operating controls including capacity controller, control center, motor starting components, and special features as specified herein or required for safe, automatic operation.

23. COMPRESSOR

a) The compressor shall be single / multiple stage, open / hermetic type screw compressor’s using refrigerant- hfc 134a. The impeller shaft shall be either direct driven or connected to the speed increasing gear. It shall be self-aligned and balanced and shall be assembled in the compressor casing. The driven end of the gear shaft shall be connected with the motor through a flexible




320

coupling. The impeller shall be cast from alloy steel / aluminum alloy. This shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ensure vibration free operation. Casing design shall ensure that major wearing parts, bearings thrust bearings are accessible for maintenance and replacement. Condensed liquid refrigerant shall be injected in to the compressor discharge to reduce discharge gas temperature and to reduce sound level of the compressor.

b) Compressor shall be capable to operate at all loads from 100%-20% load even at constant ecwt without surging and without need of hot gas by-pass system. It will be verified with computerized selection sheet from 100% - 20% load data at constant entering condenser water temp.

c) Chiller shall also be capable of working on higher entering condenser water temperature (+4of) over design. This shall be demonstrated by separate chiller selection printout for design conditions except entering condenser water temperature, which shall be design+ 4of.

d) Chiller should be stable across complete operating range from 100 to 20% load at constant ecwt and noise level should not increase at part loads. Bidder to submit noise reports at const. Ecwt conditions at 10% load interval. Report should clearly specify operating conditions.

e) Chillers shall have quick start facility / rapid restart facility with low inrush current during starting of the chiller. In case of vfd, it shall be active front end design with less than 10% ithd and more than 0.9 lag power factor

24. EVAPORATOR

1. The evaporator shell shall be of rolled carbon steel plate with fusion welded seams. Removable compact water boxes of cast iron or welded steel with stub-out water connections shall be provided to permit access for tube cleaning and replacement.

2. Water boxes shall be designed for 150 psig working pressure and pneumatically tested at 225 psig.

3. The tube material will be copper. Tubes shall be high-efficiency, internally and externally enhanced type having plain lands at all intermediate tube supports to provide maximum tube wall thickness at the support area. Intermediate steel tube supports should be provided at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm.

4. Evaporator shall be horizontal shell-and-tube, flooded / falling film type and shall be provided with following accessories,

▪ Two liquid level sight glasses will be located on the side of the shell to aid in determining proper refrigerant charge.

▪ Suction baffles / mist eliminator to prevent liquid carry over to the compressor.

▪ Refrigerant relief device sized to meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

25. CONDENSERS:

Condenser shall be horizontal shell-and-tube heat exchanger and shall be provided with following accessories,

1. Two liquid level sight glasses will be located on the side of the shell to aid in determining proper refrigerant charge.

2. Refrigerant relief device sized to meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

3. Hinged type Marine Water boxes and cover plates shall be provided to permit tube cleaning and replacement.




321

26. AUTOMATIC TUBE CLEANING SYSTEM (ATCS)

As a standard feature, chiller to be provided with automatic tube cleaning system for condenser. As a minimum requirement, ATCS should meet following requirements.

1. ATCS should be provided to clean tubes internally during course of water chilling operation in settable time intervals, to keep internal tube surface free from scaling.

2. ATCS should be completely independent and no modification / opening of chiller should be needed for installation and inspection of ATCS.

3. ATCS should not need any pump / compressed air and flow reversal valve in the system.

4. ATCS system offered should give easier access to check operation and condition of tube cleaning media

5. All important components required for ATCS should be provided by vendor along with micro-processor panel. Design pressure for all ATCS components coming in the water loop should be equal to the chiller water box design pressure.

6. Automatic Tube cleaning system need to be provide for each chiller to keep the heat exchanger surface free from fouling. It should be reliable cleaning system and should not cause any disturbance to water pressure. Chiller should not be shut down for cleaning of tube and no chemical should be used for the same.

27. ACOUSTICAL DATA

1. Provide acoustical sound power or sound pressure level data in decibels (dB) at the scheduled eight (8) octave band center frequencies. A-weighted sound data alone is not acceptable.

2. Provide all sound power or sound pressure level data at 100%, 75%, 50%, and 25% load.

3. Supplied equipment shall not exceed scheduled sound power or sound pressure level data at any load point. The mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs associated with equipment deviation.

4. Acoustical performance ratings shall be in accordance with AHRI Standard 370.

28. POWER AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Power/Control Panel

i. Factory installed and wired, powder painted steel cabi¬nets with tool lockable, hinged, latched, and gasket sealed outer doors equipped with wind struts for safer servicing. Provide main power connection(s), compressor starters and fan motor contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring.

ii. Panel shall include control display access door.

2. Single Point Power:

i. Chilled should be provided with single point power connection of 3 phase of scheduled voltage.

ii. Terminal block connections shall be provided at the point of incoming single point connection for field connection and interconnecting wiring to the compressors. Separate external protection must be supplied, by others, in the incoming power wiring, which must comply with local codes.




322

iii. Control Transformer: Power panel shall be supplied with a factory mounted and wired control transformer that will supply all unit control voltage from the main unit power supply. Transformer shall utilize scheduled line voltage on the primary side and provide 115V/1Ø on secondary.

iv. Motor Starters: Motor starters shall be zero electrical inrush current (Variable Frequency Drives). VFD should be provided for

(1) For compressors

(2) For condenser fans

v. Power Factor

In case of VFD driven, Chiller shall be provided with power factor correction capacitors as required to maintain a displacement power factor of 95% at all load conditions.

The manufacturer is responsible for additional cost to furnish and install power factor correction capacitors if they are not factory mounted and wired.

29. MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROL PANEL:

Factory mounted microprocessor based control panel must be provided with at least the following features:

a) Automatic shutdown protection with manual reset for:

• Low evaporator refrigerant temperature and pressure,

• High condenser refrigerant pressure.

• Loss of condenser water flow

• High motor temperature

• Low Oil flow

• Electrical distribution faults such as Phase reversal, phase loss, phase imbalance, motor current overload.

• High compressor discharge temperature.

b) Critical sensor or detection of circuit fault in:

1) Starter transition failure.

2) External or local emergency stop.

3) Automatic shut down protection with automatic reset when condition is corrected for of chilled water flow, high compressor discharge temperature, under / over voltage momentary power loss.

4) The monitoring system should be provided for early detection and warning of refrigerant loss. Microprocessor based chilled water reset based on return water is necessary and must be provided.

5) The unit control panel should be capable of avoiding unit shutdown due to transit abnormal operating conditions associated with low evaporator refrigerant temperature, hi-condensing temperature and motor current overload. If the abnormal operating conditions persist and the protective limit is reached, the machine will be shut down. The microprocessor based panel should be compatible to building management system.

30. QUICK START

Bidder to provide chiller with quick starting abilities and should provide following points as a minimum requirements.

1. Quick start control enabling the chiller controller to rapidly restart and load the chiller and deliver chilled water at set point temperature following a power interruption event. The quick start




323

feature shall ensure rapid and quick loading of all compressors simultaneously so that Max time to reach set point for complete chiller is 3-4 Mins.

2. Manufacturers must be able to demonstrate chiller start time improvements with the quick start feature enabled on an ARI certified test block fully simulating power fault, power service return, restart time, and capacity control to produce desired chilled water temperature

31. AIR-COOLED SCREW CHILLERS

31.1. SCOPE

1. Manufacture and supply of AHRI / Eurovent Certified Imported Air cooled screw chillers with VFD with associated motors, and accessories. All compressors in chiller shall be with VFD drives.

2. All associated items herein to be supplied delivered and installed.

3. Assembly of chiller components including connection of cooler, condenser, motor, compressor and VFD into complete refrigeration machine.

4. Provide manufacturer’s factory representative’s services, including coordination, and start-up and erection & testing supervision.

5. Carry out performance test run at factory at 4 points in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590. .

6. C.O.P. of selected chiller at ARI conditions shall be > 3.1.

7. Advanced microprocessor control center with graphics and all interconnecting unit piping and wiring

8. IBMS Compatibility– MODBUS / Bacnet IP output

9. Chiller should be provided with high ambient temperature control options to ensure unit is capable of operation up to 125°F (52°C) ambient temperature.

31.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM

1. Pressure vessels shall be designed, constructed, tested as per ASME / GB Code.

2. Chiller shall be the product of a manufacturer / licensee normally supplying this type of equipment and who can show evidence, having completed five installations of approximately the same capacity that have been in successful operation for at least three years.

3. The chiller shall be designed / manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable portions of the latest revisions of the following Standards and Codes.

ARI 550 / 590 – 2003 - Performance rating of water chilling packages using the

vapor compression cycle.

ARI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Equipment

ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration ANSI/ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation and Safety Classification of

Refrigerants

ASHRAE 90.1 Number Designation and Safety Classification of




324

Refrigerants

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (N.E.C.)

ASME CODE - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. (Div. 1 Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels - Section VIII, Design, construction, testing and certification of pressure vessels).

ANSI-B9.1 - American National Standards Institute. Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (overall general safety requirements, relief device sizing, etc.)

ANSI-B31.5 - American National Standards Institute. Code for Refrigerant Piping.

31.3. CAPACITY

Actual refrigeration capacity of chilling machine shall be as per design requirements.

31.4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Chiller shall be air cooled with variable speed drive ad should be with a complete system including, multiple independent refrigerant circuits, semi hermetic twin screw compressors, shell and tube type evaporator, air-cooled condenser, R134a refrigerant, lubrication system, interconnecting wiring, safety and operating controls including capacity controller, control center, motor starting components, and special features as specified herein or required for safe, automatic operation.

31.5. COMPRESSOR

1. Compressors: Shall be direct drive, semi hermetic, rotary twin-screw type with integrated lubrication system utilizing compressor differential pressure.

2. Refrigerant shall be R-134a.

3. Compressor casing shall be constructed from a high strength iron casting, having reinforced double wall construction to provide a rigid structure and minimize the transmission of noise. Multiple pressure lubricated rolling element bearing shall be used to absorb axial thrust as well as radial load. Minimum 80 mesh reinforced SS strainer shall be provided at the suction of compressor for protection. Rotors shall be precision made from ductile iron. Oil separator shall be provided at discharge side of compressor. Oil separator can be an integral part of compressor of alternatively, it could be separate pressure vessel. Oil separator shall contain impingement plate, removable SS oil strainer and electrical oil heater. Drained oil from oil separator shall be piped back to the compressor.

4. Step-less capacity control to exactly match system load shall be provided. Compressor shall be able to unload up to 20% of load with stable running.

5. Compressor Motors: Refrigerant cooled accessible hermetic compressor motor, with inherent internal thermal overload protection and external current overload on all three phases.

Capacity Control: Compressors shall start at minimum load. Provide Microprocessor control to command compressor capacity to balance compressor capacity with cooling load.




325

31.6. EVAPORATOR

1. The evaporator shell shall be of rolled carbon steel plate with fusion welded seams. Removable compact water boxes of cast iron or welded steel with stub-out water connections shall be provided to permit access for tube cleaning and replacement.

2. Water boxes shall be designed for 150 psig working pressure and pneumatically tested at 225 psig.

3. The tube material will be copper. Tubes shall be high-efficiency, internally and externally enhanced type having plain lands at all intermediate tube supports to provide maximum tube wall thickness at the support area.

4. Evaporator shall be horizontal shell-and-tube, flooded / falling film type and shall be provided with following accessories,

i. Two liquid level sight glasses will be located on the side of the shell to aid in determining proper refrigerant charge.

ii. Suction baffles / mist eliminator to prevent liquid carry over to the compressor.

iii. Refrigerant relief device sized to meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

5. Chiller shall be factory insulated with 19 mm thick nitrile rubber / or equivalent thermal insulation with vapor barrier. The insulation shall be applied in such a manner that water boxes and covers shall be removable without damaging it.

31.7. AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS:

Condenser coils shall be either Micro Channel (All aluminum) or Copper-aluminum construction with factory applied post dipped e-coat (Spray coating and locally made coating is not acceptable) for protection from Sulphur and other pollutants in environment.

Condenser fans should be direct driven, heavy duty axial fans with aluminum blades and should be provided with variable speed drive/ EC fans. Constant speed fans are not acceptable.

31.8. ACOUSTICAL DATA

1. Provide acoustical sound power or sound pressure level data in decibels (dB) at the scheduled eight (8) octave band center frequencies. A-weighted sound data alone is not acceptable.

2. Provide all sound power or sound pressure level data at 100%, 75%, 50%, and 25% load.

3. Supplied equipment shall not exceed scheduled sound power or sound pressure level data at any load point. The mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs associated with equipment deviation.

4. Acoustical performance ratings shall be in accordance with AHRI Standard 370.

31.9. POWER AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Power/Control Panel

i. Factory installed and wired, powder painted steel cabinets with tool lockable, hinged, latched, and gasket sealed outer doors equipped with wind struts for safer servicing. Provide main power connection(s), compressor starters and fan motor contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring.




326

ii. Panel shall include control display access door. iii. Control panel should be suitable for provision of separate control supply from UPS.

2. Single Point Power:

i. Chilled should be provided with single point power connection of 3 phase of scheduled voltage.

ii. Terminal block connections shall be provided at the point of incoming single point connection for field connection and interconnecting wiring to the compressors. Separate external protection must be supplied, by others, in the incoming power wiring, which must comply with local codes.

3. Control Transformer: Power panel shall be supplied with a factory mounted and wired control transformer that will supply all unit control voltage from the main unit power supply. Transformer shall utilize scheduled line voltage on the primary side and provide 115V/1Ø on secondary.

i. Motor Starters: Motor starters shall be zero electrical inrush current (Variable Frequency Drives). VFD should be provided for

ii. For compressors (all compressors to be provided with VFD)

iii. For condenser fans

4. Power Factor

i. Chiller shall be provided with power factor correction capacitors as required to maintain a displacement power factor of 95% at all load conditions.

ii. The manufacturer is responsible for additional cost to furnish and install power factor correction capacitors if they are not factory mounted and wired.

31.10. MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROL PANEL:

Factory mounted microprocessor based control panel must be provided with at least the following features:

1. Automatic shutdown protection with manual reset for:

a) Low evaporator refrigerant temperature and pressure

b) High condenser refrigerant pressure.

c) Loss of condenser water flow

d) High motor temperature

e) Low Oil flow

f) Electrical distribution faults such as Phase reversal, phase loss, phase imbalance, motor current overload.

g) High compressor discharge temperature.

h) Compressor overload by a thermal relay contact. After the fault, clearing the start shall be by reset button. Each compressor shall have independent overload protection.

2. Critical sensor or detection of circuit fault in:

a) Starter transition failure. b) External or local emergency stop.




327

3. Automatic shutdown protection with automatic reset when condition is corrected for of chilled water flow, high compressor discharge temperature, under / over voltage momentary power loss.

4. The monitoring system should be provided for early detection and warning of refrigerant loss. Microprocessor based chilled water reset based on return water is necessary and must provided.

5. The unit control panel should be capable of avoiding unit shutdown due to transit abnormal operating conditions associated with low evaporator refrigerant temperature, hi-condensing temperature and motor current overload. If the abnormal operating conditions persist and the protective limit is reached, the machine will be shut down. The microprocessor based panel should be compatible to building management system.

31.11. QUICK START & RECOVERY

Bidder to provide chiller with quick starting abilities and should provide following points as a minimum requirements.

1. Quick start control enabling the chiller controller to rapidly restart and load the chiller and deliver chilled water at set point temperature following a power interruption event. The quick start feature shall ensure rapid and quick loading of all compressors simultaneously so that Max time to reach set point for complete chiller is 5 Mins.

a) All chillers and compressors must be with VFD so that multiple compressors in single chillers and multiple chillers as well can be started simultaneously so that desired temperature can be achieved at earliest.

b) Manufacturers must be able to demonstrate chiller start time improvements with the quick start feature enabled on an ARI certified test block fully simulating power fault, power service return, restart time, and capacity control to produce desired chilled water temperature.

31.12. TESTING

Equipment capacity in tons of refrigeration shall be computed from the temperature readings and water flow measurements. Flow measurements shall be preferably through BTU meters. Computed results should tally with the specified capacities and the power consumption should tally with the figures furnished with the tender.

All instruments, services needed for the tests required for computation of capacity and power consumption shall be furnished by the Contractor themselves.

Factory testing for checking performance of chiller shall be witness by the consultant/purchaser for one unit of each type for obtaining the dispatch clearance.

Single Chiller of each type will be selected from the manufactured lot and will tested for performance. The chiller shall be tested for varying percentage of cooling capacities of 100 %, 75 % , 50 % & 25 % for their performance.

Client will witness performance testing of one each type of chiller at manufactures factory. The performance testing shall be carried out at four points as per AHRI/ Eurovent test standards.

31.13. INSTALLATION

The air cooled chiller package housing compressor, chiller and condensers shall be mounted on a suitable foundation which shall be prepared by the Owner/contractor. The Contractor/Owner shall supply foundation bolts, nuts, washers, levelling screws, mounting frame or base plate, vibration isolation pads etc. and it shall be his responsibility to see that all the above items are properly and accurately placed in




328

position while the foundation is cast. The contractor shall supply the required quantity of refrigerant, lubricant and other consumables for testing and commissioning the equipment.

After erection, the unit shall be properly levelled before grouting the foundation bolts and the levels should be shown to the Consultants. All the equipment shall be thoroughly tested and checked for leaks. The refrigeration system shall be vacuumed to within 7.6 mm Hg Absolute and maintained for four hours. At the end of this period the pumps shall be stopped and vacuum maintained for twenty four hours without exceeding a vacuum drop of 2.5mm Hg Absolute. The Contractor shall certify that the vacuum was maintained as specified above.

All safety controls, low and high refrigerant pressure controls, starter, overload trips shall be suitably set and record of all the setting shall be furnished to the Consultants.




329

Annexure Q5: Technical Specifications For Precision Air Conditioning Units

1. PRECISION AIRCONDITIONING UNITS FOR Telecom, Staging, MUX and Meet Me Rooms

Down discharge Chilled Water Type Units with EC Fan- Motors (Electronically Commutated)

1.1. Scope

Scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of precision air conditioning systems. The units shall be provided with chilled water coil along with 2 way valve control. A built in ATS shall be provided within unit for dual power supply. All units shall be provided with Modbus/Bacnet over IP for connectivity with building management system.

1.2. Selection basis

Units shall be selected based on 32 degree centigrade air inlet & chilled water with supply and return of 14/21 degree C.

1.3. Cabinet Construction

• The frame and panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge corrosion resistant sheet steel and have modular construction with railing and hinged doors.

• The cabinet shall be powder coated and have a textured finish.

• The cabinet shall be provided with double skin panels with inner panel of minimum thickness of 0.8mm and outer panel of thickness of 1.0mm.

• Insulation thickness in all the panels should be 19 mm thick glass wool or equivalent insulation.

1.4. Evaporator Coil – CW Type

The evaporator coil shall be constructed of rifled bore copper tubes and louvered aluminum fins, with the aluminum/ GI frame. The coil should be straight/ slant coil configuration and drip tray should be fabricated from heavy gauge steel with powder coating to avoid corrosion. The drip trays must be double angled for condensate flow and easily removable for cleaning. The cooling coil shall be of suitable rows deep and designed for high sensible cooling. The distance between the fins should not be less than 1.8 mm and the face velocity shall not be more than 2.75 m/sec. The coil must be internally partitioned with minimum 6 rows.

CRAC units should be supplied with MS flanges for connecting chilled water pipes to the unit.

1.5. Fan and Motor: ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED DRIVES

Fans: Unit must be provided with direct drive backward curved fans each running with DC drive electronically communicated fans for discharge of cold air in the false floor. The fans should be aligned and balance statically and dynamically. The fan speed must be controlled based on the room return air temperatures and also must have automatic speed control without manual intervention. The number of Fans should be as per design requirements.




330

Units with latest innovative EC fan technology with “COMPOSITE “Blade material will be preferred.

Units shall be factory balanced in accordance with Section 15071, Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.

Only direct drive fans to be provided in offered units and centrifugal fans with belt drive is strictly not acceptable.

Noise Level: 70 db from 1 MT of unit in free filed conditions.

1.6. Accessibility: Service Area

• The unit shall be accessed from front, which will be enabling to access all the main components of the machine from the front for installation purposes and routine servicing.

• The unit shall be serviceable from the front with a maximum service space required of 1m.

1.7. Electrical Heating (Optional)

1) The electric heating elements shall operate at a level not exceeding 60 KW / sqm. The low watt density elements shall be of finned tubular nickel plated steel construction.

2) The heating circuit shall include dual safety protection through loss of air and high temperature controls.

1.8. Humidification (Optional)

Humidity shall be achieved by using Immersed-electrode type humidifier by which steam shall be produced and the steam shall be distributed evenly into the bypass air-stream of the process cooling unit. The Humidifier operation should have periodic flushing cycle. The Humidifier should guarantee a perfect efficiency with low energy consumption and greater durability of components. The humidifier shall be fully serviceable with replaceable electrodes.

1.9. De-Humidification

De- Humidification to be achieved by controlling the evaporator fan speed.

1.10. Filtration

Filtration level should be of 90% - 10 microns. Filter should be of HDPE media & washable type. Filters with combustible / dry disposable media are strictly not accepted.

1.11. Electrical Panel

Control cabinet to be provided with Type 2 enclosure, with grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock, and fusible control circuit transformer.

The electric panel provided for the unit must be equipped with main incoming power isolation switch or IMCCB of suitable rating with microprocessor control, additionally the unit must be provided with under voltage / over voltage / phase reversal / single phasing protection, all three phase motors must be operated only via 24V coil voltage contactors and MPCB’s, additionally step down transformer must be provided for power supply to the unit controller. The electrical panel must also be providing with relay block for common alarm.

1.12. Micro Processor Controller

Each Air conditioners should have single microprocessor with following controls:




331

Control Type

The controls shall be a microprocessor programmable logic controller. The controls shall have separate indication of operating modes (cooling, heating, humidifying and dehumidifying), alarm conditions (temperature high, loss of sensor, compressor HP & LP, wet floor, no air flow and low humidifier water). The display and indication shall be visible on the front without removing any external panels. Local and remote alarms will be triggered if an alarm condition is reached. Each unit must be provided with large screen GRAPHICAL DISPLAY and additionally the controller must have feature of DUAL SET POINT programming.

• The control should have an auto-restart feature, which will return the unit to normal operation resumption of mains power.

• Automatic load / time and alarm sequencing function to be performed by the unit.

• Microprocessor must have output point for ON/OFF of motorized damper and must be suitable to be integrated with fire point for unit shut off incase receiving signal from fire panel or fire detectors.

• The unit controller must have option of {DUAL SET} point for energy saving i.e. customer must have the option to set two independent set points for the unit based on operational requirements and energy saving concepts.

1.13. Display:

In normal operating mode the screen should display unit number, temperature and relative humidity set points and actual, operating status.

The unit must have a large screen LCD display on controller with user friendly menus and minimum two level password protections.

RS485 interface port for BMS compatibility with ModBus RTU protocol is required.

1.14. Alarms:

Following alarms should be available:

1. Temperature High / Loss of Sensor

2. Wet floor

3. No Air flow

4. Low Humidifier Water.

5. Temperature high / low

6. Humidity high / low

1.15. Safety Protections

The unit shall also incorporate the following protections:

1) Single phasing preventers

2) Reverse phasing

3) Phase unbalancing

4) Phase failure

5) Overload tripping (MPCB) of all components

6) Wet floor sensor

7) Under Voltage and Over Voltage protection




332

1.16. Safety Interlocks

Operation of heaters & humidifiers shall be possible only when blower fan is in operation. Interlocking should be with alarm or indicators for the above condition.

1.17. Sequencing

The sequencing should be feature of the PAC units. The units shall be designed to work for equal no of run hours also in case of fault the stand by unit should start.

1.18. Microprocessor Controls

Following information shall be available on the display on the units:

1) Room temperature and humidity

2) Supply fan working status

3) Current date and time

4) Electric heaters working status

5) Manual / Auto unit status

6) Temperature set point

7) Humidity set point

8) Working hours of main component i.e. fan, heater, humidifier

9) Unit working hours

10) Modes of operation (cooling, heating, humidification, de-humidification)

11) The last 10 intervened alarms or faults

The Microprocessor shall be able to perform following functions

1) Password for unit calibration values modification

2) Automatic reset of program

3) Cooling capacity control

4) Date & time of last 10 intervened alarms

5) Start / Stop status storage by switch

6) Bypass arrangements in case of microprocessor failure for any emergency conditions.

2. PRECISION AIRCONDITIONING UNITS FOR UPS ROOM & BATTERY ROOM

Down discharge Chilled Water Type Units with EC Fan- Motors (Electronically Commutated)

2.1. Scope

Scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of precision air conditioning Systems. . The units shall be provided with chilled water coil along with 2 way valve control. A built in ATS shall be provided within unit for dual power supply. All units shall be provided with Modbus/ Bacnet over IP for connectivity with building management system.


Units for shall be selected based on 32 degree centigrade air inlet & chilled water with supply and return of 14/21 degree C.




333


1) The frame and panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge corrosion resistant sheet steel and have modular construction with railing and hinged doors

2) The cabinet shall be powder coated and have a textured finish

3) The cabinet shall be provided with double skin panels with inner panel of minimum thickness of 0.8mm and outer panel of thickness of 1.0mm

4) Insulation thickness in all the panels should be 19 mm thick glass wool or equivalent insulation




Fans: Unit must be provided with direct drive backward curved fans each running with DC drive electronically communicated fans for discharge of cold air in the false floor. The fans should be aligned and balance statically and dynamically. The fan speed must be controlled based on the room return air Temperatures and also must have automatic speed control without manual intervention. The fans can be one /two/ three no’s as per the manufacturer’s standard.


Units shall be factory balanced in accordance with Section 15071, mechanical, sound and vibration control.



2.6. Accessibility: Service Area

1) The unit shall be accessed from front, which will be enabling to access all the main components of the machine from the front for installation purposes and routine servicing.

2) The unit shall be serviceable from the front with a maximum service space required of 1m


1) The electric heating elements shall operate at a level not exceeding 60 KW / sqm. The low watt density elements shall be of finned tubular nickel plated steel construction.

2) The heating circuit shall include dual safety protection through loss of air and high temperature controls.

2.8. Humidification (Optional)

Humidity shall be achieved by using Immersed-electrode type humidifier by which steam shall be produced and the steam shall be distributed evenly into the bypass air-stream of the process cooling unit. The humidifier operation should have periodic flushing cycle. The Humidifier should guarantee a




334

perfect efficiency with low energy consumption and greater durability of components. The humidifier shall be fully serviceable with replaceable electrodes.


De- humidification to be achieved by controlling the evaporator fan speed.

2.10. Filtration




The electric panel provided for the unit must be equipped with main incoming power isolation switch or IMCCB of suitable rating with microprocessor control, additionally the unit must be provided with under voltage / over voltage / phase reversal / single phasing protection, all three phase motors must be operated only via 24V coil voltage contactors and MPCB’s, additionally step down transformer must be provided for power supply to the unit controller. The electrical panel must also be providing with relay block for common alarm.


Each air conditioners should have single microprocessor with following controls:

Control Type


1) The control should have an auto-restart feature which will return the unit to normal operation resumption of mains power.

2) Automatic load / time and alarm sequencing function to be performed by the unit.

3) Microprocessor must have output point for ON/OFF of motorized damper and must be suitable to be integrated with fire point for unit shut off incase receiving signal from fire panel or fire detectors.

4) The unit controller must have option of {DUAL SET} point for energy saving i.e. customer must have the option to set two independent set points for the unit based on operational requirements and energy saving concepts.

2.13. Display







335

2.14. Alarms:


1) Temperature high / Loss of sensor

2) Wet floor

3) No air flow

4) Low humidifier water

5) Temperature high / low

6) Humidity high / low

2.15. Safety Protections:



2) Reverse phasing


4) Phase failure


6) Wet floor sensor

7) Over Voltage and Under Voltage protection

Safety Interlocks:

Operation of heaters & humidifiers shall be possible only when blower fan is in operation. Interlocking should be with alarms or indications for the above conditions

2.16. Sequencing:


2.17. Microprocessor Controls

Following information shall be displayed on the units:










10) Modes of operation (cooling, heating, humidification, de-humidification,)




336


The Microprocessor shall perform the following functions







3. PRECISION AIRCONDITIONING UNITS FOR SERVER ROOM

Chilled Water Type Units with EC Fan- Motors with Fan Section below false floor

3.1. Scope

Scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of in floor type Precision Air Conditioning Systems. The units shall be provided with supply air temperature logic. Fan speed shall automatically vary based on load. The units shall be provided with dual chilled water coil along with 2 way valve control. A built in ATS shall be provided within unit for dual power supply. All units shall be provided with Modbus/ Bacnet over IP for connectivity with Integrated Building management system.


Units for server room shall be selected based on 34 degree C air inlet & Chilled water with supply and return of 14/21 degree C units shall have two independent cooling coil each of 100 % capacity. One coil shall act as precooling coil with cooling water supplied from cooling tower.


1) The frame and panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge corrosion resistant sheet steel and have modular construction with railing and hinged doors.

2) The cabinet shall be powder coated and have a textured finish.

3) The cabinet Shall be provided with double skin panels with inner panel of minimum thickness of 0.8mm and outer panel of thickness of 1.0mm

4) Insulation thickness in all the panels should be 19 mm thick glass wool or equivalent insulation.



CRAC units should be supplied with MS flanges for connecting chilled water pipes to the unit.




337

3.5. Pressure Independent Valves

1) PAC units to be supplied with Pressure independent valves with actuators to stabilize the flow and to have better heat transfer resulting in Energy savings and increase in overall performance of the unit . The valve must be installed inside the unit and not externally.

2) The pressure independent valves should have user friendly display for high flow units

3) PID valve to be provided in the CRAC unit to eliminate the installation of extra balancing valve/ flanges etc. reducing the capital cost and labor.

4) Eliminates the need for Cv calculations and sizing. Gives the user the flexibility to select the valve with the required max flow/tonnage and allow the actuator to modulate the flow and this should be on site adjustable on the valve actuator

5) PAC units with conventional two-way modulating valves are strictly not acceptable


Fans: Unit must be provided with direct drive backward curved fans each running with DC drive electronically communicated fans for discharge of cold air in the false floor. The fans should be aligned and balance statically and dynamically. The fan speed must be controlled based on the room return air Temperatures and also must have automatic speed control without manual intervention. The fans can be one /two/ three no’s as per the manufacturer’s standard.


Units shall be factory balanced in accordance with Section 15071, Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control.



3.7. Accessibility: Service Area:

1) The unit shall be accessed from front which will be enabling to access all the main components of the machine from the front for installation purposes and routine servicing.

2) The unit shall be serviceable from the front with a maximum service space required of 1m


1) The electric heating elements shall operate at a level not exceeding 60 KW / sqm. The low watt density elements shall be of finned tubular nickel plated steel construction

2) The heating circuit shall include dual safety protection through loss of air and high temperature controls

3.9. Humidification

Humidity shall be achieved by using Immersed-electrode type humidifier by which steam shall be produced and the steam shall be distributed evenly into the bypass air-stream of the process cooling unit. The Humidifier operation should have periodic flushing cycle. The Humidifier should guarantee a perfect efficiency with low energy consumption and greater durability of components. The humidifier shall be fully serviceable with replaceable electrodes.


De- Humidification to be achieved by controlling the evaporator fan speed.




338

3.11. Filtration




The electric panel provided for the unit must be equipped with main incoming power isolation switch or IMCCB of suitable rating with microprocessor control, additionally the unit must be provided with under voltage / over voltage / phase reversal / single phasing protection, all three phase motors must be operated only via 24V coil voltage contactors and MPCB’s, additionally step down transformer must be provided for power supply to the unit controller. The electrical panel must also be providing with relay block for common alarm


Each Air conditioners should have single microprocessor with following controls:

Control Type


1) The control should have an auto-restart feature which will return the unit to normal operation resumption of mains power.

2) Automatic load / time and alarm sequencing function to be performed by the unit.

3) Microprocessor must have output point for ON/OFF of motorized damper and must be suitable to be integrated with fire point for unit shut off incase receiving signal from fire panel or fire detectors.

4) The unit controller must have option of {DUAL SET} point for energy saving i.e. customer must have the option to set two independent set points for the unit based on operational requirements and energy saving concepts.

3.14. Display




3.15. Alarms:


1) Temperature High / Loss of Sensor

2) Wet floor




339

3) No Air flow

4) Low Humidifier Water

5) Temperature high / low

6) Humidity high / low

3.16. Safety Protections:



2) Reverse phasing


4) Phase failure


6) Wet Floor Sensor

Safety Interlocks:

Operation of heaters & humidifiers shall be possible only when blower fan is in operation. Interlocking should be with alarm or indication for the above condition.

3.17. Sequencing


3.18. Microprocessor Controls:

Following information shall be displayed on the units:










10) Modes of operation (cooling, heating, humidification, de-humidification)


The Microprocessor shall be able to perform following functions:





340









341

Annexure-Q6: Elevators

1. Passenger Lift

Sr.No Description

1. No. of Lifts Minimum Two (2).

2. Technical Specification As per Annexure-P

3. Detailed technical specifications as per Tier IV Design requirement

SI to specify

4. Specifications and General Features

IS: 4666. 1968 for electric passenger lifts and shall further Comply to IS: 1860:1960, IS: 63831, 1971, IS: 732: 1963 and Bombay lift act 1943 amended up to date.

5. Sanction and approvals The supplier shall obtain all the Licenses required for the operation of lifts from Chief Electrical Inspector and any other Statutory Body, on behalf of SBI.

6. Tests

The supplier shall test the lift in the presence of lift inspector as well as SBI authorized Engineer/Site-Incharge/3rd party agency appointed by SBI as per ISI if required.

7. Inclusion

Cost of voltage stabilizer (if required) and SMF Batteries, Vat, Service tax, excise duty, Freight, Insurance transit

and up to handling over of lift, Octori etc. to be borne by

SI.

8. Minor Building Work

The lift suppliers include: 1. Scaffolding inside the hoist way for erection. 2. Cutting of walls with repair Including all of bolts

members indicator and button boxes etc. in position. 3. Sill angles, fascia plates, machine Beams and

rolled steel section with bearing plates for support of the machine if required.

4. Door frames.

5. Pit Ladder




342

2. Freight Lift

Sr.No Description

1. No. of Lifts One (1)

2. Technical Specification As per Annexure-P

3. Detail technical specifications as per Tier IV Design requirement

SI to Specify

4. Specification and General Features

IS: 4666. 1968 for electric passenger lifts and shall further Comply to IS: 1860:1960, IS: 63831, 1971, IS: 732: 1963 and Bombay lift act 1943 amended up to date.

5. Sanction and approvals The supplier shall obtain all the Licenses required for the operation of lifts from Chief Electrical Inspector and any other Statutory Body, on behalf of SBI.

6. Tests

The supplier shall test the lift in the presence of lift inspector as well as department SBI authorized Engineer/Site-Incharge/3rd party agency appointed by SBI as per ISI if required.

7. Inclusion Cost of voltage stabilizer (if required) and SMF Batteries, Vat, Service tax, Excise duty, Freight, Octori, Insurance transit and up to handling over of lift, to be borne by SI

8. Minor Building Work

The lift suppliers include: 1. Scaffolding inside the hoist way for erection. 2. Cutting of walls with repair Including all of bolts

members indicator and button boxes etc. in position. 3. Sill angles, fascia plates, machine Beams and rolled

steel section with bearing plates for support of the machine if required.

4. Door frames.

5. Pit Ladder

Refer Annexure-Q6 for detailed technical specifications.




343

Annexure-Q7: Solar Power Generation system

1. Scope of Work

Solar Power will be utilized for power generation for non-critical/non-essential load of Data center. System Integrator has to provide an innovative High Level and Low Level design for solar generating system. System Integrator should efficiently utilize the available space for Solar Power generation. The design should be grid tie system with building integrated solar panels.

If required by MSEB, net metering facility to be provided and NOC/Permissions for operating the SV system shall be obtained from the Authorities.

2. Functional Requirements

Solar PV system shall consist of but not limited to following equipment’s:

a. Solar PV modules consisting PV cells. b. Moveable with rotation type module mounting system (adjustable to Sun’s Movement path). c. Power Conditioning Unit/ Inverters d. Meter for monitoring energy generated, irradiation with communication capability e. Mounting structures f. Cables and hardware g. Earthing kit h. PVC pipes and accessories i. Lightning Arrestors

3. Photovoltaic (PV) Arrays

a. The PV modules convert the light reaching them into DC power. The amount of power they produce is roughly proportional to the intensity and the angle of the light reaching them. They are therefore required to be positioned to take maximum advantage of available sunlight within string constraints. Bidder will provide moveable PV modules in such a manner that the maximum power is obtained with the sun's movements during the day.

b. The Photovoltaic modules must be qualified as per IEC 61215 (revised) standard and in addition,

the modules must conform to IEC 61730-1 requirements for construction & Part-2 requirements for testing, for safety qualification. The test certificates can be from any of the NABL/BIS Accredited Testing Calibration Laboratories.

c. The optimum generation of electricity of PV capacity installed vis-a-vis available solar radiation at

the site may be obtained through use of lower cable losses, maximization of power transfer from PV modules to electronics, maximization of power generation by enhancing incident radiation.

d. The manufacturer shall arrange certification on qualification of PV modules.

e. The material used for constructing the PV module shall be selected in such a way that its gives the

maximum efficiency and the latest technology shall be adopted for the construction of PV module. f. The power output of the PV system under Standard Test Conditions (STC) should be

sufficient to meet the requirement. g. The required power made of suitable module size depending upon manufacturer prudent practice

with required output voltage. The number of modules to be supplied shall be worked out accordingly.




344

4. Identification and Traceability

Each PV module used in any solar power project must use a Bar Code system, which must contain the following information. The must be able to withstand harsh environmental conditions.

a. Name of the manufacturer of PV Module

b. Name of the Manufacturer of Solar cells

c. Month and year of the manufacture (separately for solar cells and module)

d. Country of origin (separately for solar cells and module)

e. I-V curve for the module

f. Peak Wattage, Im, Vm for the module

g. Unique Serial No and Model No of the module

h. Date and year of obtaining IEC PV module qualification certificate ix. Name of the test lab issuing

IEC certificate i. Other relevant information on traceability of solar cells and module as per ISO 9000 series.

5. Inverter/Power Conditioning Unit (PCU)

The term Inverter means the power conditioning unit, which converts the DC power from the SPV module to suitable AC voltage required for the load. All the electronic equipment which required for the efficient conversion of this power falls under the definition of Inverter.

The DC power produced from SPV module is fed to inverter for conversion into AC. SPV system AC power shall be fed to the load at single phase DB. The output of the inverter must be pure sine wave AC voltage of 415V and frequency of 50Hz.

The inverter control unit shall be so designed so as to operate the PV system near its Maximum Power Point (MPP), the operating point where the combined values of the current and voltage of the solar modules result in a maximum power output. The capacity of solar charge controller should be meet the efficient utilization of the total SPV module. In this case the bidder shall have the option to give a separate charge controller unit for obtaining maximum utilization of the SPV module. If the bidder chooses a separate charge controller, then he should submit the supporting calculation and documentation including test certificates for approval along with technical bid.

The inverter shall be a true sine wave inverter for the proposed system.

A complete data logger system with minimum 180 days data storing facility is required. This data includes the information regarding healthy condition of solar panel array.

6. Energy Meter and ACDB

Energy meter with AC distribution board (ACDB) shall be provided for accounting and also have to provide energy delivery for the customer as per the latest MNRE requirements. The MCB used in the ACDB should be sufficient to carry the full load current.

7. Protections and Control

PV system software and control system shall be equipped with following protections such as under and over voltage conditions, surge protection, reverse power relays PV systems shall be provided with




345

adequate rating MCB on inverter input side (DC) as well as output side (AC) side for overload and short circuit protection and disconnecting switches to isolate the DC and AC system for maintenances are needed. Fuses of adequate rating shall also be provided in each solar array module to protect them against short circuit. Suitable DC Distribution board (DCDB) with MCB etc. shall be provided on inverter input side (DC). The MCB used for this purpose should be sufficient to carry the full load DC current safely. Protection against lightning shall be provided and all the metal parts shall be earthed. RCCB of proper rating shall be provided.

8. Earthing

Each array structure of the PV yard should be grounded properly as per IS: 3043-1987. Provision should be kept for shorting and grounding of the PV array at the time of maintenance work. All metal casing/shielding of the plant should be thoroughly grounded in accordance with Indian electricity Act. /IE Rules. Earth Resistance should be tested in presence of the representative of SBI authorized Engineer/Site-Incharge/3rd party agency appointed by SBI after earthing by calibrated earth tester. PCU, ACDB, DCDB, supporting structures should also be earthed properly.

In case the SPV Array cannot be installed close to the equipment to be powered & a separate earth has been provided for SPV System, it shall be ensured that all the earths are bonded together to prevent the development of potential difference between two earths.

It shall be ensured that all the earths are bonded together to make them at the same potential.

The earthing conductor shall be rated for the maximum short circuit current.

The array structure of the PV modules shall be grounded properly using adequate numbers of earthing pits. All metal casing/ shielding of the plant shall be thoroughly grounded to ensure safety of the power plant.

9. Civil Works for Solar System

Sr.No Civil Work

1. Existing project site shall be used to install solar PV array.

2 PV array shall be installed in the proposed space free from any obstruction and/or shadow.

3 PV array shall be installed utilizing maximum space to minimize effects of shadows due to adjacent PV panel rows.

4 Adequate spacing shall be provided between two panel frames and rows of panel to facilitate personal protection ease of installation, replacement, cleaning of panels and electrical maintenance.

5 PV array shall be oriented in the south direction at a tilt angle of with maximum possibility of solar power harness. In order to maximize annual energy yield of the plant

6 Ample clearance shall be provide in the layout of the inventor and DC/AC distribution boxes for adequate cooling and ease of maintenance

7 No grouting or drilling in the slab of the terrace to be done for installation to avoid water leakage at a later stage

10. Data Acquisition System / Plant Monitoring

10.1. Data Logging Provision for plant control and monitoring, time and date stamped system data logs for analysis with the high quality. Metering and Instrumentation for display of systems parameters and status indication to be provided.




346

10.2. The following parameters are accessible via the operating interface display in real time separately for solar power plant:

a. AC Voltage. b. AC Output current. c. Output Power d. Power factor. e. DC Input Voltage. f. DC Input Current. g. Time Active. h. Time disabled. i. Time Idle. j. Power produced k. Protective function limits (Viz-AC Over voltage, AC Under voltage, over frequency, under

frequency ground fault, PV starting voltage, PV stopping voltage. 10.3. All major parameters available on the digital bus and logging facility for energy auditing

through the internal microprocessor and read on the digital front panel at any time) and logging facility (the current values, previous values for up to a month and the average values) should be made available for energy auditing through the internal microprocessor and should be read on the digital front panel.

10.4. PV array energy production: Digital Energy Meters to log the actual value of AC voltage, Current & Energy generated by the PV system provided. Energy meter along with CT/PT should be made available.




347

Annexure-Q8: Management system – Safety and Security

1. Scope

The scope of work shall include design, supply, installation, acceptance testing, commissioning, training & operation and maintenance of the Safety & Security Systems and the IBMS system. The work under this system shall consist of design, supply, installation, acceptance testing, training, operation & maintenance of all materials, equipment, hardware, software appliances and necessary labour to commission the said system, complete with all the respect with required components, strictly as per the tender specifications, design details. The scope also include the supply, installation & commissioning of any material or equipment including civil works that are not specifically mentioned in the specifications and design details but are required for successful commissioning of the project. The System includes:

1. Safety Systems a. Fire Detection with Integrated Voice Evacuation System b. Hand Held Extinguishers c. Aspirating Smoke Detection System d. Gas based fire suppression system e. Burglar and Intrusion Alarm System f. Fire Alarm system

2. Security Systems

a. Access Management, Physical security and CCTV b. Water Leak Detection c. Rodent Repellent

3. Integrated Building Management System

2. Safety Systems

2.1. Fire Detection with Integrated Voice Evacuation System

Scope The system shall be designed specifically to include all required hardware and system programming to provide a complete and operational system, with a layered application design concept, including an “Operational Layer” and a “Human Interface Layer”, to allow maximum flexibility of the system with a minimum physical size requirement. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur:

a. The System Alarm LED shall flash. b. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. c. The LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including

the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises. d. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to be activated

by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.

e. The audio portion of the system shall sound the proper signal (tone or voice) to the appropriate zones.

f. The fire alarm system shall detect all changes in status of monitored points and shall initiate




348

g. appropriate acts to alert/evacuate occupants, provide event annunciation and activate auxiliary controls as specified herein.

The system shall be integrated with IBMS (i) Network Fire Alarm Control Panel

a) Network fire alarm control panels shall include all features as described in this specification for standalone FACPs and shall have network communication capabilities as described below: All points monitored and controlled by a single node shall be capable of being programmed as "Public". Each point made public to the network may be programmed to be operated by any other node connected to the network. Network communications shall be capable of supporting "point lists" that can be handled as though they were a single point. The network shall provide a means to log into any node on the system via a computer or CRT/Keyboard and have complete network access (Set Host) for diagnostics. [The means shall include the capability to log into any node on the system via TCP/IP Ethernet network communications protocol compatible with IEEE Standard 802.3. Ethernet access to any fire alarm panel shall be capable of providing access only to authenticated users through a cryptographically authenticated and secure SLL tunnel. Provisions for a standard RJ-45 Ethernet connection to the owner's Ethernet network must be provided at each node. Systems not meeting this requirement must provide all diagnostic tools required to support this function from selected points on the network. This Section covers fire alarm systems, including initiating devices, notification appliances, controls, and supervisory devices.

b) The Fire Alarm System shall consist of all necessary hardware equipment and software programming to perform the following functions:

i.Fire alarm system detection and notification operations ii. Control and monitoring of elevators, smoke control equipment, door hold-open devices,

fire suppression systems, emergency power systems, and other equipment as indicated as per design

iii.Two-way supervised firefighter's phone operations iv.One-way supervised automatic voice alarm operations

(ii) Acceptable Code & Related Documents

a) The system and all associated operations shall be in accordance with the following:

i. Requirements of the following Model Building Code: 2009 Edition

ii. Requirements of the following Model Fire Code: NFPA 2010 Edition

iii. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code,2010 Edition

iv. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code,

v. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code,2009 Edition

vi. NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2009 Edition

vii. Local Jurisdictional Adopted Codes and Standards




349

(iii) System Description

a) General addressable microprocessor-based fire alarm system with initiating devices, notification appliances, and monitoring and control devices as specified herein.

b) Software: The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing instructions and operating sequences as necessary.

i. The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation.

ii. The system shall accept process and evaluate the following types of input signals: I. Automatic Fire Detectors II. Manual Alarms III. Supervisory (Tamper ) Condition IV. Trouble

iii. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.

iv. Panels shall be capable of full system operation during new site specific configuration download, master exec downloads, and slave exec downloads.

v. Remote panel site-specific software and executive firmware downloads shall be capable of being performed over proprietary fire alarm network communications [and via TCP/IP Ethernet network communications. Ethernet access to any fire alarm panel shall be capable of providing access only to authenticated users through a cryptographically authenticated and secure SSL tunnel.]

vi. Panels shall automatically store all program changes to the panel's non-volatile memory each time a new program is downloaded. Panels shall be capable of storing the active site-specific configuration program and no less than 9 previous revisions in reserve. A compare utility program shall also be available to authorized users to compare any two of the saved programs. The compare utility shall provide a deviation report highlighting the changes between the two compared programs.

vii. Panels shall provide electronic file storage with a means to retrieve a record copy of the site-specific software and up to 9 previous revisions. Sufficient file storage shall be provided for other related system documentation such as record drawings, record of completion, owner's manuals, testing and maintenance records, etc.

viii. The media used to store the record copy of site-specific software and other related system documentation shall be electrically supervised. If the media is removed a trouble shall be reported on the fire alarm control panel.

ix. The system shall be capable of being expanded and field reprogrammed at any time up to the predetermined maximum capacity of the system, without the requirement to return the operating system to the factory for program changes.

c) History Logs: The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. IT shall contain the most recent minimum 1000 events, with time and date of each event. A separate alarm and trouble log shall be provided. The history file shall remain intact in the event of a loss of AC and battery power.

d) Recording of Events: Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events by means of system printer. The printout shall include the type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) the device identification, date and time of the occurrence.

e) Wiring/Signal Transmission:

i. Transmission shall be hard-wired using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm operation, as required or addressable signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only.




350

ii. System connections for initiating device circuits shall be [Class A, Style A] [Class B, Style D], signaling line circuits shall be [Class A, Style 6][Class B, Style 4] and notification appliance circuits shall be [Class A, Style Z] [Class B, Style Y].

iii. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the FACP. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.

iv. Constant Supervision Audio: When provided, audio notification appliance circuits shall be supervised during standby by monitoring for DC continuity to end-of-line resistors.

f) Remote Access:

i. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall have the capability to provide a remote service access

feature using Ethernet and TCP/IP communications protocol compatible with IEEE Standard 802.3. The Remote Access feature shall provide automatic notification of system faults and remote diagnostics of system status for responding technicians prior to arrival on site.

ii. A standard RJ-45 Ethernet connection shall connect to the owners Ethernet network. Provisions for that connection must be provided at each fire alarm control panel.

iii. The Ethernet access feature shall be agency listed for specific interfaces and for the purpose described in this section. The use of non-listed external third party interfaces are not acceptable.

iv. The internet remote access service function shall provide automated real time off-site reporting of discrete system events to a remote service support center with details of internal FACP fault conditions allowing a pre-site visit analysis of repair requirements.

v. Existing FACP controls shall be capable of retrofitting the remote service module as a plug-in upgrade feature.

vi. The remote service network shall work on the customers Ethernet infrastructure and be Fire-Wall friendly for two-way communications for off-site reporting. The feature shall be compatible with existing proxy servers and firewalls shall not require any special changes or modifications.

vii. The remote service system shall be able to connect to the remote service center without the need for a VPN account or similar tunnel.

viii. The remote service system shall be a non-Windows based application to protect against conventional virus attacks.

ix. The remote service system shall support a secure connection with strong encryption, 128 bit or better, and an optional secondary encryption method as per requirement.

x. The remote service system shall be compatible with virtual LANS (VLAN).

xi. The remote service system shall work on an outbound communication premise (panel calls home) in order to eliminate the possibility of any inbound connection into the network (from trusted or non-trusted sites).

xii. The remote service system shall provide an audit trail of all events and service connections.

xiii. The Remote Service connection will provide access for panel software downloads and uploads for archiving job specific programs back at the enterprise server.

g) Network communication:

i. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall have the capability to provide a remote service access

feature using Ethernet and TCP/IP communications protocol compatible with IEEE Standard 802.3. The Remote Access feature shall provide automatic notification of system faults and remote diagnostics of system status for responding technicians prior to arrival on site.




351

ii. A standard RJ-45 Ethernet connection shall connect to the owners Ethernet network. Provisions for that connection must be provided at each fire alarm control panel..

iii. The Ethernet access feature shall be agency listed for specific interfaces and for the purpose described in this section. The use of non-listed external third party interfaces is not acceptable.

iv. The internet remote access service function shall provide automated real time off-site reporting of discrete system events to a remote service support center with details of internal FACP fault conditions allowing a pre-site visit analysis of repair requirements.

v. Existing FACP controls shall be capable of retrofitting the remote service module as a plug-in upgrade feature.

vi. The remote service network shall work on the customers Ethernet infrastructure and be Fire-Wall friendly for two-way communications for off-site reporting. The feature shall be compatible with existing proxy servers and firewalls shall not require any special changes or modifications.

vii. The remote service system shall be able to connect to the remote service center without the need for a VPN account or similar tunnel.

viii. The remote service system shall support a secure connection with strong encryption, 128 bit or better, and an optional secondary encryption method if required.

ix. The remote service system shall be compatible with virtual LANS (VLAN).

x. The remote service system shall work on an outbound communication premise (panel calls home) in order to eliminate the possibility of any inbound connection into the network (from trusted or non trusted sites).

xi. The remote service system shall provide an audit trail of all events and service connections.

xii. The Remote Service connection will provide access for panel software downloads and uploads for archiving job specific programs back at the enterprise server.

g) Network communication:

• Network node communication shall be through a token ring, hub, or star topology configuration, or combination thereof.

• A single open, ground or short on the network communication loop shall not degrade network communications. Token shall be passed in opposite direction to maintain communications throughout all network nodes. At the same time the status of the communication link shall be reported.

• If a group of nodes becomes isolated from the rest of the network due to multiple fault conditions, that group shall automatically form a sub-network with all common interaction of monitoring and control remaining intact. The network shall be notified with the exact details of the lost communications.

• Fiber optics communication shall be provided as an option via a fiber optics modem. Modem shall multiplex audio signals and digital communication via full duplex transmission over a single fiber optic cable, either single mode or multi mode

• The communication method shall be NFPA 72 style 7.

h) Building Automation and Control Network (BACnet) Integration

i. The fire alarm control unit shall be capable of providing communications interface between

the fire alarm control unit and an industry-standard Building Automation and Control Network




352

(BACnet) using ASHRAE@ BACnet® IP (internet protocol) compliant with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135.

ii. The BACnet communications module shall be agency listed to [UL Standard 864][ULC Standard S527].

iii. MS/TP Master and MS/TP Slave data link layer options communicating at baud rates up to 76,800 bps shall be supported.

iv. The interface shall be capable of supporting ANSI X3.4, ISO 10656 (ICS-4), ISO 10656 (UCS-2), ISO 8859-1, or IBM/Microsoft DBCS character sets.

v. A standard RJ-45 Ethernet connection to the Building Automation System Ethernet network shall be provided at the fire alarm control unit

vi. Systems using relay interfaces shall not be accepted

i) Required Functions: The following are required system functions and operating features:

i. Priority of Signals: Fire alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are queued in the order received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Priority Two, Supervisory and Trouble events have second-, third-, and fourth-level priority, respectively. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all events regardless of priority or order received.

ii. Non interfering: An event on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal. The activation of an addressable device does not prevent the receipt of signals from subsequent addressable device activations.

iii. Annunciation: Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated at the FACP and the remote annunciator, indicating the type of device, the operational state of the device (i.e. alarm, trouble or supervisory) and shall display the custom label associated with the device.

iv. Selective Alarm: A system alarm shall include: a. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP and the annunciator(s). b. Identification of the device /zone that is the source of the alarm at the FACP and the \

annunciator(s). c. Operation of audible and visible notification appliances until silenced at FACP. d. Selectively closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders on the fire floor,

floor above and floor below. e. Unlocking designated doors f. Shutting down supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is

initiated. Closing smoke dampers on system serving zone where alarm is initiated

g. Initiation of smoke control sequence h. Transmission of signal to the supervising station i. Initiation of elevator Phase I functions (recall, shunt trip, illumination of indicator etc.) in

accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1, when specified detectors or sensors are activated, as appropriate.

v. Activation of any manual alarm station or any other approved alarm initiating device shall immediately result in the following:

Display the alarm condition on the LCD Displays of all the Peer-to-Peer networked Panels, Network Repeaters and Slave Repeaters, Touch Screen Displays.

Visual alarm signals shall be provided as indicated on the plans.




353

System shall shutdown/redirect all HVAC system fans, dampers, etc.; close fire doors, recall elevators, etc., in accordance with the schedule provided and with appropriate local/national code.

Operation of the system alarm silence switch shall silence all alarm audible connected to the system, with the exception of circuits programmed for the non-silence water flow feature. When properly configured, a silence command shall not extinguish visual alarm appliances. Circuits containing alarm visual circuits shall not be silence able except upon system reset.

Because certain smoke detector environments change from day (occupied) till night (unoccupied), a more sensitive or Night setting may be desirable. Adjustable sensitivity smoke detector values shall be distinctly identified in the system memory and by display.

The fire alarm panel shall fully supervise its operation.

i. Supervisory Operations: Upon activation of a supervisory device such as fire pump power failure, low air pressure switch, and none tamper switch, the system shall operate as follows:

ii. Activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control unit and the remote annunciator

iii. Pressing the Supervisory Acknowledge Key will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory LED "on" indicating off-normal condition

iv. Record the event in the FACP historical log

v. Transmission of supervisory signal to the supervising station

vi. Restoring the condition shall cause the Supervisory LED to clear and restore the system to normal

vi. Alarm Silencing: If the "Alarm Silence" button is pressed, all audible and visible alarm signals shall cease operation.

vii. System Reset

a. The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state. Display messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps ("IN PROGRESS", "RESET COMPLETED") as they occur. The system shall verify all circuits or devices are restored prior to resetting the system to avoid the potential for re-alarming the system. The display message shall indicate "ALARM PRESENT, SYSTEM RESET ABORTED."

b. Should an alarm condition continue, the system will remain in an alarmed state.

c. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the notification appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated.

viii. WALKTEST: The system shall have the capacity of minimum 8 programmable passcode protected one person testing groups, such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing. The actuation of the "enable one person test" program at the control unit shall activate the "One Person Testing" mode of the system as follows:




354

a. Connection and any suppression release circuits shall be bypassed for the testing group.

b. Control relay functions associated with one of the 8 testing groups shall be bypassed.

c. The control unit shall indicate a trouble condition.

d. The alarm activation of any initiating device in the testing group shall cause the audible notification appliances assigned only to that group to sound a code to identify the device or zone.

i. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. Any opening of an initiating device or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.

e. Install Mode: The system shall provide the capability to group all non-commissioned points and devices into a single "Install Mode" trouble condition allowing an operator to clearly identify event activations from commissioned points and devices in occupied areas.

f. It shall be possible to individually remove points from install mode as required for phased system commissioning.

g. It shall be possible to retrieve an install mode report listing that includes a list of all points assigned to the same.

ix. Addressable Analog Smoke Sensors with base

a. Monitoring: FACP shall individually monitor sensors for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The control unit shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values.

b. Environmental Compensation: The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the sensor's smoke chamber value to automatically compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions that could affect detection operations.

c. Programmable Sensitivity: Photoelectric Smoke Sensors shall have minimum 7 selectable sensitivity levels ranging from 0.2% to 3.7%, programmed and monitored from the FACP.

d. Sensitivity Testing Reports: The FACP shall provide sensor reports that meet NFPA 72 calibrated test method requirements. The reports shall be viewed on a CRT Display or printed for annual recording and logging of the calibration maintenance schedule.

e. The FACP shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, progressive levels of reporting should be provided. The first level shall indicate if a sensor is close to a trouble reporting condition and will be indicated on the FACP as "ALMOST DIRTY." This condition provides a means to alert maintenance staff of a sensor approaching dirty without creating a trouble in the system. If this indicator is ignored and the second level is reached, a "DIRTY SENSOR" condition shall be indicated at the FACP and subsequently a system trouble is reported [to the Supervising Station][none]. The sensor base LED shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. The "DIRTY SENSOR" condition shall not affect the sensitivity level required to alarm the sensor. If a "DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a third predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be indicated at the control unit.

f. The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each sensor that will check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition.




355

g. Multi-Sensors shall combine photoelectric smoke sensing and heat sensing technologies. An alarm shall be determined by either smoke detection, with selectable sensitivity from 0.2 to 3.7%/ft obscuration; or heat detection, selectable as fixed temperature or fixed with selectable rate-of-rise; or based on an analysis of the combination of smoke and heat activity.

h. Programmable bases. It shall be possible to program relay and sounder bases to operate independently of their associated sensor.

i. Magnet test activation of smoke sensors shall be distinguished by its label and history log entry as being activated by a magnet.

x. Smoke Detectors:

a. Biannual sensitivity reading and logging for each smoke sensor

b. Scheduled biannual threshold adjustments to maintain proper sensitivity for each smoke sensor.

c. Threshold adjustment to any smoke sensor that has alarmed the system without the presence of particles of combustion

d. Scheduled biannual cleaning or replacement of each smoke detector or sensor within the system

e. Biannual functional testing of each smoke detector or sensor using the manufacturer's calibrated test tool

f. Written documentation of all testing, cleaning, replacing, threshold adjustment, and sensitivity reading for each smoke detector or sensor device within the system

xi. Audible Alarm Notification: By voice evacuation and tone signals on loudspeakers in areas as per approved design and drawings.

a. Automatic Voice Evacuation Sequence:

i. The audio alarm signal shall consist of an alarm tone for a maximum of five seconds followed by an automatic digital voice message. At the end of the voice message, the alarm tone shall resume. This sequence shall sound continuously until the "Alarm Silence" switch is activated.

ii. All audio operations shall be activated by the system software so that any required future changes can be facilitated by authorized personnel without any component rewiring or hardware additions.

xii. Speaker: Speaker notification appliances shall be listed to UL 1480.

a. The speaker shall operate on a standard 25VRMS or 70.7VRMS NAC using twisted/shielded wire.

b. The following taps are available: 0.25W, 0.50W, 1.0W and 2.0W. At the 1.0W tap, the speaker has minimum UL rated sound pressure level of 84dBA at 10 feet.

c. The speaker shall have a frequency response of 400 to 4000 Hz for Fire Alarm and 125 to 12 kHz for general signaling.

xiii. Manual Voice Paging

a. The system shall be configured to allow voice paging. Upon activation of any speaker manual control switch, the alarm tone shall be sounded over all speakers in that group.

b. The control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push-to-talk paging microphone over the pre-selected speakers.

c. Total building paging shall be accomplished by the means of an "All Call" switch.




356

xiv. Constant Supervision of Non-Alarm Audio Functions

a. When required, the system shall be configured to allow Non-Alarm Audio (NAA) functions such as background music or general/public address paging.

b. During NAA operation, the speaker circuit shall be electrically supervised to provide continuous monitoring of the speaker circuit.

c. During an alarm condition, supervision shall be disabled and alarm signals delivered to speakers.

xv. Firefighter's phone: Provide a supervised, two-way communication system between the Command

a. Center/main fire alarm control panel and emergency phones. The firefighter's phone system shall be capable of handling single or simultaneous conversations with all phones connected into the system.

b. The phone system circuits shall be designed to prevent static, hum or other interference for clear, intelligible two-way conversation between all phones of the system.

c. The phone system circuits shall be supervised, such that the FACP shall be able to differentiate between whether a handset has been plugged into the emergency phone jack and whether the circuit has a shorted wire.

d. A beeping busy signal shall indicate to the person attempting to use a remote phone that the signal is being received at the control unit and that the lines are intact.

e. The act of plugging a handset into an emergency phone jack or removal of any phone from its normal hook position shall cause an audible and visual indication at the control unit. Picking up of the master phone and acknowledgment of the phone circuit shall silence the tone and allow for direct two-way communications.

f. The act of unplugging handsets in use and replacement of remote phones to their cradle shall restore normal supervisory functions.

g. Provide emergency phone jacks for installation in each elevator car by the elevator contractor. Required wiring from elevator controls to each elevator car shall be furnished and installed by the elevator contractor.

h. Provide emergency phone jacks as shown on the plans. Each jack shall be mounted on a stainless steel single gang plate with the words "Fire Emergency Phone" screened on each.

xvi. Fire Suppression Monitoring:

a. Water flow: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate general alarm operations.

b. Sprinkler valve tamper switch: The activation of any valve tamper switch shall activate system supervisory operations.

c. WSO: Water flow switch and sprinkler valve tamper switch shall be capable of existing on the same initiating zone. Activation of either device shall distinctly report which device is in alarm on the initiating zone.

xvii. Power Requirements

a. The control unit shall receive AC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit.

b. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 30 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The




357

system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.

c. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control unit.

d. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be indicated at the control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously at the user interface while incoming power is present.

e. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery or a depleted battery condition, or disconnection of the battery shall be indicated at the control unit and displayed for the specific fault type.

f. The system shall support Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) Lockout feature to prevent subsequent activation of NAC after a depleted battery condition occurs in order to make use of battery reserve for front panel annunciation and control.

g. The system shall support 100% of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions

h. Loss of primary power shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP. FACP shall indicate when the system is operating on an alternate power supply.

xviii. Following modules (including but not limited to) should be provided as part of the proposed solution

a. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) b. Smoke Control System c. Fire Fighters' Telephones d. Remote Crts, Pc Annunciator And Printers e. Remote Lcd Annunciator f. Remote 854 Char Qvga Lcd Annunciator g. Network Annunciators h. Graphical Software Workstation i. Graphic Annunciator - Led Type j. Addressable Manual Pull Stations k. Addressable Photo Electric Smoke Sensors With Base l. Addressable Photo Thermal Smoke Sensors With Base m. Addressable Heat Sensors With Base n. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules o. Magnetic Door Holders p. Addressable Alarm Notification Appliances q. Standard Alarm Notification Appliances r. Network System Integrator (NSI)

2.2. Hand Held Extinguishers

Specifications of dry chemical powder (ABC stored pressure type) with hose:

IS specification IS 13849

Capacity 5 kg.

Certification mark ISI mark

Body Mild steel (IS: 513)

Valve Brass IS: 6912 FLB

'O'ring Rubber




358

Plunger Stainless steel

Spring Steel

Syphon tube Plastic

Hose Braided PVC (bursting pressure 50 kgf/cm2)

Pressure Gauge IS approved/ compliant to equivalent international norms

Handle & lever Mild steel

Nozzle Plastic

Anti corrosive treatment

Phosphating & Epoxy powder coated (inside & outside)

Paint Fire red/ Red as per IS: 5

Hydraulic pressure test

30kgf/cm2 (min)

Bursting pressure test

45kgf/cm2 (min)

Throw of jet 6 meter for 20 seconds (min).

% of discharge 85% (min) in 30 seconds

Mount Wall/ Floor mounts (as required at site)

Marking extinguisher

The following information shall be marked on the extinguisher:

• Manufacturer's name,

• Method of operation in prominent letters,

• Words "dry chemical powder, abc stored pressure type",

• Capacity, Date of refill / inspection for pressure check,

• Source, year of manufacture of the cylinder and its test Pressure

2.3. Aspirating Smoke Detection System 1. Scope of Work

This specifications cover the requirements of design, supply of materials, installation, testing and commissioning and operation & maintenance of Aspirating Smoke Detection System. The system shall include all equipment's, appliances and labour necessary to install the system, complete with high sensitive LASER-based Single/ Four Channel Smoke Detectors with aspirators connected to network of sampling pipes.

2. Codes and standards

The primary component of the Fire Detection and Alarm system to be deployed in the DC facility is the Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA). This should be essential part of the fire detection and alarm system and would be installed as per procedures laid down in the NFPA (US) standard. The entire installation shall be installed to comply one or more of the following codes and standards: NFPA Standards, US & British Standards, BS 5839 part: 1.

The system would have a display featuring LEDs and Reset/Isolate button. The entire system should be integrally configurable by a portable or PC-based system and programmable for multiple smoke threshold alarm levels. The system should have option to have intelligent remote displays and/or a high level interface with the building fire alarm system and a dedicated system management graphics




359

All the equipment shall be tested, approved, and/or listed by: FM (Factory Mutual), US

UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.), US

ULC (Underwriters Laboratories Canada), Canada

Vds (Verband der Sachversicherer e.V), Germany

3. Design Requirements

i. The System shall consist of a high sensitive LASER-based smoke detector, aspirator and filter. It shall indicate the smoke detected in each zone. It shall also be possible to set the smoke threshold level in each channel independently either through a hand held programmer or through the graphics software

ii. It shall have a display featuring LEDs and Reset/ Isolate button. The system shall be configured by a programmer that is either integral to the system or PC based.

iii. The system shall allow programming of Multiple Smoke Threshold Alarm Levels.

4. Time Delays

i. Faults including airflow, detector, power, filter block and network as well as an indication of the

urgency of the fault. Configurable relay outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault Conditions.

ii. It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection system, supported by calculations from a computer-based design modeling tool.

iii. Optional equipment may include intelligent remote displays and/or a high level interface with the building fire alarm system, or a dedicated System Management graphics package. 5. Performance Requirements

i. Provide very early smoke detection and provide multiple output levels corresponding to Alert, Action, and Fire 1 & 2. These levels shall be programmable and shall be able to set sensitivities in various ranges.

ii. Report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault output relays or via the graphics Software.

iii. Monitor for filter contamination.

iv. Incorporate a flow sensor in each pipe and provide staged airflow faults.

6. Materials and Equipment

i. Both Light Scattering and Particle Counting shall be utilized in the device as follows:

• The Laser detection chamber shall be of the mass light scattering type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types of varying size.

• A particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke reading.

ii. Monitoring contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to notify automatically when maintenance is required. The Laser Detection Chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across critical detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.

iii. The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the sensitivity from the set during commissioning. A learning tool shall be provided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm thresholds during the commissioning process.




360

7. Detector Assembly

i. The Detector, Filter, Aspirator and Relay Outputs shall be housed in a mounting box and shall be arranged in such a way that air is drawn continuously from the fire risk area by the Aspirator and a sample passed through the Dual Stage Filter and then to the detector.

ii. The detection unit shall include scanning valve mechanism to identify which sampling pipe is carrying smoke. And it shall be LASER-based

iii. The valve mechanism shall be integrated in to the detector. It shall sample each pipe individually upon detection of smoke. The detector shall also identify the level of smoke in each pipe and indicate in which pipe the alarm is detected. The system shall utilize the principle of sampling all the sectors simultaneously.

iv. The detector shall have minimum four independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds across its sensitivity range with adjustable time delays for each threshold between 0 - 60 seconds.

v. The Detector shall also incorporate facilities to transmit the following faults: Detector, Airflow, Filter, System, Zone, Network, Power

vi. Urgent and Minor faults: vii. Minor faults shall be considered as servicing or maintenance signals. viii. Urgent fault shall indicate that the unit may not be able to detect. ix. The detector shall have single / multiple pipe inlets which must contain a flow sensor. Both Minor

and Urgent flow faults shall be reported. x. The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering

particles in excess of 20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultra-fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of 0.3 microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detector's optics to prevent contamination and increase service life.

xi. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed rotary vane air pump. It shall be capable of allowing/ supporting for a single pipe run / multiple sampling pipes runs.

xii. The Assembly shall contain relays for fire alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable (latching or non-latching). Remote relays shall be offered and either configured to replicate those on the detector or programmed differently.

xiii. The Assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. The date and time of each event shall be recorded.

8. Sampling Pipe

i. The PVC sampling pipe shall be smooth bore. The PVC pipe material should be suitable for the environment in which it is installed.

ii. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight except at entry to the detector. The PVC pipe shall be identified as Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe along its entire length at regular intervals not exceeding the manufacturer's recommendation or that of local codes and standards.

iii. The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted an end cap and drilled with a hole appropriately sized to achieve the performance as specified and as calculated by the system design.

iv. The sampling pipes shall be mounted using full threaded rods, with necessary hooks for fixing them on the metal truss. No modification, welding, making holes allowed in the truss. The fixing accessories shall be chosen accordingly.

9. Sampling Holes

i. Sampling Holes should be appropriately sized, shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance allowable for conventional detectors as specified in the local codes & standards. Intervals may vary according to calculations.

ii. Each sampling point shall be identified in accordance with Codes and Standards.

iii. Consideration shall be given to the manufacturer's recommendations and standards in relation to the number of Sampling Points and the distance of the Sampling Points from the ceiling and




361

roof structure and forced ventilation systems. The sampling points at the false ceiling level shall be provided with Tees, capillary tubes & nozzles.

iv. Functional Test

v. Introduce Smoke into the Detector Assembly to provide a basic functional test.

vi. Introduce smoke to the least favorable Sampling Point in each Sampling Pipe. Transport time shall not exceed 60 seconds.

2.4. Fire Suppression System

Scope

The SI shall design, install, and configure the Fire Suppression System for the Data Centers, comprising of Server Farm, Network Farm, UPS Room, Utility Area, Electrical/IBMS Room etc. The Fire Suppression System shall have a clean agent fire suppression system cylinder, seamless cylinders, discharge hose, fire detectors and panels, and all other accessories required to provide a complete operational system, meeting applicable requirements of NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems, NFPA 70 National Electric Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, ISO standards and any other relevant standard. These standards shall be used to ensure the performance as a system with UL/FM approvals and installed in compliance with all applicable requirements of the local codes and standards. Fire suppression system should be integrated with Fire Alarm system. Cylinders installed for Fire suppression system should be outside server farm area.

1. SI shall provide Ecofriendly Gas based fire suppression system for Data Center server farm,

Electrical room, Battery room, UPS room. For all other areas, water based suppression system should be considered.

2. The minimum design standards shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001, 2004 edition or latest revisions.

3. Care shall be given to ensure early warning detection system with minimum sensitivity of 0.03% per foot obscuration in accordance with NFPA 318 and NFPA 72 to ensure a very early warning signal to allow investigation of the incipient fire with significant time before the other detectors activate the fire suppression system automatically.

4. All system components furnished and installed shall be warranted against defects in design, materials, and workmanship for the full warranty period, which is standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than operational readiness closure period.

5. Fire suppression system shall deploy gas based suppression systems with cross-zoned detector systems for Data Center Hall, Electrical room, Battery room, UPS room. These detectors shall be arranged in a manner such that they activate the suppression system in zones to cater to only the affected area.

6. Illuminated signs indicating the location of the extinguishers and exit paths shall be placed high enough to be seen over tall cabinets and racks across the room. A linear heat detection cable shall be placed along all wire pathways in the ceiling. This cable shall not directly trigger the suppression system; rather, it shall prompt the control system to sound an alarm.

7. The SI shall give a certificate stating that their Fire detection and suppression system is approved by UL/FM/VdS/LPC/CNPP for use with seamless steel cylinders, including component and system approval.

8. The designer shall study and address possible fire hazards within the protected volume at the design stage. The delivery of the Fire Detection and suppression system shall provide for the highest degree of protection and minimum extinguishing time. The design shall be strictly in accordance with NFPA standard NFPA 2001.

9. The suppression system shall provide for a high-speed release of gas-based on the concept of total flooding protection for enclosed areas.

10. Sub-floor and the ceiling void to be included in the protected volume. 11. The Fire Detection and suppression system to be supplied by the SI shall satisfy all the

requirements of the authority and shall be in accordance with the OEM’s product design criteria. 12. Upon discharge of the system, no parts shall require replacement other than gasket, lubricants,




362

and the Gas agent. Systems requiring replacement of disks, squibs, or any other parts that add to the recharge cost will not be acceptable.

13. Gas storage cylinder valve shall be provided with a safety rupture disc. An increase in internal pressure due to high temperature shall rupture the safety disc and allow the content to vent before the rupture pressure of the container is reached. The contents shall not be vented through the discharge piping and nozzles.

14. Gas containers shall be equipped with a pressure gauge to display internal pressure. 15. Manual gas discharge stations and manual abort stations, in conformance with the requirements

of NFPA 2001, shall be provided. 16. A high-sensitivity smoke-detection system shall provide an early warning of fire in its incipient

stage, analyze the risk, and set off an alarm and actions appropriate to the risk. The system shall include, but not be limited to, a display control panel, detector assembly, and properly designed sampling pipe network.

17. Multi Gas cylinder Bank should be available in case of re-fire in any area, such that after exhaustion of main gas cylinder the backup Gas filled cylinder will be active.

18. A properly designed fire control and suppression system would also contribute to a ‘green data center’. Use of green gases in the fire control and suppression system which are non-ozone depleting as well as breathable for human beings.

System Design consideration a. Cylinders

• The clean agent shall be stored in cylinders designed to hold the agent at ambient temperature. UL listed Seamless PESO approved Cylinders shall be charged to a fill density as specified in the manufacturer's listed manual.

• The cylinders shall be designed to meet the requirement of US Department of Transportation or other authorities, as specified in NFPA 2001.

• Cylinder shall be mounted according to manufacturer recommendations.

• Each agent cylinder shall have a permanent nameplate indicating the agent, pressurization level of the container and nominal agent volume.

• Initial fill & subsequent filling of Seamless cylinders shall be done at UL & PESO approved filling station.

b. Cylinders

• The Valve assembly shall be mounted directly on the cylinder and should NOT have any adaptor provision between the cylinder and Valve as per requirements of PESO. Cylinders with Adaptor between Valve assemblies shall be rejected as it is a violation of the PESO norms.

• Each cylinder valve shall have a provision for fixing a supervisory pressure switch and a safety burst disc to protect the cylinder from over pressure. The cylinder valve shall have a disabling plug to prevent accidental discharge of the valve during transportation and installation. Each valve is to be fitted with a pressure gauge for monitoring loss of pressure.

• The master cylinder valve is to be released electrically which is performed by means of a solenoid valve arrangement. Pilot cylinder actuation and pyrotechnic devices shall not be used.

c. Cylinder valve Actuators

• In a single cylinder system, the cylinder shall have a solenoid operated actuator and a manual actuator incorporating a strike knob mounted on top of the solenoid operated actuator. Multi cylinder systems shall have the same fitted on to the master cylinder and pressure operated actuators fitted on each slave cylinder. All actuators shall be original OEM make. Locally manufactured actuators shall not be used.

d) Hoses




363

• Each cylinder valve shall be provided with a plug in type flexible rubber discharge hose. Each hose shall be permanently marked with the test pressure and OEM's part number. Multi cylinder systems shall have an interconnect hose for each cylinder. All hoses shall be original OEM make and locally manufactured hoses shall not be used.

• Manifold with check valve

• Manifold shall be fabricated from ASTM A106 Schedule 80 seamless pipe and shall have integral check valves provided for each cylinder. The Manifold shall preferably be supplied by the original equipment manufacturer instead of fabricating the same at site.

e) Re-filling and maintenance

• In case of any leakage or accidental discharge of the agent, it shall be responsibility of SI to re-fill the cylinders from a valid PESO / UL approved OEM filling station in India itself. The SI should indicate the source of re-filling and the time that will be taken for re-filling and replacement.

f) Piping and fittings

• All Pipes shall be as per ASTM-A-105 / A-234 standard.

• The thickness of the piping shall be calculated in accordance with ASME B31.1 The internal pressure used for this calculation shall be as mentioned in NFPA 2001.

• Each pipe sections shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before assembly by means of swabbing, utilizing a nonflammable cleaner. The pipe network shall be clean from particulate matter and oil residue before installation of nozzles or discharge devices.

• Fittings shall have a minimum rated working pressure equal to or greater that the minimum design working pressure as specified in NFPA 2001.

g) Fire Detection and Gas Release Panel

• Fire detection shall be achieved using smoke detectors, which shall be connected to the respective fire alarm panel. The protected area shall have fire control panel and one set of detectors. In case of fire, the smoke detectors shall detect the condition at an early stage (the moment products of combustion enter the detector) and shall cause the alarm panel to activate.

• The moment the first detector gets activated the specific detector number shall be displayed and the panel buzzer shall start operating. At the end of timer one, stage 1 bells and relays shall be switched on. There shall be two sounders, both of which get switched on simultaneously to ensure that at least one shall work even if the other fails. The stage 1 bells shall be identified by the fact that they pulsate at the rate defined by timer 1.

• When the second detector also activates, the second detector number shall also be displayed on the panel and stage 2 bells shall be activated which is identified by a continuous tone. The stage 2 bells indicate that area is to be evacuated. The output from the panel to the gas release module (actuator output) shall activate at the end of timer two, which is initiated from the moment the panel enters stage 2. It is important to note that the actuator output on the panel shall be enabled only if the automatic gas release mode is selected. Even as the panel enters stage 2, it shall be possible to delay the release of the gas by pressing the hold off switch on the panel, which resets the timer to zero. The moment the switch is released the timer shall start as fresh.

• In the manual mode, even if the panel enters the stage 2, the actuator output shall not be enabled. In this case, actuator output shall be enabled if and only if the manual release switch is pressed, which shall cause the panel to enter stage 2 directly and at the end timer 2 enables the actuator output.




364

2.5. Burglar and Intrusion Alarm System

i. Burglar alarm system should be installed at the main entrances and all exits to protect the data center and other external restricted premises from unauthorized access, intrusions or break-in.

ii. The alarm system may also provide Window panes and "Door-Remains-Open" warnings to operators.

iii. The system shall be UL Listed.

iv. The Intrusion detection system shall comprise of Magnetic Contacts, PIR Motion detectors and Glass Break detectors.

v. 24 hours standby power supply to the operation of the burglar alarm is necessary to cater for power outages.

2.6. Fire Alarm system The fire alarm system proposed shall be an intelligent system with including but not limited to following features:-

1. Addressable system should be integrated with other systems like access control, public address, IBMS, HVAC, Electrical, PAC, water leak detection, fire suppression system or any other system in case of fire emergency.

2. The above & below false ceiling detectors shall be provided with response indicator. The non-false ceiling areas such as services rooms, electrical room, AHU room, Janitor, security room etc., to be provided with normal ceiling detectors.

3. The panel of fire alarm system shall be UL listed / approved. 4. Repeater panel at main entrance security room shall be provided. 5. For double height areas Beam Detectors shall be proposed at equal distances as per fire

norms mounted on side beams with reflector on opposite sides. The beam detector shall work on infrared light beam technology.

6. Care shall be taken to see that the detectors shall be placed at the return air outlets, so as to improve the detection in case of Air conditioned areas.

Codes & Standards

UL-50 Cabinets and Boxes

UL-268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL-864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL-268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications

UL-521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective

UL-228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL-464 Audible Signaling Appliances

UL-38 Manually actuated signaling Boxes

UL-346 Water-flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL-1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL-1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm

UL-1971 Visual Notification Appliances

UL-318 Clean Room Application (9th Edition)

NFPA-72

2013 Edition: General System Design Guideline

NBC,20 National Building Code of India




365

05

Local AHJ

All requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction

3. Security Systems

3.1. Access Management, Physical security and CCTV

Scope of Work The intent of this section is to establish fully operational and integrated Security Systems comprising:- i. Access Management. ii. Visitor management. iii. Pedestrian Traffic management iv. Vehicle Access with Crash Rated Bollards. v. Motorized Telescopic, Track sliding Gates The Access management System shall be seamlessly integrated with the IBMS system. The basic components of the Security Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System shall include:

1. Data Management System Complete with Specified Servers and Client hardware and Software all required database management Modules, configuration software, database storage system software and hardware, as well as complete browser based Access Control and Alarm Monitoring software package including a dynamic and interactive graphical user interface.

2. The SACAM (Integrated Security Access Control and Alarm Monitoring) system shall also support a fully integrated Visitor Management System, CCTV Subsystem Interface, High Integrity Dial-up & GSM-SMS, Intrusion Detection Functionality and other Subsystem functions as defined in the specifications and contract documents. SACAM File Server shall communicate with SACAM Client Workstations over an industry standard Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).

3. Location of SACAM File Server shall be at both the Main and redundant server, such that the redundant server shall take over the complete functionality in case of hardware schemes to achieve this functionality.

4. SACAM Client workstation shall be color monitor and keyboard for database entry, operator requested reports and alarm/event reporting. SACAM Client Stations shall be located at Security Area of Main entrance, Material Entry, as well as at the BMS Room.

5. Operator interface at the SACAM client shall be browser-driven through easy to understand, screens with point and click buttons.

6. SACAM Client Workstations shall communicate with SACAM Main and redundant Server over an industry standard Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).

7. Access control Integration with IBMS shall allow for Dynamic and Interactive Color Graphics user interface with full graphic map/floor plan import and display capability. The interfaced GUI system shall have the capability to simultaneously display floor plan maps or photos with coded interactive alarm, reader, and relay icons and indications, together with audible alarm, descriptive text and operator instructions.

8. Logging and report printers shall be provided at Security Main Gate and Gr Floor BMS Room.

9. IP Based Networked intelligent Access controllers (NICs) shall be provided by the Bidder for this project, and these capable of utilizing both central processing and true distributed processing technology.

10. In case of Main Server Failure, Redundant SACAM server shall take over the functions of making access decisions, controlling doors, monitoring alarms, activating relays and performing the functions of remote control and time activated actions.

11. This shall continue until such time as the full database of the Access NIC has been




366

correctly downloaded from the SACAM server. 12. The Access controller shall be capable of supporting up to 2 Readers directly connected

readers as well as combined reader/keypads, and or Biometric Readers, and Biometric-cum-keypad-cum Smart Readers.

13. In its maximum configuration, the individual Access controller shall be capable of storing up to 5000 cardholders, and its memory utilization shall be such that if storing database information for 2,000 cardholders, it shall also be capable of storing data of one million transactions.

14. Alternately, the Access controller may have Input and output Module cards directly sitting on the NIC Motherboard. Quantity and location of Access Controllers shall been as specified in contract documents and drawings.

15. Card Readers, Keypads and Access Control Cards shall be provided as per quantities specified in the design documents and drawings. Door contacts switches, request-to-exit devices, electric locks, local alarm horns, status indicators and other devices shall also be provided.

VISITOR MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A Visitor Management System shall be deployed for the purpose of ensuring a better visit Experience for the visitors to the Data Center Premises. The Work Flow Shall be as under:

a) The Visitors shall seek a Prior Appointment from the Data Center Employee to be visited.

b) Data Center Authorized Employee shall, through a Web Browser interface intimate the system of an impending appointment with details of the Visitor, time and date of the appointment.

c) When the Visitor visits the premises at the given time and date, the security shall already have prior intimation of the authorization of visitor, on the Visitor Management Client PC(s).

d) The Security shall check the Visitor’s Credentials, and shall print a photo pass for the visitor; and a visitor access card shall be given to the Approved Visitor

e) Simultaneously, the System shall give a pop-up on the Employee’s PC informing him of the arrival of the Employee.

f) If the Employee is not on his / her desk, then the system shall, after a preset time delay, raise a GSM based SMS to the Concerned Employee.

g) If the Employee is absent on the date of the appointment, then the Shared Database of the Access control and the Visitor Management System shall enable the Security to inform the Visitor of the Employee’s absence for the day.

h) Else, the Employee shall acknowledge the Pop-up and proceed to meet the visitor at the designated Visitor meeting rooms.

i) The System shall thus generate a database comprising information on the visitors, the Employees who meet the Visitors, time and purpose of their meeting.

j) This shall enable the Company to generate custom made reports to assess Employee productivity, or measure the overall experience of the visitors to the DC Premises.

The Visitor Management system shall also be interfaced with the Maintenance Management system from the FMS Suite which shall be deployed on the IBMS Server. The Main Components of the Visitor Management system shall comprise of:

i. Server Application loaded on the Common Application Server (Main and Redundant Servers)

ii. Database loaded on the Database Server (Main and Redundant Servers) iii. Web Application loaded on 500 User PCs. iv. Client Version Software with Security / Reception with Web Camera and Color Laser

Printer(s) for Photo-pass Printing. GUARD TOUR SYSTEM A Guard Tour System is proposed for the Data Center Premises. It shall enable the Security




367

Agencies to ensure proper surveillance of the Entire facility by virtue of monitored guard tour at predesigned times by the Security Guards. The main system Components shall be:-

1. Passive Station Cards / Tags mounted at designated locations (RFID Based) 2. Handheld Reader 3. Docking Station for reading Data and downloading from the Hand held Reader. 4. Software:

i. Server version loaded on the common Application Server ii. Database on the Database server. iii. Client Version Software loaded on the Security Counter PC.

The Works flow for this System shall be as under:

1. The Passive RFID Tags shall be weather-proof, and shall be located at strategic locations in the Data Center Premises.

2. The System shall be capable of ensuring that all these RFID Tags are necessarily read by the Hand held reader by the Security Guard, thereby ensuring a complete Tour by the guard.

3. During the initial run, the travel time from one tag to other shall be derived by a physical tour, and the same shall be fed in to the system as the benchmark parameter.

4. During the Regular course, a Security Guard is supposed to start the tour at a predesigned time in the night, and shall be required to flash the Handheld reader in front of the Tags, and shall move on to the next tag in a predefined sequence.

5. The Security Guard, after finishing the tour shall be required to “Dock” his / her handheld reader in a Docking station connected to the client PC.

6. The system shall download all information regarding the Specific Guard’s tour through this Docking station interface.

7. A report shall thus generate, and the Security Supervisor would be able to evaluate if the Guard has been Diligent in his duties in the after-office hours.

PHYSICAL SECURITY Physical Security system shall be deployed at the DC for the following areas/ Check points, 1. Main Security entrance Gate. 2. Exits Gate. 3. Security lobby. 4. DC Entrance. Following shall be deployed at every check point as mentioned above,

1. Main Security entrance Gate: i. Boom Barrier with card access. ii. Under vehicle Scanning system with ANPR iii. Full height Turnstiles with card access. iv. Portable Handheld explosives detector v. Bollards. vi. Roller sliding Motorized Gates.

2. Exit Gate: i. Boom Barrier with card access. ii. Under vehicle Scanning system with ANPR iii. Bollards.

3. Security lobby: i. Half height Turnstiles/ Tripod / Flap barrier with card access. ii. Door Frame Metal Detector. iii. Baggage Scanner iv. Mail Scanner.

4. DC Entrance. i. Half height Turnstiles/ Tripod / Flap barrier with card access.




368

PEDESTRIAN & TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SOLUTION The System shall have the following modules. 1. Vehicle Detection and Video Capture Module

a) The System should automatically detect a four wheeler approaching the installed location by means of inductive loops

b) On detection of vehicle approach, the system would activate the license plate video capture cameras.

2. License Plate Detection Module a) The System shall automatically detect the license plate in the captured video feed in

real-time. b) The system shall perform OCR (optical character recognition) of the license plate

characters (English alpha-numeric characters in standard fonts). c) The System shall store JPEG image of vehicle and license plate and enter the license

plate number into a SQL database along with date timestamp and site location details. d) System should be able to detect and recognize the English alpha numeric License plate

in all standard fonts and formats of all four wheelers including cars, HCV, LCV. Apart from printed license plates, the system should also be able to perform recognition on hand painted straight font alpha numeric number plates in standard formats found in Indian license plates.

e) The system processing should be real time i.e. the recognition of license number plates shall happen instantaneously (within less than a second delay).

f) The system should be able to process and read number plates of vehicles with speed even up to 30km/hr.

g) The system shall be robust to variation in License Plates in terms of font, size, contrast and color and should work with good accuracy.

h) The system should store video clip of the vehicle approaching and leaving the location.

3. Vehicle Log Module

a) The system shall enable easy and quick retrieval of snapshots, video and other data for post incident analysis and investigations.

b) The system should be able to generate suitable MIS reports that shall provide meaningful data to concerned authorities and facilitate optimum utilization of resources. These reports shall include: i. Report of vehicle flow at each of the installed locations for Last Day, Last Week and Last Month. ii. Report of vehicles in the detected categories at each of the installed locations for Last Day, Last Week and Last Month. iii. Report of Vehicle Status change in different Vehicle Categories.

c) The system shall have Search option to tune the reports based on license plate number, date and time, site location as per the need of the authorities.

d) The system shall have option to save custom reports for subsequent use. e) The system shall have option to export report being viewed to common format for use

outside of the ANPRS or exporting into other systems. f) The system should provide advanced and smart searching facility of License Plates from

the database. There should be an option of searching number plates almost matching with the specific number entered (up to 1 and 2 character distance).

PERIMETER INTEGRATED SECURITY SOLUTION

The non-lethal security Perimeter Electric Fence shall be specifically designed and implemented for the purpose of deterrence, detection and movement control of people. Perimeter Integrated Security system should operate as a psychological and physical barrier, and as a zoned, automatic, supervised, detection system. The perimeter Electric Fence security system should function as an active deterrent (delivering a pre-specified safe but painful electric pulse), a physical barrier (providing technology designed to delay an attack attempt), and a reliable detection system. The system should alert security personnel of an attempted intrusion and its location around the




369

perimeter of the site. a) The perimeter security fence System shall be a high voltage system which would deter,

detect and deny physical intrusion by giving the intruder a short, sharp, painful but safe shock.

b) The system shall check the fence around 50 times a minute and the instant the electric wires are cut or tampered a built-in alarm should immediately alert the monitoring personnel and the security authorities, along with the zone of attempted break-in.

c) Each zone shall has its own circuit, which monitors attack or sabotage of the fencing system. The energizer should comply with all national and international standards of safety

Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV) IP BASED CCTV: IP based Closed Circuit Surveillance system is proposed to monitor the activities at critical areas. This is a true network system where the video is continuously transported over an IP Network, using network cameras. CCTV system is designed for 24x7 operations on site and the cameras will record via a suitable network video recording and retrieval system that provides hard disk storage for the required period. As a basic requirement 30 days of live and 90 days of cloud enabled backup storage is considered in the design. The system will incorporate full redundancy to prevent any data loss. Images will be captured and stored in time lapse mode but event recorders will be provided to record alarm events and all images will be switched to operator control monitors at higher capture rates. The system components are:

• IP based POE Cameras (Indoor & Outdoor)

• Network attached storage (Considering 30 days’ storage capacity as per specification)

• Visual Monitoring Software (VMS)

• LCD Display

• CCTV Workstation (Integrated with IBMS) CCTV SYSTEM LOCATIONS Camera positioned at important locations greatly help the security of the building. CCTV Cameras are positioned for continuous monitoring and recording. Following are including but not limited location where CCTV cameras are proposed;

• Server Rooms Entry & emergency exit – Day/Night IP based Camera

• Electrical Room Entry locations - Day/Night IP based Camera

• Networking Room, Telecommunication Room, office areas, BMS Room - Day/Night IP based Camera

• Building Entry and Exit & parking area – PTZ Infrared IP based Camera

• Lift Lobbies & Corridors - Day/Night IP based Camera.




370

• Perimeter Surveillance – PTZ Infrared IP based cameras

• Cameras firmware shall be compatible with application version.

3.2. Water Leak Detection System

(i) Scope

The scope of work under this head shall include design, supply, and installation, Commissioning, operation and Maintenance of Water Leak Detection System. The work under this system shall consist of design, supply, installation, testing, training & operation and Maintenance of all materials, equipment's and appliances and labor necessary to commission this system.

(ii) Design considerations

a) Furnish a complete leak detection system including electronic alarm modules, water sensing cable, graphic display map, and auxiliary equipment. The system shall be capable of automatically detecting the presence of water at any point along the continuous length of sensing cable. The system shall sound an alarm and locate, with a digital display, the point of liquid contact across connected sensing cable length as per design and drawing.

b) The system shall be UL listed, FM approved.

3.3. Rodent Repellent

i. OBJECTIVE:

The objective is to protect the entire premises viz., all the voids against rodents. The purpose is to keep the rodents away from the floor by generating very high frequency sound waves (above 20 Khz) which are not legible to human ear but irritates rodents. The objective is to protect all the cables below floor, above ceiling & room void from damage caused by rodents. In addition to this system, periodic pest control should be done once in 3 months as a contingency measure to effectively fight the pest menace.

ii. SCOPE:

The system proposed is to protect all the equipment, areas with relevant type of high frequency sound producing device called satellites or transducers.

Once powered up these transducers very high frequency variable sound waves ( above 20 Khz) continuously which irritate the rodents and are forced to evacuate the place.

The devices can be tested periodically by means of a test switch provided on the Main console.

iii. APPLICABLE STANDARD:

The OEM shall have an IDEMI and CFTRI certification for its products.

iv. SATELLITES :

The satellites or Transducers shall be circular ceiling mounted low profile units that produce high decibel sound waves at very high frequency not less than 20 Khz. These satellites shall cover Room void application, for ceiling Voids & floor void applications. These shall be powered thru Main Controller multiple satellites in parallel (i.e. no looping of satellites)

v. CONTROLLER :

The controller is installed in the control / IBMS room and the transducers in the problematic areas i.e. above and below false ceiling and below false flooring.

a) Features:




371

ii. LCD display with on-board controls for changing the following parameters. iii. Wave Speed: Is an indicator for the number of frequency sweeps per minute, should be as

per system design. iv. Wave Density: Is an indicator for the number of divisions within a frequency band, should be

as per system design. v. Frequency Band Time: Is an indicator of the time for which the controller would operate in a

pre-programmed frequency band. There are 3 bands available: Band A, Band B, and Band C. This parameter can have maximum value of 10 minutes and a minimum value of 1 minute per band. Depending upon the time frame set for each band, the controller will switch the bands automatically.

vi. Machine/Controller ID: Is an indicator of the machine/controller identification number. It can have any value within the range of 1 to 255.

vii. Password Protection: Every controller is password protected. To change the parameters mentioned above you have to key in the password. The password can be changed if required.

viii. Frequency Testing: This feature will enable the user to test and verify the frequency that is being transmitted from the controller to the transducer. This feature would be particularly useful during systems audit.

ix. Transducer Testing: All the transducers can be tested in an audible range one at a time by using this feature.

x. Provision for restoring all the parameters to the factory default setting a. Inbuilt RS/EIA-485 transmission.

i. Provision of a termination switch so that the controller data can be transferred to the computer for viewing.

ii. Daisy chain protocol for interfacing controllers (nodes)

iii. Independent Driver for each transducer.

iv. Independent test facility for each transducer. v. Tr

ansducer should cover entire area above false ceiling, below false ceiling vi. Frequency band of > 20 KHz and <60 KHz is pre tuned for 100 different frequencies.

vii. UL and CE approved transformers for power supply.

(vi) GUI Software Compatibility having the following Features:

a) Facility to configure controller parameters for all controllers in one go (broadcast) or for an individual controller.

b) Facility to schedule / generate a consolidated Health Status Report of all the controllers and / or an individual controller. This is possible either with the help of the inbuilt scheduler (Daily, Weekly, Fortnightly and Monthly Schedules) and/or in real time.

c) Individual folders for individual Controller reports with the folder name same as the machine id. This folder will contain the Report in text format and the PCB image of the corresponding controller. One single folder for the consolidated report. This folder will contain only the report in text report and shall depict the status of all controllers.

d) PCB snapshot of the controller for faulty transducer drivers.

e) Configurable control of the image quality of the PCB snapshot, thereby enabling the customer to manage the computer Memory effectively.

f) Admin Level password for report generation and scheduling.

g) Service Level password for parameter configuration of all / individual controllers.

h) Test facility to check if the signal is being transmitted to the transducer from the drivers on the PCB.

i) Ping facility to check if all the controllers installed at the customer site are in the daisy chain network. If not then the Corresponding controller will have an 'Offline' status else it will have an 'Online' status.

j) Configurable ping acknowledgement / return time.




372

k) Test Facility to test all controllers in a sequential mode or in an individual mode. I) Online servicing/maintenance via web meetings.

l) RS/ EIA 485 to RS/EIA 232C converter to transfer the controller data to the serial port of your computer.

3.4. Integrated Building Management System (IBMS)

Scope:

The Integrated Building Management System (IBMS) is another very important component in the DC facility.

1. IBMS (Integrated Building Management System) should include conceptualization and implementation of suitable (infrastructure management) tool for the entire data modules.

2. The IBMS would be based on GUI software which shall be high‐performance building automation system for monitoring and managing building’s devices and systems including but not limited to HVAC, lighting, hydraulics, water, electrical equipment and solar power generating system.

3. An application of Buildings Integrator platform would utilize open system standards to seamlessly integrate every control and information system within the facility/enterprise.

4. SI has to ensure that proposed IBMS solution is Disaster recovery ready, deployable in cloud environment and should have inbuilt capability of integration with all systems of Data Center. This system should have inbuilt role based access control mechanism which shall be regularly maintained and updated.

5. Buildings Integrator platform shall have single‐window control over all building operations and all the relevant data which need to maximize building performance. In addition, Building Manager would capture current and historical data for advanced analysis and reporting and would install, customize, and maintain Building Manager to all requirements to create the ideal solution for a wide range of operations.

6. MIS report of all the consumables should be generated through the IBMS.

7. The proposed system shall perform all the functions, apart from those that are listed above, all such other tasks, as may be found necessary to fulfil the operational requirements and the intent whether specified or not. The IBMS system shall be make use of Intranet / Internet infrastructure in conjunction with Active Server Technology. It shall be implemented as a client-server architecture and shall use standard browser technologies.

8. A web server core shall be used to provide all forms and applications.

9. It shall be possible to connect this server to an internet node (such as DSL router)and allow the operation of the BMS system through the internet at any time and at any location without any software extension.

10. The proposed system shall be based on Distributed Networkable Intelligent system. The system shall be microprocessor based Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) shall interface with relays, sensors, actuators and safety & utility systems

11. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC Controller shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O and data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

12. DDC Controllers shall be able to access any data from any other DDC Controller or combination of controllers on the network without dependence upon a central processing




373

device. DDC Controllers shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations without dependence upon a central processing device.

13. Standard Protocols:

The BMS system shall utilize industry standard protocols like BACnet, LON, KNX, OPC, DALI, M-Bus and thereby support various third party systems using standard hardware and software to link various functional nodes into a single integrated system.

The following protocols shall be supported:

i. BACnet

ii. OPC

iii. XML

iv. Modbus

v. Profibus

vi. CAN

vii. LON

viii. KNX

ix. DALI

x. LON Works

xi. M-Bus

14. The BMS operator station shall allow the user to monitor and control the entire system with

various user definable access levels.

15. Database

i. The database shall be scalable. The data sources of the web server can be from the local nodes or from different computers on the network and via DSL/ ADSL/ ISDN. Archiving should be capable of being done based on time, data quantity or manually. The database should contain alarm and event data from the process level, event data from the controller level and management level, trends, user log data.

ii. It should be possible to use logical query to retrieve the data systematically and quickly.

16. Scheduling: Time base & Event based

17. Online configuration

a. The DDC's shall support remote configuration and operation. All configuration shall be permissible while the system is on-line without interruption to monitoring and control on other channels.

b. Systems that require to go off line for programming/ configuration shall not be acceptable. c. The configuration tool must be web based and be easily deployable. It should contain all

modules necessary for configuring the controller.

18. Control Level

a. DDC Controllers shall be at least a 32 Bit Microprocessor. They shall also be multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware within a protective enclosure for ease of maintenance. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.

b. The system shall be both compact , i.e. DDC's with on board inputs and modular with. capability of adding additional Input/ Output modules as required. Overall, the system shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC Controllers, Application Specific Controllers and operator devices. The DDC's shall have be onboard Ethernet interface. The controllers should also have an option of connecting to




374

other controllers through a high speed network/ bus. They should be available with interfaces to 3rd party equipment using standard protocols like BACnet, Modbus, M-Bus, KNX. The DDC controller shall have an Integral Display which should display all parameters and allow overriding of outputs.

19. Sensor Level

i. The sensors required for the solution shall be provided by the DCDA ii. All analogues sensors required (Temperature, Humidity, Temperature & Humidity, Pressure,

Flow) iii. All digital sensors (air flow switch, pressure switch, flow switch) should be available with

potential free contact.

20. Alarms Program

i. Alarms need be displayed based on time, priority or system type and should be visual/ audio based.

ii. This shall provide automatic VDU display and printout of any alarm. iii. The alarms should be capable of being displayed on remote devices like PDA's, and remote

PC's through email.

21. Data Logging & Trending Program It should be possible to document chronologically and monitor real time data (online) and past process data (offline). All monitored data shall be recorded and shall be available in graphical format for viewing on screen or printing.

22. The integration of operations including Access Control, Security, Surveillance, Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning, Energy Management and Life Safety systems, would do the following: i. Integration with a diverse range of devices, enterprise systems, Internet and intranet

sources allowing intelligent management of key facility information ii. Would use latest industry‐standard hardware and latest Windows Standard Edition

operations systems iii. Would support the leading open standards like BACnet or Modbus iv. Should be UL Listed Standards UL864 (Fire), UL2017 (Signaling Systems), UL916 (Energy

Management Systems), UL1017, UL1076 (Security), UL1610 (Central Station) and UL 294 (Access Control)

v. Would have easy‐to‐use Web‐based user interface reduces operator training costs and puts the user in control of every situation

vi. Would be suitable for use in a restricted environment requiring conformance to 21CFR Part 11 for electronic records and electronic signatures

vii. Would be designed and developed to International Standards ISO 9001 for quality Enterprise Buildings Integrator platform would also allow surveillance of the DC facility using cameras connected directly to the LAN, enabling flexible event based recording and viewing.

viii. The IBMS shall have distributed system architecture with adoption of open technologies and supporting wide variety of open systems.

ix. There shall have many sensors and operator interfaces for creating and managing displays, executing and acknowledging alarms, initiating printing, configuring system parameters, recording and playing back videos etc.

x. Fire Alarm & Detection System xi. Aspiration system - VESDA xii. Gas based fire suppression system for Data Center Hall, Electrical room, Battery room,

UPS room. For all other areas, water based suppression system should be considered. xiii. Access Control System xiv. CCTV, WLD, Public Address, Rodent Repellent System




375

xv. Security Gadgets – Door frame metal detectors, baggage scanners, UVSS, Boom barriers, bollards, flap gate etc.

xvi. Multiple ways of Incident recording, e.g. voice and text etc. xvii. The IBMS shall perform the following important functions:

a. Building Management & Control b. Serve as operator Man — Machine interface c. Data Collection & Historisation d. Alarm Event & Management e. Trending f. Reports & MIS Generation g. Maintenance & Complaint Management h. Integration of several sub systems and related protocols.

4. Abbreviations

CU Stands for Copper

GI Stands for Galvanized Iron (Mild Steel) V Stands for Volts

KV Stands for Kilo Volts

HV Stands for High Voltage (3.3 KV and above)

MV Stands for Medium Voltage (110 V, 230 V, 415 V , 600 V, and1 10 V)

LV Stands for Low Voltage (32 V &Below)

LT Stands for Low Tension

VCB Stands for Vacuum Circuit Breaker

PVC Stands for Polyvinyl Chloride

AMP Stands for Amperes

KWH stands for Kilowatt Hours

KW Stands for Kilo Watts

BIS Stands for Bureau of Indian Standards

IS Stands for Indian Standards

IEE Stands for Institution of Electrical Engineers-London

NEC Stands for National Electrical Code

ACB Stands for Air Circuit Breaker

RCCB Stands for Residual Current Circuit Breaker

RCBO Stands for Residual Current Breaker with Over Lo ad Protection

MCCB Stands for Moulded Case Circuit Breaker SP Stands for Single P ole

DP Stands for Double Pole

TP Stands for Triple Pole

TPN Stands for Triple Pole and Neutral

SDB Stands for Sub Distribution Board

FDB Stands for Final Distribution Board

MCC Stands for Motor Control Center

MDB Stands for Main Distribution Board

MCB Stands for Miniature Circuit Breaker

ASHRAE

stands for the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

UL Underwriters Laboratories

VESDA Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus




376

Annexure-Q9: Operation and Maintenance

1. Scope of Work:

1.1. Under the scope of Operation & Maintenance Services successful bidder shall undertake

monitoring, administration, management and maintenance of the entire Data Center infrastructure (Civil, MEP and other Non-IT infrastructure) supplied, installed and commissioned by the successful bidder.

1.2. The successful bidder shall ensure that all the devices that will be installed in the Data Center

as part of the physical infrastructure should be Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) enabled and shall be centrally monitored and managed on a 24x7 basis.

1.3. Industry leading infrastructure management solution should be deployed to facilitate monitoring

and management of the Data Center Infrastructure on one integrated console.

1.4. The successful bidder will monitor the performance of the data center components including usage, availability and analyze the future requirements, if any. In case the requirement exceeds the scalability requirements mentioned, the successful bidder has to upgrade the current infrastructure in order to meet the increase in demand. The successful bidder shall note that no additional implementation, operation and maintenance charge will be provided for this up gradation of the data center common infrastructure.

1.5. The successful bidder should undertake proactive monitoring of the entire basic infrastructure

and diagnose problems that could arise as part of any component installed at the data center. The Successful bidder should maintain a log of all such diagnosis and notify SBI on a monthly basis in the form of a report.

1.6. All faults that have been identified would need to be isolated and rectified appropriately. The

report mentioned above would include resolution measures undertaken by the Successful bidder and results produced accordingly.

1.7. Proactive and reactive maintenance, repair and replacement of defective components (Non-IT/

Hardware and Software) installed at the Data Center through this RFP. The cost for repair and replacement shall be borne by the SI.

1.8. Adequate onsite and offsite spare parts and spare component must be maintained by the

successful bidder to ensure that the uptime commitment as per SLA is met. To provide this service it is important for the selected bidder to have back to back arrangement with the OEMs. The selected bidder would be required to provide a copy of the service level agreement signed with the respective OEMs.

1.9. Component that is reported to be down on a given date should be either fully repaired or

replaced by temporary substitute (of equivalent configuration) within the time frame indicated in the Service Level Agreement (SLA). In case the selected bidder fails to meet the above standards of maintenance, there will be a penalty as specified in the SLA.




377

1.10. The selected bidder shall also maintain records of all maintenance of the system and shall maintain a logbook on-site that may be inspected by SBI at any time. All Reports related to Operation and Maintenance needs to be submitted to SBI on monthly basis.

1.11. Physical Security of the Data Center Infrastructure will be the responsibility of the successful bidder. 1.12. The Successful bidder shall provide software (OS and applications) updates and upgrades for the

components supported by them in the data center for a period of five years from date of Final Acceptance Test. This will include the patch upgrade or any type of upgrade for, management software, operating systems, network management software, security software, anti-virus software or any other software. Software updates and upgrades will be part of the supplies, at no additional costs to SBI.

1.13. For ensuring desired uptime of the data center, required Diesel for running DG Set shall be provided

by the bidder as much required, regardless of the number of hours. The recurring diesel cost and recurring electricity cost shall be reimbursed by the SBI to the successful bidder on actual. For this the successful bidder shall ensure that adequate meters shall be installed at the raw power and alternate power through DG separately.

1.14. Incidents of failure of any service/equipment must be recorded and reported to SBI immediately.

Report with Root Cause Analysis (RCA) post resolving the query must be submitted immediately.




378

Annexure-Q10: Manpower Requirement

Sr.No Role Min. Qualification, Relevant Experience & Certifications

Manpower Required (Qty)

1 2 3 4

1 Project Manager

B.E. / B.Tech. in Electrical / Mechanical + 8 Years experience in Electrical, AC, Lift, DG Set & Fire, IBMS & IT security. Prince2/PMP certified

SI to Specify

2 Electrical Engineer

B.E. / B.Tech. in Electrical + 5 years experience in relevant field like Electrical, AC, Lift, Fire, HT Work, Water Supply & other Building Section

SI to Specify

3 Mechanical Engineer

B.E. / B.Tech. in Mechanical + 5 years experience in relevant field like HVAC/IBMS

SI to Specify

4 Civil Engineer B.E / Diploma in Civil + 5 years experience in relevant field

SI to Specify

5 IBMS Supervisor

PGDCA + Diploma in Electrical + 5 years relevant experience of Data center in Air- conditioning, Fire, Electrical, IBMS, DG Sets, etc.

SI to Specify

6 Helpdesk MCA / B.E. / B.Tech. + 3 years relevant experience.

SI to Specify

7 Precision A.C. Technician

ITI in HVAC + 3 years experience in AC And Refrigeration and Equivalent.

SI to Specify




379

8 Comfort A.C. Technician

ITI in HVAC + 3 years experience in AC And Refrigeration and Equivalent.

SI to Specify

9 Fire men Diploma in relevant field + 3 years experience in Fire maintenance or Equivalent.

SI to Specify

10 IBMS Operator Diploma in IT / CS or Equivalent + 3 years experience.

SI to Specify

11

Water Supply including STP & WTP

Diploma / ITI in relevant field + 3 years experience in Plumbing or Equivalent.

SI to Specify

12 DG Set Operator

ITI in relevant field + 3 years experience in Automobile or Electrical Engineering or Equivalent.

SI to Specify

13 Electricians

ITI in Electrical + 3 years experience in Electrical Engineering having Experience in HT/LT Panels, Transforms

SI to Specify

14 Lift Operator ITI in Electrical / Mechanical Engineering or Equivalent + 2 years experience.

SI to Specify

15

Civil Mason including Joinery and other work

2 years experience in civil Work SI to Specify

16

Helpers(House keeping, Gardeners)

Class 8th Passed or Equivalent. Helper should be able to Read, write and understand English Language.

SI to Specify

17 Security Staff

Class 10th Passed or Equivalent. Security staff should be able to Read, write and understand English Language.

SI to Specify

TOTAL




380

Annexure-Q11: Finishing Schedule

SI to specify and provide Finishing schedule in following format for Civil related Activities:

Sr.no Description Area (Sq.mts)

Wall Finish Floor Finish False Ceiling

1 Atrium SI to specify as per Tier IV design

NA NA A combination of Gypsum and Fiber paneled ceiling

2 Back Side Stair SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Premium Emulsion Finish

Kota Stone No False Ceiling

3 Battery Room SI to specify as per Tier IV design


Anti static flooring without copper strips

No False Ceiling

4 BMS Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Wooden Paneling + Wooden Partition

Vitrified Tiles 600 x 600 with spacer

A combination of Gypsum and Fiber paneled ceiling

5 Cabin SI to specify as per Tier IV design




6 Compactors SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Premium Emulsion Finish + Wooden Partition

Vitrified Tiles 600 x600 with spacer


7 DG SYNC PANL ROOMS

SI to specify as per Tier IV design


Anti static flooring

No False Ceiling

8 Electrical Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design



No False

9 Electrical/HUB Room




Gypsum Board




381



10 Freight Lift SI to specify as per Tier IV design

SS scratch resistant

Granite Modular with Lights

11 Front of Toilets SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Ceramic tiles + Glass mosaic tiles + Premium Emulsion

Granite Gypsum Board

12 Gents Locker Room



Vitrified Tiles 600 x 600 with pacer

Gypsum Board

13 Gents Toilet SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Ceramic tiles + Glass mosaic tiles

Ceramic anti skid tiles

Calcium Silicate Board

14 Hydraulic loading & Unloading bay



Granite No False Ceiling

15 Indoor Terrace Area


Wooden Paneling

Wooden Floor A combination of Gypsum and Fiber paneled ceiling

16 IT Store Room SI to specify as per Tier IV design


False Floor A combination of Gypsum and Metal ceiling

17 Ladies Locker Room




Gypsum Board

18 Lift Lobby SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Italian Marble Wall Paneling

Imported Granite Floor


19 Locker Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design


Kota Stone Gypsum Board

20 Lounge SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Wooden Paneling

Granite A combination of Gypsum and Fiber paneled ceiling




382



21 MDA Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design



22 Media Store Room SI to specify as per Tier IV design



23 Meeting Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Wooden Paneling + Wooden Partition + Fabric Paneling

Wooden Floor A combination of Gypsum and Fabric paneled ceiling

24 Network Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design



25 NOEVC Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design



26 O & M Room SI to specify as per Tier IV design




27 Office SI to specify as per Tier IV design



A combination of Gypsum and Metal ceiling

28 PAC Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design



29 Panel Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design



No False Ceiling

30 Pantry SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Premium Emulsion Finish + Glazed wall tiles

Kota Stone Calcium Silicate Board




383



31 Passenger Lift SI to specify as per Tier IV design

SS scratch resistant

Granite Modular with Lights

32 Reception \ Waiting


Italian Marble Wall Paneling



33 Rest Room SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Wooden Paneling

Wooden Floor Gypsum Board

34 Server Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design


False Floor No False Ceiling

35 Staging Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design



36 Stair SI to specify as per Tier IV design



No False Ceiling

37 NOC Rooms for minimum 50 Persons




A combination of Gypsum and Fabric paneled ceiling

38 Storage Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design


Kota Stone Gypsum Board

39 TFA Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design


Kota Stone No False ceiling

40 Conference Hall SI to specify as per Tier IV design




41 Training Room (minimum 25 seats)








384



42 TRFO Area SI to specify as per Tier IV design



No False Ceiling

43 UPS Rooms SI to specify as per Tier IV design



No False Ceiling

44 Vendor Rack Room




45 Video Conference SI to specify as per Tier IV design


Wooden Floor A combination of Gypsum and Fabric paneled ceiling

46 Waiting Area SI to specify as per Tier IV design

Wooden Partition + Italian Marble Paneling



47 Wash Room SI to specify as per Tier IV design


Ceramic anti skid tiles 300 x 300

Calcium Silicate Board

48 Water Cooler SI to specify as per Tier IV design


Granite Gypsum Board

49 Roads SI to specify as per Tier IV design

NA

As per applicable standards and codes

No False Ceiling

50 Pavements SI to specify as per Tier IV design

NA


No False Ceiling

51 Campus Area SI to specify as per Tier IV design

NA


No False Ceiling




385

Annexure-Q12: Warranty

1.1. The bidder must supply all items with comprehensive on-site OEM warranty valid for 1 year

after the goods, or any portion thereof as the case may be, have been delivered to, installed and accepted at the final destination(s). However, if delay of installation is more than a month’s time due to the reasons ascribed to the bidder, the warranty shall start from the date of completion of the job.

1.2. At the time of goods delivery, the selected bidder shall submit a certificate/ undertaking from all the respective OEMs mentioning the fact that the goods supplied are covered under comprehensive warranty & support for the prescribed period.

1.3. SBI shall give a written notice to the selected bidder stating the nature of any defect together with all available evidence thereof, promptly following the discovery thereof. SBI shall afford all reasonable opportunity for the selected bidder to inspect such defects. Upon receipt of such notice, the selected bidder shall expeditiously cause to repair the defective goods or parts thereof or replace the defective goods or parts thereof with brand new genuine/ authentic ones having similar or higher specifications from the respective OEM. Any goods repaired or replaced by the selected bidder shall be delivered at the respective location without any additional costs to the SBI.

1.4. If having been notified, the selected bidder fails to remedy the defect within the period specified, the SBI may proceed to take within a reasonable period such remedial action as may be necessary, in addition to other recourses available in terms and conditions of the contract and bidding document.

1.5. During the warranty period, the bidder shall also be responsible to ensure adequate and timely availability of spare parts needed for repairing the supplied goods.




386

Annexure-Q13: Maintenance Contract

1. The SI shall observe any defect /malfunctioning in Equipment / Hardware / Software as a part of

FMS services and promptly generate a ticket in Help desk tool for the same for rectification of the defect / malfunction. The SI shall record nature of the defect together with all available evidence thereof, promptly following the discovery thereof. Upon generating of such ticket, the selected bidder shall expeditiously cause to repair the defective goods or parts thereof or replace the defective goods or parts thereof with brand new genuine / authentic ones / equipment / parts / software / patches / drivers having similar or higher specifications from the respective OEM. Any goods repaired or replaced / software by the selected bidder shall be delivered at the respective location without any additional costs to SBI.

2. If having been notified i.e. generation of ticket, the selected bidder fails to remedy the defect within the period specified, SBI may proceed to take remedial action as may be necessary and the cost of the same will be deducted from due payment of selected bidder.

3. During the maintenance and support contract period, the bidder shall be responsible to ensure adequate and timely availability of spare parts needed for repairing the equipment / parts. The bidder has to see the end of support / end of sale / end of service dates being declared by respective OEM’s time to time and make necessary arrangements of spares for catering maintenance needs of equipment / parts during entire contract period. In case, at the time of resolution of any compliant, the equipment(s) / part(s) is found non-serviceable during contract period, the selected SI shall be responsible for replacing the non-serviceable equipment / part with same / higher configuration equipment/part of the same make at no extra cost to SBI. 1.1. FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS

1.1.1. Post commissioning and inspection of the entire installation, and prior to issue of the

Completion Certificate, the SI shall carry out final acceptance tests in accordance with a program to be agreed with the SBI authorized Engineer/Site-In charge/3rd party agency appointed by SBI.

1.1.2. Should the results of the acceptance tests show that plant, systems and/or equipment fail

to perform to the efficiencies or other performance as per the Specification mentioned in scope, the SI shall adjust, modify and if necessary replace the equipment in order that the required performance is obtained.

1.1.3. Where acceptance tests are required by the relevant Authorities having jurisdiction,

these tests shall be carried out by the SI prior to the issue of Completion Certificate to the acceptance of the Authorities.

1.2. REJECTION

1.2.1. Any Equipment/Product of the data center which fails to comply with the requirements

specified at any stage of Installation, Test and Commissioning at site may be rejected by the SBI either in whole or in part as SBI.




387

1.3. WARRANTY AND HANDOVER

1.3.1. The SI shall warrant that all plant, materials and equipment supplied and all workmanship

performed by him to be free from defects of whatsoever nature before handover to the Owner.

1.4. HANDING OVER OF DOCUMENTS

1.4.1. All testing and commissioning and handover shall be done by the SI to the entire

satisfaction of the SBI.

1.4.2. The SI shall also hand over all maintenance and operation manuals, all certificates and all other documentation as per the terms of the contract with SBI.




388

Annexure-Q14: Indicative Innovation criteria

Sr. No.

Innovation Considerations

1 An energy efficient, sustainable design, usage of progressive free air-cooling technology that incorporates recycled material and harvested rainwater

2 Facility should be design to achieve PUV (Power Usage efficiency) of less than 1.5 An energy-efficiency dashboard, to monitor mechanical and electrical systems (up to rack level) energy efficiency

3 Pune being in Seismic Zone 3, consideration for design including DC building should be for Zone 4

4

Innovative design for high capacity chiller water storage tank to enable the facility to operate without using a chiller/cooling plant in case of chiller outages. Chillers to be designed in such a way that they can operate in economizer mode use depending on the outside temperature

5

DC design should be state of the art, smart rack space management consisting of low, medium and high power density with efficient power management. Closed- Coupled cooling solution design for high density configurations, elimination of hotspots and improving energy efficiency should be considered in Data Center design

6 Design to consider Performance Optimized Data Center (POD) design techniques for efficient space, power & cooling management

7 Innovative landscaping design considering native planting so that site usage less water than conventionally designed grounds

8 DC design considering Software Defined Networking (SDN) be part of future implementation

9 Modular and purpose build infrastructure design fulfilling the need of when capacity rise & where capacity needed

10 Smart design for Hot aisle/cold aisle layouts

The above criteria are indicative and Bidder may come up with better design, or energy and cost efficient innovations.




389

Annexure-Q15: Data Center Tier –IV Gold certification

1.1. It is SBI’s requirement that the completed Data Center Facility to be constructed under this

contract shall be Uptime Institute Tier IV Gold Certified. The successful Bidder shall obtain all Uptime certifications up to and including Gold Tier Certification of Operational sustainability for all Phases of the Development and shall maintain them for the Contract period. Re-certifying as necessary either due to changes in installed capacity or expiry of certification.

1.2. The Facility Design shall adhere to Uptime Institute’s Tier IV Fault Tolerant Criteria as detailed

in the uptime Institute’s Tier Standard: Topology (available at http://uptimeinstitute.com/tierpublication) and effective as of date of the contract Award. No substitute will be accepted for uptime Institute certification(s) and experience with Uptime Institute certifications, as well as on-staff Accredited Tier Designers, will be a differentiating factor in evaluating respondents.

1.3. The successful bidder shall obtain:

a. Uptime Institute Tier Certification IV of Design Documents for the complete Data Center

Facility Design. b. Uptime Institute Tier Certification IV of constructed Facility for all areas of the Data Center

Facility to be constructed under this contract c. Uptime Institute Gold Certification of operational sustainability for all areas of the Data

Center to be constructed under this contract. d. The necessary Certifications will be obtained on behalf of SBI and passed to SBI on its

Award e. All certifications shall be kept current for the contract period f. The successful Bidder shall be responsible for all costs associated with obtaining and

maintaining these Certifications. g. Notwithstanding any technical or commercial clause in this tender, it is the duty of the

bidder to ensure the certification at no extra cost.

http://uptimeinstitute.com/tierpublication




390

Annexure-R: Penalties & SLA Terms

1. Overview

1. Please find below the Service Level Agreement to be built for the Bank on Design, Build, Supply,

Installation, Testing, Commissioning, Maintenance and Transfer model at Pune, Hinjewadi which includes hardware (IT and Non-IT) and related services, duly edited as per specific requirement of RFP.

2. The SI warrants that the equipment supplied under the Contract are new, unused, of the most recent or current model and they incorporate all recent improvements in design and / or features. The SI further warrants that all the equipment supplied under this Contract shall have no defect, arising from design or from any act of omission of the SI that may develop under normal use of the supplied Equipment/products in the conditions prevailing in India.

3. Warranty for all equipment Components: Onsite comprehensive warranty for all the equipment components including free replacement of spares, parts, kits as and when necessary will be 60 months from date of installation or 63 months from date of delivery, whichever is earlier.

4. Warranty for the System Software/off-the-shelf Software will be provided to the Bank as per the general conditions of sale of such software.

5. The SI shall in addition comply with the performance guarantees specified under the Contract. If, for reasons attributable to the SI, these guarantees are not attained in whole or in part, the SI shall make such changes, modifications and / or additions to the Equipment/Products or any part thereof as may be necessary in order to attain the contractual guarantees specified in the Contract at its own cost and expense and to carry out further performance tests.

6. On-site comprehensive warranty: The warranty would be on-site and comprehensive in nature and back to back support from the OEM. The SI will warrant all the equipment (IT and Non-IT) against defects arising out of faulty design, materials and media workmanship etc. for a period of sixty (60) months from the date of acceptance of the equipment. The SI will provide support for all equipment during the warranty period. The SI shall repair or replace worn out or defective parts including all plastic parts of the equipment at his own cost including the cost of transport.

7. During the term of the contract, the SI will maintain the equipment in perfect working order and condition and for this purpose will provide the following repairs and maintenance services:

a) Free maintenance services during the period of warranty. Professionally qualified personnel who have expertise in the hardware and system software supplied by the SI will provide these services.

b) The Bidder shall rectify any defects, faults and failures in the equipment and shall repair/replace worn out or defective parts of the equipment within 24 hours for critical works and 48 hours for non-critical works. In case any defects, faults and failures in the equipment could not be repaired or rectified during the said period, the engineers of the SI are required to accomplish their duties beyond the said schedules in case of any situation if it warrants. In cases where unserviceable parts of the equipment need replacement, the SI shall replace such parts, at no extra cost to the BANK, with brand new parts or those equivalent to new parts in performance. For this purpose the SI shall keep sufficient stock of spares at Bank’s premises and at the premises of The SI.

c) The SI shall ensure that the full configuration of Data Center is available to the BANK in proper working condition with an uptime of 99.995% of the time on a 365 x 24 x7 basis. Power and cooling availability for IT Load with an uptime of 99.999% on a 365x24x7 basis.

d) The SI shall ensure that the meantime between failures (including any malfunctioning, breakdown or fault) in the equipment or any part thereof, as calculated during any and every quarter (period of three consecutive months) is not less than 90 days.




391

e) The SI shall provide replacement equipment, if any equipment is out of the premises for repairs.

8. Any worn or defective parts withdrawn from the equipment and replaced by the SI shall become the

property of the SI and the parts replacing the withdrawn parts shall become the property of Bank. 9. The SI’s maintenance personnel shall, be given access to the equipment when necessary, for

purpose of performing the repair and maintenance services indicated in this agreement.

10. However if Bank desires to shift the equipment to a new site and install it thereof urgently, the SI shall be informed of the same immediately. The Bank shall bear the charges for such shifting and the SI shall provide necessary arrangement to Bank in doing so. The terms of this agreement, after such shifting to the alternate site and reinstallation thereof would continue to apply and binding on the SI.

11. No term or provision hereof shall be deemed waived and no breach excused, unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the party claimed to have waived or consented. Any consent by any party to or waiver of a breach by other, whether express or implied, shall not constitute a consent to or waiver of or excuse for another different or subsequent breach.

12. On account of any negligence, commission or omission by the engineers of the SI and if any loss or damage caused to the Equipment, the SI shall indemnify/pay/reimburse the loss suffered by the Bank in a period of one month. In case of exceptional cases, Bank reserves the rights to define timelines considering prevailing circumstances.

13. In the event of failure of the SI to render the Services or in the event of termination of agreement or

expiry of term or otherwise, without prejudice to any other right, the Bank at its sole discretion may make alternate arrangement for getting the Services contracted with another SI. In such case, the Bank shall give notice to the existing SI at least 3 months beforehand and it is duty of the existing SI to provide services as per the terms of contract until a ‘New SI’ completely takes over the work. During the transition phase, the existing SI shall render all reasonable assistance to the new SI within such period prescribed by the Bank, at no extra cost to the Bank, for ensuring smooth switch over and continuity of services. If existing SI is in breach of this obligation, they shall be liable for paying a penalty of as provided in Section-II, 2.3 (Schedule of Events,)on demand to the Bank, which may be settled from the payment of invoices or Performance Bank Guarantee for the contracted period. Service Level Agreement The purpose of this Service Level Agreement (hereinafter referred to as SLA) is to clearly define the levels of service which shall be provided by the selected bidder to the Bank for the duration of this contract. The Bank will regularly review the performance of the services being provided by the selected bidder and impose penalties if any deficiency is found in the services. Three consecutive quarterly penalties (on actual) of more than 20% put together of the applicable fee on account of any reasons may be deemed to be an event of default and termination. It is acknowledged that service levels may change as service needs evolves over the course of the contract. The present SLAs have been worked out on the basis of current expectations. Service levels between the Bank and bidder can be revised after the start of O&M phase in view of experience gained.




392

The experience gained during this period will be used to fine tune the SLAs, including parameters, targets and penalties, if required. Any changes to the levels of services provided during the project period will be consented, documented and negotiated in good faith by both parties. Either party can request a change. Changes will be documented as an addendum to SI must be required to generate periodical reports as desired by the tendering authority in customized format.

2. SLA Categories

The SLA has been logically segregated in the following categories:

2.1 Project Timelines

2.1.1 Project Timelines (High Level) Project Timelines will commence from date of issue of Purchase Order

2.1.2 Project Timelines (Low Level)

Sr. No. Phases Target (In Months)

Penalty

CAPEX

1 Consultancy & PMC, Data Center Design along with Weekly, Monthly progress report and Phase completion Report

3

The SI should adhere to timelines as specified in the above table. Any Delay in in timelines would attract a penalty of INR 10 Lakhs per week and maximum of 20% of

Timelines

Activities Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

1Consultancy & PMC, Data Center

Design

2

Data Center physical build (Civil &

architectural work) and Campus

development.

3

Requirements Definition, Detailed

Design, Procurement,

Implementation, Testing, and

Commissioning of MEP, Data Center,

Lighting system, UPS, DG,

Transformer etc.

4 Final acceptance test

5Operations and Maintenance for 5

years payable quarterly

B

u

i

l

d

P

h

a

s

e

Project Schedule

Sr.

No

FY 2017-18 FY 2018-19

O

&

M

P

h

a

s

e

FY 2019-20 FY 2020-21 FY 2021-22 FY 2022-23 FY 2023-24




393

Sr. No. Phases Target (In Months)

Penalty

Agreed Phase 1 Capex Payment.

2

Data Center physical build (Civil & architectural work) and Campus development along with Weekly, Monthly progress report and Phase completion Report

9

The SI should adhere to timelines as specified in the above table. Any Delay in in timelines would attract a penalty of INR 10 Lakhs per week and 20% of Agreed Phase 2 Capex Payment.

3. MEP, Data Center, Lighting system, UPS, DG, Transformer etc.

3.1

Requirements Definition, Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of MEP Equipment along with Weekly, Monthly progress report and Phase completion Report

4

The SI should adhere to timelines as specified in the above table. Any Delay in in timelines would attract a penalty of INR 10 Lakhs per week and maximum of 20% of Agreed Phase 3 Capex Payment

3.2

Requirements Definition, Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Data Center along with Weekly, Monthly progress report and Phase completion Report

3.3

Requirements Definition, Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Lighting System along with Weekly, Monthly progress report and Phase completion Report

3.4

Requirements Definition, Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Fire Suppression Gas Cylinder, Electrical Distribution/IBMS Rooms/UPS & Battery Rooms etc. along with Weekly, Monthly progress report and Phase completion Report

4 Successful final acceptance Test by the Bank including obtaining all approvals from Statutory Bodies

2

The SI should adhere to timelines as specified in the above table. Any Delay in in timelines would attract a penalty of INR 10 Lakhs per week and maximum of 20% of Agreed Phase 4 Capex Payment




394

2.2 Infrastructure service levels

S. No.

Service description Measurement parameter

Target Penalty

1 Entire Data Center Uptime calculated for each quarter

Uptime of Data Centre = {1 -[(Data center Downtime in mins.in a quarter)/ (Total Time in mins. in a quarter)]} * 100

>=99.995% Nil

<99.995%

For every 0.005% degradation in the uptime there will be a penalty of 5% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment

2.

Uptime calculated for each equipment (list of equipment mentioned in annexed table “A” of Annexure-R) installed in Data Center

Uptime of an equipment = {1 -[(Equipment downtime)*(Severity factor) / (Total Time )]} * 100

>=99.995% Nil




395

<99.995%

For every 0.005% degradation in the uptime there will be a penalty of 3% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment

3. Power Availability (For IT load and Cooling)

Uptime of an equipment = {1 -[(Power Non-Availability in mins.in a quarter)/ (Total Time in mins. in a quarter)]} * 100

>=99.999% Nil

<99.995%

For every 0.005% degradation in the uptime there will be a penalty of 5% of the agreed Quarterly Payment

4.

Preventive Maintenance(each equipment installed in Data Center)

No. of days In last15 days of the quarter

NIL

If not carried in the defined time period, the penalty will be applicable as follows,

Next Quarter 1.) 1st- 30th day

1st- 30th day

1% of Previous Total Quarter payment for not carrying out in schedule time not

2) 31st-60th day 31st-60th day 2% of Previous Total Quarter payment




396

3) 61st-75th day 61st-75th day 5% of Previous Total Quarter payment

a) Equipment/Services Downtime is the time in hours that the equipment/ services is not available and

excludes planned downtime, which are approved by the Bank. The downtime shall be calculated from the Enterprise management system (EMS) or Integrated Building management system (IBMS), as may be applicable. In case, downtime of any equipment/ Services is not available on EMS/IBMS it shall be calculated from the helpdesk or available any other alternative tools/means. It is clarified that the downtime on account of delay by the OEM in repairing / replacing equipment's/ Services for which warranty/maintenance contract already exists (or was taken by the Bank) shall not be counted subject to timely call logging for SI management.

b) Severity factors of each equipment's are defined in Table - Severity Factor of the Items. The severity

factor for to be procured items would be communicated accordingly. c) Total time is equal to total number of hours in the given quarter. d) Planned Downtime means any time when the equipment's/services is unavailable because of

maintenance, installation/reinstallation or other services with the prior approval of the Bank. Example: 90 days will be considered in each quarter. Thus total time in quarter is 129600 minutes and SI should maintain total uptime is 99.995% i.e. 129593.52 minutes. Total downtime allowed is 6.48 minutes in a quarter. For SLA calculation, SI should maintain equipment wise downtime will be calculated and thereafter sum of all equipment downtime shall be less than 6.48 minutes in a quarter for non-applicability of penalty. Severity Factor of the Items Table A List provided below is non-exhaustive and is not limited to: (1 being Least Severe and 10 being most severe)

S. No. Non IT equipment Severity Factor

1. Power Panel 9

2. Bus Bar 9

3. UPS 9

4. Battery 8

5. Diesel Generator Set 9

6. PAC 9

7. Comfort Air Conditioner(CAC), VRV 6




397

S. No. Non IT equipment Severity Factor

8. Bus Coupler 9

9. Outgoing Feeder / Cable / Bus Trunking 8

10. Distribution BOX-Lighting DB 8

11. Distribution BOX-Power DB 8

12. Distribution BOX- UPS DB 9

13. Earthing 9

14. Wiring 8

15. Video Wall 6

16. Sound System 4

17. Elevators 8

18. Fire Management System 8

19. IBMS 8

20. HT Panels, Transformers 9

21. LT Panels 9

22. HVAC - Chiller 9

23. Gas Insulation sub-station 9

24. Solar Power Panel System 7

25. CCTV 9

26. Access Control 9

2.3 Manpower availability service levels The manpower deployed by SI for carrying out and providing Facility Management Service services shall necessarily be on direct payroll of the bidder organization and should not be outsourced / subcontracted in any circumstances. The SI shall post an on-site dedicated Project Manager to look after the entire operation of the Datacenter with his/her on-site team, with no additional responsibility. The project manager shall coordinate with the designated officer of the Bank.




398

SI shall appoint as many team members, as deemed fit by them, subject to the minimum manpower specified below to meet the SLA requirements. The Bank would not be liable to pay any additional cost for this. SI shall provide detailed CV of each of the resource being provided to the Bank before deployment of the resource at datacenter. Minimum manpower requirement for FMS/O&M is defined in the table mentioned below.

Sr.No. Role Min. Qualification, Relevant Experience & Certifications

Penalty on non-availability of resource (Per resource per shift)

1 2 3 4

1 Project Manager

B.E. / B.Tech. in Electrical / Mechanical + 8 years’ experience in Electrical, AC, Lift, DG Set & Fire, IBMS & IT security. He should be Prince2/PMP certified

5000/-

2 Electrical Engineer

B.E. / B.Tech. in Electrical + 5 years’ experience in relevant field like Electrical, AC, Lift, Fire, HT Work, Water Supply & other Building Section.

4000/-

3 Mechanical Engineer

B.E. / B.Tech. in Mechanical + 5 years’ experience in relevant field like HVAC/IBMS

4000/-

4 Civil Engineer B.E / Diploma in Civil + 5 years’ experience in relevant field

2000/-




399



5 IBMS Supervisor

PGDCA + Diploma in Electrical + 5 years relevant experience of Data center in Air-conditioning, Fire, Electrical, BMS, DG Sets, etc.

4000/-

6 Helpdesk MCA / B.E. / B.Tech. + 3 years relevant experience.

3000/-

7 Precision A.C.Technician

ITI in HVAC + 3 years’ experience in AC And Refrigeration and Equivalent.

2000/-

8 Comfort A.C. Technician

ITI in HVAC + 3 years’ experience in AC And Refrigeration and Equivalent.

2000/-

9 Fire men Diploma in relevant field + 3 years’ experience in Fire maintenance or Equivalent.

2500/-

10 IBMS operator Diploma in IT / CS or Equivalent + 3 years’ experience.

2000/-

11 Water Supply including STP & WTP

Diploma / ITI in relevant field + 3 years’ experience in Plumbing or Equivalent.

2000/-




400



12 DG Set Operator

ITI in relevant field + 3 years’ experience in Automobile or Electrical Engineering or Equivalent.

2000/-

13 Electricians

ITI in Electrical + 3 years’ experience in Electrical Engineering having Experience in HT/LT Panels, Transforms

2000/-

14 Lift Operator ITI in Electrical / Mechanical Engineering or Equivalent + 2 years’ experience.

2000/-

15 Civil Mason including Joinery and other work

2 years’ experience in Civil Work 1000/-

16 Helpers Class 12th Passed or Equivalent. 1000/-

17 Security Staff

Class 10th Passed or Equivalent. Helper should be able to Read, write and understand English Language.

2000/-

The SI has to propose “Manpower Requirement” as per format given in Annexure-Q10 and shall always maintain above minimum but not limited to manpower on-site throughout the period of the contract. The Successful bidder has to ensure proper replacement for weekly off/absence/leave of any manpower resource without any cost. Every resource has to hand over its own work and status of his shift to subsequent resource in next shift. The resources shall be deployed by the SI to manage the datacenter 24 *7 and maintain the service level requirements. Provisions of leave reserve, providing leaves and other facilities / perks shall be as per SI's prevailing policies / practices which shall be taken care by SI without any liability and/or financial implications on the part of the Bank.




401

Periodic training to entire Data center staff for procedures to be followed for applicable Certification shall be provided by the SI at no extra cost. The team deployment plan at the site during O&M shall be prepared by SI periodically and shall obtain approval from designated authority of the Bank prior to its implementation. No resource shall be absent without prior permission of the designated authority of the Bank. Penalty on non-availability of any resource shall be as under:

S. No.

No. of absence shifts per role in a quarter

Applicable Penalty / Actions

1. > 0 but <= 10 No. of absence shifts x Amount defined in the column "4" of above mentioned table in Section 2.3 of Annexure-R

2. > 10 but <=30 No. of absence shifts x 2 x Amount defined in the column "4" of above mentioned table in Section 2.3 of Annexure-R

3. > 30 No. of absence shifts x 4 x Amount defined in the column "4" of above mentioned table in Section 2.3 of Annexure-R

An absence of more than half an hour from the work place, without having permission of Designated Authority of the Bank shall be considered as absent for the shift. Operational Hardware, Software and other resources: The SI shall deploy sufficient devices like desktops/laptop, printers, scanners, multi-function devices etc. for carrying out datacenter operations and monitoring by its manpower resources deployed. All the required consumable shall be arranged by the SI at his own cost. The equipment deployed shall generally not be moved from the place of installation except for the purpose of repair/ maintenance with permission of the Bank.

2.4 Civil Works SLA

S. No.

Type of Incident Resolution Time

Penalty

1.

Major Civil Work including the False Flooring, False Ceiling, Raised flooring, Doors & Locking, Partitioning, Fire Proofing of all surfaces, Furniture & Fixtures (Door, windows, Table, chair)and Painting to be attended ideally within 2 days of reporting the problem.

The SI should maintain sufficient inventory

T No Penalty

T1=T+ up to 2days

0.5% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment For every unresolved call




402

S. No.

Type of Incident Resolution Time

Penalty

to carry out civil, electrical HVAC and IBMS, etc. repairs without any disruption to operations. For critical items, the resolution time shall be mutually agreed by the Bank and the SI at the time of award of contract.

T2=T1+ up to 2 days

1% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment for every unresolved call

>T2 2% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment for every unresolved call.

2.

Minor Civil work including Cement Concrete Work, Masonry Work, Trench Work, Storage, Glazing and Scaffolding Work to be carried ideally within 4 days of the reporting problem

T No Penalty

T1=T+ up to 4 days

0.05% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment for every unresolved call

T2=T1+ up to 2 days


>T2


Note: In case of civil works, T the resolution time (for Points 1 & 2) shall be the agreed resolution time between SI and the Bank considering the criticality / urgency of work

2.5 Rack Inlet Temperature, Humidity, Plumbing, and PUE

S. No.

Measurement Measurement Interval

Target Penalty

1 Rack Inlet Temperature

This SLA would measure the temperature at the rack level. The SI should ensure that the Data

Temperature of 20 degree +/-2 degree centigrade at all times. The penalty will be decided on number of

>5 <=8 instances per week Penalty Applicable: 2%of Agreed Quarterly Payment

>8 <=12 instances per week Penalty Applicable: 4% of Agreed Quarterly Payment




403

S. No.


Target Penalty

Center temperature is maintained at 20 degree +/- 2degree centigrade at all times.

such instance. An instance is said to have occurred when the rack inlet temperature goes beyond the permissible limits for greater than 10 minutes. Each additional 10 minutes is counted as an instance.

>12 instances Penalty Applicable: 6%of Agreed Quarterly Payment + Letter of warning

2 Humidity

The SI should ensure that the Data Center humidity is maintained at 50% +- 5% RH at all times.

50% +- 5% RH at all times. The penalty will be decided on number of such instance. An instance is said to have occurred when the Data Center humidity goes beyond the permissible limits for greater than 10 minutes. Each additional 10 minutes is counted as an instance

>5 <=8 >instance s per week. Penalty Applicable:2%of Agreed Quarterly Payment

>8 <=12 instances per week. Penalty Applicable:4%of Agreed Quarterly Payment

>12 instances. Penalty Applicable: 6%of Agreed Quarterly Payment + Letter of warning




404

S. No.


Target Penalty

3

Plumbing, sanitary, water supply, STP

The SI is required to record all relevant data as per OEM operation and maintenance manual & should maintain sufficient inventory for maintenance of same

The SI should archive and maintain recordings of past 12 month at any given point in time.

After 1 hour from detecting the fault, INR 1000/- per day to be deducted for unavailability of the service from the Quarterly Payment + Letter of warning

4 Power Usage Efficiency (PUE)

>50% of IT Load

<=1.50

Nil Incentive of 0.25% of Quarterly payment will be paid as an addition to the Agreed Quarterly payment.

25% - 50% of IT Load

1.51-1.59

For every 0.1 degradation in the PUE value there will be a penalty of 0.25% of Agreed Quarterly Payment

<=25% of IT Load

1.6-1.69

For every 0.1 degradation in the PUE value there will be a penalty of 0.50% of Agreed Quarterly Payment

2.6 Help desk service levels

The service level standards under this sub section pertain to all services which (i) Do not impact the uptime of the equipment as mentioned above and, (ii) Are not related to man power related services mentioned as mentioned above. However, penalties may be attracted both under section 2.2 and section 2.3 of Annexure-R if any of the service mentioned in these sections are hampered because of shortage or unavailability of manpower. It is further clarified that in some cases breakdown of equipment may generate a service request for restoring services on another equipment and non-compliance of service level for the generated service request may lead to penalties.




405

Sr. No.

Service Description

Measurement Parameter Target Penalty

1.

Various incidents related to comprehensive onsite maintenance and FMS promptly

Resolution time measuredas the time taken by the SI to troubleshoot and fix the problem.

Call will be treated as logged immediately after any incident/ problem occurs/ request made.

Within 1 hour for incident of severity level 1

1% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment for every 30 mins (or its part) delay.

Within 4 hours for incident of severity level 2

0.5% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment for every 60 mins (or its part) delay.

Within 8 hours for incident of severity level 3

0.25% of the Agreed Quarterly Payment for every 120 mins (or its part) delay.

Unresolved Incidents

Each unresolved incidents in a quarter will attract a penalty of 0.01% of Agreed Quarterly payment.

2.

Scheduled downtime for system maintenance Per Week

• During 1st Year, 3 hours preferably during lean time on Sunday.

• 2nd year onwards, 2 hours preferably during lean time on Sunday.

• For any other requirements for scheduled downtime, permission has to be taken from the Bank.

To be notified 7 days in advance

Nil

Severity level will be defined by the Bank. A. It is clarified that the downtime on account of delay by the OEM/maintenance SI (other than SI) in

repairing / replacing equipment's for which either warranty/comprehensive maintenance has not been asked for from the SI or for which warranty already exists (or was taken by the Bank) shall not be counted.

B. The Bank reserves the right to define severity levels of services.




406

2.7 Compliance & Reporting Procedures

Sr.No Service Description Measurement Parameter Target Penalty

1. Submission of Quarterly MIS Reports

SI shall submit the MIS reports as requested by the Bank.

Submit reports on 7th Day of the month after reporting Quarter

0.01% of Previous Total Quarter payment.

2. Maintenance of Inventory

SI should maintain an inventory of items that will be required on an ongoing basis. For e.g. tiles, cables etc.

100% as per the inventory log committed and maintained by SI.


3. Submission of monthly MIS Reports

SI shall submit the MIS reports as requested by the Bank.

Submit reports on 7th Day of every month.


2.8 Change Requests/ Management

Sr.No Service Description Measurement Parameter Target Penalty

1.

Change management

Change Request turnaround time Within 4 hours of change management request.

Up to 1 violation of service parameter in a quarter.

Not applicable

>1 <5 0.01% of Previous Total Quarter payment.

>3 <5 0.02% of Previous Total Quarter payment.

>5 0.03% of Previous Total Quarter payment.




407

1. An institutional mechanism will be set up for taking decisions regarding requests for changes. The Purchase Committee of the Bank will set up a Change Control Committee with members from the procurement agency and the selected bidder. If it is unable to reach an agreement, the decision of the Purchase Committee will be final.

2. The Bank may at any time, by a written order given to the bidder, make changes within the

general scope of the Agreement in any one or more of the following: i. Designs, specifications, requirements, quantities or services to be provided under the

Agreement are to be specifically developed and rendered for the Bank. ii. The method of deployment, shipping or packing iii. Schedule of installation Acceptance iv. The place of delivery and/or the services to be provided by the bidder. 3. The change request/ management procedure will follow the following steps:

i. Identification and documentation of the need for the change - The information related to initiator, initiation date and details of change required and priority of the change will be documented by the Bank.

ii. Analysis and evaluation of the Change Request - Impact of the change in terms of the estimated effort, changed schedule, cost and the items impacted will be analyzed and documented by the bidder.

iii. Approval or disapproval of the change request: the Bank will approve or disapprove the change requested including the additional payments for supply, installation. And quoted rates shall be used for cost estimation resulting from the change request.

iv. Implementation of the change: The change will be implemented in accordance to the agreed cost, effort, and schedule by the selected bidder.

v. Verification of the change: The change will be verified by the Bank on implementation of the change request.

4. All changes outside the scope of supplies agreed to herein which may have likely financial

implications in terms of the overall cost/ time of the project shall be undertaken by supplier only after securing the express consent of the Bank.

5. While approving any change request, if required, the Bank may ask the bidder to supply and

install the required items in the agreed manner on-site. 6. If any such change outside the scope of supplies agreed to herein causes an increase or

decrease in cost of, or the time required for, firm's performance of any provisions under the Agreement, equitable adjustments shall be made in the Agreement Price or Delivery Schedule, or both, and the Agreement shall accordingly be amended. Any claims by firm for adjustment under this must be asserted within 30 (thirty) days from the date of supplier receiving the Bank change order which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed.

2.9 Audit

Sr.No Service Description Measurement Parameter

Target Penalty

1. ISO 27001:2013 or latest

Within 3 months from Final Acceptance Test

<=3 Months Nil




408

Sr.No Service Description Measurement Parameter

Target Penalty

3 months - 6 months

0.25% Deduction in next successive Quarter Payment

>6 months 0.50% Deduction in next successive Quarter Payment

2. Uptime Design Design Phase completion

<=3 Months from start of Phase 1

Nil

>3 Months 0.5% of Phase 1 Payout will be withheld.

3 Uptime Facility certification

Facility Phase completion

<=9 months from start of Phase 3

Nil

> 9 months 1% of Phase 3 Payout will be withheld.

4 Uptime Operation certification

Operation Phase completion

<=6 months from start of Operation Phase

Nil

> 6 months 5% of Total OPEX will be withheld.

2.10 Health, Safety and Environment Management

The SI shall adhere consistently to all provisions of HSE requirements. In case of non-compliances and also for repeated failure in implementation of any of the HSE provisions, the Bank may impose stoppage of work without any cost & time implication to the Bank. The Bank may impose a suitable penalty. The amount of penalty applicable for the SI on different types of HSE violations is specified below:

Sr. No Violation of HSE Norms Penalty Amount

1. For not using personal protective equipment (Helmet, Shoes, Goggles, Gloves, Full body harness, Face shield, Boiler suit, etc.

Rs. 250/- per day/Item/Person




409


2. Working without Work Permit/Clearance Rs. 50000/- per occasion

3.

Unsafe electrical practices (not installing Earth Leakage circuit breaker (ELCB), using poor joints of cables, using naked wire without top plug into socket, laying wire/cables on the roads, electrical jobs by incompetent person, etc.)


4.

Working at height without full body harness, using non-standard/ rejected scaffolding and not arranging fall protection arrangement as required, like handrails, life-lines, Safety Nets etc.

Rs. 2500/- per case per day

5. Unsafe handling of compressed gas cylinders (No trolley, jubilee clips double gauge regulator, improper storage/handling)


6. Use of domestic LPG for cutting purpose Rs. 1000/- per occasion

7. No fencing/barricading of excavated areas / trenches Rs. 1000/- per occasion

8. Not providing shoring/strutting/proper slope and not keeping the excavated earth at least 1.5M away from excavated area

Rs. 5000/- per occasion

9. Non display of caution boards, list of hospitals, emergency services available at work locations


10.

Traffic rules violations like over speeding of vehicles, rash driving, talking on mobile phones during vehicle driving, wrong parking, not using seat belts, vehicles not fitted with reverse horn / warning alarms


11. Absence of SI’s top most executive at site in the safety meetings whenever called by the Bank

Rs. 5000/- per meeting

12. Failure to maintain HSE records by SI Safety personnel Rs. 500/- per meeting

13. Failure to conduct daily site safety site inspection, HSE meeting and HSE audit at predefined frequencies


14. Failure to submit the monthly HSE report by 5th of subsequent month to Project’s Engineer-in-Charge / the Bank

Rs. 5000/- per occasion and Rs 100/- per day for further delay.

15. Poor House Keeping Rs. 1000/- per occasion

16. Failure to report & follow up accident (including Near Miss) reporting system.

Rs. 10,000/- per occasion




410


17. Degradation of environment (not confining toxic spills, spilling oil/lubricants onto ground)


18.

Not medically examining the workers before allowing them to work at height, not providing ear muffs while allowing them to work in noise polluted areas, made them to work in air polluted areas without respiratory protective devices, etc.

Rs. 1000/- per occasion and warning letter will be issued.

19.

Violation of any other safety condition as per job HSE plan / work permit and HSE conditions of contract (e.g. using crowbar on cable trenches, improper welding booth, not keeping fire extinguisher ready at hot work site, unsafe rigging practices, non-availability of First-Aid box at site etc.)


20. Failure to carry-out Safety audit in time (internal & external), close-out of identified shortfalls of Observations of Safety Aspects etc.


21.

Any incident / accident at project site has been caused because of willful negligence or gross violation of safety measures / provisions on the part of the SI or any of its sub-agencies


22. Any violation not covered above To be decided by the Bank.

Penalty Capping for Health, Safety and Environment Management: 1. Overall ceiling of 2.0% (Two percent) of the Agreed Phase 2 Capex Payment and,

2. Overall ceiling of 2.0% (Two percent) of the Agreed Phase 5 Quarterly Payment

This penalty shall be in addition to all other penalties specified elsewhere in the contract. The decision of imposing stop-work-instruction and imposition of penalty shall rest with the Bank. The same shall be binding on the SI. Imposition of penalty does not make the SI eligible to continue the work in unsafe manner. Penalty capping for the sections 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 2.10 mentioned under this Annexure-R are: Total penalties excluding those defined in Annexure-R sub-section 2.3: "Manpower availability service levels" shall not be higher than 20% of Agreed Quarterly Payment for respective quarter, whereas total penalty including penalties towards "Manpower availability service levels" shall not be higher that the Agreed Quarterly Payment for respective quarter.




411

Annexure-S: Terms of Payment

Total Project completion timeline shall be 18 months from the date of Purchase order/Work order

Sr. No.

Phases Deliverables Payable Timeline (In Months)

1 Consultancy & PMC, Data Center Design

Payment made post submission and acceptance of all set of deliverables mentioned in Scope of Work – Phase 1

2.5% of CAPEX

3

2

Data Center physical build (Civil & architectural work) and Campus development.


17.5% of the CAPEX

9

3 MEP, Data Center, Lighting system, Modular UPS, DG, Transformer etc.

3.1

Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of MEP Equipment

Payment made post submission and acceptance of all set of deliverables mentioned in Scope of Work – Phase 3.1

20% of the CAPEX

4

3.2

Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Data Center


10% of the CAPEX




412

Sr. No.

Phases Deliverables Payable Timeline (In Months)

3.3

Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Lighting System


5% of the CAPEX

3.4

Detailed Design, Procurement, Implementation, Testing, and Commissioning of Fire Suppression Gas Cylinder, Electrical Distribution/IBMS Rooms/UPS & Battery Rooms etc.


15% of the CAPEX

4 Final acceptance test

Payment made post acceptance of all below: 1.Completion Report from SI 2.Completion & Operation Certificate from MIDC, Local Authority & Statutory Body 3.Compliance and certificate to be issued by Tier IV Data center certifying agency

30% of CAPEX

2

A:Total CAPEX 100%

5



5% (per quarter) of the OPEX

Per Quarter

B: Total OPEX 100%




413

Annexure-T: RACI Matrix for Data Center.

Sr No

Activity Phase System Integrator

Consultant/ Tier Certifying Authority

SBI

1. Contract Signing Project Initiation

R C R

2. Site Survey, assessment and Preliminary Test

Design & PMC R C A

3. Design of DC Building Civil layout

Design & Installation

R C A

4. Design of DC Solution (Non IT including Networks)


R C A

5. Validation of Design documents and certification


R R A

6.

Construction of DC Facility and Installation of Non-IT Solutions (including power)


R C A

7. Configuration of Data Center Solution


R C A

8. Installation/ Update/upgrade of all software.


R C A

9.

Low level design for all the data center rooms such as Meet me room(Telco Room), NOC, IBMS, Media Room etc.


R C A

10.

Factory Test Report, Delivery Inspection report, Installation report, Functional Testing report and Integrated testing report

Testing R R A

11. Security Testing report

Testing R C A

12. System and User Documentation R C A




414

Sr No

Activity Phase System Integrator

Consultant/ Tier Certifying Authority

SBI

Level documentation

13. Civil, MEP and other Non-IT documentation(SOP)

Documentation R C A

14.

Data Center Acceptance Test, validation and certification

Testing R R A

15. DC Solution Maintenance (Non-IT)

Operations & Maintenance

R C A

16. Training of Client Users as per the training requirements


R C A

17. 24x7x365 Operations Support, etc.


R C A

18. Maintaining the helpdesk


R C A

19. Operation Validation and Certification


R R A

R= Responsible, A= Accountable, C= Consulted and I= Informed




415

Annexure-U Plot Layout Drawing